oops, remove 5.16 tlperl files

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@33649 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

104 files changed, 0 insertions, 28988 deletions

diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/804delta.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/804delta.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 1472f38c86b..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/804delta.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,110 +0,0 @@
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::804delta - what is new for perl/Tk 804
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-This document describes differences between the Tk800 series and the
-Tk804 series.
-
-=head1 Incompatible Changes
-
-In Tk804.028, there are some additional incompatible changes:
-
-Return values of some B<Tk::Wm> methods (e.g. B<aspect>, B<wmGrid>,
-B<iconposition>, B<resizable> ...) were changed from returning tclish
-lists (e.g. "1 2 3 4") to perlish lists (1,2,3,4).
-
-B<Tk::Wm::wmTracing> needs argument for setting on/off, without argument
-just return the current value.
-
-All Tk804 releases have the following incompatible changes:
-
-Tk804 will only work with perl 5.8.0 and above. For older perl
-versions look for Tk800.025.
-
-B<curselection> of B<Tk::Listbox> now returns an array reference in
-scalar context. This means you have to write
-
-	my(@selected) = $listbox->curselection
-
-or
-
-	my(@selected) = @{ $listbox->curselection }
-
-now.
-
-The B<fontActual> method now returns the pixel value instead of the
-point value for B<-size>. Pixel values are expressed as negative
-numbers.
-
-Some enhancements from the E<quot>dashE<quot> patches are lost for now
-(i.e. B<-tile>, B<-troughtile> ...).
-
-The B<-state> option is not available anymore for B<Tk::Text> tags.
-Use B<-elide> instead.
-
-=head1 Enhancements
-
-Tk804 is Unicode-aware.
-
-It is possible to build Tk with Xft support on X11. This is strongly
-recommened if you are planning to make use of Unicode rendering
-capabilities of Tk. It also gives anti-aliased fonts for regular text
-(if you have TrueType or Type1 fonts and they are in your fontconfig
-config file).
-
-The new method B<chooseDirectory> is available as a standard directory
-selector.
-
-B<Tk::PNG> and B<Tk::JPEG> are bundled now with the perl/Tk
-distribution, providing support for the image formats B<png> and
-B<jpeg>.
-
-Improvements to B<Tk::Listbox>: new option B<-activestyle>, new
-methods B<itemconfigure> and B<itemcget>, new virtual event B<<<
-<<ListboxSelect>> >>>.
-
-More tests.
-
-=head1 New Widgets
-
-=over
-
-=item Tk::Labelframe
-
-An alternative to B<Tk::LabFrame>.
-
-=item Tk::Panedwindow
-
-An alternative to B<Tk::Adjuster>.
-
-=item Tk::Spinbox
-
-An alternative to the CPAN module B<Tk::NumEntry>.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 Selected Bug Fixes
-
-=head1 Changed Internals
-
-=head1 Platform Specific Problems
-
-=head1 Future Directions
-
-=head1 Reporting Bugs
-
-If you find what you think is a bug, you might check the articles
-recently posted to the comp.lang.perl.tk newsgroup.
-
-If you believe you have an unreported bug, please send a mail to <ptk@lists.stanford.edu> and/or <nick@ing-simmons.net>.  Be sure to trim your bug down
-to a tiny but sufficient test case.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk>, C<Changes> file in the Perl/Tk distribution.
-
-=cut
-
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Adjuster.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Adjuster.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 7d094f4e262..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Adjuster.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,223 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Adjuster - Allow size of packed widgets to be adjusted by user
-
-=for pm Tk/Adjuster.pm
-
-=for category Tk Geometry Management
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-use Tk::Adjuster;
-
-I<$adjuster> = I<$widget>->B<Adjuster>I<(?options?)>;
-
-=head1 WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Name: B<restore>
-
-=item Class: B<Restore>
-
-=item Switch: B<-restore>
-
-Specifies a boolean value that determines whether the Adjuster
-should forcibly attempt to make room
-for itself (by reducing the size of its managed widget) when it is
-unmapped (for example, due to a size change in a top level window).
-The default value is 1.
-
-=item Name: B<side>
-
-=item Class: B<Side>
-
-=item Switch: B<-side>
-
-Specifies the side on which the managed widget lies relative to the
-Adjuster. In conjunction with the pack geometry manager, this relates to
-the side of the master against which the managed widget and the Adjuster
-are packed.
-Must be B<left>, B<right>, B<top>, or B<bottom>. Defaults to B<top>.
-
-=item Name: B<widget>
-
-=item Class: B<Widget>
-
-=item Switch: B<-widget>
-
-Specifies the widget which is to be managed by the Adjuster.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-B<Tk::Adjuster> is a Frame containing a "line" and a "blob".
-
-Dragging with Mouse Button-1 results in a line being dragged
-to indicate new size. Releasing Button-1 submits GeometryRequests
-on behalf of the managed widget which will cause the packer to change the
-widget's size.
-
-If Drag is done with Shift button down, then GeometryRequests are made
-in "real time" so that text-flow effects can be seen, but as a lot more
-work is done behaviour may be sluggish.
-
-If widget is packed with -side => left or -side => right then width is
-adjusted. If packed -side => top or -side => bottom then height is adjusted.
-
-B<packPropagate> is turned off for the master window to prevent adjustment
-changing overall window size. Similarly B<packPropagate> is turned off
-for the managed widget if it has things packed inside it. This is so that
-the GeometryRequests made by B<Tk::Adjuster> are not overridden by pack.
-
-In addition, the managed widget is made non-expandable
-to prevent the geometry manager reallocating freed space in the master
-back to the managed widget.
-Note however that expansion is turned off only after the Adjuster is mapped,
-which allows the managed widget to expand naturally on window creation.
-
-The Tk::Widget method, B<packAdjust>, calls pack on the widget, then
-creates an instance of B<Tk::Adjuster>,
-and packs that "after" the widget. Its use has two disadvantages however: the
-Adjuster widget is not made available to the caller, and
-options cannot be set on the Adjuster. For these reasons, the Tk::Adjuster
-method, B<packAfter> is preferred, but B<packAdjust> is retained
-for backwards compatibility.
-
-=head1 WIDGET METHODS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$adjuster>->B<packAfter>(I<managed_widget, ?pack_options?>)
-
-This command configures the Adjuster's B<-widget> and B<-side> options
-respectively to I<managed_widget> and the B<-side> value specified in
-I<pack_options> (B<top> if not specified). It then packs the Adjuster
-after I<managed_widget>, with B<-fill> set to B<x> or B<y> as appropriate.
-
-=item I<$adjuster>->B<packForget>I<?(boolean)?>
-
-This command calls B<Tk::Widget::packForget> on the Adjuster.
-If a parameter is provided and it has a true boolean value, then
-B<packForget> is also called on the managed widget.
-
-=item I<$adjuster>->B<slave>
-
-This command returns the value I<$adjuster>->I<cget('-widget')>, ie. the
-reference to the managed widget.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 EXAMPLES
-
-B<Using an Adjuster to separate two widgets, whereby the left widget
-is managed, and right widget expands to fill space on a window resize>
-
-a) Using packAfter (preferred interface)
-
-  use Tk;
-  use Tk::Adjuster;
-
-  my $f = MainWindow->new;
-  my $lst1 = $f->Listbox();
-  my $adj1 = $f->Adjuster();
-  my $lst2 = $f->Listbox();
-
-  my $side = 'left';
-  $lst1->pack(-side => $side, -fill => 'both', -expand => 1);
-  $adj1->packAfter($lst1, -side => $side);
-  $lst2->pack(-side => $side, -fill => 'both', -expand => 1);
-  MainLoop;
-
-b) Using packAdjust
-
-  use Tk;
-  use Tk::Adjuster;
-
-  my $f = MainWindow->new;
-  my $lst1 = $f->Listbox();
-  my $lst2 = $f->Listbox();
-
-  my $side = 'left';
-  $lst1->packAdjust(-side => $side, -fill => 'both');
-  $lst2->pack      (-side => $side, -fill => 'both', -expand => 1);
-  MainLoop;
-
-c) Using the standard Tk::Widget::pack
-
-  use Tk;
-  use Tk::Adjuster;
-
-  my $f = MainWindow->new;
-  my $side = 'left';
-  my $lst1 = $f->Listbox();
-  my $adj  = $f->Adjuster(-widget => $lst1, -side => $side);
-  my $lst2 = $f->Listbox();
-
-  $lst1->pack(-side => $side, -fill => 'both', -expand => 1);
-  $adj->pack (-side => $side, -fill => 'y');
-  $lst2->pack(-side => $side, -fill => 'both', -expand => 1);
-
-  MainLoop;
-
-Changing the above examples so that $side has the value 'right' means the
-left widget expands to fill space on a window resize.
-
-Changing the above examples so that $side has the value 'top'
-produces a testcase with a horizontal Adjuster.
-Here the bottom widget expands to fill space on a window resize.
-Packing to the 'bottom' makes the top widget expand to fill space on window
-resize.
-
-B<Using -restore =E<gt> 0 for multiple columns>
-
-In the case of multiple columns (or rows) the "restore" functionality of the
-Adjuster can be inconvenient. When the user adjusts the width of one column
-and thereby pushes the Adjuster of another column off the window, this
-adjuster tries to restore itself by reducing the size of its managed widget.
-This has the effect that column widths shrink; and the original size
-is not restored when
-the user reverses the originating change. The B<-restore> option can be
-used to turn off this functionality. (It makes some sense, however, to
-leave B<-restore>
-turned on for the first-packed Adjuster, so that at least one Adjuster
-always remains visible.)
-
-  use Tk;
-  use Tk::Adjuster;
-  my $f = MainWindow->new;
-  my $lst1 = $f->Listbox();
-  my $adj1 = $f->Adjuster();
-  my $lst2 = $f->Listbox();
-  my $adj2 = $f->Adjuster(-restore => 0);
-  my $lst3 = $f->Listbox();
-
-  my $side = 'left';
-  $lst1->pack(-side => $side, -fill => 'both', -expand => 1);
-  $adj1->packAfter($lst1, -side => $side);
-  $lst2->pack(-side => $side, -fill => 'both', -expand => 1);
-  $adj2->packAfter($lst2, -side => $side);
-  $lst3->pack(-side => $side, -fill => 'both', -expand => 1);
-
-  MainLoop;
-
-=head1 BUGS
-
-It is currently not possible to configure the appearance of the Adjuster.
-It would be nice to be able to set the width and relief of the Adjuster "line"
-and the presence/absence of the "blob" on the Adjuster.
-
-Tk::Adjuster works theoretically with the grid geometry manager but there
-are currently some problems which seem to be due to bugs in grid:
-
-  a) There's never an Unmap event for the adjuster, so the "restore"
-     functionality has no effect.
-  b) After adjusting, widgets protrude into the border of the master.
-  c) grid('Propagate', 0) on MainWindow has no effect - window shrinks/grows
-     when widgets are adjusted.
-  d) Widgets shuffle to correct position on startup
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Animation.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Animation.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 996b035b1c5..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Animation.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,92 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Animation - Display sequence of Tk::Photo images
-
-=for pm Tk/Animation.pm
-
-=for category Tk Image Classes
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-  use Tk::Animation
-  my $img = $widget->Animation('-format' => 'gif', -file => 'somefile.gif');
-
-  $img->add_frame(@images);
-
-  $img->start_animation;
-  $img->start_animation( $period );
-
-  $img->next_image;
-  $img->prev_image;
-  $img->set_image( 0 .. $#frames );
-
-  $img->pause_animation;
-  $img->resume_animation( $period );
-
-  $img->fast_forward( $multiplier );
-  $img->fast_reverse( $multiplier );
-
-  $img->stop_animation;
-
-  $img->set_disposal_method( $boolean );
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-In the simple case when C<Animation> is passed a GIF89 style GIF with
-multiple 'frames', it will build an internal array of C<Photo> images.
-
-The C<add_frame> method adds images to the sequence. It is provided
-to allow animations to be constructed from separate images.
-All images must be C<Photo>s and should all be the same size.
-
-C<start_animation($period)> then initiates a C<repeat> with specified
-I<$period> to sequence through these images. As for raw C<repeat>
-I<$period> is in milliseconds, for a 50Hz monitor it should be at
-least 20ms. If I<$period> is omitted it is determined from the GIF
-metadata (see below), or if this is not possible it defaults to 100
-milliseconds.
-
-C<stop_animation> cancels the C<repeat> and resets the image to the first
-image in the sequence.
-
-For fine-grained control C<next_image> and C<prev_image> move one frame forward
-or backward.  C<set_image> randomly positions the animation to a particular frame.
-
-C<pause_animation> pauses the movie and C<resume_animation> continues from the
-pause point.
-
-C<fast_forward> and C<fast_reverse> speed through the movie either
-forwards or backwards.  $multiplier specifies how much faster the
-animation moves.
-
-If L<Image::Info> is installed, then the repeat period time and
-disposal method of GIF animations are determined from the GIF metadata
-directly. Otherwise the disposal method must be set manually by using
-C<set_disposal_method> (1 for blanking the previous images, 0 for
-leaving the previous images as is). The repeat period time may be
-given in the C<start_animation> method.
-
-=head1 NOTES
-
-C<set_disposal_method> was formerly known as C<blank> method, but the
-naming of this method was a mistake.
-
-If the disposal method is not set correctly, either by
-C<set_disposal_method> or by determining from the GIF metadata, then
-the following may happen: By default Animation leaves the previous
-movie frame in the animation photo. Many times overlaying subsequent
-frames produces a composite that looks blurred.
-
-=head1 BUGS
-
-This module should not depend on a module which is not declared as a
-dependency (Image::Info).
-
-The delays between images may vary in a GIF animation. This cannot be
-handled by this module yet.
-
-The handling of the various disposal methods is not correct.
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Balloon.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Balloon.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 9188a9e25a4..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Balloon.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,293 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Balloon - pop up help balloons.
-
-=for pm Tixish/Balloon.pm
-
-=for category Tix Extensions
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-    use Tk::Balloon;
-    ...
-    $b = $top->Balloon(-statusbar => $status_bar_widget);
-
-    # Normal Balloon:
-    $b->attach($widget,
-	       -balloonmsg => "Balloon help message",
-	       -statusmsg => "Status bar message");
-
-    # Balloon attached to entries in a menu widget:
-    $b->attach($menu, -state => 'status',
-		      -msg => ['first menu entry',
-			       'second menu entry',
-			       ...
-			      ],
-	      );
-
-    # Balloon attached to individual items in a canvas widget:
-    $b->attach($canvas, -balloonposition => 'mouse',
-			-msg => {'item1' => 'msg1',
-				 'tag2'  => 'msg2',
-				  ...
-				},
-	      );
-
-    # Balloon attached to items in a listbox widget:
-    $b->attach($listbox, -balloonposition => 'mouse',
-			 -msg => ['first listbox element',
-				  '2nd listbox element',
-				  ...
-				 ],
-	      );
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-B<Balloon> provides the framework to create and attach help
-balloons to various widgets so that when the mouse pauses over the
-widget for more than a specified amount of time, a help balloon is
-popped up.
-
-=head2 Balloons and Menus or Listboxes
-
-If the balloon is attached to a B<Menu> or B<Listbox> widget and the
-message arguments are array references, then each element in the array
-will be the message corresponding to a menu entry or listbox element.
-The balloon message will then be shown for the entry which the mouse
-pauses over. Otherwise it is assumed that the balloon is to be
-attached to the B<Menu> or B<Listbox> as a whole. You can have
-separate status and balloon messages just like normal balloons.
-
-=head2 Balloons and Canvases
-
-If the balloon is attached to a B<Canvas> widget and the message
-arguments are hash references, then each hash key should correspond to
-a canvas item ID or tag and the associated value will correspond to the
-message for that canvas item. The balloon message will then be shown for
-the current item (the one at the position of the mouse). Otherwise it is
-assumed that the balloon is to be attached to the B<Canvas> as a whole.
-You can have separate status and balloon messages just like normal
-balloons.
-
-=head2 Balloons and HLists
-
-If the balloon is attached to a B<HList> widget and the message
-arguments are hash references, then each hash key should correspond to
-a HList path and the associated value will correspond to the message
-for that HList item. The balloon message will then be shown for the
-current item (the one at the position of the mouse). Otherwise it is
-assumed that the balloon is to be attached to the B<HList> as a whole.
-You can have separate status and balloon messages just like normal
-balloons.
-
-=head2 Balloon Position
-
-By default, the balloon pops up at the lower right side of the client.
-If it would extend outside the lower screen border, its positioned at the
-upper right side. If it would extend outside the right screen border
-it's shown on the lower left side of the client. If it would extend
-outside both the lower and the right screen border, it's positioned
-at the upper left side of the client. Thus, the little arrow always
-points to the attached client.
-
-=head1 OPTIONS
-
-B<Balloon> accepts all of the options that the B<Frame> widget
-accepts. In addition, the following options are also recognized.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-initwait>
-
-Specifies the amount of time to wait without activity before
-popping up a help balloon. Specified in milliseconds. Defaults to
-350 milliseconds. This applies to both the popped up balloon and
-the status bar message.
-
-=item B<-state>
-
-Can be one of B<'balloon'>, B<'status'>, B<'both'> or B<'none'>
-indicating that the help balloon, status bar help, both or none
-respectively should be activated when the mouse pauses over the
-client widget. Default is B<'both'>.
-
-=item B<-statusbar>
-
-Specifies the widget used to display the status message. This
-widget should accept the B<-text> option and is typically a
-B<Label>. If the widget accepts the B<-textvariable> option and
-that option is defined then it is used instead of the B<-text>
-option.
-
-=item B<-balloonposition>
-
-Can be one of B<'widget'> or B<'mouse'>. It controls where the balloon
-will popup. B<'widget'> makes the balloon appear at the lower right
-corner of the widget it is attached to (default), and B<'mouse'> makes
-the balloon appear below and to the right of the current mouse position.
-
-=item B<-postcommand>
-
-This option takes a B<CODE> reference which will be executed before the
-balloon and statusbar messages are displayed and should return a true
-or false value to indicate whether you want the balloon to be displayed
-or not. This also lets you control where the balloon is positioned by
-returning a true value that looks like I<X,Y> (matches this regular
-expression: C</^(\d+),(\d+)$/>). If the postcommand returns a value that
-matches that re then those coordinates will be used as the position to
-post the balloon. I<Warning:> this subroutine should return quickly or
-the balloon response will appear slow.
-
-=item B<-cancelcommand>
-
-This option takes a B<CODE> reference which will be executed before the
-balloon and statusbar messages are canceled and should return a true
-or false value to indicate whether you want the balloon to be canceled
-or not. I<Warning:> this subroutine should return quickly or the balloon
-response will appear slow.
-
-=item B<-motioncommand>
-
-This option takes a B<CODE> reference which will be executed for any
-motion event and should return a true or false value to indicate
-whether the currently displayed balloon should be canceled (deactivated).
-If it returns true then the balloon will definitely be canceled, if it
-returns false then it may still be canceled depending the internal rules.
-I<Note:> a new balloon may be posted after the B<-initwait> time
-interval, use the B<-postcommand> option to control that behavior.
-I<Warning:> the subroutine should be extremely fast or the balloon
-response will appear slow and consume a lot of CPU time (it is executed
-every time the mouse moves over the widgets the balloon is attached to).
-
-=item B<-numscreens>
-
-This option accepts an integer 1 or greater. This option should be used
-to avoid disjointed balloons across multiple screens in single logical
-sceen (SLS) mode. This only currently works in the horizontal direction.
-Example: If you are running dual screens in SLS mode then you would set
-this value to 2. Default value is 1.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 METHODS
-
-The B<Balloon> widget supports only three non-standard methods:
-
-=head2 B<attach(>I<widget>, I<options>B<)>
-
-Attaches the widget indicated by I<widget> to the help system. The
-allowed options are:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-statusmsg>
-
-The argument is the message to be shown on the status bar when the
-mouse pauses over this client. If this is not specified, but
-B<-msg> is specified then the message displayed on the status bar
-is the same as the argument for B<-msg>. If you give it a scalar
-reference then it is dereferenced before being displayed. Useful
-if the postcommand is used to change the message.
-
-=item B<-balloonmsg>
-
-The argument is the message to be displayed in the balloon that
-will be popped up when the mouse pauses over this client. As with
-B<-statusmsg> if this is not specified, then it takes its value
-from the B<-msg> specification if any. If neither B<-balloonmsg>
-nor B<-msg> are specified, or they are the empty string then
-no balloon is popped up instead of an empty balloon. If you
-give it a scalar reference then it is dereferenced before being
-displayed. Useful if the postcommand is used to change the message.
-
-=item B<-msg>
-
-The catch-all for B<-statusmsg> and B<-balloonmsg>. This is a
-convenient way of specifying the same message to be displayed in
-both the balloon and the status bar for the client.
-
-=item B<-initwait>
-
-=item B<-state>
-
-=item B<-statusbar>
-
-=item B<-balloonposition>
-
-=item B<-postcommand>
-
-=item B<-cancelcommand>
-
-=item B<-motioncommand>
-
-These options allow you to override the balloon's default value for
-those option for some of the widgets it is attached to. It accepts the
-same values as above and will default to the B<Balloon>'s value.
-
-=back
-
-=head2 B<detach(>I<widget>B<)>
-
-Detaches the specified I<widget> from the help system.
-
-=head2 B<destroy>
-
-Destroys the specified balloon.
-
-=head1 ADVERTISED SUBWIDGETS
-
-The balloon label is advertised as C<message>.
-
-=head1 EXAMPLES
-
-See the balloon demo included with the widget demo script that came with
-the distribution for examples on various ways to use balloons.
-
-=head1 NOTES
-
-Because of the overhead associated with each balloon you create (from
-tracking the mouse movement to know when to activate and deactivate
-them) you will see the best performance (low CPU consumption) if you
-create as few balloons as possible and attach them to as many widgets
-as you can.  In other words, don't create a balloon for each widget
-you want to attach one to.
-
-=head1 CAVEATS
-
-Pressing any button will deactivate (cancel) the current balloon,
-if one exists. You can usually make the balloon reappear by moving
-the mouse a little. Creative use of the 3 command options can help
-you out also. If the mouse is over the balloon when a menu is unposted
-then the balloon will remain until you move off of it.
-
-=head1 BUGS
-
-If using balloons attached to listbox entries or canvas items in a
-scrolled widget, then the subwidget have to be used:
-
-    $balloon->attach($w->Subwidget("scrolled"), -msg => ...);
-
-=head1 AUTHORS
-
-B<Rajappa Iyer> <rsi@earthling.net> did the original coding.
-
-B<Jason A. Smith> <smithj4@rpi.edu> added support for menus and made some
-other enhancements.
-
-B<Slaven Rezic> <srezic@cpan.org> added support for canvas items.
-
-B<Gerhard Petrowitsch> <gerhard@petrowitsch.de> added intelligent positioning
-
-B<Jack Dunnigan> <dunniganj@cpan.org> Made positioning I<more> intelligent and
-added support for multiple monitors under single logical screen.
-
-=head1 HISTORY
-
-The code and documentation was derived from Balloon.tcl from the
-Tix4.0 distribution by Ioi Lam and modified by the above mentioned
-authors. This code may be redistributed under the same terms as Perl.
-
-=cut
-
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Bitmap.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Bitmap.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 49bf20ce4b4..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Bitmap.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Bitmap - Images that display two colors
-
-=for category  Tk Image Classes
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >I<$image> = I<$widget>-E<gt>B<Bitmap>?(I<name>??,I<options>?)
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-A bitmap is an image whose pixels can display either of two colors
-or be transparent.
-A bitmap image is defined by four things:  a background color,
-a foreground color, and two bitmaps, called the I<source>
-and the I<mask>.
-Each of the bitmaps specifies 0/1 values for a rectangular
-array of pixels, and the two bitmaps must have the same
-dimensions.
-For pixels where the mask is zero, the image displays nothing,
-producing a transparent effect.
-For other pixels, the image displays the foreground color if
-the source data is one and the background color if the source
-data is zero.
-
-=head1 CREATING BITMAPS
-
-Bitmaps are created using I<$widget>-E<gt>B<Bitmap>.
-Bitmaps support the following I<options>:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-background> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-Specifies a background color for the image in any of the standard
-ways accepted by Tk.  If this option is set to an empty string
-then the background pixels will be transparent.  This effect
-is achieved by using the source bitmap as the mask bitmap, ignoring
-any B<-maskdata> or B<-maskfile> options.
-
-=item B<-data> =E<gt> I<string>
-
-Specifies the contents of the source bitmap as a string.
-The string must adhere to X11 bitmap format (e.g., as generated
-by the B<bitmap> program).
-If both the B<-data> and B<-file> options are specified,
-the B<-data> option takes precedence.
-
-=item B<-file> =E<gt> I<name>
-
-I<name> gives the name of a file whose contents define the
-source bitmap.
-The file must adhere to X11 bitmap format (e.g., as generated
-by the B<bitmap> program).
-
-=item B<-foreground> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-Specifies a foreground color for the image in any of the standard
-ways accepted by Tk.
-
-=item B<-maskdata> =E<gt> I<string>
-
-Specifies the contents of the mask as a string.
-The string must adhere to X11 bitmap format (e.g., as generated
-by the B<bitmap> program).
-If both the B<-maskdata> and B<-maskfile> options are specified,
-the B<-maskdata> option takes precedence.
-
-=item B<-maskfile> =E<gt> I<name>
-
-I<name> gives the name of a file whose contents define the
-mask.
-The file must adhere to X11 bitmap format (e.g., as generated
-by the B<bitmap> program).
-
-=back
-
-=head1 IMAGE METHODS
-
-When a bitmap image is created, Tk also creates a new object.
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::Image|Tk::Image>
-L<Tk::Pixmap|Tk::Pixmap>
-L<Tk::Photo|Tk::Photo>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-bitmap, image
-
-=cut
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/BrowseEntry.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/BrowseEntry.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 98a547c4084..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/BrowseEntry.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,210 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::BrowseEntry - entry widget with popup choices.
-
-=for pm Tixish/BrowseEntry.pm
-
-=for category Tix Extensions
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-    use Tk::BrowseEntry;
-
-    $b = $frame->BrowseEntry(-label => "Label", -variable => \$var);
-    $b->insert("end", "opt1");
-    $b->insert("end", "opt2");
-    $b->insert("end", "opt3");
-    ...
-    $b->pack;
-
-=head1 SUPER-CLASS
-
-The C<BrowseEntry> class is derived from the C<Frame> class and
-inherits all the methods, options and subwidgets of its super-class.
-By default, options and methods are delegated to the entry subwidget.
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-BrowseEntry is a poor man's ComboBox. It may be considered an
-enhanced version of LabEntry which provides a button to popup the
-choices of the possible values that the Entry may
-take. BrowseEntry supports all the options LabEntry supports
-except B<-textvariable>. This is replaced by B<-variable>. Other
-options that BrowseEntry supports:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-arrowimage>
-
-Specifies the image to be used in the arrow button beside the entry
-widget. The default is an downward arrow image in the file cbxarrow.xbm
-
-=item B<-autolimitheight>
-
-If set to a true value, then the height of the listbox will be at most
-the number of entries in the list. The overall maximum of
-C<-listheight> still applies.
-
-=item B<-autolistwidth>
-
-If set to a true value, then the width of the listbox will match the
-width of the largest entry.
-
-=item B<-browsecmd>
-
-Specifies a function to call when a selection is made in the
-popped up listbox. It is passed the widget and the text of the
-entry selected. This function is called after the entry variable
-has been assigned the value.
-
-=item B<-browse2cmd>
-
-Like C<-browsecmd>, but the callback is called with the listbox index
-instead of the selected value.
-
-=item B<-buttontakefocus>
-
-Set the C<-takefocus> option of the button subwidget.
-
-=item B<-choices>
-
-Specifies the list of choices to pop up.  This is a reference to an
-array of strings specifying the choices.
-
-=item B<-colorstate>
-
-The state of the widget is reflected by color. A non-editable entry
-widget will get a light gray background, while an editable entry will
-be almost white. [This may change]
-
-=item B<-listcmd>
-
-Specifies the function to call when the button next to the entry
-is pressed to popup the choices in the listbox. This is called before
-popping up the listbox, so can be used to populate the entries in
-the listbox.
-
-=item B<-listheight>
-
-Set the height of the listbox. See also C<-autolimitheight>.
-
-=item B<-listwidth>
-
-Specifies the width of the popup listbox.
-
-=item B<-state>
-
-Specifies one of three states for the widget: normal, readonly, or
-disabled.  If the widget is disabled then the value may not be changed
-and the arrow button won't activate.  If the widget is readonly, the
-entry may not be edited, but it may be changed by choosing a value
-from the popup listbox.  normal is the default.
-
-=item B<-style>
-
-Set the "style" of the widget. Permitted values are C<MSWin32> and
-C<unix>. By default C<-style> is set to the current platform. Widgets
-with the C<unix> style will look like a normal C<BrowseEntry> widget,
-whereas with the C<MSWin32> style the arrow will look close to the
-Windows' standard combobox widget, while moving the mouse the entries
-will be highlighted, and probably includes other changes.
-
-=item B<-variable>
-
-Specifies the variable in which the entered value is to be stored.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 METHODS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<insert(>I<index>, I<string>B<)>
-
-Inserts the text of I<string> at the specified I<index>. This string
-then becomes available as one of the choices.
-
-=item B<delete(>I<index1>, I<index2>B<)>
-
-Deletes items from I<index1> to I<index2>.
-
-=item B<get>
-
-The get method is delegated to the choices listbox.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 ADVERTISED WIDGETS
-
-The following widgets are advertised:
-
-=over
-
-=item entry
-
-The entry widget.
-
-=item arrow
-
-The button with the arrow image.
-
-=item choices
-
-The toplevel widget containing the choice listbox.
-
-=item slistbox
-
-The scrolled listbox with the choices.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 SUBCLASSING
-
-To make subclassing easier, the following methods may be overridden to
-use other standard widgets in composing the mega widget:
-
-=over
-
-=item LabEntryWidget
-
-A widget class compatible with Tk::LabEntry used for the entry.
-
-=item ButtonWidget
-
-A widget class compatible with Tk::Button used for the arrow button.
-
-=item ListboxWidget
-
-A widget class compatible with Tk::Listbox used for the choices
-listbox.
-
-=back
-
-For example to use a C<NumEntry> widget (from the Tk-GBARR CPAN
-distribution) instead of the normal C<Entry> widget:
-
-    package Tk::NumBrowseEntry;
-    use base qw(Tk::BrowseEntry);
-    use Tk::NumEntry;
-    Construct Tk::Widget 'NumBrowseEntry';
-    sub LabEntryWidget { "NumEntry" }
-
-=head1 BUGS
-
-BrowseEntry should really provide more of the ComboBox options.
-
-=head1 AUTHOR
-
-B<Rajappa Iyer> rsi@earthling.net
-
-B<Chris Dean> ctdean@cogit.com made additions.
-
-More additions by B<Slaven Rezic> slaven@rezic.de
-
-This code was inspired by ComboBox.tcl in Tix4.0 by Ioi Lam and
-bears more than a passing resemblance to ComboBox code. This may
-be distributed under the same conditions as Perl.
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Button.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Button.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 2eb6401ca9d..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Button.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,255 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Button - Create and manipulate Button widgets
-
-=for category  Tk Widget Classes
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-I<$button> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<Button>(?I<options>?);
-
-=head1 STANDARD OPTIONS
-
-B<-activebackground>
-B<-activeforeground>
-B<-anchor>
-B<-background>
-B<-bitmap>
-B<-borderwidth>
-B<-compound>
-B<-cursor>
-B<-disabledforeground>
-B<-font>
-B<-foreground>
-B<-highlightbackground>
-B<-highlightcolor>
-B<-highlightthickness>
-B<-image>
-B<-justify>
-B<-padx>
-B<-pady>
-B<-relief>
-B<-repeatdelay>
-B<-repeatinterval>
-B<-takefocus>
-B<-text>
-B<-textvariable>
-B<-underline>
-B<-wraplength>
-
-See L<Tk::options> for details of the standard options.
-
-=head1 WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Name:	B<command>
-
-=item Class:	B<Command>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-command>
-
-Specifies a L<Perl/Tk callback|Tk::callbacks> to associate with the
-button.  This command is typically invoked when mouse button 1 is
-released over the button window.
-
-=item Command-Line Name: B<-compound>
-
-=item Database Name:  B<compound>
-
-=item Database Class: B<Compound>
-
-Specifies whether the button should display both an image and text,
-and if so, where the image should be placed relative to the text.
-Valid values for this option are B<bottom>, B<center>, B<left>,
-B<none>, B<right> and B<top>.  The default value is B<none>, meaning
-that the button will display either an image or text, depending on the
-values of the -image and -bitmap options.
-
-=item Name:	B<default>
-
-=item Class:	B<Default>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-default>
-
-Specifies one of three states for the default ring: B<normal>,
-B<active>, or B<disabled>.  In active state, the button is drawn
-with the platform specific appearance for a default button.  In normal
-state, the button is drawn with the platform specific appearance for a
-non-default button, leaving enough space to draw the default button
-appearance.  The normal and active states will result in buttons of
-the same size.  In disabled state, the button is drawn with the
-non-default button appearance without leaving space for the default
-appearance.  The disabled state may result in a smaller button than
-the active state.
-ring.
-
-=item Name:	B<height>
-
-=item Class:	B<Height>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-height>
-
-Specifies a desired height for the button.
-If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the button then the value is in
-screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>);
-for text it is in lines of text.
-If this option isn't specified, the button's desired height is computed
-from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
-
-=item Command-Line Name: B<-overrelief>
-
-=item Database Name:  B<overRelief>
-
-=item Database Class: B<OverRelief>
-
-Specifies  an alternative relief for the button, to be used when
-the mouse cursor is over the widget.  This option can be used to
-make  toolbar  buttons,  by configuring B<-relief flat -overrelief
-raised>.  If the value of this option is the empty  string,  then
-no  alternative relief is used when the mouse cursor is over the
-button.  The empty string is the default value.
-
-=item Name:	B<state>
-
-=item Class:	B<State>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-state>
-
-Specifies one of three states for the button:  B<normal>, B<active>,
-or B<disabled>.  In normal state the button is displayed using the
-B<foreground> and B<background> options.  The active state is
-typically used when the pointer is over the button.  In active state
-the button is displayed using the B<activeForeground> and
-B<activeBackground> options.  Disabled state means that the button
-should be insensitive:  the default bindings will refuse to activate
-the widget and will ignore mouse button presses.
-In this state the B<disabledForeground> and
-B<background> options determine how the button is displayed.
-
-=item Name:	B<width>
-
-=item Class:	B<Width>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-width>
-
-Specifies a desired width for the button.
-If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the button then the value is in
-screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>);
-for text it is in characters.
-If this option isn't specified, the button's desired width is computed
-from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<Button> method creates a new window (given by the
-$widget argument) and makes it into a button widget.
-Additional
-options, described above, may be specified on the command line
-or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the button such as its colors, font,
-text, and initial relief.  The B<button> command returns its
-$widget argument.  At the time this command is invoked,
-there must not exist a window named $widget, but
-$widget's parent must exist.
-
-A button is a widget that displays a textual string, bitmap or image.
-If text is displayed, it must all be in a single font, but it
-can occupy multiple lines on the screen (if it contains newlines
-or if wrapping occurs because of the B<-wraplength> option) and
-one of the characters may optionally be underlined using the
-B<-underline> option.
-It can display itself in either of three different ways, according
-to
-the B<-state> option;
-it can be made to appear raised, sunken, or flat;
-and it can be made to flash.  When a user invokes the
-button (by pressing mouse button 1 with the cursor over the
-button), then the L<perl/Tk callback|Tk::callbacks> specified in the B<-command>
-option is invoked.
-
-=head1 WIDGET METHODS
-
-The B<Button> method creates a widget object.
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-The widget also inherits all the methods provided by the generic
-L<Tk::Widget|Tk::Widget> class.
-
-The following additional methods are available for button widgets:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$button>-E<gt>B<flash>
-
-Flash the button.  This is accomplished by redisplaying the button
-several times, alternating between active and normal colors.  At
-the end of the flash the button is left in the same normal/active
-state as when the command was invoked.
-This command is ignored if the button's state is B<disabled>.
-
-=item I<$button>-E<gt>B<invoke>
-
-Invoke the L<callback|Tk::callbacks> associated with the buttons
-B<-command> option, if there is one.
-The return value is the return value from the callback, or the
-undefined value if there is no callback associated with the button.
-This command is ignored if the button's state is B<disabled>.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DEFAULT BINDINGS
-
-Tk automatically creates class bindings for buttons that give them
-default behavior:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item [1]
-
-A button activates whenever the mouse passes over it and deactivates
-whenever the mouse leaves the button.
-Under Windows, this binding is only active when mouse button 1 has
-been pressed over the button.
-
-=item [2]
-
-A button's relief is changed to sunken whenever mouse button 1 is
-pressed over the button, and the relief is restored to its original
-value when button 1 is later released.
-
-=item [3]
-
-If mouse button 1 is pressed over a button and later released over
-the button, the button is invoked.  However, if the mouse is not
-over the button when button 1 is released, then no invocation occurs.
-
-=item [4]
-
-When a button has the input focus, the space key causes the button
-to be invoked.
-
-If the button's state is B<disabled> then none of the above
-actions occur:  the button is completely non-responsive.
-
-The behavior of buttons can be changed by defining new bindings for
-individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-button, widget
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Canvas.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Canvas.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index daf4cf7f32e..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Canvas.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2394 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Canvas - Create and manipulate Canvas widgets
-
-=for category  Tk Widget Classes
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-I<$canvas> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<Canvas>(?I<options>?);
-
-=head1 STANDARD OPTIONS
-
-B<-background>	B<-highlightthickness>	B<-insertwidth>	B<-state>
-B<-borderwidth>	B<-insertbackground>	B<-relief>	B<-tile>
-B<-cursor>	B<-insertborderwidth>	B<-selectbackground>	B<-takefocus>
-B<-highlightbackground>	B<-insertofftime>	B<-selectborderwidth>	B<-xscrollcommand>
-B<-highlightcolor>	B<-insertontime>	B<-selectforeground>	B<-yscrollcommand>
-
-=head1 WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Name:	B<closeEnough>
-
-=item Class:	B<CloseEnough>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-closeenough>
-
-Specifies a floating-point value indicating how close the mouse cursor
-must be to an item before it is considered to be ``inside'' the item.
-Defaults to 1.0.
-
-=item Name:	B<confine>
-
-=item Class:	B<Confine>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-confine>
-
-Specifies a boolean value that indicates whether or not it should be
-allowable to set the canvas's view outside the region defined by the
-B<scrollRegion> argument.
-Defaults to true, which means that the view will
-be constrained within the scroll region.
-
-=item Name:	B<height>
-
-=item Class:	B<Height>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-height>
-
-Specifies a desired window height that the canvas widget should request from
-its geometry manager.  The value may be specified in any
-of the forms described in the L<"COORDINATES"> section below.
-
-=item Name:	B<scrollRegion>
-
-=item Class:	B<ScrollRegion>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-scrollregion>
-
-Specifies a list with four coordinates describing the left, top, right, and
-bottom coordinates of a rectangular region.
-This region is used for scrolling purposes and is considered to be
-the boundary of the information in the canvas.
-Each of the coordinates may be specified
-in any of the forms given in the L<"COORDINATES"> section below.
-
-=item Name:	B<state>
-
-=item Class:	B<State>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-state>
-
-Modifies the default state of the canvas where I<state> may be set to one of:
-normal, disabled, or hidden. Individual canvas objects all have their own
-state option, which overrides the default state. Many options can take
-separate specifications such that the appearance of the item can be different
-in different situations. The options that start with "active" control the
-appearence when the mouse pointer is over it, while the option starting
-with "disabled" controls the appearence when the state is disabled.
-
-=item Name:	B<width>
-
-=item Class:	B<width>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-width>
-
-Specifies a desired window width that the canvas widget should request from
-its geometry manager.  The value may be specified in any
-of the forms described in the L<"COORDINATES"> section below.
-
-=item Name:	B<xScrollIncrement>
-
-=item Class:	B<ScrollIncrement>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-xscrollincrement>
-
-Specifies an increment for horizontal scrolling, in any of the usual forms
-permitted for screen distances.  If the value of this option is greater
-than zero, the horizontal view in the window will be constrained so that
-the canvas x coordinate at the left edge of the window is always an even
-multiple of B<xScrollIncrement>;  furthermore, the units for scrolling
-(e.g., the change in view when the left and right arrows of a scrollbar
-are selected) will also be B<xScrollIncrement>.  If the value of
-this option is less than or equal to zero, then horizontal scrolling
-is unconstrained.
-
-=item Name:	B<yScrollIncrement>
-
-=item Class:	B<ScrollIncrement>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-yscrollincrement>
-
-Specifies an increment for vertical scrolling, in any of the usual forms
-permitted for screen distances.  If the value of this option is greater
-than zero, the vertical view in the window will be constrained so that
-the canvas y coordinate at the top edge of the window is always an even
-multiple of B<yScrollIncrement>;  furthermore, the units for scrolling
-(e.g., the change in view when the top and bottom arrows of a scrollbar
-are selected) will also be B<yScrollIncrement>.  If the value of
-this option is less than or equal to zero, then vertical scrolling
-is unconstrained.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<Canvas> method creates a new window (given
-by the $canvas argument) and makes it into a canvas widget.
-Additional options, described above, may be specified on the
-command line or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the canvas such as its colors and 3-D relief.
-The B<canvas> command returns its
-$canvas argument.  At the time this command is invoked,
-there must not exist a window named $canvas, but
-$canvas's parent must exist.
-
-Canvas widgets implement structured graphics.
-A canvas displays any number of I<items>, which may be things like
-rectangles, circles, lines, and text.
-Items may be manipulated (e.g. moved or re-colored) and
-L<callbacks|Tk::callbacks> may
-be associated with items in much the same way that the L<bind|Tk::bind>
-method allows callbacks to be bound to widgets.  For example,
-a particular callback may be associated with the B<E<lt>Button-1E<gt>> event
-so that the callback is invoked whenever button 1 is pressed with
-the mouse cursor over an item.
-This means that items in a canvas can have behaviors defined by
-the Callbacks bound to them.
-
-=head1 DISPLAY LIST
-
-The items in a canvas are ordered for purposes of display,
-with the first item in the display list being displayed
-first, followed by the next item in the list, and so on.
-Items later in the display list obscure those that are
-earlier in the display list and are sometimes referred to
-as being I<``on top''> of earlier items.
-When a new item is created it is placed at the end of the
-display list, on top of everything else.
-Widget methods may be used to re-arrange the order of the
-display list.
-
-Window items are an exception to the above rules.  The underlying
-window systems require them always to be drawn on top of other items.
-In addition, the stacking order of window items
-is not affected by any of the canvas methods; you must use
-the L<raise|Tk::Widget> and L<lower|Tk::Widget> Tk widget methods instead.
-
-=head1 ITEM IDS AND TAGS
-
-Items in a canvas widget may be named in either of two ways:
-by id or by tag.
-Each item has a unique identifying number which is assigned to
-that item when it is created.  The id of an item never changes
-and id numbers are never re-used within the lifetime of a
-canvas widget.
-
-Each item may also have any number of I<tags> associated
-with it.  A tag is just a string of characters, and it may
-take any form except that of an integer.
-For example, ``x123'' is OK but ``123'' isn't.
-The same tag may be associated with many different items.
-This is commonly done to group items in various interesting
-ways;  for example, all selected items might be given the
-tag ``selected''.
-
-The tag B<all> is implicitly associated with every item
-in the canvas;  it may be used to invoke operations on
-all the items in the canvas.
-
-The tag B<current> is managed automatically by Tk;
-it applies to the I<current item>, which is the
-topmost item whose drawn area covers the position of
-the mouse cursor.
-If the mouse is not in the canvas widget or is not over
-an item, then no item has the B<current> tag.
-
-When specifying items in canvas methods, if the
-specifier is an integer then it is assumed to refer to
-the single item with that id.
-If the specifier is not an integer, then it is assumed to
-refer to all of the items in the canvas that have a tag
-matching the specifier.
-The symbol I<tagOrId> is used below to indicate that
-an argument specifies either an id that selects a single
-item or a tag that selects zero or more items.
-
-I<tagOrId> may contain a logical expressions of
-tags by using operators: 'E<amp>E<amp>', '||', '^' '!', and parenthezised
-subexpressions.  For example:
-
-$c-E<gt>find('withtag',  '(aE<amp>E<amp>!b)|(!aE<amp>E<amp>b)');
-
-or equivalently:
-
-$c-E<gt>find('withtag', 'a^b');
-
-will find only those items with either "a" or "b" tags, but not both.
-
-Some methods only operate on a single item at a
-time;  if I<tagOrId> is specified in a way that
-names multiple items, then the normal behavior is for
-the methods is to use the first (lowest) of these items in
-the display list that is suitable for the method.
-Exceptions are noted in the method descriptions
-below.
-
-=head1 COORDINATES
-
-All coordinates related to canvases are stored as floating-point
-numbers.
-Coordinates and distances are specified in screen units,
-which are floating-point numbers optionally followed
-by one of several letters.
-If no letter is supplied then the distance is in pixels.
-If the letter is B<m> then the distance is in millimeters on
-the screen;  if it is B<c> then the distance is in centimeters;
-B<i> means inches, and B<p> means printers points (1/72 inch).
-Larger y-coordinates refer to points lower on the screen;  larger
-x-coordinates refer to points farther to the right.
-
-=head1 TRANSFORMATIONS
-
-Normally the origin of the canvas coordinate system is at the
-upper-left corner of the window containing the canvas.
-It is possible to adjust the origin of the canvas
-coordinate system relative to the origin of the window using the
-B<xview> and B<yview> methods;  this is typically used
-for scrolling.
-Canvases do not support scaling or rotation of the canvas coordinate
-system relative to the window coordinate system.
-
-Individual items may be moved or scaled using methods
-described below, but they may not be rotated.
-
-=head1 INDICES
-
-Text items support the notion of an I<index> for identifying
-particular positions within the item.
-
-Indices are used for methods such as inserting text, deleting
-a range of characters, and setting the insertion cursor position.
-An index may be specified in any of a number of ways, and
-different types of items may support different forms for
-specifying indices.
-
-In a similar fashion, line and polygon items support I<index> for
-identifying, inserting and deleting subsets of their coordinates.
-Indices are used for commands such as inserting or deleting
-a range of characters or coordinates, and setting the insertion
-cursor position. An index may be specified in any of a number
-of ways, and different types of items may support different forms
-for specifying indices.
-
-Text items support the following forms for an index;  if you
-define new types of text-like items, it would be advisable to
-support as many of these forms as practical.
-Note that it is possible to refer to the character just after
-the last one in the text item;  this is necessary for such
-tasks as inserting new text at the end of the item.
-Lines and Polygons don't support the insertion cursor
-and the selection. Their indices are supposed to be even
-always, because coordinates always appear in pairs.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<number>
-
-A decimal number giving the position of the desired character
-within the text item.
-0 refers to the first character, 1 to the next character, and
-so on. If indexes are odd for lines and polygons, they will be
-automatically decremented by one.
-A number less than 0 is treated as if it were zero, and a
-number greater than the length of the text item is treated
-as if it were equal to the length of the text item. For
-polygons, numbers less than 0 or greater then the length
-of the coordinate list will be adjusted by adding or substracting
-the length until the result is between zero and the length,
-inclusive.
-
-=item B<end>
-
-Refers to the character or coordinate just after the last one
-in the item (same as the number of characters or coordinates
-in the item).
-
-=item B<insert>
-
-Refers to the character just before which the insertion cursor
-is drawn in this item. Not valid for lines and polygons.
-
-=item B<sel.first>
-
-Refers to the first selected character in the item.
-If the selection isn't in this item then this form is illegal.
-
-=item B<sel.last>
-
-Refers to the last selected character in the item.
-If the selection isn't in this item then this form is illegal.
-
-=item B<[>I<x,y>B<]>
-
-Refers to the character or coordinate at the point given by I<x> and
-I<y>, where I<x> and I<y> are specified in the coordinate
-system of the canvas.
-If I<x> and I<y> lie outside the coordinates covered by the
-text item, then they refer to the first or last character in the
-line that is closest to the given point.
-The Tcl string form "@x,y" is also allowed.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DASH PATTERNS
-
-Many items support the notion of an dash pattern for outlines.
-
-The first possible syntax is a list of integers. Each element
-represents the number of pixels of a line segment. Only the odd
-segments are drawn using the "outline" color. The other segments
-are drawn transparent.
-
-The second possible syntax is a character list containing only
-5 possible characters B<[.,-_ ]>,  with the first 4 characters
-producing a segment of length 1 to 4, respectively, followed
-by a transparent segment of length 2. The space can be used
-repeatedly to enlarge the space between other line elements
-by 1, and can not occur as the first position in the string.
-The main difference of this syntax with the previous one is 
-that it it shape-conserving. This means that all values in the dash
-list will be multiplied by the line width before display. This
-assures that "." will always be displayed as a dot and "-"
-always as a dash regardless of the line width.
-
-Some examples, for a line width of 2:
-
- -dash .     = -dash [2,4]
- -dash -     = -dash [6,4]
- -dash -.    = -dash [6,4,2,4]
- -dash -..   = -dash [6,4,2,4,2,4]
- -dash '.  ' = -dash [2,8]
- -dash ','   = -dash [4,4]
-
-On systems where only a limited set of dash patterns is available,
-the dash pattern will be displayed as the closest available dash 
-pattern. For example, on Windows only the first 4 of the
-above examples are available. The last 2 examples will be
-displayed identically as the first one.
-
-=head1 WIDGET METHODS
-
-The B<Canvas> method creates a widget object.
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-The widget also inherits all the methods provided by the generic
-L<Tk::Widget|Tk::Widget> class.
-
-The following additional methods are available for canvas widgets:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<addtag>(I<tag, searchSpec, >?I<arg, arg, ...>?)
-
-For each item that meets the constraints specified by
-I<searchSpec> and the I<arg>s, add
-I<tag> to the list of tags associated with the item if it
-isn't already present on that list.
-It is possible that no items will satisfy the constraints
-given by I<searchSpec> and I<arg>s, in which case the
-method has no effect.
-This command returns an empty string as result.
-I<SearchSpec> and I<arg>'s may take any of the following
-forms:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item B<above >I<tagOrId>
-
-Selects the item just after (above) the one given by I<tagOrId>
-in the display list.
-If I<tagOrId> denotes more than one item, then the last (topmost)
-of these items in the display list is used.
-
-=item B<all>
-
-Selects all the items in the canvas.
-
-=item B<below >I<tagOrId>
-
-Selects the item just before (below) the one given by I<tagOrId>
-in the display list.
-If I<tagOrId> denotes more than one item, then the first (lowest)
-of these items in the display list is used.
-
-=item B<closest >I<x y >?I<halo>? ?I<start>?
-
-Selects the item closest to the point given by I<x> and I<y>.
-If more than one item is at the same closest distance (e.g. two
-items overlap the point), then the top-most of these items (the
-last one in the display list) is used.
-If I<halo> is specified, then it must be a non-negative
-value.
-Any item closer than I<halo> to the point is considered to
-overlap it.
-The I<start> argument may be used to step circularly through
-all the closest items.
-If I<start> is specified, it names an item using a tag or id
-(if by tag, it selects the first item in the display list with
-the given tag).
-Instead of selecting the topmost closest item, this form will
-select the topmost closest item that is below I<start> in
-the display list;  if no such item exists, then the selection
-behaves as if the I<start> argument had not been specified.
-
-=item B<enclosed> I<x1> I<y1> I<x2> I<y2>
-
-Selects all the items completely enclosed within the rectangular
-region given by I<x1>, I<y1>, I<x2>, and I<y2>.
-I<X1> must be no greater then I<x2> and I<y1> must be
-no greater than I<y2>.
-
-=item B<overlapping> I<x1> I<y1> I<x2> I<y2>
-
-Selects all the items that overlap or are enclosed within the
-rectangular region given by I<x1>, I<y1>, I<x2>,
-and I<y2>.
-I<X1> must be no greater then I<x2> and I<y1> must be
-no greater than I<y2>.
-
-=item B<withtag >I<tagOrId>
-
-Selects all the items given by I<tagOrId>.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<bbox>(I<tagOrId, >?I<tagOrId, tagOrId, ...>?)
-
-Returns a list with four elements giving an approximate bounding box
-for all the items named by the I<tagOrId> arguments.
-The list has the form ``I<x1 y1 x2 y2>'' such that the drawn
-areas of all the named elements are within the region bounded by
-I<x1> on the left, I<x2> on the right, I<y1> on the top,
-and I<y2> on the bottom.
-The return value may overestimate the actual bounding box by
-a few pixels.
-If no items match any of the I<tagOrId> arguments or if the
-matching items have empty bounding boxes (i.e. they have nothing
-to display)
-then an empty string is returned.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<bind>(I<tagOrId>?, I<sequence>? ?,I<callback>?)
-
-This method associates I<callback> with all the items given by
-I<tagOrId> such that whenever the event sequence given by
-I<sequence> occurs for one of the items the callback will
-be invoked.
-This method is similar to the B<bind> method except that
-it operates on items in a canvas rather than entire widgets.
-See L<Tk::bind> for complete details
-on the syntax of I<sequence> and the substitutions performed
-on I<callback> before invoking it.
-If all arguments are specified then a new binding is created, replacing
-any existing binding for the same I<sequence> and I<tagOrId>
-(if the first character of I<command> is ``+'' then I<command>
-augments an existing binding rather than replacing it).
-In this case the return value is an empty string.
-If I<callback> is omitted then the method returns the I<callback>
-associated with I<tagOrId> and I<sequence> (an error occurs
-if there is no such binding).
-If both I<callback> and I<sequence> are omitted then the method
-returns a list of all the sequences for which bindings have been
-defined for I<tagOrId>.
-
-=over 8
-
-The only events for which bindings may be specified are those related to
-the mouse and keyboard (such as B<Enter>, B<Leave>,
-B<ButtonPress>, B<Motion>, and B<KeyPress>) or virtual events.
-The handling of events in canvases uses the current item defined
-in L<"ITEM IDS AND TAGS"> above.  B<Enter> and B<Leave> events trigger for an
-item when it becomes the current item or ceases to be the current item;
-note that these events are different than B<Enter> and B<Leave>
-events for windows.  Mouse-related events are directed to the current
-item, if any.  Keyboard-related events are directed to the focus item, if
-any (see the L<focus|/focus> method below for more on this).  If a
-virtual event is used in a binding, that binding can trigger only if the
-virtual event is defined by an underlying mouse-related or
-keyboard-related event.
-
-It is possible for multiple bindings to match a particular event.
-This could occur, for example, if one binding is associated with the
-item's id and another is associated with one of the item's tags.
-When this occurs, all of the matching bindings are invoked.
-A binding associated with the B<all> tag is invoked first,
-followed by one binding for each of the item's tags (in order),
-followed by a binding associated with the item's id.
-If there are multiple matching bindings for a single tag,
-then only the most specific binding is invoked.
-A B<continue> in a callback terminates that
-subroutine, and a B<break> method terminates that subroutine
-and skips any remaining callbacks for the event, just as for the
-B<bind> method.
-
-If bindings have been created for a canvas window using the B<CanvasBind>
-method, then they are invoked in addition to bindings created for
-the canvas's items using the B<bind> method.
-The bindings for items will be invoked before any of the bindings
-for the window as a whole.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<canvasx>(I<screenx>?, I<gridspacing>?)
-
-Given a window x-coordinate in the canvas I<screenx>, this method returns
-the canvas x-coordinate that is displayed at that location.
-If I<gridspacing> is specified, then the canvas coordinate is
-rounded to the nearest multiple of I<gridspacing> units.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<canvasy>(I<screeny, >?I<gridspacing>?)
-
-Given a window y-coordinate in the canvas I<screeny> this method returns
-the canvas y-coordinate that is displayed at that location.
-If I<gridspacing> is specified, then the canvas coordinate is
-rounded to the nearest multiple of I<gridspacing> units.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<coords>(I<tagOrId >?I<x0,y0 ...>?)
-
-Query or modify the coordinates that define an item.
-If no coordinates are specified, this method returns a list
-whose elements are the coordinates of the item named by
-I<tagOrId>.
-If coordinates are specified, then they replace the current
-coordinates for the named item.
-If I<tagOrId> refers to multiple items, then
-the first one in the display list is used.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<create>(I<type, x, y, >?I<x, y, ...>?, ?I<option, value, ...>?)
-
-Create a new item in I<$canvas> of type I<type>.
-The exact format of the arguments after B<type> depends
-on B<type>, but usually they consist of the coordinates for
-one or more points, followed by specifications for zero or
-more item options.
-See the subsections on individual item types below for more
-on the syntax of this method.
-This method returns the id for the new item.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<dchars>(I<tagOrId, first, >?I<last>?)
-
-For each item given by I<tagOrId>, delete the characters, or coordinates,
-in the range given by I<first> and I<last>, inclusive.
-If some of the items given by I<tagOrId> don't support
-Text items interpret I<first> and I<last> as indices to a character,
-line and polygon items interpret them indices to a coordinate (an x,y pair).
-within the item(s) as described in L<"INDICES"> above.
-If I<last> is omitted, it defaults to I<first>.
-This method returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<delete>(?I<tagOrId, tagOrId, ...>?)
-
-Delete each of the items given by each I<tagOrId>, and return
-an empty string.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<dtag>(I<tagOrId, >?I<tagToDelete>?)
-
-For each of the items given by I<tagOrId>, delete the
-tag given by I<tagToDelete> from the list of those
-associated with the item.
-If an item doesn't have the tag I<tagToDelete> then
-the item is unaffected by the method.
-If I<tagToDelete> is omitted then it defaults to I<tagOrId>.
-This method returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<find>(I<searchCommand, >?I<arg, arg, ...>?)
-
-This method returns a list consisting of all the items that
-meet the constraints specified by I<searchCommand> and
-I<arg>'s.
-I<SearchCommand> and I<args> have any of the forms
-accepted by the B<addtag> method.
-The items are returned in stacking order, with the lowest item first.
-
-=item focus
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<focus>(?I<tagOrId>?)
-
-Set the keyboard focus for the canvas widget to the item given by
-I<tagOrId>.
-If I<tagOrId> refers to several items, then the focus is set
-to the first such item in the display list that supports the
-insertion cursor.
-If I<tagOrId> doesn't refer to any items, or if none of them
-support the insertion cursor, then the focus isn't changed.
-If I<tagOrId> is an empty
-string, then the focus item is reset so that no item has the focus.
-If I<tagOrId> is not specified then the method returns the
-id for the item that currently has the focus, or an empty string
-if no item has the focus.
-
-=over 8
-
-Once the focus has been set to an item, the item will display
-the insertion cursor and all keyboard events will be directed
-to that item.
-The focus item within a canvas and the focus window on the
-screen (set with the B<focus> method) are totally independent:
-a given item doesn't actually have the input focus unless (a)
-its canvas is the focus window and (b) the item is the focus item
-within the canvas.
-In most cases it is advisable to follow the B<focus> widget
-method with the B<CanvasFocus> method to set the focus window to
-the canvas (if it wasn't there already).
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<gettags>(I<tagOrId>)
-
-Return a list whose elements are the tags associated with the
-item given by I<tagOrId>.
-If I<tagOrId> refers to more than one item, then the tags
-are returned from the first such item in the display list.
-If I<tagOrId> doesn't refer to any items, or if the item
-contains no tags, then an empty string is returned.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<icursor>(I<tagOrId, index>)
-
-Set the position of the insertion cursor for the item(s) given by I<tagOrId>
-to just before the character whose position is given by I<index>.
-If some or all of the items given by I<tagOrId> don't support
-an insertion cursor then this method has no effect on them.
-See L<"INDICES"> above for a description of the
-legal forms for I<index>.
-Note:  the insertion cursor is only displayed in an item if
-that item currently has the keyboard focus (see the widget
-method B<focus>, below), but the cursor position may
-be set even when the item doesn't have the focus.
-This method returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<index>(I<tagOrId, index>)
-
-This method returns a decimal string giving the numerical index
-within I<tagOrId> corresponding to I<index>.
-I<Index> gives a textual description of the desired position
-as described in L<"INDICES"> above.
-Text items interpret I<index> as an index to a  character,
-line and polygon items interpret it as an index to a coordinate (an x,y pair).
-The return value is guaranteed to lie between 0 and the number
-of characters, or coordinates, within the item, inclusive.
-If I<tagOrId> refers to multiple items, then the index
-is processed in the first of these items that supports indexing
-operations (in display list order).
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<insert>(I<tagOrId, beforeThis, string>)
-
-For each of the items given by I<tagOrId>, if the item supports
-text or coordinate, insertion then I<string> is inserted into the item's
-text just before the character, or coordinate, whose index is I<beforeThis>.
-Text items interpret I<beforethis> as an index to a  character,
-line and polygon items interpret it as an index to a coordinate (an x,y pair).
-For lines and polygons the I<string> must be a valid coordinate
-sequence.
-See L<"INDICES"> above for information about the forms allowed
-for I<beforeThis>.
-This method returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<itemcget>(I<tagOrId, >I<option>)
-
-Returns the current value of the configuration option for the
-item given by I<tagOrId> whose name is I<option>.
-This method is similar to the L<cget|Tk::option> method except that
-it applies to a particular item rather than the widget as a whole.
-I<Option> may have any of the values accepted by the B<create>
-method when the item was created.
-If I<tagOrId> is a tag that refers to more than one item,
-the first (lowest) such item is used.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<itemconfigure>(I<tagOrId, >?I<option>?, ?I<value>?, ?I<option, value, ...>?)
-
-This method is similar to the L<configure|Tk::option> method except
-that it modifies item-specific options for the items given by
-I<tagOrId> instead of modifying options for the overall
-canvas widget.
-If no I<option> is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for the first item given by I<tagOrId>
-(see L<Tk::options> for
-information on the format of this list).  If I<option> is specified
-with no I<value>, then the method returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no I<option> is specified).  If
-one or more I<option-value> pairs are specified, then the method
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s) in
-each of the items given by I<tagOrId>;  in
-this case the method returns an empty string.
-The I<option>s and I<value>s are the same as those permissible
-in the B<create> method when the item(s) were created;
-see the sections describing individual item types below for details
-on the legal options.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<lower>(I<tagOrId, >?I<belowThis>?)
-
-Move all of the items given by I<tagOrId> to a new position
-in the display list just before the item given by I<belowThis>.
-If I<tagOrId> refers to more than one item then all are moved
-but the relative order of the moved items will not be changed.
-I<BelowThis> is a tag or id;  if it refers to more than one
-item then the first (lowest) of these items in the display list is used
-as the destination location for the moved items.
-Note: this method has no effect on window items.  Window items always
-obscure other item types, and the stacking order of window items is
-determined by the B<raise> and B<lower> methods of the widget, not the
-B<raise> and B<lower> methods for canvases.
-This method returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<move>(I<tagOrId, xAmount, yAmount>)
-
-Move each of the items given by I<tagOrId> in the canvas coordinate
-space by adding I<xAmount> to the x-coordinate of each point
-associated with the item and I<yAmount> to the y-coordinate of
-each point associated with the item.
-This method returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<postscript>(?I<option, value, option, value, ...>?)
-
-Generate a Postscript representation for part or all of the canvas.
-If the B<-file> option is specified then the Postscript is written
-to a file and an empty string is returned;  otherwise the Postscript
-is returned as the result of the method.
-If the interpreter that owns the canvas is marked as safe, the operation
-will fail because safe interpreters are not allowed to write files.
-If the B<-channel> option is specified, the argument denotes the name
-of a channel already opened for writing. The Postscript is written to
-that channel, and the channel is left open for further writing at the end
-of the operation.
-The Postscript is created in Encapsulated Postscript form using
-version 3.0 of the Document Structuring Conventions.
-Note: by default Postscript is only generated for information that
-appears in the canvas's window on the screen.  If the canvas is
-freshly created it may still have its initial size of 1x1 pixel
-so nothing will appear in the Postscript.  To get around this problem
-either invoke the B<update> method to wait for the canvas window
-to reach its final size, or else use the B<-width> and B<-height>
-options to specify the area of the canvas to print.
-The I<option>-I<value> argument pairs provide additional
-information to control the generation of Postscript.  The following
-options are supported:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item B<-colormap> =E<gt> I<hashRef>
-
-I<HashRef> must be a reference to a hash variable or an anonymous hash
-that specifies a color mapping to use in the Postscript.
-Each value of the hash must consist of Postscript
-code to set a particular color value (e.g. ``B<1.0 1.0 0.0 setrgbcolor>'').
-When outputting color information in the Postscript, Tk checks
-to see if there is a key in the hash with the same
-name as the color.
-If so, Tk uses the value of the element as the Postscript method
-to set the color.
-If this option hasn't been specified, or if there isn't a key
-in I<hashRef> for a given color, then Tk uses the red, green,
-and blue intensities from the X color.
-
-=item B<-colormode> =E<gt> I<mode>
-
-Specifies how to output color information.  I<Mode> must be either
-B<color> (for full color output), B<gray> (convert all colors
-to their gray-scale equivalents) or B<mono> (convert all colors
-to black or white).
-
-=item B<-file> =E<gt> I<fileName>
-
-Specifies the name of the file in which to write the Postscript.
-If this option isn't specified then the Postscript is returned as the
-result of the method instead of being written to a file.
-
-=item B<-fontmap> =E<gt> I<hashRef>
-
-I<HashRef> must be a reference to a hash variable or an anonymous hash
-that specifies a font mapping to use in the Postscript.
-Each value of the hash must consist of an array reference with
-two elements, which are the name and point size of a Postscript font.
-When outputting Postscript commands for a particular font, Tk
-checks to see if I<hashRef> contains a value with the same
-name as the font.
-If there is such an element, then the font information contained in
-that element is used in the Postscript.
-Otherwise Tk attempts to guess what Postscript font to use.
-Tk's guesses generally only work for well-known fonts such as
-Times and Helvetica and Courier, and only if the X font name does not
-omit any dashes up through the point size.
-For example, B<-*-Courier-Bold-R-Normal--*-120-*> will work but
-B<*Courier-Bold-R-Normal*120*> will not;  Tk needs the dashes to
-parse the font name).
-
-=item B<-height> =E<gt> I<size>
-
-Specifies the height of the area of the canvas to print.
-Defaults to the height of the canvas window.
-
-=item B<-pageanchor> =E<gt> I<anchor>
-
-Specifies which point of the printed area of the canvas should appear over
-the positioning point on the page (which is given by the B<-pagex>
-and B<-pagey> options).
-For example, B<-pageanchor>=>B<n> means that the top center of the
-area of the canvas being printed (as it appears in the canvas window)
-should be over the positioning point. Defaults to B<center>.
-
-=item B<-pageheight> =E<gt> I<size>
-
-Specifies that the Postscript should be scaled in both x and y so
-that the printed area is I<size> high on the Postscript page.
-I<Size> consists of a floating-point number followed by
-B<c> for centimeters, B<i> for inches, B<m> for millimeters,
-or B<p> or nothing for printer's points (1/72 inch).
-Defaults to the height of the printed area on the screen.
-If both B<-pageheight> and B<-pagewidth> are specified then
-the scale factor from B<-pagewidth> is used (non-uniform scaling
-is not implemented).
-
-=item B<-pagewidth> =E<gt> I<size>
-
-Specifies that the Postscript should be scaled in both x and y so
-that the printed area is I<size> wide on the Postscript page.
-I<Size> has the same form as for B<-pageheight>.
-Defaults to the width of the printed area on the screen.
-If both B<-pageheight> and B<-pagewidth> are specified then
-the scale factor from B<-pagewidth>  is used (non-uniform scaling
-is not implemented).
-
-=item B<-pagex> =E<gt> I<position>
-
-I<Position> gives the x-coordinate of the positioning point on
-the Postscript page, using any of the forms allowed for B<-pageheight>.
-Used in conjunction with the B<-pagey> and B<-pageanchor> options
-to determine where the printed area appears on the Postscript page.
-Defaults to the center of the page.
-
-=item B<-pagey> =E<gt> I<position>
-
-I<Position> gives the y-coordinate of the positioning point on
-the Postscript page, using any of the forms allowed for B<-pageheight>.
-Used in conjunction with the B<-pagex> and B<-pageanchor> options
-to determine where the printed area appears on the Postscript page.
-Defaults to the center of the page.
-
-=item B<-rotate> =E<gt> I<boolean>
-
-I<Boolean> specifies whether the printed area is to be rotated 90
-degrees.
-In non-rotated output the x-axis of the printed area runs along
-the short dimension of the page (``portrait'' orientation);
-in rotated output the x-axis runs along the long dimension of the
-page (``landscape'' orientation).
-Defaults to non-rotated.
-
-=item B<-width> =E<gt> I<size>
-
-Specifies the width of the area of the canvas to print.
-Defaults to the width of the canvas window.
-
-=item B<-x> => I<position>
-
-Specifies the x-coordinate of the left edge of the area of the
-canvas that is to be printed, in canvas coordinates, not window
-coordinates.
-Defaults to the coordinate of the left edge of the window.
-
-=item B<-y> => I<position>
-
-Specifies the y-coordinate of the top edge of the area of the
-canvas that is to be printed, in canvas coordinates, not window
-coordinates.
-Defaults to the coordinate of the top edge of the window.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<raise>(I<tagOrId, >?I<aboveThis>?)
-
-Move all of the items given by I<tagOrId> to a new position
-in the display list just after the item given by I<aboveThis>.
-If I<tagOrId> refers to more than one item then all are moved
-but the relative order of the moved items will not be changed.
-I<AboveThis> is a tag or id;  if it refers to more than one
-item then the last (topmost) of these items in the display list is used
-as the destination location for the moved items.
-Note: this method has no effect on window items.  Window items always
-obscure other item types, and the stacking order of window items is
-determined by the B<raise> and B<lower> widget commands, not the
-B<raise> and B<lower> methods for canvases.
-This method returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<scale>(I<tagOrId, xOrigin, yOrigin, xScale, yScale>)
-
-Rescale all of the items given by I<tagOrId> in canvas coordinate
-space.
-I<XOrigin> and I<yOrigin> identify the origin for the scaling
-operation and I<xScale> and I<yScale> identify the scale
-factors for x- and y-coordinates, respectively (a scale factor of
-1.0 implies no change to that coordinate).
-For each of the points defining each item, the x-coordinate is
-adjusted to change the distance from I<xOrigin> by a factor
-of I<xScale>.
-Similarly, each y-coordinate is adjusted to change the distance
-from I<yOrigin> by a factor of I<yScale>.
-This method returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<scan>(I<option, args>)
-
-This method is used to implement scanning on canvases.  It has
-two forms, depending on I<option>:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<scanMark>(I<x, y>)
-
-Records I<x> and I<y> and the canvas's current view;  used
-in conjunction with later B<scanDragto> method.
-Typically this method is associated with a mouse button press in
-the widget and I<x> and I<y> are the coordinates of the
-mouse.  It returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<scanDragto>(I<x, y, ?gain?>.)
-
-This method computes the difference between its I<x> and I<y>
-arguments (which are typically mouse coordinates) and the I<x> and
-I<y> arguments to the last B<scanMark> method for the widget.
-It then adjusts the view by 10 times the
-difference in coordinates.  This method is typically associated
-It then adjusts the view by I<gain> times the
-difference in coordinates, where I<gain> defaults to 10.
-This command is typically associated
-with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of
-dragging the canvas at high speed through its window.  The return
-value is an empty string.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<select>(I<option, >?I<tagOrId, arg>?)
-
-Manipulates the selection in one of several ways, depending on
-I<option>.
-The method may take any of the forms described below.
-In all of the descriptions below, I<tagOrId> must refer to
-an item that supports indexing and selection;  if it refers to
-multiple items then the first of
-these that supports indexing and the selection is used.
-I<Index> gives a textual description of a position
-within I<tagOrId>, as described in L<"INDICES"> above.
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<selectAdjust>(I<tagOrId, index>)
-
-Locate the end of the selection in I<tagOrId> nearest
-to the character given by I<index>, and adjust that
-end of the selection to be at I<index> (i.e. including
-but not going beyond I<index>).
-The other end of the selection is made the anchor point
-for future B<selectTo> method calls.
-If the selection isn't currently in I<tagOrId> then
-this method behaves the same as the B<selectTo> widget
-method.
-Returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<selectClear>
-
-Clear the selection if it is in this widget.
-If the selection isn't in this widget then the method
-has no effect.
-Returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<selectFrom>(I<tagOrId, index>)
-
-Set the selection anchor point for the widget to be just
-before the character
-given by I<index> in the item given by I<tagOrId>.
-This method doesn't change the selection;  it just sets
-the fixed end of the selection for future B<selectTo>
-method calls.
-Returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<selectItem>
-
-Returns the id of the selected item, if the selection is in an
-item in this canvas.
-If the selection is not in this canvas then an empty string
-is returned.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<selectTo>(I<tagOrId, index>)
-
-Set the selection to consist of those characters of I<tagOrId>
-between the selection anchor point and
-I<index>.
-The new selection will include the character given by I<index>;
-it will include the character given by the anchor point only if
-I<index> is greater than or equal to the anchor point.
-The anchor point is determined by the most recent B<selectAdjust>
-or B<selectFrom> method calls for this widget.
-If the selection anchor point for the widget isn't currently in
-I<tagOrId>, then it is set to the same character given
-by I<index>.
-Returns an empty string.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<type>(I<tagOrId>)
-
-Returns the type of the item given by I<tagOrId>, such as
-B<rectangle> or B<text>.
-If I<tagOrId> refers to more than one item, then the type
-of the first item in the display list is returned.
-If I<tagOrId> doesn't refer to any items at all then
-an empty string is returned.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<xview>(?I<args>?)
-
-This method is used to query and change the horizontal position of the
-information displayed in the canvas's window.
-It can take any of the following forms:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<xview>
-
-Returns a list containing two elements.
-Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1;  together they describe
-the horizontal span that is visible in the window.
-For example, if the first element is .2 and the second element is .6,
-20% of the canvas's area (as defined by the B<-scrollregion> option)
-is off-screen to the left, the middle 40% is visible
-in the window, and 40% of the canvas is off-screen to the right.
-These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the B<-xscrollcommand>
-option.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<xviewMoveto>(I<fraction>)
-
-Adjusts the view in the window so that I<fraction> of the
-total width of the canvas is off-screen to the left.
-I<Fraction> must be a fraction between 0 and 1.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<xviewScroll>(I<number, what>)
-
-This method shifts the view in the window left or right according to
-I<number> and I<what>.
-I<Number> must be an integer.
-I<What> must be either B<units> or B<pages> or an abbreviation
-of one of these.
-If I<what> is B<units>, the view adjusts left or right in units
-of the B<xScrollIncrement> option, if it is greater than zero,
-or in units of one-tenth the window's width otherwise.
-If I<what is >B<pages> then the view
-adjusts in units of nine-tenths the window's width.
-If I<number> is negative then information farther to the left
-becomes visible;  if it is positive then information farther to the right
-becomes visible.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<yview>(I<?args>?)
-
-This method is used to query and change the vertical position of the
-information displayed in the canvas's window.
-It can take any of the following forms:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<yview>
-
-Returns a list containing two elements.
-Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1;  together they describe
-the vertical span that is visible in the window.
-For example, if the first element is .6 and the second element is 1.0,
-the lowest 40% of the canvas's area (as defined by the B<-scrollregion>
-option) is visible in the window.
-These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the B<-yscrollcommand>
-option.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<yviewMoveto>(I<fraction>)
-
-Adjusts the view in the window so that I<fraction> of the canvas's
-area is off-screen to the top.
-I<Fraction> is a fraction between 0 and 1.
-
-=item I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<yviewScroll>(I<number, what>)
-
-This method adjusts the view in the window up or down according to
-I<number> and I<what>.
-I<Number> must be an integer.
-I<What> must be either B<units> or B<pages>.
-If I<what> is B<units>, the view adjusts up or down in units
-of the B<yScrollIncrement> option, if it is greater than zero,
-or in units of one-tenth the window's height otherwise.
-If I<what> is B<pages> then
-the view adjusts in units of nine-tenths the window's height.
-If I<number> is negative then higher information becomes
-visible;  if it is positive then lower information
-becomes visible.
-
-=back
-
-=back
-
-=head1 OVERVIEW OF ITEM TYPES
-
-The sections below describe the various types of items supported
-by canvas widgets.  Each item type is characterized by two things:
-first, the form of the B<create> method used to create
-instances of the type;  and second, a set of configuration options
-for items of that type, which may be used in the
-B<create> and B<itemconfigure> methods.
-Most items don't support indexing or selection or the methods
-related to them, such as B<index> and B<insert>.
-Where items do support these facilities, it is noted explicitly
-in the descriptions below.
-At present, text, line and polygon items provide this support.
-For lines and polygons the indexing facility is used to manipulate
-the coordinates of the item.
-
-=head1 ARC ITEMS
-
-Items of type B<arc> appear on the display as arc-shaped regions.
-An arc is a section of an oval delimited by two angles (specified
-by the B<-start> and B<-extent> options) and displayed in
-one of several ways (specified by the B<-style> option).
-Arcs are created with methods of the following form:
-
- $canvas->createArc(x1, y1, x2, y2, ?option, value, option, value, ...?)
-
-The arguments I<x1>, I<y1>, I<x2>, and I<y2> give
-the coordinates of two diagonally opposite corners of a
-rectangular region enclosing the oval that defines the arc.
-After the coordinates there may be any number of I<option>-I<value>
-pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options
-for the item.  These same I<option>-I<value> pairs may be
-used in B<itemconfigure> methods to change the item's
-configuration.
-The following options are supported for arcs:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-dash> =E<gt> I<pattern>
-
-=item B<-activedash> =E<gt> I<pattern>
-
-=item B<-disableddash> =E<gt> I<pattern>
-
-This option specifies dash patterns for the normal state, the active
-state, and the disabled state of an arc item.
-I<pattern> may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetDash>.
-If the dash options are omitted then the default is a solid outline.
-
-=item B<-dashoffset> =E<gt> I<offset>
-
-The starting I<offset> into the pattern provided by the
-B<-dash> option.
-B<-dashoffset> is ignored if there is no B<-dash> pattern.
-
-=item B<-extent> =E<gt> I<degrees>
-
-Specifies the size of the angular range occupied by the arc.
-The arc's range extends for I<degrees> degrees counter-clockwise
-from the starting angle given by the B<-start> option.
-I<Degrees> may be negative.
-If it is greater than 360 or less than -360, then I<degrees>
-modulo 360 is used as the extent.
-
-=item B<-fill> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-=item B<-activefill> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-=item B<-disabledfill> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-Specifies the color to be used to fill the arc region in its normal, active, and
-disabled states,
-I<Color> may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetColor>.
-If I<color> is an empty string (the default), then
-then the arc will not be filled.
-
-=item B<-outline> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-=item B<-activeoutline> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-=item B<-disabledoutline> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-This option specifies the color that should be used to draw the
-outline of the arc in its normal, active and disabled states.
-I<Color> may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetColor>.
-This option defaults to B<black>.  If I<color> is specified
-as undef then no outline is drawn for the arc.
-
-=item B<-outlinestipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-=item B<-activeoutlinestipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-=item B<-disabledoutlinestipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-This option specifies stipple patterns that should be used to draw the
-outline of the arc in its normal, active and disabled states.
-Indicates that the outline for the arc should be drawn with a stipple pattern;
-I<bitmap> specifies the stipple pattern to use, in any of the
-forms accepted by B<Tk_GetBitmap>.
-If the B<-outline> option hasn't been specified then this option
-has no effect.
-If I<bitmap> is an empty string (the default), then the outline is drawn
-in a solid fashion.
-
-=item B<-start> =E<gt> I<degrees>
-
-Specifies the beginning of the angular range occupied by the
-arc.
-I<Degrees> is given in units of degrees measured counter-clockwise
-from the 3-o'clock position;  it may be either positive or negative.
-
-=item B<-state> =E<gt> I<state>
-
-Modifies the state of the arc item where I<state> may be set to one of:
-normal, disabled, hidden or "". If set to empty, the state of the canvas
-itself is used. An arc item may also be in the "active"
-state if the mouse is currently over it.  Many options can take
-separate specifications in normal, active and disabled states such that the
-appearance of the item can be different in each state.
-
-=item B<-stipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-=item B<-activestipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-=item B<-disabledstipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-This option specifies stipple patterns that should be used to fill the
-the arc in its normal, active and disabled states.
-I<bitmap> specifies the stipple pattern to use, in any of the
-forms accepted by B<Tk_GetBitmap>.
-If the B<-fill> option hasn't been specified then this option
-has no effect.
-If I<bitmap> is an empty string (the default), then filling is done
-in a solid fashion.
-
-=item B<-style> =E<gt> I<type>
-
-Specifies how to draw the arc.  If I<type> is B<pieslice>
-(the default) then the arc's region is defined by a section
-of the oval's perimeter plus two line segments, one between the center
-of the oval and each end of the perimeter section.
-If I<type> is B<chord> then the arc's region is defined
-by a section of the oval's perimeter plus a single line segment
-connecting the two end points of the perimeter section.
-If I<type> is B<arc> then the arc's region consists of
-a section of the perimeter alone.
-In this last case the B<-fill> option is ignored.
-
-=item B<-tags> =E<gt> I<tagList>
-
-Specifies a set of tags to apply to the item.
-I<TagList> consists of a list of tag names, which replace any
-existing tags for the item.
-I<TagList> may be an empty list.
-
-=item B<-updatecommand> =E<gt> I<command>
-
-Specifies a callback that is to be executed every time
-the arc item is updated on the screen.
-
-=item B<-width> =E<gt> I<outlineWidth>
-
-=item B<-activewidth> =E<gt> I<outlineWidth>
-
-=item B<-disabledwidth> =E<gt> I<outlineWidth>
-
-Specifies the width of the outline to be drawn around
-the arc's region, in its normal, active and disabled states.
-I<outlineWidth> may be in any of the forms described in
-the L<"COORDINATES"> section above.
-If the B<-outline> option has been specified as undef
-then this option has no effect.
-Wide outlines will be drawn centered on the edges of the arc's region.
-This option defaults to 1.0.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 BITMAP ITEMS
-
-Items of type B<bitmap> appear on the display as images with
-two colors, foreground and background.
-Bitmaps are created with methods of the following form:
-
- $canvas->createBitmap(x, y, ?option, value, option, value, ...?)
-
-The arguments I<x> and I<y> specify the coordinates of a
-point used to position the bitmap on the display (see the B<-anchor>
-option below for more information on how bitmaps are displayed).
-After the coordinates there may be any number of I<option>-I<value>
-pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options
-for the item.  These same I<option>-I<value> pairs may be
-used in B<itemconfigure> methods to change the item's
-configuration.
-The following options are supported for bitmaps:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-anchor> =E<gt> I<anchorPos>
-
-I<AnchorPos> tells how to position the bitmap relative to the
-positioning point for the item;  it may have any of the forms
-accepted by B<Tk_GetAnchor>.  For example, if I<anchorPos>
-is B<center> then the bitmap is centered on the point;  if
-I<anchorPos> is B<n> then the bitmap will be drawn so that
-its top center point is at the positioning point.
-This option defaults to B<center>.
-
-=item B<-background> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-=item B<-activebackground> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-=item B<-disabledbackground> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-Specifies the color to use for each of the bitmap's '0' valued pixels
-in its normal, active and disabled states.
-I<Color> may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetColor>.
-If this option isn't specified, or if it is specified as undef,
-then nothing is displayed where the bitmap pixels are 0;  this
-produces a transparent effect.
-
-=item B<-bitmap> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-=item B<-activebitmap> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-=item B<-disabledbitmap> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-Specifies the bitmaps to display in the item in its normal, active and
-disabled states. All bitmaps must have the same width and height.
-I<Bitmap> may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetBitmap>.
-
-=item B<-foreground> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-=item B<-activeforeground> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-=item B<-disabledforeground> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-Specifies the color to use for each of the bitmap's '1' valued pixels
-in its normal, active and disabled states.
-I<Color> may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetColor> and
-defaults to B<black>.
-
-=item B<-state> =E<gt> I<state>
-
-Modifies the state of the bitmap item where I<state> may be set to one of:
-normal, disabled, or hidden.  An bitmap item may also be in the "active"
-state if the mouse is currently over it.  Many options can take
-separate specifications in normal, active and disabled states such that the
-appearance of the item can be different in each state.
-
-=item B<-tags> =E<gt> I<tagList>
-
-Specifies a set of tags to apply to the item.
-I<TagList> consists of a list of tag names, which replace any
-existing tags for the item.
-I<TagList> may be an empty list.
-
-=item B<-updatecommand> =E<gt> I<command>
-
-Specifies a callback that is to be executed every time
-the bitmap item is updated on the screen.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 GRID ITEMS
-
-Items of type B<grid> are intended for producing a visual reference for
-interpreting other items. They can be drawn as either lines (with dash
-style) or as rectangular "dots" at each grid point.
-
-Items of type B<grid> are unlike other items they always cover the
-whole of the canvas, but are never enclosed by nor overlap any area
-and are not near any point. That is they are intended to be always visible
-but not "pickable", as such they do support the "active" state.
-They are like other items in that: multiple
-grids are permitted, they can be raised and lowered relative to other
-items, they can be moved and scaled. As yet grids do not appear in
-PostScript output.
-
-Grids have outline like configure options. Grids are created with methods of the
-following form:
-
- $canvas->createGrid(x1, y1, x2, y2, ?option, value, option, value, ...?)
-
-The arguments I<x1>, I<y1> give the origin of the grid. I<x2>, and I<y2> give
-the coordinates of the next grid point in their respective directions.
-After the coordinates there may be any number of I<option>-I<value>
-pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options
-for the item.  These same I<option>-I<value> pairs may be
-used in B<itemconfigure> methods to change the item's
-configuration.
-
-The following options are supported for grids:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-lines> =E<gt> I<boolean>
-
-If B<-lines> is set to a true value then lines are drawn for both X and Y
-grids in the style determined by B<-dash>. Otherwise retangular "dots"
-are drawn at each grid point.
-
-=item B<-dash> =E<gt> I<pattern>
-
-=item B<-disableddash> =E<gt> I<pattern>
-
-This option specifies dash patterns for the normal state,
-and the disabled state of a grid item.
-I<pattern> may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetDash>.
-If the dash options are omitted then the default is a solid outline.
-
-=item B<-dashoffset> =E<gt> I<offset>
-
-The starting I<offset> into the pattern provided by the
-B<-dash> option.
-B<-dashoffset> is ignored if there is no B<-dash> pattern.
-
-=item B<-color> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-=item B<-disabledcolor> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-This option specifies the color that should be used to draw the
-outline of the grid in its normal and disabled states.
-I<Color> may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetColor>.
-This option defaults to B<black>.
-If I<color> is undef then no grid will be drawn.
-
-=item B<-stipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-=item B<-disabledstipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-This option specifies stipple patterns that should be used to draw the
-outline of the rectangle in its normal and disabled states.
-I<bitmap> specifies the stipple pattern to use, in any of the
-forms accepted by B<Tk_GetBitmap>.
-If I<bitmap> is an empty string (the default), then the outline is drawn
-in a solid fashion.
-
-=item B<-state> =E<gt> I<state>
-
-Modifies the state of the rectangle item where I<state> may be set to one of:
-normal, disabled, or hidden. Many options can take
-separate specifications in normal and disabled states such that the
-appearance of the item can be different in each state.
-
-=item B<-tags> =E<gt> I<tagList>
-
-Specifies a set of tags to apply to the item.
-I<TagList> consists of a list of tag names, which replace any
-existing tags for the item.
-I<TagList> may be an empty list.
-
-=item B<-updatecommand> =E<gt> I<command>
-
-Specifies a callback that is to be executed every time
-the grid item is updated on the screen.
-
-=item B<-width> =E<gt> I<outlineWidth>
-
-=item B<-disabledwidth> =E<gt> I<outlineWidth>
-
-Specifies the width of the lines drawn by the grid or the size (in both X and Y)
-of the dots, in its normal and disabled states.
-This option defaults to 1.0.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 IMAGE ITEMS
-
-Items of type B<image> are used to display images on a
-canvas.
-Images are created with methods of the following form:
-
- $canvas->createImage(x, y, ?option, value, option, value, ...?)
-
-The arguments I<x> and I<y> specify the coordinates of a
-point used to position the image on the display (see the B<-anchor>
-option below for more information).
-After the coordinates there may be any number of I<option>-I<value>
-pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options
-for the item.  These same I<option>-I<value> pairs may be
-used in B<itemconfigure> methods to change the item's
-configuration.
-The following options are supported for images:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-anchor> =E<gt> I<anchorPos>
-
-I<AnchorPos> tells how to position the image relative to the
-positioning point for the item;  it may have any of the forms
-accepted by B<Tk_GetAnchor>.  For example, if I<anchorPos>
-is B<center> then the image is centered on the point;  if
-I<anchorPos> is B<n> then the image will be drawn so that
-its top center point is at the positioning point.
-This option defaults to B<center>.
-
-=item B<-image> =E<gt> I<name>
-
-=item B<-activeimage> =E<gt> I<name>
-
-=item B<-disabledimage> =E<gt> I<name>
-
-Specifies the name of the images to display in the item in is normal,
-active and disabled states. This image must have been created
-previously, see L<Tk::Image>.
-
-=item B<-state> =E<gt> I<state>
-
-Modifies the state of the image item where I<state> may be set to one of:
-normal, disabled, or hidden.  An image item may also be in the "active"
-state if the mouse is currently over it.  Many options can take
-separate specifications in normal, active and disabled states such that the
-appearance of the item can be different in each state.
-
-=item B<-tags> =E<gt> I<tagList>
-
-Specifies a set of tags to apply to the item.
-I<TagList> consists of a list of tag names, which replace any
-existing tags for the item;  it may be an empty list.
-
-=item B<-updatecommand> =E<gt> I<command>
-
-Specifies a callback that is to be executed every time
-the image item is updated on the screen.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 LINE ITEMS
-
-Items of type B<line> appear on the display as one or more connected
-line segments or curves.
-Line items support coordinate indexing operations using the canvas
-methods: B<dchars, index, insert.>
-Lines are created with methods of the following form:
-
- $canvas->createLine(x1, y1..., xn, yn, ?option, value, option, value, ...?)
-
-The arguments I<x1> through I<yn> give
-the coordinates for a series of two or more points that describe
-a series of connected line segments.
-After the coordinates there may be any number of I<option>-I<value>
-pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options
-for the item.  These same I<option>-I<value> pairs may be
-used in B<itemconfigure> methods to change the item's
-configuration.
-The following options are supported for lines:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-arrow> =E<gt> I<where>
-
-Indicates whether or not arrowheads are to be drawn at one or both
-ends of the line.
-I<Where> must have one of the values B<none> (for no arrowheads),
-B<first> (for an arrowhead at the first point of the line),
-B<last> (for an arrowhead at the last point of the line), or
-B<both> (for arrowheads at both ends).
-This option defaults to B<none>.
-
-=item B<-arrowshape> =E<gt> I<shape>
-
-This option indicates how to draw arrowheads.
-The I<shape> argument must be a list with three elements, each
-specifying a distance in any of the forms described in
-the L<"COORDINATES"> section above.
-The first element of the list gives the distance along the line
-from the neck of the arrowhead to its tip.
-The second element gives the distance along the line from the
-trailing points of the arrowhead to the tip, and the third
-element gives the distance from the outside edge of the line to the
-trailing points.
-If this option isn't specified then Tk picks a ``reasonable'' shape.
-
-=item B<-capstyle> =E<gt> I<style>
-
-Specifies the ways in which caps are to be drawn at the endpoints
-of the line.
-I<Style> may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetCapStyle>
-(B<butt>, B<projecting>, or B<round>).
-If this option isn't specified then it defaults to B<butt>.
-Where arrowheads are drawn the cap style is ignored.
-
-=item B<-dash> =E<gt> I<pattern>
-
-=item B<-activedash> =E<gt> I<pattern>
-
-=item B<-disableddash> =E<gt> I<pattern>
-
-This option specifies dash patterns for the normal state, the active
-state, and the disabled state of a line item.
-I<pattern> may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetDash>.
-If the dash options are omitted then the default is a solid outline.
-
-=item B<-dashoffset> =E<gt> I<offset>
-
-The starting I<offset> into the pattern provided by the
-B<-dash> option.
-B<-dashoffset> is ignored if there is no B<-dash> pattern.
-
-=item B<-fill> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-=item B<-activefill> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-=item B<-disabledfill> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-Specifies the color to be used to fill the line in its normal, active, and
-disabled states.
-I<Color> may have
-any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetColor>.  It may also be undef,
-in which case the line will be transparent.
-This option defaults to B<black>.
-
-=item B<-joinstyle> =E<gt> I<style>
-
-Specifies the ways in which joints are to be drawn at the vertices
-of the line.
-I<Style> may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetCapStyle>
-(B<bevel>, B<miter>, or B<round>).
-If this option isn't specified then it defaults to B<miter>.
-If the line only contains two points then this option is
-irrelevant.
-
-=item B<-smooth> =E<gt> I<boolean>
-
-I<Boolean> must have one of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetBoolean>.
-It indicates whether or not the line should be drawn as a curve.
-If so, the line is rendered as a set of parabolic splines: one spline
-is drawn for the first and second line segments, one for the second
-and third, and so on.  Straight-line segments can be generated within
-a curve by duplicating the end-points of the desired line segment.
-
-=item B<-splinesteps> =E<gt> I<number>
-
-Specifies the degree of smoothness desired for curves:  each spline
-will be approximated with I<number> line segments.  This
-option is ignored unless the B<-smooth> option is true.
-
-=item B<-state> =E<gt> I<state>
-
-Modifies the state of the line item where I<state> may be set to one of:
-normal, disabled, or hidden.  A line item may also be in the "active"
-state if the mouse is currently over it.  Many options can take
-separate specifications in normal, active and disabled states such that the
-appearance of the item can be different in each state.
-
-=item B<-stipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-=item B<-activestipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-=item B<-disabledstipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-This option specifies stipple patterns that should be used to fill the
-the line in its normal, active and disabled states.
-I<bitmap> specifies the stipple pattern to use, in any of the
-forms accepted by B<Tk_GetBitmap>.
-If I<bitmap> is an empty string (the default), then filling is
-done in a solid fashion.
-
-=item B<-tags> =E<gt> I<tagList>
-
-Specifies a set of tags to apply to the item.
-I<TagList> consists of a list of tag names, which replace any
-existing tags for the item.
-I<TagList> may be an empty list.
-
-=item B<-updatecommand> =E<gt> I<command>
-
-Specifies a callback that is to be executed every time
-the line item is updated on the screen.
-
-=item B<-width> =E<gt> I<lineWidth>
-
-=item B<-activewidth> =E<gt> I<lineWidth>
-
-=item B<-disabledwidth> =E<gt> I<lineWidth>
-
-Specifies the width of the line
-in its normal, active and disabled states.
-I<lineWidth> may be in any of the forms
-described in the L<"COORDINATES"> section above.
-
-Wide lines will be drawn centered on the path specified by the
-points.
-If this option isn't specified then it defaults to 1.0.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 OVAL ITEMS
-
-Items of type B<oval> appear as circular or oval regions on
-the display.  Each oval may have an outline, a fill, or
-both.  Ovals are created with methods of the
-following form:
-
- $canvas->createOval(x1, y1, x2, y2, ?option, value, option, value, ...?)
-
-The arguments I<x1>, I<y1>, I<x2>, and I<y2> give
-the coordinates of two diagonally opposite corners of a
-rectangular region enclosing the oval.
-The oval will include the top and left edges of the rectangle
-not the lower or right edges.
-If the region is square then the resulting oval is circular;
-otherwise it is elongated in shape.
-After the coordinates there may be any number of I<option>-I<value>
-pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options
-for the item.  These same I<option>-I<value> pairs may be
-used in B<itemconfigure> methods to change the item's
-configuration.
-The following options are supported for ovals:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-dash> =E<gt> I<pattern>
-
-=item B<-activedash> =E<gt> I<pattern>
-
-=item B<-disableddash> =E<gt> I<pattern>
-
-This option specifies dash patterns for the normal state, the active
-state, and the disabled state of an oval item.
-I<pattern> may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetDash>.
-If the dash options are omitted then the default is a solid outline.
-
-=item B<-dashoffset> =E<gt> I<offset>
-
-The starting I<offset> into the pattern provided by the
-B<-dash> option.
-B<-dashoffset> is ignored if there is no B<-dash> pattern.
-
-=item B<-fill> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-=item B<-activefill> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-=item B<-disabledfill> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-Specifies the color to be used to fill the oval in its normal, active, and
-disabled states.
-I<Color> may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetColor>.
-If I<color> is undef (the default), then
-then the oval will not be filled.
-
-=item B<-outline> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-=item B<-activeoutline> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-=item B<-disabledoutline> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-This option specifies the color that should be used to draw the
-outline of the oval in its normal, active and disabled states.
-I<Color> may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetColor>.
-This option defaults to B<black>.
-If I<color> is undef then no outline will be
-drawn for the oval.
-
-=item B<-outlinestipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-=item B<-activeoutlinestipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-=item B<-disabledoutlinestipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-This option specifies stipple patterns that should be used to draw the
-outline of the oval in its normal, active and disabled states.
-I<bitmap> specifies the stipple pattern to use, in any of the
-forms accepted by B<Tk_GetBitmap>.
-If the B<-outline> option hasn't been specified then this option
-has no effect.
-If I<bitmap> is an empty string (the default), then the outline is drawn
-in a solid fashion.
-
-=item B<-state> =E<gt> I<state>
-
-Modifies the state of the oval item where I<state> may be set to one of:
-normal, disabled, or hidden.  An oval item may also be in the "active"
-state if the mouse is currently over it.  Many options can take
-separate specifications in normal, active and disabled states such that the
-appearance of the item can be different in each state.
-
-=item B<-stipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-=item B<-activestipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-=item B<-disabledstipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-This option specifies stipple patterns that should be used to fill the
-the oval in its normal, active and disabled states.
-I<bitmap> specifies the stipple pattern to use, in any of the
-forms accepted by B<Tk_GetBitmap>.
-If the B<-fill> option hasn't been specified then this option
-has no effect.
-If I<bitmap> is an empty string (the default), then filling is done
-in a solid fashion.
-
-=item B<-tags> =E<gt> I<tagList>
-
-Specifies a set of tags to apply to the item.
-I<TagList> consists of a list of tag names, which replace any
-existing tags for the item.
-I<TagList> may be an empty list.
-
-=item B<-updatecommand> =E<gt> I<command>
-
-Specifies a callback that is to be executed every time
-the oval item is updated on the screen.
-
-=item B<-width> =E<gt> I<outlineWidth>
-
-=item B<-activewidth> =E<gt> I<outlineWidth>
-
-=item B<-disabledwidth> =E<gt> I<outlineWidth>
-
-Specifies the width of the outline to be drawn around
-the oval, in its normal, active and disabled states.
-I<outlineWidth> specifies the width of the outline to be drawn around
-the oval, in any of the forms described in the L<"COORDINATES"> section above.
-
-If the B<-outline> option hasn't been specified then this option
-has no effect.
-Wide outlines are drawn centered on the oval path defined by
-I<x1>, I<y1>, I<x2>, and I<y2>.
-This option defaults to 1.0.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 POLYGON ITEMS
-
-Items of type B<polygon> appear as polygonal or curved filled regions
-on the display.
-Polygon items support coordinate indexing operations using the canvas
-methods: B<dchars, index, insert.>
-Polygons are created with methods of the following form:
-
- $canvas->createPolygon(x1, y1, ..., xn, yn, ?option, value, option, value, ...?)
-
-The arguments I<x1> through I<yn> specify the coordinates for
-three or more points that define a closed polygon.
-The first and last points may be the same;  whether they are or not,
-Tk will draw the polygon as a closed polygon.
-After the coordinates there may be any number of I<option>-I<value>
-pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options
-for the item.  These same I<option>-I<value> pairs may be
-used in B<itemconfigure> methods to change the item's
-configuration.
-The following options are supported for polygons:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-dash> =E<gt> I<pattern>
-
-=item B<-activedash> =E<gt> I<pattern>
-
-=item B<-disableddash> =E<gt> I<pattern>
-
-This option specifies dash patterns for the normal state, the active
-state, and the disabled state of an polygon item.
-I<pattern> may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetDash>.
-If the dash options are omitted then the default is a solid outline.
-
-=item B<-dashoffset> =E<gt> I<offset>
-
-The starting I<offset> into the pattern provided by the
-B<-dash> option.
-B<-dashoffset> is ignored if there is no B<-dash> pattern.
-
-=item B<-fill> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-=item B<-activefill> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-=item B<-disabledfill> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-Specifies the color to be used to fill the polygon in its normal, active, and
-disabled states.
-I<Color>
-may have any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetColor>.
-If I<color> is undef then the polygon will be
-transparent.
-This option defaults to B<black>.
-
-=item B<-joinstyle> =E<gt> I<style>
-
-Specifies the ways in which joints are to be drawn at the vertices
-of the outline.
-I<Style> may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetCapStyle>
-(B<bevel>, B<miter>, or B<round>).
-If this option isn't specified then it defaults to B<miter>.
-
-=item B<-outline> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-=item B<-activeoutline> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-=item B<-disabledoutline> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-This option specifies the color that should be used to draw the
-outline of the polygon in its normal, active and disabled states.
-I<Color> may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetColor>.
-If I<color> is undef then no outline will be
-drawn for the polygon.
-This option defaults to undef (no outline).
-
-=item B<-outlinestipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-=item B<-activeoutlinestipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-=item B<-disabledoutlinestipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-This option specifies stipple patterns that should be used to draw the
-outline of the polygon in its normal, active and disabled states.
-I<bitmap> specifies the stipple pattern to use, in any of the
-forms accepted by B<Tk_GetBitmap>.
-If the B<-outline> option hasn't been specified then this option
-has no effect.
-If I<bitmap> is an empty string (the default), then the outline is drawn
-in a solid fashion.
-
-=item B<-smooth> =E<gt> I<boolean>
-
-I<Boolean> must have one of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetBoolean>
-It indicates whether or not the polygon should be drawn with a
-curved perimeter.
-If so, the outline of the polygon becomes a set of parabolic splines,
-one spline for the first and second line segments, one for the second
-and third, and so on.  Straight-line segments can be generated in a
-smoothed polygon by duplicating the end-points of the desired line segment.
-
-=item B<-splinesteps> =E<gt> I<number>
-
-Specifies the degree of smoothness desired for curves:  each spline
-will be approximated with I<number> line segments.  This
-option is ignored unless the B<-smooth> option is true.
-
-=item B<-state> =E<gt> I<state>
-
-Modifies the state of the polygon item where I<state> may be set to one of:
-normal, disabled, or hidden.  A polygon item may also be in the "active"
-state if the mouse is currently over it.  Many options can take
-separate specifications in normal, active and disabled states such that the
-appearance of the item can be different in each state.
-
-=item B<-stipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-=item B<-activestipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-=item B<-disabledstipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-This option specifies stipple patterns that should be used to fill the
-the polygon in its normal, active and disabled states.
-I<bitmap> specifies the stipple pattern to use, in any of the
-forms accepted by B<Tk_GetBitmap>.
-If I<bitmap> is an empty string (the default), then filling is
-done in a solid fashion.
-
-=item B<-tags> =E<gt> I<tagList>
-
-Specifies a set of tags to apply to the item.
-I<TagList> consists of a list of tag names, which replace any
-existing tags for the item.
-I<TagList> may be an empty list.
-
-=item B<-updatecommand> =E<gt> I<command>
-
-Specifies a callback that is to be executed every time
-the polygon item is updated on the screen.
-
-=item B<-width> =E<gt> I<outlineWidth>
-
-=item B<-activewidth> =E<gt> I<outlineWidth>
-
-=item B<-disabledwidth> =E<gt> I<outlineWidth>
-
-=item Specifies the width of the outline to be drawn around
-
-the polygon, in its normal, active and disabled states.
-I<outlineWidth> may be in any of the forms described in the COORDINATES
-section above.
-I<OutlineWidth> specifies the width of the outline to be drawn around
-the polygon, in any of the forms described in the L<"COORDINATES"> section above.
-If the B<-outline> option hasn't been specified then this option
-has no effect.  This option defaults to 1.0.
-
-Polygon items are different from other items such as rectangles, ovals
-and arcs in that interior points are considered to be ``inside'' a
-polygon (e.g. for purposes of the B<find closest> and
-B<find overlapping> methods) even if it is not filled.
-For most other item types, an
-interior point is considered to be inside the item only if the item
-is filled or if it has neither a fill nor an outline.  If you would
-like an unfilled polygon whose interior points are not considered
-to be inside the polygon, use a line item instead.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 RECTANGLE ITEMS
-
-Items of type B<rectangle> appear as rectangular regions on
-the display.  Each rectangle may have an outline, a fill, or
-both.  Rectangles are created with methods of the
-following form:
-
- $canvas->createRectangle(x1, y1, x2, y2, ?option, value, option, value, ...?)
-
-The arguments I<x1>, I<y1>, I<x2>, and I<y2> give
-the coordinates of two diagonally opposite corners of the rectangle
-(the rectangle will include its upper and left edges but not
-its lower or right edges).
-After the coordinates there may be any number of I<option>-I<value>
-pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options
-for the item.  These same I<option>-I<value> pairs may be
-used in B<itemconfigure> methods to change the item's
-configuration.
-The following options are supported for rectangles:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-dash> =E<gt> I<pattern>
-
-=item B<-activedash> =E<gt> I<pattern>
-
-=item B<-disableddash> =E<gt> I<pattern>
-
-This option specifies dash patterns for the normal state, the active
-state, and the disabled state of a rectangle item.
-I<pattern> may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetDash>.
-If the dash options are omitted then the default is a solid outline.
-
-=item B<-dashoffset> =E<gt> I<offset>
-
-The starting I<offset> into the pattern provided by the
-B<-dash> option.
-B<-dashoffset> is ignored if there is no B<-dash> pattern.
-
-=item B<-fill> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-=item B<-activefill> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-=item B<-disabledfill> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-Specifies the color to be used to fill the rectangle in its normal, active, and
-disabled states.
-I<Color>
-may be specified in any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetColor>.
-If I<color> is undef (the default),
-then the rectangle will not be filled.
-
-=item B<-outline> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-=item B<-activeoutline> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-=item B<-disabledoutline> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-This option specifies the color that should be used to draw the
-outline of the rectangle in its normal, active and disabled states.
-I<Color> may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetColor>.
-This option defaults to B<black>.
-If I<color> is undef then no outline will be
-drawn for the rectangle.
-
-=item B<-outlinestipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-=item B<-activeoutlinestipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-=item B<-disabledoutlinestipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-This option specifies stipple patterns that should be used to draw the
-outline of the rectangle in its normal, active and disabled states.
-I<bitmap> specifies the stipple pattern to use, in any of the
-forms accepted by B<Tk_GetBitmap>.
-If the B<-outline> option hasn't been specified then this option
-has no effect.
-If I<bitmap> is an empty string (the default), then the outline is drawn
-in a solid fashion.
-
-=item B<-state> =E<gt> I<state>
-
-Modifies the state of the rectangle item where I<state> may be set to one of:
-normal, disabled, or hidden.  A rectangle item may also be in the "active"
-state if the mouse is currently over it.  Many options can take
-separate specifications in normal, active and disabled states such that the
-appearance of the item can be different in each state.
-
-=item B<-stipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-=item B<-activestipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-=item B<-disabledstipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-This option specifies stipple patterns that should be used to fill the
-the rectangle in its normal, active and disabled states.
-I<bitmap> specifies the stipple pattern to use, in any of the
-forms accepted by B<Tk_GetBitmap>.
-If the B<-fill> option hasn't been specified then this option
-has no effect.
-If I<bitmap> is an empty string (the default), then filling
-is done in a solid fashion.
-
-=item B<-tags> =E<gt> I<tagList>
-
-Specifies a set of tags to apply to the item.
-I<TagList> consists of a list of tag names, which replace any
-existing tags for the item.
-I<TagList> may be an empty list.
-
-=item B<-updatecommand> =E<gt> I<command>
-
-Specifies a callback that is to be executed every time
-the rectangle item is updated on the screen.
-
-=item B<-width> =E<gt> I<outlineWidth>
-
-=item B<-activewidth> =E<gt> I<outlineWidth>
-
-=item B<-disabledwidth> =E<gt> I<outlineWidth>
-
-Specifies the width of the outline to be drawn around
-the rectangle, in its normal, active and disabled states.
-I<OutlineWidth> specifies the width of the outline to be drawn around
-the rectangle, in any of the forms described in the L<"COORDINATES"> section above.
-
-If the B<-outline> option hasn't been specified then this option
-has no effect.
-Wide outlines are drawn centered on the rectangular path
-defined by I<x1>, I<y1>, I<x2>, and I<y2>.
-This option defaults to 1.0.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 TEXT ITEMS
-
-A text item displays a string of characters on the screen in one
-or more lines.
-Text items support indexing and selection, along with the
-following text-related canvas methods:  B<dchars>,
-B<focus>, B<icursor>, B<index>, B<insert>,
-B<select>.
-Text items are created with methods of the following
-form:
-
- $canvas->createText(x, y, ?option, value, option, value, ...?)
-
-The arguments I<x> and I<y> specify the coordinates of a
-point used to position the text on the display (see the options
-below for more information on how text is displayed).
-After the coordinates there may be any number of I<option>-I<value>
-pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options
-for the item.  These same I<option>-I<value> pairs may be
-used in B<itemconfigure> methods to change the item's
-configuration.
-The following options are supported for text items:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-anchor> =E<gt> I<anchorPos>
-
-I<AnchorPos> tells how to position the text relative to the
-positioning point for the text;  it may have any of the forms
-accepted by B<Tk_GetAnchor>.  For example, if I<anchorPos>
-is B<center> then the text is centered on the point;  if
-I<anchorPos> is B<n> then the text will be drawn such that
-the top center point of the rectangular region occupied by the
-text will be at the positioning point.
-This option defaults to B<center>.
-
-=item B<-fill> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-=item B<-activefill> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-=item B<-disabledfill> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-Specifies the color to be used to fill the text in its normal, active, and
-disabled states.
-I<Color> may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetColor>.
-If I<color> is undef then the text will be transparent.
-If this option isn't specified then it defaults to B<black>.
-
-=item B<-font> =E<gt> I<fontName>
-
-Specifies the font to use for the text item.
-I<FontName> may be any string acceptable to B<Tk_GetFontStruct>.
-If this option isn't specified, it defaults to a system-dependent
-font.
-
-=item B<-justify> =E<gt> I<how>
-
-Specifies how to justify the text within its bounding region.
-I<How> must be one of the values B<left>, B<right>,
-or B<center>.
-This option will only matter if the text is displayed as multiple
-lines.
-If the option is omitted, it defaults to B<left>.
-
-=item B<-state> =E<gt> I<state>
-
-Modifies the state of the text item where I<state> may be set to one of:
-normal, disabled, or hidden.  A text item may also be in the "active"
-state if the mouse is currently over it.  Many options can take
-separate specifications in normal, active and disabled states such that the
-appearance of the item can be different in each state.
-
-=item B<-stipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-=item B<-activestipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-=item B<-disabledstipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-This option specifies stipple patterns that should be used to fill the
-the text in its normal, active and disabled states.
-I<bitmap> specifies the stipple pattern to use, in any of the
-forms accepted by B<Tk_GetBitmap>.
-If I<bitmap> is an empty string (the default) then the text
-is drawn in a solid fashion.
-
-=item B<-tags> =E<gt> I<tagList>
-
-Specifies a set of tags to apply to the item.
-I<TagList> consists of a list of tag names, which replace any
-existing tags for the item.
-I<TagList> may be an empty list.
-
-=item B<-text> =E<gt> I<string>
-
-I<String> specifies the characters to be displayed in the text item.
-Newline characters cause line breaks.
-The characters in the item may also be changed with the
-B<insert> and B<delete> methods.
-This option defaults to an empty string.
-
-=item B<-updatecommand> =E<gt> I<command>
-
-Specifies a callback that is to be executed every time
-the text item is updated on the screen.
-
-=item B<-width> =E<gt> I<lineLength>
-
-Specifies a maximum line length for the text, in any of the forms
-described in the L<"COORDINATES"> section above.
-If this option is zero (the default) the text is broken into
-lines only at newline characters.
-However, if this option is non-zero then any line that would
-be longer than I<lineLength> is broken just before a space
-character to make the line shorter than I<lineLength>;  the
-space character is treated as if it were a newline
-character.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 WINDOW ITEMS
-
-Items of type B<window> cause a particular window to be displayed
-at a given position on the canvas.
-Window items are created with methods of the following form:
-
-S<    >I<$canvas>->B<createWindow>(I<x, y>?, I<-option>=>I<value>, I<-option>=>I<value>, ...?)
-
-The arguments I<x> and I<y> specify the coordinates of a
-point used to position the window on the display (see the B<-anchor>
-option below for more information on how bitmaps are displayed).
-After the coordinates there may be any number of I<option-value>
-pairs, each of which sets one of the configuration options
-for the item.  These same I<option>-I<value> pairs may be
-used in B<itemconfigure> method to change the item's
-configuration.
-The following options are supported for window items:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-anchor> =E<gt> I<anchorPos>
-
-I<AnchorPos> tells how to position the window relative to the
-positioning point for the item;  it may have any of the forms
-accepted by B<Tk_GetAnchor>.  For example, if I<anchorPos>
-is B<center> then the window is centered on the point;  if
-I<anchorPos> is B<n> then the window will be drawn so that
-its top center point is at the positioning point.
-This option defaults to B<center>.
-
-=item B<-height> =E<gt> I<pixels>
-
-Specifies the height to assign to the item's window.
-I<Pixels> may have any of the
-forms described in the L<"COORDINATES"> section above.
-If this option isn't specified, or if it is specified as an empty
-string, then the window is given whatever height it requests internally.
-
-=item B<-state> =E<gt> I<state>
-
-Modifies the state of the window item where I<state> may be set to one of:
-normal, disabled, or hidden.
-
-=item B<-tags> =E<gt> I<tagList>
-
-Specifies a set of tags to apply to the item.
-I<TagList> consists of a list of tag names, which replace any
-existing tags for the item.
-I<TagList> may be an empty list.
-
-=item B<-updatecommand> =E<gt> I<command>
-
-Specifies a callback that is to be executed every time
-the window item is updated on the screen.
-
-=item B<-width> =E<gt> I<pixels>
-
-Specifies the width to assign to the item's window.
-I<Pixels> may have any of the
-forms described in the L<"COORDINATES"> section above.
-If this option isn't specified, or if it is specified as an empty
-string, then the window is given whatever width it requests internally.
-
-=item B<-window> =E<gt> I<$widget>
-
-Specifies the window to associate with this item.
-The window specified by $widget must either be a child of
-the canvas widget or a child of some ancestor of the canvas widget.
-I<PathName> may not refer to a top-level window.
-
-Note:  due to restrictions in the ways that windows are managed, it is not
-possible to draw other graphical items (such as lines and images) on top
-of window items.  A window item always obscures any graphics that
-overlap it, regardless of their order in the display list.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 APPLICATION-DEFINED ITEM TYPES
-
-It is possible for individual applications to define new item
-types for canvas widgets using C code.
-See the documentation for B<Tk_CreateItemType>.
-
-=head1 BINDINGS
-
-Canvas has default bindings to allow scrolling if necessary:
-<Up>, <Down>, <Left> and <Right> (and their <Control-*> counter
-parts).  Further <Proir>, <Next>, <Home> and <End>.  These
-bindings allow you to navigate the same way as in other
-widgets that can scroll.
-
-=head1 Perl/Tk Methods
-
-The following methods are added as perl code:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item $canvas->get_corners
-
-Returns the bounding box in Canvas coordinates of the visible portion
-of the Canvas. (Written by Slaven Rezic.)
-
-=back
-
-=head1 CREDITS
-
-Tk's canvas widget is a blatant ripoff of ideas from Joel Bartlett's
-I<ezd> program.  I<Ezd> provides structured graphics in a Scheme
-environment and preceded canvases by a year or two.  Its simple
-mechanisms for placing and animating graphical objects inspired the
-functions of canvases.
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-canvas, widget
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Checkbutton.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Checkbutton.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 35c4fa8ffbc..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Checkbutton.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,347 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Checkbutton - Create and manipulate Checkbutton widgets
-
-=for category  Tk Widget Classes
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-I<$checkbutton> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<Checkbutton>(?I<options>?);
-
-=head1 STANDARD OPTIONS
-
-B<-activebackground>
-B<-activeforeground>
-B<-anchor>
-B<-background>
-B<-bitmap>
-B<-borderwidth>
-B<-compound>
-B<-cursor>
-B<-disabledforeground>
-B<-font>
-B<-foreground>
-B<-highlightbackground>
-B<-highlightcolor>
-B<-highlightthickness>
-B<-image>
-B<-justify>
-B<-padx>
-B<-pady>
-B<-relief>
-B<-takefocus>
-B<-text>
-B<-textvariable>
-B<-underline>
-B<-wraplength>
-	
-See L<Tk::options> for details of the standard options.
-
-=head1 WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Name:	B<command>
-
-=item Class:	B<Command>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-command>
-
-Specifies a L<perl/Tk callback|Tk::callbacks> to associate with the button.  This command
-is typically invoked when mouse button 1 is released over the button
-window.  The button's global variable (B<-variable> option) will
-be updated before the command is invoked.
-
-=item Name:	B<height>
-
-=item Class:	B<Height>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-height>
-
-Specifies a desired height for the button.
-If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the button then the value is in
-screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>);
-for text it is in lines of text.
-If this option isn't specified, the button's desired height is computed
-from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
-
-=item Name:	B<indicatorOn>
-
-=item Class:	B<IndicatorOn>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-indicatoron>
-
-Specifies whether or not the indicator should be drawn.  Must be a
-proper boolean value.  If false, the B<relief> option is
-ignored and the widget's relief is always sunken if the widget is
-selected and raised otherwise.
-
-=item Command-Line Name: B<-offrelief>
-
-=item Database Name:  B<offRelief>
-
-=item Database Class: B<OffRelief>
-
-Specifies the relief for the checkbutton when the indicator is not
-drawn and the checkbutton is off.  The default value is B<raised>.  By
-setting this option to B<flat> and setting
-B<-indicatoron false -overrelief raised>, the effect is achieved of
-having a flat button
-that raises on mouse-over and which is depressed when activated.  This
-is the behavior typically exhibited by the Bold, Italic, and
-Underline checkbuttons on the toolbar of a word-processor, for
-example.
-
-=item Name:	B<offValue>
-
-=item Class:	B<Value>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-offvalue>
-
-Specifies value to store in the button's associated variable whenever
-this button is deselected.  Defaults to ``0''.
-
-=item Name:	B<onValue>
-
-=item Class:	B<Value>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-onvalue>
-
-Specifies value to store in the button's associated variable whenever
-this button is selected.  Defaults to ``1''.
-
-=item Command-Line Name: B<-overrelief>
-
-=item Database Name:  B<overRelief>
-
-=item Database Class: B<OverRelief>
-
-Specifies  an alternative relief for the button, to be used when
-the mouse cursor is over the widget.  This option can be used to
-make  toolbar  buttons,  by configuring B<-relief flat -overrelief
-raised>.  If the value of this option is the empty  string,  then
-no  alternative relief is used when the mouse cursor is over the
-button.  The empty string is the default value.
-
-=item Name:	B<selectColor>
-
-=item Class:	B<Background>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-selectcolor>
-
-Specifies a background color to use when the button is selected.
-If B<indicatorOn> is true then the color applies to the indicator.
-Under Windows, this color is used as the background for the indicator
-regardless of the select state.
-If B<indicatorOn> is false, this color is used as the background
-for the entire widget, in place of B<background> or B<activeBackground>,
-whenever the widget is selected.
-If specified as an empty string then no special color is used for
-displaying when the widget is selected.
-
-=item Name:	B<selectImage>
-
-=item Class:	B<SelectImage>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-selectimage>
-
-Specifies an image to display (in place of the B<image> option)
-when the checkbutton is selected.
-This option is ignored unless the B<image> option has been
-specified.
-
-=item Name:	B<state>
-
-=item Class:	B<State>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-state>
-
-Specifies one of three states for the checkbutton:  B<normal>, B<active>,
-or B<disabled>.  In normal state the checkbutton is displayed using the
-B<foreground> and B<background> options.  The active state is
-typically used when the pointer is over the checkbutton.  In active state
-the checkbutton is displayed using the B<activeForeground> and
-B<activeBackground> options.  Disabled state means that the checkbutton
-should be insensitive:  the default bindings will refuse to activate
-the widget and will ignore mouse button presses.
-In this state the B<disabledForeground> and
-B<background> options determine how the checkbutton is displayed.
-
-=item Name:	B<variable>
-
-=item Class:	B<Variable>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-variable>
-
-Specifies reference to a variable to set to indicate whether
-or not this button is selected.  Defaults to C<\$widget-E<gt>{'Value'}>
-member of the widget's hash. In general perl variables are C<undef> unless
-specifically initialized which will not match either default B<-onvalue> or
-default B<-offvalue>.
-
-=item Name:	B<width>
-
-=item Class:	B<Width>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-width>
-
-Specifies a desired width for the button.
-If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the button then the value is in
-screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>);
-for text it is in characters.
-If this option isn't specified, the button's desired width is computed
-from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<Checkbutton> method creates a new window (given by the
-$widget argument) and makes it into a checkbutton widget.
-Additional
-options, described above, may be specified on the command line
-or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the checkbutton such as its colors, font,
-text, and initial relief.  The B<checkbutton> command returns its
-$widget argument.  At the time this command is invoked,
-there must not exist a window named $widget, but
-$widget's parent must exist.
-
-A checkbutton is a widget
-that displays a textual string, bitmap or image
-and a square called an I<indicator>.
-If text is displayed, it must all be in a single font, but it
-can occupy multiple lines on the screen (if it contains newlines
-or if wrapping occurs because of the B<wrapLength> option) and
-one of the characters may optionally be underlined using the
-B<underline> option.
-A checkbutton has
-all of the behavior of a simple button, including the
-following: it can display itself in either of three different
-ways, according to the B<state> option;
-it can be made to appear
-raised, sunken, or flat; it can be made to flash; and it invokes
-a L<perl/Tk callback|Tk::callbacks> whenever mouse button 1 is clicked over the
-checkbutton.
-
-In addition, checkbuttons can be I<selected>.
-If a checkbutton is selected then the indicator is normally
-drawn with a selected appearance, and
-a Tcl variable associated with the checkbutton is set to a particular
-value (normally 1).
-Under Unix, the indicator is drawn with a sunken relief and a special
-color.  Under Windows, the indicator is drawn with a check mark inside.
-If the checkbutton is not selected, then the indicator is drawn with a
-deselected appearance, and the associated variable is
-set to a different value (typically 0).
-Under Unix, the indicator is drawn with a raised relief and no special
-color.  Under Windows, the indicator is drawn without a check mark inside.
-By default, the name of the variable associated with a checkbutton is the
-same as the I<name> used to create the checkbutton.
-The variable name, and the ``on'' and ``off'' values stored in it,
-may be modified with options on the command line or in the option
-database.
-Configuration options may also be used to modify the way the
-indicator is displayed (or whether it is displayed at all).
-By default a checkbutton is configured to select and deselect
-itself on alternate button clicks.
-In addition, each checkbutton monitors its associated variable and
-automatically selects and deselects itself when the variables value
-changes to and from the button's ``on'' value.
-
-=head1 WIDGET METHODS
-
-The B<Checkbutton> method creates a widget object.
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-The widget also inherits all the methods provided by the generic
-L<Tk::Widget|Tk::Widget> class.
-
-The following additional methods are available for checkbutton widgets:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$checkbutton>-E<gt>B<deselect>
-
-Deselects the checkbutton and sets the associated variable to its ``off''
-value.
-
-=item I<$checkbutton>-E<gt>B<flash>
-
-Flashes the checkbutton.  This is accomplished by redisplaying the checkbutton
-several times, alternating between active and normal colors.  At
-the end of the flash the checkbutton is left in the same normal/active
-state as when the command was invoked.
-This command is ignored if the checkbutton's state is B<disabled>.
-
-=item I<$checkbutton>-E<gt>B<invoke>
-
-Does just what would have happened if the user invoked the checkbutton
-with the mouse: toggle the selection state of the button and invoke
-the L<perl/Tk callback|Tk::callbacks> associated with the checkbutton, if there is one.
-The return value is the return value from the L<perl/Tk callback|Tk::callbacks>, or an
-empty string if there is no command associated with the checkbutton.
-This command is ignored if the checkbutton's state is B<disabled>.
-
-=item I<$checkbutton>-E<gt>B<select>
-
-Selects the checkbutton and sets the associated variable to its ``on''
-value.
-
-=item I<$checkbutton>-E<gt>B<toggle>
-
-Toggles the selection state of the button, redisplaying it and
-modifying its associated variable to reflect the new state.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 BINDINGS
-
-Tk automatically creates class bindings for checkbuttons that give them
-the following default behavior:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item [1]
-
-On Unix systems, a checkbutton activates whenever the mouse passes
-over it and deactivates whenever the mouse leaves the checkbutton.  On
-Mac and Windows systems, when mouse button 1 is pressed over a
-checkbutton, the button activates whenever the mouse pointer is inside
-the button, and deactivates whenever the mouse pointer leaves the
-button.
-
-=item [2]
-
-When mouse button 1 is pressed over a checkbutton, it is invoked (its
-selection state toggles and the command associated with the button is
-invoked, if there is one).
-
-=item [3]
-
-When a checkbutton has the input focus, the space key causes the checkbutton
-to be invoked.  Under Windows, there are additional key bindings; plus
-(+) and equal (=) select the button, and minus (-) deselects the button.
-
-If the checkbutton's state is B<disabled> then none of the above
-actions occur:  the checkbutton is completely non-responsive.
-
-The behavior of checkbuttons can be changed by defining new bindings for
-individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-checkbutton, widget
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Clipboard.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Clipboard.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index a65eb37a870..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Clipboard.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,89 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::clipboard - Manipulate Tk clipboard
-
-=for category User Interaction
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-I<$widget>-E<gt>B<clipboard>I<Option>?(I<args>)?
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-This command provides an interface to the Tk clipboard,
-which stores data for later retrieval using the selection mechanism.
-In order to copy data into the clipboard, B<clipboardClear> must
-be called, followed by a sequence of one or more calls to
-B<clipboardAppend>.  To ensure that the clipboard is updated atomically, all
-appends should be completed before returning to the event loop.
-
-The following methods are currently supported:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<clipboardClear>
-
-Claims ownership of the clipboard on I<$widget>'s display and removes
-any previous contents.   Returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<clipboardAppend>(?B<-format>=E<gt>I<format>?,?B<-type>=E<gt>I<type>?,?B<-->?,I<data>)
-
-Appends I<data> to the clipboard on $widget's
-display in the form given by I<type> with the representation given
-by I<format> and claims ownership of the clipboard on $widget's
-display.
-
-=over 4
-
-I<Type> specifies the form in which the selection is to be returned
-(the desired ``target'' for conversion, in ICCCM terminology), and
-should be an atom name such as STRING or FILE_NAME; see the
-Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual for complete details.
-I<Type> defaults to STRING.
-
-The I<format> argument specifies the representation that should be
-used to transmit the selection to the requester (the second column of
-Table 2 of the ICCCM), and defaults to STRING.  If I<format> is
-STRING, the selection is transmitted as 8-bit ASCII characters.
-See the L<Tk::Selection> documentation for explanation of what happens
-if I<format> is not STRING.
-Note that arguments passed to
-B<clipboardAppend> are concatenated before conversion, so the
-caller must take care to ensure appropriate spacing across string
-boundaries.  All items appended to the clipboard with the same
-I<type> must have the same I<format>.
-
-A B<--> argument may be specified to mark the end of options:  the
-next argument will always be used as I<data>.
-This feature may be convenient if, for example, I<data> starts
-with a B<->.
-
-=back
-
-=back
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<clipboardGet>( ?-type? );
-
-Retrieve data from the clipboard on  I<widget>'s  display.
-I<-type> specifies the form in which the data is
-to be returned and should be an atom  name  such  as  STRING  or
-FILE_NAME.  Type defaults to STRING.  This command is equivalent 
-to C<SelectionGet( -selection =E<gt> 'CLIPBOARD' )>.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-clear, format, clipboard, append, selection, type
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/CmdLine.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/CmdLine.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 58b69fded17..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/CmdLine.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,454 +0,0 @@
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::CmdLine - Process standard X11 command line options and set initial resources
-
-=for pm Tk/CmdLine.pm
-
-=for category Creating and Configuring Widgets
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-  Tk::CmdLine::SetArguments([@argument]);
-
-  my $value = Tk::CmdLine::cget([$option]);
-
-  Tk::CmdLine::SetResources((\@resource | $resource) [, $priority]);
-
-  Tk::CmdLine::LoadResources(
-      [ -symbol   => $symbol     ]
-      [ -file     => $fileSpec   ]
-      [ -priority => $priority   ]
-      [ -echo     => $fileHandle ] );
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-Process standard X11 command line options and set initial resources.
-
-The X11R5 man page for X11 says: "Most X programs attempt to use the same names
-for command line options and arguments. All applications written with the
-X Toolkit Intrinsics automatically accept the following options: ...".
-This module processes these command line options for perl/Tk applications
-using the C<SetArguments>() function.
-
-This module can optionally be used to load initial resources explicitly via
-function C<SetResources>(), or from specified files (default: the standard X11
-application-specific resource files) via function C<LoadResources>().
-
-=head2 Command Line Options
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-background> I<Color> | B<-bg> I<Color>
-
-Specifies the color to be used for the window background.
-
-=item B<-class> I<Class>
-
-Specifies the class under which resources for the application should be found.
-This option is useful in shell aliases to distinguish between invocations
-of an application, without resorting to creating links to alter the executable
-file name.
-
-=item B<-display> I<Display> | B<-screen> I<Display>
-
-Specifies the name of the X server to be used.
-
-=item B<-font> I<Font> | B<-fn> I<Font>
-
-Specifies the font to be used for displaying text.
-
-=item B<-foreground> I<Color> | B<-fg> I<Color>
-
-Specifies the color to be used for text or graphics.
-
-=item B<-geometry> I<Geometry>
-
-Specifies the initial size and location of the I<first>
-L<MainWindow|Tk::MainWindow>.
-
-=item B<-iconic>
-
-Indicates that the user would prefer that the application's windows initially
-not be visible as if the windows had been immediately iconified by the user.
-Window managers may choose not to honor the application's request.
-
-=item B<-motif>
-
-Specifies that the application should adhere as closely as possible to Motif
-look-and-feel standards. For example, active elements such as buttons and
-scrollbar sliders will not change color when the pointer passes over them.
-
-=item B<-name> I<Name>
-
-Specifies the name under which resources for the application should be found.
-This option is useful in shell aliases to distinguish between invocations
-of an application, without resorting to creating links to alter the executable
-file name.
-
-=item B<-synchronous>
-
-Indicates that requests to the X server should be sent synchronously, instead of
-asynchronously. Since Xlib normally buffers requests to the server, errors do
-do not necessarily get reported immediately after they occur. This option turns
-off the buffering so that the application can be debugged. It should never
-be used with a working program.
-
-=item B<-title> I<TitleString>
-
-This option specifies the title to be used for this window. This information is
-sometimes used by a window manager to provide some sort of header identifying
-the window.
-
-=item B<-xrm> I<ResourceString>
-
-Specifies a resource pattern and value to override any defaults. It is also
-very useful for setting resources that do not have explicit command line
-arguments.
-
-The I<ResourceString> is of the form E<lt>I<pattern>E<gt>:E<lt>I<value>E<gt>,
-that is (the first) ':' is used to determine which part is pattern and which
-part is value. The (E<lt>I<pattern>E<gt>, E<lt>I<value>E<gt>) pair is entered
-into the options database with B<optionAdd> (for each
-L<MainWindow|Tk::MainWindow> configured), with I<interactive> priority.
-
-=back
-
-=head2 Initial Resources
-
-There are several mechanism for initializing the resource database to be used
-by an X11 application. Resources may be defined in a $C<HOME>/.Xdefaults file,
-a system application defaults file (e.g.
-/usr/lib/X11/app-defaults/E<lt>B<CLASS>E<gt>),
-or a user application defaults file (e.g. $C<HOME>/E<lt>B<CLASS>E<gt>).
-The Tk::CmdLine functionality for setting initial resources concerns itself
-with the latter two.
-
-Resource files contain data lines of the form
-E<lt>I<pattern>E<gt>:E<lt>I<value>E<gt>.
-They may also contain blank lines and comment lines (denoted
-by a ! character as the first non-blank character). Refer to L<option|Tk::option>
-for a description of E<lt>I<pattern>E<gt>:E<lt>I<value>E<gt>.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item System Application Defaults Files
-
-System application defaults files may be specified via environment variable
-$C<XFILESEARCHPATH> which, if set, contains a list of file patterns
-(joined using the OS-dependent path delimiter, e.g. colon on B<UNIX>).
-
-=item User Application Defaults Files
-
-User application defaults files may be specified via environment variables
-$C<XUSERFILESEARCHPATH>, $C<XAPPLRESDIR> or $C<HOME>.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 METHODS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<SetArguments> - Tk::CmdLine::SetArguments([@argument])
-
-Extract the X11 options contained in a specified array (@ARGV by default).
-
-  Tk::CmdLine::SetArguments([@argument])
-
-The X11 options may be specified using a single dash I<-> as per the X11
-convention, or using two dashes I<--> as per the POSIX standard (e.g.
-B<-geometry> I<100x100>, B<-geometry> I<100x100> or B<-geometry=>I<100x100>).
-The options may be interspersed with other options or arguments.
-A I<--> by itself terminates option processing.
-
-By default, command line options are extracted from @ARGV the first time
-a MainWindow is created. The Tk::MainWindow constructor indirectly invokes
-C<SetArguments>() to do this.
-
-=item B<GetArguments> - Tk::CmdLine::GetArguments()
-
-Get a list of the X11 options that have been processed by C<SetArguments>().
-(C<GetArguments>() first invokes C<SetArguments>() if it has not already been invoked.)
-
-=item B<cget> - Tk::CmdLine::cget([$option])
-
-Get the value of a configuration option specified via C<SetArguments>().
-(C<cget>() first invokes C<SetArguments>() if it has not already been invoked.)
-
-  Tk::CmdLine::cget([$option])
-
-The valid options are: B<-class>, B<-name>, B<-screen> and B<-title>.
-If no option is specified, B<-class> is implied.
-
-A typical use of C<cget>() might be to obtain the application class in order
-to define the name of a resource file to be loaded in via C<LoadResources>().
-
-  my $class = Tk::CmdLine::cget(); # process command line and return class
-
-=item B<SetResources> - Tk::CmdLine::SetResources((\@resource | $resource) [, $priority])
-
-Set the initial resources.
-
-  Tk::CmdLine::SetResources((\@resource | $resource) [, $priority])
-
-A single resource may be specified using a string of the form
-'E<lt>I<pattern>E<gt>:E<lt>I<value>E<gt>'. Multiple resources may be specified
-by passing an array reference whose elements are either strings of the above
-form, and/or anonymous arrays of the form [ E<lt>I<pattern>E<gt>,
-E<lt>I<value>E<gt> ]. The optional second argument specifies the priority,
-as defined in L<option|Tk::option>, to be associated with the resources
-(default: I<userDefault>).
-
-Note that C<SetResources>() first invokes C<SetArguments>() if it has not already
-been invoked.
-
-=item B<LoadResources> - Tk::CmdLine::LoadResources([%options])
-
-Load initial resources from one or more files.
-
-  Tk::CmdLine::LoadResources(
-      [ -symbol   => $symbol     ]
-      [ -file     => $fileSpec   ]
-      [ -priority => $priority   ]
-      [ -echo     => $fileHandle ] );
-
-[ B<-symbol> =E<gt> $symbol ] specifies the name of an environment variable
-that, if set, defines a list of one or more directories and/or file patterns
-(joined using the OS-dependent path delimiter, e.g. colon on B<UNIX>).
-$C<XUSERFILESEARCHPATH> is a special case.
-If $C<XUSERFILESEARCHPATH> is not set, $C<XAPPLRESDIR> is checked instead.
-If $C<XAPPLRESDIR> is not set, $C<HOME> is checked instead.
-
-An item is identified as a file pattern if it contains one or more /%[A-Za-z]/
-patterns. Only patterns B<%L>, B<%T> and B<%N> are currently recognized. All
-others are replaced with the null string. Pattern B<%L> is translated into
-$C<LANG>. Pattern B<%T> is translated into I<app-defaults>. Pattern B<%N> is
-translated into the application class name.
-
-Each file pattern, after substitutions are applied, is assumed to define a
-FileSpec to be examined.
-
-When a directory is specified, FileSpecs
-E<lt>B<DIRECTORY>E<gt>/E<lt>B<LANG>E<gt>/E<lt>B<CLASS>E<gt>
-and E<lt>B<DIRECTORY>E<gt>/E<lt>B<CLASS>E<gt> are defined, in that order.
-
-[ B<-file> =E<gt> $fileSpec ] specifies a resource file to be loaded in.
-The file is silently skipped if if does not exist, or if it is not readable.
-
-[ B<-priority> =E<gt> $priority ] specifies the priority, as defined in
-L<option|Tk::option>, to be associated with the resources
-(default: I<userDefault>).
-
-[ B<-echo> =E<gt> $fileHandle ] may be used to specify that a line should be
-printed to the corresponding FileHandle (default: \*STDOUT) everytime a file
-is examined / loaded.
-
-If no B<-symbol> or B<-file> options are specified, C<LoadResources>()
-processes symbol $C<XFILESEARCHPATH> with priority I<startupFile> and
-$C<XUSERFILESEARCHPATH> with priority I<userDefault>.
-(Note that $C<XFILESEARCHPATH> and $C<XUSERFILESEARCHPATH> are supposed to
-contain only patterns. $C<XAPPLRESDIR> and $C<HOME> are supposed to be a single
-directory. C<LoadResources>() does not check/care whether this is the case.)
-
-For each set of FileSpecs, C<LoadResources>() examines each FileSpec to
-determine if the file exists and is readable. The first file that meets this
-criteria is read in and C<SetResources>() is invoked.
-
-Note that C<LoadResources>() first invokes C<SetArguments>() if it has not already
-been invoked.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 NOTES
-
-This module is an object-oriented module whose methods can be invoked as object
-methods, class methods or regular functions. This is accomplished via an
-internally-maintained object reference which is created as necessary, and which
-always points to the last object used. C<SetArguments>(), C<SetResources>() and
-C<LoadResources>() return the object reference.
-
-=head1 EXAMPLES
-
-=over
-
-=item 1
-
-@ARGV is processed by Tk::CmdLine at MainWindow creation.
-
-  use Tk;
-
-  # <Process @ARGV - ignoring all X11-specific options>
-
-  my $mw = MainWindow->new();
-
-  MainLoop();
-
-=item 2
-
-@ARGV is processed by Tk::CmdLine before MainWindow creation.
-An @ARGV of (--geometry=100x100 -opt1 a b c -bg red)
-is equal to (-opt1 a b c) after C<SetArguments>() is invoked.
-
-  use Tk;
-
-  Tk::CmdLine::SetArguments(); # Tk::CmdLine->SetArguments() works too
-
-  # <Process @ARGV - not worrying about X11-specific options>
-
-  my $mw = MainWindow->new();
-
-  MainLoop();
-
-=item 3
-
-Just like 2) except that default arguments are loaded first.
-
-  use Tk;
-
-  Tk::CmdLine::SetArguments(qw(-name test -iconic));
-  Tk::CmdLine::SetArguments();
-
-  # <Process @ARGV - not worrying about X11-specific options>
-
-  my $mw = MainWindow->new();
-
-  MainLoop();
-
-=item 4
-
-@ARGV is processed by Tk::CmdLine before MainWindow creation.
-Standard resource files are loaded in before MainWindow creation.
-
-  use Tk;
-
-  Tk::CmdLine::SetArguments();
-
-  # <Process @ARGV - not worrying about X11-specific options>
-
-  Tk::CmdLine::LoadResources();
-
-  my $mw = MainWindow->new();
-
-  MainLoop();
-
-=item 5
-
-@ARGV is processed by Tk::CmdLine before MainWindow creation.
-Standard resource files are loaded in before MainWindow creation
-using non-default priorities.
-
-  use Tk;
-
-  Tk::CmdLine::SetArguments();
-
-  # <Process @ARGV - not worrying about X11-specific options>
-
-  Tk::CmdLine::LoadResources(-echo => \*STDOUT,
-      -priority => 65, -symbol => 'XFILESEARCHPATH' );
-  Tk::CmdLine::LoadResources(-echo => \*STDOUT,
-      -priority => 75, -symbol => 'XUSERFILESEARCHPATH' );
-
-  my $mw = MainWindow->new();
-
-  MainLoop();
-
-=item 6
-
-@ARGV is processed by Tk::CmdLine before MainWindow creation.
-Standard resource files are loaded in before MainWindow creation.
-Individual resources are also loaded in before MainWindow creation.
-
-  use Tk;
-
-  Tk::CmdLine::SetArguments();
-
-  # <Process @ARGV - not worrying about X11-specific options>
-
-  Tk::CmdLine::LoadResources();
-
-  Tk::CmdLine::SetResources( # set a single resource
-      '*Button*background: red',
-      'widgetDefault' );
-
-  Tk::CmdLine::SetResources( # set multiple resources
-      [ '*Button*background: red', '*Button*foreground: blue' ],
-      'widgetDefault' );
-
-  my $mw = MainWindow->new();
-
-  MainLoop();
-
-=back
-
-=head1 ENVIRONMENT
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<HOME> (optional)
-
-Home directory which may contain user application defaults files as
-$C<HOME>/$C<LANG>/E<lt>B<CLASS>E<gt> or $C<HOME>/E<lt>B<CLASS>E<gt>.
-
-=item B<LANG> (optional)
-
-The current language (default: I<C>).
-
-=item B<XFILESEARCHPATH> (optional)
-
-List of FileSpec patterns
-(joined using the OS-dependent path delimiter, e.g. colon on B<UNIX>)
-used in defining system application defaults files.
-
-=item B<XUSERFILESEARCHPATH> (optional)
-
-List of FileSpec patterns
-(joined using the OS-dependent path delimiter, e.g. colon on B<UNIX>)
-used in defining user application defaults files.
-
-=item B<XAPPLRESDIR> (optional)
-
-Directory containing user application defaults files as
-$C<XAPPLRESDIR>/$C<LANG>/E<lt>B<CLASS>E<gt> or
-$C<XAPPLRESDIR>/E<lt>B<CLASS>E<gt>.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<MainWindow|Tk::MainWindow>
-L<option|Tk::option>
-
-=head1 HISTORY
-
-=over 4
-
-=item *
-
-1999.03.04 Ben Pavon E<lt>ben.pavon@hsc.hac.comE<gt>
-
-Rewritten as an object-oriented module.
-
-Allow one to process command line options in a specified array (@ARGV by default).
-Eliminate restrictions on the format and location of the options within the array
-(previously the X11 options could not be specified in POSIX format and had to be
-at the beginning of the array).
-
-Added the C<SetResources>() and C<LoadResources>() functions to allow the definition
-of resources prior to MainWindow creation.
-
-=item *
-
-2000.08.31 Ben Pavon E<lt>ben.pavon@hsc.hac.comE<gt>
-
-Added the C<GetArguments>() method which returns the list of arguments that
-have been processed by C<SetArguments>().
-
-Modified C<LoadResources>() to split the symbols using the OS-dependent
-path delimiter defined in the B<Config> module.
-
-Modified C<LoadResources>() to eliminate a warning message when processing
-patterns B<%l>, B<%C>, B<%S>.
-
-=back
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/ColorEditor.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/ColorEditor.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 48e6477f3ef..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/ColorEditor.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,120 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::ColorEditor - a general purpose Tk widget Color Editor
-
-=for pm Tk/ColorEditor.pm
-
-=for category Popups and Dialogs
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-   use Tk::ColorEditor;
-
-   $cref = $mw->ColorEditor(-title => $title, -cursor => @cursor);
-
-   $cref->Show;
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-ColorEditor is implemented as an object with various methods, described
-below.  First, create your ColorEditor object during program initialization
-(one should be sufficient), and then configure it by specifying a list of Tk
-widgets to colorize. When it's time to use the editor, invoke the Show()
-method.
-
-ColorEditor allows some customization: you may alter the color attribute
-menu by adding and/or deleting menu items and/or separators, turn the status
-window on or off, alter the configurator's list of color widgets, or even
-supply your own custom color configurator callback.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item 1.
-
-Call the constructor to create the editor object, which in turn returns a
-blessed reference to the new object:
-
-   use Tk::ColorEditor;
-
-   $cref = $mw->ColorEditor(
-       -title  => $title,
-       -cursor => @cursor,
-   );
-
-      mw     - a window reference, usually the result of a MainWindow->new
-               call.  As the default root of a widget tree, $mw and all
-               descendant widgets at object-creation-time are configured
-               by the default color configurator procedure.  (You probably
-               want to change this though or you might end up colorizing
-               ColorEditor!)
-      title  - Toplevel title, default = ' '.
-      cursor - a valid Tk '-cursor' specification (default is
-               'top_left_arrow').  This cursor is used over all ColorEditor
-               "hot spots".
-
-=item 2.
-
-Invoke the configure() method to change editor characteristics:
-
-   $cref->configure(-option => value, ..., -option-n => value-n);
-
-      options:
-        -command             : a callback to a  `set_colors' replacement.
-        -widgets             : a reference to a list of widget references
-                               for the color configurator.
-        -display_status      : TRUE IFF display the ColorEditor status
-                               window when applying colors.
-        -add_menu_item       : 'SEP', or a color attribute menu item.
-        -delete_menu_item    : 'SEP', a color attribute menu item, or color
-                               attribute menu ordinal.
-
-   For example:
-
-      $cref->configure(-delete_menu_item   => 3,
-          -delete_menu_item   => 'disabledforeground',
-          -add_menu_item      => 'SEP',
-          -add_menu_item      => 'New color attribute',
-          -widgets            => [$ce, $qu, $f2b2],
-          -widgets            => [$f2->Descendants],
-          -command            => [\&my_special_configurator, some, args ]
-      );
-
-=item 3.
-
-Invoke the Show() method on the editor object, say, by a button or menu press:
-
-   $cref->Show;
-
-=item 4.
-
-The cget(-widgets) method returns a reference to a list of widgets that
-are colorized by the configurator.  Typically, you add new widgets to
-this list and then use it in a subsequent configure() call to expand your
-color list.
-
-   $cref->configure(
-       -widgets => [
-           @{$Filesystem_ref->cget(-widgets)}, @{$cref->cget(-widgets)},
-       ]
-   );
-
-=item 5.
-
-The delete_widgets() method expects a reference to a list of widgets which are
-then removed from the current color list.
-
-   $cref->delete_widgets($OBJTABLE{$objname}->{'-widgets'})
-
-=back
-
-=head1 AUTHORS
-
-Stephen O. Lidie, Lehigh University Computing Center.  95/03/05
-lusol@Lehigh.EDU
-
-Many thanks to Guy Decoux (decoux@moulon.inra.fr) for doing the initial
-translation of tcolor.tcl to TkPerl, from which this code has been derived.
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Common.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Common.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index cd53ab79a99..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Common.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,16 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::DragDrop::Common - private class used by Drag&Drop
-
-=for pm DragDrop/DragDrop/Common.pm
-
-=for category Experimental Modules
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-This class provides methods to automate the the loading and declaring
-of Drop and Site 'types'.
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Compound.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Compound.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 01f6e5f2639..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Compound.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,298 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1996, Expert Interface Technologies
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#  The file man.macros and some of the macros used by this file are
-#  copyrighted: (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-#               (c) 1994-1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  The license terms of the Tcl/Tk distrobution are in the file
-#  license.tcl.
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Compound - Create multi-line compound images.
-
-=for category  Tk Image Classes
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-    use Tk::Compound;
-    $image = $widget->Compound(name,options);
-    $image->Line(options);
-    $image->Text(options);
-    $image->Bitmap(options);
-    $image->Image(options);
-    $image->Space(options);
-
-=for comment
-This paragraph used to be written different, but perldoc 3.14 cannot
-display this paragraph.
-S<    >use Tk::Compound;
-S<    >I<$image> = I<$widget>-E<gt>B<Compound>?(I<name>??,I<options>?)
-S<    >I<$image>-E<gt>B<Line>?(I<options>?)
-S<    >I<$image>-E<gt>B<Text>?(I<options>?)
-S<    >I<$image>-E<gt>B<Bitmap>?(I<options>?)
-S<    >I<$image>-E<gt>B<Image>?(I<options>?)
-S<    >I<$image>-E<gt>B<Space>?(I<options>?)
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-Compound image types can be used to create images that consists of
-multiple horizontal lines; each line is composed of a series of items
-(texts, bitmaps, images or spaces) arranged from left to
-right. Compound images are mainly used to embed complex drawings into
-widgets that support the B<-image> option. As shown in the EXAMPLE
-section below, a compound image can be used to display a bitmap and a
-text string simutaneously in a Tk B<Button> widget.
-
-Compound images can only be used on windows on the same display as, and
-with the same pixel depth and visual as the I<$widget> used to create them.
-
-=head1 CREATING COMPOUND IMAGES
-
-Compounds are created using I<$widget>-E<gt>B<Compound>.
-Compounds support the following I<options>:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-background> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-Specifies the background color of the compound image. This color is
-also used as the default background color for the bitmap items in the
-compound image.
-
-=item B<-borderwidth> =E<gt> I<pixels>
-
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating the width of the 3-D border
-drawn around the compound image.
-
-=item B<-font> =E<gt> I<font>
-
-Specifies the default font for the text items in the compound image.
-
-=item B<-foreground> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-Specifies the default foreground color for the bitmap and text items
-in the compound image.
-
-=item B<-padx> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating how much extra space to
-request for the compound image in the X-direction. The I<value> may
-have any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels(3)>.
-
-=item B<-pady> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating how much extra space to
-request for the compound image in the Y-direction.
-
-=item B<-relief> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Specifies the 3-D effect desired for the background of the compound
-image. Acceptable values are B<raised>, B<sunken>, B<flat>,
-B<ridge>, and B<groove>.
-
-=item B<-showbackground> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Specifies whether the background and the 3D borders should be drawn.
-Must be a valid boolean value. By default the background is not drawn
-and the compound image appears to have a transparent background.
-
-
-=back
-
-=head1 IMAGE COMMAND
-
-When a compound image is created, Tk also creates a new object.
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-
-The object also supports the following methods:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$compound>-E<gt>B<Line>?(I<option => value ...>)?
-
-Creates a new line at the bottom of the compound image. Lines support
-the following I<options>:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-anchor> value
-
-Specifies how the line should be aligned along the horizontal axis.
-When the values are B<w>, B<sw> or B<nw>, the line is aligned
-to the left. When the values are B<c>, B<s> or B<n>, the line
-is aligned to the middle.  When the values are B<e>, B<se> or
-B<ne>, the line is aligned to the right.
-
-=item B<-padx> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating how much extra space to
-request for this line in the X-direction.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$compound>-E<gt>I<Itemtype>?(I<option => value ...>)?
-
-Creates a new item of the type I<Itemtype> at the end of the last
-line of the compound image. All types of items support
-these following common I<options>:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-anchor> value
-
-Specifies how the item should be aligned along the vertical axis. When
-the values are B<n>, B<nw> or B<ne>, the item is aligned to
-the top of the line. When the values are B<c>, B<w> or B<e>,
-the item is aligned to the middle of the line.  When the values are
-B<s>, B<se> or B<sw>, the item is aligned to the bottom of
-the line.
-
-=item B<-padx> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating how much extra space to
-request for this item in the X-direction.
-
-=item B<-pady> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating how much extra space to
-request for this item in the Y-direction.
-
-=item I<item-type> can be any of the following:
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$compound>-E<gt>B<Bitmap>?(I<option => value ...>)?
-
-Creates a new bitmap item of at the end of the last
-line of the compound image. Additional I<options> accepted by the
-bitmap type are:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-background> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-Specifies the background color of the bitmap item.
-
-=item B<-bitmap> =E<gt> I<name>
-
-Specifies a bitmap to display in this item, in any of the forms
-acceptable to B<Tk_GetBitmap(3)>.
-
-=item B<-foreground> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-Specifies the foreground color of the bitmap item.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$compound>-E<gt>B<Image>?(I<option => value ...>)?
-
-Creates a new image item of at the end of the last
-line of the compound image. Additional I<options> accepted by the
-image type are:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-image> =E<gt> I<name>
-
-Specifies an image to display in this item. I<name>
-must have been created with the B<image create> command.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$compound>-E<gt>B<Space>?(I<option => value ...>)?
-
-Creates a new space item of at the end of the last line of the
-compound image. Space items do not display anything. They just acts as
-space holders that add additional spaces between items inside a
-compound image. Additional I<options> accepted by the image type
-are:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-width> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Specifies the width of this space. The I<value> may have any of the
-forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels(3)>.
-
-=item B<-height> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Specifies the height of this space. The I<value> may have any of
-the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels(3)>.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$compound>-E<gt>B<Text>?(I<option => value ...>)?
-
-Creates a new text item of at the end of the last line of the compound
-image. Additional I<options> accepted by the text type are:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-background> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-Specifies the background color of the text item.
-
-=item B<-font> =E<gt> I<name>
-
-Specifies the font to be used for this text item.
-
-=item B<-foreground> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-Specifies the foreground color of the text item.
-
-=item B<-justify> I<value>
-
-When there are multiple lines of text displayed in a text item, this
-option determines how the lines line up with each other. I<value>
-must be one of B<left>, B<center>, or B<right>.  B<Left>
-means that the lines' left edges all line up, B<center> means that
-the lines' centers are aligned, and B<right> means that the lines'
-right edges line up.
-
-=item B<-text> =E<gt> I<string>
-
-Specifies a text string to display in this text item.
-
-=item B<-underline> I<value>
-
-Specifies the integer index of a character to underline in the text
-item. 0 corresponds to the first character of the text displayed in
-the text item, 1 to the next character, and so on.
-
-=item B<-wraplength> I<value>
-
-This option specifies the maximum line length of the label string on
-this text item. If the line length of the label string exceeds this
-length, it is wrapped onto the next line, so that no line is longer
-than the specified length. The value may be specified in any of the
-standard forms for screen distances. If this value is less than or
-equal to 0 then no wrapping is done: lines will break only at newline
-characters in the text.
-
-=back
-
-=back
-
-=head1 EXAMPLE
-
-The following example creates a compound image with a bitmap and a
-text string and places this image into a B<Button(n)>
-widget. Notice that the image must be created using the widget
-that it resides in.
-
-  my $b = $parent->Button;
-  my $c = $b->Compound;
-  $b->configure(-image => $c);
-  $c->Line;
-  $c->Bitmap(-bitmap => 'warning');
-  $c->Space(-width => 8);
-  $c->Text(-text => "Warning", -underline => 0);
-  $b->pack;
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-image(n), Tix(n)
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/ConfigSpecs.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/ConfigSpecs.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 5f90c2716bb..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/ConfigSpecs.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,262 +0,0 @@
-# $Id: configspec.pod 1.2 Wed, 12 Nov 1997 00:30:45 +0100 ach $
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::ConfigSpecs - Defining behaviour of 'configure' for composite widgets.
-
-=for category Derived Widgets
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-    sub Populate
-    {
-     my ($composite,$args) = @_;
-     ...
-     $composite->ConfigSpecs('-attribute' => [ where,dbName,dbClass,default ]);
-     $composite->ConfigSpecs('-alias' => '-otherattribute');
-     $composite->ConfigSpecs('DEFAULT' => [ where ]);
-     $composite->ConfigSpecs($subwidget->ConfigSpecs);
-     ...
-    }
-
-    $composite->configure(-attribute => value);
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The aim is to make the composite widget configure method look as much like
-a regular Tk widget's configure as possible.
-(See L<Tk::options> for a description of this behaviour.)
-To enable this the attributes that the composite as a whole accepts
-needs to be defined.
-
-=head2 Defining the ConfigSpecs for a class.
-
-Typically a widget will have one or more calls like the following
-
-    $composite->ConfigSpecs(-attribute => [where,dbName,dbClass,default]);
-
-in its B<Populate> method. When B<ConfigSpecs> is called this way
-(with arguments) the arguments are used to construct or augment/replace
-a hash table for the widget. (More than one I<-option>=E<gt>I<value>
-pair can be specified to a single call.)
-
-B<dbName>, B<dbClass> and default are only used by B<ConfigDefault> described
-below, or to respond to 'inquiry' configure commands.
-
-It may be either one of the values below, or a list of such values
-enclosed in B<[]>.
-
-The currently permitted values of B<where> are:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<'ADVERTISED'>
-
-Apply B<configure> to I<advertised> subwidgets.
-
-=item B<'DESCENDANTS'>
-
-Apply B<configure> recursively to all descendants.
-
-=item B<'CALLBACK'>
-
-Setting the attribute does C<Tk::Callback-E<gt>new($value)> before storing
-in C<$composite-E<gt>{Configure}{-attribute}>. This is appropriate for
-C<-command =E<gt> ...> attributes that are handled by the composite and not
-forwarded to a subwidget. (E.g. B<Tk::Tiler> has C<-yscrollcommand> to
-allow it to have scrollbar attached.)
-
-This may be the first of several 'validating' keywords (e.g. font, cursor,
-anchor etc.) that core Tk makes special for C code.
-
-=item B<'CHILDREN'>
-
-Apply B<configure> to all children.  (Children are the immediate
-descendants of a widget.)
-
-=item B<'METHOD'>
-
-Call C<$cw-E<gt>attribute(value)>
-
-This is the most general case. Simply have a method of the composite
-class with the same name as the attribute.  The method may do any
-validation and have whatever side-effects you like.  (It is probably
-worth 'queueing' using B<afterIdle> for more complex side-effects.)
-
-=item B<'PASSIVE'>
-
-Simply store value in C<$composite-E<gt>{Configure}{-attribute}>.
-
-This form is also a useful placeholder for attributes which you
-currently only handle at create time.
-
-=item B<'SELF'>
-
-Apply B<configure> to the core widget (e.g. B<Frame>) that is the basis of
-the composite. (This is the default behaviour for most attributes which
-makes a simple Frame behave the way you would expect.) Note that once
-you have specified B<ConfigSpecs> for an attribute you must explicitly
-include C<'SELF'> in the list if you want the attribute to apply to the
-composite itself (this avoids nasty infinite recursion problems).
-
-=item B<$reference> (blessed)
-
-Call B<$reference>->configure(-attribute => value)
-
-A common case is where B<$reference> is a subwidget.
-
-$reference may also be result of
-
-     Tk::Config->new(setmethod,getmethod,args,...);
-
-B<Tk::Config> class is used to implement all the above keyword types.  The
-class has C<configure> and C<cget> methods so allows higher level code to
-I<always> just call one of those methods on an I<object> of some kind.
-
-=item B<hash reference>
-
-Defining:
-
-	$cw->ConfigSpecs(
-		...
-		-option => [ { -optionX=>$w1, -optionY=>[$w2, $w3] },
-				dbname dbclass default ],
-		...
-		);
-
-So C<$cw-E<gt>configure(-option =E<gt> value)> actually does
-
-	$w1->configure(-optionX => value);
-	$w2->configure(-optionY => value);
-	$w3->configure(-optionY => value);
-
-=item B<'otherstring'>
-
-Call
-
-    $composite->Subwidget('otherstring')->configure( -attribute => value );
-
-While this is here for backward compatibility with Tk-b5, it is probably
-better just to use the subwidget reference directly.  The only
-case for retaining this form is to allow an additional layer of
-abstraction - perhaps having a 'current' subwidget - this is unproven.
-
-=item B<Aliases>
-
-C<ConfigSpecs( -alias =E<gt> '-otherattribute' )> is used to make C<-alias>
-equivalent to C<-otherattribute>. For example the aliases
-
-    -fg => '-foreground',
-    -bg => '-background'
-
-are provided automatically (if not already specified).
-
-=back
-
-=head2 Delegating all options of a widget class to a subwidget
-
-    $composite->ConfigSpecs($subwidget->ConfigSpecs);
-
-The above generates a list of I<composite> ConfigSpecs arguments, one
-for each valid option in $subwidget's class, and delegates said option
-to $subwidget.  See L<Tk::Widget> and the I<widget> method
-ConfigSpecs.  Duplicating I<composite> ConfigSpecs and I<widget>
-ConfigSpecs keys will yield undefined results.
-
-
-=head2 Default values
-
-When the B<Populate> method returns B<ConfigDefault> is called.  This calls
-
-    $composite->ConfigSpecs;
-
-(with no arguments) to return a reference to a hash. Entries in the hash
-take the form:
-
-    '-attribute' => [ where, dbName, dbClass, default ]
-
-B<ConfigDefault> ignores 'where' completely (and also the DEFAULT entry) and
-checks the 'options' database on the widget's behalf, and if an entry is
-present matching dbName/dbClass
-
-    -attribute => value
-
-is added to the list of options that B<new> will eventually apply to the
-widget. Likewise if there is not a match and default is defined this
-default value will be added.
-
-Alias entries in the hash are used to convert user-specified values for the
-alias into values for the real attribute.
-
-=head2 B<New()-time configure>
-
-Once control returns to B<new>, the list of user-supplied options
-augmented by those from B<ConfigDefault> are applied to the widget using the
-B<configure> method below.
-
-Widgets are most flexible and most Tk-like if they handle the majority of
-their attributes this way.
-
-=head2 Configuring composites
-
-Once the above have occurred calls of the form:
-
-    $composite->configure( -attribute => value );
-
-should behave like any other widget as far as end-user code is concerned.
-B<configure> will be handled by B<Tk::Derived::configure> as follows:
-
-    $composite->ConfigSpecs;
-
-is called (with no arguments) to return a reference to a hash B<-attribute> is
-looked up in this hash, if B<-attribute> is not present in the hash then
-B<'DEFAULT'> is looked for instead.  (Aliases are tried as well and cause
-redirection to the aliased attribute).  The result should be a reference to a
-list like:
-
-  [ where, dbName, dbClass, default ]
-
-at this stage only I<where> is of interest, it maps to a list of object
-references (maybe only one) foreach one
-
-   $object->configure( -attribute => value );
-
-is B<eval>ed.
-
-=head2 Inquiring attributes of composites
-
-   $composite->cget( '-attribute' );
-
-This is handled by  B<Tk::Derived::cget> in a similar manner to configure. At
-present if I<where> is a list of more than one object it is ignored completely
-and the "cached" value in
-
-   $composite->{Configure}{-attribute}.
-
-is returned.
-
-=head1 CAVEATS
-
-The C<-background> and C<-foreground> option values are automatically
-propagated down to all composite widget's children. This may be
-sometimes not desirable, especially if some subwidgets should use own
-color schemes, either by using explicit options or by option database
-definitions. If this is the case, then just add
-
-    -foreground => 'SELF',
-    -background => 'SELF',
-
-to C<ConfigSpecs>.
-
-It is the author's intention to port as many of the "Tix" composite widgets
-as make sense. The mechanism described above may have to evolve in order to
-make this possible, although now aliases are handled I think the above is
-sufficient.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::composite|Tk::composite>,
-L<Tk::options|Tk::options>,
-L<Tk::Widget>
-
-=cut
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/DItem.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/DItem.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 27db79744df..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/DItem.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,439 +0,0 @@
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::DItem - Tix Display Items
-
-=for category Tix Extensions
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The Tix B<Display Items> and B<Display Types> are devised to
-solve a general problem: many Tix widgets (both existing and planned
-ones) display many items of many types simultaneously.
-
-For example, a hierarchical listbox widget (see L<Tk::HList>) can display
-items
-of images, plain text and subwindows in the form of a
-hierarchy. Another widget, the tabular listbox widget (see L<Tk::TList>)
-also displays items of the
-same types, although it arranges the items in a tabular form. Yet
-another widget, the spreadsheet widget (see L<Tk::TixGrid>),
-also displays similar types
-items, but in yet another format.
-
-In these examples, the display items in different widgets are only
-different in how they are arranged by the B<host widget>. In Tix,
-display items are clearly separated from the host widgets. The
-advantage is two-fold: first, the creation and configuration of
-display items become uniform across different host widgets. Second,
-new display item types can be added without the need to modify the
-existing host widgets.
-
-In a way, Tix display items are similar to the items inside Tk
-the canvas widget. However, unlike the Tix display items, the canvas
-items are not independent of the canvas widget; this makes it
-impossible to use the canvas items inside other types of TK widgets.
-
-The appearance of a display item is controlled by a set of
-I<attributes>. It is observed that each the attributes usually fall
-into one of two categroies: ``I<individual>'' or
-``I<collective>''. For example, the text items inside a HList widget
-may all display a different text string; however, in most cases, the
-text items share the same color, font and spacing. Instead of keeping
-a duplicated version of the same attributes inside each display item,
-it will be advantageous to put the collective attributes in a
-special object called a B<display style>. First, there is the space
-concern: a host widget may have many thousands of items; keeping
-dupilcated attributes will be very wasteful. Second, when it becomes
-necessary to change a collective attribute, such as changing all the
-text items' foreground color to red, it will be more efficient to
-change only the display style object than to modify all the text
-items one by one.
-
-The attributes of the a display item are thus stored in two places: it
-has a set of B<item options> to store its individual attributes. Each
-display item is also associated with a I<display style>, which specifies
-the collective attributes of all items associated with itself.
-
-The division between the individual and collective attributes are
-fixed and cannot be changed. Thus, when it becomes necessary for some
-items to differ in their collective attributes, two or more B<display styles>
-can be used. For example, suppose you want to display two
-columns of text items inside an HList widget, one column in red and
-the other in blue. You can create a TextStyle object called ``$red''
-which defines a red foreground, and another called ``$blue'', which
-defines a blue foreground. You can then associate all text items of
-the first column to ``$red'' and the second column to ``$blue''
-
-=head1 DISPLAY ITEM TYPES AND OPTIONS
-
-Currently there are three types of display items: B<text>,
-B<imagetext> and I<window>.
-
-=head1 IMAGETEXT ITEMS
-
-Display items of the type B<imagetext> are used to display an image
-together with a text string. Imagetext items support the following options:
-
-=head2 Imagetext Item Options
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Name:	B<bitmap>
-
-=item Class:	B<Bitmap>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-bitmap>
-
-Specifies the bitmap to display in the item.
-
-=item Name:	B<image>
-
-=item Class:	B<Image>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-image>
-
-Specifies the image to display in the item. When both the
-B<-bitmap> and B<-image> options are specified, only the image
-will be displayed.
-
-=item Name:	B<imageTextStyle>
-
-=item Class:	B<ImageTextStyle>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-style>
-
-Specifies the display style to use for this item. Must be the
-name of a B<imagetext> display style that has already be created with
-B<ItemStyle>.
-
-=item Name:	B<showImage>
-
-=item Class:	B<ShowImage>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-showimage>
-
-A Boolean value that specifies whether the image/bitmap should be
-displayed.
-
-=item Name:	B<showText>
-
-=item Class:	B<ShowText>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-showtext>
-
-A Boolean value that specifies whether the text string should be
-displayed.
-
-=item Name:	B<text>
-
-=item Class:	B<Text>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-text>
-
-Specifies the text string to display in the item.
-
-=item Name:	B<underline>
-
-=item Class:	B<Underline>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-underline>
-
-Specifies the integer index of a character to underline in the text
-string in the item.  0 corresponds to the first character of the text
-displayed in the widget, 1 to the next character, and so on.
-
-=back
-
-=head2 Imagetext Style Options
-
-The style information of B<imagetext> items are stored in the
-B<imagetext> display style. The following options are supported:
-
-B<STANDARD OPTIONS>
-
-B<-activebackground>	B<-activeforeground>
-B<-anchor>	B<-background>
-B<-disabledbackground>	B<-disabledforeground>
-B<-foreground>	B<-font>
-B<-justify>	B<-padx>
-B<-pady>	B<-selectbackground>
-B<-selectforeground>	B<-wraplength>
-
-See L<Tk::options> for details of the standard options.
-
-B<STYLE-SPECIFIC OPTIONS>
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Name:	B<gap>
-
-=item Class:	B<Gap>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-gap>
-
-Specifies the distance between the bitmap/image and the text string,
-in number of pixels.
-
-=item Name:	B<textAnchor>
-
-=item Class:	B<TextAnchor>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-textanchor>
-
-The anchor position on the image to which text part is attached.
-This is a perl/Tk addition. Defaults to B<e> for compatibility with standard
-Tix. The interesting cases are
-
-=over 8
-
-=item B<n>
-
-Text is centred above the image.
-
-=item B<s>
-
-Text is centred below the image
-
-=item B<e>
-
-Text is centred to right of the image.
-
-=item B<w>
-
-Text is centred to left of the image.
-
-=item B<c>
-
-Text is centred over the image.
-
-=back
-
-The B<sw>, B<se>, B<ne>, and b<nw> cases look rather odd.
-
-To get items to line up correctly it will usually be necessary
-to specify B<-anchor> as well. e.g. with default B<e> then anchoring
-item as a whole B<w> lines images up down left with text stuck to right side.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 TEXT ITEMS
-
-Display items of the type B<text> are used to display a text string
-in a widget. Text items support the following options:
-
-=head2 Text Item Options
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Name:	B<textStyle>
-
-=item Class:	B<TextStyle>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-style>
-
-Specifies the display style to use for this text item. Must be the
-name of a B<text> display style that has already be created with
-B<ItemStyle>.
-
-=item Name:	B<text>
-
-=item Class:	B<Text>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-text>
-
-Specifies the text string to display in the item.
-
-=item Name:	B<underline>
-
-=item Class:	B<Underline>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-underline>
-
-Specifies the integer index of a character to underline in the item.
-0 corresponds to the first character of the text displayed in the
-widget, 1 to the next character, and so on.
-
-=back
-
-=head2 Text Style Options
-
-B<STANDARD OPTIONS>
-
-B<-activebackground>	B<-activeforeground>
-B<-anchor>	B<-background>
-B<-disabledbackground>	B<-disabledforeground>
-B<-foreground>	B<-font>
-B<-justify>	B<-padx>
-B<-pady>	B<-selectbackground>
-B<-selectforeground>	B<-wraplength>
-
-See L<Tk::options> for details of the standard options.
-
-=head1 WINDOW ITEMS
-
-Display items of the type I<window> are used to display a
-sub-window in a widget. B<Window> items support the following
-options:
-
-=head2 Window Item Options
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Name:	B<windowStyle>
-
-=item Class:	B<WindowStyle>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-style>
-
-Specifies the display style to use for this window item. Must be the
-name of a I<window> display style that has already be created with
-the B<ItemStyle> method.
-
-=item Name:	B<window>
-
-=item Class:	B<Window>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-window>
-
-=item Alias:	B<-widget>
-
-Specifies the sub-window to display in the item.
-
-=back
-
-=head2 Window Style Options
-
-B<STYLE STANDARD OPTIONS>
-
-B<-anchor>	B<-padx>	B<-pady>
-
-See L<Tk::options> for details of the standard options.
-
-=head1 CREATING DISPLAY ITEMS
-
-Display items do not exist on their and thus they cannot be created
-independently of the widgets they reside in. As a rule, display items
-are created by special methods of their ``host'' widgets. For
-example, the HList widgets has a method B<item> which can be used
-to create new display items. The following code creates a new text
-item at the third column of the entry foo inside an HList widget:
-
- my $hlist = $parent->HList(-columns=>3);
- $hlist->add('foo');
- $hlist->itemCreate('foo', 2, -itemtype=>'text', -text=>'Hello');
-
-The B<itemCreate> method of the HList widget accepts a variable
-number of arguments. The special argument B<-itemtype> specifies
-which type of display item to create. Options that are valid for this
-type of display items can then be specified by one or more
-I<option-value> pairs.
-
-After the display item is created, they can then be configured or
-destroyed using the methods provided by the host widget. For example,
-the HList widget has the methods B<itemConfigure>, B<itemCget>
-and B<itemDelete> for accessing the display items.
-
-=head1 CREATING AND MANIPULATING ITEM STYLES
-
-Item styles are created with B<ItemStyle>:
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<   >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<ItemStyle>(I<itemType> ?,B<-stylename>=E<gt>I<name>? ?,B<-refwindow>=E<gt>I<pathName>? ?,I<option>=E<gt>I<value>, ...>?);
-
-I<itemType> must be one of the existing display items types such as
-B<text>, B<imagetext>, B<window> or any new types added by
-the user. Additional arguments can be given in one or more
-I<option-value> pairs. I<option> can be any of the valid option
-for this display style or any of the following:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-stylename> =E<gt> I<name>
-
-Specifies a name for this style. If unspecified, then a default name
-will be chosen for this style.
-
-=item B<-refwindow> =E<gt> I<$otherwidget>
-
-Specifies a window to use for determine the default values of the
-display type. If unspecified, the I<$widget> will be used. Default
-values for the display types can be set via the options database. The
-following example sets the B<-disablebackground> and
-B<-disabledforeground> options of a B<text> display style via
-the option database:
-
-  $widget->optionAdd('*table.list*disabledForeground' => 'blue');
-  $widget->optionAdd('*table.list*disabledBackground' => 'darkgray');
-  $widget->ItemStyle('text', -refwindow => $table_list, -fg => 'red');
-
-By using the option database to set the options of the display styles,
-we can advoid hard-coding the option values and give the user more
-flexibility in customization. See L<Tk::option> for a detailed description
-of the option database.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 STYLE METHODS
-
-The B<ItemStyle> method creates an object.
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-
-The following additional methods are available for item styles:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$style>-E<gt>B<delete>
-
-Destroy this display style object.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 EXAMPLE
-
-The following example creates two columns of data in a HList
-widget. The first column is in red and the second column in blue. The
-colors of the columns are controlled by two different B<text>
-styles. Also, the anchor and font of the second column is chosen so
-that the income data is aligned properly.
-
-   use strict;
-   use Tk;
-   use Tk::HList;
-   use Tk::ItemStyle;
-
-   my $mw = MainWindow->new();
-
-   my $hlist = $mw->HList(-columns=>2)->pack;
-
-   my $red  = $hlist->ItemStyle('text', -foreground=>'#800000');
-   my $blue = $hlist->ItemStyle('text', -foreground=>'#000080', -anchor=>'e');
-
-   my $e;
-   foreach ([Joe => '$10,000'], [Peter => '$20,000'],
-            [Raj => '$90,000'],  [Zinh => '$0']) {
-       $e = $hlist->addchild("");
-       $hlist->itemCreate($e, 0, -itemtype=>'text',
-   		-text=>$_->[0], -style=>$red );
-       $hlist->itemCreate($e, 1, -itemtype=>'text',
-   		-text=>$_->[1], -style=>$blue);
-   }
-
-   Tk::MainLoop;
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::HList|Tk::HList>
-L<Tk::TixGrid|Tk::TixGrid>
-L<Tk::TList|Tk::TList>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-display item, display style, item style
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Derived.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Derived.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 4b99934d5bd..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Derived.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,89 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Derived - Base class for widgets derived from others
-
-=for pm Tk/Derived.pm
-
-=for category Derived Widgets
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-    package Tk::MyNewWidget;
-
-    use Tk::widgets qw/ BaseWidget, list of Tk widgets /;
-    use base qw/ Tk::Derived Tk::BaseWidget /;
-
-    Construct Tk::Widget 'MyNewWidget';
-
-    sub ClassInit {
-        my( $class, $mw ) = @_;
-        #... e.g., class bindings here ...
-        $class->SUPER::ClassInit( $mw );
-    }
-
-    sub Populate {
-        my( $self, $args ) = @_;
-
-        my $flag = delete $args->{-flag};
-        if( defined $flag ) {
-            # handle -flag => xxx which can only be done at create
-            # time the delete above ensures that new() does not try
-            # and do  $self->configure( -flag => xxx );
-        }
-
-        $self->SUPER::Populate( $args );
-
-        $self = $self->Component( ... );
-
-        $self->Delegates( ... );
-
-        $self->ConfigSpecs(
-            '-cursor'    => [ SELF, 'cursor', 'Cursor',   undef ],
-            '-something' => [ METHOD, dbName,  dbClass, default ],
-            '-text'      => [ $label, dbName,  dbClass, default ],
-            '-heading'   => [ {-text => $head},
-                                heading, Heading,  'My Heading' ],
-       ); 
-   }
-
-   sub something {
-       my( $self, $value) = @_;
-       if ( @_ > 1 ) {
-          # set it
-       }
-       return # current value
-   }
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-Tk::Derived is used with Perl's multiple inheritance to override some
-methods normally inherited from Tk::Widget.
-
-Tk::Derived should precede any Tk widgets in the class's base class
-definition.
-
-Tk::Derived's main purpose is to apply wrappers to C<configure> and C<cget>
-methods of widgets to allow the derived widget to add to or modify behaviour
-of the configure options supported by the base widget.
-
-The derived class should normally override the C<Populate> method provided
-by Tk::Derived and call C<ConfigSpecs> to declare configure options.
-
-The public methods provided by Tk::Derived are as follows:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item -E<gt>ConfigSpecs(-I<key> =E<gt> [I<kind>, I<name>, I<Class>, I<default>], ...)
-
-=back
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::ConfigSpecs|Tk::ConfigSpecs>
-L<Tk::mega|Tk::mega>
-L<Tk::composite|Tk::composite>
-
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Dialog.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Dialog.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 871206d504c..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Dialog.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,107 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Dialog - Create modal dialog and wait for a response.
-
-=for pm Tk/Dialog.pm
-
-=for category Popups and Dialogs
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >I<$dialog> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<Dialog>(I<-option> =E<gt> I<value>, ... );
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-This procedure is part of the Tk script library - its arguments
-describe a dialog box.  After creating a dialog box, B<Dialog> waits
-for the user to select one of the Buttons either by clicking on the
-Button with the mouse or by typing return to invoke the default Button
-(if any).  Then it returns the text string of the selected Button.
-
-While waiting for the user to respond, B<Dialog> sets a local
-grab.  This prevents the user from interacting with the application
-in any way except to invoke the dialog box.  See the B<Show()> method.
-
-=head1 OPTIONS
-
-The following option/value pairs are supported:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-title>
-
-Text to appear in the window manager's title bar for the dialog.
-
-=item B<-text>
-
-Message to appear in the top portion of the Dialog.
-
-=item B<-bitmap>
-
-If non-empty, specifies a bitmap to display in the top portion of the
-Dialog, to the left of the text.  If this is an empty string then no
-bitmap is displayed in the Dialog.
-
-=item B<-default_button>
-
-Text label string of the Button that displays the default ring.
-
-=item B<-buttons>
-
-A reference to a list of Button label strings.  Each I<string>
-specifies text to display in a Button, in order from left to right.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 METHODS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$answer> = $dialog-E<gt>B<Show(>?-global?B<)>;
-
-This method displays the Dialog, waits for the user's response, and stores
-the text string of the selected Button in I<$answer>.  If I<-global> is
-specified a global (rather than local) grab is performed.
-
-The actual Dialog is shown using the B<Popup> method. Any other
-options supplied to B<Show> are passed to B<Popup>, and can be used to
-position the Dialog on the screen. Please read Tk::Popup for details.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 ADVERTISED WIDGETS
-
-Because Tk::Dialog is a subclass of Tk::DialogBox it inherits all the
-advertised subwidgets of its superclass: e.g. "B_button-text", where
-'button-text' is a Button's -text value. Additionally, Tk::Dialog
-advertises:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<message>
-
-The dialog's Label widget containing the message text.
-
-=item B<bitmap>
-
-The dialog's Label widget containing the bitmap image.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 EXAMPLE
-
-I<$dialog> = I<$mw>-E<gt>B<Dialog>(-text =E<gt> 'Save File?', -bitmap =E<gt> 'question', -title =E<gt> 'Save File Dialog', -default_button =E<gt> 'Yes', -buttons =E<gt> [qw/Yes No Cancel/);
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-bitmap, dialog, modal, messageBox
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/DialogBox.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/DialogBox.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index a091cd98427..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/DialogBox.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,156 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::DialogBox - create and manipulate a dialog screen.
-
-=for pm Tixish/DialogBox.pm
-
-=for category Tix Extensions
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-    use Tk::DialogBox
-    ...
-    $d = $top->DialogBox(-title => "Title", -buttons => ["OK", "Cancel"]);
-    $w = $d->add(Widget, args)->pack;
-    ...
-    $button = $d->Show;
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-B<DialogBox> is very similar to B<Dialog> except that it allows
-any widget in the top Frame. B<DialogBox> creates two
-Frames, I<top> and I<bottom>. The bottom Frame shows all the
-specified Buttons, lined up from left to right. The top Frame acts
-as a container for all other widgets that can be added with the
-B<add()> method.
-
-=head1 OPTIONS
-
-The options recognized by B<DialogBox> are as follows:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-title>
-
-Specify the title of the DialogBox. If this is not set, then the
-name of the program is used.
-
-=item B<-buttons>
-
-The button names to display in the bottom Frame. This is a reference
-to an array of strings containing the text to put on each
-Button. There is no default value for this. If you do not specify any
-button names, no Buttons are displayed.
-
-=item B<-default_button>
-
-Specifies the default Button that is considered invoked when user
-presses <Return> on the DialogBox. This Button is highlighted. If
-no default Button is specified, then the first element of the
-array whose reference is passed to the B<-buttons> option is used
-as the default.
-
-=item B<-cancel_button>
-
-Specifies the Button that is considered invoked when the user closes
-the DialogBox using the window manager's close button. If the
-B<-cancel_button> option is not given, and if there's only one button
-configured, then this button is also used as the cancel button.
-Otherwise no button is considered as the cancel button; in such a case
-B<Show> just returns C<undef> when the user closes the DialogBox.
-
-=item B<-command>
-
-A callback which is executed after invoking an action to close the
-DialogBox, but before restoring focus and grab information. The
-selected button is passed as the first argument.
-
-=item B<-focus>
-
-Specify the widget to receive the initial focus after popping up the
-DialogBox. By default the B<-default_button> widget receives the
-initial focus.
-
-=item B<-showcommand>
-
-A callback which is executed before displaying the DialogBox and
-waiting for user input. The DialogBox itself is passed as the first
-argument.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 METHODS
-
-B<DialogBox> supports only two methods as of now:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<add(>I<widget>, I<options>B<)>
-
-Add the widget indicated by I<widget>. I<Widget> can be the name
-of any Tk widget (standard or contributed). I<options> are the
-options that the widget accepts. The widget is advertized as a
-subwidget of B<DialogBox>. The name of I<widget> is
-lower-cased and used as the advertised name. If multiple instances of
-I<widget> are created in the B<DialogBox>, then only the last one gets
-the advertised name. B<add()> does not automatically B<pack()> or
-B<grid()> I<widget> into the B<DialogBox>.
-
-=item B<Show(>I<?-global?>B<)>
-
-Displays the Dialog until the user invokes one of the Buttons in the
-bottom Frame. If the grab type I<-global> is specified, then B<Show>
-uses that grab; otherwise it defaults to a local grab. Returns the
-name of the Button invoked.
-
-The actual Dialog is shown using the B<Popup> method. Any other
-options supplied to B<Show> are passed to B<Popup>, and can be used to
-position the Dialog on the screen. Please read Tk::Popup for details.
-
-=item B<Exit()>
-
-Close the dialogbox, by emulating a click on the default button.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 ADVERTISED WIDGETS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<top>
-
-The subwidget reference to the top half of the DialogBox widget, the Frame
-containing widgets added by the B<add> method.
-
-=item B<bottom>
-
-The subwidget reference to the bottom half of the DialogBox widget, the Frame
-containing the Button widgets.
-
-=item B<B_"button-text">
-
-Individual subwidget references to the Buttons in the DialogBox widget. The
-subwidget name is the string I<B_> concatenated with the Button's -text
-value.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 BUGS
-
-There is no way of removing a widget once it has been added to the
-top Frame, unless you access the I<top> subwidget and go through the
-child widgets.
-
-There is no control over the appearance of the Buttons in the
-bottom Frame nor is there any way to control the placement of the
-two Frames with respect to each other.
-
-=head1 AUTHOR
-
-B<Rajappa Iyer> rsi@earthling.net
-
-This code is distributed under the same terms as Perl.
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/DirTree.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/DirTree.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index d8ded2f41b7..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/DirTree.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,172 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::DirTree - Create and manipulate DirTree widgets
-
-=for pm Tixish/DirTree.pm
-
-=for category Tix Extensions
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >B<use Tk::DirTree;>
-
-S<    >I<$dirtree> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<DirTree>(?I<options>?);
-
-=head1 SUPER-CLASS
-
-The B<DirTree> class is derived from the L<Tree|Tk::Tree> class and inherits
-all the methods, options and subwidgets of its super-class.
-
-=head1 STANDARD OPTIONS
-
-B<Tree> supports all the standard options of a Tree widget.  See
-L<Tk::options> for details on the standard options.
-
-=head1 WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Name:		B<browseCmd>
-
-=item Class:		B<BrowseCmd>
-
-=item Switch:		B<-browsecmd>
-
-Specifies a L<callback|Tk::callbacks> to call whenever the user browses on a directory
-(usually by single-clicking on the name of the directory). The callback
-is called with one argument, the complete pathname of the directory.
-
-=item Name:		B<command>
-
-=item Class:		B<Command>
-
-=item Switch:		B<-command>
-
-Specifies the L<callback|Tk::callbacks> to be called when the user activates on a directory
-(usually by double-clicking on the name of the directory). The callback
-is called with one argument, the complete pathname of the directory.
-
-=item Name:		B<dircmd>
-
-=item Class:		B<DirCmd>
-
-=item Switch:		B<-dircmd>
-
-Specifies the L<callback|Tk::callbacks> to be called when a directory listing is needed
-for a particular directory. If this option is not specified, by
-default the DirTree widget will attempt to read the directory as a
-Unix directory. On special occasions, the application programmer may
-want to supply a special method for reading directories: for example,
-when he needs to list remote directories. In this case, the B<-dircmd>
-option can be used. The specified callback accepts two arguments: the
-first is the name of the directory to be listed; the second is a
-Boolean value indicating whether hidden sub-directories should be
-listed. This callback returns a list of names of the sub-directories of
-this directory. For example:
-
-    sub read_dir {
-        my( $dir, $showhidden ) = @_;
-        return( qw/DOS NORTON WINDOWS/ ) if $dir eq "C:\\";
-        return();
-    }
-
-=item Name:		B<showHidden>
-
-=item Class:		B<ShowHidden>
-
-=item Switch:		B<-showhidden>
-
-Specifies whether hidden directories should be shown. By default, a
-directory name starting with a period "." is considered as a hidden
-directory. This rule can be overridden by supplying an alternative
-B<-dircmd> option.
-
-=item Name:		B<directory>
-
-=item Class:		B<Directory>
-
-=item Switch:		B<-directory>
-
-=item Alias:		B<-value>
-
-Specifies the name of the current directory to be displayed in the
-DirTree widget.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<DirTree> constructor method creates a new window (given by the $dirtree
-argument) and makes it into a DirTree widget.  Additional options,
-described above, may be specified on the command line or in the
-option database to configure aspects of the DirTree such as its
-cursor and relief.  The DirTree widget displays a list view of a
-directory, its previous directories and its sub-directories. The
-user can choose one of the directories displayed in the list or
-change to another directory.
-
-=head1 WIDGET METHODS
-
-The B<DirTree> method creates a widget object.
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-The widget also inherits all the methods provided by the generic
-L<Tk::Widget|Tk::Widget> class.
-
-The following additional methods are available for DirTree widgets:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$dirtree>-E<gt>B<chdir>(I<dir>)
-
-Change the current directory to I<dir>.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 OTHER METHODS
-
-These methods have to be documented or made private:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item OpenCmd
-
-=item Populate
-
-=item add_to_tree
-
-=item dirnames
-
-=item fullpath
-
-=item has_subdir
-
-=item opencmd
-
-=item set_dir
-
-=back
-
-=head1 BINDINGS
-
-The mouse and keyboard bindings of the DirTree widget are the same as
-the bindings of the L<Tree|Tk::Tree> widget.
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-directory, tree, tix
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::Tree|Tk::Tree>
-L<Tk::HList|Tk::HList>
-
-=head1 AUTHOR
-
-Perl/TK version by Chris Dean <ctdean@cogit.com>.  Original Tcl/Tix
-version by Ioi Kim Lam.
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/DropSite.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/DropSite.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 8ae5a199fe3..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/DropSite.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::DropSite - Receive side of Drag & Drop abstraction
-
-=for category User Interaction
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
- use Tk::DropSite qw(...);
- $widget->DropSite(-entercommand => ...,
-                   -dropcommand  => ...,
-                   -motioncommand  => ...,
-                   -dropcommand  => ...,
-                  );
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-C<DropSite> creates an object which represents a site on which things
-may be "Dropped".
-
-A DropSite provides the following methods:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item $site->Enter($token,$event)
-
-=item $site->Leave($token,$event)
-
-=item $site->Motion($token,$event)
-
-=item $site->Drop($token,$event)
-
-=back
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Entry.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Entry.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 1b6dbf15482..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Entry.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,693 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Entry - Create and manipulate Entry widgets
-
-=for category  Tk Widget Classes
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >I<$entry> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<Entry>(?I<options>?);
-
-=head1 STANDARD OPTIONS
-
-B<-background>	B<-highlightbackground>	B<-insertontime>	B<-selectforeground>
-B<-borderwidth>	B<-highlightcolor>	B<-insertwidth>	B<-takefocus>
-B<-cursor>	B<-highlightthickness>	B<-justify>	B<-textvariable>
-B<-exportselection>	B<-insertbackground>	B<-relief>	B<-xscrollcommand>
-B<-font>	B<-insertborderwidth>	B<-selectbackground>
-B<-foreground>	B<-insertofftime>	B<-selectborderwidth>
-
-=head1 WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Command-Line Name: B<-disabledbackground>
-
-=item Database Name:  B<disabledBackground>
-
-=item Database Class: B<DisabledBackground>
-
-Specifies the background color to use when the entry is disabled.  If
-this option is the empty string, the normal background color is used.
-
-=item Command-Line Name: B<-disabledforeground>
-
-=item Database Name:  B<disabledForeground>
-
-=item Database Class: B<DisabledForeground>
-
-Specifies the foreground color to use when the entry is disabled.  If
-this option is the empty string, the normal foreground color is used.
-
-=item Name:	B<invalidCommand>
-
-=item Class:	B<InvalidCommand>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-invalidcommand>
-
-=item Alias:	B<-invcmd>
-
-Specifies a script to eval when B<validateCommand> returns 0.
-Setting it to <undef> disables this feature (the default).  The best use
-of this option is to set it to I<bell>.  See B<Validation>
-below for more information.
-
-=item Command-Line Name: B<-readonlybackground>
-
-=item Database Name:  B<readonlyBackground>
-
-=item Database Class: B<ReadonlyBackground>
-
-Specifies the background color to use when the entry is read-only.  If
-this option is the empty string, the normal background color is used.
-
-=item Name:	B<show>
-
-=item Class:	B<Show>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-show>
-
-If this option is specified, then the true contents of the entry
-are not displayed in the window.
-Instead, each character in the entry's value will be displayed as
-the first character in the value of this option, such as ``*''.
-This is useful, for example, if the entry is to be used to enter
-a password.
-If characters in the entry are selected and copied elsewhere, the
-information copied will be what is displayed, not the true contents
-of the entry.
-
-=item Name:	B<state>
-
-=item Class:	B<State>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-state>
-
-Specifies one of three states for the entry: B<normal>, B<disabled>, or
-B<readonly>.  If the entry is B<readonly>, then the value may not be changed
-using widget commands and no insertion cursor will be displayed, even
-if the input focus is in the widget; the contents of the widget may
-still be selected.  If the entry is B<disabled>, the value may not be
-changed, no insertion cursor will be displayed, the contents will not
-be selectable, and the entry may be displayed in a different color,
-depending on the values of the B<-disabledforeground> and
-B<-disabledbackground> options.
-
-=item Name:	B<validate>
-
-=item Class:	B<Validate>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-validate>
-
-Specifies the mode in which validation should operate: B<none>,
-B<focus>, B<focusin>, B<focusout>, B<key>, or B<all>.
-It defaults to B<none>.  When you want validation, you must explicitly
-state which mode you wish to use.  See B<Validation> below for more.
-
-=item Name:	B<validateCommand>
-
-=item Class:	B<ValidateCommand>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-validatecommand>
-
-=item Alias:	B<-vcmd>
-
-Specifies a script to eval when you want to validate the input into
-the entry widget.  Setting it to C<undef> disables this feature (the default).
-This command must return a valid boolean value.  If it returns 0 (or
-the valid boolean equivalent) then it means you reject the new edition
-and it will not occur and the B<invalidCommand> will be evaluated if it
-is set. If it returns 1, then the new edition occurs.
-See B<Validation> below for more information.
-
-=item Name:	B<width>
-
-=item Class:	B<Width>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-width>
-
-Specifies an integer value indicating the desired width of the entry window,
-in average-size characters of the widget's font.
-If the value is less than or equal to zero, the widget picks a
-size just large enough to hold its current text.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<Entry> method creates a new window (given by the
-$entry argument) and makes it into an entry widget.
-Additional options, described above, may be specified on the
-command line or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the entry such as its colors, font,
-and relief.  The B<entry> command returns its
-$entry argument.  At the time this command is invoked,
-there must not exist a window named $entry, but
-$entry's parent must exist.
-
-An entry is a widget that displays a one-line text string and
-allows that string to be edited using methods described below, which
-are typically bound to keystrokes and mouse actions.
-When first created, an entry's string is empty.
-A portion of the entry may be selected as described below.
-If an entry is exporting its selection (see the B<exportSelection>
-option), then it will observe the standard X11 protocols for handling the
-selection;  entry selections are available as type B<STRING>.
-Entries also observe the standard Tk rules for dealing with the
-input focus.  When an entry has the input focus it displays an
-I<insertion cursor> to indicate where new characters will be
-inserted.
-
-Entries are capable of displaying strings that are too long to
-fit entirely within the widget's window.  In this case, only a
-portion of the string will be displayed;  methods described below
-may be used to change the view in the window.  Entries use
-the standard B<xScrollCommand> mechanism for interacting with
-scrollbars (see the description of the B<-xscrollcommand> option
-for details).  They also support scanning, as described below.
-
-=head1 VALIDATION
-
-Validation of entry widgets is derived from part of the patch written by
-jhobbs@cs.uoregon.edu.  This works by setting the B<validateCommand>
-option to a callback which will be evaluated according to the B<validate>
-option as follows:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<none>
-
-Default.  This means no validation will occur.
-
-=item B<focus>
-
-B<validateCommand> will be called when the entry receives or
-loses focus.
-
-=item B<focusin>
-
-B<validateCommand> will be called when the entry receives focus.
-
-=item B<focusout>
-
-B<validateCommand> will be called when the entry loses focus.
-
-=item B<key>
-
-B<validateCommand> will be called when the entry is edited.
-
-=item B<all>
-
-B<validateCommand> will be called for all above conditions.
-
-=back
-
-The B<validateCommand> and B<invalidCommand> are called with the following
-arguments:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item * The proposed value of the entry.  If you are configuring the
-entry widget to have a new textvariable, this will be the value of that
-textvariable.
-
-=item * The characters to be added (or deleted). This will be C<undef>
-if validation is due to focus, explcit call to validate or if change
-is due to C<-textvariable> changing.
-
-=item * The current value of entry i.e. before the proposed change.
-
-=item * index of char string to be added/deleted, if any. -1 otherwise
-
-=item * type of action. 1 == INSERT, 0 == DELETE,
--1 if it's a forced validation or textvariable validation
-
-=back
-
-In general, the B<textVariable> and B<validateCommand> can be
-dangerous to mix. If you try set the B<textVariable>
-to something that the B<validateCommand> will not accept it will
-be set back to the value of the entry widget.
-Using the B<textVariable> for read-only purposes will never cause problems.
-
-The B<validateCommand> will turn itself off by setting
-B<validate> to B<none> when an error occurs, for example
-when the B<validateCommand> or B<invalidCommand> encounters
-an error in its script while evaluating, or
-B<validateCommand> does not return a valid boolean value.
-
-With the perl/Tk version B<validate> option is supposed to be
-"suspended" while executing the B<validateCommand> or the B<invalidCommand>.
-This is experimental but in theory either callback can "correct" the
-value of the widget, and override the proposed change. (B<validateCommand>
-should still return false to inhibit the change from happening when
-it returns.)
-
-=head1 WIDGET METHODS
-
-The B<Entry> method creates a widget object.
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-The widget also inherits all the methods provided by the generic
-L<Tk::Widget|Tk::Widget> class.
-
-Many of the additional methods for entries take one or more indices as
-arguments.  An index specifies a particular character in the entry's
-string, in any of the following ways:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<number>
-
-Specifies the character as a numerical index, where 0 corresponds
-to the first character in the string.
-
-=item B<anchor>
-
-Indicates the anchor point for the selection, which is set with the
-B<selectionFrom> and B<selectionAdjust> methods.
-
-=item B<end>
-
-Indicates the character just after the last one in the entry's string.
-This is equivalent to specifying a numerical index equal to the length
-of the entry's string.
-
-=item B<insert>
-
-Indicates the character adjacent to and immediately following the
-insertion cursor.
-
-=item B<sel.first>
-
-Indicates the first character in the selection.  It is an error to
-use this form if the selection isn't in the entry window.
-
-=item B<sel.last>
-
-Indicates the character just after the last one in the selection.
-It is an error to use this form if the selection isn't in the
-entry window.
-
-=item B<@>I<number>
-
-In this form, I<number> is treated as an x-coordinate in the
-entry's window;  the character spanning that x-coordinate is used.
-For example, ``B<@0>'' indicates the left-most character in the
-window.
-
-=back
-
-Abbreviations may be used for any of the forms above, e.g. ``B<e>''
-or ``B<sel.f>''.  In general, out-of-range indices are automatically
-rounded to the nearest legal value.
-
-The following additional methods are available for entry widgets:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$entry>-E<gt>B<bbox>(I<index>)
-
-Returns a list of four numbers describing the bounding box of the
-character given by I<index>.
-The first two elements of the list give the x and y coordinates of
-the upper-left corner of the screen area covered by the character
-(in pixels relative to the widget) and the last two elements give
-the width and height of the character, in pixels.
-The bounding box may refer to a region outside the visible area
-of the window.
-
-=item I<$entry>-E<gt>B<cget>(?I<option>?)
-
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given
-by I<option>.
-I<Option> may have any of the values accepted by the B<entry>
-command.
-
-=item I<$entry>-E<gt>B<configure>(?I<option>?, ?I<value, option, value, ...>?)
-
-Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
-If no I<option> is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for $entry (see L<Tk::configure> for
-information on the format of this list).  If I<option> is specified
-with no I<value>, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no I<option> is specified).  If
-one or more I<option-value> pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string.
-I<Option> may have any of the values accepted by the B<entry>
-command.
-
-=item I<$entry>-E<gt>B<delete>(I<first, >?I<last>?)
-
-Delete one or more elements of the entry.
-I<First> is the index of the first character to delete, and
-I<last> is the index of the character just after the last
-one to delete.
-If I<last> isn't specified it defaults to I<first>+1,
-i.e. a single character is deleted.
-This method returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$entry>-E<gt>B<get>
-
-Returns the entry's string.
-
-=item I<$entry>-E<gt>B<icursor>(I<index>)
-
-Arrange for the insertion cursor to be displayed just before the character
-given by I<index>.  Returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$entry>-E<gt>B<index>(I<index>)
-
-Returns the numerical index corresponding to I<index>.
-
-=item I<$entry>-E<gt>B<insert>(I<index, string>)
-
-Insert the characters of I<string> just before the character
-indicated by I<index>.  Returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$entry>->B<scan>(I<option, args>)
-
-=item I<$entry>->B<scan>I<Option>(I<args>)
-
-This method is used to implement scanning on entries.  It has
-two forms, depending on I<Option>:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$entry>->B<scanMark>(I<x>)
-
-Records I<x> and the current view in the entry widget;  used in
-conjunction with later B<scanDragto> methods.  Typically this
-method is associated with a mouse button press in the widget.  It
-returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$entry>->B<scanDragto>(I<x>)
-
-This method computes the difference between its I<x> argument
-and the I<x> argument to the last B<scanMark> method for
-the widget.  It then adjusts the view left or right by 10 times the
-difference in x-coordinates.  This method is typically associated
-with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of
-dragging the entry at high speed through the widget.  The return
-value is an empty string.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$entry>->B<selection>(I<option, arg>)
-
-=item I<$entry>->B<selection>I<Option>(I<arg>)
-
-This method is used to adjust the selection within an entry.  It
-has several forms, depending on I<Option>:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$entry>-E<gt>B<selectionAdjust>(I<index>)
-
-Locate the end of the selection nearest to the character given by
-I<index>, and adjust that end of the selection to be at I<index>
-(i.e including but not going beyond I<index>).  The other
-end of the selection is made the anchor point for future
-B<selectionTo> methods.  If the selection
-isn't currently in the entry, then a new selection is created to
-include the characters between I<index> and the most recent
-selection anchor point, inclusive.
-Returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$entry>-E<gt>B<selectionClear>
-
-Clear the selection if it is currently in this widget.  If the
-selection isn't in this widget then the method has no effect.
-Returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$entry>-E<gt>B<selectionFrom>(I<index>)
-
-Set the selection anchor point to just before the character
-given by I<index>.  Doesn't change the selection.
-Returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$entry>-E<gt>B<selectionPresent>
-
-Returns 1 if there is are characters selected in the entry,
-0 if nothing is selected.
-
-=item I<$entry>-E<gt>B<selectionRange>(I<start, >I<end>)
-
-Sets the selection to include the characters starting with
-the one indexed by I<start> and ending with the one just
-before I<end>.
-If I<end> refers to the same character as I<start> or an
-earlier one, then the entry's selection is cleared.
-
-=item I<$entry>-E<gt>B<selectionTo>(I<index>)
-
-If I<index> is before the anchor point, set the selection
-to the characters from I<index> up to but not including
-the anchor point.
-If I<index> is the same as the anchor point, do nothing.
-If I<index> is after the anchor point, set the selection
-to the characters from the anchor point up to but not including
-I<index>.
-The anchor point is determined by the most recent B<selectionFrom>
-or B<selectionAdjust> method in this widget.
-If the selection isn't in this widget then a new selection is
-created using the most recent anchor point specified for the widget.
-Returns an empty string.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$entry>-E<gt>B<validate>
-
-This command is used to force an evaluation of the B<validateCommand>
-independent of the conditions specified by the B<validate> option.  It
-returns 0 or 1.
-
-=item I<$entry>-E<gt>B<xview>(I<args>)
-
-This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the
-text in the widget's window.  It can take any of the following
-forms:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$entry>-E<gt>B<xview>
-
-Returns a list containing two elements.
-Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1;  together they describe
-the horizontal span that is visible in the window.
-For example, if the first element is .2 and the second element is .7,
-20% of the entry's text is off-screen to the left, the middle 50% is visible
-in the window, and 30% of the text is off-screen to the right.
-These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the B<-xscrollcommand>
-option.
-
-=item I<$entry>-E<gt>B<xview>(I<index>)
-
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the character given by I<index>
-is displayed at the left edge of the window.
-
-=item I<$entry>-E<gt>B<xviewMoveto>(I<fraction>)
-
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the character I<fraction> of the
-way through the text appears at the left edge of the window.
-I<Fraction> must be a fraction between 0 and 1.
-
-=item I<$entry>-E<gt>B<xviewScroll>(I<number, what>)
-
-This method shifts the view in the window left or right according to
-I<number> and I<what>.
-I<Number> must be an integer.
-I<What> must be either B<units> or B<pages> or an abbreviation
-of one of these.
-If I<what> is B<units>, the view adjusts left or right by
-I<number> average-width characters on the display;  if it is
-B<pages> then the view adjusts by I<number> screenfuls.
-If I<number> is negative then characters farther to the left
-become visible;  if it is positive then characters farther to the right
-become visible.
-
-=back
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DEFAULT BINDINGS
-
-Tk automatically creates class bindings for entries that give them
-the following default behavior.
-In the descriptions below, ``word'' refers to a contiguous group
-of letters, digits, or ``_'' characters, or any single character
-other than these.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item [1]
-
-Clicking mouse button 1 positions the insertion cursor
-just before the character underneath the mouse cursor, sets the
-input focus to this widget, and clears any selection in the widget.
-Dragging with mouse button 1 strokes out a selection between
-the insertion cursor and the character under the mouse.
-
-=item [2]
-
-Double-clicking with mouse button 1 selects the word under the mouse
-and positions the insertion cursor at the beginning of the word.
-Dragging after a double click will stroke out a selection consisting
-of whole words.
-
-=item [3]
-
-Triple-clicking with mouse button 1 selects all of the text in the
-entry and positions the insertion cursor before the first character.
-
-=item [4]
-
-The ends of the selection can be adjusted by dragging with mouse
-button 1 while the Shift key is down;  this will adjust the end
-of the selection that was nearest to the mouse cursor when button
-1 was pressed.
-If the button is double-clicked before dragging then the selection
-will be adjusted in units of whole words.
-
-=item [5]
-
-Clicking mouse button 1 with the Control key down will position the
-insertion cursor in the entry without affecting the selection.
-
-=item [6]
-
-If any normal printing characters are typed in an entry, they are
-inserted at the point of the insertion cursor.
-
-=item [7]
-
-The view in the entry can be adjusted by dragging with mouse button 2.
-If mouse button 2 is clicked without moving the mouse, the selection
-is copied into the entry at the position of the mouse cursor.
-
-=item [8]
-
-If the mouse is dragged out of the entry on the left or right sides
-while button 1 is pressed, the entry will automatically scroll to
-make more text visible (if there is more text off-screen on the side
-where the mouse left the window).
-
-=item [9]
-
-The Left and Right keys move the insertion cursor one character to the
-left or right;  they also clear any selection in the entry and set
-the selection anchor.
-If Left or Right is typed with the Shift key down, then the insertion
-cursor moves and the selection is extended to include the new character.
-Control-Left and Control-Right move the insertion cursor by words, and
-Control-Shift-Left and Control-Shift-Right move the insertion cursor
-by words and also extend the selection.
-Control-b and Control-f behave the same as Left and Right, respectively.
-Meta-b and Meta-f behave the same as Control-Left and Control-Right,
-respectively.
-
-=item [10]
-
-The Home key, or Control-a, will move the insertion cursor to the
-beginning of the entry and clear any selection in the entry.
-Shift-Home moves the insertion cursor to the beginning of the entry
-and also extends the selection to that point.
-
-=item [11]
-
-The End key, or Control-e, will move the insertion cursor to the
-end of the entry and clear any selection in the entry.
-Shift-End moves the cursor to the end and extends the selection
-to that point.
-
-=item [12]
-
-The Select key and Control-Space set the selection anchor to the position
-of the insertion cursor.  They don't affect the current selection.
-Shift-Select and Control-Shift-Space adjust the selection to the
-current position of the insertion cursor, selecting from the anchor
-to the insertion cursor if there was not any selection previously.
-
-=item [13]
-
-Control-/ selects all the text in the entry.
-
-=item [14]
-
-Control-\ clears any selection in the entry.
-
-=item [15]
-
-The F16 key (labelled Copy on many Sun workstations) or Meta-w
-copies the selection in the widget to the clipboard, if there is a selection.
-
-=item [16]
-
-The F20 key (labelled Cut on many Sun workstations) or Control-w
-copies the selection in the widget to the clipboard and deletes
-the selection.
-If there is no selection in the widget then these keys have no effect.
-
-=item [17]
-
-The F18 key (labelled Paste on many Sun workstations) or Control-y
-inserts the contents of the clipboard at the position of the
-insertion cursor.
-
-=item [18]
-
-The Delete key deletes the selection, if there is one in the entry.
-If there is no selection, it deletes the character to the right of
-the insertion cursor.
-
-=item [19]
-
-The BackSpace key and Control-h delete the selection, if there is one
-in the entry.
-If there is no selection, it deletes the character to the left of
-the insertion cursor.
-
-=item [20]
-
-Control-d deletes the character to the right of the insertion cursor.
-
-=item [21]
-
-Meta-d deletes the word to the right of the insertion cursor.
-
-=item [22]
-
-Control-k deletes all the characters to the right of the insertion
-cursor.
-
-=item [23]
-
-Control-t reverses the order of the two characters to the right of
-the insertion cursor.
-
-If the entry is disabled using the B<-state> option, then the entry's
-view can still be adjusted and text in the entry can still be selected,
-but no insertion cursor will be displayed and no text modifications will
-take place.
-
-The behavior of entries can be changed by defining new bindings for
-individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-entry, widget
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Error.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Error.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 9c38f0b7d74..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Error.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,145 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Error - Method invoked to process background errors
-
-=for category Binding Events and Callbacks
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-Customization:
-
-    require Tk::ErrorDialog;
-
-or
-
-    sub Tk::Error
-    {
-      my ($widget,$error,@locations) = @_;
-      ...
-
-    }
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<Tk::Error> method is invoked by perl/Tk when a background
-error occurs. Two possible implementations are provided in the
-distribution and individual applications or users can (re)define a B<Tk::Error>
-method (e.g. as a perl sub) if they wish to handle background
-errors in some other manner.
-
-A background error is one that occurs in a command that didn't
-originate with the application.  For example, if an error occurs
-while executing a L<callback|Tk::callbacks> specified with a
-L<bind|Tk::bind> or a L<after|Tk::after>
-command, then it is a background error.  For a non-background error,
-the error can simply be returned up through nested subroutines
-until it reaches the top-level code in the application;
-then the application can report the error in whatever way it
-wishes.  When a background error occurs, the unwinding ends in
-the Tk library and there is no obvious way for Tk to report
-the error.
-
-When Tk detects a background error, it saves information about the
-error and invokes the B<Tk::Error> method later when Tk is idle.
-
-B<Tk::Error> is invoked by perl/Tk as if by the perl code:
-
-S<    >I<$mainwindow>-E<gt>B<Tk::Error>(I<"error message">, I<location ...>);
-
-I<$mainwindow> is the B<MainWindow> associated with widget which
-detected the error, I<"error message"> is a string describing the error
-that has been detected, I<location> is a list of one or more "locations"
-which describe the call sequence at the point the error was detected.
-
-The locations are a typically a mixture of perl location reports giving
-script name and line number, and simple strings describing locations in
-core Tk or perl/Tk C code.
-
-Tk will ignore any result returned by the B<Tk::Error> method.
-If another error occurs within the B<Tk::Error> method
-(for example if it calls B<die>) then Tk reports this error
-itself by writing a message to stderr (this is to avoid infinite loops
-due to any bugs in B<Tk::Error>).
-
-If several background errors accumulate before B<Tk::Error>
-is invoked to process them, B<Tk::Error> will be invoked once
-for each error, in the order they occurred.
-However, if B<Tk::Error> calls B<Tk-E<gt>break>, then
-any remaining errors are skipped without calling B<Tk::Error>.
-
-The B<Tk> module includes a default B<Tk::Error> subroutine
-that simply reports the error on stderr.
-
-=head1 Tk::ErrorDialog
-
-An alternate definition is provided via:
-
-S<    >C<require Tk::ErrorDialog;>
-
-that posts a dialog box containing the error message and offers
-the user a chance to see a stack trace showing where the
-error occurred.
-
-This is an OO implementation of the Tcl/Tk command B<bgerror>, with a
-twist: since there is only one B<ErrorDialog> widget, you aren't required
-to invoke the constructor to create it; it will be created
-automatically when the first background error occurs.  However, in
-order to configure the I<-cleanupcode> and I<-appendtraceback>
-B<ErrorDialog> options you must call the constructor and create it
-manually.
-
-The B<ErrorDialog> object essentially consists of two subwidgets: a
-B<Dialog> widget to display the background error and a B<Text> widget
-for the traceback information.  If required, you can invoke various
-widget methods to customize these subwidgets - their advertised names
-are described below.
-
-S<    >I<$mw>-E<gt>B<ErrorDialog>(-cleanupcode => I<code>, -appendtraceback => I<bool>);
-
-$mw is a window reference.
-
-I<code> is a CODE reference if special post-background error
-processing is required (default is undefined). The callback subroutine
-is called with @_ having the same arguments that B<Tk::Error> was
-invoked with.
-
-I<bool> is a boolean indicating whether or not to append successive
-tracebacks (default is 1, do append).
-
-=head2 Advertised ErrorDialog widgets
-
-I<error_dialog> is the Dialog widget reference.
-
-I<text> is the Text widget reference containing the traceback information.
-
-=head1 BUGS
-
-If B<after> or B<fileevent> are not invoked as methods of a widget
-then perl/Tk is unable to provide a I<$mainwindow> argument.
-To support such code from earlier versions of perl/Tk
-perl/Tk therefore calls B<Tk::Error> with string 'Tk' instead:
-B<Tk-E<gt>Tk::Error\(...\)>.
-In this case the B<Tk::Error> in B<Tk::ErrorDialog> and similar
-implementations cannot "popup" a window as they don't know which display
-to use.  A mechanism to supply I<the> B<MainWindow> in applications
-which only have one (a very common case) should be provided.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::bind|Tk::bind>
-L<Tk::after|Tk::after>
-L<Tk::fileevent|Tk::fileevent>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-background error, reporting
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Eventloop.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Eventloop.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index a4c99e7988e..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Eventloop.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Event - ToolKit for Events
-
-=for category Implementation
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
- use Tk::Event;
-
- Tk::Event->fileevent(\*FH, 'readable' => callback);
-
- Tk::Event->lineavail(\*FH, callback);
-
- use Tk::Event::Signal qw(INT);
-
- $SIG{'INT'} = callback;
-
- use Tk::Event::process;
-
- Tk::Event->proc($pid, callback);
-
- QueueEvent(callback [, position])
-
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-
-That is better than nothing but still hard to use. Most scripts want higher
-level result (a line, a "block" of data etc.)
-
-So it has occured to me that we could use new-ish TIEHANDLE thus:
-
- my $obj = tie SOMEHANDLE,Tk::Event::IO;
- 
- while (<SOMEHANDLE>)
-  {
-  }
-
-Then the READLINE routine registers a callback and looks something like:
-
- sub READLINE
-  {
-   my $obj = shift;
-   Event->io(*$obj,'readable',sub { sysread(*$obj,${*$obj},1,length(${*$obj}) });
-   my $pos;
-   while (($pos = index(${*$obj},$/) < 0)
-    {
-     DoOneEvent();
-    }
-   Event->io(*$obj,'readable',''); # unregister
-   $pos += length($/);
-   my $result = substr(${*$obj},0,$pos);
-   substr(${*$obj},0,$pos) = '';
-   return $result;
-  }
-
-This is using the scalar part of the glob representing the _inner_ IO
-as a buffer in which to accumulate chars.
-
-=cut
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/FBox.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/FBox.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index dada482a761..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/FBox.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::FBox - a file dialog
-
-=for pm Tk/FBox.pm
-
-=for category Popups and Dialogs
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-    use Tk::FBox;
-    $file = $mw->FBox(...)->Show;
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-C<Tk::FBox> is the dialog implementation behind the C<getOpenFile>,
-C<getSaveFile>, and C<chooseDirectory> method calls in the Unix/X11
-world. As such, it supports all options for these methods and
-additionally:
-
-=over
-
-=item -sortcmd => sub { $_[0] cmp $_[1] }
-
-Specified a callback for changing the sorting of the icons in the
-C<IconList> widget. By default, perl's C<cmp> operator will be used.
-
-From the source code:
-
-  # Using -sortcmd is really strange :-(
-  # $top->getOpenFile(-sortcmd => sub { package Tk::FBox; uc $b cmp uc $a});
-  # or, un-perlish, but useable (now activated in code):
-  # $top->getOpenFile(-sortcmd => sub { uc $_[1] cmp uc $_[0]});
-
-This is an experimental option!
-
-=item -type => $type
-
-Type should be "open" for choosing existing files to open (default),
-"save" for choosing existing or non-existing files to save, or "dir"
-for choosing directories.
-
-=item -filter => $glob
-
-A file glob to restrict displayed files. This is only active if no
-B<-filetypes> are defined.
-
-=item -force => $bool
-
-If true, then there will be no dialog if a file already exists.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 COPYRIGHT
-
-The original tkfbox.tcl from Tcl/Tk is:
-
-Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-
-See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-
-Translated to Perl/Tk by Slaven Rezic <srezic@cpan.org>.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::getOpenFile>, L<Tk::IconList>.
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/FileSelect.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/FileSelect.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 2ea633de674..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/FileSelect.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,150 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::FileSelect - a widget for choosing files
-
-=for pm Tk/FileSelect.pm
-
-=for category Popups and Dialogs
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
- use Tk::FileSelect;
-
- $FSref = $top->FileSelect(-directory => $start_dir);
-               $top            - a window reference, e.g. MainWindow->new
-               $start_dir      - the starting point for the FileSelect
- $file = $FSref->Show;
-               Executes the fileselector until either a filename is
-               accepted or the user hits Cancel. Returns the filename
-               or the empty string, respectively, and unmaps the
-               FileSelect.
- $FSref->configure(option => value[, ...])
-               Please see the Populate subroutine as the configuration
-               list changes rapidly.
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-This Module pops up a Fileselector box, with a directory entry on
-top, a list of directories in the current directory, a list of
-files in the current directory, an entry for entering/modifying a
-file name, an accept button and a cancel button.
-
-You can enter a starting directory in the directory entry. After
-hitting Return, the listboxes get updated. Double clicking on any
-directory shows you the respective contents. Single clicking on a
-file brings it into the file entry for further consideration,
-double clocking on a file pops down the file selector and calls
-the optional command with the complete path for the selected file.
-Hitting return in the file selector box or pressing the accept
-button will also work. *NOTE* the file selector box will only then
-get destroyed if the file name is not zero length. If you want
-yourself take care of it, change the if(length(.. in sub
-accept_file.
-
-=head1 AUTHORS
-
-Based on original FileSelect by
-Klaus Lichtenwalder, Lichtenwalder@ACM.org, Datapat GmbH, Munich,
-April 22, 1995 adapted by
-Frederick L. Wagner, derf@ti.com, Texas Instruments Incorporated, Dallas,
-21Jun95
-
-=head1 HISTORY
-
-=head2 950621 -- The following changes were made:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item *
-
-Rewrote Tk stuff to take advantage of new Compound widget module, so
-FileSelect is now composed of 2 LabEntry and 2 ScrlListbox2
-subwidgets.
-
-=item *
-
-Moved entry labels (from to the left of) to above the entry fields.
-
-=item *
-
-Caller is now able to control these aspects of widget, in both
-FileSelect (new) and configure :
-
-(Please see subroutine Populate for details, as these options
-change rapidly!)
-
-=item *
-
-I changed from Double-Button-1 to Button-1 in the Files listbox,
-to work with multiple mode in addition to browse mode.  I also
-made some name changes (LastPath --> saved_path, ...).
-
-=item *
-
-The show method is not yet updated.
-
-=item *
-
-The topLevel stuff is not done yet.  I took it out while I toy with
-the idea of FileSelect as a subwidget.  Then the 'normal' topLevel
-thing with Buttons along the bottom could be build on top of it.
-
-=item *
-
-By request of Henry Katz <katz@fs09.webo.dg.com>, I added the functionality
-of using the Directory entry as a filter. So, if you want to only see the
-*.c files, you add a .c (the *'s already there :) and hit return.
-
-=back
-
-=head2 95/10/17, SOL, LUCC.  lusol@Lehigh.EDU
-
-=over 4
-
-=item *
-
- Allow either file or directory names to be accepted.
-
-=item *
-
-Require double click to move into a new directory rather than a single
-click.  This allows a single click to select a directory name so it can
-be accepted.
-
-=item *
-
-Add -verify list option so that standard Perl file test operators (like
--d and -x) can be specified for further name validation.  The default
-value is the special value '!-d' (not a directory), so any name can be
-selected as long as it's not a directory - after all, this IS FileSelect!
-
-For example:
-
-    $fs->configure(-verify => ['-d', [\&verify_code, $P1, $P2, ... $Pn]]);
-
-ensures that the selected name is a directory.  Further, if an element of
-the list is an array reference, the first element is a code reference to a
-subroutine and the remaining optional elements are it's parameters.  The
-subroutine is called like this:
-
-    &verify_code($cd, $leaf, $P1, $P2, ... $Pn);
-
-where $cd is the current directory, $leaf is a directory or file name, and
-$P1 .. $Pn are your optional parameters.  The subroutine should return TRUE
-if success or FALSE if failure.
-
-=back
-
-=head2 961008 -- derf@ti.com :
-
-By request of Jim Stern <js@world.northgrum.com> and Brad Vance
-<bvance@ti.com>, I updated the Accept and Show functions to support
-selection of multiple files.  I also corrected a typo in the -verify code.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::getOpenFile>, L<Tk::FBox>.
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Font.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Font.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 594efa58bca..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Font.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,407 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-font - Create and inspect fonts.
-
-=for category  Tk Generic Methods
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >I<$widget>->B<Font>(I<option>?, I<arg, arg, ...>?)
-
-S<    >I<$font>->I<Option>?(I<arg, arg, ...>)?
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<Font> method provides several facilities for dealing with
-fonts, such as defining named fonts and inspecting the actual attributes of
-a font.  The command has several different forms, determined by the
-first argument.  The following forms are currently supported:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$font>-E<gt>B<actual>(I<-option>?)
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<fontActual>(I<font>?, I<-option>?)
-
-Returns information about the actual attributes that are obtained when
-I<font> is used on I<$font>'s display; the actual attributes obtained
-may differ from the attributes requested due to platform-dependant
-limitations, such as the availability of font families and pointsizes.
-I<font> is a font description; see L<"FONT DESCRIPTION"> below.  If
-I<option> is specified, returns the value of that attribute; if it is
-omitted, the return value is a list of all the attributes and their values.
-See L<"FONT OPTIONS"> below for a list of the possible attributes.
-
-=item I<$font>-E<gt>B<configure>(I<-option>??=>I<value>, I<-option>=>I<value>, ...?)
-
-Query or modify the desired attributes for I<$font>.
-If no I<-option> is specified, returns a list describing
-all the options and their values for I<fontname>.  If a single I<-option>
-is specified with no I<value>, then returns the current value of that
-attribute.  If one or more I<option-value> pairs are specified,
-then the method modifies the given named font to have the given values; in
-this case, all widgets using that font will redisplay themselves using the
-new attributes for the font.  See L<"FONT OPTIONS"> below for a list of the
-possible attributes.
-
-Note: the above behaviour differs in detail to B<configure> on widgets,
-images etc.
-
-=item I<$font> = I<$widget>-E<gt>B<Font>(I<-option>=>I<value>, ...>?)
-
-=item I<$font> = I<$widget>-E<gt>B<fontCreate>(?I<fontname>??, I<-option>=>I<value>, ...>?)
-
-Creates a new font object and returns a reference to it.
-I<fontname> specifies the name for the font; if it is omitted, then Tk generates
-a new name of the form B<font>I<x>, where I<x> is an integer.  There may be any
-number of I<option-value> pairs, which provide the desired attributes for
-the new named font.  See L<"FONT OPTIONS"> below for a list of the possible
-attributes.
-
-Note: the created font is I<not> shared between widgets of different
-L<MainWindow|Tk::MainWindow>s.
-
-=item I<$font>-E<gt>B<delete>
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<fontDelete>(I<fontname>?, I<fontname>, ...?)
-
-Delete the specified named fonts.  If there are widgets using the named font,
-the named font won't actually be deleted until all the instances are
-released.  Those widgets will continue to display using the last known values
-for the named font.  If a deleted named font is subsequently recreated with
-another call to B<fontCreate>, the widgets will use the new named font
-and redisplay themselves using the new attributes of that font.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<fontFamilies>
-
-The return value is a list of the case-insensitive names of all font families
-that exist on I<$widget>'s display.
-
-=item I<$font>-E<gt>B<measure>(I<text>)
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<fontMeasure>(I<font>, I<text>)
-
-Measures the amount of space the string I<text> would use in the given
-I<font> when displayed in I<$widget>.  I<font> is a font description;
-see L<"FONT DESCRIPTION"> below.
-The return value is the total width in pixels
-of I<text>, not including the extra pixels used by highly exagerrated
-characters such as cursive ``I<f>''.  If the string contains newlines or tabs,
-those characters are not expanded or treated specially when measuring the
-string.
-
-=item I<$font>-E<gt>B<metrics>(I<-option>?)
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<fontMetrics>(I<font>?, I<-option>?)
-
-Returns information about the metrics (the font-specific data), for
-I<font> when it is used on I<$widget>'s display.  I<font> is a font
-description; see L<"FONT DESCRIPTION"> below.
-If I<option> is specified,
-returns the value of that metric; if it is omitted, the return value is a
-list of all the metrics and their values.  See L<"FONT METRICS"> below for a list
-of the possible metrics.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<fontNames>
-
-The return value is a list of all font objects that are currently defined for
-I<$widget>'s MainWindow.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 FONT DESCRIPTION
-
-The following formats are accepted as a font description anywhere
-I<font> is specified as an argument above; these same forms are also
-permitted when specifying the B<-font> option for widgets.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item [1] I<fontname>
-
-The name of a named font, created using the B<fontCreate> method.  When
-a widget uses a named font, it is guaranteed that this will never cause an
-error, as long as the named font exists, no matter what potentially invalid
-or meaningless set of attributes the named font has.  If the named font
-cannot be displayed with exactly the specified attributes, some other close
-font will be substituted automatically.
-
-=item [1a] I<$font>
-
-A font object created using the B<Font> method. This is essentially the same
-as using a named font. The object is a reference to the name, and carries
-additional information e.g. which MainWindow it relates to in an manner peculiar
-to perl/Tk.
-
-=item [3] I<systemfont>
-
-The platform-specific name of a font, interpreted by the graphics server.
-This also includes, under X, an XLFD (see L<[4]|/[4]>) for which a single ``B<*>''
-character was used to elide more than one field in the middle of the
-name.  See L<"PLATFORM-SPECIFIC ISSUES"> for a list of the system fonts.
-
-=item [3] [I<family>,?I<size>,??I<style>,??I<style ...>?]
-
-A properly formed list whose first element is the desired font
-I<family> and whose optional second element is the desired I<size>.
-The interpretation of the I<size> attribute follows the same rules
-described for L<-size|/-size> in L<"FONT OPTIONS"> below.  Any additional optional
-arguments following the I<size> are font I<style>s.  Possible values
-for the I<style> arguments are as follows:
-
-    normal	bold	roman	italic
-    underline	overstrike
-
-=item [4] X-font names (XLFD)
-
-A Unix-centric font name of the form
-I<-foundry-family-weight-slant-setwidth-addstyle-pixel-point-resx-resy-spacing-width-charset-encoding>.
-The ``B<*>'' character may be used to skip individual fields that the
-user does not care about.  There must be exactly one ``B<*>'' for each
-field skipped, except that a ``B<*>'' at the end of the XLFD skips any
-remaining fields; the shortest valid XLFD is simply ``B<*>'', signifying
-all fields as defaults.  Any fields that were skipped are given default
-values.  For compatibility, an XLFD always chooses a font of the specified
-pixel size (not point size); although this interpretation is not strictly
-correct, all existing applications using XLFDs assumed that one ``point''
-was in fact one pixel and would display incorrectly (generally larger) if
-the correct size font were actually used.
-
-=item [5] I<option value >?I<option value ...>?
-
-A properly formed list of I<option-value> pairs that specify
-the desired attributes of the font, in the same format used when defining
-a named font; see L<"FONT OPTIONS"> below.
-
-=back
-
-When font description I<font> is used, the system attempts to parse the
-description according to each of the above five rules, in the order specified.
-Cases [1] and [2] must match the name of an existing named font or of a
-system font.  Cases [3], [4], and [5] are accepted on all
-platforms and the closest available font will be used.  In some situations
-it may not be possible to find any close font (e.g., the font family was
-a garbage value); in that case, some system-dependant default font is
-chosen.  If the font description does not match any of the above patterns,
-an error is generated.
-
-=head1 FONT METRICS
-
-The following options are used by the B<metrics>/B<fontMetrics> method to query
-font-specific data determined when the font was created.  These properties are
-for the whole font itself and not for individual characters drawn in that
-font.  In the following definitions, the ``baseline'' of a font is the
-horizontal line where the bottom of most letters line up; certain letters,
-such as lower-case ``g'' stick below the baseline.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-ascent>
-
-The amount in pixels that the tallest letter sticks up above the baseline of
-the font, plus any extra blank space added by the designer of the font.
-(I<$font>-E<gt>B<ascent> is provided for compatibility.)
-
-=item B<-descent>
-
-The largest amount in pixels that any letter sticks down below the baseline
-of the font, plus any extra blank space added by the designer of the font.
-(I<$font>-E<gt>B<descent> is provided for compatibility.)
-
-=item B<-linespace>
-
-Returns how far apart vertically in pixels two lines of text using the same
-font should be placed so that none of the characters in one line overlap any
-of the characters in the other line.  This is generally the sum of the ascent
-above the baseline line plus the descent below the baseline.
-
-=item B<-fixed>
-
-Returns a boolean flag that is ``B<1>'' if this is a fixed-width font,
-where each normal character is the the same width as all the other
-characters, or is ``B<0>'' if this is a proportionally-spaced font, where
-individual characters have different widths.  The widths of control
-characters, tab characters, and other non-printing characters are not
-included when calculating this value.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 FONT OPTIONS
-
-The following options are supported on all platforms, and are used when
-constructing a named font or when specifying a font using style [5] as
-above:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-family> => I<name>
-
-The case-insensitive font family name.  Tk guarantees to support the font
-families named B<Courier> (a monospaced ``typewriter'' font), B<Times>
-(a serifed ``newspaper'' font), and B<Helvetica> (a sans-serif
-``European'' font).  The most closely matching native font family will
-automatically be substituted when one of the above font families is used.
-The I<name> may also be the name of a native, platform-specific font
-family; in that case it will work as desired on one platform but may not
-display correctly on other platforms.  If the family is unspecified or
-unrecognized, a platform-specific default font will be chosen.
-
-=item B<-size> => I<size>
-
-The desired size of the font.  If the I<size> argument is a positive
-number, it is interpreted as a size in points.  If I<size> is a negative
-number, its absolute value is interpreted as a size in pixels.  If a
-font cannot be displayed at the specified size, a nearby size will be
-chosen.  If I<size> is unspecified or zero, a platform-dependent default
-size will be chosen.
-
-The original Tcl/Tk authors believe sizes should normally be specified in points
-so the application will remain the same ruler size on the screen, even when
-changing screen resolutions or moving scripts across platforms. While this is an
-admirable goal it does not work as well in practice as they hoped.
-The mapping between points and  pixels is set when the application starts, based
-on alleged properties of the installed monitor, but it can be overridden by
-calling the  L<scaling|Tk::Widget/scaling> command. However this can be
-problematic when system has no way of telling if (say) an 11" or 22" monitor is
-attached, also if it I<can> tell then some monitor sizes may result in poorer
-quality scaled fonts being used rather than a "tuned" bitmap font.
-In addition specifying pixels is useful in certain circumstances such as when a piece of text
-must line up with respect to a fixed-size bitmap.
-
-At present the Tcl/Tk scheme is used unchanged, with "point" size being returned
-by I<actual> (as an integer), and used internally. Suggestions for work-rounds
-to undesirable behaviour welcome.
-
-=item B<-weight> => I<weight>
-
-The nominal thickness of the characters in the font.  The value
-B<normal> specifies a normal weight font, while B<bold> specifies a
-bold font.  The closest available weight to the one specified will
-be chosen.  The default weight is B<normal>.
-
-=item B<-slant> => I<slant>
-
-The amount the characters in the font are slanted away from the
-vertical.  Valid values for slant are B<roman> and B<italic>.
-A roman font is the normal, upright appearance of a font, while
-an italic font is one that is tilted some number of degrees from upright.
-The closest available slant to the one specified will be chosen.
-The default slant is B<roman>.
-
-=item B<-underline> => I<boolean>
-
-The value is a boolean flag that specifies whether characters in this
-font should be underlined.  The default value for underline is B<false>.
-
-=item B<-overstrike> => I<boolean>
-
-The value is a boolean flag that specifies whether a horizontal line should
-be drawn through the middle of characters in this font.  The default value
-for overstrike is B<false>.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 PLATFORM-SPECIFIC ISSUES
-
-The following named system fonts are supported:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item X Windows:
-
-All valid X font names, including those listed by xlsfonts(1), are available.
-
-=item MS Windows:
-
- system       ansi       device
- systemfixed  ansifixed  oemfixed
-
-=item Macintosh:
-
- system       application
-
-=back
-
-=head1 COMPATIBILITY WITH PREVIOUS VERSIONS
-
-In prior versions of perl/Tk the I<$widget>-E<gt>B<Font> method was a perl
-wrapper on the original "[4] X-font names (XLFD)" style as described above
-(which was the only form supported by versions of core tk prior to version
-tk8.0).
-This module is provided in its original form (it has just been renamed)
-via:
-
- use Tk::X11Font;
- I<$widget>-E<gt>B<X11Font>(...)
-
-However the methods of the old scheme have been mimiced as closely as possible
-with the new scheme. It is intended that code should work without modification,
-except for the case of using :
-
-  @names = $font->Name;
-
-i.e. the I<Name> method in an array/list context. This now returns one element
-on all platforms (as it did on Win32), while previously on X systems it returned
-a list of fonts that matched an under-specified pattern.
-
-Briefly the methods supported for compatibilty are as follows:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item $newfont = I<$font>-E<gt>B<Clone>(I<-option>=>I<value>, ...>?)
-
-Returns a new font object I<$newfont> related to the original I<$font> by
-changing the values of the specified I<-option>s.
-
-=item I<$font>-E<gt>Family - maps to -family
-
-=item I<$font>-E<gt>Weight - maps to -weight
-
-=item I<$font>-E<gt>Slant - maps to -slant
-
-=item I<$font>-E<gt>Pixel and Point - map to -size
-
-=back
-
-New code should use I<$font>-E<gt>B<configure> to achieve same effect as last
-four items above.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Foundry, Swidth, Adstyle, Xres, Yres, Space, Avgwidth, Registry, Encoding
-
-Are all ignored if set, and return '*' if queried.
-
-=item I<$font>-E<gt>B<Name>
-
-Returns the name of a named font, or a string representation of an unnamed
-font. Using I<$font> in a scalar context does the same. Note this is distinctly
-different from behaviour of L<X11Font's Name|Tk::X11Font/Name( [ $max ] )> in
-a list context.
-
-=item I<$font>-E<gt>B<Pattern>
-
-Returns a XLFD string for the font based on I<actual> values, and some heuristics
-to map Tk's forms to the "standard" X conventions.
-
-=back
-
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::options|Tk::options>
-
-L<Tk::X11Font|Tk::X11Font>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-font
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Frame.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Frame.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 6570b6a18c7..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Frame.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,146 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Frame - Create and manipulate Frame widgets
-
-=for category  Tk Widget Classes
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >I<$frame> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<Frame>(?I<options>?);
-
-=head1 STANDARD OPTIONS
-
-B<-borderwidth>	B<-highlightbackground>	B<-highlightthickness>	B<-takefocus>
-B<-class>	B<-highlightcolor>	B<-relief>
-B<-cursor>
-
-See L<Tk::options> for details of the standard options.
-
-=head1 WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Name:	B<background>
-
-=item Class:	B<Background>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-background>
-
-This option is the same as the standard B<background> option
-except that its value may also be specified as an undefined value.
-In this case, the widget will display no background or border, and
-no colors will be consumed from its colormap for its background
-and border.
-
-=item Name:	B<colormap>
-
-=item Class:	B<Colormap>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-colormap>
-
-Specifies a colormap to use for the window.
-The value may be either B<new>, in which case a new colormap is
-created for the window and its children, or the name of another
-window (which must be on the same screen and have the same visual
-as $widget), in which case the new window will use the colormap
-from the specified window.
-If the B<colormap> option is not specified, the new window
-uses the same colormap as its parent.
-This option may not be changed with the B<configure>
-method.
-
-=item Name:	B<container>
-
-=item Class:	B<Container>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-container>
-
-The value must be a boolean.  If true, it means that this window will
-be used as a container in which some other application will be embedded
-(for example, a Tk toplevel can be embedded using the B<-use> option).
-The window will support the appropriate window manager protocols for
-things like geometry requests.  The window should not have any
-children of its own in this application.
-This option may not be changed with the B<configure>
-method.
-
-=item Name:	B<height>
-
-=item Class:	B<Height>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-height>
-
-Specifies the desired height for the window in any of the forms
-acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-If this option is less than or equal to zero then the window will
-not request any size at all.
-
-=item Name:	B<visual>
-
-=item Class:	B<Visual>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-visual>
-
-Specifies visual information for the new window in any of the
-forms accepted by B<Tk_GetVisual>.
-If this option is not specified, the new window will use the same
-visual as its parent.
-The B<visual> option may not be modified with the B<configure>
-method.
-
-=item Name:	B<width>
-
-=item Class:	B<Width>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-width>
-
-Specifies the desired width for the window in any of the forms
-acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-If this option is less than or equal to zero then the window will
-not request any size at all.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<Frame> method creates a new window (given by the
-$widget argument) and makes it into a frame widget.
-Additional
-options, described above, may be specified on the command line
-or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the frame such as its background color
-and relief.  The B<frame> command returns the
-path name of the new window.
-
-A frame is a simple widget.  Its primary purpose is to act as a
-spacer or container for complex window layouts.  The only features
-of a frame are its background color and an optional 3-D border to make the
-frame appear raised or sunken.
-
-=head1 WIDGET METHODS
-
-The B<Frame> method creates a widget object.
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-The widget also inherits all the methods provided by the generic
-L<Tk::Widget|Tk::Widget> class.
-
-=head1 BINDINGS
-
-When a new frame is created, it has no default event bindings:
-frames are not intended to be interactive.
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-frame, widget
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/HList.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/HList.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 0843e689843..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/HList.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1050 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1996, Expert Interface Technologies
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#  The file man.macros and some of the macros used by this file are
-#  copyrighted: (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-#               (c) 1994-1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  The license terms of the Tcl/Tk distribution are in the file
-#  license.tcl.
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::HList - Create and manipulate Tix Hierarchial List widgets
-
-=for category  Tk Widget Classes
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-I<$hlist> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<HList>(?I<options>?);
-
-=head1 STANDARD OPTIONS
-
-B<-background>	B<-borderwidth>	B<-cursor>	B<-exportselection>
-B<-foreground>	B<-font>	B<-height>	B<-highlightcolor>
-B<-highlightthickness>	B<-relief>	B<-selectbackground>
-B<-selectforeground>	B<-xscrollcommand>	B<-yscrollcommand>
-B<-width>
-
-See L<Tk::options> for details of the standard options.
-
-=head1 WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Name:	B<browsecmd>
-
-=item Class:	B<BrowseCmd>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-browsecmd>
-
-Specifies a perl/Tk L<callback|Tk::callbacks> to be executed when the user browses through the
-entries in the HList widget.
-
-=item Name:	B<columns>
-
-=item Class:	B<Columns>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-columns>
-
-Specifies the number of columns in this HList widget. This option can
-only be set during the creation of the HList widget and cannot be
-changed subsequently.
-
-=item Name:	B<command>
-
-=item Class:	B<Command>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-command>
-
-Specifies the perl/Tk L<callback|Tk::callbacks> to be executed when the user invokes a list
-entry in the HList widget. Normally the user invokes a list
-entry by double-clicking it or pressing the Return key.
-
-=item Name:	B<drawBranch>
-
-=item Class:	B<DrawBranch>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-drawbranch>
-
-A Boolean value to specify whether branch line should be drawn to
-connect list entries to their parents.
-
-=item Name:	B<foreground>
-
-=item Class:	B<Foreground>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-foreground>
-
-=item Alias:	B<-fg>
-
-B<[OBSOLETE]> Specifies the default foreground color for the list entries.
-
-=item Name:	B<gap>
-
-=item Class:	B<Gap>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-gap>
-
-B<[OBSOLETE]> The default distance between the bitmap/image and the
-text in list entries.
-
-=item Name:	B<header>
-
-=item Class:	B<Header>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-header>
-
-A Boolean value specifying whether headers should be displayed for
-this HList widget (see the B<header> method below).
-
-=item Name:	B<height>
-
-=item Class:	B<Height>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-height>
-
-Specifies the desired height for the window in number of characters.
-
-=item Name:	B<indent>
-
-=item Class:	B<Indent>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-indent>
-
-Specifies the amount of horizontal indentation between a list entry
-and its children. Must be a valid screen distance value.
-
-=item Name:	B<indicator>
-
-=item Class:	B<Indicator>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-indicator>
-
-Specifies whether the indicators should be displayed inside the HList
-widget. See the B<indicator> method below.
-
-=item Name:	B<indicatorCmd>
-
-=item Class:	B<IndicatorCmd>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-indicatorcmd>
-
-Specifies a perl/Tk L<callback|Tk::callbacks> to be executed when the user manipulates the
-indicator of an HList entry. The B<-indicatorcmd> is triggered
-when the user press or releases the mouse button over the indicator in
-an HList entry. By default the perl/Tk B<callback> specified by
-B<-indicatorcmd> is executed with two additional arguments, the
-entryPath of the entry whose indicator has been triggered and additional
-information about the event.  The additional information is one of the
-following strings:  B<E<lt>ArmE<gt>>, B<E<lt>DisarmE<gt>>,
-and B<E<lt>ActivateE<gt>>.
-
-=item Name:	B<itemType>
-
-=item Class:	B<ItemType>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-itemtype>
-
-Specifies the default type of display item for this HList widget. When
-you call the B<itemCreate>, B<add> and B<addchild> methods, display
-items of this
-type will be created if the B<-itemtype> option is not specified .
-
-=item Name:	B<padX>
-
-=item Class:	B<Pad>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-padx>
-
-B<[OBSOLETE]> The default horizontal padding for list entries.
-
-=item Name:	B<padY>
-
-=item Class:	B<Pad>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-padx>
-
-B<[OBSOLETE]> The default vertical padding for list entries.
-
-=item Name:	B<selectBackground>
-
-=item Class:	B<SelectBackground>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-selectbackground>
-
-Specifies the background color for the selected list entries.
-
-=item Name:	B<selectBorderWidth>
-
-=item Class:	B<BorderWidth>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-selectborderwidth>
-
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating the width of the 3-D border
-to draw around selected items.  The value may have any of the forms
-acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-
-=item Name:	B<selectForeground>
-
-=item Class:	B<SelectForeground>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-selectforeground>
-
-Specifies the foreground color for the selected list entries.
-
-=item Name:	B<selectMode>
-
-=item Class:	B<SelectMode>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-selectmode>
-
-Specifies one of several styles for manipulating the selection.  The
-value of the option may be arbitrary, but the default bindings expect
-it to be either B<single>, B<browse>, B<multiple>, or
-B<extended>; the default value is B<single>.
-
-=item Name:	B<sizeCmd>
-
-=item Class:	B<SizeCmd>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-sizecmd>
-
-Specifies a perl/Tk L<callback|Tk::callbacks> to be called whenever the HList widget
-changes its size.  This method can be useful to implement ``I<user scroll
-bars when needed>'' features.
-
-=item Name:	B<separator>
-
-=item Class:	B<Separator>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-separator>
-
-Specifies the character to used as the separator character when
-intepreting the path-names of list entries. By default the character
-"." is used.
-
-=item Name:	B<width>
-
-=item Class:	B<Width>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-width>
-
-Specifies the desired width for the window in characters.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<HList> method creates a new window (given by the
-$widget argument) and makes it into a HList widget.
-Additional options, described above, may be specified on the command
-line or in the option database to configure aspects of the
-HList widget such as its cursor and relief.
-
-The HList widget can be used to display any data that have a
-hierarchical structure, for example, file system directory trees. The
-list entries are indented and connected by branch lines according to
-their places in the hierachy.
-
-Each list entry is identified by an B<entryPath>. The entryPath is a
-sequence of B<entry names> separated by the separator charactor
-(specified by the B<-separator> option). An B<entry name> can be
-any string that does not contain the separator charactor, or it can be
-the a string that contains only one separator charactor.
-
-For example, when "." is used as the separator charactor,
-"one.two.three" is the entryPath for a list entry whose parent is
-"one.two", whose parent is "one", which is a toplevel entry (has no
-parents).
-
-Another examples: ".two.three" is the entryPath for a list entry whose
-parent is ".two", whose parent is ".", which is a toplevel entry.
-
-=head1 DISPLAY ITEMS
-
-Each list entry in an HList widget is associated with a B<display>
-item.  The display item determines what visual information should
-be displayed for this list entry. Please see L<Tk::DItem>
-for a list of all display items.
-When a list entry is created by the B<itemCreate>, B<add> or
-B<addchild> widget
-methods, the type of its display item is determined by the
-B<-itemtype> option passed to these methods. If the
-B<-itemtype> is omitted, then by default the type specified by
-this HList widget's B<-itemtype> option is used.
-
-=head1 WIDGET METHODS
-
-The B<HList> method creates a widget object.
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-The widget also inherits all the methods provided by the generic
-L<Tk::Widget|Tk::Widget> class.
-
-The following additional methods are available HList widgets:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<add>(I<$entryPath> ?,I<option>=E<gt>I<value>, ...?)
-
-Creates a new list entry with the pathname I<$entryPath>. A list
-entry must be created after its parent is created (unless this entry
-is a top-level entry, which has no parent).  See also L<"BUGS"> below.
-This method returns the
-entryPath of the newly created list entry. The following
-configuration options can be given to configure the list entry:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item B<-at> =E<gt> I<position>
-
-Insert the new list at the position given by I<position>.
-I<position> must be a valid integer. The position B<0> indicates
-the first position, B<1> indicates the second position, and so on.
-
-=item B<-after> =E<gt> I<afterWhich>
-
-Insert the new list entry after the entry identified by
-I<afterWhich>. I<afterWhich> must be a valid list entry and it
-mush have the same parent as the new list entry
-
-=item B<-before> =E<gt> I<beforeWhich>
-
-Insert the new list entry before the entry identified by
-I<beforeWhich>. I<beforeWhich> must be a valid list entry and it
-mush have the same parent as the new list entry
-
-=item B<-data> =E<gt> I<string>
-
-Specifies a string to associate with this list entry. This string can
-be queried by the B<info> method. The application
-programmer can use the B<-data> option to associate the list entry
-with the data it represents.
-
-=item B<-itemtype> =E<gt> I<type>
-
-Specifies the type of display item to be display for the new list
-entry. B<type> must be a valid display item type. Currently the
-available display item types are B<imagetext>, B<text>, and
-$widget. If this option is not specified, then by default the
-type specified by this HList widget's B<-itemtype> option is used.
-
-=item B<-state> =E<gt> I<state>
-
-Specifies whether this entry can be selected or invoked by the user.
-Must be either B<normal> or B<disabled>.
-
-=back
-
-The B<add> method accepts additional configuration options
-to configure the display item associated with this list entry. The set
-of additional configuration options depends on the type of the display
-item given by the B<-itemtype> option. Please see
-L<Tk::DItem> for a list of the configuration options for
-each of the display item types.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<addchild>(I<$parentPath, >?I<option, value, ..., >?)
-
-Adds a new child entry to the children list of the list entry
-identified by I<$parentPath>. Or, if I<$parentPath> is set to be
-the empty string, then creates a new toplevel entry. The name of the
-new list entry will be a unique name automatically generated by the
-HList widget. Usually if I<$parentPath> is B<foo>, then the
-entryPath of the new entry will be B<foo.0>, B<foo.1>, ... etc.
-This method returns the entryPath of the newly created list entry.
-I<option> can be any option for the B<add> method.
-See also L<"BUGS"> below.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<anchorSet>(I<$entryPath>)
-
-Sets the anchor to the list entry identified by I<$entryPath>.  The
-anchor is the end of the selection that is fixed while the user is
-dragging out a selection with the mouse.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<anchorClear>
-
-Removes the anchor, if any, from this HList widget. This only
-removes the surrounding highlights of the anchor entry and does not
-affect its selection status.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<columnWidth>(I<$col>?, I<-char>?, ?I<width>?)
-
-Querys or sets the width of a the column I<$col> in the HList
-widget. The value of I<$col> is zero-based: 0 stands for the first
-column, 1 stands for the second, and so on. If no further parameters
-are given, returns the current width of this column (in number of
-pixels). Additional parameters can be given to set the width of this
-column:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<columnWidth>(I<$col>, B<''>)
-
-An empty string indicates that the width of the column should be just
-wide enough to display the widest element in this column. In this
-case, the width of this column may change as a result of the elements
-in this column changing their sizes.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<columnWidth>(I<$col, >I<width>)
-
-I<width> must be in a form accepted by B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<columnWidth>(I<$col, >B<-char, >I<nChars>)
-
-The width is set to be the average width occupied by I<nChars>
-number of characters of the font specified by the B<-font> option
-of this HList widget.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<delete>(I<option>, I<$entryPath>)
-
-Delete one or more list entries. I<option> may be one of the
-following:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item B<all>
-
-Delete all entries in the HList. In this case the I<$entryPath>
-does not need to be specified.
-
-=item B<entry>
-
-Delete the entry specified by I<$entryPath> and all its offsprings,
-if any.
-
-=item B<offsprings>
-
-Delete all the offsprings, if any, of the entry specified by
-I<$entryPath>. However, I<$entryPath> itself is not deleted.
-
-=item B<siblings>
-
-Delete all the list entries that share the same parent with the entry
-specified by I<$entryPath>. However, I<$entryPath> itself is not
-deleted.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<dragsiteSet>(I<$entryPath>)
-
-Sets the dragsite to the list entry identified by
-I<$entryPath>. The dragsite is used to indicate the source of a
-drag-and-drop action. Currently drag-and-drop functionality has not
-been implemented in Tix yet.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<dragsiteClear>
-
-Remove the dragsite, if any, from the this HList widget. This only
-removes the surrounding highlights of the dragsite entry and does not
-affect its selection status.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<dropsiteSet>(I<$entryPath>)
-
-Sets the dropsite to the list entry identified by I<$entryPath>. The
-dropsite is used to indicate the target of a drag-and-drop
-action. Currently drag-and-drop functionality has not been implemented
-in Tix yet.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<dropsiteClear>
-
-Remove the dropsite, if any, from the this HList widget. This only
-removes the surrounding highlights of the dropsite entry and does not
-affect its selection status.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<entrycget>(I<$entryPath>, I<option>)
-
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given by
-I<option> for the entry indentfied by I<$entryPath>. I<Option>
-may have any of the values accepted by the B<add> method.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<entryconfigure>(I<$entryPath> ?,I<option>?, ?I<value>=E<gt>I<option>, ...?)
-
-Query or modify the configuration options of the list entry indentfied
-by I<$entryPath>. If no I<option> is specified, returns a list
-describing all of the available options for I<$entryPath> (see
-L<Tk::options> for information on the format of this list.) If
-I<option> is specified with no I<value>, then the method
-returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be
-identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no
-I<option> is specified). If one or more I<option-value> pairs
-are specified, then the method modifies the given option(s) to have
-the given value(s); in this case the method returns an empty string.
-I<Option> may have any of the values accepted by the B<add> or
-B<addchild> method. The exact set of options depends on the
-value of the B<-itemtype> option passed to the the B<add> or
-B<addchild> method when this list entry is created.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<header>(I<option>, I<$col> ?,I<args>, ...?)
-
-Manipulates the header items of this HList widget. If the
-B<-header> option of this HList widget is set to true, then a
-header item is displayed at the top of each column. The I<$col>
-argument for this method must be a valid integer. 0 indicates the
-first column, 1 the second column, ... and so on. This method
-supports the following options:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<header>(B<cget>, I<$col>, I<option>)
-
-If the I<$col>-th column has a header display item, returns the
-value of the specified I<option> of the header item. If the header
-doesn't exist, returns an error.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<header>(B<configure, >I<$col, >?I<option>?, I<?value, option, value, ...>?)
-
-Query or modify the configuration options of the header display item
-of the I<$col>-th column. The header item must exist, or an error
-will result.  If no I<option> is specified, returns a list
-describing all of the available options for the header display item
-(see L<Tk::options> for information on the format of this
-list.) If I<option> is specified with no I<value>, then the
-method returns a list describing the one named option (this list will
-be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no
-I<option> is specified). If one or more I<option-value> pairs
-are specified, then the method modifies the given option(s) to have
-the given value(s); in this case the method returns an empty
-string. I<Option> may have any of the values accepted by the
-B<header create> method. The exact set of options depends
-on the value of the B<-itemtype> option passed to the the B<header>
-create method when this display item was created.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<header>(B<create, >I<$col, >?I<-itemtype type>? ?I<option value ...>?
-
-Creates a new display item as the header for the I<$col>-th
-column. See also L<"BUGS"> below.
-If an header display item already exists for this column, it
-will be replaced by the new item.  An optional parameter
-I<-itemtype> can be used to specify what type of display item
-should be created. If the I<-itemtype> is not given, then by
-default the type specified by this HList widget's B<-itemtype>
-option is used. Additional parameters, in I<option-value> pairs,
-can be passed to configure the appearance of the display item. Each
-I<option-value> pair must be a valid option for this type of
-display item or one of the following:
-
-=over 12
-
-=item B<-borderwidth> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-Specifies the border width of this header item.
-
-=item B<-headerbackground> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-Specifies the background color of this header item.
-
-=item B<-relief> =E<gt> I<type>
-
-Specifies the relief type of the border of this header item.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<header>(B<delete, >I<$col>)
-
-Deletes the header display item for the I<$col>-th column.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<header>(B<exists, >I<$col>)
-
-Return true if an header display item exists for the I<$col>-th
-column; return false otherwise.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<header>(B<size>, I<$col>)
-
-If an header display item exists for the I<$col>-th column , returns
-its size in pixels in a two element list I<(width, height)>;
-returns an error if the header display item does not exist.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<hide>(I<option> ?,I<$entryPath>?)
-
-Makes some of entries invisible without deleting them.
-I<Option> can be one of the following:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item B<entry>
-
-Hides the list entry identified by I<$entryPath>.
-
-=back
-
-Currently only the B<entry> option is supported. Other options will
-be added in the next release.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<indicator>(I<option>, I<$entryPath>, ?I<args, ...>?)
-
-Manipulates the indicator on the list entries. An indicator is usually
-a small display item (such as an image) that is displayed to the left
-to an entry to indicate the status of the entry.  For example, it may
-be used to indicate whether a directory is opened or
-closed.  I<Option> can be one of the following:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<indicator>(B<cget>, I<$entryPath>, I<option>)
-
-If the list entry given by I<$entryPath> has an indicator, returns
-the value of the specified I<option> of the indicator. If the
-indicator doesn't exist, returns an error.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<indicator>(B<configure>, I<$entryPath>, ?I<option>?, I<?value, option, value, ...>?)
-
-Query or modify the configuration options of the indicator display
-item of the entry specified by I<$entryPath>. The indicator item
-must exist, or an error will result.  If no I<option> is specified,
-returns a list describing all of the available options for the
-indicator display item (see L<Tk::options> for information
-on the format of this list). If I<option> is specified with no
-I<value>, then the method returns a list describing the one named
-option (this list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of
-the value returned if no I<option> is specified). If one or more
-I<option-value> pairs are specified, then the method modifies the
-given option(s) to have the given value(s); in this case the method
-returns an empty string.  I<Option> may have any of the values
-accepted by the B<indicator create> method. The exact set
-of options depends on the value of the B<-itemtype> option passed
-to the the B<indicator create> method when this display item
-was created.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<indicator>(B<create, >I<$entryPath, >?, I<-itemtype type>? ?I<option value ...>?)
-
-Creates a new display item as the indicator for the entry specified by
-I<$entryPath>. If an indicator display item already exists for this
-entry, it will be replaced by the new item.  An optional parameter
-I<-itemtype> can be used to specify what type of display item
-should be created. If the I<-itemtype> is not given, then by
-default the type specified by this HList widget's B<-itemtype>
-option is used. Additional parameters, in I<option-value> pairs,
-can be passed to configure the appearance of the display item. Each
-I<option-value> pair must be a valid option for this type of
-display item.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<indicator>(B<delete>, I<$entryPath>)
-
-Deletes the indicator display item for the entry given by I<$entryPath>.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<indicator>(B<exists>, I<$entryPath>)
-
-Return true if an indicator display item exists for the entry given by
-I<$entryPath>; return false otherwise.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<indicator>(B<size>, I<$entryPath>)
-
-If an indicator display item exists for the entry given by
-I<$entryPath>, returns its size in a two element list of the form
-{I<width height>}; returns an error if the indicator display item
-does not exist.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<info>(I<option>, I<arg, ...>)
-
-Query information about the HList widget. I<option> can be one
-of the following:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<info>(B<anchor>)
-
-Returns the entryPath of the current anchor, if any, of the HList
-widget. If the anchor is not set, returns the empty string.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<infoBbox>(I<$entryPath>)
-
-Returns a list of four numbers describing the visible bounding box of
-the entry given I<$entryPath>. The first two elements of the list
-give the x and y coordinates of the upper-left corner of the screen
-area covered by the entry (specified in pixels relative to the widget)
-and the last two elements give the lower-right corner of the area, in
-pixels. If no part of the entry given by index is visible on the
-screen then the result is an empty string; if the entry is partially
-visible, the result gives the only the visible area of the entry.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<info>(B<children> ?,I<$entryPath>?)
-
-If I<$entryPath> is given, returns a list of the entryPath's of its
-children entries. Otherwise returns a list of the toplevel
-entryPath's.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<info>(B<data> ?,I<$entryPath>?)
-
-Returns the data associated with I<$entryPath>.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<info>(B<dragsite>)
-
-Returns the entryPath of the current dragsite, if any, of the HList
-widget. If the dragsite is not set, returns the empty string.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<info>(B<dropsite>)
-
-Returns the entryPath of the current dropsite, if any, of the HList
-widget. If the dropsite is not set, returns the empty string.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<info>(B<exists>, I<$entryPath>)
-
-Returns a boolean value indicating whether the list entry
-I<$entryPath> exists.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<info>(B<hidden>, I<$entryPath>)
-
-Returns a boolean value indicating whether the list entry
-B<$entryPath> is hidden or not.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<info>(B<next>, I<$entryPath>)
-
-Returns the entryPath of the list entry, if any, immediately below
-this list entry. If this entry is already at the bottom of the HList
-widget, returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<info>(B<parent>, I<$entryPath>)
-
-Returns the name of the parent of the list entry identified by
-I<$entryPath>. If I<entryPath> is a toplevel list entry,
-returns the empty string.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<info>(B<prev>, I<$entryPath>)
-
-Returns the entryPath of the list entry, if any, immediately above
-this list entry. If this entry is already at the top of the HList
-widget, returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<info>(B<selection>)
-
-Returns a list of selected entries in the HList widget. In scalar
-context, returns an anonymous list of the selected entries.
-If no entries are selected, undef is returned in scalar context, and
-an empty list otherwise.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<item>(I<option, >?I<args, ...>?)
-
-Creates and configures the display items at individual columns the
-entries. The form of additional of arguments depends on the choice of
-I<option>:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<itemCget>(I<$entryPath>, I<$col>, I<option>)
-
-Returns the current value of the configure I<option> of the display
-item at the column designated by I<$col> of the entry specified by
-I<$entryPath>.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<itemConfigure>(I<$entryPath>, I<$col> ?,I<option>?, I<?value, option, value, ...>?)
-
-Query or modify the configuration options of the display item at the
-column designated by I<$col> of the entry specified by
-I<$entryPath>. If no I<option> is specified, returns a list
-describing all of the available options for I<$entryPath> (see
-L<Tk::options> for information on the format of this
-list). If I<option> is specified with no I<value>, then the
-method returns a list describing the one named option (this list will
-be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no
-I<option> is specified). If one or more I<option-value> pairs
-are specified, then the method modifies the given option(s) to have
-the given value(s); in this case the method returns an empty string.
-I<Option> may have any of the values accepted by the B<item>
-create method. The exact set of options depends on the
-value of the B<-itemtype> option passed to the the B<item>
-create method when this display item was created.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<itemCreate>(I<$entryPath>, I<$col> ?,I<-itemtype>=E<gt>I<type>? ?,I<option value ...>?)
-
-Creates a new display item at the column designated by I<$col> of
-the entry specified by I<$entryPath>. An optional parameter
-I<-itemtype> can be used to specify what type of display items
-should be created. If the I<-itemtype> is not specified, then by
-default the type specified by this HList widget's B<-itemtype>
-option is used.  Additional parameters, in I<option-value> pairs,
-can be passed to configure the appearance of the display item. Each
-I<option- value> pair must be a valid option for this type of
-display item.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<itemDelete>(I<$entryPath>, I<$col>)
-
-Deletes the display item at the column designated by I<$col> of
-the entry specified by I<$entryPath>.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<itemExists>(I<$entryPath>, I<$col>)
-
-Returns true if there is a display item at the column designated by
-I<$col> of the entry specified by I<$entryPath>; returns false
-otherwise.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<nearest>(I<y>)
-
-I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<nearest>(I<y>)
-Given a y-coordinate within the HList window, this method returns
-the entryPath of the (visible) HList element nearest to that
-y-coordinate.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<see>(I<$entryPath>)
-
-Adjust the view in the HList so that the entry given by I<$entryPath> is
-visible. If the entry is already visible then the method has no
-effect; if the entry is near one edge of the window then the HList
-scrolls to bring the element into view at the edge; otherwise the
-HList widget scrolls to center the entry.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<selection>(I<option>, I<arg>, ...)
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<selection>I<Option>(I<arg>, ...)
-
-This method is used to adjust the selection within a HList widget. It
-has several forms, depending on I<option>:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<selectionClear>(?I<from>?, ?I<to>?)
-
-When no extra arguments are given, deselects all of the list entrie(s)
-in this HList widget. When only I<from> is given, only the list
-entry identified by I<from> is deselected. When both I<from> and
-I<to> are given, deselects all of the list entrie(s) between
-between I<from> and I<to>, inclusive, without affecting the
-selection state of elements outside that range.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<selectionGet>
-
-This is an alias for the B<infoSelection> method.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<selectionIncludes>(I<$entryPath>)
-
-Returns 1 if the list entry indicated by I<$entryPath> is currently
-selected; returns 0 otherwise.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<selectionSet>(I<from>?, I<to>?)
-
-Selects all of the list entrie(s) between between I<from> and
-I<to>, inclusive, without affecting the selection state of entries
-outside that range. When only I<from> is given, only the list entry
-identified by I<from> is selected.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<show>(I<option> ?,I<$entryPath>?)
-
-Show the entries that are hidden by the B<hide> method,
-I<option> can be one of the following:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item B<entry>
-
-Shows the list entry identified by I<$entryPath>.
-
-=back
-
-Currently only the B<entry> option is supported. Other options will
-be added in future releases.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<xview>(I<args>)
-
-This method is used to query and change the horizontal position of the
-information in the widget's window. It can take any of the following
-forms:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<xview>
-
-Returns a list containing two elements.  Each element is a real
-fraction between 0 and 1; together they describe the horizontal span
-that is visible in the window.  For example, if the first element is
-.2 and the second element is .6, 20% of the HList entry is
-off-screen to the left, the middle 40% is visible in the window, and
-40% of the entry is off-screen to the right. These are the same values
-passed to scrollbars via the B<-xscrollcommand> option.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<xview>(I<$entryPath>)
-
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the list entry identified by
-I<$entryPath> is aligned to the left edge of the window.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<xview>(B<moveto> =E<gt> I<fraction>)
-
-Adjusts the view in the window so that I<fraction> of the total
-width of the HList is off-screen to the left. I<fraction> must be
-a fraction between 0 and 1.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<xview>(B<scroll> =E<gt> I<number, what>)
-
-This method shifts the view in the window left or right according to
-I<number> and I<what>. I<Number> must be an integer.
-I<What> must be either B<units> or B<pages> or an
-abbreviation of one of these. If I<what> is B<units>, the view
-adjusts left or right by I<number> character units (the width of
-the B<0> character) on the display; if it is B<pages> then the
-view adjusts by I<number> screenfuls. If I<number> is negative
-then characters farther to the left become visible; if it is positive
-then characters farther to the right become visible.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<yview>(I<?args>?)
-
-This method is used to query and change the vertical position of the
-entries in the widget's window. It can take any of the following forms:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<yview>
-
-Returns a list containing two elements, both of which are real
-fractions between 0 and 1.  The first element gives the position of
-the list element at the top of the window, relative to the HList as a
-whole (0.5 means it is halfway through the HList, for example).  The
-second element gives the position of the list entry just after the
-last one in the window, relative to the HList as a whole.  These are
-the same values passed to scrollbars via the B<-yscrollcommand>
-option.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<yview>(I<$entryPath>)
-
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the list entry given by
-I<$entryPath> is displayed at the top of the window.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<yview>(B<moveto> =E<gt> I<fraction>)
-
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the list entry given by
-I<fraction> appears at the top of the window. I<Fraction> is a
-fraction between 0 and 1; 0 indicates the first entry in the
-HList, 0.33 indicates the entry one-third the way through the
-HList, and so on.
-
-=item I<$hlist>-E<gt>B<yview>(B<scroll> =E<gt> I<number, what>)
-
-This method adjust the view in the window up or down according to
-I<number> and I<what>.  I<Number> must be an integer.
-I<What> must be either B<units> or B<pages>.  If I<what>
-is B<units>, the view adjusts up or down by I<number> lines; if
-it is B<pages> then the view adjusts by I<number> screenfuls.
-If I<number> is negative then earlier entries become visible; if
-it is positive then later entries become visible.
-
-=back
-
-=back
-
-=head1 BINDINGS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item [1]
-
-If the B<-selectmode> is "browse", when the user drags the mouse
-pointer over the list entries, the entry under the pointer will be
-highlighted and the B<-browsecmd> callback will be called with
-one parameter, the entryPath of the highlighted entry. Only one entry
-can be highlighted at a time. The B<-command> callback will be
-called when the user double-clicks on a list entry.
-
-=item [2]
-
-If the B<-selectmode> is "single", the entries will only be
-highlighted by mouse E<lt>ButtonRelease-1E<gt> events. When a new list entry
-is highlighted, the B<-browsecmd> callback will be called with
-one parameter indicating the highlighted list entry. The
-B<-command> callback will be called when the user double-clicks
-on a list entry.
-
-=item [3]
-
-If the B<-selectmode> is "multiple", when the user drags the mouse
-pointer over the list entries, all the entries under the pointer will
-be highlighted. However, only a contiguous region of list entries can
-be selected. When the highlighted area is changed, the
-B<-browsecmd> callback will be called with an undefined
-parameter. It is the responsibility of the B<-browsecmd> callback
-to find out the exact highlighted selection in the HList. The
-B<-command> callback will be called when the user double-clicks
-on a list entry.
-
-=item [4]
-
-If the B<-selectmode> is "extended", when the user drags the mouse
-pointer over the list entries, all the entries under the pointer will
-be highlighted. The user can also make disjointed selections using
-E<lt>Control-ButtonPress-1E<gt>. When the highlighted area is changed, the
-B<-browsecmd> callback will be called with an undefined
-parameter. It is the responsibility of the B<-browsecmd> callback
-to find out the exact highlighted selection in the HList. The
-B<-command> callback will be called when the user double-clicks
-on a list entry.
-
-=item [5]
-
-B<Arrow key bindings:> E<lt>UpE<gt> arrow key moves the anchor point to the
-item right on top of the current anchor item. E<lt>DownE<gt> arrow key moves
-the anchor point to the item right below the current anchor item.
-E<lt>LeftE<gt> arrow key moves the anchor to the parent item of the current
-anchor item. E<lt>RightE<gt> moves the anchor to the first child of the
-current anchor item. If the current anchor item does not have any
-children, moves the anchor to the item right below the current anchor
-item.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 EXAMPLE
-
-This example demonstrates how to use an HList to store a file
-directory structure and respond to the user's browse events:
-
-   use strict;
-   use Tk;
-   use Tk::Label;
-   use Tk::HList;
-
-   my $mw = MainWindow->new();
-   my $label = $mw->Label(-width=>15);
-   my $hlist = $mw->HList(
-                       -itemtype   => 'text',
-                       -separator  => '/',
-                       -selectmode => 'single',
-                       -browsecmd  => sub {
-                                 my $file = shift;
-                                 $label->configure(-text=>$file);
-                              }
-                       );
-
-   foreach ( qw(/ /home /home/ioi /home/foo /usr /usr/lib) ) {
-       $hlist->add($_, -text=>$_);
-   }
-
-   $hlist->pack;
-   $label->pack;
-
-   MainLoop;
-
-=head1 BUGS
-
-The fact that the display item at column 0 is implicitly associated
-with the whole entry is probably a design bug. This was done for
-backward compatibility purposes. The result is that there is a large
-overlap between the B<item> method and the B<add>,
-B<addchild>, B<entrycget> and B<entryconfigure>
-methods.  Whenever multiple columns exist, the programmer should use
-ONLY the B<item> method to create and configure the display items
-in each column; the B<add>, B<addchild>, B<entrycget> and
-B<entryconfigure> should be used ONLY to create and configure
-entries.
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-Hierarchical Listbox
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::DItem|Tk::DItem>
-
-=cut
-
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/IO.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/IO.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 2781d2e17e6..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/IO.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,51 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::IO - high level interface to Tk's 'fileevent' mechanism
-
-=for pm IO/IO.pm
-
-=for category Binding Events and Callbacks
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-  my $fh = Tk::IO->new(-linecommand => callback, -childcommand => callback);
-  $fh->exec("command")
-  $fh->wait
-  $fh->kill
-
-=head1 WARNING
-
-INTERFACES TO THIS MODULE MAY CHANGE AS PERL'S IO EVOLVES
-AND WITH PORT OF TK4.1
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-Tk::IO is now layered on perl's IO::Handle class. Interfaces
-have changed, and are still evolving.
-
-In theory C methods which enable non-blocking IO as in earlier Tk-b*
-release(s) are still there. I have not changed them to use perl's
-additional Configure information, or tested them much.
-
-Assumption is that B<exec> is
-used to fork a child process and a callback is called each time a
-complete line arrives up the implied pipe.
-
-"line" should probably be defined in terms of perl's input record
-separator but is not yet.
-
-The -childcommand callback is called when end-of-file occurs.
-
-$fh->B<wait> can be used to wait for child process while processing
-other Tk events.
-
-$fh->B<kill> can be used to send signal to child process.
-
-=head1 BUGS
-
-Still not finished.
-Idea is to use "exec" to emulate "system" in a non-blocking manner.
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/IconList.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/IconList.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index e68324ce4b6..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/IconList.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,82 +0,0 @@
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::IconList - an icon list widget
-
-=for pm Tk/IconList.pm
-
-=for category Derived Widgets
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-    use Tk::IconList;
-    $il = $mw->IconList(-browsecmd => sub { ... },
-                        -command   => sub { ... })->pack;
-    $il->Add($icon1, $text1);
-    $il->Add($icon2, $text2);
-    $il->Arrange;
-    ...
-    $il->DeleteAll;
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-=head2 OPTIONS
-
-=over
-
-=item -browsecmd
-
-=item -command
-
-=item -font
-
--item -foreground|-fg
-
-=back
-
-=head2 METHODS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item DeleteAll
-
-Deletes all the items inside the canvas subwidget and reset the IconList's
-state.
-
-=item Add($image, $text)
-
-Adds an icon into the IconList with the designated image and text.
-
-=item Arrange
-
-Places the icons in a column-major arrangement.
-
-=item Get
-
-Return the selected item.
-
-=item Invoke
-
-Gets called when the user invokes the IconList (usually by double-clicking
-or pressing the Return key) (internal method).
-
-=item See($tag)
-
-If the item is not (completely) visible, scroll the canvas so that it
-becomes visible (internal method).
-
-=back
-
-=head1 COPYRIGHT
-
-The original tkfbox.tcl from Tcl/Tk is:
-
-Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-
-See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-
-Translated to Perl/Tk by Slaven Rezic <srezic@cpan.org>.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::FBox>.
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Image.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Image.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 797ecc23cbf..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Image.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,145 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Image - Create and manipulate images
-
-=for category  Tk Image Classes
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-I<$image> = I<$widget>-E<gt>I<type>(?I<arg arg ...>?)
-
-I<$image>-E<gt>I<method>(?I<arg arg ...>?)
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<image> constructors and methods are used to create, delete, and query images.
-It can take several different forms, depending on the
-I<type>.
-
-The constructors require a I<$widget> to invoke them, this is used
-to locate a B<MainWindow>. (This is because the underlying Tk code
-registers the images in the data structure for the B<MainWindow>.)
-
-The legal forms are:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>I<type>?(?I<name>?,?I<option>=E<gt>I<value ...>)?
-
-Creates a new image and returns an object.
-I<type> specifies the type of the image, which must be one of
-the types currently defined (e.g., B<Bitmap>).
-I<name> specifies the name for the image;  if it is omitted then
-Tk picks a name of the form B<image>I<x>, where I<x> is
-an integer.
-There may be any number of I<option>=E<gt>I<value> pairs,
-which provide configuration options for the new image.
-The legal set of options is defined separately for each image
-type;  see below for details on the options for built-in image types.
-If an image already exists by the given name then it is replaced
-with the new image and any instances of that image will redisplay
-with the new contents.
-
-=item I<$image>-E<gt>B<delete>
-
-Deletes the image I<$image> and returns an empty string.
-If there are instances of the image displayed in widgets,
-the image won't actually be deleted until all of the instances
-are released.
-However, the association between the instances and the image
-manager will be dropped.
-Existing instances will retain their sizes but redisplay as
-empty areas.
-If a deleted image is recreated (with the same I<name>)
-the existing instances will use the new image.
-
-=item I<$image>-E<gt>B<height>
-
-Returns a decimal string giving the height of image I<name>
-in pixels.
-
-=item I<$image>-E<gt>B<inuse>
-
-Returns a boolean value indicating whether or not the image is in use
-by any widgets.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<imageNames>
-
-Returns a list containing all existing images for I<$widget>'s
-B<MainWindow>.
-
-=item I<$image>-E<gt>B<type>
-
-Returns the type of  I<$image> (the value of the I<type>
-method when the image was created).
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<imageTypes>
-
-Returns a list whose elements are all of the valid image types
-(i.e., all of the values that may be supplied for the I<type>
-to create an image).
-
-=item I<$image>-E<gt>B<width>
-
-Returns a decimal string giving the width of image I<name>
-in pixels.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 BUILT-IN IMAGE TYPES
-
-The following image types are defined by Tk so they will be available
-in any Tk application.
-Individual applications or extensions may define additional types.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<Bitmap>
-
-Each pixel in the image displays a foreground color, a background
-color, or nothing.
-See L<Tk::Bitmap> for more information.
-
-=item B<Pixmap>
-
-B<Pixmap> is slightly more general than B<Bitmap>, each pixel can
-be any available color or "transparent" (rendered as background color of the
-widget image is displayed in). B<Pixmap> is best used for icons and other
-simple graphics with only a few colors.
-
-B<Pixmap> is derived from Tix. See L<Tk::Pixmap> for more information.
-
-=item B<Photo>
-
-Displays a variety of full-color images, using dithering to
-approximate colors on displays with limited color capabilities.
-See L<Tk::Photo> documentation for more information.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 CAVEATS
-
-It's necessary to use the L</delete> method to delete an image object
-and free memory associated with it. Just using a lexical variable for
-storing the image object and letting the variable to go out of scope
-or setting to C<undef> is not sufficient.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::Bitmap|Tk::Bitmap>
-L<Tk::Pixmap|Tk::Pixmap>
-L<Tk::Photo|Tk::Photo>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-height, image, types of images, width
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/InputO.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/InputO.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 03a43b29ed7..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/InputO.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,50 +0,0 @@
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::InputO - Create and manipulate TIX InputO widgets
-
-=for category Tix Extensions
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-I<$inputonly> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<InputO>(?I<options>?);
-
-=head1 STANDARD OPTIONS
-
-Only the following three standard options are supported by
-B<InputO>:
-
-B<cursor>	B<width>	B<height>
-
-See L<Tk::options> for details of the standard options.
-
-=head1 WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS
-
-B<InputO> does not have any widget specific options.
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<InputO> method creates a new window (given by the
-$widget argument) and makes it into a B<InputO>
-widget.  Additional options, described above, may be specified on the
-command line or in the option database to configure aspects of the
-B<InputO> such as its cursor or width.
-
-B<InputO> widgets are not visible to the user. The only
-purpose of B<InputO> widgets are to accept inputs from the
-user, which can be done with the B<bind> method.
-
-=head1 WIDGET METHODS
-
-The B<InputO> method creates a widget object.
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-The widget also inherits all the methods provided by the generic
-L<Tk::Widget|Tk::Widget> class.
-
-=head1 BINDINGS
-
-B<InputO> widgets have no default bindings.
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Internals.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Internals.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 4ee1e0126ca..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Internals.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,142 +0,0 @@
-=head1 NAME
-
-CallingTk -  what is Perl Tk interface doing when you call Tk functions.
-
-=for category  C Programming
-
-This information is worse than useless for C<perlTk> users, but can of
-some help for people interested in using modified Tk source with
-C<perlTk>.
-
-I<This document is under construction. The information is believed to
-be pertinent to the version of> C<portableTk> I<available when it was
-created. All the details are subject to change.>
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-=over 4
-
-=item PreCompiling
-
-Before the actual compilation stage a script scans the source
-and extracts the subcommands of different commands. This information
-resides in the file C<pTk/Methods.def>.
-
-=item Compilation
-
-During compilation the above file is included in the source of booting
-routine of dynamic (or static) library. More precisely, the booting
-code of module C<Tk> calls the subroutine Boot_Glue() from the module
-C<tkGlue.c>, and this subroutine includes the file (with appropriate
-macro definitions).
-
-=item Inside C<use Tk;>
-
-The module bootstraps the C code, then loads the Perl libraries. The
-heart of the Perl code is contained in the C<Tk::Widget> library, all the
-widgets inherit from this module. Code for toplevels is loaded from
-C<Tk::MainWindow>.
-
-During bootstrap of the C glue code the C<Xevent::?> codes and a
-handful of C<Tk::Widget> and C<Tk::Image> routines are defined. (Much
-more XSUBs are created from C<Tk.xs> code.) The widget subcommands are
-glued to Perl basing on the list included from C<pTk/Methods.def>. In
-fact all the subcommands are glued to XSUBs that are related to the
-same C subroutine XStoWidget(), but have different data parts.
-
-During the Perl code bootstrap the method C<Tk::Widget::import> is
-called. This call requires all the code from particular widget
-packages.
-
-Code from the widget packages calls an obscure command like
-
-  (bless \"Text")->WidgetClass;
-
-This command (actually Tk::Widget::WidgetClass()) creates three
-routines: Tk::Widget::Text(), Tk::Widget::isText(), and
-Tk::Text::isText(). The first one is basically C<new> of C<Tk::Text>,
-the other two return constants. It also puts the class into
-depository.
-
-=item Inside C<$top = MainWindow-E<gt>new;>
-
-This is quite intuitive. This call goes direct to
-C<Tk::MainWindow::new>, that calls XSUB
-C<Tk::MainWindow::CreateMainWindow>, that calls C subroutine
-Tk_CreateMainWindow(). It is a C<Tk> subroutine, so here black magic
-ends (almost).
-
-The only remaining black magic is that the C<Tk> initialization
-routine creates a lot of commands, but the subroutine for creation is
-usurped by B<portableTk> and the commands are created in the package
-C<Tk>. They are associated to XSUBs that are related to one of three C
-subroutines XStoSubCmd(), XStoBind(), or XStoTk(), but have different
-data parts.
-
-The result of the call is blessed into C<Tk::MainWindow>, as it should.
-
-=item Inside C<$top-E<gt>title('Text demo');>
-
-The package C<Tk::Toplevel> defines a lot of subroutines on the fly on
-some list. All the commands from the list are converted to the
-corresponding subcommands of C<wm> method of the widget. Here
-subcommand is a command with some particular second argument (in this
-case C<"title">). Recall that the first argument is $self.
-
-Now C<Tk::Toplevel> @ISA C<Tk::Widget>, that in turn @ISA C<Tk>. So a
-call to C<$top-E<gt>wm('title','Text demo')> calls C<Tk::wm>, that is
-defined during call to Tk_CreateMainWindow(). As it is described
-above, the XSUB associated to XStoSubCmd() is called.
-
-This C routine is defined in C<tkGlue.c>. It gets the data part of
-XSUB, creates a C<SV> with the name of the command, and calls
-Call_Tk() with the XSUB data as the first argument, and with the name
-of XSUB stuffed into the Perl stack in the place there C<tk> expects
-it. (In fact it can also reorder the arguments if it thinks it is
-what you want).
-
-The latter procedure extracts name of C<tk> procedure and
-C<clientData> from the first argument and makes a call, using Perl
-stack as C<argv> for the procedure. A lot of black magic is performed
-afterwards to convert result of the procedure to a Perl array return.
-
-=item Inside C<$text = $top-E<gt>Text(background =E<gt> $txtBg);>
-
-Above we discussed how the command C<Tk::Widget::Text> is created. The
-above command calls it via inheritance. It is translated to
-
-  Tk::Text::new($top, background => $txtBg);
-
-The package C<Tk::Text> has no method C<new>, so the
-C<Tk::Widget::new> is called. In turn it calls
-C<Tk::Text-E<gt>DoInit($top)>, that is
-C<Tk::Widget::DoInit(Tk::Text,$top)>, that initializes the bindings if
-necessary. Then it creates the name for the widget of the form
-C<.text0>, and calls C<Tk::text('.text0', background =E<gt> $txtBg)>
-(note lowercase). The result of the call is blessed into C<Tk::Text>,
-and the method C<bindtags> for this object is called.
-
-Now the only thing to discuss is who defines the methods C<text> and
-C<bindtags>. The answer is that they are defined in C<tkWindow.c>,
-and these commands are created in the package C<Tk> in the same sweep
-that created the command C<Tk::wm> discussed above.
-
-So the the same C code that corresponds to the processing of
-corresponding TCL commands is called here as well (this time via
-C<XStoTk> interface).
-
-=item Inside C<$text-E<gt>insert('insert','Hello, world!');>
-
-As we discussed above, the subcommands of widget procedures correspond
-to XSUB C<XStoWidget>. This XSUB substitutes the first argument $text
-(that is a hash reference) to an appropriate value from this hash,
-adds the additional argument after the first one that contains the
-name of the subcommand extracted from the data part of XSUB, and calls
-the corresponding Tk C subroutine via C<Call_Tk>.
-
-=back
-
-Ilya Zakharevich <ilya@math.ohio-state.edu>
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/LabFrame.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/LabFrame.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index cf5cebf754a..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/LabFrame.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,110 +0,0 @@
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::LabFrame - labeled frame.
-
-=for pm Tixish/LabFrame.pm
-
-=for category Tix Extensions
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >B<use Tk::LabFrame;>
-
-S<    >I<$f> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<LabFrame>(?B<-label>=E<gt>I<text>,
-B<-labelside>=E<gt>I<where>, ...?);
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-B<LabFrame> is exactly like B<Frame> and additionaly allows to
-add a label to the frame.
-
-=head1 WIDGET-OPTIONS
-
-B<LabFrame> supports the same options as the
-L<Frame|Tk::Frame/"STANDARD OPTIONS"> widget.
-
-Additional options of B<LabFrame> are:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-font> =E<gt> I<font>
-
-Specifies the label's font
-
-=item B<-foreground> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-Specifies the label's foreground color
-
-=item B<-label> =E<gt> I<text>
-
-The text of the label to be placed with the Frame.
-
-=item B<-labelside> =E<gt> I<where>
-
-I<Where> can be one of B<left>, B<right>, B<top>, B<bottom> or B<acrosstop>.
-The first four work as might be expected and place the label to the
-left, right, above or below the frame respectively. The B<acrosstop>
-creates a grooved frame around the central frame and puts the label
-near the northwest corner such that it appears to "overwrite" the
-groove.
-
-=item B<-labelvariable> =E<gt> I<scalar_ref>
-
-Specifies a reference to a variable and used as an 
-alternative to -label. If the value of the variable changes,
-then the widget will be updated automatically to reflect the
-change. Used like -textvariable.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 ADVERTISED SUBWIDGETS
-
-See L<Tk::mega/"Subwidget"> how to use advertised widgets.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<border>
-
-  Frame used to display the border
-
-=item I<frame>
-
-  Frame used to create new LabFrame children. 
-
-=item I<label>
-
-  Label used for displaying text
-
-=back
-
-=head1 EXAMPLE
-
-Run the following test program to see this in action:
-
-    use strict;
-    use Tk;
-    require Tk::LabFrame;
-    require Tk::LabEntry;
-
-    my $test = 'Test this';
-    my $mw = Tk::MainWindow->new;
-    my $f = $mw->LabFrame(-label => "This is a label",
-			   -labelside => "acrosstop");
-    $f->LabEntry(-label => "Testing", -textvariable => \$test)->pack;
-    $f->pack;
-    Tk::MainLoop;
-
-=head1 BUGS
-
-Perhaps B<LabFrame> should be subsumed within the generic pTk
-labeled widget mechanism.
-
-=head1 AUTHOR
-
-B<Rajappa Iyer> rsi@earthling.net
-
-This code is derived from LabFrame.tcl and LabWidg.tcl in the Tix4.0
-distribution by Ioi Lam. The code may be redistributed under the same
-terms as Perl.
-
-=cut
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Label.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Label.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 96386b09b5c..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Label.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,133 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Label - Create and manipulate Label widgets
-
-=for category  Tk Widget Classes
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-I<$label> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<Label>(?I<options>?);
-
-=head1 STANDARD OPTIONS
-
-B<-activebackground>
-B<-activeforeground>
-B<-anchor>
-B<-background>
-B<-bitmap>
-B<-borderwidth>
-B<-compound>
-B<-cursor>
-B<-disabledforeground>
-B<-font>
-B<-foreground>
-B<-highlightbackground>
-B<-highlightcolor>
-B<-highlightthickness>
-B<-image>
-B<-justify>
-B<-padx>
-B<-pady>
-B<-relief>
-B<-takefocus>
-B<-text>
-B<-textvariable>
-B<-underline>
-B<-wraplength>
-
-See L<Tk::options> for details of the standard options.
-
-=head1 WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Name:	B<height>
-
-=item Class:	B<Height>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-height>
-
-Specifies a desired height for the label.
-If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the label then the value is in
-screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>);
-for text it is in lines of text.
-If this option isn't specified, the label's desired height is computed
-from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
-
-=item Name:	B<state>
-
-=item Class:	B<State>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-state>
-
-Specifies one of three states for the label: B<normal>, B<active>, or
-B<disabled>. In normal state the label is displayed using the
-B<foreground> and B<background> options. In active state the label is
-displayed using the B<activeForeground> and B<activeBackground>
-options. In the disabled state the B<disabledForeground> and
-B<background> options determine how the button is displayed.
-
-=item Name:	B<width>
-
-=item Class:	B<Width>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-width>
-
-Specifies a desired width for the label.
-If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the label then the value is in
-screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>);
-for text it is in characters.
-If this option isn't specified, the label's desired width is computed
-from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<Label> method creates a new window (given by the
-$widget argument) and makes it into a label widget.
-Additional
-options, described above, may be specified on the command line
-or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the label such as its colors, font,
-text, and initial relief.  The B<label> command returns its
-$widget argument.  At the time this command is invoked,
-there must not exist a window named $widget, but
-$widget's parent must exist.
-
-A label is a widget that displays a textual string, bitmap or image.
-If text is displayed, it must all be in a single font, but it
-can occupy multiple lines on the screen (if it contains newlines
-or if wrapping occurs because of the B<wrapLength> option) and
-one of the characters may optionally be underlined using the
-B<underline> option.
-The label can be manipulated in a few simple ways, such as
-changing its relief or text, using the commands described below.
-
-=head1 WIDGET METHODS
-
-The B<Label> method creates a widget object.
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-The widget also inherits all the methods provided by the generic
-L<Tk::Widget|Tk::Widget> class.
-
-=head1 BINDINGS
-
-When a new label is created, it has no default event bindings:
-labels are not intended to be interactive.
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-label, widget
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Labelframe.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Labelframe.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index b904ad7775b..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Labelframe.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,206 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#  RCS: @(#) $Id: labelframe.n,v 1.1 2001/09/26 21:36:19 pspjuth Exp $
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Labelframe - Create and manipulate Labelframe widgets
-
-=for category  Tk Generic Methods
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-I<$labelframe> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<Labelframe>(?I<options>?);
-
- -borderwidth -highlightbackground -pady
- -cursor      -highlightcolor      -relief
- -font        -highlightthickness  -takefocus
- -foreground  -padx                -text
-
-=head1 WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Option:	B<-background>
-
-=item Name:	B<background>
-
-=item Class:	B<Background>
-
-This option is the same as the standard B<background> option
-except that its value may also be specified as an empty string.
-In this case, the widget will display no background or border, and
-no colors will be consumed from its colormap for its background
-and border.
-
-=item Option:	B<-class>
-
-=item Name:	B<class>
-
-=item Class:	B<Class>
-
-Specifies a class for the window.
-This class will be used when querying the option database for
-the window's other options, and it will also be used later for
-other purposes such as bindings.
-The B<class> option may not be changed with the B<configure>
-method.
-
-=item Option:	B<-colormap>
-
-=item Name:	B<colormap>
-
-=item Class:	B<Colormap>
-
-Specifies a colormap to use for the window.
-The value may be either B<new>, in which case a new colormap is
-created for the window and its children, or the name of another
-window (which must be on the same screen and have the same visual
-as $widget), in which case the new window will use the colormap
-from the specified window.
-If the B<colormap> option is not specified, the new window
-uses the same colormap as its parent.
-This option may not be changed with the B<configure>
-method.
-
-=item Option:	B<-container>
-
-=item Name:	B<container>
-
-=item Class:	B<Container>
-
-The value must be a boolean.  If true, it means that this window will
-be used as a container in which some other application will be embedded
-(for example, a Tk toplevel can be embedded using the B<-use> option).
-The window will support the appropriate window manager protocols for
-things like geometry requests.  The window should not have any
-children of its own in this application.
-This option may not be changed with the B<configure>
-method.
-
-=item Option:	B<-height>
-
-=item Name:	B<height>
-
-=item Class:	B<Height>
-
-Specifies the desired height for the window in any of the forms
-acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-If this option is less than or equal to zero then the window will
-not request any size at all.
-
-=item Option:	B<-labelanchor>
-
-=item Name:	B<labelAnchor>
-
-=item Class:	B<LabelAnchor>
-
-Specifies where to place the label. A label is only displayed if the
-B<-text> option is not the empty string.
-Valid values for this option are (listing them clockwise)
-B<nw>, B<n>, B<ne>, B<en>, B<e>, B<es>,
-B<se>, B<s>,B<sw>, B<ws>, B<w> and B<wn>.
-The default value is B<nw>.
-
-=item Option:	B<-labelwidget>
-
-=item Name:	B<labelWidget>
-
-=item Class:	B<LabelWidget>
-
-Specifies a widget to use as label. This overrides any B<-text>
-option. The widget must exist before being used as B<-labelwidget>
-and if it is not a descendant of this window, it will be raised
-above it in the stacking order.
-
-=item Option:	B<-visual>
-
-=item Name:	B<visual>
-
-=item Class:	B<Visual>
-
-Specifies visual information for the new window in any of the
-forms accepted by B<Tk_GetVisual>.
-If this option is not specified, the new window will use the same
-visual as its parent.
-The B<visual> option may not be modified with the B<configure>
-method.
-
-=item Option:	B<-width>
-
-=item Name:	B<width>
-
-=item Class:	B<Width>
-
-Specifies the desired width for the window in any of the forms
-acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-If this option is less than or equal to zero then the window will
-not request any size at all.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<Labelframe> method creates a new window (given by the
-$labelframe argument) and makes it into a Labelframe widget.
-Additional
-options, described above, may be specified on the command line
-or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the Labelframe such as its background color
-and relief.
-
-A Labelframe is a simple widget.  Its primary purpose is to act as a
-spacer or container for complex window layouts.  It has the features
-of a B<Frame> plus the ability to display a label.
-
-=head1 WIDGET METHODS
-
-The B<Labelframe> method
-may be used to invoke various operations on the widget.  It has the
-following general form:
-
- $widget->method(?arg arg ...?);
-
-The following
-methods are possible for Labelframe widgets:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<cget>(I<option>);
-
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given
-by I<option>.
-I<Option> may have any of the values accepted by the B<Labelframe>
-command.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<configure>(?I<option>?, I<?value, option, value, ...>?);
-
-Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
-If no I<option> is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for $widget (see L<Tk::configure> for
-information on the format of this list).  If I<option> is specified
-with no I<value>, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no I<option> is specified).  If
-one or more I<option-value> pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string.
-I<Option> may have any of the values accepted by the B<Labelframe>
-command.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 BINDINGS
-
-When a new Labelframe is created, it has no default event bindings:
-Labelframes are not intended to be interactive.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::Frame>, L<Tk::Label>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-Labelframe, widget
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Listbox.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Listbox.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index ba00afe3ed9..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Listbox.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,794 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Listbox - Create and manipulate Listbox widgets
-
-=for category  Tk Widget Classes
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-I<$listbox> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<Listbox>(?I<options>?);
-
-=head1 STANDARD OPTIONS
-
-B<-background> B<-borderwidth> B<-cursor> B<-disabledforeground>
-B<-exportselection> B<-font> B<-foreground> B<-height>
-B<-highlightbackground> B<-highlightcolor> B<-highlightthickness>
-B<-offset> B<-relief> B<-selectbackground> B<-selectborderwidth>
-B<-selectforeground> B<-setgrid> B<-state> B<-takefocus> B<-tile>
-B<-width> B<-xscrollcommand> B<-yscrollcommand>
-		
-
-See L<Tk::options> for details of the standard options.
-
-=head1 WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Name:	B<activeStyle>
-
-=item Class:	B<ActiveStyle>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-activestyle>
-
-Specifies the style in which to draw the active element. This must be
-one of B<dotbox> (show a focus ring around the active element), B<none>
-(no special indication of active element) or B<underline> (underline the
-active element). The default is B<underline>.
-
-=item Name:	B<height>
-
-=item Class:	B<Height>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-height>
-
-Specifies the desired height for the window, in lines.
-If zero or less, then the desired height for the window is made just
-large enough to hold all the elements in the listbox.
-
-=item Name:	B<listVariable>
-
-=item Class:	B<Variable>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-listvariable>
-
-I<The following is only partially implemented in Perl/Tk:>
-
-Specifies the reference of a variable. The value of the variable is an array
-to be displayed inside the widget; if the variable value changes
-then the widget will automatically update itself to reflect the new
-value. Attempts to assign a variable with an invalid list value to
-B<-listvariable> will cause an error. Attempts to unset a variable in use
-as a B<-listvariable> will fail but will not generate an error.
-
-=item Name:	B<selectMode>
-
-=item Class:	B<SelectMode>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-selectmode>
-
-Specifies one of several styles for manipulating the selection.
-The value of the option may be arbitrary, but the default bindings
-expect it to be either B<single>, B<browse>, B<multiple>,
-or B<extended>;  the default value is B<browse>.
-
-=item Name:	B<state>
-
-=item Class:	B<State>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-state>
-
-Specifies one of two states for the listbox: B<normal> or B<disabled>.
-If the listbox is disabled then items may not be inserted or deleted,
-items are drawn in the B<-disabledforeground> color, and selection
-cannot be modified and is not shown (though selection information is
-retained).
-
-=item Name:	B<width>
-
-=item Class:	B<Width>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-width>
-
-Specifies the desired width for the window in characters.
-If the font doesn't have a uniform width then the width of the
-character ``0'' is used in translating from character units to
-screen units.
-If zero or less, then the desired width for the window is made just
-large enough to hold all the elements in the listbox.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<Listbox> method creates a new window (given by the
-$widget argument) and makes it into a listbox widget.
-Additional
-options, described above, may be specified on the command line
-or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the listbox such as its colors, font,
-text, and relief.  The B<listbox> command returns its
-$widget argument.  At the time this command is invoked,
-there must not exist a window named $widget, but
-$widget's parent must exist.
-
-A listbox is a widget that displays a list of strings, one per line.
-When first created, a new listbox has no elements.
-Elements may be added or deleted using methods described
-below.  In addition, one or more elements may be selected as described
-below.
-If a listbox is exporting its selection (see B<exportSelection>
-option), then it will observe the standard X11 protocols
-for handling the selection.
-Listbox selections are available as type B<STRING>;
-the value of the selection will be the text of the selected elements, with
-newlines separating the elements.
-
-It is not necessary for all the elements to be
-displayed in the listbox window at once;  commands described below
-may be used to change the view in the window.  Listboxes allow
-scrolling in both directions using the standard B<xScrollCommand>
-and B<yScrollCommand> options.
-They also support scanning, as described below.
-
-=head1 INDICES
-
-Many of the methods for listboxes take one or more indices
-as arguments.
-An index specifies a particular element of the listbox, in any of
-the following ways:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<number>
-
-Specifies the element as a numerical index, where 0 corresponds
-to the first element in the listbox.
-
-=item B<active>
-
-Indicates the element that has the location cursor.  This element
-will be displayed with an underline when the listbox has the
-keyboard focus, and it is specified with the B<activate>
-method.
-
-=item B<anchor>
-
-Indicates the anchor point for the selection, which is set with the
-B<selection anchor> method.
-
-=item B<end>
-
-Indicates the end of the listbox.
-For most commands this refers to the last element in the listbox,
-but for a few commands such as B<index> and B<insert>
-it refers to the element just after the last one.
-
-=item B<@>I<x>B<,>I<y>
-
-Indicates the element that covers the point in the listbox window
-specified by I<x> and I<y> (in pixel coordinates).  If no
-element covers that point, then the closest element to that
-point is used.
-
-=back
-
-In the method descriptions below, arguments named I<index>,
-I<first>, and I<last> always contain text indices in one of
-the above forms.
-
-=head1 WIDGET METHODS
-
-The B<Listbox> method creates a widget object.
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-The widget also inherits all the methods provided by the generic
-L<Tk::Widget|Tk::Widget> class.
-
-The following additional methods are available for listbox widgets:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<activate>(I<index>)
-
-Sets the active element to the one indicated by I<index>.
-If I<index> is outside the range of elements in the listbox
-then the closest element is activated.
-The active element is drawn with an underline when the widget
-has the input focus, and its index may be retrieved with the
-index B<active>.
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<bbox>(I<index>)
-
-Returns a list of four numbers describing the bounding box of
-the text in the element given by I<index>.
-The first two elements of the list give the x and y coordinates
-of the upper-left corner of the screen area covered by the text
-(specified in pixels relative to the widget) and the last two
-elements give the width and height of the area, in pixels.
-If no part of the element given by I<index> is visible on the
-screen,
-or if I<index> refers to a non-existent element,
-then the result is an empty string;  if the element is
-partially visible, the result gives the full area of the element,
-including any parts that are not visible.
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<curselection>
-
-Returns a list containing the numerical indices of
-all of the elements in the listbox that are currently selected.
-If there are no elements selected in the listbox then an empty
-string is returned.
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<delete>(I<first, >?I<last>?)
-
-Deletes one or more elements of the listbox.  I<First> and I<last>
-are indices specifying the first and last elements in the range
-to delete.  If I<last> isn't specified it defaults to
-I<first>, i.e. a single element is deleted.
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<get>(I<first, >?I<last>?)
-
-If I<last> is omitted, returns the contents of the listbox
-element indicated by I<first>,
-or an empty string if I<first> refers to a non-existent element.
-If I<last> is specified, the command returns a list whose elements
-are all of the listbox elements between I<first> and I<last>,
-inclusive.
-Both I<first> and I<last> may have any of the standard
-forms for indices.
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<index>(I<index>)
-
-Returns the integer index value that corresponds to I<index>.
-If I<index> is B<end> the return value is a count of the number
-of elements in the listbox (not the index of the last element).
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<insert>(I<index, >?I<element, element, ...>?)
-
-Inserts zero or more new elements in the list just before the
-element given by I<index>.  If I<index> is specified as
-B<end> then the new elements are added to the end of the
-list.  Returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<itemcget>(I<index>, I<option>)
-
-Returns the current value of the item configuration option given by
-I<option>. Option may have any of the values accepted by the listbox
-B<itemconfigure> command.
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<itemconfigure>(I<index, >?I<option, value,
-option, value, ...>?)
-
-Query or modify the configuration options of an item in the listbox.
-If no option is specified, returns a list describing all of the
-available options for the item (see Tk_ConfigureInfo for information
-on the format of this list). If option is specified with no value,
-then the command returns a list describing the one named option (this
-list will be identical to the corresponding sublist of the value
-returned if no option is specified). If one or more option-value pairs
-are specified, then the command modifies the given widget option(s) to
-have the given value(s); in this case the command returns an empty
-string. The following options are currently supported for items:
-
-=over
-
-=item B<-background> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-I<Color> specifies the background color to use when displaying the
-item. It may have any of the forms accepted by Tk_GetColor.
-
-=item B<-foreground> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-I<Color> specifies the foreground color to use when displaying the
-item. It may have any of the forms accepted by Tk_GetColor.
-
-=item B<-selectbackground> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-I<Color> specifies the background color to use when displaying the
-item while it is selected. It may have any of the forms accepted by
-Tk_GetColor.
-
-=item B<-selectforeground> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-I<Color> specifies the foreground color to use when displaying the
-item while it is selected. It may have any of the forms accepted by
-Tk_GetColor.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<nearest>(I<y>)
-
-Given a y-coordinate within the listbox window, this command returns
-the index of the (visible) listbox element nearest to that y-coordinate.
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<scan>(I<option, args>)
-
-This command is used to implement scanning on listboxes.  It has
-two forms, depending on I<option>:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<scanMark>(I<x, y>)
-
-Records I<x> and I<y> and the current view in the listbox
-window;  used in conjunction with later B<scan dragto> commands.
-Typically this command is associated with a mouse button press in
-the widget.  It returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<scanDragto>(I<x, y>.)
-
-This command computes the difference between its I<x> and I<y>
-arguments and the I<x> and I<y> arguments to the last
-B<scan mark> command for the widget.
-It then adjusts the view by 10 times the
-difference in coordinates.  This command is typically associated
-with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of
-dragging the list at high speed through the window.  The return
-value is an empty string.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<see>(I<index>)
-
-Adjust the view in the listbox so that the element given by I<index>
-is visible.
-If the element is already visible then the command has no effect;
-if the element is near one edge of the window then the listbox
-scrolls to bring the element into view at the edge;  otherwise
-the listbox scrolls to center the element.
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<selection>(I<option, arg>)
-
-This command is used to adjust the selection within a listbox.  It
-has several forms, depending on I<option>:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<selectionAnchor>(I<index>)
-
-Sets the selection anchor to the element given by I<index>.
-If I<index> refers to a non-existent element, then the closest
-element is used.
-The selection anchor is the end of the selection that is fixed
-while dragging out a selection with the mouse.
-The index B<anchor> may be used to refer to the anchor
-element.
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<selectionClear>(I<first, >?I<last>?)
-
-If any of the elements between I<first> and I<last>
-(inclusive) are selected, they are deselected.
-The selection state is not changed for elements outside
-this range.
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<selectionIncludes>(I<index>)
-
-Returns 1 if the element indicated by I<index> is currently
-selected, 0 if it isn't.
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<selectionSet>(I<first, >?I<last>?)
-
-Selects all of the elements in the range between
-I<first> and I<last>, inclusive, without affecting
-the selection state of elements outside that range.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<size>
-
-Returns a decimal string indicating the total number of elements
-in the listbox.
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<xview>(I<args>)
-
-This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the
-information in the widget's window.  It can take any of the following
-forms:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<xview>
-
-Returns a list containing two elements.
-Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1;  together they describe
-the horizontal span that is visible in the window.
-For example, if the first element is .2 and the second element is .6,
-20% of the listbox's text is off-screen to the left, the middle 40% is visible
-in the window, and 40% of the text is off-screen to the right.
-These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the B<-xscrollcommand>
-option.
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<xview>(I<index>)
-
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the character position given by
-I<index> is displayed at the left edge of the window.
-Character positions are defined by the width of the character B<0>.
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<xviewMoveto>( I<fraction> );
-
-Adjusts the view in the window so that I<fraction> of the
-total width of the listbox text is off-screen to the left.
-I<fraction> must be a fraction between 0 and 1.
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<xviewScroll>( I<number, what> );
-
-This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to
-I<number> and I<what>.
-I<Number> must be an integer.
-I<What> must be either B<units> or B<pages> or an abbreviation
-of one of these.
-If I<what> is B<units>, the view adjusts left or right by
-I<number> character units (the width of the B<0> character)
-on the display;  if it is B<pages> then the view adjusts by
-I<number> screenfuls.
-If I<number> is negative then characters farther to the left
-become visible;  if it is positive then characters farther to the right
-become visible.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<yview>(I<?args>?)
-
-This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the
-text in the widget's window.
-It can take any of the following forms:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<yview>
-
-Returns a list containing two elements, both of which are real fractions
-between 0 and 1.
-The first element gives the position of the listbox element at the
-top of the window, relative to the listbox as a whole (0.5 means
-it is halfway through the listbox, for example).
-The second element gives the position of the listbox element just after
-the last one in the window, relative to the listbox as a whole.
-These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the B<-yscrollcommand>
-option.
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<yview>(I<index>)
-
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the element given by
-I<index> is displayed at the top of the window.
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<yviewMoveto>( I<fraction> );
-
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the element given by I<fraction>
-appears at the top of the window.
-I<Fraction> is a fraction between 0 and 1;  0 indicates the first
-element in the listbox, 0.33 indicates the element one-third the
-way through the listbox, and so on.
-
-=item I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<yviewScroll>( I<number, what> );
-
-This command adjusts the view in the window up or down according to
-I<number> and I<what>.
-I<Number> must be an integer.
-I<What> must be either B<units> or B<pages>.
-If I<what> is B<units>, the view adjusts up or down by
-I<number> lines;  if it is B<pages> then
-the view adjusts by I<number> screenfuls.
-If I<number> is negative then earlier elements
-become visible;  if it is positive then later elements
-become visible.
-
-=back
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DEFAULT BINDINGS
-
-Tk automatically creates class bindings for listboxes that give them
-Motif-like behavior.  Much of the behavior of a listbox is determined
-by its B<selectMode> option, which selects one of four ways
-of dealing with the selection.
-
-If the selection mode is B<single> or B<browse>, at most one
-element can be selected in the listbox at once.
-In both modes, clicking button 1 on an element selects
-it and deselects any other selected item.
-In B<browse> mode it is also possible to drag the selection
-with button 1.
-
-If the selection mode is B<multiple> or B<extended>,
-any number of elements may be selected at once, including discontiguous
-ranges.  In B<multiple> mode, clicking button 1 on an element
-toggles its selection state without affecting any other elements.
-In B<extended> mode, pressing button 1 on an element selects
-it, deselects everything else, and sets the anchor to the element
-under the mouse;  dragging the mouse with button 1
-down extends the selection to include all the elements between
-the anchor and the element under the mouse, inclusive.
-
-Most people will probably want to use B<browse> mode for
-single selections and B<extended> mode for multiple selections;
-the other modes appear to be useful only in special situations.
-
-Any time the selection changes in the listbox, the virtual event
-B<<< <<ListboxSelect>> >>> will be generated. It is easiest to bind to this
-event to be made aware of any changes to listbox selection.
-
-
-In addition to the above behavior, the following additional behavior
-is defined by the default bindings:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item [1]
-
-In B<extended> mode, the selected range can be adjusted by pressing
-button 1 with the Shift key down:  this modifies the selection to
-consist of the elements between the anchor and the element under
-the mouse, inclusive.
-The un-anchored end of this new selection can also be dragged with
-the button down.
-
-=item [2]
-
-In B<extended> mode, pressing button 1 with the Control key down
-starts a toggle operation: the anchor is set to the element under
-the mouse, and its selection state is reversed.  The selection state
-of other elements isn't changed.
-If the mouse is dragged with button 1 down, then the selection state
-of all elements between the anchor and the element under the mouse
-is set to match that of the anchor element;  the selection state of
-all other elements remains what it was before the toggle operation
-began.
-
-=item [3]
-
-If the mouse leaves the listbox window with button 1 down, the window
-scrolls away from the mouse, making information visible that used
-to be off-screen on the side of the mouse.
-The scrolling continues until the mouse re-enters the window, the
-button is released, or the end of the listbox is reached.
-
-=item [4]
-
-Mouse button 2 may be used for scanning.
-If it is pressed and dragged over the listbox, the contents of
-the listbox drag at high speed in the direction the mouse moves.
-
-=item [5]
-
-If the Up or Down key is pressed, the location cursor (active
-element) moves up or down one element.
-If the selection mode is B<browse> or B<extended> then the
-new active element is also selected and all other elements are
-deselected.
-In B<extended> mode the new active element becomes the
-selection anchor.
-
-=item [6]
-
-In B<extended> mode, Shift-Up and Shift-Down move the location
-cursor (active element) up or down one element and also extend
-the selection to that element in a fashion similar to dragging
-with mouse button 1.
-
-=item [7]
-
-The Left and Right keys scroll the listbox view left and right
-by the width of the character B<0>.
-Control-Left and Control-Right scroll the listbox view left and
-right by the width of the window.
-Control-Prior and Control-Next also scroll left and right by
-the width of the window.
-
-=item [8]
-
-The Prior and Next keys scroll the listbox view up and down
-by one page (the height of the window).
-
-=item [9]
-
-The Home and End keys scroll the listbox horizontally to
-the left and right edges, respectively.
-
-=item [10]
-
-Control-Home sets the location cursor to the the first element in
-the listbox, selects that element, and deselects everything else
-in the listbox.
-
-=item [11]
-
-Control-End sets the location cursor to the the last element in
-the listbox, selects that element, and deselects everything else
-in the listbox.
-
-=item [12]
-
-In B<extended> mode, Control-Shift-Home extends the selection
-to the first element in the listbox and Control-Shift-End extends
-the selection to the last element.
-
-=item [13]
-
-In B<multiple> mode, Control-Shift-Home moves the location cursor
-to the first element in the listbox and Control-Shift-End moves
-the location cursor to the last element.
-
-=item [14]
-
-The space and Select keys make a selection at the location cursor
-(active element) just as if mouse button 1 had been pressed over
-this element.
-
-=item [15]
-
-In B<extended> mode, Control-Shift-space and Shift-Select
-extend the selection to the active element just as if button 1
-had been pressed with the Shift key down.
-
-=item [16]
-
-In B<extended> mode, the Escape key cancels the most recent
-selection and restores all the elements in the selected range
-to their previous selection state.
-
-=item [17]
-
-Control-slash selects everything in the widget, except in
-B<single> and B<browse> modes, in which case it selects
-the active element and deselects everything else.
-
-=item [18]
-
-Control-backslash deselects everything in the widget, except in
-B<browse> mode where it has no effect.
-
-=item [19]
-
-The F16 key (labelled Copy on many Sun workstations) or Meta-w
-copies the selection in the widget to the clipboard, if there is
-a selection.
-
-The behavior of listboxes can be changed by defining new bindings for
-individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 TIED INTERFACE
-
-The Tk::Listbox widget can also be tied to a scalar or array variable, with
-different behaviour depending on the variable type, with the following
-tie commands:
-
-   use Tk;
-
-   my ( @array, $scalar, $other );
-   my %options = ( ReturnType => "index" );
-
-   my $MW = MainWindow->new();
-   my $lbox = $MW->Listbox()->pack();
-
-   my @list = ( "a", "b", "c", "d", "e", "f" );
-   $lbox->insert('end', @list );
-
-   tie @array, "Tk::Listbox", $lbox
-   tie $scalar, "Tk::Listbox", $lbox;
-   tie $other, "Tk::Listbox", $lbox, %options;
-
-currently only one modifier is implemented, a 3 way flag for tied scalars
-"ReturnType" which can have values "element", "index" or "both". The default
-is "element".
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Tied Arrays
-
-If you tie an array to the Listbox you can manipulate the items currently
-contained by the box in the same manner as a normal array, e.g.
-
-    print @array;
-    push(@array, @list);
-    my $popped = pop(@array);
-    my $shifted = shift(@array);
-    unshift(@array, @list);
-    delete $array[$index];
-    print $string if exists $array[$i];
-    @array = ();
-    splice @array, $offset, $length, @list
-
-The delete function is implemented slightly differently from the standard
-array implementation. Instead of setting the element at that index to undef
-it instead physically removes it from the Listbox. This has the effect of
-changing the array indices, so for instance if you had a list on non-continuous
-indices you wish to remove from the Listbox you should reverse sort the list
-and then apply the delete function, e.g.
-
-     my @list = ( 1, 2, 4, 12, 20 );
-     my @remove = reverse sort { $a <=> $b } @list;
-     delete @array[@remove];
-
-would safely remove indices 20, 12, 4, 2 and 1 from the Listbox without
-problems. It should also be noted that a similar warning applies to the
-splice function (which would normally be used in this context to perform
-the same job).
-
-
-=item Tied Scalars
-
-Unlike tied arrays, if you tie a scalar to the Listbox you can retrieve the
-currently selected elements in the box as an array referenced by the scalar,
-for instance
-
-    my @list = ( "a", "b", "c", "d", "e", "f" );
-    $lbox->insert('end', sort @list );
-    $lbox->selectionSet(1);
-
-inserts @list as elements in an already existing listbox and selects the
-element at index 1, which is "b". If we then
-
-     print @$selected;
-
-this will return the currently selected elements, in this case "b".
-
-However, if the "ReturnType" arguement is passed when tying the Listbox to the
-scalar with value "index" then the indices of the selected elements will be
-returned instead of the elements themselves, ie in this case "1". This can be
-useful when manipulating both contents and selected elements in the Listbox at
-the same time.
-
-Importantly, if a value "both" is given the scalar will not be tied to an
-array, but instead to a hash, with keys being the indices and values being
-the elements at those indices
-
-You can also manipulate the selected items using the scalar. Equating the
-scalar to an array reference will select any elements that match elements
-in the Listbox, non-matching array items are ignored, e.g.
-
-    my @list = ( "a", "b", "c", "d", "e", "f" );
-    $lbox->insert('end', sort @list );
-    $lbox->selectionSet(1);
-
-would insert the array @list into an already existing Listbox and select
-element at index 1, i.e. "b"
-
-    @array = ( "a", "b", "f" );
-    $selected = \@array;
-
-would select elements "a", "b" and "f" in the Listbox.
-
-Again, if the "index" we indicate we want to use indices in the options hash
-then the indices are use instead of elements, e.g.
-
-    @array = ( 0, 1, 5 );
-    $selected = \@array;
-
-would have the same effect, selecting elements "a", "b" and "f" if the
-$selected variable was tied with %options = ( ReturnType => "index" ).
-
-If we are returning "both", i.e. the tied scalar points to a hash, both key and
-value must match, e.g.
-
-    %hash = ( 0 => "a", 1 => "b", 5 => "f" );
-    $selected = \%hash;
-
-would have the same effect as the previous examples.
-
-It should be noted that, despite being a reference to an array (or possibly a has), you still can not copy the tied variable without it being untied, instead
-you must pass a reference to the tied scalar between subroutines.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-listbox, widget, tied
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::HList>, L<Tk::TextList>.
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/MainWindow.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/MainWindow.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 565658adc1d..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/MainWindow.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,85 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::MainWindow - Root widget of a widget tree
-
-=for pm Tk/MainWindow.pm
-
-=for category Creating and Configuring Widgets
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-    use Tk;
-
-    my $mw = MainWindow->new( ... options ... );
-
-    my $this = $mw->ThisWidget -> pack ;
-    my $that = $mw->ThatWidget;
-    ...
-
-    MainLoop;
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-Perl/Tk applications (which have windows associated with them) create
-one or more B<MainWindow>s which act as the containers and parents
-of the other widgets.
-
-B<Tk::MainWindow> is a special kind of L<Toplevel|Tk::Toplevel> widget. It is
-the root of a widget tree. Therefore C<$mw-E<gt>Parent> returns
-C<undef>.
-
-The default title of a MainWindow is the basename of the script
-(actually the Class name used for options lookup, i.e. with basename
-with inital caps) or 'Ptk' as the fallback value.  If more than one MainWindow is created
-or several instances of the script are running at the same time the
-string C<" #n"> is appended where the number C<n> is set to get
-a unique value.
-
-Unlike the standard Tcl/Tk's wish, perl/Tk allows you to create
-several MainWindows.  When the I<last> B<MainWindow> is destroyed
-the Tk eventloop exits (the eventloop is entered with the call of
-C<MainLoop>). Various resources (bindings, fonts, images, colors) are
-maintained or cached for each MainWindow, so each MainWindow consumes more
-resources than a Toplevel. However multiple MainWindows can make sense when
-the user can destroy them independently.
-
-=head1 METHODS
-
-You can apply all methods that a L<Toplevel|Tk::Toplevel> widget accepts.
-
-The method I<$w>-E<gt>B<MainWindow> applied to any widget will return the
-B<MainWindow> to which the widget belongs (the  MainWindow belongs to itself).
-
-=head1 MISSING
-
-Documentation is incomplete.
-Here are I<some> missing items that should be explained in
-more detail:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item *
-
-The new mechanism for MainWindows is slightly different to
-other widgets.
-
-=item *
-
-There no explanation about what resources are bound
-to a MainWindow (e.g., ClassInit done per MainWindow)
-
-=item *
-
-Passing of command line options to override or augment
-arguments of the C<new> method (see L<Tk::CmdLine>).
-
-=back
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::Toplevel|Tk::Toplevel>
-L<Tk::CmdLine|Tk::CmdLine>
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Menu.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Menu.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index b7414e57510..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Menu.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,876 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Menu - Create and manipulate Menu widgets
-
-=for category  Tk Widget Classes
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >I<$menu> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<Menu>(?I<options>?);
-
-=head1 STANDARD OPTIONS
-
-B<-activebackground>	B<-background>	B<-disabledforeground>	B<-relief>
-B<-activeborderwidth>	B<-borderwidth>	B<-font>	B<-takefocus>
-B<-activeforeground>	B<-cursor>	B<-foreground>
-
-See L<Tk::options> for details of the standard options.
-
-=head1 WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Name:	B<postCommand>
-
-=item Class:	B<Command>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-postcommand>
-
-If this option is specified then it provides a L<callback|Tk::callbacks> to execute
-each time the menu is posted.  The callback is invoked by the B<post>
-method before posting the menu. Note that in 8.0 on Macintosh
-and Windows, all commands in a menu systems are executed before any
-are posted. This is due to the limitations in the individual platforms'
-menu managers.
-
-=item Name:	B<selectColor>
-
-=item Class:	B<Background>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-selectcolor>
-
-For menu entries that are check buttons or radio buttons, this option
-specifies the color to display in the indicator when the check button
-or radio button is selected.
-
-=item Name:	B<tearOff>
-
-=item Class:	B<TearOff>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-tearoff>
-
-This option must have a proper boolean value, which specifies
-whether or not the menu should include a tear-off entry at the
-top.  If so, it will exist as entry 0 of the menu and the other
-entries will number starting at 1.  The default
-menu bindings arrange for the menu to be torn off when the tear-off
-entry is invoked.
-
-=item Name:	B<tearOffCommand>
-
-=item Class:	B<TearOffCommand>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-tearoffcommand>
-
-If this option has a non-empty value, then it specifies a L<perl/Tk callback|Tk::callbacks>
-to invoke whenever the menu is torn off.  The actual command will
-consist of the value of this option, followed by a space, followed
-by the name of the menu window, followed by a space, followed by
-the name of the name of the torn off menu window.  For example, if
-the option's is ``B<a b>'' and menu B<.x.y> is torn off to
-create a new menu B<.x.tearoff1>, then the command
-``B<a b .x.y .x.tearoff1>'' will be invoked.
-
-=item Name:	B<title>
-
-=item Class:	B<Title>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-title>
-
-The string will be used to title the window created when this menu is
-torn off. If the title is NULL, then the window will have the title
-of the menubutton or the text of the cascade item from which this menu
-was invoked.
-
-=item Name:	B<type>
-
-=item Class:	B<Type>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-type>
-
-This option can be one of B<menubar>, B<tearoff>, or
-B<normal>, and is set when the menu is created. While the string
-returned by the configuration database will change if this option is
-changed, this does not affect the menu widget's behavior. This is used
-by the cloning mechanism and is not normally set outside of the Tk
-library.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<Menu> method creates a new top-level window (given
-by the $widget argument) and makes it into a menu widget.
-Additional
-options, described above, may be specified on the command line
-or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the menu such as its colors and font.
-The B<menu> command returns its
-$widget argument.  At the time this command is invoked,
-there must not exist a window named $widget, but
-$widget's parent must exist.
-
-A menu is a widget that displays a collection of one-line entries arranged
-in one or more columns.  There exist several different types of entries,
-each with different properties.  Entries of different types may be
-combined in a single menu.  Menu entries are not the same as
-entry widgets.  In fact, menu entries are not even distinct widgets;
-the entire menu is one widget.
-
-Menu entries are displayed with up to three separate fields.
-The main field is a label in the form of a text string,
-a bitmap, or an image, controlled by the B<-label>,
-B<-bitmap>, and B<-image> options for the entry.
-If the  B<-accelerator> option is specified for an entry then a second
-textual field is displayed to the right of the label.  The accelerator
-typically describes a keystroke sequence that may be typed in the
-application to cause the same result as invoking the menu entry.
-The third field is an I<indicator>.  The indicator is present only for
-checkbutton or radiobutton entries.  It indicates whether the entry
-is selected or not, and is displayed to the left of the entry's
-string.
-
-In normal use, an entry becomes active (displays itself differently)
-whenever the mouse pointer is over the entry.  If a mouse
-button is released over the entry then the entry is I<invoked>.
-The effect of invocation is different for each type of entry;
-these effects are described below in the sections on individual
-entries.
-
-Entries may be I<disabled>, which causes their labels
-and accelerators to be displayed
-with dimmer colors.
-The default menu bindings will not allow
-a disabled entry to be activated or invoked.
-Disabled entries may be re-enabled, at which point it becomes
-possible to activate and invoke them again.
-
-Whenever a menu's active entry is changed, a E<lt>E<lt>MenuSelectE<gt>E<gt> virtual
-event is sent to the menu. The active item can then be queried from
-the menu, and an action can be taken, such as setting
-context-sensitive help text for the entry.
-
-=head2 COMMAND ENTRIES
-
-The most common kind of menu entry is a command entry, which
-behaves much like a button widget.  When a command entry is
-invoked, a callback is executed.  The callback
-is specified with the B<-command> option.
-
-=head2 SEPARATOR ENTRIES
-
-A separator is an entry that is displayed as a horizontal dividing
-line.  A separator may not be activated or invoked, and it has
-no behavior other than its display appearance.
-
-=head2 CHECKBUTTON ENTRIES
-
-A checkbutton menu entry behaves much like a checkbutton widget.
-When it is invoked it toggles back and forth between the selected
-and deselected states.  When the entry is selected, a particular
-value is stored in a particular global variable (as determined by
-the B<-onvalue> and B<-variable> options for the entry);  when
-the entry is deselected another value (determined by the
-B<-offvalue> option) is stored in the global variable.
-An indicator box is displayed to the left of the label in a checkbutton
-entry.  If the entry is selected then the indicator's center is displayed
-in the color given by the B<-selectcolor> option for the entry;
-otherwise the indicator's center is displayed in the background color for
-the menu.  If a B<-command> option is specified for a checkbutton
-entry, then its value is evaluated each time the entry
-is invoked;  this happens after toggling the entry's
-selected state.
-
-=head2 RADIOBUTTON ENTRIES
-
-A radiobutton menu entry behaves much like a radiobutton widget.
-Radiobutton entries are organized in groups of which only one
-entry may be selected at a time.  Whenever a particular entry
-becomes selected it stores a particular value into a particular
-global variable (as determined by the B<-value> and
-B<-variable> options for the entry).  This action
-causes any previously-selected entry in the same group
-to deselect itself.
-Once an entry has become selected, any change to the entry's
-associated variable will cause the entry to deselect itself.
-Grouping of radiobutton entries is determined by their
-associated variables:  if two entries have the same associated
-variable then they are in the same group.
-An indicator diamond is displayed to the left of the label in each
-radiobutton entry.  If the entry is selected then the indicator's
-center is displayed in the color given by the B<-selectcolor> option
-for the entry;
-otherwise the indicator's center is displayed in the background color for
-the menu.  If a B<-command> option is specified for a radiobutton
-entry, then its value is evaluated each time the entry
-is invoked;  this happens after selecting the entry.
-
-=head2 CASCADE ENTRIES
-
-A cascade entry is one with an associated menu (determined
-by the B<-menu> option).  Cascade entries allow the construction
-of cascading menus.
-The B<postcascade> method can be used to post and unpost
-the associated menu just next to of the cascade entry.
-The associated menu must be a child of the menu containing
-the cascade entry (this is needed in order for menu traversal to
-work correctly).
-
-A cascade entry posts its associated menu by invoking
-
-=over 4
-
-I<$menu>-E<gt>B<post>(I<x,y>)
-
-=back
-
-where I<menu> is the path name of the associated menu, and I<x>
-and I<y> are the root-window coordinates of the upper-right
-corner of the cascade entry.
-On Unix, the lower-level menu is unposted by executing
-
-=over 4
-
-I<$menu>-E<gt>B<unpost>
-
-=back
-
-where I<menu> is the name of the associated menu.
-On other platforms, the platform's native code takes care of unposting the
-menu.
-
-If a B<-command> option is specified for a cascade entry then it is
-evaluated whenever the entry is invoked. This is not supported on Windows.
-
-=head2 TEAR-OFF ENTRIES
-
-A tear-off entry appears at the top of the menu if enabled with the
-B<tearOff> option.  It is not like other menu entries in that
-it cannot be created with the B<add> method and
-cannot be deleted with the B<delete> method.
-When a tear-off entry is created it appears as a dashed line at
-the top of the menu.  Under the default bindings, invoking the
-tear-off entry causes a torn-off copy to be made of the menu and
-all of its submenus.
-
-=head2 MENUBARS
-
-Any menu can be set as a menubar for a toplevel window (see the
-L<Toplevel|Tk::Toplevel> constructor for syntax). On the Macintosh, whenever the
-toplevel is in front, this menu's cascade items will appear in the
-menubar across the top of the main monitor. On Windows and Unix, this
-menu's items will be displayed in a menubar accross the top of the
-window. These menus will behave according to the interface guidelines
-of their platforms. For every menu set as a menubar, a clone menu is
-made. See L<"CLONES"> for more information.
-
-As noted, menubars may behave differently on different platforms.   One
-example  of this concerns the handling of checkbuttons and radiobuttons
-within the menu.  While it is permitted to put these menu  elements  on
-menubars,  they may not be drawn with indicators on some platforms, due
-to system restrictions.
-
-=head2 SPECIAL MENUS IN MENUBARS
-
-Certain menus in a menubar will be treated specially.  On the Macintosh,
-access to the special Apple and Help menus is provided. On Windows,
-access to the Windows System menu in each window is provided. On X Windows,
-a special right-justified help menu is provided. In all cases, these
-menus must be created with the command name of the menubar menu concatenated
-with the special name. So for a menubar named .menubar, on the Macintosh,
-the special menus would be .menubar.apple and .menubar.help; on Windows,
-the special menu would be .menubar.system; on X Windows, the help
-menu would be .menubar.help.
-
-When Tk sees an Apple menu on the Macintosh, that menu's contents make
-up the first items of the Apple menu on the screen whenever the window
-containing the menubar is in front. The menu is the
-first one that the user sees and has a title which is an Apple logo.
-After all of the Tk-defined items, the menu will have a separator,
-followed by all of the items in the user's Apple Menu Items folder.
-Since the System uses a different menu definition procedure for
-the Apple menu than Tk uses for its menus, and the system APIs do
-not fully support everything Tk tries to do, the menu item will only
-have its text displayed. No font attributes, images, bitmaps, or colors
-will be displayed. In addition, a menu with a tearoff item will have
-the tearoff item displayed as "(TearOff)".
-
-When Tk see a Help menu on the Macintosh, the menu's contents are
-appended to the standard help menu on the right of the user's menubar
-whenever the user's menubar is in front. The first items in the menu
-are provided by Apple. Similar to the Apple Menu, cusomization in this
-menu is limited to what the system provides.
-
-When Tk sees a System menu on Windows, its items are appended to the
-system menu that the menubar is attached to. This menu has an icon
-representing a spacebar, and can be invoked with the mouse or by typing
-Alt+Spacebar.  Due to limitations in the Windows API, any font changes,
-colors, images, bitmaps, or tearoff images will not appear in the
-system menu.
-
-When Tk see a Help menu on X Windows, the menu is moved to be last in
-the menubar and is right justified.
-
-=head2 CLONES
-
-When a menu is set as a menubar for a toplevel window, or when a menu
-is torn off, a clone of the menu is made. This clone is a menu widget
-in its own right, but it is a child of the original. Changes in the
-configuration of the original are reflected in the
-clone. Additionally, any cascades that are pointed to are also cloned
-so that menu traversal will work right. Clones are destroyed when
-either the tearoff or menubar goes away, or when the original menu is
-destroyed.
-
-=head2 WIDGET METHODS
-
-The B<Menu> method creates a widget object.
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-The widget also inherits all the methods provided by the generic
-L<Tk::Widget|Tk::Widget> class, and the L<Tk::Wm|Tk::Wm> class.
-
-Many of the methods for a menu take as one argument an
-indicator of which entry of the menu to operate on.  These
-indicators are called I<index>es and may be specified in
-any of the following forms:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<number>
-
-Specifies the entry numerically, where 0 corresponds
-to the top-most entry of the menu, 1 to the entry below it, and
-so on.
-
-=item B<active>
-
-Indicates the entry that is currently active.  If no entry is
-active then this form is equivalent to B<none>.  This form may
-not be abbreviated.
-
-=item B<end>
-
-Indicates the bottommost entry in the menu.  If there are no
-entries in the menu then this form is equivalent to B<none>.
-This form may not be abbreviated.
-
-=item B<last>
-
-Same as B<end>.
-
-=item B<none>
-
-Indicates ``no entry at all'';  this is used most commonly with
-the B<activate> option to deactivate all the entries in the
-menu.  In most cases the specification of B<none> causes
-nothing to happen in the method.
-This form may not be abbreviated.
-
-=item B<@>I<number>
-
-In this form, I<number> is treated as a y-coordinate in the
-menu's window;  the entry closest to that y-coordinate is used.
-For example, ``B<@0>'' indicates the top-most entry in the
-window.
-
-=item I<pattern>
-
-If the index doesn't satisfy one of the above forms then this
-form is used.  I<Pattern> is pattern-matched against the label of
-each entry in the menu, in order from the top down, until a
-matching entry is found.
-(In perl/Tk the matching is under review, but exact match
-should work.)
-
-=back
-
-The following methods are possible for menu widgets:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$menu>-E<gt>B<activate>(I<index>)
-
-Change the state of the entry indicated by I<index> to B<active>
-and redisplay it using its active colors.
-Any previously-active entry is deactivated.  If I<index>
-is specified as B<none>, or if the specified entry is
-disabled, then the menu ends up with no active entry.
-Returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$menu>-E<gt>B<add>(I<type, >?I<option, value, option, value, ...>?)
-
-Add a new entry to the bottom of the menu.  The new entry's type
-is given by I<type> and must be one of B<cascade>,
-B<checkbutton>, B<command>, B<radiobutton>, or B<separator>,
-or a unique abbreviation of one of the above.  If additional arguments
-are present, they specify any of the following options:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item B<-activebackground> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Specifies a background color to use for displaying this entry when it
-is active.
-If this option is specified as an empty string (the default), then the
-B<activeBackground> option for the overall menu is used.
-If the B<$Tk::strictMotif> variable has been set to request strict
-Motif compliance, then this option is ignored and the B<-background>
-option is used in its place.
-This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.
-
-=item B<-activeforeground> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Specifies a foreground color to use for displaying this entry when it
-is active.
-If this option is specified as an empty string (the default), then the
-B<activeForeground> option for the overall menu is used.
-This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.
-
-=item B<-accelerator> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Specifies a string to display at the right side of the menu entry.
-Normally describes an accelerator keystroke sequence that may be
-typed to invoke the same function as the menu entry.  This option
-is not available for separator or tear-off entries.
-
-=item B<-background> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Specifies a background color to use for displaying this entry when it
-is in the normal state (neither active nor disabled).
-If this option is specified as an empty string (the default), then the
-B<background> option for the overall menu is used.
-This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.
-
-=item B<-bitmap> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Specifies a bitmap to display in the menu instead of a textual
-label, in any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetBitmap>.
-This option overrides the B<-label> option but may be reset
-to an empty string to enable a textual label to be displayed.
-If a B<-image> option has been specified, it overrides
-B<-bitmap>.
-This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.
-
-=item B<-columnbreak> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-When this option is zero, the appears below the previous entry. When
-this option is one, the menu appears at the top of a new column in the
-menu.
-
-=item B<-compound> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Specifies whether the button should display both an image and text,
-and if so, where the image should be placed relative to the text.
-Valid values for this option are B<bottom>, B<center>, B<left>,
-B<none>, B<right> and B<top>.  The default value is B<none>, meaning
-that the button will display either an image or text, depending on the
-values of the -image and -bitmap options.
-
-=item B<-command> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-For command, checkbutton, and radiobutton entries, specifies a
-callback to execute when the menu entry is invoked.
-For cascade entries, specifies a callback to execute
-when the entry is activated (i.e. just before its submenu is
-posted).
-Not available for separator or tear-off entries.
-
-=item B<-font> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Specifies the font to use when drawing the label or accelerator
-string in this entry.
-If this option is specified as an empty string (the default) then
-the B<font> option for the overall menu is used.
-This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.
-
-=item B<-foreground> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Specifies a foreground color to use for displaying this entry when it
-is in the normal state (neither active nor disabled).
-If this option is specified as an empty string (the default), then the
-B<foreground> option for the overall menu is used.
-This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.
-
-=item B<-hidemargin> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Specifies whether the standard margins should be drawn for this menu
-entry. This is useful when creating palette with images in them, i.e.,
-color palettes, pattern palettes, etc. 1 indicates that the margin for
-the entry is hidden; 0 means that the margin is used.
-
-=item B<-image> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Specifies an image to display in the menu instead of a text string
-or bitmap
-The image must have been created by some previous invocation of
-B<image create>.
-This option overrides the B<-label> and B<-bitmap> options
-but may be reset to an empty string to enable a textual or
-bitmap label to be displayed.
-This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.
-
-=item B<-indicatoron> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Available only for checkbutton and radiobutton entries.
-I<Value> is a boolean that determines whether or not the
-indicator should be displayed.
-
-=item B<-label> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Specifies a string to display as an identifying label in the menu
-entry.  Not available for separator or tear-off entries.
-
-=item B<-menu> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Available only for cascade entries.  Specifies the path name of
-the submenu associated with this entry.
-The submenu must be a child of the menu.
-
-=item B<-offvalue> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Available only for checkbutton entries.  Specifies the value to
-store in the entry's associated variable when the entry is
-deselected.
-
-=item B<-onvalue> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Available only for checkbutton entries.  Specifies the value to
-store in the entry's associated variable when the entry is selected.
-
-=item B<-selectcolor> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Available only for checkbutton and radiobutton entries.
-Specifies the color to display in the indicator when the entry is
-selected.
-If the value is an empty string (the default) then the B<selectColor>
-option for the menu determines the indicator color.
-
-=item B<-selectimage> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Available only for checkbutton and radiobutton entries.
-Specifies an image to display in the entry (in place of
-the B<-image> option) when it is selected.
-I<Value> is the name of an image, which must have been created
-by some previous invocation of B<image create>.
-This option is ignored unless the B<-image> option has
-been specified.
-
-=item B<-state> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Specifies one of three states for the entry:  B<normal>, B<active>,
-or B<disabled>.  In normal state the entry is displayed using the
-B<foreground> option for the menu and the B<background>
-option from the entry or the menu.
-The active state is typically used when the pointer is over the entry.
-In active state the entry is displayed using the B<activeForeground>
-option for the menu along with the B<activebackground> option from
-the entry.  Disabled state means that the entry
-should be insensitive:  the default bindings will refuse to activate
-or invoke the entry.
-In this state the entry is displayed according to the
-B<disabledForeground> option for the menu and the
-B<background> option from the entry.
-This option is not available for separator entries.
-
-=item B<-underline> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Specifies the integer index of a character to underline in the entry.
-This option is also queried by the default bindings and used to
-implement keyboard traversal.
-0 corresponds to the first character of the text displayed in the entry,
-1 to the next character, and so on.
-If a bitmap or image is displayed in the entry then this option is ignored.
-This option is not available for separator or tear-off entries.
-
-=item B<-value> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Available only for radiobutton entries.  Specifies the value to
-store in the entry's associated variable when the entry is selected.
-If an empty string is specified, then the B<-label> option
-for the entry as the value to store in the variable.
-
-=item B<-variable> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Available only for checkbutton and radiobutton entries.  Specifies
-the name of a global value to set when the entry is selected.
-For checkbutton entries the variable is also set when the entry
-is deselected.  For radiobutton entries, changing the variable
-causes the currently-selected entry to deselect itself.
-
-=back
-
-The B<add> method returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$menu>-E<gt>B<clone>(I<$parent> ?, I<cloneType?>)
-
-Makes a clone of the current menu as a child of I<$parent>. This clone
-is a menu in its own right, but any changes to the clone are
-propogated to the original menu and vice versa. I<cloneType> can be
-B<normal>, B<menubar>, or B<tearoff>. Should not normally be
-called outside of the Tk library. See L<"CLONES"> for
-more information.
-
-=item I<$menu>-E<gt>B<delete>(I<index1>?, I<index2>?)
-
-Delete all of the menu entries between I<index1> and
-I<index2> inclusive.
-If I<index2> is omitted then it defaults to I<index1>.
-Attempts to delete a tear-off menu entry are ignored (instead, you
-should change the B<tearOff> option to remove the tear-off entry).
-
-=item I<$menu>-E<gt>B<entrycget>(I<index, option>)
-
-Returns the current value of a configuration option for
-the entry given by I<index>.
-I<Option> may have any of the values accepted by the B<add>
-method.
-
-=item I<$menu>-E<gt>B<entryconfigure>(I<index> ?,I<options>?)
-
-This method is similar to the B<configure> method, except that
-it applies to the options for an individual entry, whereas B<configure>
-applies to the options for the menu as a whole.
-I<Options> may have any of the values accepted by the B<add>
-method.  If I<options> are specified, options are modified
-as indicated
-in the method call and the method returns an empty string.
-If no I<options> are specified, returns a list describing
-the current options for entry I<index> (see L<Tk::options> for
-information on the format of this list).
-
-=item I<$menu>-E<gt>B<index>(I<index>)
-
-Returns the numerical index corresponding to I<index>, or
-B<none> if I<index> was specified as B<none>.
-
-=item I<$menu>-E<gt>B<insert>(I<index, type>?, I<-option>=E<gt>I<value>, ...?)
-
-Same as the B<add> method except that it inserts the new
-entry just before the entry given by I<index>, instead of appending
-to the end of the menu.  The I<type>, I<-option>, and I<value>
-arguments have the same interpretation as for the B<add> widget
-method.  It is not possible to insert new menu entries before the
-tear-off entry, if the menu has one.
-
-=item I<$menu>-E<gt>B<invoke>(I<index>)
-
-Invoke the action of the menu entry.  See the sections on the
-individual entries above for details on what happens.  If the
-menu entry is disabled then nothing happens.  If the
-entry has a callback associated with it then the result of that
-callback is returned as the result of the B<invoke> widget
-method.  Otherwise the result is an empty string.  Note:  invoking
-a menu entry does not automatically unpost the menu;  the default
-bindings normally take care of this before invoking the B<invoke>
-method.
-
-=item I<$menu>-E<gt>B<post>(I<x, y>)
-
-Arrange for the menu to be displayed on the screen at the root-window
-coordinates given by I<x> and I<y>.  These coordinates are
-adjusted if necessary to guarantee that the entire menu is visible on
-the screen.  This method normally returns an empty string.
-If the B<postCommand> option has been specified, then its value is
-executed before posting the menu and the result of
-that callback is returned as the result of the B<post> widget
-method.
-If an error returns while executing the method, then the error is
-returned without posting the menu.
-
-=item I<$menu>-E<gt>B<postcascade>(I<index>)
-
-Posts the submenu associated with the cascade entry given by
-I<index>, and unposts any previously posted submenu.
-If I<index> doesn't correspond to a cascade entry,
-or if I<$menu> isn't posted,
-the method has no effect except to unpost any currently posted
-submenu.
-
-=item I<$menu>-E<gt>B<type>(I<index>)
-
-Returns the type of the menu entry given by I<index>.
-This is the I<type> argument passed to the B<add> widget
-method when the entry was created, such as B<command>
-or B<separator>, or B<tearoff> for a tear-off entry.
-
-=item I<$menu>-E<gt>B<unpost>
-
-Unmap the window so that it is no longer displayed.  If a
-lower-level cascaded menu is posted, unpost that menu.  Returns an
-empty string. This method does not work on Windows and the
-Macintosh, as those platforms have their own way of unposting menus.
-
-=item I<$menu>-E<gt>B<yposition>(I<index>)
-
-Returns a decimal string giving the y-coordinate within the menu
-window of the topmost pixel in the entry specified by I<index>.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 MENU CONFIGURATIONS
-
-The default bindings support four different ways of using menus:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<Pulldown Menus in Menubar>
-
-This is the most command case. You create a menu widget that will become the
-menu bar. You then add cascade entries to this menu, specifying the
-pull down menus you wish to use in your menu bar. You then create all
-of the pulldowns. Once you have done this, specify the menu using the
-B<-menu> option of the toplevel's method. See the
-B<toplevel> manual entry for details.
-
-=item B<Pulldown Menus in Menu Buttons>
-
-This is the compatable way to do menu bars.  You create one menubutton
-widget for each top-level menu, and typically you arrange a series of
-menubuttons in a row in a menubar window.  You also create the top-level menus
-and any cascaded submenus, and tie them together with B<-menu>
-options in menubuttons and cascade menu entries.  The top-level menu must
-be a child of the menubutton, and each submenu must be a child of the
-menu that refers to it.  Once you have done this, the default bindings
-will allow users to traverse and invoke the tree of menus via its
-menubutton;  see the B<menubutton> documentation for details.
-
-=item B<Popup Menus>
-
-Popup menus typically post in response to a mouse button press or
-keystroke.  You create the popup menus and any cascaded submenus,
-then you call the B<Post> method at the appropriate time
-to post the top-level menu.
-
-I<$menu>-E<gt>B<Post>(I<$x>,I<$y>?,I<$entry>?)
-
-I<$x> and I<$y> are the root window coordinates at which the I<$menu>
-will be displayed. If I<$entry> is specified then that entry is centred
-on that point, otherwise the top-left corner of the I<$menu> is placed
-at that point.
-
-B<Menu> also inherits methods from L<Tk::Wm> and so the method
-B<Popup> can be used to position menu relative to other windows, the
-mouse cursor or the screen.
-
-=item B<Option Menus>
-
-An option menu consists of a menubutton with an associated menu
-that allows you to select one of several values.  The current value
-is displayed in the menubutton and is also stored in a global
-variable.  Use the L<Tk::Optionmenu> class to create option
-menubuttons and their menus.
-
-=item B<Torn-off Menus>
-
-You create a torn-off menu by invoking the tear-off entry at
-the top of an existing menu.  The default bindings will create a new menu
-that is a copy of the original menu and leave it permanently
-posted as a top-level window.  The torn-off menu behaves just
-the same as the original menu.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DEFAULT BINDINGS
-
-Tk automatically creates class bindings for menus that give them
-the following default behavior:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item [1]
-
-When the mouse enters a menu, the entry underneath the mouse
-cursor activates;  as the mouse moves around the menu, the active
-entry changes to track the mouse.
-
-=item [2]
-
-When the mouse leaves a menu all of the entries in the menu
-deactivate, except in the special case where the mouse moves from
-a menu to a cascaded submenu.
-
-=item [3]
-
-When a button is released over a menu, the active entry (if any) is invoked.
-The menu also unposts unless it is a torn-off menu.
-
-=item [4]
-
-The Space and Return keys invoke the active entry and
-unpost the menu.
-
-=item [5]
-
-If any of the entries in a menu have letters underlined with
-with B<-underline> option, then pressing one of the underlined
-letters (or its upper-case or lower-case equivalent) invokes that
-entry and unposts the menu.
-
-=item [6]
-
-The Escape key aborts a menu selection in progress without invoking any
-entry.  It also unposts the menu unless it is a torn-off menu.
-
-=item [7]
-
-The Up and Down keys activate the next higher or lower entry
-in the menu.  When one end of the menu is reached, the active
-entry wraps around to the other end.
-
-=item [8]
-
-The Left key moves to the next menu to the left.
-If the current menu is a cascaded submenu, then the submenu is
-unposted and the current menu entry becomes the cascade entry
-in the parent.
-If the current menu is a top-level menu posted from a
-menubutton, then the current menubutton is unposted and the
-next menubutton to the left is posted.
-Otherwise the key has no effect.
-The left-right order of menubuttons is determined by their stacking
-order:  Tk assumes that the lowest menubutton (which by default
-is the first one created) is on the left.
-
-=item [9]
-
-The Right key moves to the next menu to the right.
-If the current entry is a cascade entry, then the submenu is
-posted and the  current menu entry becomes the first entry
-in the submenu.
-Otherwise, if the current menu was posted from a
-menubutton, then the current menubutton is unposted and the
-next menubutton to the right is posted.
-
-Disabled menu entries are non-responsive:  they don't activate and
-they ignore mouse button presses and releases.
-
-The behavior of menus can be changed by defining new bindings for
-individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 BUGS
-
-At present it isn't possible to use the
-option database to specify values for the options to individual
-entries.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::callbacks|Tk::callbacks>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-menu, widget
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Menu/Item.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Menu/Item.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index dabaadb8a58..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Menu/Item.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,96 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Menu::Item - Base class for Menu items
-
-=for pm Tk/Menu/Item.pm
-
-=for category Implementation
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-   require Tk::Menu::Item;
-
-   my $but = $menu->Button(...);
-   $but->configure(...);
-   my $what = $but->cget();
-
-   package Whatever;
-   require Tk::Menu::Item;
-   @ISA = qw(Tk::Menu::Item);
-
-   sub PreInit
-   {
-    my ($class,$menu,$info) = @_;
-    $info->{'-xxxxx'} = ...
-    my $y = delete $info->{'-yyyy'};
-   }
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-Tk::Menu::Item is the base class from which Tk::Menu::Button,
-Tk::Menu::Cascade, Tk::Menu::Radiobutton and Tk::Menu::Checkbutton are derived.
-There is also a Tk::Menu::Separator.
-
-Constructors are declared so that $menu-E<gt>Button(...) etc. do what you would
-expect.
-
-The C<-label> option is pre-processed allowing ~ to be prefixed to the character
-to derive a C<-underline> value. Thus
-
-    $menu->Button(-label => 'Goto ~Home',...)
-
-    is equivalent to
-
-    $menu->Button(-label => 'Goto Home', -underline => 6, ...)
-
-The C<Cascade> menu item creates a sub-menu and accepts
-these options:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-menuitems>
-
-A list of items for the sub-menu.
-Within this list (which is also accepted by Menu and Menubutton) the first
-two elements of each item should be the "constructor" name and the label:
-
-    -menuitems => [
-                   [Button      => '~Quit', -command => [destroy => $mw]],
-                   [Checkbutton => '~Oil',  -variable => \$oil],
-                  ]
-
-=item B<-postcommand>
-
-A callback to be invoked before posting the menu.
-
-=item B<-tearoff>
-
-Specifies whether sub-menu can be torn-off or not.
-
-=item B<-menuvar>
-
-Scalar reference that will be set to the newly-created sub-menu.
-
-=back
-
-The returned object is currently a blessed reference to an array of two items:
-the containing Menu and the 'label'.
-Methods C<configure> and C<cget> are mapped onto underlying C<entryconfigure>
-and C<entrycget>.
-
-The main purpose of the OO interface is to allow derived item classes to
-be defined which pre-set the options used to create a more basic item.
-
-=head1 BUGS
-
-This OO interface is very new. Using the label as the "key" is a problem
-for separaror items which don't have one. The alternative would be to
-use an index into the menu but that is a problem if items are deleted
-(or inserted other than at the end).
-
-There should probably be a PostInit entry point too, or a more widget like
-defered 'configure'.
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Menubutton.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Menubutton.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index fcda3e958aa..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Menubutton.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,249 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Menubutton - Create and manipulate Menubutton widgets
-
-=for category  Tk Widget Classes
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-I<$menubutton> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<Menubutton>(?I<options>?);
-
-=head1 STANDARD OPTIONS
-
-B<-activebackground>	B<-cursor>	B<-highlightthickness>	B<-takefocus>
-B<-activeforeground>	B<-disabledforeground>	B<-image>	B<-text>
-B<-anchor>	B<-font>	B<-justify>	B<-textvariable>
-B<-background>	B<-foreground>	B<-padx>	B<-underline>
-B<-bitmap>	B<-highlightbackground>	B<-pady>	B<-wraplength>
-B<-borderwidth>	B<-highlightcolor>	B<-relief>
-
-See L<Tk::options> for details of the standard options.
-
-=head1 WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Command-Line Name: B<-compound>
-
-=item Database Name:  B<compound>
-
-=item Database Class: B<Compound>
-
-Specifies whether the button should display both an image and text,
-and if so, where the image should be placed relative to the text.
-Valid values for this option are B<bottom>, B<center>, B<left>,
-B<none>, B<right> and B<top>.  The default value is B<none>, meaning
-that the button will display either an image or text, depending on the
-values of the -image and -bitmap options.
-
-=item Name:	B<direction>
-
-=item Class:	B<Height>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-direction>
-
-Specifies where the menu is going to be popup up. B<above> tries to
-pop the menu above the menubutton. B<below> tries to pop the menu
-below the menubutton. B<left> tries to pop the menu to the left of
-the menubutton. B<right> tries to pop the menu to the right of the
-menu button. B<flush> pops the menu directly over the menubutton.
-
-=item Name:	B<height>
-
-=item Class:	B<Height>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-height>
-
-Specifies a desired height for the menubutton.
-If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the menubutton then the value is in
-screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>);
-for text it is in lines of text.
-If this option isn't specified, the menubutton's desired height is computed
-from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
-
-=item Name:	B<indicatorOn>
-
-=item Class:	B<IndicatorOn>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-indicatoron>
-
-The value must be a proper boolean value.  If it is true then
-a small indicator rectangle will be displayed on the right side
-of the menubutton and the default menu bindings will treat this
-as an option menubutton.  If false then no indicator will be
-displayed.
-
-=item Name:	B<menu>
-
-=item Class:	B<MenuName>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-menu>
-
-Specifies the path name of the menu associated with this menubutton.
-The menu must be a child of the menubutton.
-
-=item Name:	B<state>
-
-=item Class:	B<State>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-state>
-
-Specifies one of three states for the menubutton:  B<normal>, B<active>,
-or B<disabled>.  In normal state the menubutton is displayed using the
-B<foreground> and B<background> options.  The active state is
-typically used when the pointer is over the menubutton.  In active state
-the menubutton is displayed using the B<activeForeground> and
-B<activeBackground> options.  Disabled state means that the menubutton
-should be insensitive:  the default bindings will refuse to activate
-the widget and will ignore mouse button presses.
-In this state the B<disabledForeground> and
-B<background> options determine how the button is displayed.
-
-=item Name:	B<width>
-
-=item Class:	B<Width>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-width>
-
-Specifies a desired width for the menubutton.
-If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the menubutton then the value is in
-screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>);
-for text it is in characters.
-If this option isn't specified, the menubutton's desired width is computed
-from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<Menubutton> method creates a new window (given by the
-$widget argument) and makes it into a menubutton widget.
-Additional
-options, described above, may be specified on the command line
-or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the menubutton such as its colors, font,
-text, and initial relief.  The B<menubutton> command returns its
-$widget argument.  At the time this command is invoked,
-there must not exist a window named $widget, but
-$widget's parent must exist.
-
-A menubutton is a widget that displays a textual string, bitmap, or image
-and is associated with a menu widget.
-If text is displayed, it must all be in a single font, but it
-can occupy multiple lines on the screen (if it contains newlines
-or if wrapping occurs because of the B<wrapLength> option) and
-one of the characters may optionally be underlined using the
-B<underline> option.  In normal usage, pressing
-mouse button 1 over the menubutton causes the associated menu to
-be posted just underneath the menubutton.  If the mouse is moved over
-the menu before releasing the mouse button, the button release
-causes the underlying menu entry to be invoked.  When the button
-is released, the menu is unposted.
-
-Menubuttons are typically organized into groups called menu bars
-that allow scanning:
-if the mouse button is pressed over one menubutton (causing it
-to post its menu) and the mouse is moved over another menubutton
-in the same menu bar without releasing the mouse button, then the
-menu of the first menubutton is unposted and the menu of the
-new menubutton is posted instead.
-
-There are several interactions between menubuttons and menus;  see
-the B<menu> manual entry for information on various menu configurations,
-such as pulldown menus and option menus.
-
-=head1 WIDGET METHODS
-
-The B<Menubutton> method creates a widget object.
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-The B<menu> method returns the menu associated with the widget.
-The widget also inherits all the methods provided by the generic
-L<Tk::Widget|Tk::Widget> class.
-
-=head1 DEFAULT BINDINGS
-
-Tk automatically creates class bindings for menubuttons that give them
-the following default behavior:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item [1]
-
-A menubutton activates whenever the mouse passes over it and deactivates
-whenever the mouse leaves it.
-
-=item [2]
-
-Pressing mouse button 1 over a menubutton posts the menubutton:
-its relief changes to raised and its associated menu is posted
-under the menubutton.  If the mouse is dragged down into the menu
-with the button still down, and if the mouse button is then
-released over an entry in the menu, the menubutton is unposted
-and the menu entry is invoked.
-
-=item [3]
-
-If button 1 is pressed over a menubutton and then released over that
-menubutton, the menubutton stays posted: you can still move the mouse
-over the menu and click button 1 on an entry to invoke it.
-Once a menu entry has been invoked, the menubutton unposts itself.
-
-=item [4]
-
-If button 1 is pressed over a menubutton and then dragged over some
-other menubutton, the original menubutton unposts itself and the
-new menubutton posts.
-
-=item [5]
-
-If button 1 is pressed over a menubutton and released outside
-any menubutton or menu, the menubutton unposts without invoking
-any menu entry.
-
-=item [6]
-
-When a menubutton is posted, its associated menu claims the input
-focus to allow keyboard traversal of the menu and its submenus.
-See the B<menu> documentation for details on these bindings.
-
-=item [7]
-
-If the B<underline> option has been specified for a menubutton
-then keyboard traversal may be used to post the menubutton:
-Alt+I<x>, where I<x> is the underlined character (or its
-lower-case or upper-case equivalent), may be typed in any window
-under the menubutton's toplevel to post the menubutton.
-
-=item [8]
-
-The F10 key may be typed in any window to post the first menubutton
-under its toplevel window that isn't disabled.
-
-=item [9]
-
-If a menubutton has the input focus, the space and return keys
-post the menubutton.
-
-If the menubutton's state is B<disabled> then none of the above
-actions occur:  the menubutton is completely non-responsive.
-
-The behavior of menubuttons can be changed by defining new bindings for
-individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-menubutton, widget
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Message.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Message.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 9b0d67f3118..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Message.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,151 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Message - Create and manipulate Message widgets
-
-=for category  Tk Widget Classes
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-I<$message> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<Message>(?I<options>?);
-
-=head1 STANDARD OPTIONS
-
-B<-anchor>	B<-font>	B<-highlightthickness>	B<-takefocus>
-B<-background>	B<-foreground>	B<-padx>	B<-text>
-B<-borderwidth>	B<-highlightbackground>	B<-pady>	B<-textvariable>
-B<-cursor>	B<-highlightcolor>	B<-relief>	B<-width>
-
-See L<Tk::options> for details of the standard options.
-
-=head1 WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Name:	B<aspect>
-
-=item Class:	B<Aspect>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-aspect>
-
-Specifies a non-negative integer value indicating desired
-aspect ratio for the text.  The aspect ratio is specified as
-100*width/height.  100 means the text should
-be as wide as it is tall, 200 means the text should
-be twice as wide as it is tall, 50 means the text should
-be twice as tall as it is wide, and so on.
-Used to choose line length for text if B<width> option
-isn't specified.
-Defaults to 150.
-
-=item Name:	B<justify>
-
-=item Class:	B<Justify>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-justify>
-
-Specifies how to justify lines of text.
-Must be one of B<left>, B<center>, or B<right>.  Defaults
-to B<left>.
-This option works together with the B<anchor>, B<aspect>,
-B<padX>, B<padY>, and B<width> options to provide a variety
-of arrangements of the text within the window.
-The B<aspect> and B<width> options determine the amount of
-screen space needed to display the text.
-The B<anchor>, B<padX>, and B<padY> options determine where this
-rectangular area is displayed within the widget's window, and the
-B<justify> option determines how each line is displayed within that
-rectangular region.
-For example, suppose B<anchor> is B<e> and B<justify> is
-B<left>, and that the message window is much larger than needed
-for the text.
-The the text will displayed so that the left edges of all the lines
-line up and the right edge of the longest line is B<padX> from
-the right side of the window;  the entire text block will be centered
-in the vertical span of the window.
-
-=item Name:	B<width>
-
-=item Class:	B<Width>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-width>
-
-Specifies the length of lines in the window.
-The value may have any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-If this option has a value greater than zero then the B<aspect>
-option is ignored and the B<width> option determines the line
-length.
-If this option has a value less than or equal to zero, then
-the B<aspect> option determines the line length.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<Message> method creates a new window (given by the
-$widget argument) and makes it into a message widget.
-Additional
-options, described above, may be specified on the command line
-or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the message such as its colors, font,
-text, and initial relief.  The B<message> command returns its
-$widget argument.  At the time this command is invoked,
-there must not exist a window named $widget, but
-$widget's parent must exist.
-
-A message is a widget that displays a textual string.  A message
-widget has three special features.  First, it breaks up
-its string into lines in order to produce a given aspect ratio
-for the window.  The line breaks are chosen at word boundaries
-wherever possible (if not even a single word would fit on a
-line, then the word will be split across lines).  Newline characters
-in the string will force line breaks;  they can be used, for example,
-to leave blank lines in the display.
-
-The second feature of a message widget is justification.  The text
-may be displayed left-justified (each line starts at the left side of
-the window), centered on a line-by-line basis, or right-justified
-(each line ends at the right side of the window).
-
-The third feature of a message widget is that it handles control
-characters and non-printing characters specially.  Tab characters
-are replaced with enough blank space to line up on the next
-8-character boundary.  Newlines cause line breaks.  Other control
-characters (ASCII code less than 0x20) and characters not defined
-in the font are displayed as a four-character sequence B<\x>I<hh> where
-I<hh> is the two-digit hexadecimal number corresponding to
-the character.  In the unusual case where the font doesn't contain
-all of the characters in ``0123456789abcdef\x'' then control
-characters and undefined characters are not displayed at all.
-
-=head1 WIDGET METHODS
-
-The B<Message> method creates a widget object.
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-The widget also inherits all the methods provided by the generic
-L<Tk::Widget|Tk::Widget> class.
-
-=head1 DEFAULT BINDINGS
-
-When a new message is created, it has no default event bindings:
-messages are intended for output purposes only.
-
-=head1 BUGS
-
-Tabs don't work very well with text that is centered or right-justified.
-The most common result is that the line is justified wrong.
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-message, widget
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/MsgBox.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/MsgBox.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 6f5536cf89c..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/MsgBox.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,83 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::MsgBox - create and manipulate a message dialog
-
-=for pm Tk/MsgBox.pm
-
-=for category Popups and Dialogs
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-    use Tk::MsgBox
-    ...
-    $d = $top->MsgBox(-title => "Title", -type => "okcancel");
-    ...
-    $button = $d->Show;
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-B<MsgBox> is a simple dialog with predefined buttons.
-
-=head1 OPTIONS
-
-The options recognized by B<MsgBox> are as follows:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-icon>
-
-Specify the icon of the MsgBox. Valid values are B<error>, B<info>,
-B<question>, or B<warning>.
-
-=item B<-type>
-
-Specify the type of the MsgBox. Valid values are B<abortretryignore>,
-B<ok>, B<okcancel>, B<retrycancel>, B<yesno>, or B<yesnocancel>. The
-type determines the buttons to be shown.
-
-=item B<-default>
-
-Specify the default button. This must be one of B<abort>, B<retry>,
-B<ignore>, B<ok>, B<cancel>, B<yes>, or B<no>, depending on the type
-of the MsgBox previously specified.
-
-=item B<-detail>
-
-Specify text for the detail region of the MsgBox.
-
-=item B<-message>
-
-Specify the message text of the MsgBox.
-
-=item B<-title>
-
-Specify the title of the MsgBox.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 METHODS
-
-B<MsgBox> supports only one method as of now:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<Show()>
-
-Displays the MsgBox until the user invokes one of the buttons. Returns
-the name of the button invoked.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 AUTHOR
-
-Translated from Tcl/Tk by B<Slaven Rezic> srezic@cpan.org
-
-This code is distributed under the same terms as Perl.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::messageBox>, L<Tk::DialogBox>, L<Tk::Dialog>.
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Mwm.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Mwm.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index e9c09cd0358..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Mwm.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,109 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Mwm - Communicate with the Motif(tm) window manager.
-
-=for category  Tix Extensions
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >B<use Tk::Mwm;>
-
-S<    >I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<mwm>I<Option>?(I<args>)?
-
-S<    >I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<mwm>(I<option> ?,I<args>?)
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-Interface to special extentions supported by mwm.
-
-=head1 METHODS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<mwmDecoration>?(?option??=E<gt>value? ?,...?)?
-
-When no options are given, this method returns the values of all the
-decorations options for the toplevel window with the I<$toplevel>.
-When only one option is given without specifying the value, the
-current value of that option is returned.
-When more than one "option-value" pairs are passed to this method,
-the specified values will be assigned to the corresponding options. As
-a result, the appearance of the Motif decorations around the toplevel
-window will be changed.
-Possible options are: B<-border>, B<-menu>, B<-maximize>,
-B<-minimize>, B<-resizeh> and B<-title>. The value must be a
-Boolean value. The values returned by this command are undefined when
-the window is not managed by mwm.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<mwmIsmwmrunning>
-
-This returns value is true if mwm is running on the screen where the specified
-window is located, false otherwise.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<mwmProtocol>
-
-When no additional options are given, this method returns all
-protocols associated with this toplevel window.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<mwmProtocol>(B<activate> =E<gt> I<protocol_name>)
-
-Activate the mwm protocol message in mwm's menu.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<MwmProtocol>(B<add> =E<gt> I<protocol_name>, I<menu_message>)
-
-Add a new mwm protocol message for this toplevel window. The
-message is identified by the string name specified in
-I<protocol_name>.  A menu item will be added into mwm's menu as
-specified by I<menu_message>.  Once a new mwm protocol message is
-added to a toplevel, it can be caught by the TK B<protocol>
-method. Here is an example:
-
-S<    >I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<mwmProtocol>(B<'add'> =E<gt> 'MY_PRINT_HELLO', '"Print Hello"  _H CtrlE<lt>KeyE<gt>H');
-
-S<    >I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<protocol>(B<'MY_PRINT_HELLO'> =E<gt> sub {print "Hello"});
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<mwmProtocol>(B<'deactivate'> =E<gt> I<protocol_name>)
-
-Deactivate the mwm protocol message in mwm's menu.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<mwmProtocol>(B<'delete'> =E<gt> I<protocol_name>)
-
-Delete the mwm protocol message from mwm's menu. Please note that the
-window manager protocol handler associated with this protocol (by the
-B<protocol> method) is not deleted automatically. You have to
-delete the protocol handle explicitly.  E.g.:
-
-S<    >I<$mw>-E<gt>B<mwmProtocol>(B<'delete'> =E<gt> 'MY_PRINT_HELLO');
-
-S<    >I<$mw>-E<gt>B<protocol>(B<'MY_PRINT_HELLO'> =E<gt> '');
-
-=back
-
-=head1 BUGS
-
-This is a Tix extension which perl/Tk has adopted. It has not been
-tested as perl/Tk's author has not got round to installing a Motif Window
-Manager.
-
-On some versions of mwm, the B<-border> will not disappear unless
-B<-resizeh> is turned off. Also, the B<-title> will not disappear
-unless all of B<-title>, B<-menu>, B<-maximize> and
-B<-minimize> are turned off.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::Wm|Tk::Wm>
-L<Tk::tixWm|Tk::tixWm>
-L<Tk::Toplevel|Tk::Toplevel>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-window manager, mwm, TIX
-
-=head1 AUTHOR
-
-Ioi Kim Lam - ioi@graphics.cis.upenn.edu
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/NoteBook.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/NoteBook.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 2cc84bb3fad..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/NoteBook.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,235 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::NoteBook - display several windows in limited space with notebook metaphor.
-
-=for pm Tixish/NoteBook.pm
-
-=for category Tix Extensions
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-  use Tk::NoteBook;
-  ...
-  $w = $frame->NoteBook();
-  $page1 = $w->add("page1", options);
-  $page2 = $w->add("page2", options);
-  ...
-  $page2 = $w->add("page2", options);
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The NoteBook widget provides a notebook metaphor to display several
-windows in limited space. The notebook is divided into a stack of pages
-of which only one is displayed at any time. The other pages can be
-selected by means of choosing the visual "tabs" at the top of the
-widget. Additionally, the <Tab> key may be used to traverse the pages.
-If B<-underline> is used, Alt- bindings will also work.
-
-The widget takes all the options that a Frame does. In addition,
-it supports the following options:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-dynamicgeometry>
-
-If set to false (default and recommended), the size of the NoteBook
-will match the size of the largest page. Otherwise the size will
-match the size of the current page causing the NoteBook to change
-size when different pages of different sizes are selected.
-
-=item B<-ipadx>
-
-The amount of internal horizontal padding around the pages.
-
-=item B<-ipady>
-
-The amount of internal vertical padding around the pages.
-
-=item B<-backpagecolor>
-
-The background color of the tabs and back page.
-
-=item B<-disabledforeground>
-
-XXX
-
-=item B<-focuscolor>
-
-The color of the focus border around the tabs.
-
-=item B<-font>
-
-The font of the tab labels.
-
-=item B<-inactivebackground>
-
-XXX
-
-=item B<-tabpadx>
-
-Horizonzal padding around the tab label.
-
-=item B<-tabpady>
-
-Vertical padding around the tab label.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 METHODS
-
-The following methods may be used with a NoteBook object in addition
-to standard methods.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<add(>I<pageName>, I<options>B<)>
-
-Adds a page with name I<pageName> to the notebook. Returns an object
-of type B<Frame>. The recognized I<options> are:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-anchor>
-
-Specifies how the information in a tab is to be displayed. Must be
-one of B<n>, B<ne>, B<e>, B<se>, B<s>, B<sw>, B<w>, B<nw> or
-B<center>.
-
-=item B<-bitmap>
-
-Specifies a bitmap to display on the tab of this page. The bitmap
-is displayed only if none of the B<-label> or B<-image> options
-are specified.
-
-=item B<-image>
-
-Specifies an image to display on the tab of this page. The image
-is displayed only if the B<-label> option is not specified.
-
-=item B<-label>
-
-Specifies the text string to display on the tab of this page.
-
-=item B<-justify>
-
-When there are multiple lines of text displayed in a tab, this
-option determines the justification of the lines.
-
-=item B<-createcmd>
-
-Specifies a L<callback|Tk::callbacks> to be called the first time the page is
-shown on the screen. This option can be used to delay the creation
-of the contents of a page until necessary. It can be useful in
-situations where there are a large number of pages in a NoteBook
-widget; with B<-createcmd> you do not have to make the user wait
-until all pages are constructed before displaying the first page.
-
-=item B<-raisecmd>
-
-Specifies a L<callback|Tk::callbacks> to be called whenever this page is raised
-by the user.
-
-=item B<-state>
-
-Specifies whether this page can be raised by the user. Must be
-either B<normal> or B<disabled>.
-
-=item B<-underline>
-
-Specifies the integer index of a character to underline in the
-tab. This option is used by the default bindings to implement
-keyboard traversal for menu buttons and menu entries. 0
-corresponds to the first character of text displayed on the
-widget, 1 to the next character and so on.
-
-=item B<-wraplength>
-
-This option specifies the maximum line length of the label string
-on this tab. If the line length of the label string exceeds this
-length, then it is wrapped onto the next line so that no line is
-longer than the specified length. The value may be specified in
-any standard forms for screen distances. If this value is less
-than or equal to 0, then no wrapping is done: lines will break
-only at newline characters in the text.
-
-=back
-
-=item B<delete(>I<pageName>B<)>
-
-Deletes the page identified by I<pageName>.
-
-=item B<pagecget(>I<pageName>, I<-option>B<)>
-
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given by
-I<-option> in the page given by I<pageName>. I<Option> may have any of
-the values accepted in the B<add> method.
-
-=item B<pageconfigure(>I<pageName>, I<options>B<)>
-
-Like configure for the page indicated by I<pageName>. I<Options> may
-be any of the options accepted by the B<add> method.
-
-=item B<pages>
-
-Returns a list consisting of the names of all currently defined
-pages, i.e., those created with the B<add> method.
-
-=item B<page_widget(>I<pageName>B<)>
-
-Returns the page with name I<pageName>.
-
-=item B<raise(>I<pageName>B<)>
-
-Raise the page identified by I<pageName>.
-
-=item B<raised()>
-
-Returns the name of the currently raised page.
-
-=item B<geometryinfo>
-
-Return the dimensions of the tab area.
-
-=item B<identify(>I<x>,I<y>B<)>
-
-Identify the tab's page name under the specified coordinates. Return
-an empty string if there's no tab.
-
-=item B<info(E<quot>pagesE<quot>)>
-
-Return a list of all pages.
-
-=item B<info(E<quot>focusE<quot>)>
-
-Return the page name of the tab with the current focus.
-
-=item B<info(E<quot>focusnextE<quot>)>
-
-Return the page name of the tab which would receive the next focus.
-
-=item B<info(E<quot>focusprevE<quot>)>
-
-Return the page name of the tab which had the previous focus.
-
-=item B<info(E<quot>activeE<quot>)>
-
-Return the page name of the active tab.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 BUGS
-
-The options C<-width> and C<-height> do not work.
-
-=head1 AUTHORS
-
-B<Rajappa Iyer>  <rsi@earthling.net>
-Nick Ing-Simmons <nick@ni-s.u-net.com>
-
-This code and documentation was derived from NoteBook.tcl in
-Tix4.0 written by Ioi Lam. It may be distributed under the same
-conditions as Perl itself.
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Optionmenu.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Optionmenu.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index f5e514c63b3..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Optionmenu.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,100 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Optionmenu - Let the user select one of some predefined options values
-
-=for pm Tk/Optionmenu.pm
-
-=for category Tk Widget Classes
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-    use Tk::Optionmenu;
-
-    $opt = $w->Optionmenu(
-			-options => REFERENCE_to_OPTIONLIST,
-			-command => CALLBACK,
-			-variable => SCALAR_REF,
-			);
-
-    $opt->addOptions( OPTIONLIST );
-
-    # OPTION LIST is
-    #   a)  $val1, $val2, $val3,...
-    #   b)  [ $lab1=>$val1], [$lab2=>val2], ... ]
-    #   c)  combination of a) and b), e.g.,
-    #       val1, [$lab2=>val2], val3, val4, [...], ...
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<Optionmenu> widget allows the user chose between a given set
-of options.
-
-If the user should be able to change the available option have a look
-at L<Tk::BrowseEntry>.
-
-=head1 OPTIONS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item -options
-
-(Re)sets the list of options presented.
-
-=item -command
-
-Defines the L<callback|Tk::callbacks> that is invokes when a new option
-is selected.
-
-=item -variable
-
-Reference to a scalar that contains the current value of the
-selected option.
-
-=item -textvariable
-
-Reference to a scalar that contains the text label of the current value of the
-selected option.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 METHODS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item addOptions
-
-Adds OPTION_LIST to the already available options.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 EXAMPLE
-
- use Tk;
- my $mw = MainWindow->new();
-
- my ($var, $tvar);
- my $opt = $mw->Optionmenu(
-        -options => [[jan=>1], [feb=>2], [mar=>3], [apr=>4]],
-        -command => sub { print "got: ", shift, "\n" },
-        -variable => \$var,
-        -textvariable => \$tvar
-       )->pack;
-
- $opt->addOptions([may=>5],[jun=>6],[jul=>7],[aug=>8]);
-
- my $f = $mw->Frame(-relief=>'groove', -borderwidth => 2)->pack;
- $f->Label(-textvariable=>\$tvar)->pack(-side => 'left');
- $f->Label(-text => " -> ")->pack(-side => 'left');
- $f->Label(-textvariable=>\$var)->pack(-side => 'left');
-
- $mw->Button(-text=>'Exit', -command=>sub{$mw->destroy})->pack;
-
- MainLoop;
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::Menubutton>, L<Tk::BrowseEntry>
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Panedwindow.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Panedwindow.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 673938d55e5..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Panedwindow.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,326 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#  RCS: @(#) $Id: panedwindow.n,v 1.2.2.1 2003/07/17 20:49:00 dkf Exp $
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Panedwindow - Create and manipulate Panedwindow widgets
-
-=for category  Tk Generic Methods
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-I<$panedwindow> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<Panedwindow>(?I<options>?);
-
- -background    -height  -width
- -borderwidth   -orient
- -cursor        -relief
-
-=head1 WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Option:	B<-handlepad>
-
-=item Name:	B<handlePad>
-
-=item Class:	B<HandlePad>
-
-When sash handles are drawn, specifies the distance from the top or
-left end of the sash (depending on the orientation of the widget) at
-which to draw the handle.  May be any value accepted by B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-
-=item Option:	B<-handlesize>
-
-=item Name:	B<handleSize>
-
-=item Class:	B<HandleSize>
-
-Specifies the side length of a sash handle.  Handles are always
-drawn as squares.  May be any value accepted by B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-
-=item Option:	B<-opaqueresize>
-
-=item Name:	B<opaqueResize>
-
-=item Class:	B<OpaqueResize>
-
-Specifies whether panes should be resized as a sash is moved (true),
-or if resizing should be deferred until the sash is placed (false).
-
-=item Option:	B<-sashcursor>
-
-=item Name:	B<sashCursor>
-
-=item Class:	B<SashCursor>
-
-Mouse cursor to use when over a sash.  If null,
-B<sb_h_double_arrow> will be used for horizontal Panedwindows, and
-B<sb_v_double_arrow> will be used for vertical Panedwindows.
-
-=item Option:	B<-sashpad>
-
-=item Name:	B<sashPad>
-
-=item Class:	B<SashPad>
-
-Specifies the amount of padding to leave of each side of a sash.  May
-be any value accepted by B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-
-=item Option:	B<-sashrelief>
-
-=item Name:	B<sashRelief>
-
-=item Class:	B<SashRelief>
-
-Relief to use when drawing a sash.  May be any of the standard Tk
-relief values.
-
-=item Option:	B<-sashwidth>
-
-=item Name:	B<sashWidth>
-
-=item Class:	B<SashWidth>
-
-Specifies the width of each sash.  May be any value accepted by
-B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-
-=item Option:	B<-showhandle>
-
-=item Name:	B<showHandle>
-
-=item Class:	B<ShowHandle>
-
-Specifies whether sash handles should be shown.  May be any valid
-boolean value.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<Panedwindow> method creates a new window (given by the
-$panedwindow argument) and makes it into a Panedwindow widget.
-Additional options, described above, may be specified on the command
-line or in the option database to configure aspects of the Panedwindow
-such as its default background color and relief.
-
-A Panedwindow widget contains any number of panes, arranged
-horizontally or vertically, according to the value of the
-B<-orient> option.  Each pane contains one widget, and each pair of
-panes is separated by a moveable (via mouse movements) sash.  Moving a
-sash causes the widgets on either side of the sash to be resized.
-
-=head1 WIDGET METHODS
-
-The B<Panedwindow> method
-may be used to invoke various operations on the widget.  It has the
-following general form:
-
- $widget->method(?arg arg ...?);
-
-The following
-commands are possible for Panedwindow widgets:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<add>(?window ...? ?option value ...?);
-
-Add one or more windows to the Panedwindow, each in a separate pane.
-The arguments consist of the names of one or more windows
-followed by pairs of arguments that specify how to manage the windows.
-I<Option> may have any of the values accepted by the
-B<configure> subcommand.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<cget>(I<option>);
-
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given by
-I<option>.  I<Option> may have any of the values accepted by the
-B<Panedwindow> command.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<configure>(I<?option?, ?value, option, value, ...?>);
-
-Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.  If no
-I<option> is specified, returns a list describing all of the
-available options for $widget (see L<Tk::configure> for
-information on the format of this list).  If I<option> is specified
-with no I<value>, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no I<option> is specified).  If
-one or more I<option-value> pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string. I<Option> may have
-any of the values accepted by the B<Panedwindow> command.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<forget>(?window ...?);
-
-Remove the pane containing $widget from the Panedwindow.  All
-geometry management options for $widget will be forgotten.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<identify>(I<x, y>);
-
-Identify the Panedwindow component underneath the point given by
-I<x> and I<y>, in window coordinates.  If the point is over a
-sash or a sash handle, the result is a two element list containing the
-index of the sash or handle, and a word indicating whether it is over
-a sash or a handle, such as [0, 'sash'] or [2, 'handle'].  If the point is
-over any other part of the Panedwindow, the result is an empty list.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<proxy>(I<?args?>);
-
-This command is used to query and change the position of the sash
-proxy, used for rubberband-style pane resizing. It can take any of
-the following forms:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<proxyCoord>;
-
-Return a list containing the x and y coordinates of the most recent
-proxy location.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<proxyForget>;
-
-Remove the proxy from the display.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<proxyPlace>(I<x, y>);
-
-Place the proxy at the given I<x> and I<y> coordinates.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<sash>(I<?args?>);
-
-This command is used to query and change the position of sashes in the
-Panedwindow.  It can take any of the following forms:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<sashCoord>(I<index>);
-
-Return the current x and y coordinate pair for the sash given by
-I<index>.  I<Index> must be an integer between 0 and 1 less than
-the number of panes in the Panedwindow.  The coordinates given are
-those of the top left corner of the region containing the sash.
-I<$widget>-E<gt>B<sashDragto>(I<index, x, y>)
-This command computes the difference between the given coordinates and the
-coordinates given to the last B<sash coord> command for the given
-sash.  It then moves that sash the computed difference.  The return
-value is the empty string.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<sashMark>(I<index, x, y>);
-
-Records I<x> and I<y> for the sash given by I<index>; used in
-conjunction with later dragto commands to move the sash.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<sashPlace>(I<index, x, y>);
-
-Place the sash given by I<index> at the given coordinates.
-
-=back
-
-=item $widget I<$widget>-E<gt>B<panecget>(option);
-
-Query a management option for $widget.  I<Option> may be any
-value allowed by the B<paneconfigure> subcommand.
-
-=item $widget I<$widget>-E<gt>B<paneconfigure>(?option? ?value option value ...?);
-
-Query or modify the management options for $widget.  If no
-I<option> is specified, returns a list describing all of the
-available options for $widget (see L<Tk::configure> for
-information on the format of this list).  If I<option> is specified
-with no I<value>, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no I<option> is specified).  If
-one or more I<option-value> pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string.  The following options
-are supported:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-after> =E<gt> $widget
-
-Insert the window after the window specified.  $widget should be the
-name of a window already managed by $widget.
-
-=item B<-before> =E<gt> $widget
-
-Insert the window before the window specified.  $widget should be
-the name of a window already managed by $widget.
-
-=item B<-height> =E<gt> I<size>
-
-Specify a height for the window.  The height will be the outer
-dimension of the window including its border, if any.  If I<size>
-is an empty string, or if B<-height> is not specified, then the
-height requested internally by the window will be used initially; the
-height may later be adjusted by the movement of sashes in the
-Panedwindow.  I<Size> may be any value accepted by B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-
-=item B<-minsize> =E<gt> I<n>
-
-Specifies that the size of the window cannot be made less than
-I<n>.  This constraint only affects the size of the widget in the
-paned dimension -- the x dimension for horizontal Panedwindows, the y
-dimension for vertical Panedwindows.  May be any value accepted by
-B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-
-=item B<-padx> =E<gt> I<n>
-
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating how much extra space to
-leave on each side of the window in the X-direction.  The value may
-have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-
-=item B<-pady> =E<gt> I<n>
-
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating how much extra space to
-leave on each side of the window in the Y-direction.  The value may
-have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-
-=item B<-sticky> =E<gt> I<style>
-
-If a window's pane is larger than the requested dimensions of the
-window, this option may be used to position (or stretch) the window
-within its pane.  I<Style>  is a string that contains zero or more
-of the characters B<n>, B<s>, B<e> or B<w>.  The string
-can optionally contains spaces or commas, but they are ignored.  Each
-letter refers to a side (north, south, east, or west) that the window
-will "stick" to.  If both B<n> and B<s> (or B<e> and B<w>)
-are specified, the window will be stretched to fill the entire height
-(or width) of its cavity.
-
-=item B<-width> =E<gt> I<size>
-
-Specify a width for the window.  The width will be the outer
-dimension of the window including its border, if any.  If I<size>
-is an empty string, or if B<-width> is not specified, then the
-width requested internally by the window will be used initially; the
-width may later be adjusted by the movement of sashes in the
-Panedwindow.  I<Size> may be any value accepted by B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<panes>;
-
-Returns an ordered list of the widgets managed by $widget.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 RESIZING PANES
-
-A pane is resized by grabbing the sash (or sash handle if present) and
-dragging with the mouse.  This is accomplished via mouse motion
-bindings on the widget.  When a sash is moved, the sizes of the panes
-on each side of the sash, and thus the widgets in those panes, are
-adjusted.
-
-When a pane is resized from outside (eg, it is packed to expand and
-fill, and the containing toplevel is resized), space is added to the final
-(rightmost or bottommost) pane in the window.
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-Panedwindow, widget, geometry management
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Photo.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Photo.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 02a691d6261..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Photo.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,475 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1994 The Australian National University
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#  Author: Paul Mackerras (paulus@cs.anu.edu.au),
-# 	    Department of Computer Science,
-# 	    Australian National University.
-#  RCS: @(#) $Id: photo.n,v 1.2 1998/09/14 18:22:59 stanton Exp $
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Photo - Full-color images
-
-=for category Tk Image Classes
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<Photo>(?I<name>??, I<options>?)
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-A photo is an L<image|Tk::Image> whose pixels can display any color or be
-transparent.  A photo image is stored internally in full color (32
-bits per pixel), and is displayed using dithering if necessary.  Image
-data for a photo image can be obtained from a file or a string, or it
-can be supplied from
-C code through a procedural interface.  At present, only GIF,
-XBM, XPM, BMP, JPEG, PNG and PPM/PGM
-formats are supported, but an interface exists to allow additional
-image file formats to be added easily.  A photo image is transparent
-in regions where no image data has been supplied
-or where it has been set transparent by the B<transparencySet>
-subcommand.
-
-=head1 CREATING PHOTOS
-
-Photos are created using the B<Photo> method.
-B<Photo> supports the following I<options>:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-data> =E<gt> I<string>
-
-Specifies the contents of the image as a string.
-The string can
-contain base64 encoded data or binary data.
-The format of the
-string must be one of those for which there is an image file format
-handler that will accept string data.  If both the B<-data>
-and B<-file> options are specified, the B<-file> option takes
-precedence.
-
-=item B<-format> =E<gt> I<format-name>
-
-Specifies the name of the file format for the data specified with the
-B<-data> or B<-file> option.
-
-=item B<-file> =E<gt> I<name>
-
-I<name> gives the name of a file that is to be read to supply data
-for the photo image.  The file format must be one of those for which
-there is an image file format handler that can read data.
-
-=item B<-gamma> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Specifies that the colors allocated for displaying this image in a
-window should be corrected for a non-linear display with the specified
-gamma exponent value.  (The intensity produced by most
-CRT displays is a power function of the input value, to a good
-approximation; gamma is the exponent and is typically around 2).
-The value specified must be greater than zero.  The default
-value is one (no correction).  In general, values greater than one
-will make the image lighter, and values less than one will make it
-darker.
-
-=item B<-height> =E<gt> I<number>
-
-Specifies the height of the image, in pixels.  This option is useful
-primarily in situations where the user wishes to build up the contents
-of the image piece by piece.  A value of zero (the default) allows the
-image to expand or shrink vertically to fit the data stored in it.
-
-=item B<-palette> =E<gt> I<palette-spec>
-
-Specifies the resolution of the color cube to be allocated for
-displaying this image, and thus the number of colors used from the
-colormaps of the windows where it is displayed.  The
-I<palette-spec> string may be either a single decimal number,
-specifying the number of shades of gray to use, or three decimal
-numbers separated by slashes (/), specifying the number of shades of
-red, green and blue to use, respectively.  If the first form (a single
-number) is used, the image will be displayed in monochrome (i.e.,
-grayscale).
-
-=item B<-width> =E<gt> I<number>
-
-Specifies the width of the image, in pixels.    This option is useful
-primarily in situations where the user wishes to build up the contents
-of the image piece by piece.  A value of zero (the default) allows the
-image to expand or shrink horizontally to fit the data stored in it.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 IMAGE METHODS
-
-When a photo image is created, Tk also creates a new object.
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-
-Those options that write data to the image generally expand the size
-of the image, if necessary, to accommodate the data written to the
-image, unless the user has specified non-zero values for the
-B<-width> and/or B<-height> configuration options, in which
-case the width and/or height, respectively, of the image will not be
-changed.
-
-The following addition methods are available for photo images:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$image>-E<gt>B<blank>
-
-Blank the image; that is, set the entire image to have no data, so it
-will be displayed as transparent, and the background of whatever
-window it is displayed in will show through.
-
-=item I<$image>-E<gt>B<copy>(I<sourceImage> ?,I<option value(s) ...>?)
-
-Copies a region from the image called I<$sourceImage> (which must
-be a photo image) to the image called I<$image>, possibly with
-pixel zooming and/or subsampling.  If no options are specified, this
-method copies the whole of I<$sourceImage> into I<$image>,
-starting at coordinates (0,0) in I<$image>.  The following
-options may be specified:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item B<-from> =E<gt> I<x1, y1, ? ,x2, y2?>
-
-Specifies a rectangular sub-region of the source image to be copied.
-(I<x1,y1>) and (I<x2,y2>) specify diagonally opposite corners of
-the rectangle.  If I<x2> and I<y2> are not specified, the
-default value is the bottom-right corner of the source image.  The
-pixels copied will include the left and top edges of the specified
-rectangle but not the bottom or right edges.  If the B<-from>
-option is not given, the default is the whole source image.
-
-=item B<-to> =E<gt> I<x1, y1, ?, x2, y2?>
-
-Specifies a rectangular sub-region of the destination image to be
-affected.  (I<x1,y1>) and (I<x2,y2>) specify diagonally opposite
-corners of the rectangle.  If I<x2> and I<y2> are not specified,
-the default value is (I<x1,y1>) plus the size of the source
-region (after subsampling and zooming, if specified).  If I<x2> and
-I<y2> are specified, the source region will be replicated if
-necessary to fill the destination region in a tiled fashion.
-
-=item B<-shrink>
-
-Specifies that the size of the destination image should be reduced, if
-necessary, so that the region being copied into is at the bottom-right
-corner of the image.  This option will not affect the width or height
-of the image if the user has specified a non-zero value for the
-B<-width> or B<-height> configuration option, respectively.
-
-=item B<-zoom> =E<gt> I<x, y>
-
-Specifies that the source region should be magnified by a factor of
-I<x> in the X direction and I<y> in the Y direction.  If I<y>
-is not given, the default value is the same as I<x>.  With this
-option, each pixel in the source image will be expanded into a block
-of I<x> x I<y> pixels in the destination image, all the same
-color.  I<x> and I<y> must be greater than 0.
-
-=item B<-subsample> =E<gt> I<x, y>
-
-Specifies that the source image should be reduced in size by using
-only every I<x>th pixel in the X direction and I<y>th pixel in
-the Y direction.  Negative values will cause the image to be flipped
-about the Y or X axes, respectively.  If I<y> is not given, the
-default value is the same as I<x>.
-
-=item B<-compositingrule> =E<gt> I<rule>
-
-Specifies how transparent pixels in the source image are combined with
-the destination image.  When a compositing rule of I<overlay> is
-set, the old contents of the destination image are visible, as if the
-source image were printed on a piece of transparent film and placed
-over the top of the destination.  When a compositing rule of I<set>
-is set, the old contents of the destination image are discarded and
-the source image is used as-is.  The default compositing rule is
-I<overlay>.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$image>-E<gt>B<data>(?I<option value(s), ...>?)
-
-Returns image data in the form of a string.
-The following options may be specified:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item B<-background> =E<gt> I< color>
-
-If the color is specified, the data will not contain any transparency
-information. In all transparent pixels the color will be replaced by
-the specified color.
-
-=item B<-format> =E<gt> I<format-name>
-
-Specifies the name of the image file format handler to be used.
-Specifically, this method searches
-for the first handler whose name matches a initial substring of
-I<format-name> and which has the capability to read this image data.
-If this option is not given, this method uses the first
-handler that has the capability to read the image data.
-
-=item B<-from> =E<gt> I<x1, y1, ?, x2, y2?>
-
-Specifies a rectangular region of I<$image> to be 
-returned.  If only I<x1> and I<y1> are specified, the region
-extends from I<(x1,y1)> to the bottom-right corner of
-I<$image>.  If all four coordinates are given, they specify
-diagonally opposite corners of the rectangular region, including x1,y1
-and excluding x2,y2.  The default,
-if this option is not given, is the whole image.
-
-=item B<-grayscale>
-
-If this options is specified, the data will not contain color
-information. All pixel data will be transformed into grayscale.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$image>-E<gt>B<get>(I<x, y>)
-
-Returns the color of the pixel at coordinates (I<x>,I<y>) in the
-image as a list of three integers between 0 and 255, representing the
-red, green and blue components respectively.
-
-=item I<$image>-E<gt>B<put>(I<data> ?,B<-format>=E<gt>I<format-name>? ?,B<-to>=E<gt>I< x1 y1 ?x2 y2?>?)
-
-Sets pixels in I<$image> to the data specified in I<data>.
-This command first searches the list of image file format handlers for
-a handler that can interpret the data in I<data>, and then reads
-the image encoded within into I<$image> (the destination image).
-If I<data> does not match any known format, an attempt to interpret
-it as a (top-to-bottom) list of scan-lines is made, with each
-scan-line being a (left-to-right) list of pixel colors (see
-B<Tk_GetColor> for a description of valid colors.)  Every scan-line
-must be of the same length.  Note that when I<data> is a single
-color name, you are instructing Tk to fill a rectangular region with
-that color.  The following options may be specified:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-format> =E<gt>I<format-name>
-
-Specifies the format of the image data in I<data>.
-Specifically, only image file format handlers whose names begin with
-I<format-name> will be used while searching for an image data
-format handler to read the data.
-
-=item B<-to> =E<gt>I<x, y> ?I<, x2, y2>?
-
-Specifies the coordinates of the top-left corner (I<x1>,I<y1>)
-of the region of I<$image> into which data from I<filename>
-are to be read.  The default is (0,0).  If I<x2>,I<y2> is given
-and I<data> is not large enough to cover the rectangle specified by
-this option, the image data extracted will be tiled so it covers the
-entire destination rectangle.  Note that if I<data> specifies a
-single color value, then a region extending to the bottom-right corner
-represented by (I<x2>,I<y2>) will be filled with that color.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$image>-E<gt>B<read>(I<filename> ?,I<option value(s), ...>?)
-
-Reads image data from the file named I<filename> into the image.
-This method first searches the list of
-image file format handlers for a handler that can interpret the data
-in I<filename>, and then reads the image in I<filename> into
-I<$image> (the destination image).  The following options may be
-specified:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item B<-format> =E<gt> I<format-name>
-
-Specifies the format of the image data in I<filename>.
-Specifically, only image file format handlers whose names begin with
-I<format-name> will be used while searching for an image data
-format handler to read the data.
-
-=item B<-from> =E<gt> I<x1, y1, x2, y2>
-
-Specifies a rectangular sub-region of the image file data to be copied
-to the destination image.  If only I<x1> and I<y1> are
-specified, the region extends from (I<x1,y1>) to the bottom-right
-corner of the image in the image file.  If all four coordinates are
-specified, they specify diagonally opposite corners or the region.
-The default, if this option is not specified, is the whole of the
-image in the image file.
-
-=item B<-shrink>
-
-If this option is specified, the size of I<$image> will be reduced, if
-necessary, so that the region into which the image file data are read
-is at the bottom-right corner of the I<$image>.  This option
-will not affect the width or height of the image if the user has
-specified a non-zero value for the B<-width> or B<-height>
-configuration option, respectively.
-
-=item B<-to> =E<gt> I<x, y>
-
-Specifies the coordinates of the top-left corner of the region of
-I<$image> into which data from I<filename> are to be read.
-The default is (0,0).
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$image>-E<gt>B<redither>
-
-The dithering algorithm used in displaying photo images propagates
-quantization errors from one pixel to its neighbors.
-If the image data for I<$image> is supplied in pieces, the
-dithered image may not be exactly correct.  Normally the difference is
-not noticeable, but if it is a problem, this method can be used to
-recalculate the dithered image in each window where the image is
-displayed.
-
-=item I<$image>-E<gt>B<transparency>(I<subcommand, ?arg, arg ...?>);
-
-Allows examination and manipulation of the transparency information in
-the photo image.  Several subcommands are available:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$image>-E<gt>B<transparencyGet>(I<x, y>);
-
-Returns a boolean indicating if the pixel at (I<x>,I<y>) is
-transparent.
-
-=item I<$image>-E<gt>B<transparencySet>(I<x, y, boolean>);
-
-Makes the pixel at (I<x>,I<y>) transparent if I<boolean> is
-true, and makes that pixel opaque otherwise.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$image>-E<gt>B<write>(I<filename> ?,I<option value(s), ...>?)
-
-Writes image data from I<$image> to a file named I<filename>.
-The following options may be specified:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item B<-background> =E<gt> I< color>
-
-If the color is specified, the data will not contain any transparency
-information. In all transparent pixels the color will be replaced by
-the specified color.
-
-=item B<-format> =E<gt> I<format-name>
-
-Specifies the name of the image file format handler to be used to
-write the data to the file.  Specifically, this subcommand searches
-for the first handler whose name matches a initial substring of
-I<format-name> and which has the capability to write an image
-file.  If this option is not given, this subcommand uses the first
-handler that has the capability to write an image file.
-
-=item B<-from> =E<gt> I<x1, y1, ?, x2, y2?>
-
-Specifies a rectangular region of I<$image> to be written to the
-image file.  If only I<x1> and I<y1> are specified, the region
-extends from I<(x1,y1)> to the bottom-right corner of
-I<$image>.  If all four coordinates are given, they specify
-diagonally opposite corners of the rectangular region.  The default,
-if this option is not given, is the whole image.
-
-
-=item B<-grayscale>
-
-If this options is specified, the data will not contain color
-information. All pixel data will be transformed into grayscale.
-
-=back
-
-=back
-
-=head1 IMAGE FORMATS
-
-The photo image code is structured to allow handlers for additional
-image file formats to be added easily.  The photo image code maintains
-a list of these handlers.  Handlers are added to the list by
-registering them with a call to B<Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat>.  The
-standard Tk distribution comes with handlers for XBM, XPM, BMP, JPEG,
-PNG and PPM/PGM formats, which are automatically registered on
-initialization.
-
-When reading an image file or processing
-string data specified with the B<-data> configuration option, the
-photo image code invokes each handler in turn until one is
-found that claims to be able to read the data in the file or string.
-Usually this will find the correct handler, but if it doesn't, the
-user may give a format name with the B<-format> option to specify
-which handler to use.  In fact the photo image code will try those
-handlers whose names begin with the string specified for the
-B<-format> option (the comparison is case-insensitive).  For
-example, if the user specifies B<-format> B<=E<gt>> B<gif>, then a handler
-named GIF87 or GIF89 may be invoked, but a handler
-named JPEG may not (assuming that such handlers had been
-registered).
-
-When writing image data to a file, the processing of the
-B<-format> option is slightly different: the string value given
-for the B<-format> option must begin with the complete name of the
-requested handler, and may contain additional information following
-that, which the handler can use, for example, to specify which variant
-to use of the formats supported by the handler.
-Note that not all image handlers may support writing transparency data
-to a file, even where the target image format does.
-
-=head1 COLOR ALLOCATION
-
-When a photo image is displayed in a window, the photo image code
-allocates colors to use to display the image and dithers the image, if
-necessary, to display a reasonable approximation to the image using
-the colors that are available.  The colors are allocated as a color
-cube, that is, the number of colors allocated is the product of the
-number of shades of red, green and blue.
-
-Normally, the number of
-colors allocated is chosen based on the depth of the window.  For
-example, in an 8-bit PseudoColor window, the photo image code will
-attempt to allocate seven shades of red, seven shades of green and
-four shades of blue, for a total of 198 colors.  In a 1-bit StaticGray
-(monochrome) window, it will allocate two colors, black and white.  In
-a 24-bit DirectColor or TrueColor window, it will allocate 256 shades
-each of red, green and blue.  Fortunately, because of the way that
-pixel values can be combined in DirectColor and TrueColor windows,
-this only requires 256 colors to be allocated.  If not all of the
-colors can be allocated, the photo image code reduces the number of
-shades of each primary color and tries again.
-
-The user can exercise some control over the number of colors that a
-photo image uses with the B<-palette> configuration option.  If
-this option is used, it specifies the maximum number of shades of
-each primary color to try to allocate.  It can also be used to force
-the image to be displayed in shades of gray, even on a color display,
-by giving a single number rather than three numbers separated by
-slashes.
-
-=head1 CREDITS
-
-The photo image type was designed and implemented by Paul Mackerras,
-based on his earlier photo widget and some suggestions from
-John Ousterhout.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::Bitmap|Tk::Bitmap>
-L<Tk::Image|Tk::Image>
-L<Tk::Pixmap|Tk::Pixmap>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-photo, image, color
-
-=cut
-
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Pixmap.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Pixmap.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index d0f36b00e65..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Pixmap.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,64 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1996, Expert Interface Technologies
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#  The file man.macros and some of the macros used by this file are
-#  copyrighted: (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-#               (c) 1994-1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  The license terms of the Tcl/Tk distribution are in the file
-#  license.tcl.
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Pixmap - Create color images from XPM files.
-
-=for category  Tk Image Classes
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<Pixmap>?(I<name>?,I<options>?)?
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-XPM is a popular X Window image file format for storing color icons.
-The B<Pixmap> image type can be used to create color images using XPM files.
-
-Pixmaps support the following I<options>:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-data> =E<gt> I<string>
-
-Specifies the contents of the source pixmap as a string.  The string
-must adhere to the XPM file format (e.g., as generated by the
-B<pixmap(1)> program). If both the B<-data> and B<-file>
-options are specified, the B<-data> option takes precedence.
-Please note that the XPM file parsing code in the xpm library is
-somewhat fragile. The first line of the string must be "B</* XPM>
-*/" or otherwise a segmatation fault will be caused.
-
-=item B<-file> =E<gt> I<name>
-
-I<name> gives the name of a file whose contents define the source
-pixmap.  The file must adhere to the XPM file format (e.g., as
-generated by the B<pixmap(1)> program).
-
-=back
-
-=head1 IMAGE METHODS
-
-When a pixmap image is created, Tk also creates a new object.
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::Image|Tk::Image>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-pixmap, image, tix
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Popup.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Popup.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 8d40a4ed275..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Popup.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,89 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Wm::Popup - popup dialog windows.
-
-=for pm Tk/Wm.pm
-
-=for category Tk Toplevel widgets
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
- $dialog->Popup(qw/
-     -popover    => 'cursor' | $widget | undef,
-     -overanchor => c | n | ne | e | se | s | sw | w | nw,
-     -popanchor  => c | n | ne | e | se | s | sw | w | nw,
- /);
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-You've probably had occasion to use a Dialog (or DialogBox)
-widget. These widgets are derived from a Toplevel (which is a subclass
-of Tk::Wm, the window manager) and spend most of their time in a
-withdrawn state. It's also common to use Toplevels as containers for
-custom built popup windows.  Menus, too, are dialogs derived from the
-window manager class. For this discussion, we'll use the simple term
-I<dialog> to refer any widget that pops up and awaits user
-interaction, whether it be a Menu, a special purpose Toplevel, or any
-of the dialog-type widgets, including, but not limited to, ColorEditor,
-Dialog, DialogBox, ErrorDialog, FileSelect, FBox, getOpenFile and
-getSaveFile.
-
-When it's time to display these dialogs, we call the Perl/Tk
-window manager B<Popup> method. B<Popup> accepts three special purpose
-options that specify placement information in high-level terms rather
-than numerical coordinates. It is B<Popup>'s responsibility to take
-our human specifications and turn them into actual screen
-coordinates before displaying the dialog.
-
-We can direct the dialog to appear in two general locations, either
-over another window (e.g. the root window (screen) or a particular
-widget), or over the cursor. This is called the I<popover
-location>. Once we've made this decision we can further refine the
-exact placement of the dialog relative to the popover location by
-specifying the intersection of two I<anchor points>. The I<popanchor
-point> is associated with the dialog and the I<overanchor point> is
-associated with the popover location (whether it be a window or the
-cursor). The point where the two anchor points coincide is the I<popup
-locus>. Anchor points are string values and can be I<c> (for center),
-or any of the eight cardinal compass points: I<n>, I<ne>, I<e>, I<se>,
-I<s>, I<sw>, I<w> or I<nw>.
-
-For example, if I<-popover> specifies a widget, I<-popanchor> is I<sw>,
-and I<-overanchor> is I<ne>, the the dialog's southwest corner pops up
-at the widget's northeast corner.
-
-=head1 OPTIONS
-
-The options recognized by B<Popup> are as follows:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-popover>
-
-Specifies whether the dialog "pops over" a window or the cursor. 
-It may be the string I<cursor>, a widget reference, or undef for the 
-root window.
-
-=item B<-popanchor>
-
-Specifies the anchor point of the dialog.  For instance, if I<e> is
-specified, the right side of the dialog is the anchor.
-
-=item B<-overanchor>
-
-Specifies where the dialog should anchor relative to the popover
-location. For instance, if I<e> is specified the dialog appears over
-the right side of the popover location and if it's I<ne> the the
-dialog is positioned at the upper-right corner of the popover location.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 AUTHOR
-
-Nick Ing-Simmons, Steve Lidie
-
-This code is distributed under the same terms as Perl.
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/ROText.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/ROText.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index b442164ae72..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/ROText.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,48 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::ROText - 'readonly' perl/Tk Text widget
-
-=for pm Tk/ROText.pm
-
-=for category Derived Widgets
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-    use Tk::ROText;
-    ...
-    $ro = $mw->ROText(?options,...?);
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-This "I<IS A>" text widget with all bindings removed that would alter
-the contents of the text widget. The contents can still be modified
-via method calls.
-
-=head2 BINDINGS
-
-Only read-only bindings from L<Tk::Text> are available in
-B<Tk::ROText>. Additionally the following bindings are defined:
-
-=over
-
-=item <space>
-
-Move the cursor forward by one screenful.
-
-=item <BackSpace>
-
-Move the cursor backward by one screenful.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-widget, text, readonly
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::Text>
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Radiobutton.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Radiobutton.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 82fad4893fd..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Radiobutton.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,333 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Radiobutton - Create and manipulate Radiobutton widgets
-
-=for category  Tk Widget Classes
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-I<$radiobutton> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<Radiobutton>(?I<options>?);
-
-=head1 STANDARD OPTIONS
-
-B<-activebackground>
-B<-activeforeground>
-B<-anchor>
-B<-background>
-B<-bitmap>
-B<-borderwidth>
-B<-compound>
-B<-cursor>
-B<-disabledforeground>
-B<-font>
-B<-foreground>
-B<-highlightbackground>
-B<-highlightcolor>
-B<-highlightthickness>
-B<-image>
-B<-justify>
-B<-padx>
-B<-pady>
-B<-relief>
-B<-takefocus>
-B<-text>
-B<-textvariable>
-B<-underline>
-B<-wraplength>
-
-See L<Tk::options> for details of the standard options.
-
-=head1 WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Name:	B<command>
-
-=item Class:	B<Command>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-command>
-
-Specifies a L<perl/Tk callback|Tk::callbacks> to associate with the button.  This command
-is typically invoked when mouse button 1 is released over the button
-window.  The button's global variable (B<-variable> option) will
-be updated before the command is invoked.
-
-=item Name:	B<height>
-
-=item Class:	B<Height>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-height>
-
-Specifies a desired height for the button.
-If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the button then the value is in
-screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>);
-for text it is in lines of text.
-If this option isn't specified, the button's desired height is computed
-from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
-
-=item Name:	B<indicatorOn>
-
-=item Class:	B<IndicatorOn>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-indicatoron>
-
-Specifies whether or not the indicator should be drawn.  Must be a
-proper boolean value.  If false, the B<relief> option is
-ignored and the widget's relief is always sunken if the widget is
-selected and raised otherwise.
-
-=item Command-Line Name: B<-offrelief>
-
-=item Database Name:  B<offRelief>
-
-=item Database Class: B<OffRelief>
-
-Specifies the relief for the checkbutton when the indicator is not
-drawn and the checkbutton is off.  The default value is B<raised>.  By
-setting this option to B<flat> and setting
-B<-indicatoron false -overrelief raised>, the effect is achieved of
-having a flat button
-that raises on mouse-over and which is depressed when activated.  This
-is the behavior typically exhibited by the Bold, Italic, and
-Underline checkbuttons on the toolbar of a word-processor, for
-example.
-
-=item Command-Line Name: B<-overrelief>
-
-=item Database Name:  B<overRelief>
-
-=item Database Class: B<OverRelief>
-
-Specifies  an alternative relief for the button, to be used when
-the mouse cursor is over the widget.  This option can be used to
-make  toolbar  buttons,  by configuring B<-relief flat -overrelief
-raised>.  If the value of this option is the empty  string,  then
-no  alternative relief is used when the mouse cursor is over the
-button.  The empty string is the default value.
-
-=item Name:	B<selectColor>
-
-=item Class:	B<Background>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-selectcolor>
-
-Specifies a background color to use when the button is selected.
-If B<indicatorOn> is true then the color applies to the indicator.
-Under Windows, this color is used as the background for the indicator
-regardless of the select state.
-If B<indicatorOn> is false, this color is used as the background
-for the entire widget, in place of B<background> or B<activeBackground>,
-whenever the widget is selected.
-If specified as an empty string then no special color is used for
-displaying when the widget is selected.
-
-=item Name:	B<selectImage>
-
-=item Class:	B<SelectImage>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-selectimage>
-
-Specifies an image to display (in place of the B<image> option)
-when the radiobutton is selected.
-This option is ignored unless the B<image> option has been
-specified.
-
-=item Name:	B<state>
-
-=item Class:	B<State>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-state>
-
-Specifies one of three states for the radiobutton:  B<normal>, B<active>,
-or B<disabled>.  In normal state the radiobutton is displayed using the
-B<foreground> and B<background> options.  The active state is
-typically used when the pointer is over the radiobutton.  In active state
-the radiobutton is displayed using the B<activeForeground> and
-B<activeBackground> options.  Disabled state means that the radiobutton
-should be insensitive:  the default bindings will refuse to activate
-the widget and will ignore mouse button presses.
-In this state the B<disabledForeground> and
-B<background> options determine how the radiobutton is displayed.
-
-=item Name:	B<value>
-
-=item Class:	B<Value>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-value>
-
-Specifies value to store in the button's associated variable whenever
-this button is selected.
-
-=item Name:	B<variable>
-
-=item Class:	B<Variable>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-variable>
-
-Specifies reference to a variable to set whenever this button is
-selected.  Changes in this variable also cause the button to select
-or deselect itself. Defaults to the value C<\$Tk::selectedButton>.
-
-=item Name:	B<width>
-
-=item Class:	B<Width>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-width>
-
-Specifies a desired width for the button.
-If an image or bitmap is being displayed in the button, the value is in
-screen units (i.e. any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>);
-for text it is in characters.
-If this option isn't specified, the button's desired width is computed
-from the size of the image or bitmap or text being displayed in it.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<Radiobutton> method creates a new window (given by the
-$widget argument) and makes it into a radiobutton widget.
-Additional
-options, described above, may be specified on the command line
-or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the radiobutton such as its colors, font,
-text, and initial relief.  The B<radiobutton> command returns its
-$widget argument.  At the time this command is invoked,
-there must not exist a window named $widget, but
-$widget's parent must exist.
-
-A radiobutton is a widget that displays a textual string, bitmap or image
-and a diamond or circle called an I<indicator>.
-If text is displayed, it must all be in a single font, but it
-can occupy multiple lines on the screen (if it contains newlines
-or if wrapping occurs because of the B<wrapLength> option) and
-one of the characters may optionally be underlined using the
-B<underline> option.  A radiobutton has
-all of the behavior of a simple button: it can display itself in either
-of three different ways, according to the B<state> option;
-it can be made to appear
-raised, sunken, or flat; it can be made to flash; and it invokes
-a L<perl/Tk callback|Tk::callbacks> whenever mouse button 1 is clicked over the
-check button.
-
-In addition, radiobuttons can be I<selected>.
-If a radiobutton is selected, the indicator is normally
-drawn with a selected appearance, and
-a Tcl variable associated with the radiobutton is set to a particular
-value (normally 1).
-Under Unix, the indicator is drawn with a sunken relief and a special
-color.  Under Windows, the indicator is drawn with a round mark inside.
-If the radiobutton is not selected, then the indicator is drawn with a
-deselected appearance, and the associated variable is
-set to a different value (typically 0).
-Under Unix, the indicator is drawn with a raised relief and no special
-color.  Under Windows, the indicator is drawn without a round mark inside.
-Typically, several radiobuttons share a single variable and the
-value of the variable indicates which radiobutton is to be selected.
-When a radiobutton is selected it sets the value of the variable to
-indicate that fact;  each radiobutton also monitors the value of
-the variable and automatically selects and deselects itself when the
-variable's value changes.
-By default the variable B<selectedButton>
-is used;  its contents give the name of the button that is
-selected, or the empty string if no button associated with that
-variable is selected.
-The name of the variable for a radiobutton,
-plus the variable to be stored into it, may be modified with options
-on the command line or in the option database.
-Configuration options may also be used to modify the way the
-indicator is displayed (or whether it is displayed at all).
-By default a radiobutton is configured to select itself on button clicks.
-
-=head1 WIDGET METHODS
-
-The B<Radiobutton> method creates a widget object.
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-The widget also inherits all the methods provided by the generic
-L<Tk::Widget|Tk::Widget> class.
-
-The following additional methods are available for radiobutton widgets:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$radiobutton>-E<gt>B<deselect>
-
-Deselects the radiobutton and sets the associated variable to an
-empty string.
-If this radiobutton was not currently selected, the command has
-no effect.
-
-=item I<$radiobutton>-E<gt>B<flash>
-
-Flashes the radiobutton.  This is accomplished by redisplaying the radiobutton
-several times, alternating between active and normal colors.  At
-the end of the flash the radiobutton is left in the same normal/active
-state as when the command was invoked.
-This command is ignored if the radiobutton's state is B<disabled>.
-
-=item I<$radiobutton>-E<gt>B<invoke>
-
-Does just what would have happened if the user invoked the radiobutton
-with the mouse: selects the button and invokes
-its associated Tcl command, if there is one.
-The return value is the return value from the Tcl command, or an
-empty string if there is no command associated with the radiobutton.
-This command is ignored if the radiobutton's state is B<disabled>.
-
-=item I<$radiobutton>-E<gt>B<select>
-
-Selects the radiobutton and sets the associated variable to the
-value corresponding to this widget.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 BINDINGS
-
-Tk automatically creates class bindings for radiobuttons that give them
-the following default behavior:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item [1]
-
-On Unix systems, a radiobutton activates whenever the mouse passes
-over it and deactivates whenever the mouse leaves the radiobutton.  On
-Mac and Windows systems, when mouse button 1 is pressed over a
-radiobutton, the button activates whenever the mouse pointer is inside
-the button, and deactivates whenever the mouse pointer leaves the
-button.
-
-=item [2]
-
-When mouse button 1 is pressed over a radiobutton it is invoked (it
-becomes selected and the command associated with the button is
-invoked, if there is one).
-
-=item [3]
-
-When a radiobutton has the input focus, the space key causes the radiobutton
-to be invoked.
-
-If the radiobutton's state is B<disabled> then none of the above
-actions occur:  the radiobutton is completely non-responsive.
-
-The behavior of radiobuttons can be changed by defining new bindings for
-individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-radiobutton, widget
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Scale.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Scale.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index f7de2390bba..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Scale.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,356 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Scale - Create and manipulate Scale widgets
-
-=for category  Tk Widget Classes
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-I<$scale> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<Scale>(?I<options>?);
-
-=head1 STANDARD OPTIONS
-
-B<-activebackground>	B<-font>	B<-highlightthickness>	B<-repeatinterval>
-B<-background>	B<-foreground>	B<-orient>	B<-takefocus>
-B<-borderwidth>	B<-highlightbackground>	B<-relief>	B<-troughcolor>
-B<-cursor>	B<-highlightcolor>	B<-repeatdelay>
-
-See L<Tk::options> for details of the standard options.
-
-=head1 WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Name:	B<bigIncrement>
-
-=item Class:	B<BigIncrement>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-bigincrement>
-
-Some interactions with the scale cause its value to change by
-``large'' increments;  this option specifies the size of the
-large increments.  If specified as 0, the large increments default
-to 1/10 the range of the scale.
-
-=item Name:	B<command>
-
-=item Class:	B<Command>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-command>
-
-Specifies the prefix of a L<perl/Tk callback|Tk::callbacks> to invoke whenever the scale's
-value is changed via a method.
-The actual command consists
-of this option followed by a space and a real number indicating the
-new value of the scale.
-
-=item Name:	B<digits>
-
-=item Class:	B<Digits>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-digits>
-
-An integer specifying how many significant digits should be retained
-when converting the value of the scale to a string.
-If the number is less than or equal to zero, then the scale picks
-the smallest value that guarantees that every possible slider
-position prints as a different string.
-
-=item Name:	B<from>
-
-=item Class:	B<From>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-from>
-
-A real value corresponding to the left or top end of the scale.
-
-=item Name:	B<label>
-
-=item Class:	B<Label>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-label>
-
-A string to display as a label for the scale.  For
-vertical scales the label is displayed just to the right of the
-top end of the scale.  For horizontal scales the label is displayed
-just above the left end of the scale.  If the option is specified
-as an empty string, no label is displayed.
-
-=item Name:	B<length>
-
-=item Class:	B<Length>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-length>
-
-Specifies the desired long dimension of the scale in screen units
-(i.e. any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>).
-For vertical scales this is the scale's height;  for horizontal scales
-it is the scale's width.
-
-=item Name:	B<resolution>
-
-=item Class:	B<Resolution>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-resolution>
-
-A real value specifying the resolution for the scale.
-If this value is greater than zero then the scale's value will always be
-rounded to an even multiple of this value, as will tick marks and
-the endpoints of the scale.  If the value is less than zero then no
-rounding occurs.  Defaults to 1 (i.e., the value will be integral).
-
-=item Name:	B<showValue>
-
-=item Class:	B<ShowValue>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-showvalue>
-
-Specifies a boolean value indicating whether or not the current
-value of the scale is to be displayed.
-
-=item Name:	B<sliderLength>
-
-=item Class:	B<SliderLength>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-sliderlength>
-
-Specfies the size of the slider, measured in screen units along the slider's
-long dimension.  The value may be specified in any of the forms acceptable
-to B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-
-=item Name:	B<sliderRelief>
-
-=item Class:	B<SliderRelief>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-sliderrelief>
-
-Specifies the relief to use when drawing the slider, such as B<raised>
-or B<sunken>.
-
-=item Name:	B<state>
-
-=item Class:	B<State>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-state>
-
-Specifies one of three states for the scale:  B<normal>,
-B<active>, or B<disabled>.
-If the scale is disabled then the value may not be changed and the scale
-won't activate.
-If the scale is active, the slider is displayed using the color
-specified by the B<activeBackground> option.
-
-=item Name:	B<tickInterval>
-
-=item Class:	B<TickInterval>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-tickinterval>
-
-Must be a real value.
-Determines the spacing between numerical
-tick marks displayed below or to the left of the slider.
-If 0, no tick marks will be displayed.
-
-=item Name:	B<to>
-
-=item Class:	B<To>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-to>
-
-Specifies a real value corresponding
-to the right or bottom end of the scale.
-This value may be either less than or greater than the B<from> option.
-
-=item Name:	B<variable>
-
-=item Class:	B<Variable>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-variable>
-
-Specifies the name of a global variable to link to the scale.  Whenever the
-value of the variable changes, the scale will update to reflect this
-value.
-Whenever the scale is manipulated interactively, the variable
-will be modified to reflect the scale's new value.
-
-=item Name:	B<width>
-
-=item Class:	B<Width>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-width>
-
-Specifies the desired narrow dimension of the trough in screen units
-(i.e. any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>).
-For vertical scales this is the trough's width;  for horizontal scales
-this is the trough's height.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<Scale> method creates a new window (given by the
-$widget argument) and makes it into a scale widget.
-Additional
-options, described above, may be specified on the command line
-or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the scale such as its colors, orientation,
-and relief.  The B<scale> command returns its
-$widget argument.  At the time this command is invoked,
-there must not exist a window named $widget, but
-$widget's parent must exist.
-
-A scale is a widget that displays a rectangular I<trough> and a
-small I<slider>.  The trough corresponds to a range
-of real values (determined by the B<from>, B<to>, and
-B<resolution> options),
-and the position of the slider selects a particular real value.
-The slider's position (and hence the scale's value) may be adjusted
-with the mouse or keyboard as described in
-the L<"BINDINGS"> section below.  Whenever the scale's value is changed, a Tcl
-command is invoked (using the B<command> option) to notify
-other interested widgets of the change.
-In addition, the value
-of the scale can be linked to a Tcl variable (using the B<variable>
-option), so that changes in either are reflected in the other.
-
-Three annotations may be displayed in a scale widget:  a label
-appearing at the top right of the widget (top left for horizontal
-scales), a number displayed just to the left of the slider
-(just above the slider for horizontal scales), and a collection
-of numerical tick marks just to the left of the current value
-(just below the trough for horizontal scales).  Each of these three
-annotations may be enabled or disabled using the
-configuration options.
-
-=head1 WIDGET METHODS
-
-The B<Scale> method creates a widget object.
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-The widget also inherits all the methods provided by the generic
-L<Tk::Widget|Tk::Widget> class.
-
-The following additional methods are available for scale widgets:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$scale>-E<gt>B<coords>(?I<value>?)
-
-Returns a list whose elements are the x and y coordinates of
-the point along the centerline of the trough that corresponds
-to I<value>.
-If I<value> is omitted then the scale's current value is used.
-
-=item I<$scale>-E<gt>B<get>(?I<x, y>?)
-
-If I<x> and I<y> are omitted, returns the current value
-of the scale.  If I<x> and I<y> are specified, they give
-pixel coordinates within the widget;  the command returns
-the scale value corresponding to the given pixel.
-Only one of I<x> or I<y> is used:  for horizontal scales
-I<y> is ignored, and for vertical scales I<x> is ignored.
-
-=item I<$scale>-E<gt>B<identify>(I<x, y>)
-
-Returns a string indicating what part of the scale lies under
-the coordinates given by I<x> and I<y>.
-A return value of B<slider> means that the point is over
-the slider;  B<trough1> means that the point is over the
-portion of the slider above  or to the left of the slider;
-and B<trough2> means that the point is over the portion
-of the slider below or to the right of the slider.
-If the point isn't over one of these elements, an empty string
-is returned.
-
-=item I<$scale>-E<gt>B<set>(I<value>)
-
-This command is invoked to change the current value of the scale,
-and hence the position at which the slider is displayed.  I<Value>
-gives the new value for the scale.
-The command has no effect if the scale is disabled.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 BINDINGS
-
-Tk automatically creates class bindings for scales that give them
-the following default behavior.
-Where the behavior is different for vertical and horizontal scales,
-the horizontal behavior is described in parentheses.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item [1]
-
-If button 1 is pressed in the trough, the scale's value will
-be incremented or decremented by the value of the B<resolution>
-option so that the slider moves in the direction of the cursor.
-If the button is held down, the action auto-repeats.
-
-=item [2]
-
-If button 1 is pressed over the slider, the slider can be dragged
-with the mouse.
-
-=item [3]
-
-If button 1 is pressed in the trough with the Control key down,
-the slider moves all the way to the end of its range, in the
-direction towards the mouse cursor.
-
-=item [4]
-
-If button 2 is pressed, the scale's value is set to the mouse
-position.  If the mouse is dragged with button 2 down, the scale's
-value changes with the drag.
-
-=item [5]
-
-The Up and Left keys move the slider up (left) by the value
-of the B<resolution> option.
-
-=item [6]
-
-The Down and Right keys move the slider down (right) by the value
-of the B<resolution> option.
-
-=item [7]
-
-Control-Up and Control-Left move the slider up (left) by the
-value of the B<bigIncrement> option.
-
-=item [8]
-
-Control-Down and Control-Right move the slider down (right) by the
-value of the B<bigIncrement> option.
-
-=item [9]
-
-Home moves the slider to the top (left) end of its range.
-
-=item [10]
-
-End moves the slider to the bottom (right) end of its range.
-
-If the scale is disabled using the B<state> option then
-none of the above bindings have any effect.
-
-The behavior of scales can be changed by defining new bindings for
-individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-scale, slider, trough, widget
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Scrollbar.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Scrollbar.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 838eb97e666..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Scrollbar.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,429 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Scrollbar - Create and manipulate Scrollbar widgets
-
-=for category  Tk Widget Classes
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-I<$scrollbar> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<Scrollbar>(?I<options>?);
-
-=head1 STANDARD OPTIONS
-
-B<-activebackground>	B<-highlightbackground>	B<-orient>	B<-takefocus>
-B<-background>	B<-highlightcolor>	B<-relief>	B<-troughcolor>
-B<-borderwidth>	B<-highlightthickness>	B<-repeatdelay>
-B<-cursor>	B<-jump>	B<-repeatinterval>
-
-See L<Tk::options> for details of the standard options.
-
-=head1 WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Name:	B<activeRelief>
-
-=item Class:	B<ActiveRelief>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-activerelief>
-
-Specifies the relief to use when displaying the element that is
-active, if any.
-Elements other than the active element are always displayed with
-a raised relief.
-
-=item Name:	B<command>
-
-=item Class:	B<Command>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-command>
-
-Specifies a callback to invoke to change the view
-in the widget associated with the scrollbar.  When a user requests
-a view change by manipulating the scrollbar, the callback is
-invoked.  The callback is passed
-additional arguments as described later. This option almost always has
-a value such as B<[xview =E<gt> $widget]> or B<[yview =E<gt> $widget]>, consisting of the
-a widget object and either B<xview> (if the scrollbar is for
-horizontal scrolling) or B<yview> (for vertical scrolling).
-All scrollable widgets have B<xview> and B<yview> methods
-that take exactly the additional arguments appended by the scrollbar
-as described in L<"SCROLLING COMMANDS"> below.
-
-=item Name:	B<elementBorderWidth>
-
-=item Class:	B<BorderWidth>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-elementborderwidth>
-
-Specifies the width of borders drawn around the internal elements
-of the scrollbar (the two arrows and the slider).  The value may
-have any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-If this value is less than zero, the value of the B<borderWidth>
-option is used in its place.
-
-=item Name:	B<width>
-
-=item Class:	B<Width>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-width>
-
-Specifies the desired narrow dimension of the scrollbar window,
-not including 3-D border, if any.  For vertical
-scrollbars this will be the width and for horizontal scrollbars
-this will be the height.
-The value may have any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<Scrollbar> method creates a new window (given by the
-$widget argument) and makes it into a scrollbar widget.
-Additional options, described above, may be specified on the command
-line or in the option database to configure aspects of the scrollbar
-such as its colors, orientation, and relief.
-The B<scrollbar> command returns its $widget argument.
-At the time this command is invoked, there must not exist a window
-named $widget, but $widget's parent must exist.
-
-A scrollbar is a widget that displays two arrows, one at each end of
-the scrollbar, and a I<slider> in the middle portion of the
-scrollbar.
-It provides information about what is visible in an I<associated window>
-that displays an document of some sort (such as a file being edited or
-a drawing).
-The position and size of the slider indicate which portion of the
-document is visible in the associated window.  For example, if the
-slider in a vertical scrollbar covers the top third of the area
-between the two arrows, it means that the associated window displays
-the top third of its document.
-
-Scrollbars can be used to adjust the view in the associated window
-by clicking or dragging with the mouse.
-See L<"BINDINGS"> below for details.
-
-=head1 ELEMENTS
-
-A scrollbar displays five elements, which are referred to in the
-methods for the scrollbar:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<arrow1>
-
-The top or left arrow in the scrollbar.
-
-=item B<trough1>
-
-The region between the slider and B<arrow1>.
-
-=item B<slider>
-
-The rectangle that indicates what is visible in the associated widget.
-
-=item B<trough2>
-
-The region between the slider and B<arrow2>.
-
-=item B<arrow2>
-
-The bottom or right arrow in the scrollbar.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 WIDGET METHODS
-
-The B<Scrollbar> method creates a widget object.
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-The widget also inherits all the methods provided by the generic
-L<Tk::Widget|Tk::Widget> class.
-
-The following additional methods are available for scrollbar widgets:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$scrollbar>-E<gt>B<activate>(?I<element>?)
-
-Marks the element indicated by I<element> as active, which
-causes it to be displayed as specified by the B<activeBackground>
-and B<activeRelief> options.
-The only element values understood by this command are B<arrow1>,
-B<slider>, or B<arrow2>.
-If any other value is specified then no element of the scrollbar
-will be active.
-If I<element> is not specified, the command returns
-the name of the element that is currently active, or an empty string
-if no element is active.
-
-=item I<$scrollbar>-E<gt>B<delta>(I<deltaX, deltaY>)
-
-Returns a real number indicating the fractional change in
-the scrollbar setting that corresponds to a given change
-in slider position.  For example, if the scrollbar is horizontal,
-the result indicates how much the scrollbar setting must change
-to move the slider I<deltaX> pixels to the right (I<deltaY> is
-ignored in this case).
-If the scrollbar is vertical, the result indicates how much the
-scrollbar setting must change to move the slider I<deltaY> pixels
-down.  The arguments and the result may be zero or negative.
-
-=item I<$scrollbar>-E<gt>B<fraction>(I<x, y>)
-
-Returns a real number between 0 and 1 indicating where the point
-given by I<x> and I<y> lies in the trough area of the scrollbar.
-The value 0 corresponds to the top or left of the trough, the
-value 1 corresponds to the bottom or right, 0.5 corresponds to
-the middle, and so on.
-I<X> and I<y> must be pixel coordinates relative to the scrollbar
-widget.
-If I<x> and I<y> refer to a point outside the trough, the closest
-point in the trough is used.
-
-=item I<$scrollbar>-E<gt>B<get>
-
-Returns the scrollbar settings in the form of a list whose
-elements are the arguments to the most recent B<set> method.
-
-=item I<$scrollbar>-E<gt>B<identify>(I<x, y>)
-
-Returns the name of the element under the point given by I<x> and
-I<y> (such as B<arrow1>), or an empty string if the point does
-not lie in any element of the scrollbar.
-I<X> and I<y> must be pixel coordinates relative to the scrollbar
-widget.
-
-=item I<$scrollbar>-E<gt>B<set>(I<first, last>)
-
-This command is invoked by the scrollbar's associated widget to
-tell the scrollbar about the current view in the widget.
-The command takes two arguments, each of which is a real fraction
-between 0 and 1.
-The fractions describe the range of the document that is visible in
-the associated widget.
-For example, if I<first> is 0.2 and I<last> is 0.4, it means
-that the first part of the document visible in the window is 20%
-of the way through the document, and the last visible part is 40%
-of the way through.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 SCROLLING COMMANDS
-
-When the user interacts with the scrollbar, for example by dragging
-the slider, the scrollbar notifies the associated widget that it
-must change its view.
-The scrollbar makes the notification by evaluating a callback
-specified as the scrollbar's B<-command> option.
-The callback may take several forms.
-In each case, the intial arguments passed are those
-specified in the B<-command> callback itself,
-which usually has a form like [B<yview> =E<gt> I<$widget>].
-(Which will invoke I<$widget>-E<gt>B<yview>(...) where
-the ... part is as below. See L<Tk::callbacks> for details.)
-The callback is passed additional arguments as follows:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<moveto>,I<fraction>
-
-I<Fraction> is a real number between 0 and 1.
-The widget should adjust its view so that the point given
-by I<fraction> appears at the beginning of the widget.
-If I<fraction> is 0 it refers to the beginning of the
-document.  1.0 refers to the end of the document, 0.333
-refers to a point one-third of the way through the document,
-and so on.
-
-=item B<scroll,>I<number,>B<units>
-
-The widget should adjust its view by I<number> units.
-The units are defined in whatever way makes sense for the widget,
-such as characters or lines in a text widget.
-I<Number> is either 1, which means one unit should scroll off
-the top or left of the window, or -1, which means that one unit
-should scroll off the bottom or right of the window.
-
-=item B<scroll>,I<number>,B<page>
-
-The widget should adjust its view by I<number> pages.
-It is up to the widget to define the meaning of a page;  typically
-it is slightly less than what fits in the window, so that there
-is a slight overlap between the old and new views.
-I<Number> is either 1, which means the next page should
-become visible, or -1, which means that the previous page should
-become visible.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 OLD COMMAND SYNTAX
-
-In versions of Tk before 4.0, the B<set> and B<get> widget
-commands used a different form.
-This form is still supported for backward compatibility, but it
-is deprecated.
-In the old command syntax, the B<set> method has the
-following form:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$scrollbar>-E<gt>B<set>(I<totalUnits, windowUnits, firstUnit, lastUnit>)
-
-In this form the arguments are all integers.
-I<TotalUnits> gives the total size of the object being displayed in the
-associated widget.  The meaning of one unit depends on the associated
-widget;  for example, in a text editor widget units might
-correspond to lines of
-text.  I<WindowUnits> indicates the total number of units that
-can fit in the associated window at one time.  I<FirstUnit>
-and I<lastUnit> give the indices of the first and last units
-currently visible in the associated window (zero corresponds to the
-first unit of the object).
-
-=back
-
-Under the old syntax the B<get> method returns a list
-of four integers, consisting of the I<totalUnits>, I<windowUnits>,
-I<firstUnit>, and I<lastUnit> values from the last B<set>
-method.
-
-The callbacks generated by scrollbars also have a different form
-when the old syntax is being used, the callback is passed a single argument:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<unit>
-
-I<Unit> is an integer that indicates what should appear at
-the top or left of the associated widget's window.
-It has the same meaning as the I<firstUnit> and I<lastUnit>
-arguments to the B<set> method.
-
-=back
-
-The most recent B<set> method determines whether or not
-to use the old syntax.
-If it is given two real arguments then the new syntax will be
-used in the future, and if it is given four integer arguments then
-the old syntax will be used.
-
-=head1 BINDINGS
-
-Tk automatically creates class bindings for scrollbars that give them
-the following default behavior.
-If the behavior is different for vertical and horizontal scrollbars,
-the horizontal behavior is described in parentheses.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item [1]
-
-Pressing button 1 over B<arrow1> causes the view in the
-associated widget to shift up (left) by one unit so that the
-document appears to move down (right) one unit.
-If the button is held down, the action auto-repeats.
-
-=item [2]
-
-Pressing button 1 over B<trough1> causes the view in the
-associated widget to shift up (left) by one screenful so that the
-document appears to move down (right) one screenful.
-If the button is held down, the action auto-repeats.
-
-=item [3]
-
-Pressing button 1 over the slider and dragging causes the view
-to drag with the slider.
-If the B<jump> option is true, then the view doesn't drag along
-with the slider;  it changes only when the mouse button is released.
-
-=item [4]
-
-Pressing button 1 over B<trough2> causes the view in the
-associated widget to shift down (right) by one screenful so that the
-document appears to move up (left) one screenful.
-If the button is held down, the action auto-repeats.
-
-=item [5]
-
-Pressing button 1 over B<arrow2> causes the view in the
-associated widget to shift down (right) by one unit so that the
-document appears to move up (left) one unit.
-If the button is held down, the action auto-repeats.
-
-=item [6]
-
-If button 2 is pressed over the trough or the slider, it sets
-the view to correspond to the mouse position;  dragging the
-mouse with button 2 down causes the view to drag with the mouse.
-If button 2 is pressed over one of the arrows, it causes the
-same behavior as pressing button 1.
-
-=item [7]
-
-If button 1 is pressed with the Control key down, then if the
-mouse is over B<arrow1> or B<trough1> the view changes
-to the very top (left) of the document;  if the mouse is over
-B<arrow2> or B<trough2> the view changes
-to the very bottom (right) of the document;  if the mouse is
-anywhere else then the button press has no effect.
-
-=item [8]
-
-In vertical scrollbars the Up and Down keys have the same behavior
-as mouse clicks over B<arrow1> and B<arrow2>, respectively.
-In horizontal scrollbars these keys have no effect.
-
-=item [9]
-
-In vertical scrollbars Control-Up and Control-Down have the same
-behavior as mouse clicks over B<trough1> and B<trough2>, respectively.
-In horizontal scrollbars these keys have no effect.
-
-=item [10]
-
-In horizontal scrollbars the Up and Down keys have the same behavior
-as mouse clicks over B<arrow1> and B<arrow2>, respectively.
-In vertical scrollbars these keys have no effect.
-
-=item [11]
-
-In horizontal scrollbars Control-Up and Control-Down have the same
-behavior as mouse clicks over B<trough1> and B<trough2>, respectively.
-In vertical scrollbars these keys have no effect.
-
-=item [12]
-
-The Prior and Next keys have the same behavior
-as mouse clicks over B<trough1> and B<trough2>, respectively.
-
-=item [13]
-
-The Home key adjusts the view to the top (left edge) of the document.
-
-=item [14]
-
-The End key adjusts the view to the bottom (right edge) of the document.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::callbacks|Tk::callbacks>
-L<Tk::Scrolled|Tk::Scrolled>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-scrollbar, widget
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Scrolled.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Scrolled.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index cd6c648ef5e..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Scrolled.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,86 +0,0 @@
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Scrolled - Create a widget with attached scrollbar(s)
-
-=for category Derived Widgets
-
-=for index_group Perl/Tk Constructs
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >I<$whatever> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<Scrolled>(I<Whatever> ?,B<-scrollbars>=E<gt>I<where>? ?,...?);
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-To stop a flood of B<ScrlWhatever> widgets Perl/Tk introcuded the special
-constructor B<Scrolled>.  B<Scrolled> creates a widget of the given Class
-I<Whatever> with attached L<scrollbar(s)|Tk::Scrollbar>.
-
-=head1 OPTIONS
-
-All options beside B<-scrollbars> explained below are passed to
-the I<Whatever> widget constructor.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item -scrollbars
-
-Expects as argument the position where the scrollbars should be
-created:  B<w>, B<e> or B<n>, B<s> or a combination of
-them.  If the one or both positions are prefixed with B<o> the
-scrollbar will only show up if there is a 'real' need to scroll.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 ADVERTISED SUBWIDGETS
-
-See L<Tk::mega/"Subwidget"> how to use advertised widgets.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item scrolled
-
-the scrolled widget
-
-=item I<widget>
-
-same as B<scrolled> above.  I<widget> is the kind of widget passed
-to scrolled as first argument in all lowercase.
-
-=item xscrollbar
-
-the B<Scrollbar> widget used for horizontal scrolling (if it exists)
-
-=item yscrollbar
-
-the B<Scrollbar> widget used for vertical scrolling (if it exists)
-
-=item corner
-
-a frame in the corner between the vertical and horizontal scrolbar
-
-=back
-
-=head1 BUGS
-
-If a widget does not support I<-{x,y}scrollcommand> options,
-B<Scrolled> does not complain if the specified widget class does
-not support them.  E.g.,
-
-S<    >I<$parent>->B<Scrolled>(B<'Button'>, ...)
-
-One does not get an error message or warning when one tries to
-configure scrollbars after the widget construction:
-
-S<    >I<$ascrolled>->B<configure>(B<-scrollbars> => B<'e'>);
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::Scrollbar|Tk::Scrollbar>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-scrolled, scrollbar
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Spinbox.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Spinbox.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index b18b7e1b9ae..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Spinbox.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,819 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 2000 Jeffrey Hobbs.
-#  Copyright (c) 2000 Ajuba Solutions.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#  RCS: @(#) $Id: spinbox.n,v 1.3 2001/12/18 23:02:35 hobbs Exp $
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Spinbox - Create and manipulate Spinbox widgets
-
-=for category  Tk Generic Methods
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-I<$spinbox> =  I<$parent>-E<gt>Spinbox(?I<options>?);
-
- -activebackground    -highlightthickness -repeatinterval
- -background          -insertbackground   -selectbackground
- -borderwidth         -insertborderwidth  -selectborderwidth
- -cursor              -insertontime       -selectforeground
- -exportselection     -insertwidth        -takefocus
- -font                -insertofftime      -textvariable
- -foreground          -justify            -xscrollcommand
- -highlightbackground -relief
- -highlightcolor      -repeatdelay
-
-=head1 WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Option:	B<-buttonbackground>
-
-=item Name:	B<buttonBackground>
-
-=item Class:	B<Background>
-
-The background color to be used for the spin buttons.
-
-=item Option:	B<-buttoncursor>
-
-=item Name:	B<buttonCursor>
-
-=item Class:	B<Cursor>
-
-The cursor to be used when over the spin buttons.  If this is empty
-(the default), a default cursor will be used.
-
-=item Option:	B<-buttondownrelief>
-
-=item Name:	B<buttonDownRelief>
-
-=item Class:	B<Relief>
-
-The relief to be used for the upper spin button.
-
-=item Option:	B<-buttonuprelief>
-
-=item Name:	B<buttonUpRelief>
-
-=item Class:	B<Relief>
-
-The relief to be used for the lower spin button.
-
-=item Option:	B<-command>
-
-=item Name:	B<command>
-
-=item Class:	B<Command>
-
-Specifies a Perl/Tk callback to invoke whenever a Spinbutton is invoked.
-The callback has these two arguments I<appended> to any existing callback
-arguments: the current value of the widget and the direction of the button
-press (B<up> or B<down>).
-
-=item Option:	B<-disabledbackground>
-
-=item Name:	B<disabledBackground>
-
-=item Class:	B<DisabledBackground>
-
-Specifies the background color to use when the Spinbox is disabled.  If
-this option is the empty string, the normal background color is used.
-
-=item Option:	B<-disabledforeground>
-
-=item Name:	B<disabledForeground>
-
-=item Class:	B<DisabledForeground>
-
-Specifies the foreground color to use when the Spinbox is disabled.  If
-this option is the empty string, the normal foreground color is used.
-
-=item Option:	B<-format>
-
-=item Name:	B<format>
-
-=item Class:	B<Format>
-
-Specifies an alternate format to use when setting the string value
-when using the B<-from> and B<-to> range.
-This must be a format specifier of the form B<%E<lt>padE<gt>.E<lt>padE<gt>f>,
-as it will format a floating-point number.
-
-=item Option:	B<-from>
-
-=item Name:	B<from>
-
-=item Class:	B<From>
-
-A floating-point value corresponding to the lowest value for a Spinbox, to
-be used in conjunction with B<-to> and B<-increment>.  When all
-are specified correctly, the Spinbox will use these values to control its
-contents.  This value must be less than the B<-to> option.
-If B<-values> is specified, it supercedes this option.
-
-=item Option:	B<-invalidcommand>
-
-=item Alias:	B<-invcmd>
-
-=item Name:	B<invalidCommand>
-
-=item Class:	B<InvalidCommand>
-
-Specifies a script to eval when B<validateCommand> returns 0.  Setting
-it to an empty string disables this feature (the default).  The best use of
-this option is to set it to I<bell>.  See B<Validation> below for
-more information.
-
-=item Option:	B<-increment>
-
-=item Name:	B<increment>
-
-=item Class:	B<Increment>
-
-A floating-point value specifying the increment.  When used with
-B<-from> and B<-to>, the value in the widget will be adjusted by
-B<-increment> when a spin button is pressed (up adds the value,
-down subtracts the value).
-
-=item Option:	B<-readonlybackground>
-
-=item Name:	B<readonlyBackground>
-
-=item Class:	B<ReadonlyBackground>
-
-Specifies the background color to use when the Spinbox is readonly.  If
-this option is the empty string, the normal background color is used.
-
-=item Option:	B<-state>
-
-=item Name:	B<state>
-
-=item Class:	B<State>
-
-Specifies one of three states for the Spinbox:  B<normal>,
-B<disabled>, or B<readonly>.  If the Spinbox is readonly, then the
-value may not be changed using methods and no insertion cursor
-will be displayed, even if the input focus is in the widget; the
-contents of the widget may still be selected.  If the Spinbox is
-disabled, the value may not be changed, no insertion cursor will be
-displayed, the contents will not be selectable, and the Spinbox may
-be displayed in a different color, depending on the values of the
-B<-disabledforeground> and B<-disabledbackground> options.
-
-=item Option:	B<-to>
-
-=item Name:	B<to>
-
-=item Class:	B<To>
-
-A floating-point value corresponding to the highest value for the Spinbox,
-to be used in conjunction with B<-from> and B<-increment>.  When
-all are specified correctly, the Spinbox will use these values to control
-its contents.  This value must be greater than the B<-from> option.
-If B<-values> is specified, it supercedes this option.
-
-=item Option:	B<-validate>
-
-=item Name:	B<validate>
-
-=item Class:	B<Validate>
-
-Specifies the mode in which validation should operate: B<none>,
-B<focus>, B<focusin>, B<focusout>, B<key>, or B<all>.
-It defaults to B<none>.  When you want validation, you must explicitly
-state which mode you wish to use.  See B<Validation> below for more.
-
-=item Option:	B<-validatecommand>
-
-=item Alias:	B<-vcmd>
-
-=item Name:	B<validateCommand>
-
-=item Class:	B<ValidateCommand>
-
-Specifies a script to evaluate when you want to validate the input in the
-widget.  Setting it to an empty string disables this feature (the default).
-Validation occurs according to the value of B<-validate>.
-This command must return a valid boolean value.  If it returns 0 (or
-the valid boolean equivalent) then the value of the widget will not
-change and the B<invalidCommand> will be evaluated if it is set.  If it
-returns 1, then value will be changed.
-See B<Validation> below for more information.
-
-=item Option:	B<-values>
-
-=item Name:	B<values>
-
-=item Class:	B<Values>
-
-Must be a proper list value.  If specified, the Spinbox will use these
-values as to control its contents, starting with the first value.  This
-option has precedence over the B<-from> and B<-to> range.
-
-=item Option:	B<-width>
-
-=item Name:	B<width>
-
-=item Class:	B<Width>
-
-Specifies an integer value indicating the desired width of the Spinbox window,
-in average-size characters of the widget's font.
-If the value is less than or equal to zero, the widget picks a
-size just large enough to hold its current text.
-
-=item Option:	B<-wrap>
-
-=item Name:	B<wrap>
-
-=item Class:	B<Wrap>
-
-Must be a proper boolean value.  If on, the Spinbox will wrap around the
-values of data in the widget.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<Spinbox> method creates a new window (given by the
-$spinbox argument) and makes it into a Spinbox widget.
-Additional options, described above, may be specified on the
-command line or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the Spinbox such as its colors, font,
-and relief. 
-
-A B<Spinbox> is an extended B<Entry> widget that allows he user
-to move, or spin, through a fixed set of ascending or descending values
-such as times or dates in addition to editing the value as in an
-B<entry>.  When first created, a Spinbox's string is empty.
-A portion of the Spinbox may be selected as described below.
-If a Spinbox is exporting its selection (see the B<exportSelection>
-option), then it will observe the standard protocols for handling the
-selection;  Spinbox selections are available as type B<STRING>.
-Spinboxes also observe the standard Tk rules for dealing with the
-input focus.  When a Spinbox has the input focus it displays an
-I<insertion cursor> to indicate where new characters will be
-inserted.
-
-Spinboxes are capable of displaying strings that are too long to
-fit entirely within the widget's window.  In this case, only a
-portion of the string will be displayed; commands described below
-may be used to change the view in the window.  Spinboxes use
-the standard B<-xscrollcommand> mechanism for interacting with
-scrollbars (see the description of the B<-xscrollcommand> option
-for details).  They also support scanning, as described below.
-
-=head1 VALIDATION
-
-Validation works by setting the B<validateCommand>
-option to a callback which will be evaluated according to the B<validate>
-option as follows:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<none>
-
-Default.  This means no validation will occur.
-
-=item B<focus>
-
-B<validateCommand> will be called when the Spinbox receives or
-loses focus.
-
-=item B<focusin>
-
-B<validateCommand> will be called when the Spinbox receives focus.
-
-=item B<focusout>
-
-B<validateCommand> will be called when the Spinbox loses focus.
-
-=item B<key>
-
-B<validateCommand> will be called when the Spinbox is edited.
-
-=item B<all>
-
-B<validateCommand> will be called for all above conditions.
-
-
-The B<validateCommand> and B<invalidCommand> callbacks are invoked
-with at least 5 positional arguments, which are I<appended> to any already
-existing callback arguments:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item * 1
-
-The proposed value of the entry.  If you are configuring the
-entry widget to have a new textVariable, this will be the value of that
-textVariable.
-
-=item * 2
-
-The characters to be added (or deleted). This will be C<undef>
-if validation is due to focus, explcit call to validate or if change
-is due to C<-textvariable> changing.
-
-=item * 3
-
-The current value of entry i.e. before the proposed change.
-
-=item * 4
-
-The index of character string to be added/deleted, if any. Otherwise -1.
-
-=item * 5
-
-Type of action. 1 == INSERT, 0 == DELETE,
--1 if it's a forced validation or textVariable validation.
-
-=back
-
-In general, the B<textVariable> and B<validateCommand> can be
-dangerous to mix.  Any problems have been overcome so that using the
-B<validateCommand> will not interfere with the traditional behavior of
-the Spinbox widget.  Using the B<textVariable> for read-only purposes will
-never cause problems.  The danger comes when you try set the
-B<textVariable> to something that the B<validateCommand> would not
-accept, which causes B<validate> to become I<none> (the
-B<invalidCommand> will not be triggered).  The same happens
-when an error occurs evaluating the B<validateCommand>.
-
-Primarily, an error will occur when the B<validateCommand> or
-B<invalidCommand> encounters an error in its script while evaluating or
-B<validateCommand> does not return a valid boolean value.  The
-B<validate> option will also set itself to B<none> when you edit the
-Spinbox widget from within either the B<validateCommand> or the
-B<invalidCommand>.  Such editions will override the one that was being
-validated.  If you wish to edit the value of the widget
-during validation and still have the B<validate> option set, you should
-include the command
-
- my $val = $spinbox->cget(-validate);
- $spinbox->configure(-validate => $val);
-
-in the B<validateCommand> or B<invalidCommand> (whichever one you
-were editing the Spinbox widget from).  It is also recommended to not set an
-associated B<textVariable> during validation, as that can cause the
-Spinbox widget to become out of sync with the B<textVariable>.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 WIDGET METHODS
-
-The B<Spinbox> command creates a widget object whose
-name is $widget.  This command may be used to invoke various
-operations on the widget.  It has the following general form:
-
- $widget->method(?arg arg ...?);
-
-Many of the methods for Spinboxes take one or more indices as
-arguments.  An index specifies a particular character in the Spinbox's
-string, in any of the following ways:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<number>
-
-Specifies the character as a numerical index, where 0 corresponds
-to the first character in the string.
-
-=item B<anchor>
-
-Indicates the anchor point for the selection, which is set with the
-B<select from> and B<select adjust> methods.
-
-=item B<end>
-
-Indicates the character just after the last one in the Spinbox's string.
-This is equivalent to specifying a numerical index equal to the length
-of the Spinbox's string.
-
-=item B<insert>
-
-Indicates the character adjacent to and immediately following the
-insertion cursor.
-
-=item B<sel.first>
-
-Indicates the first character in the selection.  It is an error to
-use this form if the selection isn't in the Spinbox window.
-
-=item B<sel.last>
-
-Indicates the character just after the last one in the selection.
-It is an error to use this form if the selection isn't in the
-Spinbox window.
-
-=item B<@>I<number>
-
-In this form, I<number> is treated as an x-coordinate in the
-Spinbox's window;  the character spanning that x-coordinate is used.
-For example, ``B<@0>'' indicates the left-most character in the
-window.
-
-=back
-
-Abbreviations may be used for any of the forms above, e.g. ``B<e>''
-or ``B<sel.f>''.  In general, out-of-range indices are automatically
-rounded to the nearest legal value.
-
-The following commands are possible for Spinbox widgets:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<bbox>(I<index>);
-
-Returns a list of four numbers describing the bounding box of the
-character given by I<index>.
-The first two elements of the list give the x and y coordinates of
-the upper-left corner of the screen area covered by the character
-(in pixels relative to the widget) and the last two elements give
-the width and height of the character, in pixels.
-The bounding box may refer to a region outside the visible area
-of the window.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<cget>(I<option>);
-
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given
-by I<option>.
-I<Option> may have any of the values accepted by the B<Spinbox>
-command.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<configure>(?I<option>?, ?I<value, option, value, ...>?);
-
-Query or modify the configuration options of the widget.
-If no I<option> is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for $widget (see L<Tk::configure> for
-information on the format of this list).  If I<option> is specified
-with no I<value>, then the command returns a list describing the
-one named option (this list will be identical to the corresponding
-sublist of the value returned if no I<option> is specified).  If
-one or more I<option-value> pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given widget option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string.
-I<Option> may have any of the values accepted by the B<Spinbox>
-command.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<delete>(I<first, >?I<last>?);
-
-Delete one or more elements of the Spinbox.
-I<First> is the index of the first character to delete, and
-I<last> is the index of the character just after the last
-one to delete.
-If I<last> isn't specified it defaults to I<first>+1,
-i.e. a single character is deleted.
-This command returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<get>;
-
-Returns the Spinbox's string.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<icursor>(I<index>);
-
-Arrange for the insertion cursor to be displayed just before the character
-given by I<index>.  Returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<identify>(I<x, y>);
-
-Returns the name of the window element corresponding to coordinates
-I<x> and I<y> in the Spinbox.  Return value is one of:
-B<none>, B<buttondown>, B<buttonup>, B<entry>.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<index>(I<index>);
-
-Returns the numerical index corresponding to I<index>.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<insert>(I<index, string>);
-
-Insert the characters of I<string> just before the character
-indicated by I<index>.  Returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<invoke>(I<element>);
-
-Causes the specified element, either B<buttondown> or B<buttonup>,
-to be invoked, triggering the action associated with it.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<scan>(I<option, args>);
-
-This command is used to implement scanning on Spinboxes.  It has
-two forms, depending on I<option>:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<scanMark>(I<x>);
-
-Records I<x> and the current view in the Spinbox window;  used in
-conjunction with later B<scan dragto> commands.  Typically this
-command is associated with a mouse button press in the widget.  It
-returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<scanDragto>(I<x>);
-
-This command computes the difference between its I<x> argument
-and the I<x> argument to the last B<scan mark> command for
-the widget.  It then adjusts the view left or right by 10 times the
-difference in x-coordinates.  This command is typically associated
-with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of
-dragging the Spinbox at high speed through the window.  The return
-value is an empty string.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<selection>(I<option, arg>);
-
-This command is used to adjust the selection within a Spinbox.  It
-has several forms, depending on I<option>:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<selectionAdjust>(I<index>);
-
-Locate the end of the selection nearest to the character given by
-I<index>, and adjust that end of the selection to be at I<index>
-(i.e including but not going beyond I<index>).  The other
-end of the selection is made the anchor point for future
-B<select to> commands.  If the selection
-isn't currently in the Spinbox, then a new selection is created to
-include the characters between I<index> and the most recent
-selection anchor point, inclusive.
-Returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<selectionClear>;
-
-Clear the selection if it is currently in this widget.  If the
-selection isn't in this widget then the command has no effect.
-Returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<selectionElement>(?I<element>?);
-
-Sets or gets the currently selected element.  If a spinbutton element
-is specified, it will be displayed depressed.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<selectionFrom>(I<index>);
-
-Set the selection anchor point to just before the character
-given by I<index>.  Doesn't change the selection.
-Returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<selectionPresent>;
-
-Returns 1 if there is are characters selected in the Spinbox,
-0 if nothing is selected.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<selectionRange>(I<start, >I<end>);
-
-Sets the selection to include the characters starting with
-the one indexed by I<start> and ending with the one just
-before I<end>.
-If I<end> refers to the same character as I<start> or an
-earlier one, then the Spinbox's selection is cleared.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<selectionTo>(I<index>);
-
-If I<index> is before the anchor point, set the selection
-to the characters from I<index> up to but not including
-the anchor point.
-If I<index> is the same as the anchor point, do nothing.
-If I<index> is after the anchor point, set the selection
-to the characters from the anchor point up to but not including
-I<index>.
-The anchor point is determined by the most recent B<select from>
-or B<select adjust> command in this widget.
-If the selection isn't in this widget then a new selection is
-created using the most recent anchor point specified for the widget.
-Returns an empty string.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<set>(?I<string>?);
-
-If I<string> is specified, the Spinbox will try and set it to this
-value, otherwise it just returns the Spinbox's string.
-If validation is on, it will occur when setting the string.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<validate>;
-
-This command is used to force an evaluation of the B<validateCommand>
-independent of the conditions specified by the B<validate> option.
-This is done by temporarily setting the B<validate> option to B<all>.
-It returns 0 or 1.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<xview>(I<args>);
-
-This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the
-text in the widget's window.  It can take any of the following
-forms:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<xview>;
-
-Returns a list containing two elements.
-Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1;  together they describe
-the horizontal span that is visible in the window.
-For example, if the first element is .2 and the second element is .6,
-20% of the Spinbox's text is off-screen to the left, the middle 40% is visible
-in the window, and 40% of the text is off-screen to the right.
-These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the B<-xscrollcommand>
-option.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<xview>(I<index>);
-
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the character given by I<index>
-is displayed at the left edge of the window.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<xviewMoveto>(I<fraction>);
-
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the character I<fraction> of the
-way through the text appears at the left edge of the window.
-I<Fraction> must be a fraction between 0 and 1.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<xviewScroll>(I<number, what>);
-
-This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to
-I<number> and I<what>.
-I<Number> must be an integer.
-I<What> must be either B<units> or B<pages> or an abbreviation
-of one of these.
-If I<what> is B<units>, the view adjusts left or right by
-I<number> average-width characters on the display;  if it is
-B<pages> then the view adjusts by I<number> screenfuls.
-If I<number> is negative then characters farther to the left
-become visible;  if it is positive then characters farther to the right
-become visible.
-
-=back
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DEFAULT BINDINGS
-
-Tk automatically creates class bindings for Spinboxes that give them
-the following default behavior.
-In the descriptions below, ``word'' refers to a contiguous group
-of letters, digits, or ``_'' characters, or any single character
-other than these.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item [1]
-
-Clicking mouse button 1 positions the insertion cursor
-just before the character underneath the mouse cursor, sets the
-input focus to this widget, and clears any selection in the widget.
-Dragging with mouse button 1 strokes out a selection between
-the insertion cursor and the character under the mouse.
-
-=item [2]
-
-Double-clicking with mouse button 1 selects the word under the mouse
-and positions the insertion cursor at the beginning of the word.
-Dragging after a double click will stroke out a selection consisting
-of whole words.
-
-=item [3]
-
-Triple-clicking with mouse button 1 selects all of the text in the
-Spinbox and positions the insertion cursor before the first character.
-
-=item [4]
-
-The ends of the selection can be adjusted by dragging with mouse
-button 1 while the Shift key is down;  this will adjust the end
-of the selection that was nearest to the mouse cursor when button
-1 was pressed.
-If the button is double-clicked before dragging then the selection
-will be adjusted in units of whole words.
-
-=item [5]
-
-Clicking mouse button 1 with the Control key down will position the
-insertion cursor in the Spinbox without affecting the selection.
-
-=item [6]
-
-If any normal printing characters are typed in a Spinbox, they are
-inserted at the point of the insertion cursor.
-
-=item [7]
-
-The view in the Spinbox can be adjusted by dragging with mouse button 2.
-If mouse button 2 is clicked without moving the mouse, the selection
-is copied into the Spinbox at the position of the mouse cursor.
-
-=item [8]
-
-If the mouse is dragged out of the Spinbox on the left or right sides
-while button 1 is pressed, the Spinbox will automatically scroll to
-make more text visible (if there is more text off-screen on the side
-where the mouse left the window).
-
-=item [9]
-
-The Left and Right keys move the insertion cursor one character to the
-left or right;  they also clear any selection in the Spinbox and set
-the selection anchor.
-If Left or Right is typed with the Shift key down, then the insertion
-cursor moves and the selection is extended to include the new character.
-Control-Left and Control-Right move the insertion cursor by words, and
-Control-Shift-Left and Control-Shift-Right move the insertion cursor
-by words and also extend the selection.
-Control-b and Control-f behave the same as Left and Right, respectively.
-Meta-b and Meta-f behave the same as Control-Left and Control-Right,
-respectively.
-
-=item [10]
-
-The Home key, or Control-a, will move the insertion cursor to the
-beginning of the Spinbox and clear any selection in the Spinbox.
-Shift-Home moves the insertion cursor to the beginning of the Spinbox
-and also extends the selection to that point.
-
-=item [11]
-
-The End key, or Control-e, will move the insertion cursor to the
-end of the Spinbox and clear any selection in the Spinbox.
-Shift-End moves the cursor to the end and extends the selection
-to that point.
-
-=item [12]
-
-The Select key and Control-Space set the selection anchor to the position
-of the insertion cursor.  They don't affect the current selection.
-Shift-Select and Control-Shift-Space adjust the selection to the
-current position of the insertion cursor, selecting from the anchor
-to the insertion cursor if there was not any selection previously.
-
-=item [13]
-
-Control-/ selects all the text in the Spinbox.
-
-=item [14]
-
-Control-\ clears any selection in the Spinbox.
-
-=item [15]
-
-The F16 key (labelled Copy on many Sun workstations) or Meta-w
-copies the selection in the widget to the clipboard, if there is a selection.
-
-=item [16]
-
-The F20 key (labelled Cut on many Sun workstations) or Control-w
-copies the selection in the widget to the clipboard and deletes
-the selection.
-If there is no selection in the widget then these keys have no effect.
-
-=item [17]
-
-The F18 key (labelled Paste on many Sun workstations) or Control-y
-inserts the contents of the clipboard at the position of the
-insertion cursor.
-
-=item [18]
-
-The Delete key deletes the selection, if there is one in the Spinbox.
-If there is no selection, it deletes the character to the right of
-the insertion cursor.
-
-=item [19]
-
-The BackSpace key and Control-h delete the selection, if there is one
-in the Spinbox.
-If there is no selection, it deletes the character to the left of
-the insertion cursor.
-
-=item [20]
-
-Control-d deletes the character to the right of the insertion cursor.
-
-=item [21]
-
-Meta-d deletes the word to the right of the insertion cursor.
-
-=item [22]
-
-Control-k deletes all the characters to the right of the insertion
-cursor.
-
-=item [23]
-
-Control-t reverses the order of the two characters to the right of
-the insertion cursor.
-
-If the Spinbox is disabled using the B<-state> option, then the Spinbox's
-view can still be adjusted and text in the Spinbox can still be selected,
-but no insertion cursor will be displayed and no text modifications will
-take place.
-
-The behavior of Spinboxes can be changed by defining new bindings for
-individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-Spinbox, Entry, widget
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Submethods.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Submethods.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 2a83334f8b2..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Submethods.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,27 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Submethods - add aliases for tk sub-commands
-
-=for pm Tk/Submethods.pm
-
-=for category Implementation
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-  use Tk::Submethods ( 'command1' => [qw(sub1 sub2 sub3)],
-                       'command2' => [qw(sub1 sub2 sub3)]);
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-Creates C<-E<gt>commandSub(...)> as an alias for C<-E<gt>command('sub',...)>
-e.g. C<-E<gt>grabRelease> for C<-E<gt>grab('release')>.
-
-For each command/subcommand pair this creates a closure with command
-and subcommand as bound lexical variables and assigns a reference to this
-to a 'glob' in the callers package.
-
-Someday the sub-commands may be created directly in the C code.
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/SunConst.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/SunConst.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index eb5d892871b..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/SunConst.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,18 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::DragDrop::SunConst - Constants for Sun's Drag&Drop protocol
-
-=for pm DragDrop/DragDrop/SunConst.pm
-
-=for category Experimental Modules
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-This module defines symbolic name subs for the numeric constants that
-make up Sun's Drag&Drop protocol. They are in this module with Exporter
-as they are shared between the two halves (Dropper and Receiver) of
-the protocol.
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/TList.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/TList.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index b8937fa8ef0..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/TList.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,597 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1996, Expert Interface Technologies
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#  The file man.macros and some of the macros used by this file are
-#  copyrighted: (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-#               (c) 1994-1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  The license terms of the Tcl/Tk distribution are in the file
-#  license.tcl.
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::TList - Create and manipulate Tix Tabular List widgets
-
-=for category Tix Extensions
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >I<$tlist> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<TList>(?I<options>?);
-
-=head1 SUPER-CLASS
-
-None.
-
-=head1 STANDARD OPTIONS
-
-B<-background>	B<-borderwidth>	B<-class>	B<-cursor>	B<-foreground>
-B<-font>	B<-height>	B<-highlightcolor>	B<-highlightthickness>
-B<-relief>	B<-selectbackground>	B<-selectforeground>
-B<-xscrollcommand>	B<-yscrollcommand>	B<-width>
-
-See L<Tk::options> for details of the standard options.
-
-=head1 WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Name:	B<browsecmd>
-
-=item Class:	B<BrowseCmd>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-browsecmd>
-
-Specifies a perl/Tk B<callback> to be executed when the user browses through the
-entries in the TList widget.
-
-=item Name:	B<command>
-
-=item Class:	B<Command>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-command>
-
-Specifies the perl/Tk B<callback> to be executed when the user invokes a list
-entry in the TList widget. Normally the user invokes a list
-entry by double-clicking it or pressing the Return key.
-
-=item Name:	B<foreground>
-
-=item Class:	B<Foreground>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-foreground>
-
-=item Alias:	B<-fg>
-
-Specifies the default foreground color for the list entries.
-
-=item Name:	B<height>
-
-=item Class:	B<Height>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-height>
-
-Specifies the desired height for the window in number of characters.
-
-=item Name:	B<itemType>
-
-=item Class:	B<ItemType>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-itemtype>
-
-Specifies the default type of display item for this TList widget. When
-you call the B<insert> methods, display items of this
-type will be created if the B<-itemtype> option is not specified.
-
-=item Name:	B<orient>
-
-=item Class:	B<Orient>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-orient>
-
-Specifies the order of tabularizing the list entries. When set to
-"B<vertical>", the entries are arranged in a column, from top to
-bottom. If the entries cannot be contained in one column, the
-remaining entries will go to the next column, and so on. When set to
-"B<horizontal>", the entries are arranged in a row, from left to
-right. If the entries cannot be contained in one row, the remaining
-entries will go to the next row, and so on.
-
-=item Name:	B<padX>
-
-=item Class:	B<Pad>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-padx>
-
-The default horizontal padding for list entries.
-
-=item Name:	B<padY>
-
-=item Class:	B<Pad>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-padx>
-
-The default vertical padding for list entries.
-
-=item Name:	B<selectBackground>
-
-=item Class:	B<SelectBackground>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-selectbackground>
-
-Specifies the background color for the selected list entries.
-
-=item Name:	B<selectBorderWidth>
-
-=item Class:	B<BorderWidth>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-selectborderwidth>
-
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating the width of the 3-D border
-to draw around selected items.  The value may have any of the forms
-acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-
-=item Name:	B<selectForeground>
-
-=item Class:	B<SelectForeground>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-selectforeground>
-
-Specifies the foreground color for the selected list entries.
-
-=item Name:	B<selectMode>
-
-=item Class:	B<SelectMode>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-selectmode>
-
-Specifies one of several styles for manipulating the selection.  The
-value of the option may be arbitrary, but the default bindings expect
-it to be either B<single>, B<browse>, B<multiple>, or
-B<extended>; the default value is B<single>.
-
-=item Name:	B<sizeCmd>
-
-=item Class:	B<SizeCmd>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-sizecmd>
-
-Specifies a perl/Tk B<callback> to be called whenever the TList widget
-changes its size. This command can be useful to implement "user scroll
-bars when needed" features.
-
-=item Name:	B<state>
-
-=item Class:	B<State>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-state>
-
-Specifies whether the TList command should react to user actions. When
-set to "B<normal>", the TList reacts to user actions in the normal
-way. When set to "B<disabled>", the TList can only be scrolled, but
-its entries cannot be selected or activated.
-
-=item Name:	B<width>
-
-=item Class:	B<Width>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-width>
-
-Specifies the desired width for the window in characters.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<TList> method creates a new window (given by the
-$widget argument) and makes it into a TList widget.
-Additional options, described above, may be specified on the command
-line or in the option database to configure aspects of the
-TList widget such as its cursor and relief.
-
-The TList widget can be used to display data in a tabular format. The
-list entries of a TList widget are similar to the entries in the Tk
-listbox widget. The main differences are (1) the TList widget can
-display the list entries in a two dimensional format and (2) you can
-use graphical images as well as multiple colors and fonts for
-the list entries.
-
-Each list entry is identified by an B<index>, which can be in the
-following forms:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<number>
-
-An integer that indicates the position of the entry in the list. 0
-means the first position, 1 means the second position, and so on.
-
-=item B<end>
-
-Indicates the end of the listbox. For some commands this means just
-after the last entry; for other commands it means the last entry.
-
-=item B<@>I<x>,I<y>
-
-Indicates the element that covers the point in the listbox window
-specified by x and y (in pixel coordinates). If no element covers that
-point, then the closest element to that point is used.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DISPLAY ITEMS
-
-Each list entry in an TList widget is associated with a B<display>
-item.  The display item determines what visual information should
-be displayed for this list entry. Please see L<Tk::DItem>
-for a list of all display items.
-
-When a list entry is created by the B<insert> command, the type of
-its display item is determined by the B<-itemtype> option passed
-to these commands. If the B<-itemtype> is omitted, then by default
-the type specified by this TList widget's B<-itemtype> option is
-used.
-
-=head1 WIDGET METHODS
-
-The B<TList> method creates a widget object.
-
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-The widget also inherits all the methods provided by the generic
-L<Tk::Widget|Tk::Widget> class.
-
-The following additional methods are available for TList widgets:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<anchorSet>(I<index>)
-
-Sets the anchor to the list entry identified by I<index>. The
-anchor is the end of the selection that is fixed while dragging out a
-selection with the mouse.
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<anchorClear>
-
-Removes the anchor, if any, from this TList widget. This only removes
-the surrounding highlights of the anchor entry and does not affect its
-selection status.
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<delete>(I<from, >?I<to>?)
-
-Deletes one or more list entries between the two entries specified by
-the indices I<from> and I<to>. If I<to> is not specified, deletes
-the single entry specified by I<from>.
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<dragsiteSet>(I<index>)
-
-Sets the dragsite to the list entry identified by
-I<index>. The dragsite is used to indicate the source of a
-drag-and-drop action. Currently drag-and-drop functionality has not
-been implemented in Tix yet.
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<dragsiteClear>
-
-Remove the dragsite, if any, from the this TList widget. This only
-removes the surrounding highlights of the dragsite entry and does not
-affect its selection status.
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<dropsiteSet>(I<index>)
-
-Sets the dropsite to the list entry identified by I<index>. The
-dropsite is used to indicate the target of a drag-and-drop
-action. Currently drag-and-drop functionality has not been implemented
-in Tix yet.
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<dropsiteClear>
-
-Remove the dropsite, if any, from the this TList widget. This only
-removes the surrounding highlights of the dropsite entry and does not
-affect its selection status.
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<entrycget>(I<index, option>)
-
-Returns the current value of the configuration option given by
-I<option> for the entry indentfied by I<index>. I<Option> may
-have any of the values accepted by the B<insert> method.
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<entryconfigure>(I<index, >?I<option>?, I<?value, option, value, ...>?)
-
-Query or modify the configuration options of the list entry identified
-by I<index>. If no I<option> is specified, returns a list
-describing all of the available options for I<index> (see
-B<Tk_ConfigureInfo> for information on the format of this list). If
-I<option> is specified with no I<value>, then the method
-returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be
-identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no
-I<option> is specified). If one or more I<option-value> pairs
-are specified, then the command modifies the given option(s) to have
-the given value(s); in this case the method returns an empty string.
-I<Option> may have any of the values accepted by the B<insert>
-method. The exact set of options depends on the
-value of the B<-itemtype> option passed to the the B<insert>
-method when this list entry is created.
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<insert>(I<index, >?I<option, value, ...>?)
-
-Creates a new list entry at the position indicated by I<index>. The
-following configuration options can be given to configure the list
-entry:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item B<-itemtype> => I<type>
-
-Specifies the type of display item to be display for the new list
-entry. I<type> must be a valid display item type. Currently the
-available display item types are B<image>, B<imagetext>,
-B<text>, and I<$widget>. If this option is not specified, then by
-default the type specified by this TList widget's B<-itemtype>
-option is used.
-
-=item B<-state> => I<state>
-
-Specifies whether this entry can be selected or invoked by the user.
-Must be either B<normal> or B<disabled>.
-
-=item B<-data> => I<data>
-
-Arbitrary data to be associated with the entry (a perl scalar value).
-
-=back
-
-The B<insert> method accepts additional configuration options
-to configure the display item associated with this list entry. The set
-of additional configuration options depends on the type of the display
-item given by the B<-itemtype> option. Please see
-L<Tk::DItem> for a list of the configuration options for
-each of the display item types.
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<info>(I<option, >I<arg, ...>)
-
-Query information about the TList widget. I<option> can be one
-of the following:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<info>(B<anchor, >I<index>)
-
-Returns the index of the current anchor, if any, of the TList
-widget. If the anchor is not set, returns the empty string.
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<info>(B<dragsite, >I<index>)
-
-Returns the index of the current dragsite, if any, of the TList
-widget. If the dragsite is not set, returns the empty string.
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<info>(B<dropsite, >I<index>)
-
-Returns the index of the current dropsite, if any, of the TList
-widget. If the dropsite is not set, returns the empty string.
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<info>(B<selection>)
-
-Returns a list of selected elements in the TList widget. If no entries
-are selected, returns an empty string.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<nearest>(I<x, y>)
-
-Given an I<(x,y)> coordinate within the TList window, this command
-returns the index of the TList element nearest to that coordinate.
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<see>(I<index>)
-
-Adjust the view in the TList so that the entry given by I<index> is
-visible. If the entry is already visible then the command has no
-effect; otherwise TList scrolls to bring the element into view at the edge
-to which it is nearest.
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<selection>(I<option, >I<arg, ...>)
-
-This command is used to adjust the selection within a TList widget. It
-has several forms, depending on I<option>:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<selectionClear>(?I<from>?, ?I<to>?)
-
-When no extra arguments are given, deselects all of the list entrie(s)
-in this TList widget. When only I<from> is given, only the list
-entry identified by I<from> is deselected. When both I<from> and
-I<to> are given, deselects all of the list entrie(s) between
-between I<from> and I<to>, inclusive, without affecting the
-selection state of entries outside that range.
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<selectionIncludes>(I<index>)
-
-Returns 1 if the list entry indicated by I<index> is currently
-selected; returns 0 otherwise.
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<selectionSet>(I<from, >?I<to>?)
-
-Selects all of the list entrie(s) between between I<from> and
-I<to>, inclusive, without affecting the selection state of entries
-outside that range. When only I<from> is given, only the list entry
-identified by I<from> is selected.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<xview>(I<args>)
-
-This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the
-information in the widget's window. It can take any of the following
-forms:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<xview>
-
-Returns a list containing two elements.  Each element is a real
-fraction between 0 and 1; together they describe the horizontal span
-that is visible in the window.  For example, if the first element is
-0.2 and the second element is 0.6, 20% of the TList entry is
-off-screen to the left, the middle 40% is visible in the window, and
-40% of the entry is off-screen to the right. These are the same values
-passed to scrollbars via the B<-xscrollcommand> option.
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<xview>(I<index>)
-
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the list entry identified by
-I<index> is aligned to the left edge of the window.
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<xviewMoveto>(I<fraction>)
-
-Adjusts the view in the window so that I<fraction> of the total
-width of the TList is off-screen to the left. I<fraction> must be
-a fraction between 0 and 1.
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<xviewScroll>(I<number, what>)
-
-This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to
-I<number> and I<what>. I<Number> must be an integer.
-I<What> must be either B<units> or B<pages> or an
-abbreviation of one of these. If I<what> is B<units>, the view
-adjusts left or right by I<number> character units (the width of
-the B<0> character) on the display; if it is B<pages> then the
-view adjusts by I<number> screenfuls. If I<number> is negative
-then characters farther to the left become visible; if it is positive
-then characters farther to the right become visible.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<yview>(I<?args>?)
-
-This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the
-entries in the widget's window. It can take any of the following forms:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<yview>
-
-Returns a list containing two elements, both of which are real
-fractions between 0 and 1.  The first element gives the position of
-the list element at the top of the window, relative to the TList as a
-whole (0.5 means it is halfway through the TList, for example).  The
-second element gives the position of the list entry just after the
-last one in the window, relative to the TList as a whole.  These are
-the same values passed to scrollbars via the B<-yscrollcommand>
-option.
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<yview>(I<index>)
-
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the list entry given by
-I<index> is displayed at the top of the window.
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<yviewMoveto>(I<fraction>)
-
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the list entry given by
-I<fraction> appears at the top of the window. I<Fraction> is a
-fraction between 0 and 1; 0 indicates the first entry in the TList,
-0.33 indicates the entry one-third the way through the TList, and so
-on.
-
-=item I<$tlist>-E<gt>B<yviewScroll>(I<number, what>)
-
-This command adjust the view in the window up or down according to
-I<number> and I<what>.  I<Number> must be an integer.
-I<What> must be either B<units> or B<pages>.  If I<what>
-is B<units>, the view adjusts up or down by I<number> lines; if
-it is B<pages> then the view adjusts by I<number> screenfuls.
-If I<number> is negative then earlier entries become visible; if
-it is positive then later entries become visible.
-
-=back
-
-=back
-
-=head1 BINDINGS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item [1]
-
-If the B<-selectmode> is "browse", when the user drags the mouse
-pointer over the list entries, the entry under the pointer will be
-highlighted and the B<-browsecmd> procedure will be called with
-one parameter, the index of the highlighted entry. Only one entry
-can be highlighted at a time. The B<-command> procedure will be
-called when the user double-clicks on a list entry.
-
-=item [2]
-
-If the B<-selectmode> is "single", the entries will only be
-highlighted by mouse E<lt>ButtonRelease-1E<gt> events. When a new list entry
-is highlighted, the B<-browsecmd> procedure will be called with
-one parameter indicating the highlighted list entry. The
-B<-command> procedure will be called when the user double-clicks
-on a list entry.
-
-=item [3]
-
-If the B<-selectmode> is "multiple", when the user drags the mouse
-pointer over the list entries, all the entries under the pointer will
-be highlighted. However, only a contiguous region of list entries can
-be selected. When the highlighted area is changed, the
-B<-browsecmd> procedure will be called with an undefined
-parameter. It is the responsibility of the B<-browsecmd> procedure
-to find out the exact highlighted selection in the TList. The
-B<-command> procedure will be called when the user double-clicks
-on a list entry.
-
-=item [4]
-
-If the B<-selectmode> is "extended", when the user drags the mouse
-pointer over the list entries, all the entries under the pointer will
-be highlighted. The user can also make disjointed selections using
-E<lt>Control-ButtonPress-1E<gt>. When the highlighted area is changed, the
-B<-browsecmd> procedure will be called with an undefined
-parameter. It is the responsibility of the B<-browsecmd> procedure
-to find out the exact highlighted selection in the TList. The
-B<-command> procedure will be called when the user double-clicks
-on a list entry.
-
-=back
-
-=cut
-
-# BUG:
-#	click on 'one' in example below does not make
-#	it 'active' item (didn't GBARR reported this before!?)
-
-=head1 EXAMPLE
-
-This example demonstrates how to use an TList to store a list of
-numbers:
-
-    use strict;
-    use Tk ();
-    use Tk::TList;
-
-    my $mw = Tk::MainWindow->new();
-    my $image = $mw->Getimage('folder');
-    my $tlist = $mw->TList(-orient => 'vertical');
-    for my $text ( qw/one two three four five six seven eight nine/ ) {
-        $tlist->insert('end',
-		 -itemtype=>'imagetext', -image=>$image, -text=>$text);
-    }
-
-    $tlist->pack(-expand=>'yes', -fill=>'both');
-
-    Tk::MainLoop;
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::options|Tk::options>
-L<Tk::Widget|Tk::Widget>
-L<Tk::DItem|Tk::DItem>
-L<Tk::HList|Tk::HList>
-L<Tk::TixGrid|Tk::TixGrid>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-Tix(n), Tabular Listbox, Display Items
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Table.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Table.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index f73e93907b4..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Table.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Table - Scrollable 2 dimensional table of Tk widgets
-
-=for pm Tk/Table.pm
-
-=for category Tk Geometry Management
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-  use Tk::Table;
-
-  $table = $parent->Table(-rows => number,
-                          -columns => number,
-                          -scrollbars => anchor,
-                          -fixedrows => number,
-                          -fixedcolumns => number,
-                          -takefocus => boolean);
-
-  $widget = $table->Button(...);
-
-  $old = $table->put($row,$col,$widget);
-  $old = $table->put($row,$col,"Text");  # simple Label
-  $widget = $table->get($row,$col);
-
-  $cols = $table->totalColumns;
-  $rows = $table->totalRows;
-
-  $table->see($widget);
-  $table->see($row,$col);
-
-  ($row,$col) = $table->Posn($widget);
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-Tk::Table is an all-perl widget/geometry manager which allows a two dimensional
-table of arbitary perl/Tk widgets to be displayed.
-
-Entries in the Table are simply ordinary perl/Tk widgets. They should
-be created with the Table as their parent. Widgets are positioned in the
-table using:
-
- $table->put($row,$col,$widget)
-
-If I<$widget> is not a reference it is treated as a string, and
-a Lable widget is created with the string as its text.
-
-All the widgets in each column are set to the same width - the requested
-width of the widest widget in the column.
-Likewise, all the widgets in each row are set to the same height - the requested
-height of the tallest widget in the column.
-
-A number of rows and/or columns can be marked as 'fixed' - and so can serve
-as 'headings' for the remainder the rows which are scrollable.
-
-The requested size of the table as a whole is such that the number of rows
-specified by -rows (default 10), and number of columns specified by -columns
-(default 10) can be displayed.
-
-If the Table is told it can take the keyboard focus then cursor and scroll
-keys scroll the displayed widgets.
-
-The Table will create and manage its own scrollbars if requested via
--scrollbars.
-
-The table can be emptied using
-
- $table->clear
-
-the widgets which were in the table are destroyed.
-
-
-The Tk::Table widget is derived from a Tk::Frame, so inherits all its
-configure options.
-
-=head1 BUGS / Snags / Possible enhancements
-
-=over 4
-
-=item *
-
-Very large Tables consume a lot of X windows.
-
-=item *
-
-No equivalent of pack's -anchor/-pad etc. options
-
-=back
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::grid>, L<Tk::HList>, L<Tk::TableMatrix>, L<Tk::MListbox>,
-L<Tk::Columns>
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Tcl-perl.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Tcl-perl.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 2310e0738e4..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Tcl-perl.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,200 +0,0 @@
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tcl vs perl - very old suspect documentation on porting.
-
-=for category Other Modules and Languages
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-This isn't really a .pod yet, nor is it Tcl vs perl
-it is a copy of John's comparison of Malcolm's original perl/Tk
-port with the current one. It is also out-of-date in places.
-
-  From: john@WPI.EDU (John Stoffel )
-
-  Here are some thoughts on the new Tk extension and how I think the
-  organization of the commands looks.  Mostly, I'm happy with it, it
-  makes some things more organized and more consistent with tcl/tk, but
-  since the overlying language is so different, I don't think we need to
-  follow exactly the tcl/tk model for how to call the language.
-
-  The basic structure of the Tk program is:
-
-      require Tk;
-
-      $top = MainWindow->new();
-
-      #
-      # create widgets
-      #
-
-      Tk::MainLoop;
-
-      sub method1 {
-      }
-
-      sub methodN {
-      }
-
-  This is pretty much the same as tkperl5a5, with some cosmetic naming
-  changes, and some more useful command name and usage changes.  A quick
-  comparison in no particular order follows:
-
-  tkperl5a5				Tk
-  -------------------------------	-----------------------------------
-  $top=tkinit(name,display,sync);	$top=MainWindow->new();
-
-  tkpack $w, ... ;		$w->pack(...)
-
-  $w = Class::new($top, ...);	$w = $top->Class(...);
-
-  tkmainloop;			Tk::MainLoop;
-
-  tkbind($w,"<key>",sub);		$w->bind("<key>",sub);
-
-  tkdelete($w, ...);		$w->delete(...);
-
-  $w->scanmark(...);		$w->scan("mark", ...);
-
-  $w->scandragto(...);		$w->scan("dragto", ...);
-
-  $w->tkselect();			$w->Select();
-
-  $w->selectadjust(...);		$w->selection("adjust", ...);
-
-  $w->selectto(...);		$w->selection("to", ...);
-
-  $w->selectfrom(...);		$w->selection("from", ...);
-
-  $w->tkindex(...);		$w->index(...);
-
-  tclcmd("xxx",...);              &Tk::xxx(...)    # all Tk commands, but no Tcl at all
-
-  tclcmd("winfo", xxx, $w, ...);  $w->xxx(...);
-
-  				$w->mark(...);
-
-  				$w->tag(...);
-
-  $w->grabstatus();		$w->grab("status");
-
-  $w->grabrelease(...);		$w->grab("release", ...);
-
-  focus($w);			$w->focus;
-
-  update();			Tk->update();
-
-  idletasks();			Tk->update("idletasks");
-
-  wm("cmd",$w, ...);		$w->cmd(...);
-
-  destroy($w);			$w->destroy();
-
-  				Tk::option(...);
-                                  $w->OptionGet(name,Class)
-
-  				$w->place(...)
-
-  				Tk::property(...);
-
-  $w = Entry::new($parent,...)
-
-  is now
-
-  $w = $parent->Entry(...)
-
-  As this allows new to be inherited from a Window class.
-
-    -method=>x,-slave=>y
-
-   is now
-
-    -command => [x,y]
-
-  1st element of list is treated as "method" if y is an object reference.
-  (You can have -command => [a,b,c,d,e] too; b..e get passed as args).
-
-  Object references are now hashes rather than scalars and there
-  is only ever one such per window.  The Tcl_CmdInfo and PathName
-  are entries in the hash.
-
-  (This allows derived classes to
-  re-bless the hash and keep their on stuff in it too.)
-
-  Tk's "Tcl_Interp" is in fact a ref to "." window.
-  You can find all the Tk windows descended from it as their object
-  references get added (by PathName) into this hash.
-  $w->MainWindow returns this hash from any window.
-
-  I think that it should extend to multiple tkinits / Tk->news
-  with different Display's - if Tk code does.
-
-  Finally "bind" passes window as "extra" (or only)
-  argument. Thus
-
-  Tk::Button->bind(<Any-Enter>,"Enter");
-
-  Binds Enter events to Tk::Button::Enter by default
-  but gets called as $w->Enter so derived class of Button can just
-  define its own Enter method. &EvWref and associated globals and race
-  conditions are no longer needed.
-
-  One thing to beware of : commands bound to events with $widget->bind
-  follow same pattern, but get passed extra args :
-
-  $widget->bind(<Any-1>,[sub {print shift}, $one, $two ]);
-
-  When sub gets called it has :
-
-     $widget $one $two
-
-  passed.
-
-  1st extra arg is reference to the per-widget hash that serves as the
-  perl object for the widget.
-
-  Every time an XEvent a reference to a special class is placed
-  in the widget hash. It can be retrieved by $w->XEvent method.
-
-  The methods of the XEvent class are the
-  Tcl/Tk % special characters.
-
-  Thus:
-
-  $widget->bind(<Any-KeyPress>,
-                sub {
-                 my $w = shift;
-                 my $e = $w->XEvent;
-                 print $w->PathName," ",$e->A," pressed ,$e->xy,"\n");
-                });
-
-  XEvent->xy is a special case which returns "@" . $e->x . "," . $e->y
-  which is common in Text package.
-
-  Because of passing a blessed widget hash to "bound" subs they can be
-  bound to (possibly inherited) methods of the widget's class:
-
-  Class->bind(<Any-Down>,Down);
-
-  sub Class::Down
-  {
-   my $w = shift;
-   # handle down arrow
-  }
-
-  Also:
-
-  -command and friends can take a list the 1st element can be a ref to
-  as sub or a method name. Remaining elements are passed as args to the
-  sub at "invoke" time. Thus :
-
-  $b= $w->Button(blah blah, '-command' => [sub{print shift} , $fred ]);
-
-  Should do the trick, provided $fred is defined at time of button creation.
-
-  Thus 1st element of list is equivalent to Malcolm's -method and second
-  would be his -slave.  Any further elements are a bonus and avoid
-  having to pass ref to an array/hash as a slave.
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Text.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Text.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 200cda9b033..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Text.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2220 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  Copyright (c) 2002 O'Reilly & Associates Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Text - Create and manipulate Text widgets
-
-=for category  Tk Widget Classes
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-I<$text> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<Text>(?I<options>?);
-
-B<-background>	B<-highlightbackground>	B<-insertontime>	B<-selectborderwidth>
-B<-borderwidth>	B<-highlightcolor>	B<-insertwidth>	B<-selectforeground>
-B<-cursor>	B<-highlightthickness>	B<-padx>	B<-setgrid>
-B<-exportselection>	B<-insertbackground>	B<-pady>	B<-takefocus>
-B<-font>	B<-insertborderwidth>	B<-relief>	B<-xscrollcommand>
-B<-foreground>	B<-insertofftime>	B<-selectbackground>	B<-yscrollcommand>
-
-=head1 WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Name:	B<height>
-
-=item Class:	B<Height>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-height>
-
-Specifies the desired height for the window, in units of characters
-in the font given by the B<-font> option.
-Must be at least one.
-
-=item Name:	B<spacing1>
-
-=item Class:	B<Spacing1>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-spacing1>
-
-Requests additional space above each text line in the widget,
-using any of the standard forms for screen distances.
-If a line wraps, this option only applies to the first line
-on the display.
-This option may be overriden with B<-spacing1> options in
-tags.
-
-=item Name:	B<spacing2>
-
-=item Class:	B<Spacing2>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-spacing2>
-
-For lines that wrap (so that they cover more than one line on the
-display) this option specifies additional space to provide between
-the display lines that represent a single line of text.
-The value may have any of the standard forms for screen distances.
-This option may be overriden with B<-spacing2> options in
-tags.
-
-=item Name:	B<spacing3>
-
-=item Class:	B<Spacing3>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-spacing3>
-
-Requests additional space below each text line in the widget,
-using any of the standard forms for screen distances.
-If a line wraps, this option only applies to the last line
-on the display.
-This option may be overriden with B<-spacing3> options in
-tags.
-
-=item Name:	B<state>
-
-=item Class:	B<State>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-state>
-
-Specifies one of two states for the text:  B<normal> or B<disabled>.
-If the text is disabled then characters may not be inserted or deleted
-and no insertion cursor will be displayed, even if the input focus is
-in the widget.
-
-=item Name:	B<tabs>
-
-=item Class:	B<Tabs>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-tabs>
-
-Specifies a set of tab stops for the window.  The option's value consists
-of a list of screen distances giving the positions of the tab stops.  Each
-position may optionally be followed in the next list element
-by one of the keywords B<left>, B<right>, B<center>,
-or B<numeric>, which specifies how to justify
-text relative to the tab stop.  B<Left> is the default; it causes
-the text following the tab character to be positioned with its left edge
-at the tab position.  B<Right> means that the right edge of the text
-following the tab character is positioned at the tab position, and
-B<center> means that the text is centered at the tab position.
-B<Numeric> means that the decimal point in the text is positioned
-at the tab position;  if there is no decimal point then the least
-significant digit of the number is positioned just to the left of the
-tab position;  if there is no number in the text then the text is
-right-justified at the tab position.
-For example, B<-tabs =E<gt> [qw/2c left 4c 6c center/]> creates three
-tab stops at two-centimeter intervals;  the first two use left
-justification and the third uses center justification.
-If the list of tab stops does not have enough elements to cover all
-of the tabs in a text line, then Tk extrapolates new tab stops using
-the spacing and alignment from the last tab stop in the list.
-The value of the B<tabs> option may be overridden by B<-tabs>
-options in tags.
-If no B<-tabs> option is specified, or if it is specified as
-an empty list, then Tk uses default tabs spaced every eight
-(average size) characters.
-
-=item Name:	B<width>
-
-=item Class:	B<Width>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-width>
-
-Specifies the desired width for the window in units of characters
-in the font given by the B<-font> option.
-If the font doesn't have a uniform width then the width of the
-character ``0'' is used in translating from character units to
-screen units.
-
-=item Name:	B<wrap>
-
-=item Class:	B<Wrap>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-wrap>
-
-Specifies how to handle lines in the text that are too long to be
-displayed in a single line of the text's window.
-The value must be B<none> or B<char> or B<word>.
-A wrap mode of B<none> means that each line of text appears as
-exactly one line on the screen;  extra characters that don't fit
-on the screen are not displayed.
-In the other modes each line of text will be broken up into several
-screen lines if necessary to keep all the characters visible.
-In B<char> mode a screen line break may occur after any character;
-in B<word> mode a line break will only be made at word boundaries.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<Text> method creates a new window (given by the
-$text argument) and makes it into a text widget.
-Additional
-options, described above, may be specified on the command line
-or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the text such as its default background color
-and relief.  The B<text> command returns the
-path name of the new window.
-
-A text widget displays one or more lines of text and allows that
-text to be edited.
-Text widgets support four different kinds of annotations on the
-text, called tags, marks, embedded windows or embedded images.
-Tags allow different portions of the text
-to be displayed with different fonts and colors.
-In addition, L<perl/Tk callbacks|Tk::callbacks> can be associated with tags so
-that scripts are invoked when particular actions such as keystrokes
-and mouse button presses occur in particular ranges of the text.
-See L<"TAGS"> below for more details.
-
-The second form of annotation consists of marks, which are floating
-markers in the text.
-Marks are used to keep track of various interesting positions in the
-text as it is edited.
-See L<"MARKS"> below for more details.
-
-The third form of annotation allows arbitrary windows to be
-embedded in a text widget.
-See L<"EMBEDDED WINDOWS"> below for more details.
-
-The fourth form of annotation allows Tk images to be embedded in a text
-widget.
-See L<"EMBEDDED IMAGES"> below for more details.
-
-The Perl/Tk B<Text> widget does not support undo/redo, use the B<TextUndo>
-widget instead.
-
-=head1 INDICES
-
-Many of the methods for texts take one or more indices
-as arguments.
-An index is a string used to indicate a particular place within
-a text, such as a place to insert characters or one endpoint of a
-range of characters to delete.
-Indices have the syntax
-
- base modifier modifier modifier ...
-
-Where I<base> gives a starting point and the I<modifier>s
-adjust the index from the starting point (e.g. move forward or
-backward one character).  Every index must contain a I<base>,
-but the I<modifier>s are optional.
-
-The I<base> for an index must have one of the following forms:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<line>B<.>I<char>
-
-Indicates I<char>'th character on line I<line>.
-Lines are numbered from 1 for consistency with other UNIX programs
-that use this numbering scheme.
-Within a line, characters are numbered from 0.
-If I<char> is B<end> then it refers to the newline character
-that ends the line.
-
-=item B<@>I<x>B<,>I<y>
-
-Indicates the character that covers the pixel whose x and y coordinates
-within the text's window are I<x> and I<y>.
-
-=item B<end>
-
-Indicates the end of the text (the character just after the last
-newline).
-
-=item I<mark>
-
-Indicates the character just after the mark whose name is I<mark>.
-
-=item I<tag>B<.first>
-
-Indicates the first character in the text that has been tagged with
-I<tag>.
-This form generates an error if no characters are currently tagged
-with I<tag>.
-
-=item I<tag>B<.last>
-
-Indicates the character just after the last one in the text that has
-been tagged with I<tag>.
-This form generates an error if no characters are currently tagged
-with I<tag>.
-
-=item I<$widget>
-
-Indicates the position of the embedded window referenced by I<$widget>.
-This form generates an error if I<$widget> does not reference to an
-embedded window.
-
-=item I<imageName>
-
-Indicates the position of the embedded image whose name is
-I<imageName>.
-This form generates an error if there is no embedded image
-by the given name.
-
-If the I<base> could match more than one of the above forms, such
-as a I<mark> and I<imageName> both having the same value, then
-the form earlier in the above list takes precedence.
-If modifiers follow the base index, each one of them must have one
-of the forms listed below.  Keywords such as B<chars> and B<wordend>
-may be abbreviated as long as the abbreviation is unambiguous.
-
-=item B<+ >I<count>B< chars>
-
-Adjust the index forward by I<count> characters, moving to later
-lines in the text if necessary.  If there are fewer than I<count>
-characters in the text after the current index, then set the index
-to the last character in the text.
-Spaces on either side of I<count> are optional.
-
-=item B<- >I<count>B< chars>
-
-Adjust the index backward by I<count> characters, moving to earlier
-lines in the text if necessary.  If there are fewer than I<count>
-characters in the text before the current index, then set the index
-to the first character in the text.
-Spaces on either side of I<count> are optional.
-
-=item B<+ >I<count>B< lines>
-
-Adjust the index forward by I<count> lines, retaining the same
-character position within the line.  If there are fewer than I<count>
-lines after the line containing the current index, then set the index
-to refer to the same character position on the last line of the text.
-Then, if the line is not long enough to contain a character at the indicated
-character position, adjust the character position to refer to the last
-character of the line (the newline).
-Spaces on either side of I<count> are optional.
-
-=item B<- >I<count>B< lines>
-
-Adjust the index backward by I<count> lines, retaining the same
-character position within the line.  If there are fewer than I<count>
-lines before the line containing the current index, then set the index
-to refer to the same character position on the first line of the text.
-Then, if the line is not long enough to contain a character at the indicated
-character position, adjust the character position to refer to the last
-character of the line (the newline).
-Spaces on either side of I<count> are optional.
-
-=item B<linestart>
-
-Adjust the index to refer to the first character on the line.
-
-=item B<lineend>
-
-Adjust the index to refer to the last character on the line (the newline).
-
-=item B<wordstart>
-
-Adjust the index to refer to the first character of the word containing
-the current index.  A word consists of any number of adjacent characters
-that are letters, digits, or underscores, or a single character that
-is not one of these.
-
-=item B<wordend>
-
-Adjust the index to refer to the character just after the last one of the
-word containing the current index.  If the current index refers to the last
-character of the text then it is not modified.
-
-If more than one modifier is present then they are applied in
-left-to-right order.  For example, the index ``B<end - 1 chars>''
-refers to the next-to-last character in the text and
-``B<insert wordstart - 1 c>'' refers to the character just before
-the first one in the word containing the insertion cursor.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 TAGS
-
-The first form of annotation in text widgets is a tag.
-A tag is a textual string that is associated with some of the characters
-in a text.
-Tags may contain arbitrary characters, but it is probably best to
-avoid using the the characters `` '' (space), B<+>, or B<->:
-these characters have special meaning in indices, so tags containing
-them can't be used as indices.
-There may be any number of tags associated with characters in a
-text.
-Each tag may refer to a single character, a range of characters, or
-several ranges of characters.
-An individual character may have any number of tags associated with it.
-
-A priority order is defined among tags, and this order is used in
-implementing some of the tag-related functions described below.
-When a tag is defined (by associating it with characters or setting
-its display options or binding callbacks to it), it is given
-a priority higher than any existing tag.
-The priority order of tags may be redefined using the
-``I<$text>-E<gt>B<tagRaise>'' and ``I<$text>-E<gt>B<tagLower>''
-methods.
-
-Tags serve three purposes in text widgets.
-First, they control the way information is displayed on the screen.
-By default, characters are displayed as determined by the
-B<background>, B<font>, and B<foreground> options for the
-text widget.
-However, display options may be associated with individual tags
-using the ``I<$text>-E<gt>B<tagConfigure>'' method.
-If a character has been tagged, then the display options associated
-with the tag override the default display style.
-The following options are currently supported for tags:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-background> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-I<Color> specifies the background color to use for characters
-associated with the tag.
-It may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetColor>.
-
-=item B<-bgstipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-I<Bitmap> specifies a bitmap that is used as a stipple pattern
-for the background.
-It may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetBitmap>.
-If I<bitmap> hasn't been specified, or if it is specified
-as an empty string, then a solid fill will be used for the
-background.
-
-=item B<-borderwidth> =E<gt> I<pixels>
-
-I<Pixels> specifies the width of a 3-D border to draw around
-the background.
-It may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-This option is used in conjunction with the B<-relief>
-option to give a 3-D appearance to the background for characters;
-it is ignored unless the B<-background> option
-has been set for the tag.
-
-=item B<-elide> =E<gt> boolean
-
-Elide  specifies whether the data should be elided.  Elided data
-is not displayed and takes no space on screen,  but  further  on
-behaves just as normal data.
-
-=item B<-data> =E<gt> I<value>
-
-Allows an arbitrary perl scalar I<value> to be associated with the tag.
-
-=item B<-fgstipple> =E<gt> I<bitmap>
-
-I<Bitmap> specifies a bitmap that is used as a stipple pattern
-when drawing text and other foreground information such as
-underlines.
-It may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetBitmap>.
-If I<bitmap> hasn't been specified, or if it is specified
-as an empty string, then a solid fill will be used.
-
-=item B<-font> =E<gt> I<fontName>
-
-I<FontName> is the name of a font to use for drawing characters.
-It may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetFontStruct>.
-
-=item B<-foreground> =E<gt> I<color>
-
-I<Color> specifies the color to use when drawing text and other
-foreground information such as underlines.
-It may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetColor>.
-
-=item B<-justify> =E<gt> I<justify>
-
-If the first character of a display line has a tag for which this
-option has been specified, then I<justify> determines how to
-justify the line.
-It must be one of B<left>, B<right>, or B<center>.
-If a line wraps, then the justification for each line on the
-display is determined by the first character of that display line.
-
-=item B<-lmargin1> =E<gt> I<pixels>
-
-If the first character of a text line has a tag for which this
-option has been specified, then I<pixels> specifies how
-much the line should be indented from the left edge of the
-window.
-I<Pixels> may have any of the standard forms for screen
-distances.
-If a line of text wraps, this option only applies to the
-first line on the display;  the B<-lmargin2> option controls
-the indentation for subsequent lines.
-
-=item B<-lmargin2> =E<gt> I<pixels>
-
-If the first character of a display line has a tag for which this
-option has been specified, and if the display line is not the
-first for its text line (i.e., the text line has wrapped), then
-I<pixels> specifies how much the line should be indented from
-the left edge of the window.
-I<Pixels> may have any of the standard forms for screen
-distances.
-This option is only used when wrapping is enabled, and it only
-applies to the second and later display lines for a text line.
-
-=item B<-offset> =E<gt> I<pixels>
-
-I<Pixels> specifies an amount by which the text's baseline
-should be offset vertically from the baseline of the overall
-line, in pixels.
-For example, a positive offset can be used for superscripts
-and a negative offset can be used for subscripts.
-I<Pixels> may have any of the standard forms for screen
-distances.
-
-=item B<-overstrike> =E<gt> I<boolean>
-
-Specifies whether or not to draw a horizontal rule through
-the middle of characters.
-I<Boolean> may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetBoolean>.
-
-=item B<-relief> =E<gt> I<relief>
-
-I<Relief> specifies the 3-D relief to use for drawing backgrounds,
-in any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetRelief>.
-This option is used in conjunction with the B<-borderwidth>
-option to give a 3-D appearance to the background for characters;
-it is ignored unless the B<-background> option
-has been set for the tag.
-
-=item B<-rmargin> =E<gt> I<pixels>
-
-If the first character of a display line has a tag for which this
-option has been specified, then I<pixels> specifies how wide
-a margin to leave between the end of the line and the right
-edge of the window.
-I<Pixels> may have any of the standard forms for screen
-distances.
-This option is only used when wrapping is enabled.
-If a text line wraps, the right margin for each line on the
-display is determined by the first character of that display
-line.
-
-=item B<-spacing1> =E<gt> I<pixels>
-
-I<Pixels> specifies how much additional space should be
-left above each text line, using any of the standard forms for
-screen distances.
-If a line wraps, this option only applies to the first
-line on the display.
-
-=item B<-spacing2> =E<gt> I<pixels>
-
-For lines that wrap, this option specifies how much additional
-space to leave between the display lines for a single text line.
-I<Pixels> may have any of the standard forms for screen
-distances.
-
-=item B<-spacing3> =E<gt> I<pixels>
-
-I<Pixels> specifies how much additional space should be
-left below each text line, using any of the standard forms for
-screen distances.
-If a line wraps, this option only applies to the last
-line on the display.
-
-=item B<-tabs> =E<gt> I<tabList>
-
-I<TabList> specifies a set of tab stops in the same form
-as for the B<-tabs> option for the text widget.  This
-option only applies to a display line if it applies to the
-first character on that display line.
-If this option is specified as an empty string, it cancels
-the option, leaving it unspecified for the tag (the default).
-If the option is specified as a non-empty string that is
-an empty list, such as B<-tabs => " ">, then it requests
-default 8-character tabs as described for the B<tabs>
-widget option.
-
-=item B<-underline> =E<gt> I<boolean>
-
-I<Boolean> specifies whether or not to draw an underline underneath
-characters.
-It may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetBoolean>.
-
-=item B<-wrap> =E<gt> I<mode>
-
-I<Mode> specifies how to handle lines that are wider than the
-text's window.
-It has the same legal values as the B<-wrap> option
-for the text widget:  B<none>, B<char>, or B<word>.
-If this tag option is specified, it overrides the B<-wrap> option
-for the text widget.
-
-=back
-
-If a character has several tags associated with it, and if their
-display options conflict, then the options of the highest priority
-tag are used.
-If a particular display option hasn't been specified for a
-particular tag, or if it is specified as an empty string, then
-that option will never be used;  the next-highest-priority
-tag's option will used instead.
-If no tag specifies a particular display option, then the default
-style for the widget will be used.
-
-The second purpose for tags is event bindings.
-You can associate bindings with a tag in much the same way you can
-associate bindings with a widget class:  whenever particular X
-events occur on characters with the given tag, a given
-<perl/Tk callback|Tk::callbacks> will be executed.
-Tag bindings can be used to give behaviors to ranges of characters;
-among other things, this allows hypertext-like
-features to be implemented.
-For details, see the description of the B<tagBind> widget
-method below.
-
-The third use for tags is in managing the selection.
-See L<"THE SELECTION"> below.
-
-=head1 MARKS
-
-The second form of annotation in text widgets is a mark.
-Marks are used for remembering particular places in a text.
-They are something like tags, in that they have names and
-they refer to places in the file, but a mark isn't associated
-with particular characters.
-Instead, a mark is associated with the gap between two characters.
-Only a single position may be associated with a mark at any given
-time.
-If the characters around a mark are deleted the mark will still
-remain;  it will just have new neighbor characters.
-In contrast, if the characters containing a tag are deleted then
-the tag will no longer have an association with characters in
-the file.
-Marks may be manipulated with the ``I<$text>-E<gt>B<mark>'' text widget
-method, and their current locations may be determined by using the
-mark name as an index in methods.
-
-Each mark also has a I<gravity>, which is either B<left> or
-B<right>.
-The gravity for a mark specifies what happens to the mark when
-text is inserted at the point of the mark.
-If a mark has left gravity, then the mark is treated as if it
-were attached to the character on its left, so the mark will
-remain to the left of any text inserted at the mark position.
-If the mark has right gravity, new text inserted at the mark
-position will appear to the right of the mark.  The gravity
-for a mark defaults to B<right>.
-
-The name space for marks is different from that for tags:  the
-same name may be used for both a mark and a tag, but they will refer
-to different things.
-
-Two marks have special significance.
-First, the mark B<insert> is associated with the insertion cursor,
-as described under L<"THE INSERTION CURSOR"> below.
-Second, the mark B<current> is associated with the character
-closest to the mouse and is adjusted automatically to track the
-mouse position and any changes to the text in the widget (one
-exception:  B<current> is not updated in response to mouse
-motions if a mouse button is down;  the update will be deferred
-until all mouse buttons have been released).
-Neither of these special marks may be deleted.
-
-=head1 EMBEDDED WINDOWS
-
-The third form of annotation in text widgets is an embedded window.
-Each embedded window annotation causes a window to be displayed
-at a particular point in  the text.
-There may be any number of embedded windows in a text widget,
-and any widget may be used as an embedded window (subject to the
-usual rules for geometry management, which require the text window
-to be the parent of the embedded window or a descendant of its
-parent).
-The embedded window's position on the screen will be updated as the
-text is modified or scrolled, and it will be mapped and unmapped as
-it moves into and out of the visible area of the text widget.
-Each embedded window occupies one character's worth of index space
-in the text widget, and it may be referred to either by the name
-of its embedded window or by its position in the widget's
-index space.
-If the range of text containing the embedded window is deleted then
-the window is destroyed.
-
-When an embedded window is added to a text widget with the
-B<widgetCreate> method, several configuration
-options may be associated with it.
-These options may be  modified later with the B<widgetConfigure>
-method.
-The following options are currently supported:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-align> =E<gt> I<where>
-
-If the window is not as tall as the line in which it is displayed,
-this option determines where the window is displayed in the line.
-I<Where> must have one of the values B<top> (align the top of the window
-with the top of the line), B<center> (center the window
-within the range of the line), B<bottom> (align the bottom of the
-window with the bottom of the line's area),
-or B<baseline> (align the bottom of the window with the baseline
-of the line).
-
-=item B<-create> =E<gt> I<callback>
-
-Specifies a L<callback|Tk::callbacks> that may be evaluated to create the window
-for the annotation.
-If no B<-window> option has been specified for the annotation
-this I<callback> will be evaluated when the annotation is about to
-be displayed on the screen.
-I<Callback> must create a window for the annotation and return
-the name of that window as its result.
-If the annotation's window should ever be deleted, I<callback>
-will be evaluated again the next time the annotation is displayed.
-
-=item B<-padx> =E<gt> I<pixels>
-
-I<Pixels> specifies the amount of extra space to leave on
-each side of the embedded window.
-It may have any of the usual forms defined for a screen distance
-(see B<Tk_GetPixels>).
-
-=item B<-pady> =E<gt> I<pixels>
-
-I<Pixels> specifies the amount of extra space to leave on
-the top and on the bottom of the embedded window.
-It may have any of the usual forms defined for a screen distance
-(see B<Tk_GetPixels>).
-
-=item B<-stretch> =E<gt> I<boolean>
-
-If the requested height of the embedded window is less than the
-height of the line in which it is displayed, this option can be
-used to specify whether the window should be stretched vertically
-to fill its line.
-If the B<-pady> option has been specified as well, then the
-requested padding will be retained even if the window is
-stretched.
-
-=item B<-window> =E<gt> I<$widget>
-
-Specifies the name of a window to display in the annotation.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 EMBEDDED IMAGES
-
-The final form of annotation in text widgets is an embedded image.
-Each embedded image annotation causes an image to be displayed
-at a particular point in  the text.
-There may be any number of embedded images in a text widget,
-and a particular image may be embedded in multiple places in the same
-text widget.
-The embedded image's position on the screen will be updated as the
-text is modified or scrolled.
-Each embedded image occupies one character's worth of index space
-in the text widget, and it may be referred to either by
-its position in the widget's index space, or the name it is assigned
-when the image is inserted into the text widget with B<imageCreate>.
-If the range of text containing the embedded image is deleted then
-that copy of the image is removed from the screen.
-
-When an embedded image is added to a text widget with the B<image>
-create method, a name unique to this instance of the image
-is returned.  This name may then be used to refer to this image
-instance.  The name is taken to be the value of the B<-name> option
-(described below).  If the B<-name> option is not provided, the
-B<-image> name is used instead.  If the I<imageName> is already
-in use in the text widget, then B<#>I<nn> is added to the end of the
-I<imageName>, where I<nn> is an arbitrary integer.  This insures
-the I<imageName> is unique.
-Once this name is assigned to this instance of the image, it does not
-change, even though the B<-image> or B<-name> values can be changed
-with B<image configure>.
-
-When an embedded image is added to a text widget with the
-B<imageCreate> method, several configuration
-options may be associated with it.
-These options may be modified later with the B<image configure>
-method.
-The following options are currently supported:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-align> =E<gt> I<where>
-
-If the image is not as tall as the line in which it is displayed,
-this option determines where the image is displayed in the line.
-I<Where> must have one of the values B<top> (align the top of the image
-with the top of the line), B<center> (center the image
-within the range of the line), B<bottom> (align the bottom of the
-image with the bottom of the line's area),
-or B<baseline> (align the bottom of the image with the baseline
-of the line).
-
-=item B<-image> =E<gt> I<image>
-
-Specifies the name of the Tk image to display in the annotation.
-If I<image> is not a valid Tk image, then an error is returned.
-
-=item B<-name> =E<gt> I<ImageName>
-
-Specifies the name by which this image instance may be referenced in
-the text widget. If I<ImageName> is not supplied, then the
-name of the Tk image is used instead.
-If the I<imageName> is already in use, I<#nn> is appended to
-the end of the name as described above.
-
-=item B<-padx> =E<gt> I<pixels>
-
-I<Pixels> specifies the amount of extra space to leave on
-each side of the embedded image.
-It may have any of the usual forms defined for a screen distance.
-
-=item B<-pady> =E<gt> I<pixels>
-
-I<Pixels> specifies the amount of extra space to leave on
-the top and on the bottom of the embedded image.
-It may have any of the usual forms defined for a screen distance.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 THE SELECTION
-
-Selection support is implemented via tags.
-If the B<exportSelection> option for the text widget is true
-then the B<sel> tag will be associated with the selection:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item [1]
-
-Whenever characters are tagged with B<sel> the text widget
-will claim ownership of the selection.
-
-=item [2]
-
-Attempts to retrieve the
-selection will be serviced by the text widget, returning all the
-characters with the B<sel> tag.
-
-=item [3]
-
-If the selection is claimed away by another application or by another
-window within this application, then the B<sel> tag will be removed
-from all characters in the text.
-
-=item [4]
-
-Whenever the sel tag range changes a virtual event B<<<Selection>>>
-is generated.
-
-The B<sel> tag is automatically defined when a text widget is
-created, and it may not be deleted with the ``I<$text>-E<gt>B<tagDelete>''
-method.  Furthermore, the B<selectBackground>,
-B<selectBorderWidth>, and B<selectForeground> options for
-the text widget are tied to the B<-background>,
-B<-borderwidth>, and B<-foreground> options for the B<sel>
-tag:  changes in either will automatically be reflected in the
-other.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 THE INSERTION CURSOR
-
-The mark named B<insert> has special significance in text widgets.
-It is defined automatically when a text widget is created and it
-may not be unset with the ``I<$text>-E<gt>B<markUnset>'' widget
-command.
-The B<insert> mark represents the position of the insertion
-cursor, and the insertion cursor will automatically be drawn at
-this point whenever the text widget has the input focus.
-
-=head1 THE MODIFIED FLAG
-
-The text widget can keep track of changes to the content of the  widget
-by means of the modified flag. Inserting or deleting text will set this
-flag. The flag can be queried, set and cleared programatically as well.
-Whenever  the flag changes state a B<<<Modified>>> virtual event is gener-
-ated. See the edit modified widget command for more details.
-
-
-=head1 WIDGET METHODS
-
-The B<Text> method creates a widget object.
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-The widget also inherits all the methods provided by the generic
-L<Tk::Widget|Tk::Widget> class.
-
-The following additional methods are available for text widgets.
-In addition, the extended text widget methods as documented
-in I<"Mastering Perl/Tk"> are included in this pod (with
-permission from the publisher, B<O'Reilly and Associates Inc.>).
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<adjustSelect>
-
-Moves the end point of the selection and anchor point to the
-mouse pointer location.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<bbox>(I<index>)
-
-Returns a list of four elements describing the screen area
-of the character given by I<index>.
-The first two elements of the list give the x and y coordinates
-of the upper-left corner of the area occupied by the
-character, and the last two elements give the width and height
-of the area.
-If the character is only partially visible on the screen, then
-the return value reflects just the visible part.
-If the character is not visible on the screen then the return
-value is an empty list.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<clipboardColumnCopy>
-
-Performs a rectangular copy of the currently selected text with
-basic compensation for tab characters.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<clipboardColumnCut>
-
-Performs a rectangular cut of the currently selected text with
-basic compensation for tab characters.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<clipboardColumnPaste>
-
-Performs a rectangular paste of the text in the clipboard. The
-upper-left corner is specified by the current position of the
-insert mark with basic compensation for tab characters.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<compare>(I<index1, op, index2>)
-
-Compares the indices given by I<index1> and I<index2> according
-to the relational operator given by I<op>, and returns 1 if
-the relationship is satisfied and 0 if it isn't.
-I<Op> must be one of the operators E<lt>, E<lt>=, ==, E<gt>=, E<gt>, or !=.
-If I<op> is == then 1 is returned if the two indices refer to
-the same character, if I<op> is E<lt> then 1 is returned if I<index1>
-refers to an earlier character in the text than I<index2>, and
-so on.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<Contents>(I<?args>?)
-
-Query or change the entire contents of the text widget. If no
-arguments are given, the entire contents of the text widget are
-returned. If any arguments are given, the entire contents of the
-text widget are deleted and replaced by the argument list.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<debug>(?I<boolean>?)
-
-If I<boolean> is specified, then it must have one of the true or
-false values accepted by Tcl_GetBoolean.
-If the value is a true one then internal consistency checks will be
-turned on in the B-tree code associated with text widgets.
-If I<boolean> has a false value then the debugging checks will
-be turned off.
-In either case the command returns an empty string.
-If I<boolean> is not specified then the command returns B<on>
-or B<off> to indicate whether or not debugging is turned on.
-There is a single debugging switch shared by all text widgets:  turning
-debugging on or off in any widget turns it on or off for all widgets.
-For widgets with large amounts of text, the consistency checks may
-cause a noticeable slow-down.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<delete>(I<index1, >?I<index2>?)
-
-Delete a range of characters from the text.
-If both I<index1> and I<index2> are specified, then delete
-all the characters starting with the one given by I<index1>
-and stopping just before I<index2> (i.e. the character at
-I<index2> is not deleted).
-If I<index2> doesn't specify a position later in the text
-than I<index1> then no characters are deleted.
-If I<index2> isn't specified then the single character at
-I<index1> is deleted.
-It is not allowable to delete characters in a way that would leave
-the text without a newline as the last character.
-The command returns an empty string.
-If more indices are given, multiple ranges of text will
-be deleted.  All indices are first checked for  validity  before
-any deletions are made.  They are sorted and the text is removed
-from the last range to the first range to deleted text does  not
-cause  a  undesired  index  shifting  side-effects.  If multiple
-ranges with the same start index are  given,  then  the  longest
-range  is used.  If overlapping ranges are given, then they will
-be merged into spans that do not cause deletion of text  outside
-the given ranges due to text shifted during deletion.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<deleteSelected>
-
-Delete the currently selected text.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<deleteTextTaggedWith>(I<tag>)
-
-Delete the text tagged with the I<tag> parameter.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<deleteToEndofLine>
-
-Delete from the insert mark location to the end of line.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<dlineinfo>(I<index>)
-
-Returns a list with five elements describing the area occupied
-by the display line containing I<index>.
-The first two elements of the list give the x and y coordinates
-of the upper-left corner of the area occupied by the
-line, the third and fourth elements give the width and height
-of the area, and the fifth element gives the position of the baseline
-for the line, measured down from the top of the area.
-All of this information is measured in pixels.
-If the current wrap mode is B<none> and the line extends beyond
-the boundaries of the window,
-the area returned reflects the entire area of the line, including the
-portions that are out of the window.
-If the line is shorter than the full width of the window then the
-area returned reflects just the portion of the line that is occupied
-by characters and embedded windows.
-If the display line containing I<index> is not visible on
-the screen then the return value is an empty list.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<dump>(?I<switches>?, I<index1, >?I<index2>?)
-
-Return the contents of the text widget from I<index1> up to,
-but not including I<index2>,
-including the text and
-information about marks, tags, and embedded windows.
-If I<index2> is not specified, then it defaults to
-one character past I<index1>.  The information is returned
-in the following format:
-
-I<key1 value1 index1 key2 value2 index2> ...
-
-The possible I<key> values are B<text>, B<mark>,
-B<tagon>, B<tagoff>, and I<$text>.  The corresponding
-I<value> is the text, mark name, tag name, or window name.
-The I<index> information is the index of the
-start of the text, the mark, the tag transition, or the window.
-One or more of the following switches (or abbreviations thereof)
-may be specified to control the dump:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-all>
-
-Return information about all elements: text, marks, tags, and windows.
-This is the default.
-
-=item B<-command> =E<gt> I<callback>
-
-Instead of returning the information as the result of the dump operation,
-invoke the I<callback> on each element of the text widget within the range.
-The callback has three arguments appended to it before it is evaluated:
-the I<key>, I<value>, and I<index>.
-
-=item B<-mark>
-
-Include information about marks in the dump results.
-
-=item B<-tag>
-
-Include information about tag transitions in the dump results. Tag information is
-returned as B<tagon> and B<tagoff> elements that indicate the
-begin and end of each range of each tag, respectively.
-
-=item B<-text>
-
-Include information about text in the dump results.  The value is the
-text up to the next element or the end of range indicated by I<index2>.
-A text element does not span newlines.  A multi-line block of text that
-contains no marks or tag transitions will still be dumped as a set
-of text seqments that each end with a newline.  The newline is part
-of the value.
-
-=item B<-window>
-
-=back
-
-Include information about embedded windows in the dump results.
-The value of a window is its Tk pathname, unless the window
-has not been created yet.  (It must have a create script.)
-In this case an empty string is returned, and you must query the
-window by its index position to get more information.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<edit>( I< option, ?arg, arg ...?> );
-
-This  command controls the undo mechanism and the modified flag.
-The exact behavior of the command depends on the option argument
-that follows the edit argument.  The following forms of the command
-are currently supported:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<editModified>( ?boolean? );
-
-If boolean is not specified, returns the modified flag of
-the widget. The insert, delete, edit undo and  edit  redo
-commands  or the user can set or clear the modified flag.
-If boolean is specified, sets the modified  flag  of  the
-widget to boolean.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<editRedo>;
-
-(Not implemented, use B<TextUndo>.)  When the B<-undo> option is true,
-reapplies the last undone edits provided no other edits were done
-since then. Generates an error when the redo stack is empty.  Does
-nothing when the B<-undo> option is false.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<editReset>;
-
-(Not implemented, use B<TextUndo>.) Clears the undo and redo stacks.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<editSeparator>;
-
-(Not implemented, use B<TextUndo>.) Inserts a separator (boundary) on
-the undo stack. Does nothing when the -undo option is false.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<editUndo>;
-
-(Not implemented, use B<TextUndo>.) Undoes the last edit action when
-the -undo option is true.  An edit action is defined as all the insert
-and delete commands that are recorded on the undo stack in between two
-separators. Generates an error when the undo stack is empty.  Does
-nothing when the -undo option is false.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<FindAll>(I<mode, case, pattern>)
-
-Removes any current selections and then performs a global text
-search. All matches are tagged with the B<sel> tag.
-
-I<mode> can be be B<-exact> or B<-regexp>. See the B<search> command
-for more information
-
-I<case> can be B<-nocase> or B<-case>. See the B<search> command
-for more information
-
-I<pattern> is an exact string to match if I<mode> is B<-exact> or a
-regular expression if the match I<mode> is B<-regexp>.
-
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<FindAndReplaceAll>(I<mode, case, find, replace>)
-
-Same as the B<FindAll> method, however additionally substitutes the
-matched text with the characters I<replace>.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<FindAndReplacePopUp>
-
-Creates a find-and-replace popup window if one does not already exist.
-If there is currently selected text, then the 'find' field will be
-'pre-filled' with the selection.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<FindNext>(I<direction, mode, case, pattern>)
-
-Removes any current selections and then performs a forward or reverse
-text search. All matches are tagged with the B<sel> tag. I<direction>
-can be B<-forwards> or B<-backwards>. I<mode, case> and I<pattern> are
-as for the B<FindAll> method.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<FindPopUp>
-
-Creates a find popup, if one does not yet exist. If there is currently
-selected text, then the 'find' field will be 'pre-filled' with the
-selection.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<FindSelectionNext>
-
-Gets the currently selected text and removes all selections. It then
-finds the next exact, case-sensitive string that matches in a forward
-direction and selects the text and makes the new selection visible.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<FindSelectionPrevious>
-
-Gets the currently selected text and removes all selections. It then
-finds the next exact, case-sensitive string that matches in a reverse
-direction and selects the text and makes the new selection visible.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<get>(I<index1, >?I<index2>?)
-
-Return a range of characters from the text.  The return value will be
-all the characters in the text starting with the one whose index is
-I<index1> and ending just before the one whose index is I<index2> (the
-character at I<index2> will not be returned).  If I<index2> is omitted
-then the single character at I<index1> is returned.  If there are no
-characters in the specified range (e.g. I<index1> is past the end of
-the file or I<index2> is less than or equal to I<index1>) then an
-empty string is returned.  If the specified range contains embedded
-windows, no information about them is included in the returned string.
-If multiple index pairs are given, multiple ranges of text will be
-returned in a list.  Invalid ranges will not be represented with empty
-strings in the list.  The ranges are returned in the order passed to
-B<get>.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<getSelected>
-
-Return the currently selected text.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<GetTextTaggedWith>(I<tag>)
-
-Return the text tagged with the I<tag> parameter.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<GotoLineNumber>(I<line_number>)
-
-Set the insert mark to I<line_number> and ensures the line is
-visible.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<GotoLineNumberPopUp>(I<line_number>)
-
-Displays a popup, pre-filling it with selected numeric text
-(if any), or the line number from B<GotoLineNumber> (if any).
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<image>(I<option>, ?I<arg, arg, ...>?)
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<image>I<Option>(?I<arg, arg, ...>?)
-
-This method is used to manipulate embedded images.
-The behavior of the method depends on the I<option> argument
-that follows the B<image> prefix.
-The following forms of the methods are currently supported:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<imageCget>(I<index, option>)
-
-Returns the value of a configuration option for an embedded image.
-I<Index> identifies the embedded image, and I<option>
-specifies a particular configuration option, which must be one of
-the ones listed in L<"EMBEDDED IMAGES">.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<imageConfigure>(I<index, >?I<option, value, ...>?)
-
-Query or modify the configuration options for an embedded image.
-If no I<option> is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for the embedded image at I<index>
-(see L<Tk::options> for information on the format of this list).
-If I<option> is specified with no I<value>, then the command
-returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be
-identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no
-I<option> is specified).
-If one or more I<option-value> pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string.
-See L<"EMBEDDED IMAGES"> for information on the options that
-are supported.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<imageCreate>(I<index, >?I<option, value, ...>?)
-
-This command creates a new image annotation, which will appear
-in the text at the position given by I<index>.
-Any number of I<option-value> pairs may be specified to
-configure the annotation.
-Returns a unique identifier that may be used as an index to refer to
-this image.
-See L<"EMBEDDED IMAGES"> for information on the options that
-are supported, and a description of the identifier returned.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<imageNames>
-
-Returns a list whose elements are the names of all image instances currently
-embedded in $text.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<index>(I<index>)
-
-Returns the position corresponding to I<index> in the form
-I<line.char> where I<line> is the line number and I<char>
-is the character number.
-I<Index> may have any of the forms described under L<"INDICES"> above.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<insert>(I<index, chars, >?I<tagList, chars, tagList, ...>?)
-
-Inserts all of the I<chars> arguments just before the character at
-I<index>.
-If I<index> refers to the end of the text (the character after
-the last newline) then the new text is inserted just before the
-last newline instead.
-If there is a single I<chars> argument and no I<tagList>, then
-the new text will receive any tags that are present on both the
-character before and the character after the insertion point; if a tag
-is present on only one of these characters then it will not be
-applied to the new text.
-If I<tagList> is specified then it consists of a list of
-tag names;  the new characters will receive all of the tags in
-this list and no others, regardless of the tags present around
-the insertion point.
-If multiple I<chars>-I<tagList> argument pairs are present,
-they produce the same effect as if a separate B<insert> widget
-command had been issued for each pair, in order.
-The last I<tagList> argument may be omitted.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<Insert>(I<string>)
-
-Do NOT confuse this with the lower-case B<insert> method.
-Insert I<string> at the point of the insertion cursor. If there is
-a selection in the text, and it covers the point of the insertion
-cursor, then it deletes the selection before inserting.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<InsertKeypress>(I<character>)
-
-Inserts I<character> at the B<insert> mark. If in overstrike mode,
-it firsts deletes the character at the B<insert> mark.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<InsertSelection>
-
-Inserts the current selection at the B<insert> mark.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<insertTab>
-
-Inserts a tab (\t) character at the B<insert> mark.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<mark>(I<option, >?I<arg, arg, ...>?)
-
-This command is used to manipulate marks.  The exact behavior of
-the command depends on the I<option> argument that follows
-the B<mark> argument.  The following forms of the command
-are currently supported:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<markGravity>(I<markName, >?I<direction>?)
-
-If I<direction> is not specified, returns B<left> or B<right>
-to indicate which of its adjacent characters I<markName> is attached
-to.
-If I<direction> is specified, it must be B<left> or B<right>;
-the gravity of I<markName> is set to the given value.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<markNames>
-
-Returns a list whose elements are the names of all the marks that
-are currently set.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<markNext>(I<index>)
-
-Returns the name of the next mark at or after I<index>.
-If I<index> is specified in numerical form, then the search for
-the next mark begins at that index.
-If I<index> is the name of a mark, then the search for
-the next mark begins immediately after that mark.
-This can still return a mark at the same position if
-there are multiple marks at the same index.
-These semantics mean that the B<mark next> operation can be used to
-step through all the marks in a text widget in the same order
-as the mark information returned by the B<dump> operation.
-If a mark has been set to the special B<end> index,
-then it appears to be I<after> B<end> with respect to the B<mark next> operation.
-An empty string is returned if there are no marks after I<index>.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<markPrevious>(I<index>)
-
-Returns the name of the mark at or before I<index>.
-If I<index> is specified in numerical form, then the search for
-the previous mark begins with the character just before that index.
-If I<index> is the name of a mark, then the search for
-the next mark begins immediately before that mark.
-This can still return a mark at the same position if
-there are multiple marks at the same index.
-These semantics mean that the B<mark previous> operation can be used to
-step through all the marks in a text widget in the reverse order
-as the mark information returned by the B<dump> operation.
-An empty string is returned if there are no marks before I<index>.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<markSet>(I<markName, index>)
-
-Sets the mark named I<markName> to a position just before the
-character at I<index>.
-If I<markName> already exists, it is moved from its old position;
-if it doesn't exist, a new mark is created.
-This command returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<markUnset>(I<markName>?, I<markName, markName, ...>?)
-
-Remove the mark corresponding to each of the I<markName> arguments.
-The removed marks will not be usable in indices and will not be
-returned by future calls to ``I<$text>-E<gt>B<markNames>''.
-This command returns an empty string.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<markExists>(I<markname>)
-
-Returns true if I<markname> exists - false otherwise.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<menu>(I<?menu?>)
-
-If I<menu> reference is given as an argument, then the text widget
-menu is adjusted to use this new I<menu>. If the I<menu> argument
-is B<undef>, then this command disables the current text widget menu.
-If the I<menu> argument is omitted altogether, then the current text
-widget menu reference is returned.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<openLine>
-
-Inserts a newline (\n) at the insert mark.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<OverstrikeMode>(I<?boolean?>)
-
-Returns the overstrike mode if I<boolean> is omitted or sets the
-overstrike mode to I<boolean>. True means overstrike mode is enabled.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<PostPopupMenu>(I<x,y>)
-
-Creates a popup menu at the specified (I<x,y>) pixel coordinates. The
-default menu has File, Edit, Search and View menu items which cascade
-to sub-menus for further commands. There is an implicit E<lt>Button-3E<gt>
-binding to this method that posts the menu over the cursor.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<ResetAnchor>
-
-Sets the selection anchor to whichever end is farthest from the index
-argument.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<scan>(I<option>, I<args>) or
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<scan>I<option>(I<args>)
-
-This method is used to implement scanning on texts.  It has
-two forms, depending on I<option>:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<scanMark>(I<x, y>)
-
-Records I<x> and I<y> and the current view in the text window,
-for use in conjunction with later B<scanDragto> method.
-Typically this method is associated with a mouse button press in
-the widget.  It returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<scanDragto>(I<x, y>)
-
-This command computes the difference between its I<x> and I<y>
-arguments and the I<x> and I<y> arguments to the last
-B<scanMark> method for the widget.
-It then adjusts the view by 10 times the difference in coordinates.
-This command is typically associated
-with mouse motion events in the widget, to produce the effect of
-dragging the text at high speed through the window.  The return
-value is an empty string.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<search>(?I<switches>,? I<pattern, index, >?I<stopIndex>?)
-
-Searches the text in I<$text> starting at I<index> for a range
-of characters that matches I<pattern>.
-If a match is found, the index of the first character in the match is
-returned as result;  otherwise an empty string is returned.
-One or more of the following switches (or abbreviations thereof)
-may be specified to control the search:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item B<-forwards>
-
-The search will proceed forward through the text, finding the first
-matching range starting at or after the position given by I<index>.
-This is the default.
-
-=item B<-backwards>
-
-The search will proceed backward through the text, finding the
-matching range closest to I<index> whose first character
-is before I<index>.
-
-=item B<-exact>
-
-Use exact matching:  the characters in the matching range must be
-identical to those in I<pattern>.
-This is the default.
-
-=item B<-regexp>
-
-Treat I<pattern> as a regular expression and match it against
-the text using the rules for regular expressions (see the B<regexp>
-command for details).
-
-=item B<-nocase>
-
-Ignore case differences between the pattern and the text.
-
-=item B<-count>I< varName>
-
-The argument following B<-count> gives the name of a variable;
-if a match is found, the number of characters in the matching
-range will be stored in the variable.
-
-=item B<-hidden>
-
-Find hidden text as well. By default only displayed text is found.
-
-=item B<-->
-
-This switch has no effect except to terminate the list of switches:
-the next argument will be treated as I<pattern> even if it starts
-with B<->.
-
-=back
-
-=back
-
-The matching range must be entirely within a single line of text.
-For regular expression matching the newlines are removed from the ends
-of the lines before matching:  use the B<$> feature in regular
-expressions to match the end of a line.
-For exact matching the newlines are retained.
-If I<stopIndex> is specified, the search stops at that index:
-for forward searches, no match at or after I<stopIndex> will
-be considered;  for backward searches, no match earlier in the
-text than I<stopIndex> will be considered.
-If I<stopIndex> is omitted, the entire text will be searched:
-when the beginning or end of the text is reached, the search
-continues at the other end until the starting location is reached
-again;  if I<stopIndex> is specified, no wrap-around will occur.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<see>(I<index>)
-
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the character given by I<index>
-is completely visible.
-If I<index> is already visible then the command does nothing.
-If I<index> is a short distance out of view, the command
-adjusts the view just enough to make I<index> visible at the
-edge of the window.
-If I<index> is far out of view, then the command centers
-I<index> in the window.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<selectAll>
-
-Selects all the text in the widget.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<selectLine>
-
-Selects the line with the insert mark.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<selectWord>
-
-Selects the word with the insert mark.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<SetCursor>(I<position>)
-
-Moves the insert mark to I<position>.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<tag>(I<option, >?I<arg, arg, ...>?)
-
-This command is used to manipulate tags.  The exact behavior of the
-command depends on the I<option> argument that follows the
-B<tag> argument.  The following forms of the command are currently
-supported:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<tagAdd>(I<tagName, index1, >?I<index2, index1, index2, ...>?)
-
-Associate the tag I<tagName> with all of the characters starting
-with I<index1> and ending just before
-I<index2> (the character at I<index2> isn't tagged).
-A single command may contain any number of I<index1>-I<index2>
-pairs.
-If the last I<index2> is omitted then the single character at
-I<index1> is tagged.
-If there are no characters in the specified range (e.g. I<index1>
-is past the end of the file or I<index2> is less than or equal
-to I<index1>) then the command has no effect.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<tagBind>(I<tagName, >?I<sequence>?, ?I<script>?)
-
-This command associates I<script> with the tag given by
-I<tagName>.
-Whenever the event sequence given by I<sequence> occurs for a
-character that has been tagged with I<tagName>,
-the script will be invoked.
-This method is similar to the B<bind> command except that
-it operates on characters in a text rather than entire widgets.
-See the L<Tk::bind> documentation for complete details
-on the syntax of I<sequence> and the substitutions performed
-on I<script> before invoking it.
-If all arguments are specified then a new binding is created, replacing
-any existing binding for the same I<sequence> and I<tagName>
-(if the first character of I<script> is ``+'' then I<script>
-augments an existing binding rather than replacing it).
-In this case the return value is an empty string.
-If I<script> is omitted then the command returns the I<script>
-associated with I<tagName> and I<sequence> (an error occurs
-if there is no such binding).
-If both I<script> and I<sequence> are omitted then the command
-returns a list of all the sequences for which bindings have been
-defined for I<tagName>.
-
-The only events for which bindings may be specified are those related
-to the mouse and keyboard (such as B<Enter>, B<Leave>,
-B<ButtonPress>, B<Motion>, and B<KeyPress>) or virtual events.
-Event bindings for a text widget use the B<current> mark described
-under L<"MARKS"> above.  An B<Enter> event triggers for a tag when the tag
-first becomes present on the current character, and a B<Leave> event
-triggers for a tag when it ceases to be present on the current character.
-B<Enter> and B<Leave> events can happen either because the
-B<current> mark moved or because the character at that position
-changed.  Note that these events are different than B<Enter> and
-B<Leave> events for windows.  Mouse and keyboard events are directed
-to the current character.  If a virtual event is used in a binding, that
-binding can trigger only if the virtual event is defined by an underlying
-mouse-related or keyboard-related event.
-
-It is possible for the current character to have multiple tags,
-and for each of them to have a binding for a particular event
-sequence.
-When this occurs, one binding is invoked for each tag, in order
-from lowest-priority to highest priority.
-If there are multiple matching bindings for a single tag, then
-the most specific binding is chosen (see the the documentation for
-the B<bind> command for details).
-B<continue> and B<break> commands within binding scripts
-are processed in the same way as for bindings created with
-the B<bind> command.
-
-If bindings are created for the widget as a whole using the
-B<bind> command, then those bindings will supplement the
-tag bindings.
-The tag bindings will be invoked first, followed by bindings
-for the window as a whole.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<tagCget>(I<tagName, option>)
-
-This command returns the current value of the option named I<option>
-associated with the tag given by I<tagName>.
-I<Option> may have any of the values accepted by the B<tag configure>
-method.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<tagConfigure>(I<tagName, >?I<option>?, ?I<value>?, ?I<option, value, ...>?)
-
-This command is similar to the B<configure> method except
-that it modifies options associated with the tag given by I<tagName>
-instead of modifying options for the overall text widget.
-If no I<option> is specified, the command returns a list describing
-all of the available options for I<tagName>
-(see L<Tk::options> for information on the format of this list).
-If I<option> is specified with no I<value>, then the command returns
-a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to
-the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no I<option>
-is specified).
-If one or more I<option-value> pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given option(s) to have the given value(s) in I<tagName>;
-in this case the command returns an empty string.
-See L<"TAGS"> above for details on the options available for tags.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<tagDelete>(I<tagName, >?I<tagName, ...>?)
-
-Deletes all tag information for each of the I<tagName>
-arguments.
-The command removes the tags from all characters in the file
-and also deletes any other information associated with the tags,
-such as bindings and display information.
-The command returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<tagLower>(I<tagName>?, I<belowThis>?)
-
-Changes the priority of tag I<tagName> so that it is just lower
-in priority than the tag whose name is I<belowThis>.
-If I<belowThis> is omitted, then I<tagName>'s priority
-is changed to make it lowest priority of all tags.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<tagNames>(?I<index>?)
-
-Returns a list whose elements are the names of all the tags that
-are active at the character position given by I<index>.
-If I<index> is omitted, then the return value will describe
-all of the tags that exist for the text (this includes all tags
-that have been named in a ``I<$text>-E<gt>B<tag>'' widget
-command but haven't been deleted by a ``I<$text>-E<gt>B<tagDelete>''
-method, even if no characters are currently marked with
-the tag).
-The list will be sorted in order from lowest priority to highest
-priority.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<tagNextrange>(I<tagName, index1, >?I<index2>?)
-
-This command searches the text for a range of characters tagged
-with I<tagName> where the first character of the range is
-no earlier than the character at I<index1> and no later than
-the character just before I<index2> (a range starting at
-I<index2> will not be considered).
-If several matching ranges exist, the first one is chosen.
-The command's return value is a list containing
-two elements, which are the index of the first character of the
-range and the index of the character just after the last one in
-the range.
-If no matching range is found then the return value is an
-empty string.
-If I<index2> is not given then it defaults to the end of the text.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<tagPrevrange>(I<tagName, index1, >?I<index2>?)
-
-This command searches the text for a range of characters tagged
-with I<tagName> where the first character of the range is
-before the character at I<index1> and no earlier than
-the character at I<index2> (a range starting at
-I<index2> will be considered).
-If several matching ranges exist, the one closest to I<index1> is chosen.
-The command's return value is a list containing
-two elements, which are the index of the first character of the
-range and the index of the character just after the last one in
-the range.
-If no matching range is found then the return value is an
-empty string.
-If I<index2> is not given then it defaults to the beginning of the text.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<tagRaise>(I<tagName, >?I<aboveThis>?)
-
-Changes the priority of tag I<tagName> so that it is just higher
-in priority than the tag whose name is I<aboveThis>.
-If I<aboveThis> is omitted, then I<tagName>'s priority
-is changed to make it highest priority of all tags.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<tagRanges>(I<tagName>)
-
-Returns a list describing all of the ranges of text that have been
-tagged with I<tagName>.
-The first two elements of the list describe the first tagged range
-in the text, the next two elements describe the second range, and
-so on.
-The first element of each pair contains the index of the first
-character of the range, and the second element of the pair contains
-the index of the character just after the last one in the
-range.
-If there are no characters tagged with I<tag> then an
-empty string is returned.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<tagRemove>(I<tagName, index1, >?I<index2, index1, index2, ...>?)
-
-Remove the tag I<tagName> from all of the characters starting
-at I<index1> and ending just before
-I<index2> (the character at I<index2> isn't affected).
-A single command may contain any number of I<index1>-I<index2>
-pairs.
-If the last I<index2> is omitted then the single character at
-I<index1> is tagged.
-If there are no characters in the specified range (e.g. I<index1>
-is past the end of the file or I<index2> is less than or equal
-to I<index1>) then the command has no effect.
-This command returns an empty string.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<ToggleInsertMode>
-
-Toggles the current overstrike mode.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<unselectAll>
-
-Unselects all the text in the widget.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<WhatLineNumberPopup>
-
-Creates a popup that displays the current line number of the
-insert mark.
-
-=item I<$text>->B<widget>(I<option?, arg, arg, ...>?)
-
-=item I<$text>->B<widget>I<Option>(?I<arg, arg, ...>?)
-
-This method is used to manipulate embedded windows.
-The behavior of the method depends on the I<option> argument
-that follows the B<window> argument.
-The following forms of the method are currently supported:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$text>->B<windowCget>(I<index, option>)
-
-Returns the value of a configuration option for an embedded window.
-I<Index> identifies the embedded window, and I<option>
-specifies a particular configuration option, which must be one of
-the ones listed in L<"EMBEDDED WINDOWS"> above.
-
-=item I<$text>->B<windowConfigure>(I<index>?, I<option, value, ...>?)
-
-Query or modify the configuration options for an embedded window.
-If no I<option> is specified, returns a list describing all of
-the available options for the embedded window at I<index>
-(see L<Tk::options> for information on the format of this list).
-If I<option> is specified with no I<value>, then the command
-returns a list describing the one named option (this list will be
-identical to the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no
-I<option> is specified).
-If one or more I<option-value> pairs are specified, then the command
-modifies the given option(s) to have the given value(s);  in
-this case the command returns an empty string.
-See L<"EMBEDDED WINDOWS"> above for information on the options that
-are supported.
-
-=item I<$text>->B<windowCreate>(I<index>?, I<option, value, ...>?)
-
-This command creates a new window annotation, which will appear
-in the text at the position given by I<index>.
-Any number of I<option-value> pairs may be specified to
-configure the annotation.
-See L<"EMBEDDED WINDOWS"> above for information on the options that
-are supported.
-Returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$text>->B<windowNames>
-
-Returns a list whose elements are the names of all windows currently
-embedded in $text.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$text>->B<xview>(I<option, args>)
-
-This command is used to query and change the horizontal position of the
-text in the widget's window.  It can take any of the following
-forms:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$text>->B<xview>
-
-Returns a list containing two elements.
-Each element is a real fraction between 0 and 1;  together they describe
-the portion of the document's horizontal span that is visible in
-the window.
-For example, if the first element is .2 and the second element is .6,
-20% of the text is off-screen to the left, the middle 40% is visible
-in the window, and 40% of the text is off-screen to the right.
-The fractions refer only to the lines that are actually visible in the
-window:  if the lines in the window are all very short, so that they
-are entirely visible, the returned fractions will be 0 and 1,
-even if there are other lines in the text that are
-much wider than the window.
-These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the B<-xscrollcommand>
-option.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<xviewMoveto>(I<fraction>)
-
-Adjusts the view in the window so that I<fraction> of the horizontal
-span of the text is off-screen to the left.
-I<Fraction> is a fraction between 0 and 1.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<xviewScroll>(I<number, what>)
-
-This command shifts the view in the window left or right according to
-I<number> and I<what>.
-I<Number> must be an integer.
-I<What> must be either B<units> or B<pages> or an abbreviation
-of one of these.
-If I<what> is B<units>, the view adjusts left or right by
-I<number> average-width characters on the display;  if it is
-B<pages> then the view adjusts by I<number> screenfuls.
-If I<number> is negative then characters farther to the left
-become visible;  if it is positive then characters farther to the right
-become visible.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<yview>(I<?args>?)
-
-This command is used to query and change the vertical position of the
-text in the widget's window.
-It can take any of the following forms:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<yview>
-
-Returns a list containing two elements, both of which are real fractions
-between 0 and 1.
-The first element gives the position of the first character in the
-top line in the window, relative to the text as a whole (0.5 means
-it is halfway through the text, for example).
-The second element gives the position of the character just after
-the last one in the bottom line of the window,
-relative to the text as a whole.
-These are the same values passed to scrollbars via the B<-yscrollcommand>
-option.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<yviewMoveto>(I<fraction>)
-
-Adjusts the view in the window so that the character given by I<fraction>
-appears on the top line of the window.
-I<Fraction> is a fraction between 0 and 1;  0 indicates the first
-character in the text, 0.33 indicates the character one-third the
-way through the text, and so on.
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<yviewScroll>(I<number, what>)
-
-This command adjust the view in the window up or down according to
-I<number> and I<what>.
-I<Number> must be an integer.
-I<What> must be either B<units> or B<pages>.
-If I<what> is B<units>, the view adjusts up or down by
-I<number> lines on the display;  if it is B<pages> then
-the view adjusts by I<number> screenfuls.
-If I<number> is negative then earlier positions in the text
-become visible;  if it is positive then later positions in the text
-become visible.
-
-=item I<$text>->B<yview>(?B<-pickplace>,? I<index>)
-
-Changes the view in the I<$text>'s window to make I<index> visible.
-If the B<-pickplace> option isn't specified then I<index> will
-appear at the top of the window.
-If B<-pickplace> is specified then the widget chooses where
-I<index> appears in the window:
-
-=over 12
-
-=item [1]
-
-If I<index> is already visible somewhere in the window then the
-command does nothing.
-
-=item [2]
-
-If I<index> is only a few lines off-screen above the window then
-it will be positioned at the top of the window.
-
-=item [3]
-
-If I<index> is only a few lines off-screen below the window then
-it will be positioned at the bottom of the window.
-
-=item [4]
-
-Otherwise, I<index> will be centered in the window.
-
-=back
-
-=back
-
-=back
-
-The B<-pickplace> option has been obsoleted by the B<see> widget
-command (B<see> handles both x- and y-motion to make a location
-visible, whereas B<-pickplace> only handles motion in y).
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$text>-E<gt>B<yview>(I<number>)
-
-This command makes the first character on the line after
-the one given by I<number> visible at the top of the window.
-I<Number> must be an integer.
-This command used to be used for scrolling, but now it is obsolete.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 BINDINGS
-
-Tk automatically creates class bindings for texts that give them
-the following default behavior.
-In the descriptions below, ``word'' refers to a contiguous group
-of letters, digits, or ``_'' characters, or any single character
-other than these.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item [1]
-
-Clicking mouse button 1 positions the insertion cursor
-just before the character underneath the mouse cursor, sets the
-input focus to this widget, and clears any selection in the widget.
-Dragging with mouse button 1 strokes out a selection between
-the insertion cursor and the character under the mouse.
-
-=item [2]
-
-Double-clicking with mouse button 1 selects the word under the mouse
-and positions the insertion cursor at the beginning of the word.
-Dragging after a double click will stroke out a selection consisting
-of whole words.
-
-=item [3]
-
-Triple-clicking with mouse button 1 selects the line under the mouse
-and positions the insertion cursor at the beginning of the line.
-Dragging after a triple click will stroke out a selection consisting
-of whole lines.
-
-=item [4]
-
-The ends of the selection can be adjusted by dragging with mouse
-button 1 while the Shift key is down;  this will adjust the end
-of the selection that was nearest to the mouse cursor when button
-1 was pressed.
-If the button is double-clicked before dragging then the selection
-will be adjusted in units of whole words;  if it is triple-clicked
-then the selection will be adjusted in units of whole lines.
-
-=item [5]
-
-Clicking mouse button 1 with the Control key down will reposition the
-insertion cursor without affecting the selection.
-
-=item [6]
-
-If any normal printing characters are typed, they are
-inserted at the point of the insertion cursor.
-
-=item [7]
-
-The view in the widget can be adjusted by dragging with mouse button 2.
-If mouse button 2 is clicked without moving the mouse, the selection
-is copied into the text at the position of the mouse cursor.
-The Insert key also inserts the selection, but at the position of
-the insertion cursor.
-
-=item [8]
-
-If the mouse is dragged out of the widget
-while button 1 is pressed, the entry will automatically scroll to
-make more text visible (if there is more text off-screen on the side
-where the mouse left the window).
-
-=item [9]
-
-The Left and Right keys move the insertion cursor one character to the
-left or right;  they also clear any selection in the text.
-If Left or Right is typed with the Shift key down, then the insertion
-cursor moves and the selection is extended to include the new character.
-Control-Left and Control-Right move the insertion cursor by words, and
-Control-Shift-Left and Control-Shift-Right move the insertion cursor
-by words and also extend the selection.
-Control-b and Control-f behave the same as Left and Right, respectively.
-Meta-b and Meta-f behave the same as Control-Left and Control-Right,
-respectively.
-
-=item [10]
-
-The Up and Down keys move the insertion cursor one line up or
-down and clear any selection in the text.
-If Up or Right is typed with the Shift key down, then the insertion
-cursor moves and the selection is extended to include the new character.
-Control-Up and Control-Down move the insertion cursor by paragraphs (groups
-of lines separated by blank lines), and
-Control-Shift-Up and Control-Shift-Down move the insertion cursor
-by paragraphs and also extend the selection.
-Control-p and Control-n behave the same as Up and Down, respectively.
-
-=item [11]
-
-The Next and Prior keys move the insertion cursor forward or backwards
-by one screenful and clear any selection in the text.
-If the Shift key is held down while Next or Prior is typed, then
-the selection is extended to include the new character.
-Control-v moves the view down one screenful without moving the
-insertion cursor or adjusting the selection.
-
-=item [12]
-
-Control-Next and Control-Prior scroll the view right or left by one page
-without moving the insertion cursor or affecting the selection.
-
-=item [13]
-
-Home and Control-a move the insertion cursor to the
-beginning of its line and clear any selection in the widget.
-Shift-Home moves the insertion cursor to the beginning of the line
-and also extends the selection to that point.
-
-=item [14]
-
-End and Control-e move the insertion cursor to the
-end of the line and clear any selection in the widget.
-Shift-End moves the cursor to the end of the line and extends the selection
-to that point.
-
-=item [15]
-
-Control-Home and Meta-E<lt> move the insertion cursor to the beginning of
-the text and clear any selection in the widget.
-Control-Shift-Home moves the insertion cursor to the beginning of the text
-and also extends the selection to that point.
-
-=item [16]
-
-Control-End and Meta-E<gt> move the insertion cursor to the end of the
-text and clear any selection in the widget.
-Control-Shift-End moves the cursor to the end of the text and extends
-the selection to that point.
-
-=item [17]
-
-The Select key and Control-Space set the selection anchor to the position
-of the insertion cursor.  They don't affect the current selection.
-Shift-Select and Control-Shift-Space adjust the selection to the
-current position of the insertion cursor, selecting from the anchor
-to the insertion cursor if there was not any selection previously.
-
-=item [18]
-
-Control-/ selects the entire contents of the widget.
-
-=item [19]
-
-Control-\ clears any selection in the widget.
-
-=item [20]
-
-The F16 key (labelled Copy on many Sun workstations) or Meta-w
-copies the selection in the widget to the clipboard, if there is a selection.
-
-=item [21]
-
-The F20 key (labelled Cut on many Sun workstations) or Control-w
-copies the selection in the widget to the clipboard and deletes
-the selection.
-If there is no selection in the widget then these keys have no effect.
-
-=item [22]
-
-The F18 key (labelled Paste on many Sun workstations) or Control-y
-inserts the contents of the clipboard at the position of the
-insertion cursor.
-
-=item [23]
-
-The Delete key deletes the selection, if there is one in the widget.
-If there is no selection, it deletes the character to the right of
-the insertion cursor.
-
-=item [24]
-
-Backspace and Control-h delete the selection, if there is one
-in the widget.
-If there is no selection, they delete the character to the left of
-the insertion cursor.
-
-=item [25]
-
-Control-d deletes the character to the right of the insertion cursor.
-
-=item [26]
-
-Meta-d deletes the word to the right of the insertion cursor.
-
-=item [27]
-
-Control-k deletes from the insertion cursor to the end of its line;
-if the insertion cursor is already at the end of a line, then
-Control-k deletes the newline character.
-
-=item [28]
-
-Control-o opens a new line by inserting a newline character in
-front of the insertion cursor without moving the insertion cursor.
-
-=item [29]
-
-Meta-backspace and Meta-Delete delete the word to the left of the
-insertion cursor.
-
-=item [30]
-
-Control-x deletes whatever is selected in the text widget.
-
-=item [31]
-
-Control-t reverses the order of the two characters to the right of
-the insertion cursor.
-
-=item [32]
-
-Control-z (and Control-underscore on UNIX when tk_strictMotif is
-true)  undoes  the last edit action if the -undo option is true.
-Does nothing otherwise.
-
-=item [33]
-
-Control-Z (or Control-y on Windows) reapplies the last undone edit
-action if the -undo option is true. Does nothing otherwise.
-
-=back
-
-If the widget is disabled using the B<-state> option, then its
-view can still be adjusted and text can still be selected,
-but no insertion cursor will be displayed and no text modifications will
-take place.
-
-The behavior of texts can be changed by defining new bindings for
-individual widgets or by redefining the class bindings.
-
-
-=head1 TIED INTERFACE
-
-The Perl/Tk Text widget also has built-in TIEHANDLE methods for
-B<print> and B<printf> statements. This means you can print to file
-handles tied to a Text widget, and the tied methods automatically
-insert the print statement's arguments into the Text widget.
-
-For example:
-
- #!/usr/local/bin/perl -w
- use POSIX 'acos';
- use Tk;
- use strict;
-
- my $mw = MainWindow->new;
- my $text = $mw->Text(qw/-width 40 -height 10/)->pack;
-
- tie *STDOUT, ref $text, $text;
-
- print "Hello Text World!\n";
- printf "pi ~= %1.5f", acos(-1.0);
-
- MainLoop;
-
-To tie a scrolled Text widget, use the Subwidget method to get to the
-E<quot>realE<quot> widget:
-
- my $text = $mw->Scrolled('Text')->pack;
- tie *STDOUT, 'Tk::Text', $text->Subwidget('scrolled');
-
-=head1 PERFORMANCE ISSUES
-
-Text widgets should run efficiently under a variety
-of conditions.  The text widget uses about 2-3 bytes of
-main memory for each byte of text, so texts containing a megabyte
-or more should be practical on most workstations.
-Text is represented internally with a modified B-tree structure
-that makes operations relatively efficient even with large texts.
-Tags are included in the B-tree structure in a way that allows
-tags to span large ranges or have many disjoint smaller ranges
-without loss of efficiency.
-Marks are also implemented in a way that allows large numbers of
-marks.
-In most cases it is fine to have large numbers of unique tags,
-or a tag that has many distinct ranges.
-
-One performance problem can arise if you have hundreds or thousands
-of different tags that all have the following characteristics:
-the first and last ranges of each tag are near the beginning and
-end of the text, respectively,
-or a single tag range covers most of the text widget.
-The cost of adding and deleting tags like this is proportional
-to the number of other tags with the same properties.
-In contrast, there is no problem with having thousands of distinct
-tags if their overall ranges are localized and spread uniformly throughout
-the text.
-
-Very long text lines can be expensive,
-especially if they have many marks and tags within them.
-
-The display line with the insert cursor is redrawn each time the
-cursor blinks, which causes a steady stream of graphics traffic.
-Set the B<-insertofftime> option to 0 avoid this.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::ROText|Tk::ROText>
-L<Tk::TextUndo|Tk::TextUndo>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-text, widget
-
-=cut
-
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/TextUndo.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/TextUndo.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 2b9d98a3c4a..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/TextUndo.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::TextUndo - perl/tk text widget with bindings to undo changes.
-
-=for pm Tk/TextUndo.pm
-
-=for category Derived Widgets
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >B<use Tk::TextUndo;>
-
-S<    >I<$testundo> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<TextUndo>(?I<-option>=E<gt>I<value>, ...?);
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-This IS-A text widget with an unlimited 'undo' history but without
-a re'undo' capability.
-
-=head2 Bindings
-
-The C<TextUndo> widget has the same bindings as the L<Text|Tk::Text> widget.
-In addition there are the following bindings:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Event <L4> <<Undo>>
-
-undo the last change.  Pressing <L4> several times undo
-step by step the changes made to the text widget.
-
-=back
-
-=head2 Methods
-
-The C<TextUndo> widget has the same methods as C<Text> widget.
-Additional methods for the C<TextUndo> widget are:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item $text->Load($filename);
-
-Loads the contents of the $filename into the text widget. Load()
-delete the previous contents of the text widget as well as it's
-undo history of the previous file.
-
-=item $text->Save(?$otherfilename?)
-
-Save contents of the text widget to a file. If the
-$otherfilename is not specified, the text widget contents
-writes the file of $filename used in the last Load()
-call.  If no file was previously Load()'ed an error message
-pops up.  The default filename of the last Load() call
-is not overwriten by $otherfilename.
-
-=item $text->FileName(?$otherfilename?)
-
-If passed an argument sets the file name associated with the loaded
-document. Returns the current file name associated with the document.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 KEYS
-
-widget, text, undo
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::Text>, L<Tk::ROText>
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Tiler.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Tiler.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 2db172ebaf1..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Tiler.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Tiler - Scrollable frame with sub-widgets arranged into rows
-
-=for pm Tk/Tiler.pm
-
-=for category Tk Geometry Management
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-  use Tk::Tiler;
-
-  my $tl = $parent->Scrolled('Tiler', -columns => n, -rows => n);
-
-  my $a  = $tl->Xxxxx(...);
-  my $b  = $tl->Xxxxx(...);
-  my $c  = $tl->Xxxxx(...);
-
-  $tl->Manage($a,$b,$c);
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-Tiler is derived form Tk::Frame. It is a geometry managing widget which
-accepts widgets to manage. It places the widgets in a grid with as many
-widgets as possible in a row. All the "slots" in the grid are the same size,
-which is determined by the largest managed widget.
-
-The grid may be scrolled vertically.
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/TixGrid.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/TixGrid.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 93484db0076..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/TixGrid.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,539 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1996, Expert Interface Technologies
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and
-#  redistribution of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#  The file man.macros and some of the macros used by this file are
-#  copyrighted: (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-#               (c) 1994-1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  The license terms of the Tcl/Tk distribution are in the file
-#  license.tcl.
-
-## TO CHECK:
-##
-## callback:  checked for defined of code ref (compare -edit*cmd)
-##
-## option
-##	formatcmd  mentions format method but there is no format
-##		   method documented
-##
-## methods:
-## 	bdtype:    what is it? no description given
-##	see:	   not documented? Not implemented??
-##
-## todo:	missing peaces marked by ????
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::TixGrid - Create and manipulate Tix Grid widgets
-
-=for pm TixGrid/TixGrid.pm
-
-=for category Tix Extensions
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >I<$tixgrid> = I<$parent>->B<TixGrid>?(I<options>)?;
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-This widget is intended as the basis of "spread sheet" like interfaces.
-The widget displays its contents in a two dimensional "grid" of cells.
-Each cell may contain one Tix display item, which may be in text,
-graphics or other formats. See L<Tk::DItem> for more information
-about Tix display items. Because these "items" need not be "windows" large
-grids can be handled  without consuming excessive display system resources.
-
-Individual cells, or groups of cells, can be formatted with a wide range of
-attributes, such as its color, relief and border. However because the
-widget is intended to handle large grids the mechanisms to achieve these
-are lower level, and more callback oriented than for other widgets. The
-assumption is that to avoid storing display details of a large number
-of cells, the data will be re-computed as needed.
-
-The port of Tix C code and some of the bindings to perl/Tk is done but still
-need further work. In several places the intent of the Tix code is not
-yet understood. For example the 'edit' interface is clearly intended
-for spread-sheet like cell content editing in an auxillary "entry" widget
-or similar, but how that should work is not yet clear.
-
-The B<TixGrid> method creates a new TixGrid window and returns a
-blessed reference of this TixGrid widget.  Additional options,
-described below, may be specified on the command line or in the
-option database to configure aspects of the B<TixGrid> widget.
-
-=head1 STANDARD OPTIONS
-
-B<-background>
-	B<-borderwidth>
-	B<-cursor>
-	B<-font>
-	B<-foreground>
-	B<-height>
-	B<-highlightbackground>
-	B<-highlightcolor>
-	B<-highlightthickness>
-	B<-padx>
-	B<-pady>
-	B<-relief>
-	B<-selectbackground>
-	B<-selectborderwidth>
-	B<-selectforeground>
-	B<-state>
-	B<-takefocus>
-	B<-width>
-	B<-xscrollcommand>
-	B<-yscrollcommand>
-
-See L<Tk::options> for details of the standard options.
-
-=head1 WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Name:	B<browseCmd>
-
-=item Class:	B<BrowseCmd>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-browsecmd>
-
-If defined, gives a perl/Tk L<callback|Tk::callbacks> to be executed when the
-user browses a grid cell (This is normally the case when the user clicks on an
-entry).  When this callback is called, it is passed with two additional
-parameters: I<x> I<y>, where (I<x>,I<y>) is the location of the cell that has
-just been clicked.
-
-=item Name:	B<Command>
-
-=item Class:	B<Command>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-command>
-
-If defined, gives a perl/Tk L<callback|Tk::callbacks> to be executed when the
-user double-clicks a grid cell.  When this callback is called, it is passed
-with two additional parameters: I<x> I<y>, where (I<x>,I<y>) is the location of
-the cell that has just been clicked.
-
-=item Name:	B<editDoneCmd>
-
-=item Class:	B<EditDoneCmd>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-editdonecmd>
-
-If defined, gives a perl/Tk L<callback|Tk::callbacks>
-to be executed when the
-user has edited grid cell. When this callback is called, it is
-passed with two additional parameters: I<x> I<y>, where (I<x>,I<y>)
-is the location of the cell that has just been edited.
-
-=item Name:	B<editNotifyCmd>
-
-=item Class:	B<EditNotifyCmd>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-editnotifycmd>
-
-If defined gives a perl/Tk L<callback|Tk::callbacks>
-to be executed when the user tries to edit a grid cell.
-When this callback is called, it is passed with two additional
-parameters: I<x> I<y>, where (I<x>,I<y>,) is the location
-of the cell. This callback should return a boolean value: B<true>
-indicates that the cell is editable and B<false> otherwise.
-
-=item Name:	B<FloatingCols>
-
-=item Class:	B<floatingCols>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-floatingcols>
-
-Defines the number of extra columns beyond the existing grid
-that can be brought into view by scrolling.
-
-=item Name:	B<FloatingRows>
-
-=item Class:	B<floatingRows>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-floatingrows>
-
-Defines the number of extra rows beyond the the existing grid
-that can be brought into view by scrolling.
-
-=item Name:	B<formatCmd>
-
-=item Class:	B<FormatCmd>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-formatcmd>
-
-If defined, gives a perl/Tk L<callback|Tk::callbacks> to be
-executed when the grid cells need to be displayed on the screen.
-Its primary purpose is to draw the background of the region
-before the cells are rendered on top. This is normally
-achieved by calling B<formatGrid> or B<formatBorder> (see below).
-However other uses can  be made of this low-level callback. For example it can be used
-to "lazily" populate the grid by calling the B<set> method only as cells come
-into view.
-
-When this callback is called, it is passed with five additional
-parameters: I<type> I<x1> I<y1> I<x2> I<y2>.
-
-I<x1> I<y1> I<x2> I<y2> gives the extent of the region that needs
-formatting.
-
-I<type> gives the logical type of the region in the grid. It may be one of the
-following.
-
-=over 8
-
-=item B<x_margin>
-
-The horizontal margin.
-
-=item B<y_margin>
-
-The vertical margin.
-
-=item B<s_margin>
-
-The area in the top left corner where the horizontal and vertical margins
-are joined.
-
-=item B<main>
-
-The main body i.e. all the cells that do not fall into the above three types.
-
-=back
-
-=item Name:	B<leftMargin>
-
-=item Class:	B<LeftMargin>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-leftmargin>
-
-Gives the width of vertical margin in cells (columns).
-A zero indicates that no vertical margin exists. A positive value I<N>
-indicates that first I<N> columns are "labels" and are always displayed
-and not scrolled.
-
-=item Name:	B<itemType>
-
-=item Class:	B<ItemType>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-itemtype>
-
-Default item type for cells.
-
-=item Name:	B<selectMode>
-
-=item Class:	B<SelectMode>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-selectmode>
-
-Specifies one of several styles for manipulating the selection.
-The value of the option may be arbitrary, but the default bindings
-expect it to be either B<single>, B<browse>, B<multiple>, or B<extended>;
-the default value is B<single>.
-
-=item Name:	B<selectUnit>
-
-=item Class:	B<SelectUnit>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-selectunit>
-
-Specifies the selection unit. Valid values are B<cell>, B<column> or B<row>.
-
-=item Name:	B<sizeCmd>
-
-=item Class:	B<SizeCmd>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-sizecmd>
-
-Callback is called (with no extra arguments) when grid sizes are
-re-computed. For example if window changes size, a different font
-is specified etc.
-
-It is called just after scrollbars (if present) are updated.
-
-=item Name:	B<topMargin>
-
-=item Class:	B<TopMargin>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-topmargin>
-
-Gives the width of horizontal margin in cells (rows).
-A zero indicates that no horizontal margin exists. A positive value
-I<N> indicates that first I<N> rows are "labels" and are always
-displayed and not scrolled.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 WIDGET METHODS
-
-The B<TixGrid> method creates a TixGrid widget and returns a blessed
-reference of this TixGrid widget.  This reference may be used to
-invoke various operations on the widget.  It has the following general
-form:
-
-S<    >I<$tixgrid>->B<method>?(I<arg, arg, ...>)?
-
-I<arg>s determine the exact behavior of the method.
-
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-The widget also inherits all the methods provided by the generic
-L<Tk::Widget|Tk::Widget> class.
-
-The following additional methods are possible for B<TixGrid> widgets:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<anchorGet>(I<x>, I<y>)
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<anchorSet>(I<x>, I<y>)
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<anchorClear>
-
-Manipulates the B<anchor cell> of the B<TixGrid> widget.
-The anchor cell is the end of the selection that is fixed
-while the user is dragging out a selection with the mouse.
-
-=item ($bd,$col,$row) = I<$tixgrid>->B<bdtype>(I<x,y> ?,I<xDelta>,I<yDelta>?)
-
-Determines if the the screen (pixel) position I<x,y> is in a border.
-This is useful for changing the mouse cursor when the user points at a
-border - e.g. to indicate that the border can be adjusted
-interactively.
-
-If in a border returns a list of three elements. First element
-is 'xy', 'x' or 'y', second two elements are integers.
-(Value of these are not understood, seem to indicate which
-column and row of the border the screen position corresponds to?)
-
-If not in a border returns an empty list.
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<delete>(I<dim>, I<from>?, I<to>?)
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<deleteColumn>(I<from>?, I<to>?)
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<deleteRow>(I<from>?, I<to>?)
-
-I<Dim> may be B<row> or B<column>. If I<to> is not given,
-deletes a single row (or column) at the position I<from>.
-If I<to> is given, deletes the range of rows (or columns)
-from position I<from> through I<to>.
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<dragsite>(I<option>, I<x>, I<y>)
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<dropsite>(I<option>, I<x>, I<y>)
-
-Tcl/Tix has (or was going to have) Drag&Drop support.
-Meaning for perl/Tk is not clear yet.
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<editApply>
-
-If any cell is being edited, de-highlight the cell and
-applies the changes.
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<editSet>(I<x>, I<y>)
-
-Highlights the cell at (I<x>,I<y>) for editing,
-if the B<-editnotify> callback returns true for this cell.
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<entrycget>(I<x>, I<y>, 'I<-option>')
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<entryconfigure>(I<x>, I<y>?, I<-option>??=>I<value>, I<-option>=>I<value>, I<...>?)
-
-Provide a configue interface to cells in the grid.
-The I<-option>s depend on the item type of the cell.
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<formatBorder>(I<x1,y1>, I<x2,y2>, I<options>);
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<formatGrid>(I<x1,y1>, I<x2,y2>, I<options>);
-
-The B<formatBorder> and B<formatBorder> methods can only be called by the
-B<-formatcmd> callback of the tixGrid widget. They draw the background of
-the region described by I<x1,y1>, I<x2,y2> according the the supplied
-I<options>. One call to B<-formatcmd> callback can make multiple
-calls to B<formatBorder> and/or B<formatBorder> for different
-sub-regions.
-
-B<formatBorder> draws the background using Tk relief style,
-B<formatGrid> also draws grid lines between the cells.
-It only makes sense to call one or the other for a particular
-sub-region as one will over-write the other.
-
-The options allowed are:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item -background / -bg
-
-=item -borderwidth / -bd
-
-=item -filled
-
-=item -relief
-
-=item -selectbackground
-
-=item -xoff
-
-=item -xon
-
-=item -yoff
-
-=item -yon
-
-=back
-
-The B<-xon/-xoff and -yon/-yoff> options are obscure. If anyone
-can figure out how to do something interesting given what
-F<pTk/tixGrFmt.c> is doing with them please let Nick know!.
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<geometryinfo>(?I<width>, I<height>?)
-
-Returns list of four values - two sets of two floating point numbers.
-First set is the scrollbar fractions for x direction, second set
-is scrollbar fractions for y direction. If I<width> and I<height>
-are specified then fractions are based on as if window size was of
-specified size (in pixels, but not allowing normal GetPixels units).
-Otherwise fractions are based on current size of the window.
-
-Usage obscure.
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<index>(I<xcoord>, I<ycoord>)
-
-Retuns I<(x, y)> of entry at position (I<$coordx>, I<$coordy>).
-Either coordinate may be B<'max'> which is largest existing entry
-in that direction, B<'end'> which is one I<beyond> largest existing
-entry, or a number. (This is how you find out how big the grid is.)
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<infoBbox>(I<x>,I<y>)
-
-Return the pixel bounding box of the cell at I<x,y>.
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<infoExists>(I<x>,I<y>)
-
-Returns true if there is an item in the cell at I<x,y>.
-Throws an exception (dies) if I<x,y> is outside the
-grid - this may change (Nick doesn't like it).
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<move>(I<dim>, I<from>, I<to>, I<offset>)
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<moveColumn>(I<from>, I<to>, I<offset>)
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<moveRow>(I<from>, I<to>, I<offset>)
-
-I<Dim> may be B<row> or B<column>. Moves the range of rows
-(or columns) from position I<from> through I<to> by the distance
-indicated by I<offset>. For example,
-I<$tixgrid>->B<moveRow>(B<2>, B<4>, B<1>) moves the rows 2,3,4
-to rows 3,4,5.
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<nearest>(I<x>, I<y>)
-
-Screen pos (pixels) to entry (nx,ny) translation.
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<selectionAdjust>(I<x1>, I<y1> ?,I<x2>, I<y2>?)
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<selectionClear>(I<x1>, I<y1> ?,I<x2>, I<y2>?)
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<selectionIncludes>(I<x1>, I<y1> ?,I<x2>, I<y2>?)
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<selectionSet>(I<x1>, I<y1> ?,I<x2>, I<y2>?)
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<selectionToggle>(I<x1>, I<y1> ?,I<x2>, I<y2>?)
-
-Selection support methods - probably buggy.
-
-x1 (y1) has not to be greater than x2 (y2), but only x2 and y2 can be 'max'.
-
-BUG: I<selectionIncludes>: has no visible effect (as in Tix). Eh???
-
-BUG: I<selectionClear>: only works for 0, 0, max, max (as in Tix). Eh???
-
-When I<x2, y2> are not given they default to I<x1, y1>, respectively.
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<set>(I<x>, I<y>?, B<-itemtype>=>I<type>??, I<-option>=>I<value>, I<...>?)
-
-Creates a new display item at the cell at (I<x>,I<y>). The optional
-B<-itemtype> parameter gives the type of the display item.
-An additional list of I<option-value> pairs specify options
-of the display item. If a display item already exists at this cell,
-the old item will be deleted automatically.
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<size>(I<dim>, I<index>?, I<-option>??=>I<value>, I<...>?)
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<sizeColumn>(I<index>?, I<-option>??=>I<value>, I<...>?)
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<sizeRow>(I<index>?, I<-option>??=>I<value>, I<...>?)
-
-Queries or sets the size of the row or column given by I<dim> and
-I<index>. I<Dim> may be B<row> or B<column>.  I<Index> may be any
-non-negative integer that gives the position of a given row (or column).
-I<Index> can also be the string B<default>; in this case, this method
-queries or sets the default size of all rows (or columns).
-When no I<option-value> pair is given, this method returns
-a list containing the current size setting of the given row (or column).
-When I<option-value> pairs are given, the corresponding options
-of the size setting of the given row are changed. I<-option> may be
-one of the following:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item B<-pad0> => I<pixels>
-
-Specifies the paddings to the left of a column or the top of a row.
-
-=item B<-pad1> => I<pixels>
-
-Specifies the paddings to the right of a column or the bottom of a row.
-
-=item B<-size> => I<val>
-
-Specifies the width of a column or the height of a row.
-I<Val> may be: B<auto> -- the width of the column is set
-the widest cell in the column; a valid Tk screen distance
-unit (see B<Tk_GetPixels>); or a real number following by the
-word B<chars> (e.g. B<3.4chars>) that sets the width of the
-column to the given number of characters.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<sort>(I<dimension>, I<start>, I<end>, ?I<args ...>?)
-
-?docu here? (not supported on Win* OSs up to now)
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<unset>(I<x>, I<y>)
-
-Clears the cell at (I<x>,I<y>) by removing its display item.
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<xview>
-
-Normal horizontal scrollbar method.
-
-=item I<$tixgrid>->B<yview>
-
-Normal vertical scrollbar method.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 BINDINGS
-
-To be done - only most obvious basic bindings work. The Tcl/Tix code
-was coded as a "state machine" which is not easy to follow.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::DItem|Tk::DItem>
-L<Tk::callbacks|Tk::callbacks>
-L<Tk::FloatEntry|Tk::FloatEntry>
-
-=head1 BUGS
-
-Tcl/Tix was/is not finished and both C code and bindings of TixGrid
-have some bugs.
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-tix, tixgrid, table, display item, spreadsheet
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Toplevel.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Toplevel.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index e3bbf579c0b..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Toplevel.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,199 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Toplevel - Create and manipulate Toplevel widgets
-
-=for category  Tk Widget Classes
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >I<$toplevel> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<Toplevel>(?I<options>?);
-
-=head1 STANDARD OPTIONS
-
-B<-borderwidth>	B<-highlightbackground>	B<-highlightthickness>	B<-takefocus>
-B<-class>	B<-highlightcolor>	B<-relief>
-B<-cursor>
-
-See L<Tk::options> for details of the standard options.
-
-=head1 WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Name:	B<background>
-
-=item Class:	B<Background>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-background>
-
-This option is the same as the standard B<background> option
-except that its value may also be specified as an undefined value.
-In this case, the widget will display no background or border, and
-no colors will be consumed from its colormap for its background
-and border.
-
-=item Name:	B<colormap>
-
-=item Class:	B<Colormap>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-colormap>
-
-Specifies a colormap to use for the window.
-The value may be either B<new>, in which case a new colormap is
-created for the window and its children, or the name of another
-window (which must be on the same screen and have the same visual
-as $widget), in which case the new window will use the colormap
-from the specified window.
-If the B<colormap> option is not specified, the new window
-uses the default colormap of its screen.
-This option may not be changed with the B<configure>
-method.
-
-=item Name:	B<container>
-
-=item Class:	B<Container>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-container>
-
-The value must be a boolean.  If true, it means that this window will
-be used as a container in which some other application will be embedded
-(for example, a Tk toplevel can be embedded using the B<-use> option).
-The window will support the appropriate window manager protocols for
-things like geometry requests.  The window should not have any
-children of its own in this application.
-This option may not be changed with the B<configure>
-method.
-
-=item Name:	B<height>
-
-=item Class:	B<Height>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-height>
-
-Specifies the desired height for the window in any of the forms
-acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-If this option is less than or equal to zero then the window will
-not request any size at all.
-
-=item Name:	B<menu>
-
-=item Class:	B<Menu>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-menu>
-
-Specifies a menu widget to be used as a menubar. On the Macintosh, the
-menubar will be displayed accross the top of the main monitor. On
-Microsoft Windows and all UNIX platforms, the menu will appear accross
-the toplevel window as part of the window dressing maintained by the
-window manager.
-
-=item Name:	B<"">
-
-=item Class:	B<"">
-
-=item Switch:	B<-screen>
-
-Specifies the screen on which to place the new window.
-Any valid screen name may be used, even one associated with a
-different display.
-Defaults to the same screen as its parent.
-This option is special in that it may not be specified via the option
-database, and it may not be modified with the B<configure>
-method.
-
-=item Switch:	B<-title>
-
-Specifies the title of the toplevel window.
-
-=item Name:	B<use>
-
-=item Class:	B<Use>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-use>
-
-This option is used for embedding. If the value isn't an empty string,
-it must be the the window identifier of a container window, specified as
-a hexadecimal string like the ones returned by the B<winfo id>
-command. The toplevel widget will be created as a child of the given
-container instead of the root window for the screen.  If the container
-window is in a Tk application, it must be a frame or toplevel widget for
-which the B<-container> option was specified.
-This option may not be changed with the B<configure>
-method.
-
-=item Name:	B<visual>
-
-=item Class:	B<Visual>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-visual>
-
-Specifies visual information for the new window in any of the
-forms accepted by B<Tk_GetVisual>.
-If this option is not specified, the new window will use the default
-visual for its screen.
-The B<visual> option may not be modified with the B<configure>
-method.
-
-=item Name:	B<width>
-
-=item Class:	B<Width>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-width>
-
-Specifies the desired width for the window in any of the forms
-acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-If this option is less than or equal to zero then the window will
-not request any size at all.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<Toplevel> method creates a new toplevel widget (given
-by the $widget argument).  Additional
-options, described above, may be specified on the command line
-or in the option database
-to configure aspects of the toplevel such as its background color
-and relief.  The B<toplevel> command returns the
-path name of the new window.
-
-A toplevel is similar to a frame except that it is created as a
-top-level window:  its X parent is the root window of a screen
-rather than the logical parent from its path name.  The primary
-purpose of a toplevel is to serve as a container for dialog boxes
-and other collections of widgets.  The only visible features
-of a toplevel are its background color and an optional 3-D border
-to make the toplevel appear raised or sunken.
-
-=head1 WIDGET METHODS
-
-The B<Toplevel> method creates a widget object.
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-The widget also inherits all the methods provided by the generic
-L<Tk::Widget|Tk::Widget> class, and the L<Tk::Wm|Tk::Wm> class.
-
-=head1 BINDINGS
-
-When a new toplevel is created, it has no default event bindings:
-toplevels are not intended to be interactive.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::Widget|Tk::Widget>
-L<Tk::Wm|Tk::Wm>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-toplevel, widget
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Tree.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Tree.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 445d2f0765b..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Tree.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,274 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Tree - Create and manipulate Tree widgets
-
-=for pm Tixish/Tree.pm
-
-=for category Tix Extensions
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >B<use Tk::Tree;>
-
-S<    >I<$tree> = I<$parent>-E<gt>B<Tree>(?I<options>?);
-
-=head1 SUPER-CLASS
-
-The B<Tree> class is derived from the L<HList|Tk::HList> class and inherits all
-the methods, options and subwidgets of its super-class.  A B<Tree> widget is
-not scrolled by default.
-
-=head1 STANDARD OPTIONS
-
-B<Tree> supports all the standard options of an HList widget.
-See L<Tk::options> for details on the standard options.
-
-=head1 WIDGET-SPECIFIC OPTIONS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Name:		B<browseCmd>
-
-=item Class:		B<BrowseCmd>
-
-=item Switch:		B<-browsecmd>
-
-Specifies a L<callback|Tk::callbacks> to call whenever the user browses on an entry
-(usually by single-clicking on the entry). The callback is called with
-one argument, the pathname of the entry.
-
-=item Name:		B<closeCmd>
-
-=item Class:		B<CloseCmd>
-
-=item Switch:		B<-closecmd>
-
-Specifies a L<callback|Tk::callbacks> to call whenever an entry needs to be closed (See
-L<"BINDINGS"> below). This method is called with one argument,
-the pathname of the entry. This method should perform appropriate
-actions to close the specified entry. If the B<-closecmd> option
-is not specified, the default closing action is to hide all child
-entries of the specified entry.
-
-=item Name:		B<command>
-
-=item Class:		B<Command>
-
-=item Switch:		B<-command>
-
-Specifies a L<callback|Tk::callbacks> to call whenever the user activates an entry
-(usually by double-clicking on the entry). The callback
-is called with one argument, the pathname of the entry.
-
-=item Name:		B<ignoreInvoke>
-
-=item Class:		B<IgnoreInvoke>
-
-=item Switch:		B<-ignoreinvoke>
-
-A Boolean value that specifies when a branch should be opened or
-closed. A branch will always be opened or closed when the user presses
-the (+) and (-) indicators. However, when the user invokes a branch
-(by doublc-clicking or pressing E<lt>ReturnE<gt>), the branch will be opened
-or closed only if B<-ignoreinvoke> is set to false (the default
-setting).
-
-=item Name:		B<openCmd>
-
-=item Class:		B<OpenCmd>
-
-=item Switch:		B<-opencmd>
-
-Specifies a L<callback|Tk::callbacks> to call whenever an entry needs to be opened (See
-L<"BINDINGS"> below). This method is called with one argument,
-the pathname of the entry. This method should perform appropriate
-actions to open the specified entry. If the B<-opencmd> option
-is not specified, the default opening action is to show all the child
-entries of the specified entry.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<Tree> method creates a new window and makes it into a Tree widget
-and return a reference to it.  Additional options, described above, may
-be specified on the command line or in the option database to configure
-aspects of the Tree widget such as its cursor and relief.
-
-The Tree widget can be used to display hierarchical data in a tree
-form. The user can adjust the view of the tree by opening or closing
-parts of the tree.
-
-To display a static tree structure, you can add the entries into the
-Tree widget and hide any entries as desired. Then you can call
-the B<autosetmode> method. This will set up the Tree widget so that it
-handles all the I<open> and I<close> events automatically.
-the demonstration program F<Tixish/examples/perl-tix-tree>).
-
-The above method is not applicable if you want to maintain a dynamic tree
-structure, i.e, you do not know all the entries in the tree and you need
-to add or delete entries subsequently. To do this, you should first create
-the entries in the Tree widget. Then, use the B<setmode> method to
-indicate the entries that can be opened or closed, and use the B<-opencmd>
-and B<-closecmd> options to handle the opening and closing events. (Please
-see the demonstration program F<Tixish/examples/perl-tix-dyntree>).
-
-Use either
-
-S<    >I<$parent>-E<gt>B<Scrolled>(B<'Tree'>, ... );
-
-or
-
-S<    >I<$parent>-E<gt>B<ScrlTree>( ... );
-
-to create a scrolled B<Tree>. See L<Tk::Scrolled> for details.
-
-=head1 WIDGET METHODS
-
-The B<Tree> method creates a widget object.
-This object supports the B<configure> and B<cget> methods
-described in L<Tk::options> which can be used to enquire and
-modify the options described above.
-The widget also inherits all the methods provided by the generic
-L<Tk::Widget|Tk::Widget> class.
-
-The following additional methods are available for Tree widgets:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$tree-E<gt>>B<add_pathimage>(I<treeRegExp [, openImg, closeImg]>)
-
-This method defines images for a given path (images must be in xpm
-format). The path can be determined by a simplified regular
-expression. There are just three metasymbols:
-
-=over
-
-=item ^
-
-at the beginning of the C<treeRegExp> same as in Perl regular
-expressions
-
-=item *
-
-anything
-
-=item $
-
-at the end of the C<TreeRegExp>, the same as in Perl regular
-expressions
-
-=back
-
-Examples:
-  
-  $tree->add_pathimage('^root','openfolder','folder');
-  
-matches C<root>, C<root.foo>, C<root.bar>, but not C<foo.root>
-
-  $tree->add_pathimage('root.*.class','openfolder','folder');
-  
-matches all paths containing C<< root.<anything>.class >>, but not
-C<< root.<anything>.<anything>.class >> C<*> is one part of the path. If
-you want to use a wildcard for two steps, you have to use C<*.*>.
-
-  $tree->add_pathimage('class$','openfolder','folder');
-  
-This matches all path with C<class> at the end.
-
-=item I<$tree>-E<gt>B<autosetmode>
-
-This method calls the B<setmode> method for all the entries in
-this Tree widget: if an entry has no child entries, its mode is set to
-B<none>. Otherwise, if the entry has any hidden child entries, its
-mode is set to B<open>; otherwise its mode is set to B<close>.
-
-=item I<$tree-E<gt>>B<child_entries>([$path][,$depth])
-
-This method returns in list context an array that contains all
-pathnames of subentries within the given path. In scalar context it
-returns the number of subentries in the given path.
-
-  Example:
-    root
-     | foo
-     | bar
-     |  | bar1
-     |  | bar2
-
-  my @childentries = $tree->child_entries('root.bar');
-  # returns (root.bar.bar1, root.bar.bar2)
-  
-  my $nr_of_subentries = $tree->child_entries('root',2);
-  # returns 4
-
-If C<$path> is omitted, all it is assumed, that the entry above
-'root' is meant. C<$depth> defines the numbers of levels.
-
-=item I<$tree>-E<gt>B<close>(I<entryPath>)
-
-Close the entry given by I<entryPath> if its I<mode> is B<close>.
-
-=item I<$tree>-E<gt>B<getmode>(I<entryPath>)
-
-Returns the current I<mode> of the entry given by I<entryPath>.
-
-=item I<$tree>-E<gt>B<open>(I<entryPath>)
-
-Open the entry given by I<entryPath> if its I<mode> is B<open>.
-
-=item I<$tree>-E<gt>B<setmode>(I<entryPath, mode>)
-
-This method is used to indicate whether the entry given by
-I<entryPath> has children entries and whether the children are
-visible. I<mode> must be one of B<open>,
-B<close> or B<none>. If I<mode> is set to B<open>, a (+)
-indicator is drawn next to the entry. If I<mode> is set to
-B<close>, a (-) indicator is drawn next to the entry. If
-I<mode> is set to B<none>, no indicators will be drawn for this
-entry. The default I<mode> is none. The B<open> mode indicates
-the entry has hidden children and this entry can be opened by the
-user. The B<close> mode indicates that all the children of the entry
-are now visible and the entry can be closed by the user.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 BINDINGS
-
-The basic mouse and keyboard bindings of the Tree widget are the same
-as the L<bindings of the HList|Tk::HList/"BINDINGS"> widget.
-In addition, the entries can be opened or closed under the following
-conditions:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item [1]
-
-If the I<mode> of the entry is B<open>, it can be opened by clicking
-on its (+) indicator.
-
-=item [2]
-
-If the I<mode> of the entry is B<close>, it can be closed by clicking
-on its (-) indicator.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::HList|Tk::HList>
-
-=head1 AUTHOR
-
-Perl/TK version by Chris Dean <ctdean@cogit.com>.  Original Tcl/Tix
-version by Ioi Kim Lam.
-
-Additions by Renee Baecker <module@renee-baecker.de>
-
-=head1 ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
-
-Thanks to Achim Bohnet <ach@mpe.mpg.de> for all his help.
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/UserGuide.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/UserGuide.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 08d397d4db7..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/UserGuide.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,586 +0,0 @@
-=head1 NAME
-
-Perl/Tk - Writing Tk applications in Perl 5
-
-=for category Introduction
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-This document is for beginners.  It assumes you know some B<Perl>, and
-have it and Tk running.  If you are I<not> currently reading this
-document courtesy of the B<widget> demonstration program, please be
-sure to run B<widget>, as it will show you the various widget types
-supported by Tk and how to use them. B<widget> should be installed in
-your default path, so type I<widget> at a command prompt.
-
-Here are links to other novice tutorials:
-
-L<http://www.lehigh.edu/~sol0/ptk/tpj1.html>
-L<http://www.lehigh.edu/~sol0/ptk/perlmonth01/pm1.html>
-
-I<Mastering Perl/Tk> is the definitive book on Perl/Tk:
-
-L<http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/mastperltk>
-
-=head1 Some Background
-
-Tk GUI programming is event-driven.  (This may already be familiar to
-you.)  In event-driven programs, the main GUI loop is outside of the
-user program and inside the GUI library.  This loop - initiated by
-calling B<MainLoop> - watches all events of interest and activates
-the correct handler procedures to handle these events.  Some of these
-handler procedures may be user-supplied; others will be part of the
-library.
-
-For a programmer, this means that you're not watching what is happening;
-instead, you are requested by the toolkit to perform actions whenever
-necessary.
-So, you're not watching for 'raise window / close window / redraw window'
-requests, but you tell the toolkit which routine will handle such cases,
-and the toolkit will call the procedures when required. These procedures
-are known as I<callbacks>, and some of them you write yourself.
-
-=head1 First Requirements
-
-B<Perl> programs that use Tk need to include C<use Tk>.
-A program should also use C<use strict> and the B<-w> switch to ensure
-the program is working without common errors.
-
-Any Perl/Tk application starts by creating the Tk B<L<MainWindow|Tk::MainWindow>>.  You
-then create items inside the B<MainWindow>, and/or create new windows
-called B<L<Toplevel|Tk::Toplevel>>s that also contain child items, before starting the
-B<MainLoop>, which is the last logical statment in your program. You
-can also create more items and windows while you're running, using
-callbacks.  Items are only shown on the display after they have been
-arranged by a I<geometry manager> like B<L<pack|Tk::pack>>; more information on
-this later.  B<MainLoop> starts the GUI and handle all events.  That's
-all there is to it!  A trivial one-window example is shown below:
-
-    #!/usr/bin/perl -w	
-    use Tk;
-    use strict;
-
-    my $mw = MainWindow->new;
-    $mw->Label(-text => 'Hello, world!')->pack;
-    $mw->Button(
-        -text    => 'Quit',
-        -command => sub { exit },
-    )->pack;
-    MainLoop;
-
-Please run this example.  It shows you two widget types, a B<L<Label|Tk::Label>>
-and a B<L<Button|Tk::Button>>, and how they are packed. When clicked, the B<Button>
-widget invokes the callback specified by the C<-command> option.  Finally,
-note the typical Tk style using C<-option> =E<gt> C<value> pairs.
-
-=head1 Widget creation
-
-Tk windows and widgets are hierarchical, S<i.e. one> window includes
-one or more other windows.  You create the first Tk window using
-C<MainWindow-E<gt>new>.  This returns a window handle, assigned to
-C<$mw> in the example above.  Keep track of the main handle, commonly
-called a I<widget reference>.
-
-You can use any Tk handle to create child widgets within the window (or
-widget).  This is done by calling the Tk constructor method on the
-variable.  In the example above, the C<Label> method called from
-C<$mw> creates a B<Label> widget inside the B<MainWindow>.  In the
-constructor call, you can specify various options; you can later add
-or change options for any widget using the B<configure> method, which
-takes the same parameters as the constructor.  The one exception to
-the hierarchical structure is the B<Toplevel> constructor, which
-creates a new outermost window.
-
-After you create any widget (other than the B<MainWindow> or
-B<Toplevel>s, you must render it by calling B<pack>.  (This is not
-entirely true; more later)).  If you do not need to refer to the widget
-after construction and packing, call B<pack> off the constructor
-results, as shown for the B<Label> and B<Button> in the example above.  Note
-that the result of the compound call is the result of B<pack>, which
-is a valid Tk handle.
-
-Windows and widgets are deleted by calling B<destroy> on them;
-this will delete and un-draw the widget and all its children.
-
-=head1 Standard Tk widgets
-
-Here is an itemize of the standard Tk widget set.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item L<Button|Tk::Button>
-
-=item L<Canvas|Tk::Canvas>
-
-=item L<Checkbutton|Tk::Checkbutton>
-
-=item L<Entry|Tk::Entry>
-
-=item L<Frame|Tk::Frame>
-
-=item L<Label|Tk::Label>
-
-=item L<Labelframe|Tk::Labelframe>
-
-=item L<Listbox|Tk::Listbox>
-
-=item L<Menu|Tk::Menu>
-
-=item L<Menubutton|Tk::Menubutton>
-
-=item L<Message|Tk::Message>
-
-=item L<Panedwindow|Tk::Panedwindow>
-
-=item L<Radiobutton|Tk::Radiobutton>
-
-=item L<Scale|Tk::Scale>
-
-=item L<Scrollbar|Tk::Scrollbar>
-
-=item L<Spinbox|Tk::Spinbox>
-
-=item L<Text|Tk::Text>
-
-=item L<Toplevel|Tk::Toplevel>
-
-=back
-
-Perl/Tk provides an equal number of new widgets, above and beyond this
-core set.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item L<Adjuster|Tk::Adjuster>
-
-=item L<Balloon|Tk::Balloon>
-
-=item L<BrowseEntry|Tk::BrowseEntry>
-
-=item L<ColorEditor|Tk::ColorEditor>
-
-=item L<Dialog|Tk::Dialog>
-
-=item L<DialogBox|Tk::DialogBox>
-
-=item L<DirTree|Tk::DirTree>
-
-=item ErrorDialog
-
-=item L<FBox|Tk::FBox>
-
-=item L<FileSelect|Tk::FileSelect>
-
-=item L<HList|Tk::HList>
-
-=item LabEntry
-
-=item L<LabFrame|Tk::LabFrame>
-
-=item L<NoteBook|Tk::NoteBook>
-
-=item L<Optionmenu|Tk::Optionmenu>
-
-=item L<Pane|Tk::Pane>
-
-=item L<ProgressBar|Tk::ProgressBar>
-
-=item L<ROText|Tk::ROText>
-
-=item L<Table|Tk::Table>
-
-=item L<TextUndo|Tk::TextUndo>
-
-=item L<Tiler|Tk::Tiler>
-
-=item L<TList|Tk::TList>
-
-=item L<Tree|Tk::Tree>
-
-=back
-
-=head1 Variables and callback routines
-
-Most graphical interfaces are used to set up a set of values and conditions,
-and then perform the appropriate action.  The Tk toolkit is different
-from your average text-based prompting or menu driven system in that you do
-not collect settings yourself, and decide on an action based on an
-input code; instead, you leave these
-values to your toolkit and only get them when the action is performed.
-
-So, where a traditional text-based system would look like this:
-
-    #!/usr/bin/perl -w
-    use strict;
-
-    print "Please type a font name\n";
-    my $font = <>; chomp $font;
-    # Validate font
-
-    print "Please type a file name\n";
-    my $filename = <>; chomp $filename;
-    # Validate filename
-
-    print "Type <1> to fax, <2> to print\n";
-    my $option = <>; chomp $option;
-    if ($option eq 1) {
-        print "Faxing $filename in font $font\n";
-    } elsif ($option eq 2) {
-        print "Now sending $filename to printer in font $font\n";
-    }
-
-The slightly larger example below shows how to do this in Tk.
-Note the use of callbacks.  Note, also, that Tk handles the values, and
-the subroutine uses the method B<get> to get at the values.
-If a user changes his mind and wants to change the font again,
-the application never notices; it's all handled by Tk.
-
-    #!/usr/bin/perl -w
-    use Tk;
-    use strict;
-
-    my $mw = MainWindow->new;
-
-    $mw->Label(-text => 'File Name')->pack;
-    my $filename = $mw->Entry(-width => 20);
-    $filename->pack;
-
-    $mw->Label(-text => 'Font Name')->pack;
-    my $font = $mw->Entry(-width => 10);
-    $font->pack;
-
-    $mw->Button(
-        -text => 'Fax',
-        -command => sub{do_fax($filename, $font)}
-    )->pack;
-
-    $mw->Button(
-        -text => 'Print',
-        -command => sub{do_print($filename, $font)}
-    )->pack;
-
-    MainLoop;
-
-    sub do_fax {
-        my ($file, $font) = @_;
-        my $file_val = $file->get;
-        my $font_val = $font->get;
-        print "Now faxing $file_val in font $font_val\n";
-    }
-
-    sub do_print {
-        my ($file, $font) = @_;
-        my $file_val = $file->get;
-        my $font_val = $font->get;
-        print "Sending file $file_val to printer in font $font_val\n";
-    }
-
-=head1 The packer - grouping with Frame widgets
-
-In the examples above, you must have noticed the B<pack> calls.  This
-is one of the more complicated parts of Tk.  The basic idea is that
-any window or widget should be subject to a Tk geometry manager; the
-I<packer> is one of the placement managers, and B<L<grid|Tk::grid>> is another.
-
-The actions of the packer are rather simple: when applied
-to a widget, the packer positions that widget on the indicated position
-within the remaining space in its parent.  By default, the position is
-on top; this means the next items will be put below.  You can also
-specify the left, right, or bottom positions.  Specify position
-using B<-side =E<gt> 'right'>.
-
-Additional packing parameters specify the behavior of the widget when
-there is some space left in the B<L<Frame|Tk::Frame>> or when the window size is
-increased.  If widgets should maintain a fixed size, specify nothing;
-this is the default.  For widgets that you want to fill up the current
-horizontal and/or vertical space, specify B<-fill =E<gt> 'x'>, B<'y'>,
-or B<'both'>; for widgets that should grow, specify B<-expand =E<gt> 1>.
-These parameters are not shown in the example below; see the B<widget>
-demonstration.
-
-If you want to group some items within a window that have a different
-packing order than others, you can include them in a Frame.  This is a
-do-nothing window type that is meant for packing or filling (and to
-play games with borders and colors).
-
-The example below shows the use of pack and Frames:
-
-    #!/usr/bin/perl -w
-    use Tk;
-    use strict;
-
-    # Take top and the bottom - now implicit top is in the middle
-    my $mw = MainWindow->new;
-    $mw->title( 'The MainWindow' );
-    $mw->Label(-text => 'At the top (default)')->pack;
-    $mw->Label(-text => 'At the bottom')->pack(-side => 'bottom');
-    $mw->Label(-text => 'The middle remains')->pack;
-
-    # Since left and right are taken, bottom will not work...
-    my $top1 = $mw->Toplevel;
-    $top1->title( 'Toplevel 1' );
-    $top1->Label(-text => 'Left')->pack(-side => 'left');
-    $top1->Label(-text => 'Right')->pack(-side => 'right');
-    $top1->Label(-text => '?Bottom?')->pack(-side => 'bottom');
-
-    # But when you use Frames, things work quite alright
-    my $top2 = $mw->Toplevel;
-    $top2->title( 'Toplevel 2' );
-    my $frame = $top2->Frame;
-    $frame->pack;
-    $frame->Label(-text => 'Left2')->pack(-side => 'left');
-    $frame->Label(-text => 'Right2')->pack(-side => 'right');
-    $top2->Label(-text => 'Bottom2')->pack(-side => 'bottom');
-
-    MainLoop;
-
-=head1 More than one window
-
-Most real applications require more than one window.  As you just saw,
-you can create more outermost windows by using a B<Toplevel> widget.
-Each window is independent; destroying a B<Toplevel> window does not
-affect the others as long as they are not a child of the closed
-B<Toplevel>.  However, exiting the B<MainWindow> will destroy all remaining
-B<Toplevel> widgets and end the application.  The
-example below shows a trivial three-window application:
-
-    #!/usr/bin/perl -w
-    use Tk;
-    use strict;
-
-    my $mw = MainWindow->new;
-    fill_window($mw, 'Main');
-    my $top1 = $mw->Toplevel;
-    fill_window($top1, 'First top-level');
-    my $top2 = $mw->Toplevel;
-    fill_window($top2, 'Second top-level');
-    MainLoop;
-
-    sub fill_window {
-        my ($window, $header) = @_;
-        $window->Label(-text => $header)->pack;
-        $window->Button(
-            -text    => 'close',
-            -command => [$window => 'destroy']
-        )->pack(-side => 'left');
-        $window->Button(
-            -text    => 'exit',
-            -command => [$mw => 'destroy']
-        )->pack(-side => 'right');
-    }
-
-=head1 More callbacks
-
-So far, all callback routines shown called a user procedure.
-You can also have a callback routine call another Tk routine.
-This is the way that scroll bars are implemented: scroll-bars
-can call a Tk item or a user procedure, whenever their position
-has changed.  The Tk item that has a scrollbar attached calls the
-scrollbar when its size or offset has changed.  In this way,
-the items are linked.  You can still ask a scrollbar's position,
-or set it by hand - but the defaults will be taken care of.
-
-The example below shows a B<L<Listbox|Tk::Listbox>> with a scroll bar.  Moving
-the scrollbar moves the B<Listbox>.  Scanning a B<Listbox> (dragging
-an item with the left mouse button) moves the scrollbar.
-
-     #!/usr/bin/perl -w
-     use Tk;
-     use strict;
-
-     my $mw = MainWindow->new;
-     my $box = $mw->Listbox(
-         -relief => 'sunken',
-         -height  => 5,
-         -setgrid => 1,
-    );
-    my @items = qw(One Two Three Four Five Six Seven
-                   Eight Nine Ten Eleven Twelve);
-    foreach (@items) {
-       $box->insert('end', $_);
-    }
-    my $scroll = $mw->Scrollbar(-command => ['yview', $box]);
-    $box->configure(-yscrollcommand => ['set', $scroll]);
-    $box->pack(-side => 'left', -fill => 'both', -expand => 1);
-    $scroll->pack(-side => 'right', -fill => 'y');
-
-    MainLoop;
-
-Note that there's a convenience method B<L<Scrolled|Tk::Scrolled>>
-which helps constructing widgets with automatically managed
-scrollbars.
-
-=head1 Canvases and tags
-
-One of the most powerful widgets in Tk is the B<L<Canvas|Tk::Canvas>> window.
-In a B<Canvas> window, you can draw simple graphics and include
-other widgets.  The B<Canvas> area may be larger than the visible window,
-and may then be scrolled.  Any item you draw on the canvas has its own id,
-and may optionally have one or more I<tags>.  You may refer to any
-item by its id, and may refer to any group of items by a common tag;
-you can move, delete, or change groups of items using these tags,
-and you can I<bind> actions to tags.  For a properly designed (often
-structured) B<Canvas>, you can specify powerful actions quite simply.
-
-In the example below, actions are bound to circles (single click)
-and blue items (double-click); obviously, this can be extended to any
-tag or group of tags.
-
-    #!/usr/bin/perl -w
-    use Tk;
-    use strict;
-
-    # Create B<MainWindow> and canvas
-    my $mw = MainWindow->new;
-    my $canvas = $mw->Canvas;
-    $canvas->pack(-expand => 1, -fill => 'both');
-
-    # Create various items
-    create_item($canvas, 1, 1, 'circle', 'blue', 'Jane');
-    create_item($canvas, 4, 4, 'circle', 'red', 'Peter');
-    create_item($canvas, 4, 1, 'square', 'blue', 'James');
-    create_item($canvas, 1, 4, 'square', 'red', 'Patricia');
-
-    # Single-clicking with left on a 'circle' item invokes a procedure
-    $canvas->bind('circle', '<1>' => sub {handle_circle($canvas)});
-    # Double-clicking with left on a 'blue' item invokes a procedure
-    $canvas->bind('blue', '<Double-1>' => sub {handle_blue($canvas)});
-    MainLoop;
-
-    # Create an item; use parameters as tags (this is not a default!)
-    sub create_item {
-        my ($can, $x, $y, $form, $color, $name) = @_;
-
-        my $x2 = $x + 1;
-        my $y2 = $y + 1;
-        my $kind;
-        $kind = 'oval' if ($form eq 'circle');
-        $kind = 'rectangle' if ($form eq 'square');
-        $can->create(
-            ($kind, "$x" . 'c', "$y" . 'c',
-            "$x2" . 'c', "$y2" . 'c'),
-            -tags => [$form, $color, $name],
-            -fill => $color);
-    }
-
-    # This gets the real name (not current, blue/red, square/circle)
-    # Note: you'll want to return a list in realistic situations...
-    sub get_name {
-        my ($can) = @_;
-        my $item = $can->find('withtag', 'current');
-        my @taglist = $can->gettags($item);
-        my $name;
-        foreach (@taglist) {
-            next if ($_ eq 'current');
-            next if ($_ eq 'red' or $_ eq 'blue');
-            next if ($_ eq 'square' or $_ eq 'circle');
-            $name = $_;
-            last;
-        }
-        return $name;
-    }
-
-    sub handle_circle {
-        my ($can) = @_;
-        my $name = get_name($can);
-        print "Action on circle $name...\n";
-    }
-
-    sub handle_blue {
-        my ($can) = @_;
-        my $name = get_name($can);
-        print "Action on blue item $name...\n";
-    }
-
-=head1 Perl/Tk and Unicode
-
-Perl/Tk follows Perl's model of handling Unicode. That is, if a string
-is correctly flagged as a E<quot>characterE<quot> string in the sense
-like described in L<Encode/TERMINOLOGY>, then Perl/Tk will very
-probably display and handle this string correctly.
-
-Note that every variable which is passed somehow into a Perl/Tk method
-will be implicitely changed into an internally utf8-flagged variable.
-Semantically nothing changes, as the series of codepoints stays the
-same, but things will change when variables with high-bit iso-8859-1
-characters will be passed to the "outer" world. In this case you have
-to explicitely mark the encoding of your output stream if using IO, or
-encode the variables using L<Encode> for other style of communication.
-
-This is the theory, now some examples.
-
-If you use non-iso-8859-1 characters in the source code, then use
-either the C<use utf8;> or C<use encoding 'I<encodingname>'> pragma:
-
-     use utf8;
-     use Tk;
-     my $x = "some characters using utf8 encoding";
-     tkinit->Label(-text => $x)->pack;
-     MainLoop;
-
-For data that comes from a file you have to specify the encoding
-unless it's encoded as ascii or iso-8559-1:
-
-     use Tk;
-     open my $FH, "<:encoding(utf-8)", "filename" or die $!;
-     # or for utf-16 data: open my $FH, "<:encoding(utf-16)", "filename" or die $!;
-     my $data = <$FH>;
-     tkinit->Label(-text => $data)->pack;
-     MainLoop;
-
-Likewise, the encoding must be specified for all data which is read
-from Tk widgets and that shall be output into a file. For the output,
-the encoding should be always specified, even if it is iso-8859-1:
-
-     use Tk;
-     $mw = tkinit;
-     $mw->Entry(-textvariable => \$input)->pack;
-     $mw->Button(
-         -text => "Write to file",
-         -command => sub {
-             open my $FH, ">:encoding(iso-8859-1)", "filename" or die $!;
-             print $FH $input;
-         },
-     )->pack;
-     MainLoop;
-
-Note that Tk is Unicode-capable. So you need to be prepared that the
-user has the appropriate input methods activated to enter non-ascii
-characters. If an output encoding is used which does not cover the
-whole of Unicode codepoints then a warning will be issued when writing
-the file, like this:
-
-    "\x{20ac}" does not map to iso-8859-1 at /usr/local/lib/perl5/site_perl/5.8.8/mach/Tk.pm line 250.
-
-Also, the same hexadecimal notation will be used as replacements for
-the unhandled characters.
-
-Handling encoding in I/O is pretty simple using the C<encoding> PerlIO
-layer, as described above. In other cases, such as when dealing with
-databases, encoding the data usually has to be done manually, unless
-the database driver has some means for automatically do this for you.
-So when working with a MySQL database, one could use:
-
-     use Tk;
-     use DBI;
-     use Encode qw(encode);
-     $mw = tkinit;
-     $mw->Entry(-textvariable => \$input)->pack;
-     $mw->Button(
-         -text => "Write to database",
-         -command => sub {
-             my $dbh = DBI->connect("dbi:mysql:test", "root", "") or die;
-             my $encoded_input = encode("iso-8859-1", $input);
-             $dbh->do("INSERT INTO testtable VALUES (?)", undef, $encoded_input) or die;
-         },
-     )->pack;
-     MainLoop;
-
-Unfortunately, there are still places in Perl ignorant of Unicode. One
-of these places are filenames. Consequently, the file selectors in
-Perl/Tk do not handle encoding of filenames properly. Currently they
-suppose that filenames are in iso-8859-1 encoding, at least on Unix
-systems. As soon as Perl has a concept of filename encodings, then
-Perl/Tk will also implement such schemes.
-
-=cut
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Widget.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Widget.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 696bbab22b7..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Widget.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,678 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Widget - Base class of all widgets
-
-=for pm Tk/Widget.pm
-
-=for category Tk Generic Methods
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-   package Tk::Whatever;
-   require Tk::Widget;
-   @ISA = qw(Tk::Widget);
-   Construct Tk::Widget 'Whatever';
-
-   sub Tk_cmd { \&Tk::whatever }
-
-S<   >I<$widget>-E<gt>I<method>(?I<arg, arg, ...>?)
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<Tk::Widget> is an abstract base class for all Tk widgets.
-
-Generic methods available to all widgets include the methods based on core
-C<winfo> mechanism and are used to retrieve information about windows managed by
-Tk. They can take any of a number of different forms, depending on the I<method>.
-The legal forms are:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<appname>?(I<newName>)?
-
-If I<newName> isn't specified, this method returns the name
-of the application (the name that may be used in B<send>
-commands to communicate with the application).
-If I<newName> is specified, then the name of the application
-is changed to I<newName>.
-If the given name is already in use, then a suffix of the form
-``B< #2>'' or ``B< #3>'' is appended in order to make the name unique.
-The method's result is the name actually chosen.
-I<newName> should not start with a capital letter.
-This will interfere with L<option|Tk::option> processing, since names starting with
-capitals are assumed to be classes;  as a result, Tk may not
-be able to find some options for the application.
-If sends have been disabled by deleting the B<send> command,
-this command will reenable them and recreate the B<send>
-command.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<atom>(I<name>)
-
-Returns a decimal string giving the integer identifier for the
-atom whose name is I<name>.  If no atom exists with the name
-I<name> then a new one is created.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<atomname>(I<id>)
-
-Returns the textual name for the atom whose integer identifier is
-I<id>.
-This command is the inverse of the I<$widget>-E<gt>B<atom> command.
-It generates an error if no such atom exists.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<bell>( ?-nice? );
-
-This command rings the bell on the display for I<$widget> and
-returns an empty string.
-The command uses the current bell-related settings for the display, which
-may be modified with programs such as B<xset>.
-
-If I<-nice>  is  not specified, this command also resets the screen saver
-for the screen.  Some screen savers will ignore this, but  others  will
-reset so that the screen becomes visible again.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<bindDump>
-
-This command returns a list of strings suitable for printing detailing
-binding information for a widget.  It prints a widget's
-bindtags.  For each binding tag it prints all the bindings, comprised
-of the event descriptor and the callback.  Callback arguments are
-printed, and B<Tk::Ev> objects are expanded.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<Busy>?(?-recurse => 1?,I<-option> => I<value>?)?
-
-This method B<configure>s a B<-cursor> option for I<$widget> and
-(if B<-recurse => 1> is specified) all its descendants. The cursor to
-be set may be passed as S<B<-cursor> => I<cursor>> or defaults to 'watch'.
-Additional B<configure> options are applied to I<$widget> only.
-It also adds a special tag B<'Busy'> to the B<bindtags> of the widgets so
-configured so that  B<KeyPress>, B<KeyRelease>, B<ButtonPress> and
-B<ButtonRelease> events are ignored (with press events generating a call to
-B<bell>). It then acquires a local B<grab> for I<$widget>.
-The state of the widgets and the grab is restored by a call to
-I<$widget>-E<gt>B<Unbusy>.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<caret>( ?-x => I<x>?, ?-y => I<y>?, ?-height
-=> I<height>? );
-
-Sets and queries the caret location for the display of the specified
-Tk window window.  The caret is the per-display cursor location used
-for indicating global focus (e.g. to comply with Microsoft
-Accessibility guidelines), as well as for location of the
-over-the-spot XIM (X Input Methods) or Windows IME windows. If no
-options are specified, the last values used for setting the caret are
-return in option-value pair format.  -x and -y represent
-window-relative coordinates, and -height is the height of the current
-cursor location, or the height of the specified window if none is
-given.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<cells>
-
-Returns a decimal string giving the number of cells in the
-color map for I<$widget>.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<children>
-
-I<$widget->>B<children>
-Returns a list containing all the children
-of $widget.  The list is in stacking order, with the lowest
-window first.  Top-level windows are returned as children
-of their logical parents.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<class>
-
-Returns the class name for I<$widget>.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<colormapfull>
-
-Returns 1 if the colormap for I<$widget> is known to be full, 0
-otherwise.  The colormap for a window is ``known'' to be full if the last
-attempt to allocate a new color on that window failed and this
-application hasn't freed any colors in the colormap since the
-failed allocation.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<ConfigSpecs>
-
-Used to perform delegated option configuration for a mega-widget.
-Returns, in Tk::Derived::ConfigSpecs notation (see L<Tk::ConfigSpecs>),
-all possible options for a widget. For example,
-
- $s = $self->Scale;
- $self->ConfigSpecs(
-     $s->ConfigSpecs,
-     .... more ConfigSpecs specifications
- );
-
-returns a hash of all Tk::Scale options, delegated to $s - e.g. some
-representative examples:
-
- -bigincrement => [$s, bigIncrement, BigIncrement, 0, 0]
- -digits       => [$s, digits, Digits, 0, 0]
- -sliderlength => [$s, sliderLength, SliderLength, 10m, 30]
- -troughcolor  => [$s, troughColor, Background, #c3c3c3, #c3c3c3]
-
-This provides an easy means of populating a mega-widget's ConfigSpecs
-with initializers.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<containing>(I<rootX,rootY>)
-
-Returns the window containing the point given
-by I<rootX> and I<rootY>.
-I<RootX> and I<rootY> are specified in screen units (i.e.
-any form acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>) in the coordinate
-system of the root window (if a virtual-root window manager is in
-use then the coordinate system of the virtual root window is used).
-If no window in this application contains the point then an empty
-string is returned.
-In selecting the containing window, children are given higher priority
-than parents and among siblings the highest one in the stacking order is
-chosen.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<depth>
-
-Returns a decimal string giving the depth of I<$widget> (number
-of bits per pixel).
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<destroy>
-
-This command deletes the window related to
-I<$widget>, plus all its descendants.
-If all the B<MainWindows> are deleted then the entire application
-will be destroyed.
-
-The perl object I<$widget> continues to exist while references
-to it still exist, e.g. until variable goes out of scope.
-However any attempt to use Tk methods on the object will fail.
-B<Exists>(I<$widget>) will return false on such objects.
-
-Note however that while a window exists for I<$widget> the
-perl object is maintained (due to "references" in perl/Tk internals)
-even though original variables may have gone out of scope.
-(Normally this is intuitive.)
-
-=item B<Exists>(I<$widget>)
-
-Returns 1 if there exists a window for I<$widget>, 0 if no such
-window exists.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<font>(I<option>?, I<arg, arg, ...>?)
-
-Create and inspect fonts. See L<Tk::Font> for further details.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<fpixels>(I<number>)
-
-Returns a floating-point value giving the number of pixels
-in I<$widget> corresponding to the distance given by I<number>.
-I<Number> may be specified in any of the forms acceptable
-to B<Tk_GetScreenMM>, such as ``2.0c'' or ``1i''.
-The return value may be fractional;  for an integer value, use
-I<$widget>-E<gt>B<pixels>.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<Getimage>(I<name>)
-
-Given I<name>, look for an image file with that base name and return
-a L<Tk::Image>.  File extensions are tried in this order: F<xpm>,
-F<gif>, F<ppm>, F<xbm> until a valid iamge is found.  If no image is
-found, try a builtin image with that name.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<geometry>
-
-Returns the geometry for I<$widget>, in the form
-I<width>B<x>I<height>B<+>I<x>B<+>I<y>.  All dimensions are
-in pixels.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<height>
-
-Returns a decimal string giving I<$widget>'s height in pixels.
-When a window is first created its height will be 1 pixel;  the
-height will eventually be changed by a geometry manager to fulfill
-the window's needs.
-If you need the true height immediately after creating a widget,
-invoke B<update> to force the geometry manager to arrange it,
-or use I<$widget>-E<gt>B<reqheight> to get the window's requested height
-instead of its actual height.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<id>
-
-Returns a hexadecimal string giving a low-level platform-specific
-identifier for $widget.  On Unix platforms, this is the X
-window identifier.  Under Windows, this is the Windows
-HWND.  On the Macintosh the value has no meaning outside Tk.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<idletasks>
-
-One of two methods which are used to bring the application ``up to date''
-by entering the event loop repeated until all pending events
-(including idle callbacks) have been processed.
-
-If the B<idletasks> method is specified, then no new events or errors
-are processed; only idle callbacks are invoked. This causes operations
-that are normally deferred, such as display updates and window layout
-calculations, to be performed immediately.
-
-The B<idletasks> command is useful in scripts where changes have been
-made to the application's state and you want those changes to appear
-on the display immediately, rather than waiting for the script to
-complete. Most display updates are performed as idle callbacks, so
-B<idletasks> will cause them to run. However, there are some kinds of
-updates that only happen in response to events, such as those
-triggered by window size changes; these updates will not occur in
-B<idletasks>.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<interps>
-
-Returns a list whose members are the names of all Tcl interpreters
-(e.g. all Tk-based applications) currently registered for
-a particular display.
-The return value refers
-to the display of I<$widget>.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<ismapped>
-
-Returns B<1> if I<$widget> is currently mapped, B<0> otherwise.
-
-=item I<$widget->>B<lower>(?I<belowThis>?)
-
-If the I<belowThis> argument is omitted then the command lowers
-$widget so that it is below all of its siblings in the stacking
-order (it will be obscured by any siblings that overlap it and
-will not obscure any siblings).
-If I<belowThis> is specified then it must be the path name of
-a window that is either a sibling of $widget or the descendant
-of a sibling of $widget.
-In this case the B<lower> command will insert
-$widget into the stacking order just below I<belowThis>
-(or the ancestor of I<belowThis> that is a sibling of $widget);
-this could end up either raising or lowering $widget.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<MapWindow>
-
-Cause I<$widget> to be "mapped" i.e. made visible on the display.
-May confuse the geometry manager (pack, grid, place, ...)
-that thinks it is managing the widget.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<manager>
-
-Returns the name of the geometry manager currently
-responsible for I<$widget>, or an empty string if I<$widget>
-isn't managed by any geometry manager.
-The name is usually the name of the method for the geometry
-manager, such as B<pack> or B<place>.
-If the geometry manager is a widget, such as canvases or text, the
-name is the widget's class command, such as B<canvas>.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<name>
-
-Returns I<$widget>'s name (i.e. its name within its parent, as opposed
-to its full path name).
-The command I<$mainwin>-E<gt>B<name> will return the name of the application.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<OnDestroy>(I<callback>);
-
-OnDestroy accepts a standard perl/Tk I<callback>.
-When the window associated with I<$widget> is destroyed then
-the callback is invoked. Unlike I<$widget->>bind('E<lt>DestroyE<gt>',...)
-the widgets methods are still available when I<callback> is executed,
-so (for example) a B<Text> widget can save its contents to a file.
-
-OnDestroy was required for new B<after> mechanism.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<parent>
-
-Returns I<$widget>'s parent, or an empty string
-if I<$widget> is the main window of the application.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<PathName>
-
-Returns the Tk path name of I<$widget>. This is the inverse of the
-L</Widget> method. (This is an import from the C interface.)
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<pathname>(I<id>)
-
-Returns an object whose X identifier is I<id>.
-The identifier is looked up on the display of I<$widget>.
-I<Id> must be a decimal, hexadecimal, or octal integer and must
-correspond to a window in the invoking application, or an error
-occurs which can be trapped with C<eval { }> or C<Tk::catch { }>.
-If the window belongs to the application, but is not an object
-(for example wrapper windows, HList header, etc.) then C<undef>
-is returned.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<pixels>(I<number>)
-
-Returns the number of pixels in I<$widget> corresponding
-to the distance given by I<number>.
-I<Number> may be specified in any of the forms acceptable
-to B<Tk_GetPixels>, such as ``2.0c'' or ``1i''.
-The result is rounded to the nearest integer value;  for a
-fractional result, use I<$widget>-E<gt>B<fpixels>.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<pointerx>
-
-If the mouse pointer is on the same screen as I<$widget>, returns the
-pointer's x coordinate, measured in pixels in the screen's root window.
-If a virtual root window is in use on the screen, the position is
-measured in the virtual root.
-If the mouse pointer isn't on the same screen as I<$widget> then
--1 is returned.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<pointerxy>
-
-If the mouse pointer is on the same screen as I<$widget>, returns a list
-with two elements, which are the pointer's x and y coordinates measured
-in pixels in the screen's root window.
-If a virtual root window is in use on the screen, the position
-is computed in the virtual root.
-If the mouse pointer isn't on the same screen as I<$widget> then
-both of the returned coordinates are -1.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<pointery>
-
-If the mouse pointer is on the same screen as I<$widget>, returns the
-pointer's y coordinate, measured in pixels in the screen's root window.
-If a virtual root window is in use on the screen, the position
-is computed in the virtual root.
-If the mouse pointer isn't on the same screen as I<$widget> then
--1 is returned.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<raise>(?I<aboveThis>?)
-
-If the I<aboveThis> argument is omitted then the command raises
-$widget so that it is above all of its siblings in the stacking
-order (it will not be obscured by any siblings and will obscure
-any siblings that overlap it).
-If I<aboveThis> is specified then it must be the path name of
-a window that is either a sibling of $widget or the descendant
-of a sibling of $widget.
-In this case the B<raise> command will insert
-$widget into the stacking order just above I<aboveThis>
-(or the ancestor of I<aboveThis> that is a sibling of $widget);
-this could end up either raising or lowering $widget.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<reqheight>
-
-Returns a decimal string giving I<$widget>'s requested height,
-in pixels.  This is the value used by I<$widget>'s geometry
-manager to compute its geometry.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<reqwidth>
-
-Returns a decimal string giving I<$widget>'s requested width,
-in pixels.  This is the value used by I<$widget>'s geometry
-manager to compute its geometry.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<rgb>(I<color>)
-
-Returns a list containing three decimal values, which are the
-red, green, and blue intensities that correspond to I<color> in
-the window given by I<$widget>.  I<Color>
-may be specified in any of the forms acceptable for a color
-option.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<rootx>
-
-Returns a decimal string giving the x-coordinate, in the root
-window of the screen, of the
-upper-left corner of I<$widget>'s border (or I<$widget> if it
-has no border).
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<rooty>
-
-Returns a decimal string giving the y-coordinate, in the root
-window of the screen, of the
-upper-left corner of I<$widget>'s border (or I<$widget> if it
-has no border).
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<scaling>?(I<number>)?
-
-Sets and queries the current scaling factor used by Tk to convert between
-physical units (for example, points, inches, or millimeters) and pixels.  The
-I<number> argument is a floating point number that specifies the number of
-pixels per point on $widget's display. If the I<number> argument is
-omitted, the current value of the scaling factor is returned.
-
-A ``point'' is a unit of measurement equal to 1/72 inch.  A scaling factor
-of 1.0 corresponds to 1 pixel per point, which is equivalent to a standard
-72 dpi monitor.  A scaling factor of 1.25 would mean 1.25 pixels per point,
-which is the setting for a 90 dpi monitor; setting the scaling factor to
-1.25 on a 72 dpi monitor would cause everything in the application to be
-displayed 1.25 times as large as normal.  The initial value for the scaling
-factor is set when the application starts, based on properties of the
-installed monitor (as reported via the window system),
-but it can be changed at any time.  Measurements made
-after the scaling factor is changed will use the new scaling factor, but it
-is undefined whether existing widgets will resize themselves dynamically to
-accomodate the new scaling factor.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<screen>
-
-Returns the name of the screen associated with I<$widget>, in
-the form I<displayName>.I<screenIndex>.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<screencells>
-
-Returns a decimal string giving the number of cells in the default
-color map for I<$widget>'s screen.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<screendepth>
-
-Returns a decimal string giving the depth of the root window
-of I<$widget>'s screen (number of bits per pixel).
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<screenheight>
-
-Returns a decimal string giving the height of I<$widget>'s screen,
-in pixels.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<screenmmheight>
-
-Returns a decimal string giving the height of I<$widget>'s screen,
-in millimeters.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<screenmmwidth>
-
-Returns a decimal string giving the width of I<$widget>'s screen,
-in millimeters.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<screenvisual>
-
-Returns one of the following strings to indicate the default visual
-class for I<$widget>'s screen: B<directcolor>, B<grayscale>,
-B<pseudocolor>, B<staticcolor>, B<staticgray>, or
-B<truecolor>.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<screenwidth>
-
-Returns a decimal string giving the width of I<$widget>'s screen,
-in pixels.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<server>
-
-Returns a string containing information about the server for
-I<$widget>'s display.  The exact format of this string may vary
-from platform to platform.  For X servers the string
-has the form ``B<X>I<major>B<R>I<minor vendor vendorVersion>''
-where I<major> and I<minor> are the version and revision
-numbers provided by the server (e.g., B<X11R5>), I<vendor>
-is the name of the vendor for the server, and I<vendorRelease>
-is an integer release number provided by the server.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<toplevel>
-
-Returns the reference of the top-level window containing I<$widget>.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<Unbusy>
-
-Restores widget state after a call to  I<$widget>-E<gt>B<Busy>.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<UnmapWindow>
-
-Cause I<$widget> to be "unmapped" i.e. removed from the display.
-This does for any widget what I<$widget>-E<gt>withdraw does for
-toplevel widgets. May confuse the geometry manager (pack, grid, place, ...)
-that thinks it is managing the widget.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<update>
-
-One of two methods which are used to bring the application ``up to date''
-by entering the event loop repeated until all pending events
-(including idle callbacks) have been processed.
-
-The B<update> method is useful in scripts where you are performing a
-long-running computation but you still want the application to respond
-to events such as user interactions; if you occasionally call
-B<update> then user input will be processed during the next call to
-B<update>.
-
-=item  I<$widget>-E<gt>B<useinputmethods>( ?I<boolean>? )
-
-Sets and queries the state of whether Tk should use XIM (X Input
-Methods) for filtering events.  The resulting state is returned.
-XIM  is  used  in some locales (ie: Japanese, Korean), to handle
-special input devices.  This feature is only significant  on  X.
-If  XIM support is not available, this will always return 0.
-If  the  boolean  argument  is  omitted,  the  current  state is
-returned.  This is turned on by default for the main display.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<viewable>
-
-Returns 1 if I<$widget> and all of its ancestors up through the
-nearest toplevel window are mapped.  Returns 0 if any of these
-windows are not mapped.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<visual>
-
-Returns one of the following strings to indicate the visual
-class for I<$widget>: B<directcolor>, B<grayscale>,
-B<pseudocolor>, B<staticcolor>, B<staticgray>, or
-B<truecolor>.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<visualid>
-
-Returns the X identifier for the visual for $widget.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<visualsavailable>(?B<includeids>?)
-
-Returns a list whose elements describe the visuals available for
-I<$widget>'s screen.
-Each element consists of a visual class followed by an integer depth.
-The class has the same form as returned by I<$widget>-E<gt>B<visual>.
-The depth gives the number of bits per pixel in the visual.
-In addition, if the B<includeids> argument is provided, then the
-depth is followed by the X identifier for the visual.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<vrootheight>
-
-Returns the height of the virtual root window associated with I<$widget>
-if there is one;  otherwise returns the height of I<$widget>'s screen.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<vrootwidth>
-
-Returns the width of the virtual root window associated with I<$widget>
-if there is one;  otherwise returns the width of I<$widget>'s screen.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<vrootx>
-
-Returns the x-offset of the virtual root window associated with I<$widget>,
-relative to the root window of its screen.
-This is normally either zero or negative.
-Returns 0 if there is no virtual root window for I<$widget>.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<vrooty>
-
-Returns the y-offset of the virtual root window associated with I<$widget>,
-relative to the root window of its screen.
-This is normally either zero or negative.
-Returns 0 if there is no virtual root window for I<$widget>.
-
-=item I<$widget->>B<waitVariable>(\$I<name>)
-
-=item I<$widget->>B<waitVisibility>
-
-=item I<$widget->>B<waitWindow>
-
-The B<tk wait> methods wait for one of several things to happen,
-then it returns without taking any other actions.
-The return value is always an empty string.
-B<waitVariable> expects a reference to a perl
-variable and the command waits for that variable to be modified.
-This form is typically used to wait for a user to finish interacting
-with a dialog which sets the variable as part (possibly final)
-part of the interaction.
-B<waitVisibility> waits for a change in I<$widget>'s
-visibility state (as indicated by the arrival of a VisibilityNotify
-event).  This form is typically used to wait for a newly-created
-window to appear on the screen before taking some action.
-B<waitWindow> waits for I<$widget> to be destroyed.
-This form is typically used to wait for a user to finish interacting
-with a dialog box before using the result of that interaction.
-Note that creating and destroying the window each time a dialog is required
-makes code modular but imposes overhead which can be avoided by B<withdrawing>
-the window instead and using B<waitVisibility>.
-
-While the B<tk wait> methods are waiting they processes events in
-the normal fashion, so the application will continue to respond
-to user interactions.
-If an event handler invokes B<tkwait> again, the nested call
-to B<tkwait> must complete before the outer call can complete.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<Walk>(I<proc>?, I<arg, ...>?)
-
-Traverse a widget hierarchy starting at I<$widget> while executing the
-subroutine I<proc> to every visited widget. The arguments I<arg, ...>
-are supplied to the subroutine.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<Widget>(I<pathname>)
-
-Returns the widget reference for the given Tk path name, or C<undef>
-if the path name does not match a Tk widget. This is the inverse of
-the L</PathName> method. (This is an import from the C interface.)
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<width>
-
-Returns a decimal string giving I<$widget>'s width in pixels.
-When a window is first created its width will be 1 pixel;  the
-width will eventually be changed by a geometry manager to fulfill
-the window's needs.
-If you need the true width immediately after creating a widget,
-invoke B<update> to force the geometry manager to arrange it,
-or use I<$widget>-E<gt>B<reqwidth> to get the window's requested width
-instead of its actual width.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<windowingsystem>
-
-Returns the current Tk windowing system, one of B<x11> (X11-based),
-B<win32> (MS Windows), B<classic> (Mac OS Classic), or B<aqua> (Mac OS  X Aqua).
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<x>
-
-Returns a decimal string giving the x-coordinate, in I<$widget>'s
-parent, of the upper-left corner of I<$widget>'s border (or I<$widget>
-if it has no border).
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<y>
-
-Returns a decimal string giving the y-coordinate, in I<$widget>'s
-parent, of the
-upper-left corner of I<$widget>'s border (or I<$widget> if it
-has no border).
-
-=back
-
-=head1 CAVEATS
-
-The above documentaion on generic methods is incomplete.
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-atom, children, class, geometry, height, identifier, information, interpreters,
-mapped, parent, path name, screen, virtual root, width, window
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/WidgetDemo.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/WidgetDemo.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 32c7a101dc6..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/WidgetDemo.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-WidgetDemo() - create a standard widget demonstration window.
-
-=for pm demos/demos/widget_lib/WidgetDemo.pm
-
-=for category Implementation
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
- use WidgetDemo;
- my $TOP = $MW->WidgetDemo(
-     -name             => $demo,
-     -text             => 'Learn how to write a widget demonstration!',
-     -title            => 'WidgetDemo Demonstration',
-     -iconname         => 'WidgetDemo',
-     -geometry_manager => 'grid',
-     -font             => $FONT,
- );
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-This constructor builds a standard widget demonstration window, composed of
-three frames.  The top frame contains descriptive demonstration text.  The
-bottom frame contains the "Dismiss" and "See Code" buttons.  The middle frame
-is demonstration container, which came be managed by either the pack or grid
-geometry manager.
-
-The -text attribute is supplied to a Label widget, which is left-adjusted
-with -wraplength set to 4 inches.  If you require different specifications
-then pass an array to -text; the first element is the text string and
-the remaining array elements are standard Label widget attributes - WidgetDemo
-will rearrange things as required..
-
-    -text => ['Hello World!', qw/-wraplength 6i/],
-
-=head1 AUTHOR
-
-Steve Lidie <Stephen.O.Lidie@Lehigh.EDU>
-
-=head1 HISTORY
-
-lusol@Lehigh.EDU, LUCC, 97/02/11
-lusol@Lehigh.EDU, LUCC, 97/06/07
-Stephen.O.Lidie@Lehigh.EDU, LUCC, 97/06/07
- . Add Delegates() call that obviates the need for Top().  Many thanks to
-   Achim Bohnet for this patch.
- . Fix -title so that it works.
-
-=head1 COPYRIGHT
-
-Copyright (C) 1997 - 1998 Stephen O. Lidie. All rights reserved.
-
-This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
-the same terms as Perl itself.
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Wm.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Wm.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 395fdf07d22..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Wm.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,667 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1991-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Wm - Communicate with window manager
-
-=for category Tk Geometry Management
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >I<$toplevel>-E<gt>I<method>(?I<args>?)
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<wm> methods are used to interact with window managers in
-order to control such things as the title for a window, its geometry,
-or the increments in terms of which it may be resized.
-The B<wm> methods can take any of a number of different forms, depending on
-the particular I<method> argument.
-All of the forms expect I<$toplevel>, which must be a
-top-level window object.
-
-The legal forms for the B<wm> methods are:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<aspect>(?I<minNumer minDenom maxNumer maxDenom>?)
-
-If I<minNumer>, I<minDenom>, I<maxNumer>, and I<maxDenom>
-are all specified, then they will be passed to the window manager
-and the window manager should use them to enforce a range of
-acceptable aspect ratios for I<$toplevel>.  The aspect ratio of
-I<$toplevel> (width/length) will be constrained to lie
-between I<minNumer>/I<minDenom> and I<maxNumer>/I<maxDenom>.
-If I<minNumer> etc. are all specified as empty strings, then
-any existing aspect ratio restrictions are removed.
-If I<minNumer> etc. are specified, then the method returns an
-empty string.  Otherwise, it returns
-a array containing four elements, which are the current values
-of I<minNumer>, I<minDenom>, I<maxNumer>, and I<maxDenom>
-(if no aspect restrictions are in effect, then an empty string is
-returned).
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<attributes>( I<?args?> );
-
-This subcommand returns or  sets  platform  specific  attributes
-associated with a window.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<attributes>;
-
-Returns a list of the  platform specific  flags  and  their  values. 
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<attributes>( I<?option?> );
-
-Returns  the  value for the specific option.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<attributes>( I<?option value option value...?> );
-
-Sets one or more of the values. The values are as follows:
-
-On Windows, B<-disabled> gets or sets whether the window is in  a 
-disabled state. B<-toolwindow> gets or sets the style of the window 
-to toolwindow (as defined in the MSDN). B<-topmost> gets or sets 
-whether this is a topmost window (displays above all other windows).
-
-On Macintosh, there are currently no special attribute values.
-
-On Unix, there are currently no special attribute values.        
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<client>(?I<name>?)
-
-If I<name> is specified, this method stores I<name> (which
-should be the name of
-the host on which the application is executing) in I<$toplevel>'s
-B<WM_CLIENT_MACHINE> property for use by the window manager or
-session manager.
-The method returns an empty string in this case.
-If I<name> isn't specified, the method returns the last name
-set in a B<client> method for I<$toplevel>.
-If I<name> is specified as an empty string, the method deletes the
-B<WM_CLIENT_MACHINE> property from I<$toplevel>.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<colormapwindows>(?I<windowList>?)
-
-This method is used to manipulate the B<WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS>
-property, which provides information to the window managers about
-windows that have private colormaps.
-If I<windowList> isn't specified, the method returns a list
-whose elements are the names of the windows in the B<WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS>
-property.
-If I<windowList> is specified, it consists of a list of widgets;
-the method overwrites the B<WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS>
-property with the given windows and returns an empty string.
-The B<WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS> property should normally contain a
-list of the internal windows within I<$toplevel> whose colormaps differ
-from their parents.
-The order of the windows in the property indicates a priority order:
-the window manager will attempt to install as many colormaps as possible
-from the head of this list when I<$widget> gets the colormap focus.
-If I<$widget> is not included among the windows in I<windowList>,
-Tk implicitly adds it at the end of the B<WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS>
-property, so that its colormap is lowest in priority.
-If I<$widget>-E<gt>colormapwindows is not invoked, Tk will automatically set
-the property for each top-level window to all the internal windows
-whose colormaps differ from their parents, followed by the top-level
-itself;  the order of the internal windows is undefined.
-See the ICCCM documentation for more information on the
-B<WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS> property.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<command>(?I<value>?)
-
-If I<value> is specified, this method stores I<value> in I<$toplevel>'s
-B<WM_COMMAND> property for use by the window manager or
-session manager and returns an empty string.
-I<Value> must have proper list structure;  the elements should
-contain the words of the command used to invoke the application.
-If I<value> isn't specified then the method returns the last value
-set in a B<command> method for I<$toplevel>.
-If I<value> is specified as an empty string, the method
-deletes the B<WM_COMMAND> property from I<$toplevel>.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<deiconify>
-
-Arrange for I<$toplevel> to be displayed in normal (non-iconified) form.
-This is done by mapping the window.  If the window has never been
-mapped then this method will not map the window, but it will ensure
-that when the window is first mapped it will be displayed
-in de-iconified form.  Returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<focusmodel>(?B<active>|B<passive>?)
-
-If B<active> or B<passive> is supplied as an optional argument
-to the method, then it specifies the focus model for I<$toplevel>.
-In this case the method returns an empty string.  If no additional
-argument is supplied, then the method returns the current focus
-model for I<$toplevel>.
-An B<active> focus model means that I<$toplevel> will claim the
-input focus for itself or its descendants, even at times when
-the focus is currently in some other application.  B<Passive> means that
-I<$toplevel> will never claim the focus for itself:  the window manager
-should give the focus to I<$toplevel> at appropriate times.  However,
-once the focus has been given to I<$toplevel> or one of its descendants,
-the application may re-assign the focus among I<$toplevel>'s descendants.
-The focus model defaults to B<passive>, and Tk's B<focus> method
-assumes a passive model of focusing.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<frame>
-
-If I<$widget> has been reparented by the window manager into a
-decorative frame, the method returns the platform specific window
-identifier for the outermost frame that contains I<$toplevel> (the
-window whose parent is the root or virtual root).  If I<$toplevel>
-hasn't been reparented by the window manager then the method returns
-the platform specific window identifier for I<$toplevel>.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<geometry>(?I<newGeometry>?)
-
-If I<newGeometry> is specified, then the geometry of I<$toplevel>
-is changed and an empty string is returned.  Otherwise the current
-geometry for I<$toplevel> is returned (this is the most recent
-geometry specified either by manual resizing or
-in a B<geometry> method).  I<NewGeometry> has
-the form B<=>I<width>B<x>I<height>B<+->I<x>B<+->I<y>, where
-any of B<=>, I<width>B<x>I<height>, or B<+->I<x>B<+->I<y>
-may be omitted.  I<Width> and I<height> are positive integers
-specifying the desired dimensions of I<$toplevel>.  If I<$toplevel>
-is gridded (see L<"GRIDDED GEOMETRY MANAGEMENT"> below) then the dimensions
-are specified in grid units;  otherwise they are specified in pixel
-units.  I<X> and I<y> specify the desired location of
-I<$toplevel> on the screen, in pixels.
-If I<x> is preceded by B<+>, it specifies
-the number of pixels between the left edge of the screen and the left
-edge of I<$toplevel>'s border;  if preceded by B<-> then
-I<x> specifies the number of pixels
-between the right edge of the screen and the right edge of I<$toplevel>'s
-border.  If I<y> is preceded by B<+> then it specifies the
-number of pixels between the top of the screen and the top
-of I<$toplevel>'s border;  if I<y> is preceded by B<-> then
-it specifies the number of pixels between the bottom of I<$toplevel>'s
-border and the bottom of the screen.
-If I<newGeometry> is specified as an empty string then any
-existing user-specified geometry for I<$toplevel> is cancelled, and
-the window will revert to the size requested internally by its
-widgets.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<wmGrid>(?I<baseWidth,baseHeight,widthInc,heightInc>?)
-
-This method indicates that I<$toplevel> is to be managed as a
-gridded window.
-It also specifies the relationship between grid units and pixel units.
-I<BaseWidth> and I<baseHeight> specify the number of grid
-units corresponding to the pixel dimensions requested internally
-by I<$toplevel> using B<Tk_GeometryRequest>.  I<WidthInc>
-and I<heightInc> specify the number of pixels in each horizontal
-and vertical grid unit.
-These four values determine a range of acceptable sizes for
-I<$toplevel>, corresponding to grid-based widths and heights
-that are non-negative integers.
-Tk will pass this information to the window manager;  during
-manual resizing, the window manager will restrict the window's size
-to one of these acceptable sizes.
-Furthermore, during manual resizing the window manager will display
-the window's current size in terms of grid units rather than pixels.
-If I<baseWidth> etc. are all specified as empty strings, then
-I<$toplevel> will no longer be managed as a gridded window.  If
-I<baseWidth> etc. are specified then the return value is an
-empty string.
-Otherwise the return value is a array containing
-four elements corresponding to the current I<baseWidth>,
-I<baseHeight>, I<widthInc>, and I<heightInc>;  if
-I<$toplevel> is not currently gridded, then an empty string
-is returned.
-Note: this command should not be needed very often, since the
-B<Tk_SetGrid> library procedure and the B<-setgrid> option
-provide easier access to the same functionality.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<group>(?I<$widget>?)
-
-If I<$widget> is specified, it is the the leader of
-a group of related windows.  The window manager may use this information,
-for example, to unmap all of the windows in a group when the group's
-leader is iconified.  I<$widget> may be specified as an empty string to
-remove I<$toplevel> from any group association.  If I<$widget> is
-specified then the method returns an empty string;  otherwise it
-returns the I<$toplevel>'s current group leader, or an empty
-string if I<$toplevel> isn't part of any group.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<iconbitmap>(?I<bitmap>?)
-
-If I<bitmap> is specified, then it names a bitmap in the standard
-forms accepted by Tk (see the B<Tk_GetBitmap> documentation for details).
-This I<black and white> bitmap is passed to the window manager to be displayed
-in I<$toplevel>'s icon, and the method returns an empty string.  If
-an empty string is specified for I<bitmap>, then any current icon
-bitmap or image is cancelled for I<$toplevel>.
-If I<bitmap> is specified then the method returns an empty string.
-Otherwise it returns the name of
-the current icon bitmap associated with I<$toplevel>, or an empty
-string if I<$toplevel> has no icon bitmap.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<iconify>
-
-Arrange for I<$toplevel> to be iconified.  It I<$toplevel> hasn't
-yet been mapped for the first time, this method will arrange for
-it to appear in the iconified state when it is eventually mapped.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<iconimage>(?I<image>?)
-
-If I<image> is specified, then it names a normal Tk image.
-This image is rendered into a private I<coloured> bitmap which is passed to
-the window manager to be displayed in I<$toplevel>'s icon, and the method returns
-an empty string. If an empty string is specified for I<image>, then any current
-icon bitmap or image is cancelled for I<$toplevel>.
-If I<image> is specified then the method returns an empty string.
-Otherwise it returns the name of
-the current icon image associated with I<$toplevel>, or an empty
-string if I<$toplevel> has no icon image.
-The private pixmap is not pre-cleared so images which are partly "transparent"
-display rubbish in their transparent parts.
-
-The sizes of images that can be used as icons in this manner are platform
-dependant. On Win32 this sets the "large" icon, which should be 32x32, it
-will automatically be scaled down to 16x16 for use as a small icon.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<iconmask>(?I<bitmap>?)
-
-If I<bitmap> is specified, then it names a bitmap in the standard
-forms accepted by Tk (see the B<Tk_GetBitmap> documentation for details).
-This bitmap is passed to the window manager to be used as a mask
-in conjunction with the B<iconbitmap> option:  where the mask
-has zeroes no icon will be displayed;  where it has ones, the bits
-from the icon bitmap will be displayed.  If
-an empty string is specified for I<bitmap> then any current icon
-mask is cancelled for I<$toplevel> (this is equivalent to specifying
-a bitmap of all ones).  If I<bitmap> is specified
-then the method returns an empty string.  Otherwise it
-returns the name of the current icon mask associated with
-I<$toplevel>, or an empty string if no mask is in effect.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<iconname>(?I<newName>?)
-
-If I<newName> is specified, then it is passed to the window
-manager;  the window manager should display I<newName> inside
-the icon associated with I<$toplevel>.  In this case an empty
-string is returned as result.  If I<newName> isn't specified
-then the method returns the current icon name for I<$toplevel>,
-or an empty string if no icon name has been specified (in this
-case the window manager will normally display the window's title,
-as specified with the B<title> method).
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<iconphoto>(?-default? I<image1> ?I<image2>
-...?)
-
-Sets the titlebar icon for  window  based  on  the  named  photo
-images.  If -default is specified, this is applied to all future
-created toplevels as well.  The data in the images is taken as a
-snapshot  at  the  time  of invocation.  If the images are later
-changed, this is not reflected to the titlebar icons.   Multiple
-images  are  accepted to allow different images sizes (eg, 16x16
-and 32x32) to be provided.  The window manager  may  scale  pro-
-vided icons to an appropriate size.
-
-On Windows, the images are packed into a Windows icon structure.
-This will override an ico specified to wm iconbitmap,  and  vice
-versa. [NOTE: This is not implemented yet!]
-
-On  X, the images are arranged into the _NET_WM_ICON X property,
-which most modern window managers support.  A wm iconbitmap  may
-exist  simultaneously.  It is recommended to use not more than 2
-icons, placing the larger icon first.
-
-On Macintosh, this is currently does nothing.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<iconposition>(?I<x y>?)
-
-If I<x> and I<y> are specified, they are passed to the window
-manager as a hint about where to position the icon for I<$toplevel>.
-In this case an empty string is returned.  If I<x> and I<y> are
-specified as empty strings then any existing icon position hint is cancelled.
-If neither I<x> nor I<y> is specified, then the method returns
-a array containing two values, which are the current icon position
-hints (if no hints are in effect then an empty string is returned).
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<iconwindow>(?I<$widget>?)
-
-If I<$widget> is specified, it is a window to
-use as icon for I<$toplevel>: when I<$toplevel> is iconified then
-I<$widget> will be mapped to serve as icon, and when I<$toplevel>
-is de-iconified then I<$widget> will be unmapped again.  If
-I<$widget> is specified as an empty string then any existing
-icon window association for I<$toplevel> will be cancelled.  If
-the I<$widget> argument is specified then an empty string is
-returned.  Otherwise the method returns the
-current icon window for I<$toplevel>, or an empty string if there
-is no icon window currently specified for I<$toplevel>.
-Button press events are disabled for I<$toplevel> as long as it is
-an icon window;  this is needed in order to allow window managers
-to ``own'' those events.
-Note: not all window managers support the notion of an icon window.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<maxsize>(?I<width,height>?)
-
-If I<width> and I<height> are specified, they give
-the maximum permissible dimensions for I<$toplevel>.
-For gridded windows the dimensions are specified in
-grid units;  otherwise they are specified in pixel units.
-The window manager will restrict the window's dimensions to be
-less than or equal to I<width> and I<height>.
-If I<width> and I<height> are
-specified, then the method returns an empty string.  Otherwise
-it returns a array with two elements, which are the
-maximum width and height currently in effect.
-The maximum size defaults to the size of the screen.
-If resizing has been disabled with the B<resizable> method,
-then this method has no effect.
-See the sections on geometry management below for more information.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<minsize>(?I<width,height>?)
-
-If I<width> and I<height> are specified, they give the
-minimum permissible dimensions for I<$toplevel>.
-For gridded windows the dimensions are specified in
-grid units;  otherwise they are specified in pixel units.
-The window manager will restrict the window's dimensions to be
-greater than or equal to I<width> and I<height>.
-If I<width> and I<height> are
-specified, then the method returns an empty string.  Otherwise
-it returns a array with two elements, which are the
-minimum width and height currently in effect.
-The minimum size defaults to one pixel in each dimension.
-If resizing has been disabled with the B<resizable> method,
-then this method has no effect.
-See the sections on geometry management below for more information.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<overrideredirect(?>I<boolean>?)
-
-If I<boolean> is specified, it must have a proper boolean form and
-the override-redirect flag for I<$toplevel> is set to that value.
-If I<boolean> is not specified then B<1> or B<0> is
-returned to indicate whether or not the override-redirect flag
-is currently set for I<$toplevel>.
-Setting the override-redirect flag for a window causes
-it to be ignored by the window manager;  among other things, this means
-that the window will not be reparented from the root window into a
-decorative frame and the user will not be able to manipulate the
-window using the normal window manager mechanisms.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<positionfrom>(?I<who>?)
-
-If I<who> is specified, it must be either B<program> or
-B<user>, or an abbreviation of one of these two.  It indicates
-whether I<$toplevel>'s current position was requested by the
-program or by the user.  Many window managers ignore program-requested
-initial positions and ask the user to manually position the window;  if
-B<user> is specified then the window manager should position the
-window at the given place without asking the user for assistance.
-If I<who> is specified as an empty string, then the current position
-source is cancelled.
-If I<who> is specified, then the method returns an empty string.
-Otherwise it returns B<user> or $widget to indicate the
-source of the window's current position, or an empty string if
-no source has been specified yet.  Most window managers interpret
-``no source'' as equivalent to B<program>.
-Tk will automatically set the position source to B<user>
-when a B<geometry> method is invoked, unless the source has
-been set explicitly to B<program>.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<protocol>(?I<name>?,?I<callback>?)
-
-This method is used to manage window manager protocols such as
-B<WM_DELETE_WINDOW>.
-I<Name> is the name of an atom corresponding to a window manager
-protocol, such as B<WM_DELETE_WINDOW> or B<WM_SAVE_YOURSELF>
-or B<WM_TAKE_FOCUS>.
-If both I<name> and I<callback> are specified, then I<callback>
-is associated with the protocol specified by I<name>.
-I<Name> will be added to I<$toplevel>'s B<WM_PROTOCOLS>
-property to tell the window manager that the application has a
-protocol handler for I<name>, and I<callback> will
-be invoked in the future whenever the window manager sends a
-message to the client for that protocol.
-In this case the method returns an empty string.
-If I<name> is specified but I<callback> isn't, then the current
-callback for I<name> is returned, or an empty string if there
-is no handler defined for I<name>.
-If I<callback> is specified as an empty string then the current
-handler for I<name> is deleted and it is removed from the
-B<WM_PROTOCOLS> property on I<$toplevel>;  an empty string is
-returned.
-Lastly, if neither I<name> nor I<callback> is specified, the
-method returns a list of all the protocols for which handlers
-are currently defined for I<$toplevel>.
-
-=over 8
-
-Tk always defines a protocol handler for B<WM_DELETE_WINDOW>, even if
-you haven't asked for one with B<protocol>.
-If a B<WM_DELETE_WINDOW> message arrives when you haven't defined
-a handler, then Tk handles the message by destroying the window for
-which it was received.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<resizable>(?I<width,height>?)
-
-This method controls whether or not the user may interactively
-resize a top-level window.  If I<width> and I<height> are
-specified, they are boolean values that determine whether the
-width and height of I<$toplevel> may be modified by the user.
-In this case the method returns an empty string.
-If I<width> and I<height> are omitted then the method
-returns a list with two 0/1 elements that indicate whether the
-width and height of I<$toplevel> are currently resizable.
-By default, windows are resizable in both dimensions.
-If resizing is disabled, then the window's size will be the size
-from the most recent interactive resize or B<geometry>
-method.  If there has been no such operation then
-the window's natural size will be used.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<sizefrom>(?I<who>?)
-
-If I<who> is specified, it must be either B<program> or
-B<user>, or an abbreviation of one of these two.  It indicates
-whether I<$toplevel>'s current size was requested by the
-program or by the user.  Some window managers ignore program-requested
-sizes and ask the user to manually size the window;  if
-B<user> is specified then the window manager should give the
-window its specified size without asking the user for assistance.
-If I<who> is specified as an empty string, then the current size
-source is cancelled.
-If I<who> is specified, then the method returns an empty string.
-Otherwise it returns B<user> or $widget to indicate the
-source of the window's current size, or an empty string if
-no source has been specified yet.  Most window managers interpret
-``no source'' as equivalent to B<program>.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<stackorder>( I<?isabove|isbelow $toplevel?> );
-
-The stackorder command returns a list  of  toplevel  windows  in
-stacking  order,  from lowest to highest. When a single toplevel
-window is passed, the returned list recursively includes all  of
-the  window's  children that are toplevels. Only those toplevels
-that are currently mapped  to  the  screen  are  returned.   The
-stackorder command can also be used to determine if one toplevel
-is positioned above or below a second toplevel.  When two window
-arguments  separated  by either isabove or isbelow are passed, a
-boolean result indicates whether or not the first window is
-currently above or below the second window in the stacking order.
-
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<state>(?I<newstate>?)
-
-If I<newstate> is specified, the window will be set to
-the new state, otherwise it returns the current state of
-I<$toplevel>: either B<normal>, B<iconic>, B<withdrawn>, B<icon>, or
-(Windows only) B<zoomed>. The
-difference between B<iconic> and B<icon> is that B<iconic> refers to a
-window that has been iconified (e.g., with the B<iconify> method)
-while B<icon> refers to a window whose only purpose is to serve as the
-icon for some other window (via the B<iconwindow> method). The
-B<icon> state cannot be set.
-
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<title>(?I<string>?)
-
-If I<string> is specified, then it will be passed to the window
-manager for use as the title for I<$toplevel> (the window manager
-should display this string in I<$toplevel>'s title bar).  In this
-case the method returns an empty string.  If I<string> isn't
-specified then the method returns the current title for the
-I<$toplevel>.  The title for a window defaults to its name.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<transient>(?I<master>?)
-
-If I<master> is specified, then the window manager is informed
-that I<$toplevel> is a transient window (e.g. pull-down menu) working
-on behalf of I<master> (where I<master> is
-a top-level window).  Some window managers will use
-this information to manage I<$toplevel> specially.  If I<master>
-is specified as an empty string then I<$toplevel> is marked as not
-being a transient window any more.  If I<master> is specified,
-then the method returns an empty string.  Otherwise the method
-returns the path name of I<$toplevel>'s current master, or an
-empty string if I<$toplevel> isn't currently a transient window.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<withdraw>
-
-Arranges for I<$toplevel> to be withdrawn from the screen.  This
-causes the window to be unmapped and forgotten about by the window
-manager.  If the window
-has never been mapped, then this method
-causes the window to be mapped in the withdrawn state.  Not all
-window managers appear to know how to handle windows that are
-mapped in the withdrawn state.
-Note: it sometimes seems to be necessary to withdraw a
-window and then re-map it (e.g. with B<deiconify>) to get some
-window managers to pay attention to changes in window attributes
-such as group.
-
-=item I<$toplevel>-E<gt>B<wrapper>
-
-Returns the window id of the wrapper window in which Tk has placed
-I<$toplevel>. This is the id by which window manager will know
-I<$toplevel>, and so is appropriate place to add X properties.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 ICON SIZES
-
-The sizes of bitmaps/images that can be used as icons in this manner are platform
-and window manager dependant. Unix window managers are typically more tolerant
-than Win32. It is possible that coloured C<iconimage> icons may cause problems
-on some X window managers.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item * Win32
-
-C<iconimage> and C<iconbitmap> set the "large" icon, which should be
-32x32, it will automatically be scaled down to 16x16 for use as a small icon.
-Win32 ignores C<iconwin> requests.
-
-=item * KDE's "kwm"
-
-Accepts coloured C<iconimage> and black and white C<iconbitmap> but
-will scale either to a small (14x14?) icon. Kwm ignores C<iconwin>.
-
-=item * Sun's "olwm" or "olvwm"
-
-Honours C<iconwin> which will override C<iconimage> or C<iconbitmap>.
-Coloured images work.
-
-=item * Sun's CDE window manager
-
-Coloured images work. ...
-
-=back
-
-=head1 GEOMETRY MANAGEMENT
-
-By default a top-level window appears on the screen in its
-I<natural size>, which is the one determined internally by its
-widgets and geometry managers.
-If the natural size of a top-level window changes, then the window's size
-changes to match.
-A top-level window can be given a size other than its natural size in two ways.
-First, the user can resize the window manually using the facilities
-of the window manager, such as resize handles.
-Second, the application can request a particular size for a
-top-level window using the B<geometry> method.
-These two cases are handled identically by Tk;  in either case,
-the requested size overrides the natural size.
-You can return the window to its natural by invoking B<geometry>
-with an empty I<geometry> string.
-
-Normally a top-level window can have any size from one pixel in each
-dimension up to the size of its screen.
-However, you can use the B<minsize> and B<maxsize> methods
-to limit the range of allowable sizes.
-The range set by B<minsize> and B<maxsize> applies to
-all forms of resizing, including the window's natural size as
-well as manual resizes and the B<geometry> method.
-You can also use the method B<resizable> to completely
-disable interactive resizing in one or both dimensions.
-
-=head1 GRIDDED GEOMETRY MANAGEMENT
-
-Gridded geometry management occurs when one of the widgets of an
-application supports a range of useful sizes.
-This occurs, for example, in a text editor where the scrollbars,
-menus, and other adornments are fixed in size but the edit widget
-can support any number of lines of text or characters per line.
-In this case, it is usually desirable to let the user specify the
-number of lines or characters-per-line, either with the
-B<geometry> method or by interactively resizing the window.
-In the case of text, and in other interesting cases also, only
-discrete sizes of the window make sense, such as integral numbers
-of lines and characters-per-line;  arbitrary pixel sizes are not useful.
-
-Gridded geometry management provides support for this kind of
-application.
-Tk (and the window manager) assume that there is a grid of some
-sort within the application and that the application should be
-resized in terms of I<grid units> rather than pixels.
-Gridded geometry management is typically invoked by turning on
-the B<setGrid> option for a widget;  it can also be invoked
-with the B<wmGrid> method or by calling B<Tk_SetGrid>.
-In each of these approaches the particular widget (or sometimes
-code in the application as a whole) specifies the relationship between
-integral grid sizes for the window and pixel sizes.
-To return to non-gridded geometry management, invoke
-B<grid> with empty argument strings.
-
-When gridded geometry management is enabled then all the dimensions specified
-in B<minsize>, B<maxsize>, and B<geometry> methods
-are treated as grid units rather than pixel units.
-Interactive resizing is also carried out in even numbers of grid units
-rather than pixels.
-
-=head1 BUGS
-
-Most existing window managers appear to have bugs that affect the
-operation of the B<wm> methods.  For example, some changes won't
-take effect if the window is already active:  the window will have
-to be withdrawn and de-iconified in order to make the change happen.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::Widget|Tk::Widget>
-L<Tk::tixWm|Tk::tixWm>
-L<Tk::Mwm|Tk::Mwm>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-aspect ratio, deiconify, focus model, geometry, grid, group, icon, iconify, increments, position, size, title, top-level window, units, window manager
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/X.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/X.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index e6c7614a72c..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/X.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,373 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::X - Perl extension for Xlib constants.
-
-=for pm Xlib/X/X.pm
-
-=for category Other Modules and Languages
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-  use Tk::X;
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-A module generated by h2xs. It exists to export Xlib #define type
-constants for possible use with Tk::Xlib.
-
-=head1 Exported constants
-
-  Above
-  AllTemporary
-  AllocAll
-  AllocNone
-  AllowExposures
-  AlreadyGrabbed
-  Always
-  AnyButton
-  AnyKey
-  AnyModifier
-  AnyPropertyType
-  ArcChord
-  ArcPieSlice
-  AsyncBoth
-  AsyncKeyboard
-  AsyncPointer
-  AutoRepeatModeDefault
-  AutoRepeatModeOff
-  AutoRepeatModeOn
-  BadAccess
-  BadAlloc
-  BadAtom
-  BadColor
-  BadCursor
-  BadDrawable
-  BadFont
-  BadGC
-  BadIDChoice
-  BadImplementation
-  BadLength
-  BadMatch
-  BadName
-  BadPixmap
-  BadRequest
-  BadValue
-  BadWindow
-  Below
-  BottomIf
-  Button1
-  Button1Mask
-  Button1MotionMask
-  Button2
-  Button2Mask
-  Button2MotionMask
-  Button3
-  Button3Mask
-  Button3MotionMask
-  Button4
-  Button4Mask
-  Button4MotionMask
-  Button5
-  Button5Mask
-  Button5MotionMask
-  ButtonMotionMask
-  ButtonPress
-  ButtonPressMask
-  ButtonRelease
-  ButtonReleaseMask
-  CWBackPixel
-  CWBackPixmap
-  CWBackingPixel
-  CWBackingPlanes
-  CWBackingStore
-  CWBitGravity
-  CWBorderPixel
-  CWBorderPixmap
-  CWBorderWidth
-  CWColormap
-  CWCursor
-  CWDontPropagate
-  CWEventMask
-  CWHeight
-  CWOverrideRedirect
-  CWSaveUnder
-  CWSibling
-  CWStackMode
-  CWWidth
-  CWWinGravity
-  CWX
-  CWY
-  CapButt
-  CapNotLast
-  CapProjecting
-  CapRound
-  CenterGravity
-  CirculateNotify
-  CirculateRequest
-  ClientMessage
-  ClipByChildren
-  ColormapChangeMask
-  ColormapInstalled
-  ColormapNotify
-  ColormapUninstalled
-  Complex
-  ConfigureNotify
-  ConfigureRequest
-  ControlMapIndex
-  ControlMask
-  Convex
-  CoordModeOrigin
-  CoordModePrevious
-  CopyFromParent
-  CreateNotify
-  CurrentTime
-  CursorShape
-  DefaultBlanking
-  DefaultExposures
-  DestroyAll
-  DestroyNotify
-  DirectColor
-  DisableAccess
-  DisableScreenInterval
-  DisableScreenSaver
-  DoBlue
-  DoGreen
-  DoRed
-  DontAllowExposures
-  DontPreferBlanking
-  EastGravity
-  EnableAccess
-  EnterNotify
-  EnterWindowMask
-  EvenOddRule
-  Expose
-  ExposureMask
-  FamilyChaos
-  FamilyDECnet
-  FamilyInternet
-  FillOpaqueStippled
-  FillSolid
-  FillStippled
-  FillTiled
-  FirstExtensionError
-  FocusChangeMask
-  FocusIn
-  FocusOut
-  FontChange
-  FontLeftToRight
-  FontRightToLeft
-  ForgetGravity
-  GCArcMode
-  GCBackground
-  GCCapStyle
-  GCClipMask
-  GCClipXOrigin
-  GCClipYOrigin
-  GCDashList
-  GCDashOffset
-  GCFillRule
-  GCFillStyle
-  GCFont
-  GCForeground
-  GCFunction
-  GCGraphicsExposures
-  GCJoinStyle
-  GCLastBit
-  GCLineStyle
-  GCLineWidth
-  GCPlaneMask
-  GCStipple
-  GCSubwindowMode
-  GCTile
-  GCTileStipXOrigin
-  GCTileStipYOrigin
-  GXand
-  GXandInverted
-  GXandReverse
-  GXclear
-  GXcopy
-  GXcopyInverted
-  GXequiv
-  GXinvert
-  GXnand
-  GXnoop
-  GXnor
-  GXor
-  GXorInverted
-  GXorReverse
-  GXset
-  GXxor
-  GrabFrozen
-  GrabInvalidTime
-  GrabModeAsync
-  GrabModeSync
-  GrabNotViewable
-  GrabSuccess
-  GraphicsExpose
-  GravityNotify
-  GrayScale
-  HostDelete
-  HostInsert
-  IncludeInferiors
-  InputFocus
-  InputOnly
-  InputOutput
-  IsUnmapped
-  IsUnviewable
-  IsViewable
-  JoinBevel
-  JoinMiter
-  JoinRound
-  KBAutoRepeatMode
-  KBBellDuration
-  KBBellPercent
-  KBBellPitch
-  KBKey
-  KBKeyClickPercent
-  KBLed
-  KBLedMode
-  KeyPress
-  KeyPressMask
-  KeyRelease
-  KeyReleaseMask
-  KeymapNotify
-  KeymapStateMask
-  LASTEvent
-  LSBFirst
-  LastExtensionError
-  LeaveNotify
-  LeaveWindowMask
-  LedModeOff
-  LedModeOn
-  LineDoubleDash
-  LineOnOffDash
-  LineSolid
-  LockMapIndex
-  LockMask
-  LowerHighest
-  MSBFirst
-  MapNotify
-  MapRequest
-  MappingBusy
-  MappingFailed
-  MappingKeyboard
-  MappingModifier
-  MappingNotify
-  MappingPointer
-  MappingSuccess
-  Mod1MapIndex
-  Mod1Mask
-  Mod2MapIndex
-  Mod2Mask
-  Mod3MapIndex
-  Mod3Mask
-  Mod4MapIndex
-  Mod4Mask
-  Mod5MapIndex
-  Mod5Mask
-  MotionNotify
-  NoEventMask
-  NoExpose
-  NoSymbol
-  Nonconvex
-  None
-  NorthEastGravity
-  NorthGravity
-  NorthWestGravity
-  NotUseful
-  NotifyAncestor
-  NotifyDetailNone
-  NotifyGrab
-  NotifyHint
-  NotifyInferior
-  NotifyNonlinear
-  NotifyNonlinearVirtual
-  NotifyNormal
-  NotifyPointer
-  NotifyPointerRoot
-  NotifyUngrab
-  NotifyVirtual
-  NotifyWhileGrabbed
-  Opposite
-  OwnerGrabButtonMask
-  ParentRelative
-  PlaceOnBottom
-  PlaceOnTop
-  PointerMotionHintMask
-  PointerMotionMask
-  PointerRoot
-  PointerWindow
-  PreferBlanking
-  PropModeAppend
-  PropModePrepend
-  PropModeReplace
-  PropertyChangeMask
-  PropertyDelete
-  PropertyNewValue
-  PropertyNotify
-  PseudoColor
-  RaiseLowest
-  ReparentNotify
-  ReplayKeyboard
-  ReplayPointer
-  ResizeRedirectMask
-  ResizeRequest
-  RetainPermanent
-  RetainTemporary
-  RevertToNone
-  RevertToParent
-  RevertToPointerRoot
-  ScreenSaverActive
-  ScreenSaverReset
-  SelectionClear
-  SelectionNotify
-  SelectionRequest
-  SetModeDelete
-  SetModeInsert
-  ShiftMapIndex
-  ShiftMask
-  SouthEastGravity
-  SouthGravity
-  SouthWestGravity
-  StaticColor
-  StaticGravity
-  StaticGray
-  StippleShape
-  StructureNotifyMask
-  SubstructureNotifyMask
-  SubstructureRedirectMask
-  Success
-  SyncBoth
-  SyncKeyboard
-  SyncPointer
-  TileShape
-  TopIf
-  TrueColor
-  UnmapGravity
-  UnmapNotify
-  Unsorted
-  VisibilityChangeMask
-  VisibilityFullyObscured
-  VisibilityNotify
-  VisibilityPartiallyObscured
-  VisibilityUnobscured
-  WestGravity
-  WhenMapped
-  WindingRule
-  XYBitmap
-  XYPixmap
-  X_H
-  X_PROTOCOL
-  X_PROTOCOL_REVISION
-  YSorted
-  YXBanded
-  YXSorted
-  ZPixmap
-
-=head1 AUTHOR
-
-Nick Ing-Simmons ran h2xs ...
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/X11Font.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/X11Font.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index bd5b353abe0..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/X11Font.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,88 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Font - a class for finding X Fonts
-
-=for pm Tk/X11Font.pm
-
-=for category Tk Generic Methods
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
- use Tk::X11Font;
-
- $font = $widget->X11Font(foundry => 'adobe',
-                       family  => 'times',
-                       point   => 120
-                      );
-
- $font = $widget->X11Font('*-courier-medium-r-normal-*-*');
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-   This module can be use to interrogate the X server what fonts are
-   avaliable.
-
-=head1 METHODS
-
-=head2 Foundry( [ $val ] )
-
-=head2 Family( [ $val ] )
-
-=head2 Weight( [ $val ] )
-
-=head2 Slant( [ $val ] )
-
-=head2 Swidth( [ $val ] )
-
-=head2 Adstyle( [ $val ] )
-
-=head2 Pixel( [ $val ] )
-
-=head2 Point( [ $val ] )
-
-=head2 Xres( [ $val ] )
-
-=head2 Yres( [ $val ] )
-
-=head2 Space( [ $val ] )
-
-=head2 Avgwidth( [ $val ] )
-
-=head2 Registry( [ $val ] )
-
-=head2 Encoding( [ $val ] )
-
-Set the given field in the font name to C<$val> if given and return the current
-or previous value
-
-=head2 Name( [ $max ] )
-
-In a list context it returns a list of all font names that match the
-fields given. It will return a maximum of C<$max> names, or 128 if
-$max is not given.
-
-In a scalar contex it returns the first matching name or undef
-
-=head2 Clone( [ key => value, [ ...]] )
-
-Create a duplicate of the curent font object and modify the given fields
-
-=head1 AUTHOR
-
-Graham Barr <Graham.Barr@tiuk.ti.com>
-
-=head1 HISTORY
-
-11-Jan-96 Initial version
-
-08-Nov-98 Renamed for Tk800.012
-
-=head1 COPYRIGHT
-
-Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Graham Barr. All rights reserved. This program is free
-software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the same terms
-as Perl itself.
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Xrm.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Xrm.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 55f885bc849..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/Xrm.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Xrm - X Resource/Defaults/Options routines that obey the rules.
-
-=for pm Tk/Xrm.pm
-
-=for category Creating and Configuring Widgets
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-   use Tk;
-   use Tk::Xrm;
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-Using this modules causes Tk's Option code to be replaced by versions
-which use routines from <X11/Xresource.h> - i.e. same ones every other
-X toolkit uses.
-
-Result is that "matching" of name/Class with the options database follows
-the same rules as other X toolkits. This makes it more predictable,
-and makes it easier to have a single ~/.Xdefaults file which gives sensible
-results for both Tk and (say) Motif applications.
-
-=head1 BUGS
-
-Currently B<optionAdd>(I<key> =E<gt> I<value>?, I<priority>?) ignores optional
-priority completely and just does XrmPutStringResource().
-Perhaps it should be more subtle and do XrmMergeDatabases() or
-XrmCombineDatabase().
-
-This version is a little slower than Tk's re-invention but there is
-more optimization that can be done.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::option|Tk::option>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-database, option, priority, retrieve
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/after.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/after.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 97c61ba380b..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/after.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,168 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::after - Execute a command after a time delay
-
-=for category  Binding Events and Callbacks
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<  >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<after>(I<ms>)
-
-S<  >I<$id> = I<$widget>-E<gt>B<after>(I<ms>?,I<callback>?)
-
-S<  >I<$id> = I<$widget>-E<gt>B<repeat>(I<ms>?,I<callback>?)
-
-S<  >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<afterCancel>(I<$id>)
-
-S<  >I<$id> = I<$widget>-E<gt>B<afterIdle>(I<callback>)
-
-S<  >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<afterInfo>?(I<$id>)?
-
-S<  >I<$id>-E<gt>B<time>(?I<delay>?)
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-This method is used to delay execution of the program or to execute
-a callback in background sometime in the future.
-
-In perl/Tk I<$widget>-E<gt>B<after> is implemented via the class C<Tk::After>,
-and callbacks are associated with I<$widget>, and are automatically cancelled
-when the widget is destroyed. An almost identical interface, but without
-automatic cancel, and without repeat is provided via Tk::after method.
-
-=head2 Internal Details
-
-The internal Tk::After class has the following synopsis:
-
-  $id = Tk::After->new($widget, tid, $time, 'once',   callback);
-  $id = Tk::After->new($widget, tid, $time, 'repeat', callback);
-  $id->cancel;
-  $id->time(?delay?);
-
-$id is a Tk::After object, an array of 5 elements:	
-
-I<$widget> is the parent widget reference.
-
-I<tid> is the internal timer id, a unique string.
-
-I<$time> is the string 'idle', representing an idle queue timer, or a
-integer millisecond value.
- 
-I<once> or I<repeat> specifies whether the timer is a one-time B<after>
-event, or a repeating B<repeat> event.
-
-I<callback> specifies a Perl/Tk Tk::Callback object.
-
-=head1 Changing a B<repeat> timer interval 
-
-It's posible to change a B<repeat> timer's delay value, or even cancel
-any timer, using the B<time> method. If I<delay> is specified and
-non-zero, a new timer delay is established.  If I<delay> is zero the
-timer event is canceled just as if I<$id>-E<gt>B<cancel> were invoked.
-In all cases the current millisecond timer delay is returned.
-
-Note: the new timer delay will take effect on the I<subsequent> timer
-event - this command will not cancel the pending timer event and
-re-issue it with the new delay time. 
-
-=head1 The after() method has several forms as follows:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<after>(I<ms>)
-
-The value I<ms> must be an integer giving a time in milliseconds.
-The command sleeps for I<ms> milliseconds and then returns.
-While the command is sleeping the application does not respond to
-events.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<after>(I<ms>,I<callback>)
-
-In this form the command returns immediately, but it arranges
-for I<callback> be executed I<ms> milliseconds later as an
-event handler.
-The callback will be executed exactly once, at the given time.
-The command will be executed in context of I<$widget>.
-If an error occurs while executing the delayed command then the
-L<Tk::Error|Tk::Error> mechanism is used to report the error.
-The B<after> command returns an identifier (an object in the perl/Tk
-case) that can be used to cancel the delayed command using B<afterCancel>.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<repeat>(I<ms>,I<callback>)
-
-In this form the command returns immediately, but it arranges
-for I<callback> be executed I<ms> milliseconds later as an
-event handler. After I<callback> has executed it is re-scheduled,
-to be executed in a futher I<ms>, and so on until it is cancelled.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<afterCancel>(I<$id>)
-
-=item I<$id>-E<gt>B<cancel>
-
-Cancels the execution of a delayed command that
-was previously scheduled.
-I<$id> indicates which command should be canceled;  it must have
-been the return value from a previous B<after> command.
-If the command given by I<$id> has already been executed (and
-is not scheduled to be executed again) then B<afterCancel>
-has no effect.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<afterCancel>(I<callback>)
-
-I<This form is not robust in perl/Tk - its use is deprecated.>
-This command should also cancel the execution of a delayed command.
-The I<callback> argument is compared with pending callbacks,
-if a match is found, that callback is
-cancelled and will never be executed;  if no such callback is
-currently pending then the B<afterCancel> has no effect.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<afterIdle>(I<callback>)
-
-Arranges for I<callback> to be evaluated later as an idle callback.
-The script will be run exactly once, the next time the event
-loop is entered and there are no events to process.
-The command returns an identifier that can be used
-to cancel the delayed command using B<afterCancel>.
-If an error occurs while executing the script then the
-L<Tk::Error|Tk::Error> mechanism is used to report the error.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<afterInfo>?(I<$id>)?
-
-This command returns information about existing event handlers.  If no
-I<$id> argument is supplied, the command returns a list of the
-identifiers for all existing event handlers created by the B<after>
-and B<repeat> commands for I<$widget>. If I<$id> is supplied, it
-specifies an existing handler; I<$id> must have been the return value
-from some previous call to B<after> or B<repeat> and it must not have
-triggered yet or been cancelled. In this case the command returns a
-list with three elements.  The first element of the list is the
-callback associated with I<$id>, the second element is either B<idle>
-or the I<integer> timer millisecond value to indicate what kind of
-event handler it is, and the third is a string I<once> or I<repeat> to
-differentiate an B<after> from a B<repeat> event.
-
-=back
-
-The B<after>(I<ms>) and B<afterIdle> forms of the command
-assume that the application is event driven:  the delayed commands
-will not be executed unless the application enters the event loop.
-In applications that are not normally event-driven,
-the event loop can be entered with the B<vwait> and B<update> commands.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::Error|Tk::Error>
-L<Tk::callbacks|Tk::callbacks>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-cancel, delay, idle callback, sleep, time
-
-=cut
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/bind.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/bind.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index f595a48e318..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/bind.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,583 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::bind - Arrange for X events to invoke callbacks
-
-=for category Binding Events and Callbacks
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-Retrieve bindings:
-
-S<    >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<bind>
-
-S<    >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<bind>(I<tag>)
-
-S<    >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<bind>(I<sequence>)
-
-S<    >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<bind>(I<tag>,I<sequence>)
-
-Associate and destroy bindings:
-
-S<    >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<bind>(I<sequence>,I<callback>)
-
-S<    >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<bind>(I<tag>,I<sequence>,I<callback>)
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<bind> method associates callbacks with X events.
-If I<callback> is specified, B<bind> will
-arrange for I<callback> to be evaluated whenever
-the event(s) given by I<sequence> occur in the window(s)
-identified by I<$widget> or I<tag>.
-If I<callback> is an empty string then the current binding for
-I<sequence> is destroyed, leaving I<sequence> unbound.
-In all of the cases where a I<callback> argument is provided,
-B<bind> returns an empty string.
-
-If I<sequence> is specified without a I<callback>, then the
-callback currently bound to I<sequence> is returned, or
-B<undef> is returned if there is no binding for I<sequence>.
-If neither I<sequence> nor I<callback> is specified, then the
-return value is a list whose elements are all the sequences
-for which there exist bindings for I<tag>.
-
-If no I<tag> is specified then the B<bind> refers to I<$widget>.
-If I<tag> is specified then it is typically a class name and the B<bind>
-refers to all instances of the class on the B<MainWindow> associated
-with I<$widget>. (It is possible for I<tag> to be another "widget object"
-but this practice is deprecated.) Perl's B<ref>(I<$object>) can be used
-to get the class name of any object.
-Each window has an associated list of tags, and a binding applies
-to a particular window if its tag is among those specified for
-the window.
-Although the B<bindtags> method may be used to assign an
-arbitrary set of binding tags to a window, the default binding
-tags provide the following behavior:
-
-If a tag is the name of an internal window the binding applies
-to that window.
-
-If the tag is the name of a toplevel window the binding applies
-to the toplevel window and all its internal windows.
-
-If the tag is the name of a class of widgets, such as B<Tk::Button>,
-the binding applies to all widgets in that class;
-
-If I<tag> has the value B<all>,
-the binding applies to all windows descended from the MainWindow
-of the application.
-
-=head1 EVENT PATTERNS
-
-The I<sequence> argument specifies a sequence of one or more event
-patterns, with optional white space between the patterns.  Each event
-pat may take one of three forms.  In the simplest case it is a single
-printing ASCII character, such as B<a> or B<[>.  The character may not
-be a space character or the character <.  This form of pattern matches
-a B<KeyPress> event for the particular character.  The second form of
-pattern is longer but more general.  It has the following syntax:
-
-S<    >'<modifier-modifier-type-detail>'
-
-The entire event pattern is surrounded by angle brackets, and normally
-needs to be quoted, as angle brackets are special to perl.
-Inside the angle brackets are zero or more modifiers, an event
-type, and an extra piece of information (I<detail>) identifying
-a particular button or keysym.  Any of the fields may be omitted,
-as long as at least one of I<type> and I<detail> is present.
-The fields must be separated by white space or dashes.
-
-The third form of pattern is used to specify a user-defined, named virtual
-event; see L<Tk::event> for details.  It has the following syntax:
-
-S<    >'<<name>>'
-
-The entire virtual event pattern is surrounded by double angle brackets.
-Inside the angle brackets is the user-defined name of the virtual event.
-Modifiers, such as B<Shift> or B<Control>, may not be combined with a
-virtual event to modify it.  Bindings on a virtual event may be created
-before the virtual event is defined, and if the definition of a virtual
-event changes dynamically, all windows bound to that virtual event will
-respond immediately to the new definition.
-
-=head1 MODIFIERS
-
-Modifiers consist of any of the following values:
-
- Control	Mod2, M2
- Shift          Mod3, M3
- Lock          	Mod4, M4
- Button1, B1	Mod5, M5
- Button2, B2	Meta, M
- Button3, B3	Alt
- Button4, B4	Double
- Button5, B5	Triple
- Mod1,    M1    Quadruple
-
-Where more than one value is listed, separated by commas, the values
-are equivalent.
-Most of the modifiers have the obvious X meanings.
-For example, B<Button1> requires that
-button 1 be depressed when the event occurs.
-For a binding to match a given event, the modifiers in the event
-must include all of those specified in the event pattern.
-An event may also contain additional modifiers not specified in
-the binding.
-For example, if button 1 is pressed while the shift and control keys
-are down, the pattern B<E<lt>Control-Button-1E<gt>> will match
-the event, but B<E<lt>Mod1-Button-1E<gt>> will not.
-If no modifiers are specified, then any combination of modifiers may
-be present in the event.
-
-B<Meta> and B<M> refer to whichever of the
-B<M1> through B<M5> modifiers is associated with the meta
-key(s) on the keyboard (keysyms B<Meta_R> and B<Meta_L>).
-If there are no meta keys, or if they are not associated with any
-modifiers, then B<Meta> and B<M> will not match any events.
-Similarly, the B<Alt> modifier refers to whichever modifier
-is associated with the alt key(s) on the keyboard (keysyms
-B<Alt_L> and B<Alt_R>).
-
-The B<Double>, B<Triple> and B<Quadruple> modifiers are a convenience
-for specifying double mouse clicks and other repeated events. They
-cause a particular event pattern to be repeated 2, 3 or 4 times, and
-also place a time and space requirement on the sequence: for a
-sequence of events to match a B<Double>, B<Triple> or B<Quadruple>
-pattern, all of the events must occur close together in time and
-without substantial mouse motion in between.  For example,
-B<E<lt>Double-Button-1E<gt>> is equivalent to
-B<E<lt>Button-1E<gt>E<lt>Button-1E<gt>> with the extra time and space
-requirement.
-
-=head1 EVENT TYPES
-
-The I<type> field may be any of the standard X event types, with a
-few extra abbreviations.  Below is a list of all the valid types;
-where two names appear together, they are synonyms.
-
-
-    Activate            Destroy            Map
-    ButtonPress, Button Enter              MapRequest
-    ButtonRelease       Expose             Motion
-    Circulate           FocusIn            MouseWheel
-    CirculateRequest    FocusOut           Property
-    Colormap            Gravity            Reparent
-    Configure           KeyPress, Key      ResizeRequest
-    ConfigureRequest    KeyRelease         Unmap
-    Create              Leave              Visibility
-    Deactivate
-
-Most of the above events have the same fields and behaviors  as  events
-in  the X Windowing system.  You can find more detailed descriptions of
-these events in any X window programming book.  A couple of the  events
-are  extensions to the X event system to support features unique to the
-Macintosh and Windows platforms.  We provide a little  more  detail  on
-these events here.  These include:                                     
-
-    Activate
-    Deactivate
-
-These two events are sent to every sub-window of a toplevel when they
-change state.  In addition to the focus Window, the Macintosh platform
-and Windows platforms have a notion of an active window (which often
-has but is not required to have the focus).  On the Macintosh, widgets
-in the active window have a different appearance than widgets in
-deactive windows.  The Activate event is sent to all the sub-windows
-in a toplevel when it changes from being deactive to active.
-Likewise, the Deactive event is sent when the window's state changes
-from active to deactive.  There are no use- ful percent substitutions
-you would make when binding to these events.
-
-    MouseWheel
-
-Some mice on the Windows platform support a mouse wheel  which  is
-used  for  scrolling  documents  without using the scrollbars.  By
-rolling the wheel, the system will generate MouseWheel events that
-the  application  can use to scroll.  Like Key events the event is
-always routed to the window that currently  has  focus.  When  the
-event is received you can use the %D substitution to get the delta
-field for the event which is a integer value of  motion  that  the
-mouse  wheel  has  moved.  The smallest value for which the system
-will report is defined by the OS.  On Windows  95  &  98  machines
-this value is at least 120 before it is reported.  However, higher
-resolution devices may be available in the future.   The  sign  of
-the  value  determines  which direction your widget should scroll.
-Positive values should scroll up and negative values should scroll
-down.
- 
-The last part of a long event specification is I<detail>.  In the
-case of a B<ButtonPress> or B<ButtonRelease> event, it is the
-number of a button (1-5).  If a button number is given, then only an
-event on that particular button will match;  if no button number is
-given, then an event on any button will match.  Note:  giving a
-specific button number is different than specifying a button modifier;
-in the first case, it refers to a button being pressed or released,
-while in the second it refers to some other button that is already
-depressed when the matching event occurs.  If a button
-number is given then I<type> may be omitted:  if will default
-to B<ButtonPress>.  For example, the specifier B<E<lt>1E<gt>>
-is equivalent to B<E<lt>ButtonPress-1E<gt>>.
-
-If the event type is B<KeyPress> or B<KeyRelease>, then
-I<detail> may be specified in the form of an X keysym.  Keysyms
-are textual specifications for particular keys on the keyboard;
-they include all the alphanumeric ASCII characters (e.g. ``a'' is
-the keysym for the ASCII character ``a''), plus descriptions for
-non-alphanumeric characters (``comma'' is the keysym for the comma
-character), plus descriptions for all the non-ASCII keys on the
-keyboard (``Shift_L'' is the keysm for the left shift key, and
-``F1'' is the keysym for the F1 function key, if it exists).  The
-complete list of keysyms is not presented here;  it is
-available in other X documentation and may vary from system to
-system.
-If necessary, you can use the B<'K'> notation described below
-to print out the keysym name for a particular key.
-If a keysym I<detail> is given, then the
-I<type> field may be omitted;  it will default to B<KeyPress>.
-For example, B<E<lt>Control-commaE<gt>> is equivalent to
-B<E<lt>Control-KeyPress-commaE<gt>>.
-
-=head1 BINDING CALLBACKS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
-
-The I<callback> argument to B<bind> is a perl/Tk callback.
-which will be executed whenever the given event sequence occurs.
-(See L<Tk::callbacks> for description of the possible forms.)
-I<Callback> will be associated with the same B<MainWindow>
-that is associated with the I<$widget> that was used to invoke
-the B<bind> method, and it will run as though called from B<MainLoop>.
-If I<callback> contains
-any B<Ev>(I<%>) calls, then each "nested" B<Ev>(I<%>)
-"callback" will be evaluated when the event occurs to form arguments
-to be passed to the main I<callback>.
-The replacement
-depends on the character I<%>, as defined in the
-list below.  Unless otherwise indicated, the
-replacement string is the numeric (decimal) value of the given field from
-the current event. Perl/Tk has enhanced this mechanism slightly compared
-to the comparable Tcl/Tk mechanism. The enhancements are not yet all
-reflected in the list below.
-Some of the substitutions are only valid for
-certain types of events;  if they are used for other types of events
-the value substituted is undefined (not the same as B<undef>!).
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<'#'>
-
-The number of the last client request processed by the server
-(the I<serial> field from the event).  Valid for all event
-types.
-
-=item B<'a'>
-
-The I<above> field from the event,
-formatted as a hexadecimal number.
-Valid only for B<Configure> events.
-
-=item B<'b'>
-
-The number of the button that was pressed or released.  Valid only
-for B<ButtonPress> and B<ButtonRelease> events.
-
-=item B<'c'>
-
-The I<count> field from the event.  Valid only for B<Expose> events.
-
-=item B<'d'>
-
-The I<detail> field from the event.  The B<'d'> is replaced by
-a string identifying the detail.  For B<Enter>,
-B<Leave>, B<FocusIn>, and B<FocusOut> events,
-the string will be one of the following:
-
- NotifyAncestor          NotifyNonlinearVirtual
- NotifyDetailNone        NotifyPointer
- NotifyInferior          NotifyPointerRoot
- NotifyNonlinear         NotifyVirtual
-
-For B<ConfigureRequest> events, the string will be one of:
-
- Above                   Opposite
- Below                   None
- BottomIf                TopIf
-
-For events other than these, the substituted string is undefined.
-(Note that this is I<not> the same as Detail part of sequence
-use to specify the event.)
-
-=item B<'f'>
-
-The I<focus> field from the event (B<0> or B<1>).  Valid only
-for B<Enter> and B<Leave> events.
-
-=item B<'h'>
-
-The I<height> field from the event.  Valid only for B<Configure>,
-B<ConfigureRequest>, B<Create>, B<Expose>, and B<ResizeRequest> events.
-
-=item B<'i'>
-
-The window field from the  event,  represented  as  a  hexadecimal integer.
-
-=item B<'k'>
-
-The I<keycode> field from the event.  Valid only for B<KeyPress>
-and B<KeyRelease> events.
-
-=item B<'m'>
-
-The I<mode> field from the event.  The substituted string is one of
-B<NotifyNormal>, B<NotifyGrab>, B<NotifyUngrab>, or
-B<NotifyWhileGrabbed>.  Valid only for B<Enter>,
-B<FocusIn>, B<FocusOut>, and B<Leave> events.
-
-=item B<'o'>
-
-The I<override_redirect> field from the event.  Valid only for
-B<Map>, B<Reparent>, and B<Configure> events.
-
-=item B<'p'>
-
-The I<place> field from the event, substituted as one of the
-strings B<PlaceOnTop> or B<PlaceOnBottom>.  Valid only
-for B<Circulate> and B<CirculateRequest> events.
-
-=item B<'s'>
-
-The I<state> field from the event.  For B<ButtonPress>,
-B<ButtonRelease>, B<Enter>, B<KeyPress>, B<KeyRelease>,
-B<Leave>, and B<Motion> events, a decimal string
-is substituted.  For B<Visibility>, one of the strings
-B<VisibilityUnobscured>, B<VisibilityPartiallyObscured>,
-and B<VisibilityFullyObscured> is substituted.
-
-=item B<'t'>
-
-The I<time> field from the event.  Valid only for events that
-contain a I<time> field.
-
-=item B<'w'>
-
-The I<width> field from the event.  Valid only for B<Configure>,
-B<ConfigueRequest>, B<Create>, B<Expose>, and B<ResizeREquest> events.
-
-=item B<'x'>
-
-The I<x> field from the event.  Valid only for events containing
-an I<x> field.
-
-=item B<'y'>
-
-The I<y> field from the event.  Valid only for events containing
-a I<y> field.
-
-=item B<'@'>
-
-The string "@I<x,y>" where I<x> and I<y> are as above.
-Valid only for events containing I<x> and I<y> fields.
-This format is used my methods of B<Tk::Text> and similar widgets.
-
-=item B<'A'>
-
-Substitutes the UNICODE character corresponding to the event, or
-the empty string if the event doesn't correspond to a UNICODE character
-(e.g. the shift key was pressed).  B<XmbLookupString> does all the
-work of translating from the event to a UNICODE character.
-Valid only for B<KeyPress> and B<KeyRelease> events.
-
-=item B<'B'>
-
-The I<border_width> field from the event.  Valid only for
-B<Configure>, B<ConfigureRequest> and B<Create> events.
-
-=item B<'D'>
-
-This reports the delta value of a  B<MouseWheel>  event.   The  delta
-value  represents  the  rotation  units  the  mouse wheel has been
-moved.  On Windows 95 & 98 systems  the  smallest  value  for  the
-delta is 120.  Future systems may support higher resolution values
-for the delta.  The sign of the value represents the direction the
-mouse wheel was scrolled.
-
-=item B<'E'>
-
-The I<send_event> field from the event.  Valid for all event types.
-
-=item B<'K'>
-
-The keysym corresponding to the event, substituted as a textual
-string.  Valid only for B<KeyPress> and B<KeyRelease> events.
-
-=item B<'N'>
-
-The keysym corresponding to the event, substituted as
-a decimal
-number.  Valid only for B<KeyPress> and B<KeyRelease> events.
-
-=item B<'R'>
-
-The I<root> window identifier from the event.  Valid only for
-events containing a I<root> field.
-
-=item B<'S'>
-
-The I<subwindow> window identifier from the event,
-as an object if it is one otherwise as a hexadecimal number.
-Valid only for events containing a I<subwindow> field.
-
-=item B<'T'>
-
-The I<type> field from the event.  Valid for all event types.
-
-=item B<'W'>
-
-The window to which the event was reported (the
-$widget field from the event) - as an perl/Tk object.
-Valid for all event types.
-
-=item B<'X'>
-
-The I<x_root> field from the event.
-If a virtual-root window manager is being used then the substituted
-value is the corresponding x-coordinate in the virtual root.
-Valid only for
-B<ButtonPress>, B<ButtonRelease>, B<KeyPress>, B<KeyRelease>,
-and B<Motion> events.
-
-=item B<'Y'>
-
-The I<y_root> field from the event.
-If a virtual-root window manager is being used then the substituted
-value is the corresponding y-coordinate in the virtual root.
-Valid only for
-B<ButtonPress>, B<ButtonRelease>, B<KeyPress>, B<KeyRelease>,
-and B<Motion> events.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 MULTIPLE MATCHES
-
-It is possible for several bindings to match a given X event.
-If the bindings are associated with different I<tag>'s,
-then each of the bindings will be executed, in order.
-By default, a class binding will be executed first, followed
-by a binding for the widget, a binding for its toplevel, and
-an B<all> binding.
-The B<bindtags> method may be used to change this order for
-a particular window or to associate additional binding tags with
-the window.
-
-B<return> and B<Tk-E<gt>break> may be used inside a
-callback to control the processing of matching callbacks.
-If B<return> is invoked, then the current callback
-is terminated but Tk will continue processing callbacks
-associated with other I<tag>'s.
-If B<Tk-E<gt>break> is invoked within a callback,
-then that callback terminates and no other callbacks will be invoked
-for the event.
-(B<Tk-E<gt>break> is implemented via perl's B<die> with a special value
-which is "caught" by the perl/Tk "glue" code.)
-
-If more than one binding matches a particular event and they
-have the same I<tag>, then the most specific binding
-is chosen and its callback is evaluated.
-The following tests are applied, in order, to determine which of
-several matching sequences is more specific:
-(a) an event pattern that specifies a specific button or key is more specific
-than one that doesn't;
-(b) a longer sequence (in terms of number
-of events matched) is more specific than a shorter sequence;
-(c) if the modifiers specified in one pattern are a subset of the
-modifiers in another pattern, then the pattern with more modifiers
-is more specific.
-(d) a virtual event whose physical pattern matches the sequence is less
-specific than the same physical pattern that is not associated with a
-virtual event.
-(e) given a sequence that matches two or more virtual events, one
-of the virtual events will be chosen, but the order is undefined.
-
-If the matching sequences contain more than one event, then tests
-(c)-(e) are applied in order from the most recent event to the least recent
-event in the sequences.  If these tests fail to determine a winner, then the
-most recently registered sequence is the winner.
-
-If there are two (or more) virtual events that are both triggered by the
-same sequence, and both of those virtual events are bound to the same window
-tag, then only one of the virtual events will be triggered, and it will
-be picked at random:
-
- $widget->eventAdd('<<Paste>>' => '<Control-y>');
- $widget->eventAdd('<<Paste>>' => '<Button-2>');
- $widget->eventAdd <<Scroll>>' => '<Button-2>');
- $widget->bind('Tk::Entry','<<Paste>>',sub { print 'Paste'});
- $widget->bind('Tk::Entry','<<Scroll>>', sub {print 'Scroll'});
-
-If the user types Control-y, the B<E<lt>E<lt>PasteE<gt>E<gt>> binding
-will be invoked, but if the user presses button 2 then one of
-either the B<E<lt>E<lt>PasteE<gt>E<gt>> or the B<E<lt>E<lt>ScrollE<gt>E<gt>> bindings will
-be invoked, but exactly which one gets invoked is undefined.
-
-If an X event does not match any of the existing bindings, then the
-event is ignored.
-An unbound event is not considered to be an error.
-
-=head1 MULTI-EVENT SEQUENCES AND IGNORED EVENTS
-
-When a I<sequence> specified in a B<bind> method contains
-more than one event pattern, then its callback is executed whenever
-the recent events (leading up to and including the current event)
-match the given sequence.  This means, for example, that if button 1 is
-clicked repeatedly the sequence B<E<lt>Double-ButtonPress-1E<gt>> will match
-each button press but the first.
-If extraneous events that would prevent a match occur in the middle
-of an event sequence then the extraneous events are
-ignored unless they are B<KeyPress> or B<ButtonPress> events.
-For example, B<E<lt>Double-ButtonPress-1E<gt>> will match a sequence of
-presses of button 1, even though there will be B<ButtonRelease>
-events (and possibly B<Motion> events) between the
-B<ButtonPress> events.
-Furthermore, a B<KeyPress> event may be preceded by any number
-of other B<KeyPress> events for modifier keys without the
-modifier keys preventing a match.
-For example, the event sequence B<aB> will match a press of the
-B<a> key, a release of the B<a> key, a press of the B<Shift>
-key, and a press of the B<b> key:  the press of B<Shift> is
-ignored because it is a modifier key.
-Finally, if several B<Motion> events occur in a row, only
-the last one is used for purposes of matching binding sequences.
-
-=head1 ERRORS
-
-If an error occurs in executing the callback for a binding then the
-B<Tk::Error> mechanism is used to report the error.
-The B<Tk::Error> mechanism will be executed at same call level,
-and associated with the same B<MainWindow> as
-as the callback was invoked.
-
-=head1 CAVEATS
-
-Note that for the B<Canvas> widget, the call to B<bind> has to be
-fully qualified. This is because there is already a bind method for
-the B<Canvas> widget, which binds individual canvas tags.
-
-S<    >I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<Tk::bind>
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::Error|Tk::Error>
-L<Tk::callbacks|Tk::callbacks>
-L<Tk::bindtags|Tk::bindtags>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-Event, binding
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/bindtags.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/bindtags.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 3ee6ddb9473..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/bindtags.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,107 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::bindtags - Determine which bindings apply to a window, and order of evaluation
-
-=for category Binding Events and Callbacks
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-I<$widget>-E<gt>B<bindtags>([I<tagList>]);
-
-I<@tags> = I<$widget>-E<gt>B<bindtags>;
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-When a binding is created with the B<bind> command, it is
-associated either with a particular window such as I<$widget>,
-a class name such as B<Tk::Button>, the keyword B<all>, or any
-other string.
-All of these forms are called I<binding tags>.
-Each window has a list of binding tags that determine how
-events are processed for the window.
-When an event occurs in a window, it is applied to each of the
-window's tags in order:  for each tag, the most specific binding
-that matches the given tag and event is executed.
-See the L<Tk::bind> documentation for more information on the matching
-process.
-
-By default, each window has four binding tags consisting of the
-the window's class name, name of the window, the name of the window's
-nearest toplevel ancestor, and B<all>, in that order.
-Toplevel windows have only three tags by default, since the toplevel
-name is the same as that of the window.
-
-Note that this order is I<different> from order used by Tcl/Tk.
-Tcl/Tk has the window ahead of the class name in the binding order.
-This is because Tcl is procedural rather than object oriented and
-the normal way for Tcl/Tk applications to override class bindings
-is with an instance binding. However, with perl/Tk the normal way
-to override a class binding is to derive a class. The perl/Tk order
-causes instance bindings to execute after the class binding, and
-so instance bind callbacks can make use of state changes (e.g. changes
-to the selection) than the class bindings have made.
-
-The B<bindtags> command allows the binding tags for a window to be
-read and modified.
-
-If I<$widget>-E<gt>B<bindtags> is invoked without an argument, then the
-current set of binding tags for $widget is returned as a list.
-If the I<tagList> argument is specified to B<bindtags>,
-then it must be a reference to and array; the tags for $widget are changed
-to the elements of the array. (A reference to an anonymous array can
-be created by enclosin the elements in B<[ ]>.)
-The elements of I<tagList> may be arbitrary strings or widget objects,
-if no window exists for an object at the time an event is processed,
-then the tag is ignored for that event.
-The order of the elements in I<tagList> determines the order in
-which binding callbacks are executed in response to events.
-For example, the command
-
- $b->bindtags([$b,ref($b),$b->toplevel,'all'])
-
-applies the Tcl/Tk binding order which binding callbacks will be
-evaluated for a button (say) B<$b> so that B<$b>'s instance bindings
-are invoked first, following by bindings for B<$b>'s class, followed by
-bindings for B<$b>'s toplevel, followed by 'B<all>' bindings.
-
-If I<tagList> is an empty list i.e. B<[]>, then the binding
-tags for $widget are returned to the perl/Tk default state described above.
-
-The B<bindtags> command may be used to introduce arbitrary
-additional binding tags for a window, or to remove standard tags.
-For example, the command
-
- $b->bindtags(['TrickyButton',$b->toplevel,'all'])
-
-replaces the (say) B<Tk::Button> tag for B<$b> with B<TrickyButton>.
-This means that the default widget bindings for buttons, which are
-associated with the B<Tk::Button> tag, will no longer apply to B<$b>,
-but any bindings associated with B<TrickyButton> (perhaps some
-new button behavior) will apply.
-
-=head1 BUGS
-
-The current mapping of the 'native' Tk behaviour of this method
-i.e. returning a list but only accepting a reference to an array is
-counter intuitive. The perl/Tk interface  may be tidied up, returning
-a list is sensible so, most likely fix will be to allow a list to be
-passed to I<set> the bindtags.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::bind|Tk::bind>
-L<Tk::callbacks|Tk::callbacks>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-binding, event, tag
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/callbacks.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/callbacks.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 5b62cb7c12c..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/callbacks.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,104 +0,0 @@
-# $Id: callbacks.pod 1.3 Thu, 27 Nov 1997 00:26:00 +0100 ach $
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::callbacks - Specifying code for Tk to call.
-
-=for category Binding Events and Callbacks
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-One can specify a callback in one of the following ways:
-
-Without arguments:
-
-    ... => \&subname, ...
-    ... => sub { ... }, ...
-    ... => 'methodname', ...
-
-or with arguments:
-
-    ... => [ \&subname, args ... ], ...
-    ... => [ sub { ... }, args... ], ...
-    ... => [ 'methodname', args... ], ...
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-Perl/Tk has a callback, where Tcl/Tk has a command string (i.e. a fragment of
-Tcl to be executed).  A perl/Tk callback can take one of the following
-basic forms:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item * Reference to a subroutine C<\E<amp>subname>
-
-=item * Anonymous subroutine (closure) C<sub { ... }>
-
-=item * A method name C<'methodname'>
-
-=back
-
-Any of these can be provided with arguments by enclosing them and the
-arguments in B<[]>. Here are some examples:
-
-I<$mw>->B<bind>(I<$class,> B<"E<lt>DeleteE<gt>" =E<gt> 'Delete'>);
-
-This will call I<$widget>->B<Delete>, the I<$widget> being provided (by bind) as
-the one where the Delete key was pressed.
-
-While having bind provide a widget object for you is ideal in many cases
-it can be irritating in others. Using the list form this behaviour
-can be modified:
-
-I<$a>-E<gt>B<bind>(B<"E<lt>DeleteE<gt>">,[I<$b> =E<gt> 'Delete']);
-
-because the first element I<$b> is an object bind
-will call I<$b>-E<gt>B<Delete>.
-
-Note that method/object ordering only matters for C<bind> callbacks,
-the auto-quoting in perl5.001 makes the first of these a little more readable:
-
-    $w->configure(-yscrollcommand => [ set => $ysb]);
-    $w->configure(-yscrollcommand => [ $ysb => 'set' ]);
-
-but both will call C<$ysb>-E<gt>set(args provided by Tk)
-
-Another use of arguments allows you to write generalized methods which are
-easier to re-use:
-
-    $a->bind("<Next>",['Next','Page']);
-    $a->bind("<Down>",['Next','Line']);
-
-This will call C<$a>-E<gt>I<Next>('Page') or C<$a>-E<gt>I<Next>('Line') respectively.
-
-Note that the contents of the C<[]> are evaluated by perl when the
-callback is created. It is often desirable for the arguments provided
-to the callback to depend on the details of the event which caused
-it to be executed. To allow for this callbacks can be nested using the
-C<Ev(...)> "constructor".
-C<Ev(...)> inserts callback objects into the
-argument list. When perl/Tk glue code is preparing the argument list for
-the callback it is about to call it spots these special objects and
-recursively applies the callback process to them.
-
-=head1 EXAMPLES
-
-    $entry->bind('<Return>' => [$w , 'validate', Ev(['get'])]);
-
-    $toplevel->bind('all', '<Visibility>', [\&unobscure, Ev('s')]);
-
-    $mw->bind($class, '<Down>', ['SetCursor', Ev('UpDownLine',1)]);
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::bind|Tk::bind>
-L<Tk::after|Tk::after>
-L<Tk::options|Tk::options>
-L<Tk::fileevent|Tk::fileevent>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-callback, closure, anonymous subroutine, bind
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/chooseColor.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/chooseColor.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index dbb8f158efa..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/chooseColor.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,64 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-chooseColor - pops up a dialog box for the user to select a color.
-
-=for category Popups and Dialogs
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >I<$color> = I<$widget>-E<gt>B<chooseColor>?(I<-option>=E<gt>I<value>, ...)?;
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The method B<chooseColor> is implemented as a perl wrapper
-on the core tk "command" B<tk_chooseColor>, and I<$widget>
-is passed as the argument to the hidden B<-parent> option.
-The implementation of internal B<tk_chooseColor> is platform
-specific, on Win32 it is a native dialog, and on UNIX/X11 it is implemented
-in terms of L<Tk::ColorEditor|Tk::ColorEditor>.
-
-The B<chooseColor> method pops up a dialog box for the
-user to select a color. The following I<option-value> pairs are
-possible as command line arguments:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-initialcolor>=E<gt>I<color>
-
-Specifies the color to display in the color dialog when it pops
-up. I<color> must be in a form acceptable to the B<Tk_GetColor>
-function.
-
-=item B<-parent>=E<gt>$widget
-
-Makes $widget the logical parent of the color dialog. The color
-dialog is displayed on top of its parent window.
-
-=item B<-title>=E<gt>I<titleString>
-
-Specifies a string to display as the title of the dialog box. If this
-option is not specified, then a default title will be displayed.
-
-=back
-
-If the user selects a color, B<tk_chooseColor> will return the
-name of the color in a form acceptable to B<Tk_GetColor>.  If the
-user cancels the operation, the command will return B<undef>.
-
-=head1 EXAMPLE
-
- $widget->configure(-fg => $parent->chooseColor(-initialcolor => 'gray',
-                                                -title => "Choose color"));
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-color selection dialog
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/chooseDirectory.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/chooseDirectory.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 8a2edc9d672..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/chooseDirectory.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,95 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation.
-#  All rights reserved.
-#
-#  RCS: @(#) $Id: chooseDirectory.n,v 1.1 2000/01/27 00:23:10 ericm Exp $
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-chooseDirectory - pops up a dialog box for the user to select a directory.
-
-=for category  Tk Generic Methods
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-I<$widget>-E<gt>B<chooseDirectory>( ?I<option value ...>? );
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The method B<chooseDirectory> is implemented as a perl wrapper on the
-core tk "command" B<tk_chooseDirectory>, and I<$widget> is passed as
-the argument to the hidden B<-parent> option.
-
-The B<chooseDirectory>
-method pops up a dialog box for the user to select a directory. The
-following I<option-value> pairs are possible as command line
-arguments:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-initialdir> I<dirname>
-
-Specifies that the directories in I<directory> should be displayed
-when the dialog pops up. If this parameter is not specified, then
-the directories in the current working directory are displayed. If the
-parameter specifies a relative path, the return value will convert the
-relative path to an absolute path.  This option may not always work on
-the Macintosh.  This is not a bug. Rather, the I<General Controls>
-control panel on the Mac allows the end user to override the
-application default directory.
-
-=item B<-parent> $widget
-
-Makes $widget the logical parent of the dialog. The dialog
-is displayed on top of its parent window.
-
-=item B<-title> I<titleString>
-
-Specifies a string to display as the title of the dialog box. If this
-option is not specified, then a default title will be displayed.
-
-=item B<-mustexist> I<boolean>
-
-Specifies whether the user may specify non-existant directories.  If
-this parameter is true, then the user may only select directories that
-already exist.  The default value is I<false>.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 CAVEATS
-
-Perl does not have a concept of encoded filesystems yet. This means
-that operations on filenames like C<opendir> and C<open> still use
-byte semantics. Tk however uses character semantics internally, which
-means that you can get filenames with the UTF-8 flag set in functions
-like C<chooseDirectory>, C<getOpenFile> and similar. It's the user's
-responsibility to determine the encoding of the underlying filesystem
-and convert the result into bytes, e.g.
-
-    use Encode;
-    ...
-    my $dir = $mw->chooseDirectory;
-    $dir = encode("windows-1252", $dir);
-    opendir DIR, $dir or die $!;
-    ...
-
-See also L<perlunicode/When Unicode Does Not Happen> and
-L<perltodo/Unicode in Filenames>.
-
-=head1 EXAMPLE
-
-    my $dir = $mw->chooseDirectory(-initialdir => '~',
-                                   -title => 'Choose a directory');
-    if (!defined $dir) {
-        warn 'No directory selected';
-    } else {
-        warn "Selected $dir";
-    }
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::getOpenFile>, L<Tk::getOpenFile>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-directory selection dialog
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/composite.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/composite.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index a493b5ee1f2..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/composite.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,171 +0,0 @@
-# $Id: composite.pod 1.2 Wed, 12 Nov 1997 00:30:45 +0100 ach $
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::composite - Defining a new composite widget class
-
-=for category Derived Widgets
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-    package Tk::MyNewWidget;
-
-    use Tk:widgets qw/ list of Tk widgets /;
-    use base qw/ Tk::Frame /;    # or Tk::Toplevel
-
-    Construct Tk::Widget 'MyNewWidget';
-
-    sub ClassInit {
-        my( $class, $mw ) = @_;
-        #... e.g., class bindings here ...
-        $class->SUPER::ClassInit( $mw );
-    }
-
-    sub Populate {
-        my( $self, $args ) = @_;
-
-        my $flag = delete $args->{-flag};
-        if( defined $flag ) {
-            # handle -flag => xxx which can only be done at create
-            # time the delete above ensures that new() does not try
-            # and do  $self->configure( -flag => xxx );
-        }
-
-        $self->SUPER::Populate( $args );
-
-        $self = $self->Component( ... );
-
-        $self->Delegates( ... );
-
-        $self->ConfigSpecs(
-            '-cursor'    => [ SELF, 'cursor', 'Cursor',   undef ],
-            '-something' => [ METHOD, dbName,  dbClass, default ],
-            '-text'      => [ $label, dbName,  dbClass, default ],
-            '-heading'   => [ {-text => $head},
-                                heading, Heading,  'My Heading' ],
-       ); 
-   }
-
-   sub something {
-       my( $self, $value) = @_;
-       if ( @_ > 1 ) {
-          # set it
-       }
-       return # current value
-   }
-
-   1;
-
-   __END__
-
-
-   =head1 NAME
-
-   Tk::Whatever - a whatever widget
-
-   =head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-     use Tk::Whatever;
-
-     $widget = $parent->Whatever(...);
-
-   =head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-   ...
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The intention behind a composite is to create a higher-level widget,
-sometimes called a "super-widget" or "mega-widget".  Most often,
-a composite will be
-built upon other widgets by B<using> them, as opposed to specializing on them.
-For example, the supplied composite widget B<LabEntry> is I<made of> an
-B<Entry> and a B<Label>; it is neither a I<kind-of> B<Label>
-nor is it a I<kind-of> B<Entry>.
-
-Most of the work of a composite widget consistd in creating subwidgets,
-arranging to dispatch configure options to the proper subwidgets and manage
-composite-specific configure options.
-
-=head1 GLORY DETAILS
-
-Depending on your Perl/Tk knowledge this section may be enlighting
-or confusing.
-
-=head2 Composite Widget
-
-Since Perl/Tk is heavilly using an object-oriented approach, it is no
-suprise that creating a composite goes through a B<new()> method.
-However, the composite does not normally define a B<new()> method
-itself: it is usually sufficient to simply inherit it from
-B<Tk::Widget>.
-
-This is what happens when the composite uses
-
-    use base qw/ Tk::Frame /;  # or Tk::Toplevel
-
-to specify its inheritance chain.  To complete the initialisation of the
-widget, it must call the B<Construct> method from class B<Widget>.  That
-method accepts the name of the new class to create, i.e. the package name
-of your composite widget:
-
-    Construct Tk::Widget 'MyNewWidget';
-
-Here, B<MyNewWidget> is the package name (aka the widget's B<class>).  This
-will define a constructor method for B<MyNewWidget>, normally named after the
-widget's class.  Instanciating that composite in client code would
-the look like:
-
-    $mw = MainWindow->new;       # creates a top-level MainWindow
-
-    $self = $mw->MyNewWidget();  # creates an instance of the
-                                 # composite widget MyNewWidget
-
-Whenever a composite is instanciated in client code,
-C<Tk::Widget::new()> will be invoked via the widget's class
-constructor.  That B<new> method will call
-
-    $self->Populate(\%args);
-
-where I<%args> is the arguments passed to the widget's constructor.  Note
-that B<Populate> receives a B<reference> to the hash array
-containing all arguments.
-
-B<Populate> is typically defined in the composite class (package),
-which creates the characteristic subwidgets of the class.
-
-=head2 Creating Subwidgets
-
-Subwidget creation happens usually in B<Populate()>.
-The composite usually calls the
-subwidget's constructor method either directly, for "private" subwidgets,
-or indirectly through the B<Component> method for subwidgets that should
-be advertised to clients.
-
-B<Populate> may call B<Delegates> to direct calls to methods
-of chosen subwidgets. For simple composites, typically most if not all
-methods are directed
-to a single subwidget - e.g. B<ScrListbox> directs all methods to the core
-B<Listbox> so that I<$composite>-E<gt>B<get>(...) calls
-I<$listbox>-E<gt>B<get>(...).
-
-=head2 Defining mega-widget options
-
-B<Populate> should also call B<ConfigSpecs()> to specify the
-way that configure-like options should be handled in the composite.
-Once B<Populate> returns, method B<Tk::Frame::ConfigDefault>
-walks through the B<ConfigSpecs> entries and populates
-%$args hash with defaults for options from X resources (F<.Xdefaults>, etc).
-
-When  B<Populate> returns to B<Tk::Widget::new()>,
-a call to B<$self>-E<gt>I<configure>(%$args) is made which sets *all*
-the options.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::ConfigSpecs|Tk::ConfigSpecs>
-L<Tk::mega|Tk::mega>
-L<Tk::Derived|Tk::Derived>
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/event.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/event.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 9012a596267..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/event.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,417 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::event - Miscellaneous event facilities: define virtual events and generate events
-
-=for category Binding Events and Callbacks
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-I<$widget>-E<gt>B<event>I<Action>(?I<arg, arg, ...>?);
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<event>I<Action> methods provides several facilities for dealing with
-window system events, such as defining virtual events and synthesizing
-events.  Virtual events are shared by all widgets of the same
-B<MainWindow>.  Different L<MainWindow|Tk::MainWindow>s can have different
-virtual event.
-
-The following methods are currently supported:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<eventAdd>(B<'E<lt>E<lt>>I<virtual>B<E<gt>E<gt>'>I<, sequence >?,I<sequence, ...>?)
-
-Associates the virtual event I<virtual> with the physical
-event sequence(s) given by the I<sequence> arguments, so that
-the virtual event will trigger whenever any one of the I<sequence>s
-occurs.
-I<Virtual> may be any string value and I<sequence> may have
-any of the values allowed for the I<sequence> argument to the
-L<bind|Tk::bind> method.
-If I<virtual> is already defined, the new physical event sequences
-add to the existing sequences for the event.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<eventDelete>(B<'E<lt>E<lt>>I<virtual>B<E<gt>E<gt>'> ?,I<sequence,> I<sequence, ...>?)
-
-Deletes each of the I<sequence>s from those associated with
-the virtual event given by I<virtual>.
-I<Virtual> may be any string value and I<sequence> may have
-any of the values allowed for the I<sequence> argument to the
-L<bind|Tk::bind> method.
-Any I<sequence>s not currently associated with I<virtual>
-are ignored.
-If no I<sequence> argument is provided, all physical event sequences
-are removed for I<virtual>, so that the virtual event will not
-trigger anymore.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<eventGenerate>(I<event> ?,I<option =E<gt> value, option =E<gt> value, ...>?)
-
-Generates a window event and arranges for it to be processed just as if
-it had come from the window system.
-I<$window> is a reference to the window for which the event
-will be generated.
-I<Event> provides a basic description of
-the event, such as B<E<lt>Shift-Button-2E<gt>> or B<E<lt>E<lt>PasteE<gt>E<gt>>.
-If I<Window> is empty the whole screen is meant, and coordinates
-are relative to the screen.
-I<Event> may have any of the forms allowed for the I<sequence>
-argument of the L<bind|Tk::bind> method except that it must consist
-of a single event pattern, not a sequence.
-I<Option-value> pairs may be used to specify additional
-attributes of the event, such as the x and y mouse position;
-see L<"EVENT FIELDS"> below.  If the B<-when> option is not specified, the
-event is processed immediately:  all of the handlers for the event
-will complete before the B<eventGenerate> method returns.
-If the B<-when> option is specified then it determines when the
-event is processed.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<eventInfo>(?'B<E<lt>E<lt>>I<virtual>B<E<gt>E<gt>'>?)
-
-Returns information about virtual events.
-If the B<E<lt>E<lt>>I<virtual>B<E<gt>E<gt>> argument is omitted, the return value
-is a list of all the virtual events that are currently defined.
-If B<E<lt>E<lt>>I<virtual>B<E<gt>E<gt>> is specified then the return value is
-a list whose elements are the physical event sequences currently
-defined for the given virtual event;  if the virtual event is
-not defined then B<undef> is returned.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 EVENT FIELDS
-
-The following options are supported for the B<eventGenerate>
-method.  These correspond to the ``%'' expansions
-allowed in binding callback for the L<bind|Tk::bind> method.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-above> => I<window>
-
-I<Window> specifies the I<above> field for the event,
-either as a window path name or as an integer window id.
-Valid for B<Configure> events.
-Corresponds to the L<%a|Tk::bind/'a'> substitution for binding scripts.
-
-=item B<-borderwidth> => I<size>
-
-I<Size> must be a screen distance;  it specifies the
-I<border_width> field for the event.
-Valid for B<Configure> events.
-Corresponds to the L<%B|Tk::bind/'B'> substitution for binding scripts.
-
-=item B<-button> => I<number>
-
-I<Number> must be an integer;  it specifies the I<detail> field
-for a B<ButtonPress> or B<ButtonRelease> event, overriding
-any button  number provided in the base I<event> argument.
-Corresponds to the L<%b|Tk::bind/'b'> substitution for binding scripts.
-
-=item B<-count> => I<number>
-
-I<Number> must be an integer;  it specifies the I<count> field
-for the event.  Valid for B<Expose> events.
-Corresponds to the L<%c|Tk::bind/'c'> substitution for binding scripts.
-
-=item B<-delta> =E<gt> I<number>
-
-B<number> must be an integer; it specifies the B<delta> field for the
-B<MouseWheel> event.  The delta refers to the direction and magnitude the
-mouse wheel was rotated.  Note the value is not a screen distance but
-are units of motion in the mouse wheel.  Typically these values are
-multiples of 120.  For example, 120 should scroll the text widget up 4
-lines and -240 would scroll the text widget down 8 lines.  Of course,
-other widgets may define different behaviors for mouse wheel motion.
-This field corresponds to the %D substitution for binding scripts.
-
-=item B<-detail> => I<detail>
-
-I<Detail> specifies the I<detail> field for the event
-and must be one of the following:
-
-=over 8
-
- NotifyAncestor	        NotifyNonlinearVirtual
- NotifyDetailNone       NotifyPointer
- NotifyInferior	        NotifyPointerRoot
- NotifyNonlinear        NotifyVirtual
-
-=back
-
-Valid for B<Enter>, B<Leave>, B<FocusIn> and
-B<FocusOut> events.
-Corresponds to the L<%d|Tk::bind/'d'> substitution for binding scripts.
-
-=item B<-focus>I< boolean>
-
-I<Boolean> must be a boolean value;  it specifies the I<focus>
-field for the event.
-Valid for B<Enter> and B<Leave> events.
-Corresponds to the L<%f|Tk::bind/'f'> substitution for binding scripts.
-
-=item B<-height>I< size>
-
-I<Size> must be a screen distance;  it specifies the I<height>
-field for the event.  Valid for B<Configure> events.
-Corresponds to the L<%h|Tk::bind/'h'> substitution for binding scripts.
-
-=item B<-keycode>I< number>
-
-I<Number>  must be an integer;  it specifies the I<keycode>
-field for the event.
-Valid for B<KeyPress> and B<KeyRelease> events.
-Corresponds to the L<%k|Tk::bind/'k'> substitution for binding scripts.
-
-=item B<-keysym>I< name>
-
-I<Name> must be the name of a valid keysym, such as B<g>,
-B<space>, or B<Return>;  its corresponding
-keycode value is used as the I<keycode> field for event, overriding
-any detail specified in the base I<event> argument.
-Valid for B<KeyPress> and B<KeyRelease> events.
-Corresponds to the L<%K|Tk::bind/'K'> substitution for binding scripts.
-
-=item B<-mode>I< notify>
-
-I<Notify> specifies the I<mode> field for the event and must be
-one of B<NotifyNormal>, B<NotifyGrab>, B<NotifyUngrab>, or
-B<NotifyWhileGrabbed>.
-Valid for B<Enter>, B<Leave>, B<FocusIn>, and
-B<FocusOut> events.
-Corresponds to the L<%m|Tk::bind/'m'> substitution for binding scripts.
-
-=item B<-override>I< boolean>
-
-I<Boolean> must be a boolean value;  it specifies the
-I<override_redirect> field for the event.
-Valid for B<Map>, B<Reparent>, and B<Configure> events.
-Corresponds to the L<%o|Tk::bind/'o'> substitution for binding scripts.
-
-=item B<-place>I< where>
-
-I<Where> specifies the I<place> field for the event;  it must be
-either B<PlaceOnTop> or B<PlaceOnBottom>.
-Valid for B<Circulate> events.
-Corresponds to the L<%p|Tk::bind/'p'> substitution for binding scripts.
-
-=item B<-root>I< window>
-
-I<Window> must be either a window path name or an integer window
-identifier;  it specifies the I<root> field for the event.
-Valid for B<KeyPress>, B<KeyRelease>, B<ButtonPress>,
-B<ButtonRelease>, B<Enter>, B<Leave>, and B<Motion>
-events.
-Corresponds to the L<%R|Tk::bind/'R'> substitution for binding scripts.
-
-=item B<-rootx>I< coord>
-
-I<Coord> must be a screen distance;  it specifies the I<x_root>
-field for the event.
-Valid for B<KeyPress>, B<KeyRelease>, B<ButtonPress>,
-B<ButtonRelease>, B<Enter>, B<Leave>, and B<Motion>
-events.  Corresponds to the L<%X|Tk::bind/'X'> substitution for binding scripts.
-
-=item B<-rooty>I< coord>
-
-I<Coord> must be a screen distance;  it specifies the I<y_root>
-field for the event.
-Valid for B<KeyPress>, B<KeyRelease>, B<ButtonPress>,
-B<ButtonRelease>, B<Enter>, B<Leave>, and B<Motion>
-events.
-Corresponds to the L<%Y|Tk::bind/'Y'> substitution for binding scripts.
-
-=item B<-sendevent>I< boolean>
-
-B<Boolean> must be a boolean value;  it specifies the I<send_event>
-field for the event.  Valid for all events.  Corresponds to the
-L<%E|Tk::bind/'E'> substitution for binding scripts.
-
-=item B<-serial>I< number>
-
-I<Number> must be an integer;  it specifies the I<serial> field
-for the event.  Valid for all events.
-Corresponds to the L<%#|Tk::bind/'#'> substitution for binding scripts.
-
-=item B<-state>I< state>
-
-I<State> specifies the I<state> field for the event.
-For B<KeyPress>, B<KeyRelease>, B<ButtonPress>,
-B<ButtonRelease>, B<Enter>, B<Leave>, and B<Motion> events
-it must be an integer value.
-For B<Visibility> events it must be one of B<VisibilityUnobscured>,
-B<VisibilityPartiallyObscured>, or B<VisibilityFullyObscured>.
-This option overrides any modifiers such as B<Meta> or B<Control>
-specified in the base I<event>.
-Corresponds to the L<%s|Tk::bind/'s'> substitution for binding scripts.
-
-=item B<-subwindow>I< window>
-
-I<Window> specifies the I<subwindow> field for the event, either
-as a path name for a Tk widget or as an integer window identifier.
-Valid for B<KeyPress>, B<KeyRelease>, B<ButtonPress>,
-B<ButtonRelease>, B<Enter>, B<Leave>, and B<Motion> events.
-Similar to L<%S|Tk::bind/'S'> substitution for binding scripts.
-
-=item B<-time>I< integer>
-
-I<Integer> must be an integer value;  it specifies the I<time> field
-for the event.
-Valid for B<KeyPress>, B<KeyRelease>, B<ButtonPress>,
-B<ButtonRelease>, B<Enter>, B<Leave>, B<Motion>,
-and B<Property> events.
-Corresponds to the L<%t|Tk::bind/'t'> substitution for binding scripts.
-
-
-=item B<-warp>I< boolean>
-
-I<boolean> must be a boolean value;  it specifies whether
-the screen pointer should be warped as well.
-Valid for B<KeyPress>, B<KeyRelease>, B<ButtonPress>,
-B<ButtonRelease>, and B<Motion> events.
-
-=item B<-width>I< size>
-
-I<Size> must be a screen distance;  it specifies the I<width> field
-for the event.
-Valid for B<Configure> events.
-Corresponds to the L<%w|Tk::bind/'w'> substitution for binding scripts.
-
-=item B<-when>I< when>
-
-I<When> determines when the event will be processed;  it must have one
-of the following values:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item B<now>
-
-Process the event immediately, before the command returns.
-This also happens if the B<-when> option is omitted.
-
-=item B<tail>
-
-Place the event on perl/Tk's event queue behind any events already
-queued for this application.
-
-=item B<head>
-
-Place the event at the front of perl/Tk's event queue, so that it
-will be handled before any other events already queued.
-
-=item B<mark>
-
-Place the event at the front of perl/Tk's event queue but behind any
-other events already queued with B<-when mark>.
-This option is useful when generating a series of events that should
-be processed in order but at the front of the queue.
-
-=back
-
-=item B<-x>I< coord>
-
-I<Coord> must be a screen distance;  it specifies the I<x> field
-for the event.
-Valid for B<KeyPress>, B<KeyRelease>, B<ButtonPress>,
-B<ButtonRelease>, B<Motion>, B<Enter>, B<Leave>,
-B<Expose>, B<Configure>, B<Gravity>, and B<Reparent>
-events.
-Corresponds to the the L<%x|Tk::bind/'x'> substitution for binding scripts.
-If I<Window> is empty the coordinate is relative to the
-screen, and this option corresponds to the L<%X|Tk::bind/'X'> substitution
-for binding scripts.
-
-=item B<-y>I< coord>
-
-I<Coord> must be a screen distance;  it specifies the I<y>
-field for the event.
-Valid for B<KeyPress>, B<KeyRelease>, B<ButtonPress>,
-B<ButtonRelease>, B<Motion>, B<Enter>, B<Leave>,
-B<Expose>, B<Configure>, B<Gravity>, and B<Reparent>
-events.
-Corresponds to the the L<%y|Tk::bind/'y'> substitution for binding scripts.
-If I<Window> is empty the coordinate is relative to the
-screen, and this option corresponds to the L<%Y|Tk::bind/'Y'> substitution
-for binding scripts.
-
-Any options that are not specified when generating an event are filled
-with the value 0, except for I<serial>, which is filled with the
-next X event serial number.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 VIRTUAL EVENT EXAMPLES
-
-In order for a virtual event binding to trigger, two things must
-happen.  First, the virtual event must be defined with the
-B<eventAdd> method.  Second, a binding must be created for
-the virtual event with the B<bind> method.
-Consider the following virtual event definitions:
-
- $widget->eventAdd('<<Paste>>' => '<Control-y>');
- $widget->eventAdd('<<Paste>>' => '<Button-2>');
- $widget->eventAdd('<<Save>>' => '<Control-X><Control-S>');
- $widget->eventAdd('<<Save>>' => '<Shift-F12>');
-
-In the B<bind> method, a virtual event can be bound like any other
-builtin event type as follows:
-
- $entry->bind('Tk::Entry', '<<Paste>>' => sub {
- 		$entry->Insert($entry->selectionGet) });
-
-The double angle brackets are used to specify that a virtual event is being
-bound.  If the user types Control-y or presses button 2, or if
-a B<E<lt>E<lt>PasteE<gt>E<gt>> virtual event is synthesized with B<eventGenerate>,
-then the B<E<lt>E<lt>PasteE<gt>E<gt>> binding will be invoked.
-
-If a virtual binding has the exact same sequence as a separate
-physical binding, then the physical binding will take precedence.
-Consider the following example:
-
- $mw->eventAdd('<<Paste>>' => '<Control-y>','<Meta-Control-y>');
- $mw->bind('Tk::Entry', '<Control-y>' => sub{print 'Control-y'});
- $mw->bind('Tk::Entry', '<<Paste>>'   => sub{print 'Paste'});
-
-When the user types Control-y the B<E<lt>Control-yE<gt>> binding
-will be invoked, because a physical event is considered
-more specific than a virtual event, all other things being equal.
-However, when the user types Meta-Control-y the
-B<E<lt>E<lt>PasteE<gt>E<gt>> binding will be invoked, because the
-B<Meta> modifier in the physical pattern associated with the
-virtual binding is more specific than the B<E<lt>Control-y>E<gt> sequence for
-the physical event.
-
-Bindings on a virtual event may be created before the virtual event exists.
-Indeed, the virtual event never actually needs to be defined, for instance,
-on platforms where the specific virtual event would meaningless or
-ungeneratable.
-
-When a definition of a virtual event changes at run time, all windows
-will respond immediately to the new definition.
-Starting from the preceding example, if the following code is executed:
-
- $entry->bind(ref($entry), '<Control-y>' => undef);
- $entry->eventAdd('<<Paste>>' => '<Key-F6>');
-
-the behavior will change such in two ways.  First, the shadowed
-B<E<lt>E<lt>PasteE<gt>E<gt>> binding will emerge.
-Typing Control-y will no longer invoke the B<E<lt>Control-yE<gt>> binding,
-but instead invoke the virtual event B<E<lt>E<lt>PasteE<gt>E<gt>>.  Second,
-pressing the F6 key will now also invoke the B<E<lt>E<lt>PasteE<gt>E<gt>> binding.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::bind|Tk::bind>
-L<Tk::callbacks|Tk::callbacks>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-event, binding, define, handle, virtual event
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/exit.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/exit.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index bb564cd0b82..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/exit.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::exit - End the application
-
-=for category Binding Events and Callbacks
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-    use Tk qw(exit);
-    ...
-    B<exit>?(I<returnCode>)?;
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-Terminate the process, returning I<returnCode> to the
-system as the exit status.
-If I<returnCode> isn't specified then it defaults
-to 0.
-
-If calling C<exit> from code invoked via a Tk callback then
-this Tk version of C<exit> cleans up more reliably than using
-the perl C<exit>.
-
-=head1 CAVEATS
-
-Using C<exit> from a forked process will terminate both the child
-process B<and> the parent process. As C<Tk::exit> is imported by
-default one should use C<CORE::exit> in the forked process instead.
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-exit, process
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/fileevent.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/fileevent.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 1a98cfd6b71..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/fileevent.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,112 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::fileevent - Execute a callback when a filehandle becomes readable or writable
-
-=for category  Binding Events and Callbacks
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-I<$widget>-E<gt>B<fileevent>(I<fileHandle>,B<readable>?,I<callback>?)
-
-I<$widget>-E<gt>B<fileevent>(I<fileHandle>,B<writable>?,I<callback>?)
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-This command is used to create I<file event handlers>.  A file event
-handler is a binding between a filehandle and a callback, such that the callback
-is evaluated whenever the filehandle becomes readable or writable.  File event
-handlers are most commonly used to allow data to be received from another
-process on an event-driven basis, so that the receiver can continue to
-interact with the user while waiting for the data to arrive.  If an
-application invokes C<E<lt>E<gt>>, C<sysread> or C<read> on a blocking filehandle when
-there is no input data available, the process will block; until the input
-data arrives, it will not be able to service other events, so it will
-appear to the user to ``freeze up''.  With B<fileevent>, the process can
-tell when data is present and only invoke B<gets> or B<read> when
-they won't block.
-
-The I<fileHandle> argument to B<fileevent> refers to an open filehandle,
-such as the return value from a previous B<open> or B<socket>
-command.
-If the I<callback> argument is specified, then B<fileevent>
-creates a new event handler:  I<callback> will be evaluated
-whenever the filehandle becomes readable or writable (depending on the
-argument to B<fileevent>).
-In this case B<fileevent> returns an empty string.
-The B<readable> and B<writable> event handlers for a file
-are independent, and may be created and deleted separately.
-However, there may be at most one B<readable> and one B<writable>
-handler for a file at a given time in a given interpreter.
-If B<fileevent> is called when the specified handler already
-exists in the invoking interpreter, the new callback replaces the old one.
-
-If the I<callback> argument is not specified, B<fileevent>
-returns the current callback for I<fileHandle>, or an empty string
-if there is none.
-If the I<callback> argument is specified as an empty string
-then the event handler is deleted, so that no callback will be invoked.
-A file event handler is also deleted automatically whenever
-its filehandle is closed or its interpreter is deleted.
-
-A filehandle is considered to be readable if there is unread data
-available on the underlying device.
-A filehandle is also considered to be readable if an end of file or
-error condition is present on the underlying file or device.
-It is important for I<callback> to check for these conditions
-and handle them appropriately;  for example, if there is no special
-check for end of file, an infinite loop may occur where I<callback>
-reads no data, returns, and is immediately invoked again.
-
-A filehandle is considered to be writable if at least one byte of data
-can be written to the underlying file or device without blocking,
-or if an error condition is present on the underlying file or device.
-
-Event-driven I/O works best for filehandles that have been
-placed into nonblocking mode.
-In blocking mode, a C<print> command may block if you give it
-more data than the underlying file or device can accept, and a
-C<E<lt>E<gt>>, C<sysread> or C<read> command will block if you attempt to read
-more data than is ready;  no events will be processed while the
-commands block.
-In nonblocking mode C<print>, C<E<lt>E<gt>>, C<sysread> and C<read> never block.
-See the documentation for the individual commands for information
-on how they handle blocking and nonblocking filehandles.
-
-The callback for a file event is executed in the context of I<$widget>
-with which B<fileevent> was invoked.
-If an error occurs while executing the callback then the
-L<Tk::Error> mechanism is used to report the error.
-In addition, the file event handler is deleted if it ever returns
-an error;  this is done in order to prevent infinite loops due to
-buggy handlers.
-
-=head1 BUGS
-
-On windows platforms B<fileevent> is limited in the types of filehandles
-that behave correctly. Making filefhandles non-blocking is only implemented
-on a subset of UNIX platforms (see L<Tk::IO>).
-
-=head1 CREDITS
-
-B<fileevent> is based on the B<addinput> command created
-by Mark Diekhans.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::IO|Tk::IO>
-L<Tk::callbacks|Tk::callbacks>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-asynchronous I/O, blocking, filehandle, event handler, nonblocking, readable,
-callback, writable.
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/focus.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/focus.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 61dab55b277..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/focus.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,166 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-focus - Manage the input focus
-
-=for category User Interaction
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<   >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<focus>
-
-S<   >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<focus>I<Option>
-
-S<   >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<focusNext>
-
-S<   >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<focusPrev>
-
-S<   >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<focusFollowsMouse>
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<focus> methods are used to manage the Tk input focus.
-At any given time, one window on each display is designated as
-the I<focus window>;  any key press or key release events for the
-display are sent to that window.
-It is normally up to the window manager to redirect the focus among the
-top-level windows of a display.  For example, some window managers
-automatically set the input focus to a top-level window whenever
-the mouse enters it;  others redirect the input focus only when
-the user clicks on a window.
-Usually the window manager will set the focus
-only to top-level windows, leaving it up to the application to
-redirect the focus among the children of the top-level.
-
-Tk remembers one focus window for each top-level (the most recent
-descendant of that top-level to receive the focus);  when the window
-manager gives the focus
-to a top-level, Tk automatically redirects it to the remembered
-window.  Within a top-level Tk uses an I<explicit> focus model
-by default.  Moving the mouse within a top-level does not normally
-change the focus;  the focus changes only when a widget
-decides explicitly to claim the focus (e.g., because of a button
-click), or when the user types a key such as Tab that moves the
-focus.
-
-The method B<focusFollowsMouse> may be invoked to
-create an I<implicit> focus model:  it reconfigures Tk so that
-the focus is set to a window whenever the mouse enters it.
-The methods B<focusNext> and B<focusPrev>
-implement a focus order among the windows of a top-level;  they
-are used in the default bindings for Tab and Shift-Tab, among other
-things.
-
-The B<focus> methods can take any of the following forms:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<focusCurrent>
-
-Returns the focus window on the display containing
-the I<$widget>,  or an empty string if no window in
-this application has the focus on that display.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<focus>
-
-If the application currently has the input focus on I<$widget>'s
-display, this command resets the input focus for I<$widget>'s display
-to I<$widget> and returns an empty string.
-If the application doesn't currently have the  input focus on
-I<$widget>'s display, I<$widget> will be remembered as the focus
-for its top-level;  the next time the focus arrives at the top-level,
-Tk will redirect it to I<$widget>.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<focusForce>
-
-Sets the focus of I<$widget>'s display to I<$widget>, even if
-the application doesn't currently have the input focus for the display.
-This command should be used sparingly, if at all.
-In normal usage, an application should not claim the focus for
-itself;  instead, it should wait for the window manager to give it
-the focus.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<focusLastfor>
-
-Returns the name of the most recent window to have the input focus
-among all the windows in the same top-level as I<$widget>.
-If no window in that top-level has ever had the input focus, or
-if the most recent focus window has been deleted, then
-the top-level is returned.  The return value is the window that
-will receive the input focus the next time the window manager gives
-the focus to the top-level.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<focusNext>
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<focusPrev>
-
-B<focusNext> is a utility method used for keyboard traversal, but can be
-useful in other contexts.
-It sets the focus to the ``next'' window after I<$widget> in focus order.
-The focus order is determined by
-the stacking order of windows and the structure of the window hierarchy.
-Among siblings, the focus order is the same as the stacking order, with the
-lowest window being first.
-If a window has children, the window is visited first, followed by
-its children (recursively), followed by its next sibling.
-Top-level windows other than I<$widget> are skipped, so that
-B<focusNext> never returns a window in a different top-level
-from I<$widget>.
-
-After computing the next window, B<focusNext> examines the
-window's B<-takefocus> option to see whether it should be skipped.
-If so, B<focusNext> continues on to the next window in the focus
-order, until it eventually finds a window that will accept the focus
-or returns back to I<$widget>.
-
-B<focusPrev> is similar to B<focusNext> except that it
-sets the focus to the window just before I<$widget> in the focus order.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<focusFollowsMouse>
-
-B<focusFollowsMouse> changes the focus model for the application
-to an implicit one where the window under the mouse gets the focus.
-After this procedure is called, whenever the mouse enters a window
-Tk will automatically give it the input focus.
-The B<focus> command may be used to move the focus to a window
-other than the one under the mouse, but as soon as the mouse moves
-into a new window the focus will jump to that window.
-Note: at present there is no built-in support for returning the
-application to an explicit focus model;  to do this you'll have
-to write a script that deletes the bindings created by
-B<focusFollowsMouse>.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 QUIRKS
-
-When an internal window receives the input focus, Tk doesn't actually
-set the X focus to that window;  as far as X is concerned, the focus
-will stay on the top-level window containing the window with the focus.
-However, Tk generates FocusIn and FocusOut events just as if the X
-focus were on the internal window.   This approach gets around a
-number of problems that would occur if the X focus were actually moved;
-the fact that the X focus is on the top-level is invisible unless
-you use C code to query the X server directly.
-
-=head1 CAVEATS
-
-Note that for the B<Canvas> widget, the call to B<focus> has to be
-fully qualified. This is because there is already a focus method for
-the B<Canvas> widget, which sets the focus on individual canvas tags.
-
-S<    >I<$canvas>-E<gt>B<Tk::focus>
-
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-events, focus, keyboard, top-level, window manager
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/form.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/form.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 64208c8e26e..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/form.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,397 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1996, Expert Interface Technologies
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#  The file man.macros and some of the macros used by this file are
-#  copyrighted: (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-#               (c) 1994-1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  The license terms of the Tcl/Tk distribution are in the file
-#  license.tcl.
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::form - Geometry manager based on attachment rules
-
-=for category  Tk Geometry Management
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >I<$widget>->B<form>?(I<args>)?
-
-S<    >I<$widget>->B<form>I<Option>?(I<args>)?
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<form> method is used to communicate with the
-B<form> Geometry Manager, a geometry manager that arranges the
-geometry of the children in a parent window according to attachment
-rules. The B<form> geometry manager is very flexible and
-powerful; it can be used to emulate all the existing features of the
-Tk packer and placer geometry managers (see L<pack|Tk::pack>,
-L<place|Tk::place>).
-The B<form> method can have any of several forms,
-depending on I<Option>:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$slave>->B<form>?(I<options>)?
-
-Sets or adjusts the attachment values of the slave window
-according to the I<-option>=>I<value> argument pairs.
-
-=over 8
-
-=item B<-b> => I<attachment>
-
-Abbreviation for the B<-bottom> option.
-
-=item B<-bottom> => I<attachment>
-
-Specifies an attachment for the bottom edge of the slave window. The
-attachment must specified according to L<"SPECIFYING ATTACHMENTS"> below.
-
-=item B<-bottomspring> => I<weight>
-
-Specifies the weight of the spring at the bottom edge of the slave
-window. See L<"USING SPRINGS"> below.
-
-=item B<-bp> => I<value>
-
-Abbreviation for the B<-padbottom> option.
-
-=item B<-bs> => I<weight>
-
-Abbreviation for the B<-bottomspring> option.
-
-=item B<-fill> => I<style>
-
-Specifies the fillings when springs are used for this widget. The
-value must be B<x>, B<y>, B<both> or B<none>.
-
-=item B<-in> => I<$master>
-
-Places the slave window into the specified I<$master> window. If the slave
-was originally in another master window, all attachment values with
-respect to the original master window are discarded. Even if the
-attachment values are the same as in the original master window, they
-need to be specified again.  The B<-in> flag, when needed, must appear
-as the first flag of I<options>. Otherwise an error is
-generated.
-
-=item B<-l> => I<attachment>
-
-Abbreviation for the B<-left> option.
-
-=item B<-left> => I<attachment>
-
-Specifies an attachment for the left edge of the slave window. The
-attachment must specified according to L<"SPECIFYING ATTACHMENTS"> below.
-
-=item B<-leftspring> => I<weight>
-
-Specifies the weight of the spring at the left edge of the slave
-window. See L<"USING SPRINGS"> below.
-
-=item B<-lp> => I<value>
-
-Abbreviation for the B<-padleft> option.
-
-=item B<-ls> => I<weight>
-
-Abbreviation for the B<-leftspring> option.
-
-=item B<-padbottom> => I<value>
-
-Specifies the amount of external padding to leave on the bottom side
-of the slave. The I<value> may have any of the forms acceptable to
-B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-
-=item B<-padleft> => I<value>
-
-Specifies the amount of external padding to leave on the left side of
-the slave.
-
-=item B<-padright> => I<value>
-
-Specifies the amount of external padding to leave on the right side of
-the slave.
-
-=item B<-padtop> => I<value>
-
-Specifies the amount of external padding to leave on the top side of
-the slave.
-
-=item B<-padx> => I<value>
-
-Specifies the amount of external padding to leave on both the left and
-the right sides of the slave.
-
-=item B<-pady> => I<value>
-
-Specifies the amount of external padding to leave on both the top and
-the bottom sides of the slave.
-
-=item B<-r> => I<attachment>
-
-Abbreviation for the B<-right> option.
-
-=item B<-right> => I<attachment>
-
-Specifies an attachment for the right edge of the slave window. The
-attachment must specified according to L<"SPECIFYING ATTACHMENTS"> below.
-
-=item B<-rightspring> => I<weight>
-
-Specifies the weight of the spring at the right edge of the slave
-window. See L<"USING SPRINGS"> below.
-
-=item B<-rp>  => I<value>
-
-Abbreviation for the B<-padright> option.
-
-=item B<-rs> => I<weight>
-
-Abbreviation for the B<-rightspring> option.
-
-=item B<-t> => I<attachment>
-
-Abbreviation for the B<-top> option.
-
-=item B<-top> => I<attachment>
-
-Specifies an attachment for the top edge of the slave window. The
-attachment must specified according to L<"SPECIFYING ATTACHMENTS"> below.
-
-=item B<-topspring> => I<weight>
-
-Specifies the weight of the spring at the top edge of the slave
-window. See L<"USING SPRINGS"> below.
-
-=item B<-tp> => I<value>
-
-Abbreviation for the B<-padtop> option.
-
-=item B<-ts> => I<weight>
-
-Abbreviation for the B<-topspring> option.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$master>->B<formCheck>
-
-This method checks whether there is circular dependency in the
-attachments of the master's slaves (see L<"CIRCULAR DEPENDENCY"> below).
-It returns the Boolean value B<TRUE> if it
-discover circular dependency and B<FALSE> otherwise.
-
-=item I<$slave>->B<formForget>
-
-Removes the slave from its master and unmaps its window.
-The slave will no longer be managed by form. All attachment values
-with respect to its master window are discarded. If another slave
-is attached to this slave, then the attachment of the other slave will
-be changed to grid attachment based on its geometry.
-
-=item I<$master>->B<formGrid>?(I<x_size, y_size>)?
-
-When I<x_size> and I<y_size> are given, this method returns the
-number of grids of the I<$master> window in a pair of integers of the form
-(I<x_size, y_size>). When both I<x_size> and I<y_size> are
-given, this method changes the number of horizontal and vertical
-grids on the master window.
-
-=item I<$slave>->B<formInfo>?(I<-option)>?
-
-Queries the attachment options of a slave window. I<-option> can be
-any of the options accepted by the B<form> method. If
-I<-option> is given, only the value of that option is returned.
-Otherwise, this method returns a list whose elements are the current
-configuration state of the slave given in the same I<option-value> form
-that might be specified to B<form>. The first two
-elements in this list list are "B<-in>=>I<$master>" where
-I<$master> is the slave's master window.
-
-=item I<$master>->B<formSlaves>
-
-Returns a list of all of the slaves for the master window. The order
-of the slaves in the list is the same as their order in the packing
-order. If master has no slaves then an empty string is returned.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 SPECIFYING ATTACHMENTS
-
-One can specify an attachment for each side of a slave window managed
-by form. An attachment is specified in the the form "-I<side> =>
-[I<anchor_point>, I<offset>]". -I<side> can be one of
-B<-top>, B<-bottom>, B<-left> or B<-right>.
-
-I<Offset> is given in screen units (i.e. any of the forms
-acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>).  A positive offset indicates
-shifting to a position to the right or bottom of an anchor point. A
-negative offset indicates shifting to a position to the left or top of
-an anchor point.
-
-I<Anchor_point> can be given in one of the
-following forms:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<Grid Attachment>
-
-The master window is divided into a number of horizontal and vertical
-grids. By default the master window is divided into 100x100 grids; the
-number of grids can be adjusted by the B<formGrid> method. A
-grid attachment anchor point is given by a B<%> sign followed by an
-integer value. For example, B<'%0'> specifies the first grid
-line (the top or left edge of the master window). B<'%100'> specifies
-the last grid line (the bottom or right edge of the master window).
-
-=item B<Opposite Side Attachment>
-
-Opposite attachment specifies an anchor point located on the
-B<opposite> side of another slave widget, which must be managed by
-form in the same master window. An opposite attachment anchor point
-is given by the name of another widget. For example,
-"I<$b>->B<form>(B<-top>=>[I<$a>,0])" attaches the top side of the widget I<$b> to the
-bottom of the widget I<$a>.
-
-=item B<Parallel Side Attachment>
-
-Opposite attachment specifies an anchor point located on the
-B<same> side of another slave widget, which must be managed by
-form in the same master window. An parallel attachment anchor point
-is given by the sign B<E<amp>> follwed by the name of another widget.
-For example, "I<$b>->B<form>(B<-top>=>['&',I<$a>,0])" attaches the top side of
-the widget I<$b> to the top of the widget I<$a>, making
-the top sides of these two widgets at the same vertical position
-in their parent window.
-
-=item B<No Attachment>
-
-Specifies a side of the slave to be attached to nothing, indicated by
-the keyword B<none>. When the B<none> anchor point is given, the
-offset must be zero (or not present).
-When a side of a slave is attached to B<['none', 0]>, the position
-of this side is calculated by the position of the other side and the
-natural size of the slave. For example, if a the left side of a
-widget is attached to B<['%0', 100]>, its right side attached to
-B<['none', 0]>, and the natural size of the widget is B<50> pixels,
-the right side of the widget will be positioned at pixel
-B<['%0', 149]>.
-When both B<-top> and B<-bottom> are attached to B<none>,
-then by default B<-top> will be attached to B<['%0', 0]>. When both
-B<-left> and B<-right> are attached to none, then by default
-B<-left> will be attached to B<['%0', 0]>.
-
-=back
-
-Shifting effects can be achieved by specifying a non-zero offset with
-an anchor point. In the following example, the top side of
-widget I<\$b> is attached to the bottom of
-I<\$a>; hence I<\$b>
-always appears below I<\$a>.  Also, the left edge of I<\$b>
-is attached to the left side of I<\$a> with a 10
-pixel offest.  Therefore, the left edge of I<\$b> is always
-shifted 10 pixels to the right of I<\$a>'s left edge:
-
-S<    >I<$b>->B<form>(B<-left>=>[I<$a>,10], B<-top>=>[I<$a>,0]);
-
-=head2 ABBREVIATIONS:
-
-Certain abbreviations can be made on the
-attachment specifications: First an offset of zero can be omitted.
-Thus, the following two lines are equivalent:
-
-S<    >I<$b>->B<form>(B<-top>=>[I<$a>,0], B<-right>=>['%100',0]);
-
-S<    >I<$b>->B<form>(B<-top>=>[I<$a>], B<-right>=>'%100');
-
-In the second case, when the anchor point is omitted, the offset must
-be given. A default anchor point is chosen according to the value of
-the offset. If the anchor point is B<0> or positive, the default
-anchor point %0 is used; thus, "I<$b>->B<form>(B<-top>=>15)" attaches the top
-edge of I<$b> to a position 15 pixels below the top edge of the
-master window. If the anchor point is "B<-0>" or negative, the
-default anchor point B<%100> is used; thus, "I<$a>->B<form>(B<-right>=>-2)"
-attaches the right edge of I<\$a> to a position 2 pixels to
-the left of the master window's right edge.  An further example
-below shows a method with its equivalent abbreviation.
-
-S<    >I<$b>->B<form>(B<-top>=>['%0',10], B<-bottom>=>['%100',0]);
-
-S<    >I<$b>->B<form>(B<-top>=>10, B<-bottom>=>-0);
-
-=head1 USING SPRINGS
-
-To be written.
-
-=head1 ALGORITHM OF FORM
-
-B<form> starts with any slave in the list of slaves of the master
-window. Then it tries to determine the position of each side of the
-slave.
-
-If the attachment of a side of the slave is grid attachment, the
-position of the side is readily determined.
-
-If the attachment of this side is B<none>, then form tries to
-determine the position of the opposite side first, and then use the
-position of the opposite side and the natural size of the slave to
-determine the position of this side.
-
-If the attachment is opposite or parallel widget attachments, then
-form tries to determine the positions of the other widget first,
-and then use the positions of the other widget and the natural size of
-the slave determine the position of this side. This recursive
-algorithmis carried on until the positions of all slaves are
-determined.
-
-=head1 CIRCULAR DEPENDENCY
-
-The algorithm of form will fail if a circular dependency exists in
-the attachments of the slaves. For example:
-
-S<    >I<$c>->B<form>(B<-left>=>I<$b>);
-
-S<    >I<$b>->B<form>(B<-right>=>I<$c>);
-
-In this example, the position of the left side of I<$b> depends on
-the right side of I<$c>, which in turn depends on the left side of I<$b>.
-
-When a circular dependency is discovered during the execution of the
-form algorithm, form will generate a background error and the
-geometry of the slaves are undefined (and will be arbitrary). Notice
-that form only executes the algorithm when the specification of the
-slaves' attachments is complete.  Therefore, it allows intermediate
-states of circular dependency during the specification of the slaves'
-attachments.  Also, unlike the Motif Form manager widget, form
-defines circular dependency as
-``I<dependency in the same dimension>''.
-Therefore, the following code fragment will does not
-have circular dependency because the two widgets do not depend on each
-other in the same dimension (I<$b> depends I<$c> in the
-horizontal dimension and I<$c> depends on I<$b> in the vertical
-dimension):
-
-S<    >I<$b>->B<form>(B<-left>=>I<$c>);
-
-S<    >I<$c>->B<form>(B<-top>=>I<$b>);
-
-=head1 BUGS
-
-Springs have not been fully implemented yet.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::grid|Tk::grid>
-L<Tk::pack|Tk::pack>
-L<Tk::place|Tk::place>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-geometry manager, form, attachment, spring, propagation, size, pack,
-tix, master, slave
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/getOpenFile.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/getOpenFile.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 56d39422afd..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/getOpenFile.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,182 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-getOpenFile, getSaveFile - pop up a dialog box for the user to select a file to open or save.
-
-=for category Popups and Dialogs
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<getOpenFile>(?I<-option>=E<gt>value, ...>?)
-
-S<    >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<getSaveFile>(?I<-option>=E<gt>value, ...>?)
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The methods B<getOpenFile> and B<getSaveFile> pop up a
-dialog box for the user to select a file to open or save.
-
-The B<getOpenFile> method is usually associated with the B<Open>
-command in the B<File> menu.  Its purpose is for the user to select an
-existing file I<only>.  If the user enters an non-existent file, the
-dialog box gives the user an error prompt and requires the user to give
-an alternative selection. If an application allows the user to create
-new files, it should do so by providing a separate B<New> menu command.
-
-The B<getSaveFile> method is usually associated with the B<Save>
-as command in the B<File> menu. If the user enters a file that
-already exists, the dialog box prompts the user for confirmation
-whether the existing file should be overwritten or not.
-
-If the user selects a file, both B<getOpenFile> and
-B<getSaveFile> return the full pathname of this file. If the
-user cancels the operation, both commands return an undefined value.
-
-The following I<option-value> pairs are possible as command line
-arguments to these two commands:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-defaultextension> =E<gt> I<extension>
-
-Specifies a string that will be appended to the filename if the user
-enters a filename without an extension. The default value is the empty
-string, which means no extension will be appended to the filename in
-any case. This option is ignored on the Macintosh platform, which
-does not require extensions to filenames, and the UNIX implementation
-guesses reasonable values  for  this from the B<-filetypes>
-option when this is not supplied.
-
-=item B<-filetypes> =E<gt> [I<filePattern> ?, ...?]
-
-If a B<File types> listbox exists in the file dialog on the particular
-platform, this option gives the I<filetype>s in this listbox. When
-the user choose a filetype in the listbox, only the files of that type
-are listed. If this option is unspecified, or if it is set to the
-empty list, or if the B<File types> listbox is not supported by the
-particular platform then all files are listed regardless of their
-types. See L<"SPECIFYING FILE PATTERNS"> below for a
-discussion on the contents of I<filePattern>s.
-
-=item B<-initialdir> =E<gt> I<directory>
-
-Specifies that the files in I<directory> should be displayed
-when the dialog pops up. If this parameter is not specified, then
-the files in the current working directory are displayed.  This
-option may not always work on the Macintosh.  This is not a bug.
-Rather, the I<General Controls> control panel on the Mac allows the
-end user to override the application default directory.
-
-=item B<-initialfile> =E<gt> I<filename>
-
-Specifies a filename to be displayed in the dialog when it pops
-up. This option is ignored by the B<getOpenFile> method.
-
-=item B<-multiple>
-
-Allows the user to choose multiple files from the Open dialog.  On the
-Macintosh, this is only available when Navigation Services are
-installed.
-
-=item B<-message> =E<gt> I<string>
-
-Specifies a message to include in the client area of the dialog. This
-is only available on the Macintosh, and only when Navigation Services
-are installed.
-
-=item B<-title> =E<gt> I<titleString>
-
-Specifies a string to display as the title of the dialog box. If this
-option is not specified, then a default title is displayed. This
-option is ignored on the Macintosh platform.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 SPECIFYING FILE PATTERNS
-
-The I<filePattern>s given by the B<-filetypes> option
-are a list of file patterns. Each file pattern is a list of the
-form
-
- typeName [extension ?extension ...?] ?[macType ?macType ...?]?
-
-I<typeName> is the name of the file type described by this
-file pattern and is the text string that appears in the B<File types>
-listbox. I<extension> is a file extension for this file pattern.
-I<macType> is a four-character Macintosh file type. The list of
-I<macType>s is optional and may be omitted for applications that do
-not need to execute on the Macintosh platform.
-
-Several file patterns may have the same I<typeName,> in which case
-they refer to the same file type and share the same entry in the
-listbox. When the user selects an entry in the listbox, all the files
-that match at least one of the file patterns corresponding
-to that entry are listed. Usually, each file pattern corresponds to a
-distinct type of file. The use of more than one file patterns for one
-type of file is necessary on the Macintosh platform only.
-
-On the Macintosh platform, a file matches a file pattern if its
-name matches at least one of the I<extension>(s) AND it
-belongs to at least one of the I<macType>(s) of the
-file pattern. For example, the B<C Source Files> file pattern in the
-sample code matches with files that have a B<\.c> extension AND
-belong to the I<macType> B<TEXT>. To use the OR rule instead,
-you can use two file patterns, one with the I<extensions> only and
-the other with the I<macType> only. The B<GIF Files> file type
-in the sample code matches files that EITHER have a B<\.gif>
-extension OR belong to the I<macType> B<GIFF>.
-
-On the Unix and Windows platforms, a file matches a file pattern
-if its name matches at at least one of the I<extension>(s) of
-the file pattern. The I<macType>s are ignored.
-
-=head1 SPECIFYING EXTENSIONS
-
-On the Unix and Macintosh platforms, extensions are matched using
-glob-style pattern matching. On the Windows platforms, extensions are
-matched by the underlying operating system. The types of possible
-extensions are: (1) the special extension * matches any
-file; (2) the special extension "" matches any files that
-do not have an extension (i.e., the filename contains no full stop
-character); (3) any character string that does not contain any wild
-card characters (* and ?).
-
-Due to the different pattern matching rules on the various platforms,
-to ensure portability, wild card characters are not allowed in the
-extensions, except as in the special extension *. Extensions
-without a full stop character (e.g, ~) are allowed but may not
-work on all platforms.
-
-=head1 CAVEATS
-
-See L<Tk::chooseDirectory/CAVEATS>.
-
-=head1 EXAMPLE
-
- my $types = [
-     ['Text Files',       ['.txt', '.text']],
-     ['TCL Scripts',      '.tcl'           ],
-     ['C Source Files',   '.c',      'TEXT'],
-     ['GIF Files',        '.gif',          ],
-     ['GIF Files',        '',        'GIFF'],
-     ['All Files',        '*',             ],
- ];
- my $filename = $widget->getOpenFile(-filetypes=>$types);
-
- if ($filename ne "") {
-     # Open the file ...
- }
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::FBox|Tk::FBox>, L<Tk::FileSelect|Tk::FileSelect>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-file selection dialog
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/grab.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/grab.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 98a488d09f7..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/grab.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,140 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-grab - Confine pointer and keyboard events to a window sub-tree
-
-=for category User Interaction
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-I<$widget>-E<gt>B<grab>
-
-I<$widget>-E<gt>B<grab>I<Option>
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-This set of methods implement simple pointer and keyboard grabs for Tk.
-Tk's grabs are different than the grabs
-described in the Xlib documentation.
-When a grab is set for a particular window, Tk restricts all pointer
-events to the grab window and its descendants in Tk's window hierarchy.
-Whenever the pointer is within the grab window's subtree, the pointer
-will behave exactly the same as if there had been no grab at all
-and all events will be reported in the normal fashion.
-When the pointer is outside I<$widget>'s tree, button presses and
-releases and
-mouse motion events are reported to I<$widget>, and window entry
-and window exit events are ignored.
-The grab subtree ``owns'' the pointer:
-windows outside the grab subtree will be visible on the screen
-but they will be insensitive until the grab is released.
-The tree of windows underneath the grab window can include top-level
-windows, in which case all of those top-level windows
-and their descendants will continue to receive mouse events
-during the grab.
-
-Two forms of grabs are possible:  local and global.
-A local grab affects only the grabbing application:  events will
-be reported to other applications as if the grab had never occurred.
-Grabs are local by default.
-A global grab locks out all applications on the screen,
-so that only the given subtree of the grabbing application will be
-sensitive to pointer events (mouse button presses, mouse button releases,
-pointer motions, window entries, and window exits).
-During global grabs the window manager will not receive pointer
-events either.
-
-During local grabs, keyboard events (key presses and key releases)
-are delivered as usual:  the window
-manager controls which application receives keyboard events, and
-if they are sent to any window in the grabbing application then they are
-redirected to the focus window.
-During a global grab Tk grabs the keyboard so that all keyboard events
-are always sent to the grabbing application.
-The B<focus> method is still used to determine which window in the
-application receives the keyboard events.
-The keyboard grab is released when the grab is released.
-
-Grabs apply to particular displays.  If an application has windows
-on multiple displays then it can establish a separate grab on each
-display.
-The grab on a particular display affects only the windows on
-that display.
-It is possible for different applications on a single display to have
-simultaneous local grabs, but only one application can have a global
-grab on a given display at once.
-
-The B<grab> methods take any of the following forms:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<grabCurrent>
-
-Returns the current grab
-window in this application for I<$widget>'s display, or an empty
-string if there is no such window.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<grabs>
-
-Returns a list whose elements
-are all of the windows grabbed by this application for all displays,
-or an empty string if the application has no grabs.
-
-I<Not implemented yet!>
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<grabRelease>
-
-Releases the grab on I<$widget> if there is one, otherwise does
-nothing.  Returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<grab>
-
-Sets a local grab on I<$widget>.
-If a grab was already in effect for this application on
-I<$widget>'s display then it is automatically released.
-If there is already a local grab on I<$widget>, then the command
-does nothing.  Returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<grabGlobal>
-
-Sets a global grab on I<$widget>.
-If a grab was already in effect for this application on
-I<$widget>'s display then it is automatically released.
-If there is already a global grab on I<$widget>,
-then the command does nothing.  Returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<grabStatus>
-
-Returns B<none> if no grab is currently set on I<$widget>,
-B<local> if a local grab is set on I<$widget>, and
-B<global> if a global grab is set.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 BUGS
-
-It took an incredibly complex and gross implementation to produce
-the simple grab effect described above.
-Given the current implementation, it isn't safe for applications
-to use the Xlib grab facilities at all except through the Tk grab
-procedures.
-If applications try to manipulate X's grab mechanisms directly,
-things will probably break.
-
-If a single process is managing several different Tk applications,
-only one of those applications can have a local grab for a given
-display at any given time.  If the applications are in different
-processes, this restriction doesn't exist.
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-grab, keyboard events, pointer events, window
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/grid.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/grid.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 8db89587a62..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/grid.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,409 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::grid - Geometry manager that arranges widgets in a grid
-
-=for category Tk Geometry Management
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<grid>?(?I<widget> ...,? ?I<arg> ?...>?)?
-
-S<    >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<grid>I<Option>?(I<arg> ?,I<arg> ...?)?
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<grid> method is used to communicate with the grid
-geometry manager that arranges widgets in rows and columns inside
-of another window, called the geometry master (or master window).
-The B<grid> method can have any of several forms, depending
-on the I<option> argument:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$slave>-E<gt>B<grid>(?I<$slave, ...>??, I<options>?)
-
-The arguments consist of the optional references to more slave windows
-followed by pairs of arguments that specify how to manage the slaves.
-The characters B<->,  B<x> and B<^>,
-can be specified instead of a window reference to alter the default
-location of a I<$slave>, as described in L<"RELATIVE PLACEMENT">, below.
-
-If any of the slaves are already managed by the geometry manager
-then any unspecified options for them retain their previous values rather
-than receiving default values.
-
-The following options are supported:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item B<-column> => I<n>
-
-Insert the I<$slave> so that it occupies the I<n>th column in the grid.
-Column numbers start with 0.  If this option is not supplied, then the
-I<$slave> is arranged just to the right of previous slave specified on this
-call to B<grid>, or column "0" if it is the first slave.  For each
-B<x> that immediately precedes the I<$slave>, the column position
-is incremented by one.  Thus the B<x> represents a blank column
-for this row in the grid.
-
-=item B<-columnspan> => I<n>
-
-Insert the slave so that it occupies I<n> columns in the grid.
-The default is one column, unless the window name is followed by a
-B<->, in which case the columnspan is incremented once for each immediately
-following B<->.
-
-=item B<-in> => I<$other>
-
-Insert the slave(s) in the master
-window given by I<$other>.  The default is the first slave's
-parent window.
-
-=item B<-ipadx> => I<amount>
-
-The I<amount> specifies how much horizontal internal padding to
-leave on each side of the slave(s).  This is space is added
-inside the slave(s) border.
-The I<amount> must be a valid screen distance, such as B<2> or B<'.5c'>.
-It defaults to 0.
-
-=item B<-ipady> => I<amount>
-
-The I<amount> specifies how much vertical internal padding to
-leave on on the top and bottom of the slave(s).
-This space is added inside the slave(s) border.
-The I<amount>  defaults to 0.
-
-=item B<-padx> => I<amount>
-
-The I<amount> specifies how much horizontal external padding to
-leave on each side of the slave(s), in screen units.
-The I<amount> defaults to 0.
-This space is added outside the slave(s) border.
-
-=item B<-pady> => I<amount>
-
-The I<amount> specifies how much vertical external padding to
-leave on the top and bottom of the slave(s), in screen units.
-The I<amount> defaults to 0.
-This space is added outside the slave(s) border.
-
-=item B<-row> => I<n>
-
-Insert the slave so that it occupies the I<n>th row in the grid.
-Row numbers start with 0.  If this option is not supplied, then the
-slave is arranged on the same row as the previous slave specified on this
-call to B<grid>, or the first unoccupied row if this is the first slave.
-
-=item B<-rowspan> => I<n>
-
-Insert the slave so that it occupies I<n> rows in the grid.
-The default is one row.  If the next B<grid> method contains
-B<^> characters instead of I<$slave>s that line up with the columns
-of this I<$slave>, then the B<rowspan> of this I<$slave> is
-extended by one.
-
-=item B<-sticky> => I<style>
-
-If a slave's cell is larger than its requested dimensions, this
-option may be used to position (or stretch) the slave within its cell.
-I<Style>  is a string that contains zero or more of the characters
-B<n>, B<s>, B<e> or B<w>.
-The string can optionally contain spaces or
-commas, but they are ignored.  Each letter refers to a side (north, south,
-east, or west) that the slave will "stick" to.  If both B<n> and B<s> (or
-B<e> and B<w>) are specified, the slave will be stretched to fill the entire
-height (or width) of its cavity.  The B<sticky> option subsumes the
-combination of B<-anchor> and B<-fill> that is used by L<pack|Tk::pack>.
-The default is B<''>, which causes the slave to be centered in its cavity,
-at its requested size.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$master>-E<gt>B<gridBbox>(?I<column, row>,? ?I<column2, row2>?)
-
-With no arguments,
-the bounding box (in pixels) of the grid is returned.
-The return value consists of 4 integers.  The first two are the pixel
-offset from the master window (x then y) of the top-left corner of the
-grid, and the second two integers are the width and height of the grid,
-also in pixels.  If a single I<column> and I<row> is specified on
-the command line, then the bounding box for that cell is returned, where the
-top left cell is numbered from zero.  If both I<column> and I<row>
-arguments are specified, then the bounding box spanning the rows and columns
-indicated is returned.
-
-=item I<$master>-E<gt>B<gridColumnconfigure>(I<index>?, I<-option>=>I<value, ...>?)
-
-Query or set the column properties of the I<index> column of the
-geometry master, I<$master>.
-The valid options are B<-minsize>, B<-weight> and B<-pad>.
-If one or more options are provided, then I<index> may be given as
-a list of column indices to which the configuration options will operate on.
-The B<-minsize> option sets the minimum size, in screen units,
-that will be permitted for this column.
-The B<-weight> option (an integer value)
-sets the relative weight for apportioning
-any extra spaces among
-columns.
-A weight of zero (0) indicates the column will not deviate from its requested
-size.  A column whose weight is two will grow at twice the rate as a column
-of weight one when extra space is allocated to the layout.
-The B<-uniform> option,  when  a
-non-empty  value  is  supplied,  places  the column in a I<uniform
-group> with other columns that have the same value for B<-uniform>.
-The  space for columns belonging to a uniform group is allocated
-so that their sizes are always in  strict  proportion  to  their
-B<-weight> values.   See  I<THE GRID ALGORITHM> below for further
-details. 
-The B<-pad> option specifies the number of screen units that will be
-added to the largest window contained completely in that column when the
-grid geometry manager requests a size from the containing window.
-If only an option is specified, with no value,
-the current value of that option is returned.
-If only the master window and index is specified, all the current settings
-are returned in an list of "-option value" pairs.
-
-=item I<$slave>-E<gt>B<gridConfigure>(?I<$slave, ...>?, I<options>?)
-
-The same as B<grid> method.
-
-=item I<$slave>-E<gt>B<gridForget>?(I<$slave, ...>)?
-
-Removes each of the I<$slave>s from grid for its
-master and unmaps their windows.
-The slaves will no longer be managed by the grid geometry manager.
-The configuration options for that window are forgotten, so that if the
-slave is managed once more by the grid geometry manager, the initial
-default settings are used.
-
-=item I<$slave>-E<gt>B<gridInfo>
-
-Returns a list whose elements are the current configuration state of
-the slave given by I<$slave> in the same option-value form that
-might be specified to B<gridConfigure>.
-The first two elements of the list are ``B<-in>=>I<$master>'' where
-I<$master> is the slave's master.
-
-=item I<$master>-E<gt>B<gridLocation>(I<x, y>)
-
-Given  I<x> and I<y> values in screen units relative to the master window,
-the column and row number at that I<x> and I<y> location is returned.
-For locations that are above or to the left of the grid, B<-1> is returned.
-
-=item I<$master>-E<gt>B<gridPropagate>?(I<boolean>)?
-
-If I<boolean> has a true boolean value such as B<1> or B<on>
-then propagation is enabled for I<$master>, which must be a window
-name (see L<"GEOMETRY PROPAGATION"> below).
-If I<boolean> has a false boolean value then propagation is
-disabled for I<$master>.
-In either of these cases an empty string is returned.
-If I<boolean> is omitted then the method returns B<0> or
-B<1> to indicate whether propagation is currently enabled
-for I<$master>.
-Propagation is enabled by default.
-
-=item I<$master>-E<gt>B<gridRowconfigure>(I<index>?, I<-option>=>I<value, ...>?)
-
-Query or set the row properties of the I<index> row of the
-geometry master, I<$master>.
-The valid options are B<-minsize>, B<-weight> and B<-pad>.
-If one or more options are provided, then I<index> may be given as
-a list of row indeces to which the configuration options will operate on.
-The B<-minsize> option sets the minimum size, in screen units,
-that will be permitted for this row.
-The B<-weight> option (an integer value)
-sets the relative weight for apportioning
-any extra spaces among
-rows.
-A weight of zero (0) indicates the row will not deviate from its requested
-size.  A row whose weight is two will grow at twice the rate as a row
-of weight one when extra space is allocated to the layout.
-The B<-uniform>  option, when a non-empty value is supplied, places the
-row in a I<uniform group> with other rows that have the same  value
-for B<-uniform>.   The space for rows belonging to a uniform group
-is allocated so that their sizes are always in strict proportion
-to  their B<-weight> values.  See I<THE GRID ALGORITHM> below for
-further details. 
-The B<-pad> option specifies the number of screen units that will be
-added to the largest window contained completely in that row when the
-grid geometry manager requests a size from the containing window.
-If only an option is specified, with no value,
-the current value of that option is returned.
-If only the master window and index is specified, all the current settings
-are returned in an list of "option-value" pairs.
-
-=item I<$slave>-E<gt>B<gridRemove>?(I<$slave, ...>)?
-
-Removes each of the I<$slave>s from grid for its
-master and unmaps their windows.
-The slaves will no longer be managed by the grid geometry manager.
-However, the configuration options for that window are remembered,
-so that if the
-slave is managed once more by the grid geometry manager, the previous
-values are retained.
-
-=item I<$master>-E<gt>B<gridSize>
-
-Returns the size of the grid (in columns then rows) for I<$master>.
-The size is determined either by the I<$slave> occupying the largest
-row or column, or the largest column or row with a B<-minsize>,
-B<-weight>, or B<-pad> that is non-zero.
-
-=item I<$master>-E<gt>B<gridSlaves>?(I<-option>=>I<value>)?
-
-If no options are supplied, a list of all of the slaves in I<$master>
-are returned, most recently manages first.
-I<-option> can be either B<-row> or B<-column> which
-causes only the slaves in the row (or column) specified by I<value>
-to be returned.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 RELATIVE PLACEMENT
-
-The B<grid> method contains a limited set of capabilities that
-permit layouts to be created without specifying the row and column
-information for each slave.  This permits slaves to be rearranged,
-added, or removed without the need to explicitly specify row and
-column information.
-When no column or row information is specified for a I<$slave>,
-default values are chosen for
-B<-column>, B<-row>, B<-columnspan> and B<-rowspan>
-at the time the I<$slave> is managed. The values are chosen
-based upon the current layout of the grid, the position of the I<$slave>
-relative to other I<$slave>s in the same grid method, and the presence
-of the characters B<->, B<^>, and B<^> in B<grid>
-method where I<$slave> names are normally expected.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<->
-
-This increases the columnspan of the I<$slave> to the left.  Several
-B<->'s in a row will successively increase the columnspan. A B<->
-may not follow a B<^> or a B<x>.
-
-=item B<x>
-
-This leaves an empty column between the I<$slave> on the left and
-the I<$slave> on the right.
-
-=item B<^>
-
-This extends the B<-rowspan> of the I<$slave> above the B<^>'s
-in the grid.  The number of B<^>'s in a row must match the number of
-columns spanned by the I<$slave> above it.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 THE GRID ALGORITHM
-
-The grid geometry manager lays out its slaves in three steps.
-In the first step, the minimum size needed to fit all of the slaves
-is computed, then (if propagation is turned on), a request is made
-of the master window to become that size.
-In the second step, the requested size is compared against the actual size
-of the master.  If the sizes are different, then space is added to or taken
-away from the layout as needed.
-For the final step, each slave is positioned in its row(s) and column(s)
-based on the setting of its I<sticky> flag.
-
-To compute the minimum size of a layout, the grid geometry manager
-first looks at all slaves whose columnspan and rowspan values are one,
-and computes the nominal size of each row or column to be either the
-I<minsize> for that row or column, or the sum of the I<pad>ding
-plus the size of the largest slave, whichever is greater.  Then the
-slaves whose rowspans or columnspans are greater than one are
-examined.  If a group of rows or columns need to be increased in size
-in order to accommodate these slaves, then extra space is added to each
-row or column in the group according to its I<weight>.  For each
-group whose weights are all zero, the additional space is apportioned
-equally.
-
-When multiple rows or columns belong to a uniform group, the space
-allocated to them is always in proportion to their weights. (A weight
-of zero is considered to be 1.)  In other words, a row or column
-configured with B<-weight 1 -uniform> a will have exactly the same size
-as any other row or column configured with B<-weight 1 -uniform a>.  A
-row or column configured with B<-weight 2 -uniform b> will be exactly
-twice as large as one that is configured with B<-weight 1 -uniform b>.
-
-More technically, each row or column in the group will have a size
-equal to I<k*weight> for some constant k.  The constant k is chosen so
-that no row or column becomes smaller than its minimum size.  For
-example, if all rows or columns in a group have the same weight, then
-each row or column will have the same size as the largest row or
-column in the group.
-
-
-For masters whose size is larger than the requested layout, the additional
-space is apportioned according to the row and column weights.  If all of
-the weights are zero, the layout is centered within its master.
-For masters whose size is smaller than the requested layout, space is taken
-away from columns and rows according to their weights.  However, once a
-column or row shrinks to its minsize, its weight is taken to be zero.
-If more space needs to be removed from a layout than would be permitted, as
-when all the rows or columns are at there minimum sizes, the layout is
-clipped on the bottom and right.
-
-=head1 GEOMETRY PROPAGATION
-
-The grid geometry manager normally computes how large a master must be to
-just exactly meet the needs of its slaves, and it sets the
-requested width and height of the master to these dimensions.
-This causes geometry information to propagate up through a
-window hierarchy to a top-level window so that the entire
-sub-tree sizes itself to fit the needs of the leaf windows.
-However, the B<gridPropagate> method may be used to
-turn off propagation for one or more masters.
-If propagation is disabled then grid will not set
-the requested width and height of the master window.
-This may be useful if, for example, you wish for a master
-window to have a fixed size that you specify.
-
-=head1 RESTRICTIONS ON MASTER WINDOWS
-
-The master for each slave must either be the slave's parent
-(the default) or a descendant of the slave's parent.
-This restriction is necessary to guarantee that the
-slave can be placed over any part of its master that is
-visible without danger of the slave being clipped by its parent.
-In addition, all slaves in one call to B<grid> must have the same master.
-
-=head1 STACKING ORDER
-
-If the master for a slave is not its parent then you must make sure
-that the slave is higher in the stacking order than the master.
-Otherwise the master will obscure the slave and it will appear as
-if the slave hasn't been managed correctly.
-The easiest way to make sure the slave is higher than the master is
-to create the master window first:  the most recently created window
-will be highest in the stacking order.
-
-=head1 CREDITS
-
-The B<grid> method is based on ideas taken from the I<GridBag>
-geometry manager written by Doug. Stein, and the B<blt_table> geometry
-manager, written by George Howlett.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::form|Tk::form>
-L<Tk::pack|Tk::pack>
-L<Tk::place|Tk::place>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-geometry manager, location, grid, cell, propagation, size, pack,
-master, slave
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/mega.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/mega.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 76e40e7891f..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/mega.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,423 +0,0 @@
-
-## Author: Achim Bohnet <ach@mpe.mpg.de>
-##
-## Copyright (c) 1997-1998 Achim Bohnet. All rights reserved.
-## You can redistribute this document and/or modify it under the
-## same terms as Perl itself.
-##
-## Update for Tk804.025, Steve Lidie, 2004/01/11.
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::mega - Perl/Tk support for writing widgets in pure Perl
-
-=for category Derived Widgets
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-Define the widget's new class name:
-
-S<    >B<package Tk::>I<MyNewWidget>;
-
-For composite widget classes:
-
-S<    >B<use base qw/ Tk::container />; # where B<container> is I<Frame> or I<Toplevel>
-
-For derived widget classes:
-
-S<    >B<use base qw/ Tk::Derived Tk::DerivedWidget /;>
-
-Install the new widget in Tk's namespace and establish class and instance
-constructors.
-
-S<    >B<Construct Tk::>I<Widget> I<'MyNewWidget'>;
-
-S<    >B<sub ClassInit> { I<my ($self, $args) = @_; ...> }
-
-S<    >B<sub Populate> { I<my ($self, $args) = @_; ...> }
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The goal of the mega-widget support of Perl/Tk is to make it
-easy to write mega-widgets that obey the same protocol and
-interface that the Tk core widgets support.
-I<For mega-widget sample code please run the B<widget> demonstration program and go to the section B<Sample Perl Mega-Widgets>.>
-
-There are two kinds of mega-widgets:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item * Composite Widgets
-
-A composite widget is composed with one or more existing widgets.
-The composite widget looks to the user like a simple single widget.
-A well known example is the file selection box.
-
-=item * Derived Widgets
-
-A derived widget adds/modifies/removes properties and methods
-from a single widget (this widget may itself be a mega-widget).
-
-=back
-
-=head1 MEGA-WIDGET SUPPORT
-
-=head2 Advertise
-
-Give a subwidget a symbolic name.
-
-Usage:
-
-S<    >I<$self>-E<gt>B<Advertise>(B<name>=E<gt>I<$widget>);
-
-Gives a subwidget I<$widget> of the mega-widget I<$self> the
-name B<name>.  One can retrieve the reference of an advertised subwidget
-with the L<Subwidget|"Subwidget"> method.
-
-B<Comment:> Mega-Widget Writers: Please make sure to document the
-advertised widgets that are intended for I<public> use.
-If there are none, document this fact, e.g.:
-
-	=head1 ADVERTISED WIDGETS
-
-	None.
-
-=head2 Callback
-
-Invoke a callback specified with an option.
-
-Usage:
-
-S<    >I<$self>-E<gt>B<Callback>(I<-option> ?,I<args> ...?);
-
-B<Callback> executes the L<callback|Tk::callbacks> defined with
-I<$self>-E<gt>B<ConfigSpecs>(I<-option>, [B<CALLBACK>, ...]);
-If I<args> are given they are passed to the callback. If
-I<-option> is not defined it does nothing.
-
-=head2 ClassInit
-
-Initialization of the mega-widget class.
-
-Usage:
-
-S<    >B<sub ClassInit> { I<my ($class, $mw) = @_;> ...  }
-
-B<ClassInit> is called once for I<each> L<MainWindow|Tk::MainWindow>
-just before the first widget instance of a class is created in
-the widget tree of B<MainWindow>.
-
-B<ClassInit> is often used to define bindings and/or other
-resources shared by all instances, e.g., images.
-
-Examples:
-
- $mw->bind($class,"<Tab>", sub { my $w = shift; $w->Insert("\t"); $w->focus; $w->break});
- $mw->bind($class,"<Return>", ['Insert',"\n"]);
- $mw->bind($class,"<Delete>",'Delete');
-
-Notice that I<$class> is the class name (e.g. B<Tk::MyText>) and I<$mw> is the mainwindow.
-
-Don't forget to call I<$class>-E<gt>B<SUPER::ClassInit($mw)> in
-B<ClassInit>.
-
-=head2 Component
-
-Convenience function to create subwidgets.
-
-Usage:
-
-    $cw->Component('Whatever', 'AdvertisedName',
-        -delegate => ['method1', 'method2', ...],
-        ... more widget options ...,
-    );
-
-B<Component> does several things for you with one call:
-
-=over 4
-
-o Creates the widget
-
-o Advertises it with a given name (overridden by 'Name' option)
-
-o Delegates a set of methods to this widget (optional)
-
-=back
-
-Example:
-
-    $cw->Component('Button', 'quitButton', -command => sub{$mw->'destroy'});
-
-=head2 ConfigSpecs
-
-Defines options and their treatment
-
-Usage:
-
-    $cw->ConfigSpecs(
-        -option => [ where, dbname, dbclass, default],
-        ...,
-        DEFAULT => [where],
-    );
-
-Defines the options of a mega-widget and what actions
-are triggered by configure/cget of an option
-(see L<Tk::ConfigSpecs> and L<Tk::Derived> for details).
-
-=head2 Construct
-
-Make the new mega-widget known to B<Tk>.
-
-Usage:
-
-S<    >B<Construct> I<baseclass> B<'Name'>;
-
-B<Construct> declares the new widget class so that your mega-widget
-works like normal Perl/Tk widgets.
-
-Examples:
-
-S<    >B<Construct Tk::Widget> I<'Whatever'>;
-S<    >B<Construct Tk::Menu>   I<'MyItem'>;
-
-First example lets one use I<$widget>-E<gt>B<Whatever> to create
-new B<Whatever> widget.
-
-The second example restricts the usage of the B<MyItem> constructor
-method to widgets that are derived from B<Menu>:
-I<$isamenu>-E<gt>I<MyItem>.
-
-=head2 CreateArgs
-
-Process options before any widget is created:
-
-S<    >B<sub CreateArgs> { I<my ($package, $parent, $args) = @_; ...; return @newargs;> }
-
-I<$package> is the package of the mega-widget (e.g., B<Tk::MyText>,
-I<$parent> the parent of the widget to be created and $args the hash
-reference to the options specified in the widget constructor call.
-
-Don't forget to call I<$package>-E<gt>B<SUPER::CreateArgs>(I<$parent>, I<$args>) in
-B<CreateArgs>.
-
-=head2 Delegates
-
-Redirect a method of the mega-widget to a subwidget of
-the composite widget
-
-Usage:
-
-    $cw->Delegates(
-        'method1' => $subwidget1,
-        'method2' => 'advertived_name',
-        ...,
-        'Construct' => $subwidget2,
-        'DEFAULT'   => $subwidget3,
-    );
-
-The B<'Construct'> delegation has a special meaning.  After
-'Construct' is delegated all Widget constructors are redirected.
-E.g. after
-
-S<    >I<$self>-E<gt>B<Delegates>(B<'Construct'>=E<gt>I<$subframe>);
-
-a I<$self>-E<gt>B<Button> does really a I<$subframe>-E<gt>B<Button>
-so the created button is a child of I<$subframe> and not I<$self>.
-
-B<Comment:> Delegates works only with methods that I<$cw> does
-not have itself.
-
-=head2 InitObject
-
-I<Note: this method should not, in general, be used, as it has been
-superceeded by B<Populate> and specifying B<Tk::Derived> as one of the base
-classes.>
-
-Defines construction and interface of derived widgets.
-
-Usage:
-
-    sub InitObject {
-	my ($derived, $args) = @_;
-	...
-    }
-
-where I<$derived> is the widget reference of the already created
-baseclass widget and I<$args> is the reference to a hash of
-I<-option-value> pairs.
-
-B<InitObject> is almost identical to L<Populate|"Populate"> method.
-B<Populate> does some more 'magic' things useful for mega-widgets
-with several widgets.
-
-Don't forget to call I<$derived>-E<gt>B<SUPER::InitObject>(I<$args>) in
-B<InitObject>.
-
-=head2 OnDestroy
-
-Define a callback invoked when the mega-widget is destroyed.
-
-Usage:
-
-S<    >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<OnDestroy>(I<callback>);
-
-B<OnDestroy> installs a L<callback|Tk::callbacks> that's called
-when a widget is going to to be destroyed.  Useful
-for special cleanup actions.  It differs from a normal B<destroy>
-in that all the widget's data structures are still intact.
-
-B<Comment:> This method could be used with any widgets not just
-for mega-widgets.  It's listed here because of it's usefulness.
-
-=head2 Populate
-
-Defines construction and interface of the composite
-widget.
-
-Usage:
-
-    sub Populate {
-	my ($self, $args) = @_;
-	...
-    }
-
-where I<$self> is the widget reference of the already created baseclass
-widget and I<$args> is the
-reference to a hash of I<-option-value> pairs.
-
-Most the other support function are normally used inside the B<Populate>
-subroutine.
-
-Don't forget to call I<$cw>-E<gt>B<SUPER::Populate>(I<$args>) in
-B<Populate>.
-
-=head2 privateData
-
-Set/get a private hash of a widget to storage
-composite internal data
-
-Usage:
-
-S<    >I<$hashref> = I<$self>-E<gt>B<privateData>();
-
-S<    >I<$another> = I<$self>-E<gt>B<privateData>(I<unique_key>|I<package>);
-
-=head2 Subwidget
-
-Get the widget reference of an advertised subwidget.
-
-S<    >I<@subwidget> = I<$cw>-E<gt>B<Subwidget>();
-
-S<    >I<$subwidget> = I<$cw>-E<gt>B<Subwidget>(I<name>);
-
-S<    >I<@subwidget> = I<$cw>-E<gt>B<Subwidget>(I<name> ?,...?);
-
-Returns the widget reference(s) of the subwidget known under the given
-name(s). Without arguments, return all known subwidgets of I<$cw>. See
-L<Advertise|"Advertise"> method how to define I<name> for a subwidget.
-
-B<Comment:> Mega-Widget Users: Use B<Subwidget> to get I<only>
-documented subwidgets.
-
-=head1 PITFALLS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item * Resource DB class name
-
-Some of the standard options use a resource date base class
-that is not equal to the resource database name.  E.g.,
-
-  Switch:            Name:             Class:
-
-  -padx              padX              Pad
-  -activerelief      activeRelief      Relief
-  -activebackground  activeBackground  Foreground
-  -status            undef             undef
-
-One should do the same when one defines one of these
-options via B<ConfigSpecs>.
-
-=item * Method delegation
-
-Redirecting methods to a subwidget with B<Delegate>
-can only work if the base widget itself does have a
-method with this name.  Therefore one can't ``I<delegate>''
-any of the methods listed in L<Tk::Widget|Tk::Widget>.
-A common problematic method is B<bind>.  In this case
-one as to explicitely redirect the method.
-
-  sub bind {
-      my $self = shift;
-      my $to = $self->privateData->{'my_bind_target'};
-      $to->bind(@_);
-  }
-
-=item * privateData
-
-Graham Barr wrote: ... It is probably
-more private than most people think. Not all calls to privateData will
-return that same HASH reference. The HASH reference that is returned
-depends on the package it was called from, a different HASH is returned
-for each package. This allows a widget to hold private data, but then
-if it is sub-classed the sub-class will get a different HASH and so not
-cause duplicate name clashes.
-
-But privateData does take an optional argument if you want to
-force which HASH is returned.
-
-=item * Scrolled and Composite
-
-B<Scrolled>(I<Kind>,...) constructor can not be used with B<Composite>.
-One has to use $cw->B<Composite>(B<Scrl>I<Kind> =E<gt> B<'name'>, ...);
-
-=back
-
-=head1 MISSING
-
-Of course Perl/Tk does not define support function for
-all necessities.  Here's a short list of things you have to
-handle yourself:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item *
-
-No support to define construction-time only options.
-
-=item *
-
-No support to remove an option that is known to the
-base widget.
-
-=item *
-
-It's hard to define B<undef> as fallback for an widget
-option that is not already B<undef>.
-
-=item *
-
-Frame in Perl/Tk carries magic and overhead not needed
-for composite widget class definition.
-
-=item *
-
-No support methods for bindings that are shared between all
-widgets of a composite widget (makes sense at all?)
-
-=back
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-mega, composite, derived, widget
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::composite|Tk::composite>
-L<Tk::ConfigSpecs|Tk::ConfigSpecs>
-L<Tk::option|Tk::option>
-L<Tk::callbacks|Tk::callbacks>
-L<Tk::bind|Tk::bind>
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/messageBox.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/messageBox.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 3cae94beb0d..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/messageBox.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
-=head1 NAME
-
-messageBox  -  pop up a message window and wait for user response.
-
-=for category Popups and Dialogs
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >I<$response> = I<$widget>-E<gt>B<messageBox>(I<-option> =E<gt> I<value>, ... );
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-This method uses L<Tk::Dialog|Tk::Dialog> to quickly create several
-common dialog boxes. A dialog widget consists of a message, an icon
-and a set of buttons (see the I<-type> option). After the message
-window is popped up, B<messageBox> waits for the user to select one of
-the buttons and return the button text (note that it's best to check the
-returned value in a case insensitive manner). NOTE: unlike
-B<Tk::Dialog> which creates its widget once and can be used many
-times, the B<messageBox> window is created every time it's used.
-
-The following option/value pairs are supported:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-default>
-
-The case-sensitive symbolic name of the default button
-for this message window  ('Ok',  'Cancel'  and  so
-on).  See  B<-type>  for a list of the symbolic names.
-If the message box has  just  one  button  it  will
-automatically  be  made  the  default, otherwise if
-this option is not specified, there  won't  be  any
-default button.
-
-=item B<-icon>
-
-Specifies an icon to display. On X11 any of the builtin Tk bitmaps can
-specified. On Windows only B<error>, B<info>, B<question> or
-B<warning> are supported.
-
-=item B<-message>
-
-Specifies the message to display.
-
-=item B<-title>
-
-Specifies  a  string to display as the title.
-
-=item B<-type>
-
-Specifies a predefined set of buttons to be displayed. The following
-values are possible: 'AbortRetryIgnore', 'Ok', 'OkCancel',
-'RetryCancel', 'YesNo' or 'YesNoCancel'.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 EXAMPLE
-
-I<$response> = I<$mw>-E<gt>B<messageBox>(-icon =E<gt> 'question', -message =E<gt> 'Hello World!', -title =E<gt> 'My title', -type =E<gt> 'AbortRetryIgnore', -default =E<gt> 'Retry');
-
-=head1 AUTHOR
-
-Stephen.O.Lidie@Lehigh.EDU.  98/05/25
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/option.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/option.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 1214357d181..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/option.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,217 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-option - Using the option database in Perl/Tk
-
-=for category Creating and Configuring Widgets
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<widgetClass>(B<Name>=E<gt>I<name>, B<-class>=E<gt>I<class>);
-
-S<    >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<PathName>;
-
-S<    >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<optionAdd>(I<pattern>=E<gt>I<value > ?,I<priority>?);
-
-S<    >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<optionClear>;
-
-S<    >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<optionGet>(I<name, class>);
-
-S<    >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<optionReadfile>(I<fileName> ?,I<priority>?);
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The option database (also known as the I<resource database> or the
-I<application defaults database>) is a set of rules for applying
-default options to widgets.  Users and system administrators can
-set up these rules to customize the appearance of applications
-without changing any application code; for example, a user might
-set up personal foreground and background colors, or a site
-might use fonts associated with visual or language preferences.
-Different window managers (and implementations of them) have implemented
-the database differently, but most Xt-based window managers use the
-I<.Xdefaults> file or the I<xrdb> utility to manage user preferences;
-some use both, and/or implement a more complex set of site, user and
-application databases.  Check your site documentation for these topics
-or your window manager's B<RESOURCE_MANAGER> property.
-
-=head2 Being a good citizen
-
-For most applications, the option database "just works."  The B<option...>
-methods are for applications that need to do something unusual, such as
-add new rules or test an option's default.  Even in such cases, the
-application should provide for user preferences.
-Do not hardcode widget options without a B<very> good reason.
-All users have their own tastes and they are all different.
-They choose a special font in a special size and have often spend a
-lot of time working out a color scheme that they will love until death.
-When you respect their choices they will enjoy working with your
-applications much more.  Don't destroy the common look and feel of a
-personal desktop.
-
-=head2 Option rules and widget identification
-
-All widgets in an application are identified hierarchically by I<pathname>,
-starting from the B<MainWindow> and passing through each widget used to create
-the endpoint.  The path elements are I<widget names>, much like the elements
-of a file path from the root directory to a file.  The rules in the option
-database are patterns that are matched against a widget's I<pathname> to
-determine which defaults apply.
-When a widget is created, the B<Name> option can be
-used to assign the widget's name and thus create a distinctive path
-for widgets in an application.  If the B<Name> option isn't given,
-Perl/Tk assigns a default name based on the type of widget; a
-B<MainWindow>'s default name is the B<appname>.  These defaults are fine
-for most widgets, so don't feel you need to find a meaningful name for
-every widget you create.
-A widget must have a distinctive name to allow users to tailor its
-options independently of other widgets in an application.  For instance,
-to create a B<Text> widget that will
-have special options assigned to it, give it a name such as:
-
-  $text = $mw->Text(Name => 'importantText');
-
-You can then tailor the widget's attributes with a rule in the option
-database such as:
-
-  *importantText*foreground: red
-
-The I<class> attribute identifies groups of widgets, usually within an
-application but also to group similar widgets among different applications.
-One typically assigns a class to a B<TopLevel> or B<Frame> so that the
-class will apply to all of that widget's children.  To extend the example,
-we could be more specific about the importantText widget
-by giving its frame a class:
-
-  $frame = $mw->Frame(-class => 'Urgent');
-  $text = $frame->Text(Name => 'importantText');
-
-Then the resource pattern can be specified as so:
-
-  *Urgent*importantText*foreground: red
-
-Similarly, the pattern C<*Urgent*background: cyan> would apply to all
-widgets in the frame.
-
-=head1 METHODS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<widgetClass>(B<Name>=E<gt>I<name>, B<-class>=E<gt>I<class>);
-
-Identify a new widget with I<name> and/or I<class>.
-B<Name> specifies the path element for the widget; names generally begin with a
-lowercase letter.  B<-class> specifies the class for the widget and its
-children; classes generally begin with an uppercase letter.
-If not specified, Perl/Tk will assign a unique default name to each widget.
-Only B<MainWindow> widgets have a default class, made by uppercasing the
-first letter of the application name.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<PathName>;
-
-The B<PathName> method returns the widget's I<pathname>, which uniquely
-identifies the widget within the application.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<optionAdd>(I<pattern>=E<gt>I<value >?, I<priority>?);
-
-The B<optionAdd> method adds a new option to the database.
-I<Pattern> contains the option being specified, and consists of
-names and/or classes separated by asterisks or dots, in the usual
-X format.  I<Value> contains a text string to associate with
-I<pattern>; this is the value that will be returned in calls to
-the B<optionGet> method.  If I<priority> is specified, it indicates
-the priority level for this option (see below for legal values);
-it defaults to B<interactive>. This method always returns an empty
-string.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<optionClear>;
-
-The B<optionClear> method clears the option database.  Default
-options (from the B<RESOURCE_MANAGER> property or the B<.Xdefaults>
-file) will be reloaded automatically the next time an option is
-added to the database or removed from it.  This method always returns
-an empty string.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<optionGet>(I<name,class>);
-
-The B<optionGet> method returns the value of the option specified for
-I<$widget> under I<name> and I<class>.  To look up the option,
-B<optionGet> matches the patterns in the resource database against
-I<$widget>'s I<pathname> along with the class of I<$widget>
-(or its parent if I<$widget> has no class specified).  The widget's
-class and name are options set when the widget is created (not
-related to class in the sense of L<bless>); the B<MainWindow>'s name
-is the B<appname> and its class is (by default) derived from the name
-of the script.
-
-If several entries in the option database match I<$widget>'s I<pathname>,
-I<name>, and I<class>, then the method returns whichever was created with
-highest I<priority> level.  If there are several matching
-entries at the same priority level, then it returns whichever entry
-was I<most recently entered> into the option database.  If there are
-no matching entries, then the empty string is returned.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<optionReadfile>(I<fileName>?,I<priority>?);
-
-The B<optionReadfile> method reads I<fileName>, which should have the
-standard format for an X resource database such as B<.Xdefaults>, and
-adds all the options specified in that file to the option database.
-If I<priority> is specified, it indicates the priority level at which
-to enter the options;  I<priority> defaults to B<interactive>.
-
-The I<priority> arguments to the B<option> methods are
-normally specified symbolically using one of the following values:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item B<widgetDefault>
-
-Level 20.  Used for default values hard-coded into widgets.
-
-=item B<startupFile>
-
-Level 40.  Used for options specified in application-specific
-startup files.
-
-=item B<userDefault>
-
-Level 60.  Used for options specified in user-specific defaults
-files, such as B<.Xdefaults>, resource databases loaded into
-the X server, or user-specific startup files.
-
-=item B<interactive>
-
-Level 80.  Used for options specified interactively after the application
-starts running.  If I<priority> isn't specified, it defaults to
-this level.
-
-=back
-
-Any of the above keywords may be abbreviated.  In addition, priorities
-may be specified numerically using integers between 0 and 100,
-inclusive.  The numeric form is probably a bad idea except for new priority
-levels other than the ones given above.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 BUGS
-
-The priority scheme used by core Tk is not the same as used by normal Xlib
-routines. In particular is assumes that the order of the entries is defined,
-but user commands like B<xrdb -merge> can change the order.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::Xrm|Tk::Xrm>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-database, option, priority, retrieve
-
-=cut
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/options.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/options.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 49d81ddd2b4..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/options.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,787 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::options - Standard options supported by widgets and their manipulation
-
-=for category Creating and Configuring Widgets
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >I<$value> = I<$widget>-E<gt>B<cget>('I<-option>');
-
-S<    >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<configure>(I<-option>=E<gt>I<value> ?,I<-option>=E<gt>I<value> ...?);
-
-S<    >I<@list> = I<$widget>-E<gt>B<configure>('I<-option>');
-
-S<    >I<@lol> = I<$widget>-E<gt>B<configure>;
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-All widgets, and images have a standard mechanism for setting and querying
-attibutes or options. The mechanism is based on two methods B<configure>
-and B<cget>. The behaviour of these methods is as follows:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<configure>(I<-option>=E<gt>I<value> ?,I<-option>=E<gt>I<value> ...?);
-
-Sets the values of I<-option> to I<value> for each I<-option>=E<gt>I<value>
-pair. The internal B<new> method does an implicit B<configure> in this
-form with options passed in at widget create time.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<configure>('I<-option>')
-
-In array context returns a list of five or two elements.  If I<-option>
-is an alias for another options it return a list consisting of the
-alias option and the name for the option is is an alias for, e.g.,
-C<('-bg', 'background')>.  If I<-option> is not an alias the returned
-list has the following five elements:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item I<Option Name>
-
-The value of I<-option>, e.g., B<-background>.
-
-=item I<Name>
-
-The option's name in the option database, e.g., C<background>.
-
-=item I<Class>
-
-The option's class value in the option database, e.g., C<Background>.
-
-=item I<Default>
-
-The default value for the option if not specified or in the option database,
-e.g., C<grey>.
-
-=item I<Value>
-
-The current value (as returned by B<cget>), e.g., C<white>.
-
-=back
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<configure>
-
-Returns a list of lists for all the options supported by I<$widget>.
-Each sub-list is in the form returned by B<configure>('I<-option>').
-(This mechanism is used by the B<Tk::Derived> class to determine
-the options available from base class.)
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<cget>('I<-option>')
-
-Returns the current value of I<-option> for I<$widget>.
-
-B<cget>('I<-option>') is clumsy with the need for B<''> due to perl's
-parsing rules. Something more subtle using L<tie|perlfunc/tie> might look better.
-
-=back
-
-The following paragraphs describe the common configuration options supported by
-widgets in the Tk toolkit.  Every widget does not necessarily support every option
-(see the the documentation entries for individual widgets for a list of the
-standard options supported by that widget), but if a widget does support an option
-with one of the names listed below, then the option has exactly the effect
-described below.
-
-In the descriptions below, ``Name'' refers to the option's name in the option
-database.  ``Class'' refers to the option's class value
-in the option database.  ``Switch'' refers to the switch used in widget-creation
-and B<configure> widget methods to set this value. For example, if an option's
-configure option is B<-foreground> and there exists a widget I<$widget>, then the
-call:
-
-S<    >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<configure>(B<-foreground>=E<gt>B<'black'>)
-
-may be used to specify the value B<black> for the option in the widget I<$widget>.
-Configure options may be abbreviated, as long as the abbreviation is unambiguous
-(abbreviation is deprecated in perl/Tk).
-
-=head2 Creation options: Widget Name and Class
-
-The B<Name> and B<-class> options can only be specified when a widget is
-created, and cannot be changed with B<configure>.  These options determine
-the widget's identity and how Tk applies resource values from the
-option database (see L<Tk::option>) and so they
-cannot be assigned by the options database.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Name:	I<name>
-
-=item Switch:	B<Name>
-
-Specifies the path element for the widget.  Names generally begin with a
-lowercase letter.
-
-Each widget has a unique I<pathname> that follows the hierarchy from the
-B<MainWindow> to the widget itself.  Since the widget's B<PathName> is
-used to assign options from the options database, it is important to
-specify a distinctive B<Name> for any widget that will have non-default
-options.  See L<Tk::option> for details.
-
-=item Name:	I<class>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-class>
-
-Specifies a class for the window.  Classes generally begin with an
-uppercase letter.
-
-This class will be used when querying the option database for
-the window's other options (see Tk::options), and it will also be used
-later for other purposes such as bindings.  One typically assigns a class
-to a B<TopLevel> or B<Frame> so that the class will apply to all of
-that widget's children.
-
-=back
-
-=head2 Reconfigurable options
-
-These options can be set at widget creation or changed later via B<configure>.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Name:	B<activeBackground>
-
-=item Class:	B<Foreground>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-activebackground>
-
-Specifies background color to use when drawing active elements.
-An element (a widget or portion of a widget) is active if the
-mouse cursor is positioned over the element and pressing a mouse button
-will cause some action to occur.
-If strict Motif compliance has been requested by setting the
-B<$Tk::strictMotif> variable, this option will normally be
-ignored;  the normal background color will be used instead.
-For some elements on Windows and Macintosh systems, the active color
-will only be used while mouse button 1 is pressed over the element.
-
-=item Name:	B<activeBorderWidth>
-
-=item Class:	B<BorderWidth>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-activeborderwidth>
-
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating
-the width of the 3-D border drawn around active elements.
-See above for definition of active elements.
-The value may have any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-This option is typically only available in widgets displaying more
-than one element at a time (e.g. menus but not buttons).
-
-=item Name:	B<activeForeground>
-
-=item Class:	B<Background>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-activeforeground>
-
-Specifies foreground color to use when drawing active elements.
-See above for definition of active elements.
-
-=item Name:	B<activetile>
-
-=item Class:	B<Tile>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-activetile>
-
-Specifies image used to display inside active elements of the widget.
-See above for definition of active elements.
-
-=item Name:	B<anchor>
-
-=item Class:	B<Anchor>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-anchor>
-
-Specifies how the information in a widget (e.g. text or a bitmap)
-is to be displayed in the widget.
-Must be one of the values B<n>, B<ne>, B<e>, B<se>,
-B<s>, B<sw>, B<w>, B<nw>, or B<center>.
-For example, B<nw> means display the information such that its
-top-left corner is at the top-left corner of the widget.
-
-=item Name:	B<background>
-
-=item Class:	B<Background>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-background>
-
-=item Alias:	B<-bg>
-
-Specifies the normal background color to use when displaying the
-widget.
-
-=item Name:	B<bitmap>
-
-=item Class:	B<Bitmap>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-bitmap>
-
-Specifies a bitmap to display in the widget, in any of the forms
-acceptable to B<Tk_GetBitmap>.
-The exact way in which the bitmap is displayed may be affected by
-other options such as B<-anchor> or B<-justify>.
-Typically, if this option is specified then it overrides other
-options that specify a textual value to display in the widget;
-the B<-bitmap> option may be reset to an empty string to re-enable
-a text display.
-In widgets that support both B<-bitmap> and B<-image> options,
-B<-image> will usually override B<-bitmap>.
-
-=item Name:	B<borderWidth>
-
-=item Class:	B<BorderWidth>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-borderwidth>
-
-=item Alias:	B<-bd>
-
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating the width
-of the 3-D border to draw around the outside of the widget (if such a
-border is being drawn;  the B<relief> option typically determines
-this).  The value may also be used when drawing 3-D effects in the
-interior of the widget.
-The value may have any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-
-=item Name:	B<compound>
-
-=item Class:	B<Compound>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-compound>
-
-Specifies if the widget should display text and bitmaps/images at the
-same time, and if so, where the bitmap/image should be placed relative
-to the text. Must be one of the values B<none>, B<bottom>, B<top>,
-B<left>, B<right>, or B<center>. For example, the (default) value
-B<none> specifies that the bitmap or image should (if defined) be
-displayed instead of the text, the value B<left> specifies that the
-bitmap or image should be displayed to the left of the text, and the
-value B<center> specifies that the bitmap or image should be displayed on
-top of the text.
-
-=item Name:	B<cursor>
-
-=item Class:	B<Cursor>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-cursor>
-
-Specifies the mouse cursor to be used for the widget.
-The value may have any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetCursor>.
-
-=item Name:	B<dash>
-
-=item Class:	B<Dash>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-dash>
-
-The value may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetDash>,
-such as B<4>, B<[6,4]>, B<.>, B<->, B<-.>, or B<-..>.
-
-=item Name:	B<dashoffset>
-
-=item Class:	B<Dashoffset>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-dashoffset>
-
-Specifies the offset in the dash list where the drawing starts.
-
-=item Name:	B<disabledForeground>
-
-=item Class:	B<DisabledForeground>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-disabledforeground>
-
-Specifies foreground color to use when drawing a disabled element.
-If the option is specified as an empty string (which is typically the
-case on monochrome displays), disabled elements are drawn with the
-normal foreground color but they are dimmed by drawing them
-with a stippled fill pattern.
-
-=item Name:	B<disabledtile>
-
-=item Class:	B<Tile>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-disabledtile>
-
-Specifies image to use when drawing a disabled element.
-
-=item Name:	B<exportSelection>
-
-=item Class:	B<ExportSelection>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-exportselection>
-
-Specifies whether or not a selection in the widget should also be
-the X selection.
-The value may have any of the forms accepted by B<Tcl_GetBoolean>,
-such as B<true>, B<false>, B<0>, B<1>, B<yes>, or B<no>.
-If the selection is exported, then selecting in the widget deselects
-the current X selection, selecting outside the widget deselects any
-widget selection, and the widget will respond to selection retrieval
-requests when it has a selection.  The default is usually for widgets
-to export selections.
-
-=item Name:	B<font>
-
-=item Class:	B<Font>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-font>
-
-Specifies the font to use when drawing text inside the widget.
-
-=item Name:	B<foreground>
-
-=item Class:	B<Foreground>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-foreground>
-
-=item Alias:	B<-fg>
-
-Specifies the normal foreground color to use when displaying the widget.
-
-=item Name:	B<highlightBackground>
-
-=item Class:	B<HighlightBackground>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-highlightbackground>
-
-Specifies the color to display in the traversal highlight region when
-the widget does not have the input focus.
-
-=item Name:	B<highlightColor>
-
-=item Class:	B<HighlightColor>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-highlightcolor>
-
-Specifies the color to use for the traversal highlight rectangle that is
-drawn around the widget when it has the input focus.
-
-=item Name:	B<highlightThickness>
-
-=item Class:	B<HighlightThickness>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-highlightthickness>
-
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating the width of the highlight
-rectangle to draw around the outside of the widget when it has the
-input focus.
-The value may have any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-If the value is zero, no focus highlight is drawn around the widget.
-
-=item Name:	B<image>
-
-=item Class:	B<Image>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-image>
-
-Specifies an image to display in the widget, which must have been
-created with an image create. (See L<Tk::Image> for details of image creation.)
-Typically, if the B<-image> option is specified then it overrides other
-options that specify a bitmap or textual value to display in the widget;
-the B<-image> option may be reset to an empty string to re-enable
-a bitmap or text display.
-
-=item Name:	B<insertBackground>
-
-=item Class:	B<Foreground>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-insertbackground>
-
-Specifies the color to use as background in the area covered by the
-insertion cursor.  This color will normally override either the normal
-background for the widget (or the selection background if the insertion
-cursor happens to fall in the selection).
-
-=item Name:	B<insertBorderWidth>
-
-=item Class:	B<BorderWidth>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-insertborderwidth>
-
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating the width
-of the 3-D border to draw around the insertion cursor.
-The value may have any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-
-=item Name:	B<insertOffTime>
-
-=item Class:	B<OffTime>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-insertofftime>
-
-Specifies a non-negative integer value indicating the number of
-milliseconds the insertion cursor should remain ``off'' in each blink cycle.
-If this option is zero then the cursor doesn't blink:  it is on
-all the time.
-
-=item Name:	B<insertOnTime>
-
-=item Class:	B<OnTime>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-insertontime>
-
-Specifies a non-negative integer value indicating the number of
-milliseconds the insertion cursor should remain ``on'' in each blink cycle.
-
-=item Name:	B<insertWidth>
-
-=item Class:	B<InsertWidth>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-insertwidth>
-
-Specifies a  value indicating the total width of the insertion cursor.
-The value may have any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-If a border has been specified for the insertion
-cursor (using the B<insertBorderWidth> option), the border
-will be drawn inside the width specified by the B<insertWidth>
-option.
-
-=item Name:	B<jump>
-
-=item Class:	B<Jump>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-jump>
-
-For widgets with a slider that can be dragged to adjust a value,
-such as scrollbars, this option determines when
-notifications are made about changes in the value.
-The option's value must be a boolean of the form accepted by
-B<Tcl_GetBoolean>.
-If the value is false, updates are made continuously as the
-slider is dragged.
-If the value is true, updates are delayed until the mouse button
-is released to end the drag;  at that point a single notification
-is made (the value ``jumps'' rather than changing smoothly).
-
-=item Name:	B<justify>
-
-=item Class:	B<Justify>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-justify>
-
-When there are multiple lines of text displayed in a widget, this
-option determines how the lines line up with each other.
-Must be one of B<left>, B<center>, or B<right>.
-B<Left> means that the lines' left edges all line up, B<center>
-means that the lines' centers are aligned, and B<right> means
-that the lines' right edges line up.
-
-=item Name:	B<offset>
-
-=item Class:	B<Offset>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-offset>
-
-Specifies the offset of tiles (see also B<-tile> option). It can
-have two different formats B<-offset x,y> or B<-offset side>,
-where side can be B<n>, B<ne>, B<e>, B<se>, B<s>,
-B<sw>, B<w>, B<nw>, or B<center>. In the first case
-the origin is the origin of the toplevel of the current window.
-For the canvas itself and canvas objects the origin is the canvas
-origin, but putting B<#> in front of the coordinate pair
-indicates using the toplevel origin in stead. For canvas objects,
-the B<-offset> option is used for stippling as well.
-For the line and polygon canvas items you can also specify
-an index as argument, which connects the stipple or tile
-origin to one of the coordinate points of the line/polygon.
-
-=item Name:	B<orient>
-
-=item Class:	B<Orient>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-orient>
-
-For widgets that can lay themselves out with either a horizontal
-or vertical orientation, such as scrollbars, this option specifies
-which orientation should be used.  Must be either B<horizontal>
-or B<vertical> or an abbreviation of one of these.
-
-=item Name:	B<padX>
-
-=item Class:	B<Pad>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-padx>
-
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating how much extra space
-to request for the widget in the X-direction.
-The value may have any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-When computing how large a window it needs, the widget will
-add this amount to the width it would normally need (as determined
-by the width of the things displayed in the widget);  if the geometry
-manager can satisfy this request, the widget will end up with extra
-internal space to the left and/or right of what it displays inside.
-Most widgets only use this option for padding text:  if they are
-displaying a bitmap or image, then they usually ignore padding
-options.
-
-=item Name:	B<padY>
-
-=item Class:	B<Pad>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-pady>
-
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating how much extra space
-to request for the widget in the Y-direction.
-The value may have any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-When computing how large a window it needs, the widget will add
-this amount to the height it would normally need (as determined by
-the height of the things displayed in the widget);  if the geometry
-manager can satisfy this request, the widget will end up with extra
-internal space above and/or below what it displays inside.
-Most widgets only use this option for padding text:  if they are
-displaying a bitmap or image, then they usually ignore padding
-options.
-
-=item Name:	B<relief>
-
-=item Class:	B<Relief>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-relief>
-
-Specifies the 3-D effect desired for the widget.  Acceptable
-values are B<raised>, B<sunken>, B<flat>, B<ridge>,
-B<solid>, and B<groove>.
-The value
-indicates how the interior of the widget should appear relative
-to its exterior;  for example, B<raised> means the interior of
-the widget should appear to protrude from the screen, relative to
-the exterior of the widget.
-
-=item Name:	B<repeatDelay>
-
-=item Class:	B<RepeatDelay>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-repeatdelay>
-
-Specifies the number of milliseconds a button or key must be held
-down before it begins to auto-repeat.  Used, for example, on the
-up- and down-arrows in scrollbars.
-
-=item Name:	B<repeatInterval>
-
-=item Class:	B<RepeatInterval>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-repeatinterval>
-
-Used in conjunction with B<repeatDelay>:  once auto-repeat
-begins, this option determines the number of milliseconds between
-auto-repeats.
-
-=item Name:	B<selectBackground>
-
-=item Class:	B<Foreground>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-selectbackground>
-
-Specifies the background color to use when displaying selected
-items.
-
-=item Name:	B<selectBorderWidth>
-
-=item Class:	B<BorderWidth>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-selectborderwidth>
-
-Specifies a non-negative value indicating the width
-of the 3-D border to draw around selected items.
-The value may have any of the forms acceptable to B<Tk_GetPixels>.
-
-=item Name:	B<selectForeground>
-
-=item Class:	B<Background>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-selectforeground>
-
-Specifies the foreground color to use when displaying selected
-items.
-
-=item Name:	B<setGrid>
-
-=item Class:	B<SetGrid>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-setgrid>
-
-Specifies a boolean value that determines whether this widget controls the
-resizing grid for its top-level window.
-This option is typically used in text widgets, where the information
-in the widget has a natural size (the size of a character) and it makes
-sense for the window's dimensions to be integral numbers of these units.
-These natural window sizes form a grid.
-If the B<setGrid> option is set to true then the widget will
-communicate with the window manager so that when the user interactively
-resizes the top-level window that contains the widget, the dimensions of
-the window will be displayed to the user in grid units and the window
-size will be constrained to integral numbers of grid units.
-See L<Tk::Wm/"GRIDDED GEOMETRY MANAGEMENT">
-for more details.
-
-=item Name:	B<takeFocus>
-
-=item Class:	B<TakeFocus>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-takefocus>
-
-Determines whether the window accepts the focus during keyboard
-traversal (e.g., Tab and Shift-Tab).
-Before setting the focus to a window, the traversal scripts
-consult the value of the B<takeFocus> option.
-A value of B<0> means that the window should be skipped entirely
-during keyboard traversal.
-B<1> means that the window should receive the input
-focus as long as it is viewable (it and all of its ancestors are mapped).
-An empty value for the option means that the traversal scripts make
-the decision about whether or not to focus on the window:  the current
-algorithm is to skip the window if it is
-disabled, if it has no key bindings, or if it is not viewable.
-If the value has any other form, then the traversal scripts take
-the value, append the name of the window to it (with a separator space),
-and evaluate the resulting string as a Callback.
-The script must return B<0>, B<1>, or an empty string:  a
-B<0> or B<1> value specifies whether the window will receive
-the input focus, and an empty string results in the default decision
-described above.
-Note: this interpretation of the option is defined entirely by
-the Callbacks that implement traversal:  the widget implementations
-ignore the option entirely, so you can change its meaning if you
-redefine the keyboard traversal scripts.
-
-=item Name:	B<text>
-
-=item Class:	B<Text>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-text>
-
-Specifies a string to be displayed inside the widget.  The way in which
-the string is displayed depends on the particular widget and may be
-determined by other options, such as B<anchor> or B<justify>.
-
-=item Name:	B<textVariable>
-
-=item Class:	B<Variable>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-textvariable>
-
-Specifies the name of a variable.  The value of the variable is a text
-string to be displayed inside the widget;  if the variable value changes
-then the widget will automatically update itself to reflect the new value.
-The way in which the string is displayed in the widget depends on the
-particular widget and may be determined by other options, such as
-B<anchor> or B<justify>.
-
-=item Name:	B<tile>
-
-=item Class:	B<Tile>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-tile>
-
-Specifies image used to display the widget. If image is the empty
-string, then the normal background color is displayed.
-
-=item Name:	B<troughColor>
-
-=item Class:	B<Background>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-troughcolor>
-
-Specifies the color to use for the rectangular trough areas
-in widgets such as scrollbars and scales.
-
-=item Name:	B<troughTile>
-
-=item Class:	B<Tile>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-troughtile>
-
-Specifies image used to display in the rectangular trough areas
-in widgets such as scrollbars and scales.
-
-=item Name:	B<underline>
-
-=item Class:	B<Underline>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-underline>
-
-Specifies the integer index of a character to underline in the widget.
-This option is used by the default bindings to implement keyboard
-traversal for menu buttons and menu entries.
-0 corresponds to the first character of the text displayed in the
-widget, 1 to the next character, and so on.
-
-=item Name:	B<wrapLength>
-
-=item Class:	B<WrapLength>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-wraplength>
-
-For widgets that can perform word-wrapping, this option specifies
-the maximum line length.
-Lines that would exceed this length are wrapped onto the next line,
-so that no line is longer than the specified length.
-The value may be specified in any of the standard forms for
-screen distances.
-If this value is less than or equal to 0 then no wrapping is done:  lines
-will break only at newline characters in the text.
-
-=item Name:	B<xScrollCommand>
-
-=item Class:	B<ScrollCommand>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-xscrollcommand>
-
-Specifies a callback used to communicate with horizontal
-scrollbars.
-When the view in the widget's window changes (or
-whenever anything else occurs that could change the display in a
-scrollbar, such as a change in the total size of the widget's
-contents), the widget will
-make a callback passing two numeric arguments in addition to
-any specified in the callback.
-Each of the numbers is a fraction between 0 and 1, which indicates
-a position in the document.  0 indicates the beginning of the document,
-1 indicates the end, .333 indicates a position one third the way through
-the document, and so on.
-The first fraction indicates the first information in the document
-that is visible in the window, and the second fraction indicates
-the information just after the last portion that is visible.
-Typically the
-B<xScrollCommand> option consists of the scrollbar widget object
-and the method ``set'' i.e. [B<set> =E<gt> I<$sb>]:
-this will cause the scrollbar to be updated whenever the view in the window changes.
-If this option is not specified, then no command will be executed.
-
-=item Name:	B<yScrollCommand>
-
-=item Class:	B<ScrollCommand>
-
-=item Switch:	B<-yscrollcommand>
-
-Specifies a calback used to communicate with vertical
-scrollbars.  This option is treated in the same way as the
-B<xScrollCommand> option, except that it is used for vertical
-scrollbars and is provided by widgets that support vertical scrolling.
-See the description of B<xScrollCommand> for details
-on how this option is used.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::option>
-L<Tk::callbacks>
-L<Tk::ConfigSpecs>
-L<Tk_GetPixels|Tk::pTk::GetPixels>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-class, name, standard option, switch
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/overview.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/overview.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 0c9e183b68a..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/overview.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,138 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-B<Tk> - An overview of an Object Oriented Tk8 extension for perl5
-
-=for category  Introduction
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-C<< use Tk; >>
-
-C<< $main = MainWindow-E<gt>new(); >>
-
-C<< $widget = $main-E<gt>I<Widget>(...); >>
-
-C<< $widget-E<gt>pack(...); >>
-
-...
-
-C<< MainLoop; >>
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-In writing the perl Tk extension, the goals were to provide a complete
-interface to the latest production version of John Ousterhout's Tk, while providing
-an Object Oriented interface to perl code.
-
-=head1 CONTENTS
-
-The package is composed of three loosely connected parts:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<pTk> - Converted Tk source
-
-The I<pTk> sub-directory is a copy of the C code of Tk8.x, modified
-to allow use by languages other than the original Tcl.
-(The pTk can be read as 'perl' Tk or 'portable' Tk, depending on
-your sensibilities.)
-
-=item B<Tk> to Perl 'Glue'
-
-The top level directory provides I<Tk.xs> and I<tkGlue.c>
-which provide the perl-callable interfaces to pTk
-
-=item Perl code for 'Widget' Classes
-
-The I<Tk> sub-directory contains the various perl modules that comprise
-the "Classes" that are visible to Tk applications.
-
-The "major" widgets such as B<Tk::Text> are actually in separate directories
-at the top level (e.g. I<Text/*> for B<Tk::Text>) and are dynamically
-loaded as needed on platforms which support perl5's B<DynaLoader>.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 CLASS HIERARCHY
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<package Tk;> - the 'base class'
-
-All the "command names" documented in Tcl/Tk are made to look like perl
-sub's and reside in the Tk package. Their names are all lower case.
-Typically there are very few commands at this level which are called
-directly by applications.
-
-=item B<package Tk::Widget;> - the 'Widget class'
-
-There are no actual objects of the B<Tk::Widget> class; however all
-the various Tk window "widgets" inherit from it, and it in turn
-inherits all the core Tk functions from Tk.
-
-B<Tk::Widget> provides various functions and interfaces which are
-common to all Widgets.
-
-A widget is represented to perl as a blessed reference to a hash. There are some
-members of the hash which are private to Tk and its tkGlue code.  Keys
-starting with B<'.'> and of the form  B</_[A-Z][A-Za-z_]+_/>
-(i.e. starting and ending in _ and with  first char after _ being upper case) should be
-considered reserved to B<Tk>.
-
-=item B<Tk::Button>, B<Tk::Entry>, B<Tk::Text> ...
-
-There is one class for each of the "Tk" widget item types.
-Some of them like B<Tk::Frame> do very little indeed, and really
-only exist so that they can be derived from or so that focus or menu
-traversal can discover the "kind" of window being processed.
-
-Other classes, B<Tk::Text> for example, provide a lot of methods
-used with Tk's "bind" to provide a rich keyboard/mouse interface
-to the widgets' data.
-
-These widget classes also include conversions of the Tcl code for
-event bindings, keyboard focus traversal, menu bars, and menu keyboard
-traversal. All the Tcl functions have been converted, but the names have
-changed (systematically) and they have been split up between the various
-classes in what I hope is an appropriate manner.
-Name changes are normally: dropping initial tk_ as the Tk-ness is implicit
-in the B<Tk::> prefix, and similarly dropping say Menu from the name if it
-has been moved the Tk::Menu class.
-Thus 'proc tkMenuNextEntry' becomes 'sub NextEntry' in the Tk::Menu package.
-
-=item B<Tk::Image>
-
-This does for Tk8.x's "images" what B<Tk::Widget> does for widgets.
-Images are new to Tk8.x and the class structure is not mature either.
-
-There are three sub-classes B<Tk::Bitmap>, B<Tk::Pixmap> and B<Tk::Photo>.
-
-It is possible to create dynamic or auto-loaded image types inherited
-from B<Tk::Image> for other image types or photo formats (e.g. support
-for TIFF format).
-
-=item Composite Widgets
-
-A composite is some kind of 'frame' with subwidgets which give it useful behaviour.
-B<Tk::Dialog> is an example of
-a composite widget classes built from the basic B<Tk> ones.
-It is intended that user code should not need to be aware that a particular
-class is a composite, and create and configure such widgets in the same manner
-as any other kind. The B<configure> mechanism and the methods of the
-class manipulate the subwidgets as required.
-
-Composite widgets are implemented via B<Tk::Frame> and multiple inheritance.
-The two 'frame' base classes B<Tk::Frame> and
-B<Tk::Toplevel> include the additional class B<Tk::Derived>
-in their inheritance. B<Tk::Derived> provides methods to allow additional
-B<configure> options to be defined for a widget.
-
-A Composite widget is typically defined as derived
-from B<Tk::Frame> or B<Tk::Toplevel>
-(e.g. B<Tk::Dialog>).
-
-=back
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/pTk.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/pTk.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 6e1a2a04022..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/pTk.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,550 +0,0 @@
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk2portableTk - how to make your B<Tk> source portable to other
-interpreted languages.
-
-=for category  C Programming
-
-=head1 Author
-
-Ilya Zakharevich <ilya@math.ohio-state.edu>  has contributed most of
-this document. Many thanks.
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-B<PortableTk> is an attempt to make B<Tk> useful from other
-languages. Currently tk4.0 runs under Perl using this
-approach. Below, I<Lang> is the notation for an external language to
-which B<PortableTk> glues B<Tk> code.
-
-The main problem with using the code developed for B<TCL> with
-different languages is the absence of data types: almost anything is
-C<char*>. It makes automatic translation hopeless. However, if you
-C<typedef> several new symbols to be C<char*>, you can still use your
-code in B<TCL>, I<and> it will make the automatic translation
-possible.
-
-Another problem with the approach that "everything is a string" is
-impossibility to have a result that says "NotApplicable" without
-setting an error. Thus different B<Tk> command return different string
-values that mean "error happened", like C<"">, C<" "> or
-C<"??">. Other languages can be more flexible, so in B<portableTk> you
-should inform the compiler that what you want to return means "error"
-(see L<Setting variables>).
-
-Currently B<PortableTk> uses several different approachs
-to simplify translation: several B<TCL> functions that are especially
-dangerous to use are undefined, so you can easily find places that
-need to be updated to use Language-independent functions based on
-compiler warnings.  Eventually a way to use these Language-independent
-functions under proper B<TCL> will be also provided.  The end of this
-document provides a starting point for such a project.
-
-=head1 Structure of B<pTk>, porting your code
-
-B<pTk>, that is a port of B<Tk>, is very special with respect to porting
-of other code to B<portableTk>. The problem is that currently there is
-very little hope to merge the modifications back into B<Tk>, so a
-special strategy is needed to maintain this port. Do not use this
-strategy to port your own code.
-
-B<pTk> is produced from B<Tk> via a two-step process: first, some
-manual editing (the result is in the subdirectory C<mTk>), and second,
-automatic conversion by the C<munge> script (written in Perl). Thus the
-subdirectory C<pTk/mTk> contains code with minimal possible difference
-from the virgin B<Tk> code, so it is easier to merge(1) the
-differences between B<Tk> versions into modified code.
-
-It looks like the strategy for a portable code should be exactly
-opposite: starting from B<TCL>-based code, apply C<munge>, and then
-hand-edit the resulting code. Probably it is also possible to target
-your code to B<portableTk> from scratch, since this will make it
-possible to run it under a lot of I<Lang>uages.
-
-The only reason anyone would like to look into contents of C<pTk/mTk>
-directory is to find out which constructs are not supported by
-C<munge>. On the other hand, C<pTk> directory contains code that is
-conformant to B<portableTk>, so you can look there to find example code.
-
-C<munge> is the script that converts most common B<Tk> constructs to
-their C<portableTk> equivalent. For your code to qualify, you should
-follow B<Tk> conventions on indentation and names of variables, in
-particular, the array of arguments for the C<...CmdProc> should be
-called C<argv>.
-
-For details on what C<munge> can do, see
-L<Translation of some TCL functions>.
-
-=head1 B<PortableTk> API
-
-=head2 Checking what you are running under
-
-B<PortableTk> provides a symbol C<????>. If this symbol is defined,
-your source is compiled with it.
-
-=head2 New types of configuration options
-
-B<PortableTk> defines several new types of configuration options:
-
- TK_CONFIG_CALLBACK
- TK_CONFIG_LANGARG
- TK_CONFIG_SCALARVAR
- TK_CONFIG_HASHVAR
- TK_CONFIG_ARRAYVAR
- TK_CONFIG_IMAGE
-
-You should use them instead of TK_CONFIG_STRING whenever
-appropriate. This allows your application to receive a direct
-representation of the corresponding resource instead of the string
-representation, if this is possible under given language.
-
-???? It looks like C<TK_CONFIG_IMAGE> and C<TK_CONFIG_SCALARVAR> set
-variables of type C<char*>.
-
-=head2 Language data
-
-The following data types are defined:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item C<Tcl_Obj *>
-
-is the main datatype of the language.  This is a type that your C
-function gets pointers to for arguments when the corresponding I<Lang>
-function is called.  The corresponding config type is
-C<TK_CONFIG_LANGARG>.
-
-This is also a type that keeps information about contents of I<Lang>
-variable.
-
-=item C<Var>
-
-Is a substitute for a C<char *> that contains name of variable. In
-I<Lang> it is an object that contains reference to another I<Lang>
-variable.
-
-=item C<LangResultSave>
-
-????
-
-=item C<LangCallback>
-
-C<LangCallback*> a substitute for a C<char *> that contains command to
-call. The corresponding config type is C<TK_CONFIG_CALLBACK>.
-
-=item C<LangFreeProc>
-
-It is the type that the C<Lang_SplitList> sets. Before you call it,
-declare
-
-    Args *args;
-    LangFreeProc *freeProc = NULL;
-    ...
-    code = Lang_SplitList(interp, value,
-	&argc, &args, &freeProc);
-
-After you use the split values, call
-
-    if (args != NULL && freeProc) (*freeProc)(argc,args);
-
-It is not guaranteed that the C<args> can survive deletion of C<value>.
-
-=back
-
-=head2 Conversion
-
-The following macros and functions are used for conversion between
-strings and the additional types:
-
- LangCallback * LangMakeCallback(Tcl_Obj *)
- Tcl_Obj * LangCallbackArg(LangCallback *)
- char * LangString(Tcl_Obj *)
-
-After you use the result of LangCallbackArg(), you should free it with
-C<freeProc> C<LANG_DYNAMIC> (it is not guaranteed that any change of
-C<Tcl_Obj *> will not be reflected in <LangCallback>, so you cannot do
-LangSet...() in between, and you should reset it to C<NULL> if you
-want to do any further assignments to this C<Tcl_Obj *>).
-
-The following function returns the C<Tcl_Obj *> that is a reference to C<Var>:
-
- Tcl_Obj * LangVarArg(Var)
-
-???? It is very anti-intuitive, I hope the name is changed.
-
- int LangCmpCallback(LangCallback *a,Tcl_Obj * b)
-
-(currently only a stub), and, at last,
-
- LangCallback * LangCopyCallback(LangCallback *)
-
-=head2 Callbacks
-
-Above we have seen the new datatype C<LangCallback> and the
-corresponding I<Config option>  C<TK_CONFIG_CALLBACK>. The following
-functions are provided for manipulation of C<LangCallback>s:
-
- void LangFreeCallback(LangCallback *)
- int LangDoCallback(Tcl_Interp *,LangCallback *,
-	int result,int argc, char *format,...)
-
-The argument C<format> of C<LangDoCallback> should contain a string that is
-suitable for C<sprintf> with optional arguments of C<LangDoCallback>.
-C<result> should be false if result of callback is not needed.
-
- int LangMethodCall(Tcl_Interp *,Tcl_Obj *,char *method,
-	int result,int argc,...)
-
-????
-
-Conceptually, C<LangCallback*> is a substitute for ubiquitous C<char *>
-in B<TCL>. So you should use C<LangFreeCallback> instead of C<ckfree>
-or C<free> if appropriate.
-
-=head2 Setting variables
-
- void LangFreeArg (Tcl_Obj *, Tcl_FreeProc *freeProc)
- Tcl_Obj *  LangCopyArg (Tcl_Obj *);
- void Tcl_AppendArg (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *)
- void LangSetString(Tcl_Obj * *, char *s)
- void LangSetDefault(Tcl_Obj * *, char *s)
-
-These two are equivalent unless s is an empty string. In this case
-C<LangSetDefault> behaves like C<LangSetString> with C<s==NULL>, i.e.,
-it sets the current value of the I<Lang> variable to be false.
-
- void LangSetInt(Tcl_Obj * *,int)
- void LangSetDouble(Tcl_Obj * *,double)
-
-The I<Lang> functions separate uninitialized and initialized data
-comparing data with C<NULL>. So the declaration for an C<Tcl_Obj *> should
-look like
-
- Tcl_Obj * arg = NULL;
-
-if you want to use this C<arg> with the above functions. After you are
-done, you should use C<LangFreeArg> with C<TCL_DYNAMIC> as C<freeProc>.
-
-=head2 Language functions
-
-Use
-
-=over 4
-
-=item C<int  LangNull(Tcl_Obj *)>
-
-to check that an object is false;
-
-=item C<int  LangStringMatch(char *string, Tcl_Obj * match)>
-
-????
-
-=item C<void LangExit(int)>
-
-to make a proper shutdown;
-
-=item C<int LangEval(Tcl_Interp *interp, char *cmd, int global)>
-
-to call I<Lang> C<eval>;
-
-=item C<void Lang_SetErrorCode(Tcl_Interp *interp,char *code)>
-
-=item C<char *Lang_GetErrorCode(Tcl_Interp *interp)>
-
-=item C<char *Lang_GetErrorInfo(Tcl_Interp *interp)>
-
-=item C<void LangCloseHandler(Tcl_Interp *interp,Tcl_Obj * arg,FILE *f,Lang_FileCloseProc *proc)>
-
-currently stubs only;
-
-=item C<int LangSaveVar(Tcl_Interp *,Tcl_Obj * arg,Var *varPtr,int type)>
-
-to save the structure C<arg> into I<Lang> variable C<*varPtr>;
-
-=item C<void LangFreeVar(Var var)>
-
-to free the result;
-
-=item C<int LangEventCallback(Tcl_Interp *,LangCallback *,XEvent *,KeySym)>
-
-????
-
-=item C<int LangEventHook(int flags)>
-
-=item C<void LangBadFile(int fd)>
-
-=item C<int LangCmpConfig(char *spec, char *arg, size_t length)>
-
-unsupported????;
-
-=item  C<void Tcl_AppendArg (Tcl_Interp *interp, Tcl_Obj *)>
-
-=back
-
-Another useful construction is
-
- Tcl_Obj * variable = LangFindVar(interp, Tk_Window tkwin, char *name);
-
-After using the above function, you should call
-
- LangFreeVar(Var variable);
-
-???? Note discrepancy in types!
-
-If you want to find the value of a variable (of type C<Tcl_Obj *>) given the
-variable name, use C<Tcl_GetVar(interp, varName, flags)>. If you are
-interested in the string value of this variable, use
-C<LangString(Tcl_GetVar(...))>.
-
-To get a B<C> array of C<Tcl_Obj *> of length C<n>, use
-
-    Tcl_Obj * *args = LangAllocVec(n);
-    ...
-    LangFreeVec(n,args);
-
-You can set the values of the C<Tcl_Obj *>s using C<LangSet...> functions,
-and get string value using C<LangString>.
-
-If you want to merge an array of C<Tcl_Obj *>s into one C<Tcl_Obj *> (that will
-be an array variable), use
-
-    result = Tcl_Merge(listLength, list);
-
-=head2 Translation of some TCL functions
-
-We mark items that can be dealt with by C<munge> by I<Autoconverted>.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item C<Tcl_AppendResult>
-
-does not take C<(char*)NULL>, but C<NULL> as delimiter. I<Autoconverted>.
-
-=item C<Tcl_CreateCommand>, C<Tcl_DeleteCommand>
-
-C<Tk_CreateWidget>, C<Tk_DeleteWidget>, the second argument is the
-window itself, not the pathname. I<Autoconverted>.
-
-=item C<sprintf(interp-E<gt>result, "%d %d %d %d",...)>
-
-C<Tcl_IntResults(interp,4,0,...)>. I<Autoconverted>.
-
-=item C<interp-E<gt>result = "1";>
-
-C<Tcl_SetResult(interp,"1", TCL_STATIC)>. I<Autoconverted>.
-
-=item Reading C<interp-E<gt>result>
-
-C<Tcl_GetResult(interp)>. I<Autoconverted>.
-
-=item C<interp-E<gt>result = Tk_PathName(textPtr-E<gt>tkwin);>
-
-C<Tk_WidgetResult(interp,textPtr-E<gt>tkwin)>. I<Autoconverted>.
-
-=item Sequence C<Tcl_PrintDouble, Tcl_PrintDouble, ..., Tcl_AppendResult>
-
-Use a single command
-
- void Tcl_DoubleResults(Tcl_Interp *interp, int append,
-	int argc,...);
-
-C<append> governs whether it is required to clear the result first.
-
-A similar command for C<int> arguments is C<Tcl_IntResults>.
-
-=item C<Tcl_SplitList>
-
-Use C<Lang_SplitList> (see the description above).
-
-=back
-
-=head1 Translation back to TCL
-
-To use your B<portableTk> program with B<TCL>, put
-
- #include "ptcl.h"
-
-I<before> inclusion of C<tk.h>, and link the resulting code with
-C<ptclGlue.c>.
-
-These files currently implement the following:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item Additional config types:
-
- TK_CONFIG_CALLBACK
- TK_CONFIG_LANGARG
- TK_CONFIG_SCALARVAR
- TK_CONFIG_HASHVAR
- TK_CONFIG_ARRAYVAR
- TK_CONFIG_IMAGE
-
-=item Types:
-
- Var, Tcl_Obj *, LangCallback, LangFreeProc.
-
-=item Functions and macros:
-
- Lang_SplitList, LangString, LangSetString, LangSetDefault,
- LangSetInt, LangSetDouble Tcl_ArgResult, LangCallbackArg,
- LangSaveVar, LangFreeVar,
- LangFreeSplitProc, LangFreeArg, Tcl_DoubleResults, Tcl_IntResults,
- LangDoCallback, Tk_WidgetResult, Tcl_CreateCommand,
- Tcl_DeleteCommand, Tcl_GetResult.
-
-=back
-
-Current implementation contains enough to make it possible to compile
-C<mTk/tkText*.[ch]> with the virgin B<Tk>.
-
-=head2 New types of events ????
-
-PortableTk defines following new types of events:
-
- TK_EVENTTYPE_NONE
- TK_EVENTTYPE_STRING
- TK_EVENTTYPE_NUMBER
- TK_EVENTTYPE_WINDOW
- TK_EVENTTYPE_ATOM
- TK_EVENTTYPE_DISPLAY
- TK_EVENTTYPE_DATA
-
-and a function
-
- char *	Tk_EventInfo(int letter,
-	    Tk_Window tkwin, XEvent *eventPtr,
- 	    KeySym keySym, int *numPtr, int *isNum, int *type,
-            int num_size, char *numStorage)
-
-=head1 Checking for trouble
-
-If you start with working TCL code, you can start convertion using
-the above hints. Good indication that you are doing is OK is absence
-of C<sprintf> and C<sscanf> in your code (at least in the part that is
-working with interpreter).
-
-=head1 Additional API
-
-What is described here is not included into base B<portableTk>
-distribution. Currently it is coded in B<TCL> and as Perl macros (core
-is coded as functions, so theoretically you can use the same object
-files with different interpreted languages).
-
-=head2 C<ListFactory>
-
-Dynamic arrays in B<TCL> are used for two different purposes: to
-construct strings, and to construct lists. These two usages will have
-separate interfaces in other languages (since list is a different type
-from a string), so you should use a different interface in your code.
-
-The type for construction of dynamic lists is C<ListFactory>. The API
-below is a counterpart of the API for construction of dynamic lists
-in B<TCL>:
-
- void ListFactoryInit(ListFactory *)
- void ListFactoryFinish(ListFactory *)
- void ListFactoryFree(ListFactory *)
- Tcl_Obj * * ListFactoryArg(ListFactory *)
- void ListFactoryAppend(ListFactory *, Tcl_Obj * *arg)
- void ListFactoryAppendCopy(ListFactory *, Tcl_Obj * *arg)
- ListFactory * ListFactoryNewLevel(ListFactory *)
- ListFactory * ListFactoryEndLevel(ListFactory *)
- void ListFactoryResult(Tcl_Interp *, ListFactory *)
-
-The difference is that a call to C<ListFactoryFinish> should precede the
-actual usage of the value of C<ListFactory>, and there are two
-different ways to append an C<Tcl_Obj *> to a C<ListFactory>:
-ListFactoryAppendCopy() guarantees that the value of C<arg> is copied
-to the list, but ListFactoryAppend() may append to the list a
-reference to the current value of C<arg>. If you are not going to change
-the value of C<arg> after appending, the call to ListFactoryAppend may
-be quicker.
-
-As in B<TCL>, the call to ListFactoryFree() does not free the
-C<ListFactory>, only the objects it references.
-
-The functions ListFactoryNewLevel() and ListFactoryEndLevel() return a
-pointer to a C<ListFactory> to fill. The argument of
-ListFactoryEndLevel() cannot be used after a call to this function.
-
-=head2 DStrings
-
-Production of strings are still supported in B<portableTk>.
-
-=head2 Accessing C<Tcl_Obj *>s
-
-The following functions for getting a value of an C<Tcl_Obj *> I<may> be
-provided:
-
- double LangDouble(Tcl_Obj *)
- int LangInt(Tcl_Obj *)
- long LangLong(Tcl_Obj *)
- int LangIsList(Tcl_Obj * arg)
-
-The function LangIsList() is supported only partially under B<TCL>,
-since there is no data types. It checks whether there is a space
-inside the string C<arg>.
-
-=head2 Assigning numbers to C<Tcl_Obj *>s
-
-While LangSetDouble() and LangSetInt() are supported ways to assign
-numbers to assign an integer value to a variable, for the sake of
-efficiency under B<TCL> it is supposed that the destination of these
-commands was massaged before the call so it contains a long enough
-string to sprintf() the numbers inside it. If you are going to
-immediately use the resulting C<Tcl_Obj *>, the best way to do this is to
-declare a buffer in the beginning of a block by
-
-   dArgBuffer;
-
-and assign this buffer to the C<Tcl_Obj *> by
-
-   void LangSetDefaultBuffer(Tcl_Obj * *)
-
-You can also create the buffer(s) manually and assign them using
-
-   void LangSetBuffer(Tcl_Obj * *, char *)
-
-This is the only choice if you need to assign numeric values to
-several C<Tcl_Obj *>s simultaneously. The advantage of the first approach is
-that the above declarations can be made C<nop>s in different languages.
-
-Note that if you apply C<LangSetDefaultBuffer> to an C<Tcl_Obj *> that
-contains some value, you can create a leak if you do not free that
-C<Tcl_Obj *> first. This is a non-problem in real languages, but can be a
-trouble in C<TCL>, unless you use only the above API.
-
-=head2 Creating new C<Tcl_Obj *>s
-
-The API for creating a new C<Tcl_Obj *> is
-
- void LangNewArg(Tcl_Obj * *, LangFreeProc *)
-
-The API for creating a new C<Tcl_Obj *> is absent. Just initialize C<Tcl_Obj *> to
-be C<NULL>, and apply one of C<LangSet...> methods.
-
-After you use this C<Tcl_Obj *>, it should be freed thusly:
-
-C<LangFreeArg(arg, freeProc)>.
-
-=head2 Evaluating a list
-
-Use
-
- int LangArgEval(Tcl_Interp *, Tcl_Obj * arg)
-
-Here C<arg> should be a list to evaluate, in particular, the first
-element should be a C<LangCallback> massaged to be an C<Tcl_Obj *>. The
-arguments can be send to the subroutine by reference or by value in
-different languages.
-
-=head2 Getting result as C<Tcl_Obj *>
-
-Use C<Tcl_ArgResult>. It is not guaranteed that result survives this
-operation, so the C<Tcl_Obj *> you get should be the only mean to access the
-data from this moment on. After you use this C<Tcl_Obj *>, you should free
-it with C<freeProc> C<LANG_DYNAMIC> (you can do LangSet...() in between).
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/pack.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/pack.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 0449556265c..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/pack.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,324 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::pack - Geometry manager that packs around edges of cavity
-
-=for category  Tk Geometry Management
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<pack>?(I<args>)?
-
-S<    >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<pack>I<Option>?(I<args>)?
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<pack> method is used to communicate with the packer,
-a geometry manager that arranges the children of a parent by
-packing them in order around the edges of the parent.
-
-In this B<perl> port of Tk it is normal to pack widgets one-at-a-time
-using the widget object to be packed to invoke a method call.
-This is a slight distortion of underlying Tk interface (which
-can handle lists of windows to one pack method call) but has proven
-effective in practice.
-
-The B<pack> method can have any of several forms, depending
-on I<Option>:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$slave>-E<gt>B<pack>?(I<options>)?
-
-The options consist of pairs of arguments that specify how
-to manage the slave.
-See L<"THE PACKER ALGORITHM"> below for details on how the options
-are used by the packer.
-The following options are supported:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item B<-after> =E<gt> I<$other>
-
-I<$other> must be another window.
-Use its master as the master for the slave, and insert
-the slave just after I<$other> in the packing order.
-
-=item B<-anchor> =E<gt> I<anchor>
-
-I<Anchor> must be a valid anchor position such as B<n>
-or B<sw>; it specifies where to position each slave in its
-parcel.
-Defaults to B<center>.
-
-=item B<-before> =E<gt> I<$other>
-
-I<$other> must be another window.
-Use its master as the master for the slave, and insert
-the slave just before I<$other> in the packing order.
-
-=item B<-expand> =E<gt> I<boolean>
-
-Specifies whether the slave should be expanded to consume
-extra space in their master.
-I<Boolean> may have any proper boolean value, such as B<1>
-or B<no>.
-Defaults to 0.
-
-=item B<-fill> =E<gt> I<style>
-
-If a slave's parcel is larger than its requested dimensions, this
-option may be used to stretch the slave.
-I<Style> must have one of the following values:
-
-=over 12
-
-=item B<none>
-
-Give the slave its requested dimensions plus any internal padding
-requested with B<-ipadx> or B<-ipady>.  This is the default.
-
-=item B<x>
-
-Stretch the slave horizontally to fill the entire width of its
-parcel (except leave external padding as specified by B<-padx>).
-
-=item B<y>
-
-Stretch the slave vertically to fill the entire height of its
-parcel (except leave external padding as specified by B<-pady>).
-
-=item B<both>
-
-Stretch the slave both horizontally and vertically.
-
-=back
-
-=item B<-in> =E<gt> I<$master>
-
-Insert the slave(s) at the end of the packing order for the master
-window given by I<$master>.
-
-=item B<-ipadx> =E<gt> I<amount>
-
-I<Amount> specifies how much horizontal internal padding to
-leave on each side of the slave(s).
-I<Amount> must be a valid screen distance, such as B<2> or B<.5c>.
-It defaults to 0.
-
-=item B<-ipady> =E<gt> I<amount>
-
-I<Amount> specifies how much vertical internal padding to
-leave on each side of the slave(s).
-I<Amount>  defaults to 0.
-
-=item B<-padx> =E<gt> I<amount>
-
-I<Amount> specifies how much horizontal external padding to
-leave on each side of the slave(s).
-I<Amount> defaults to 0.
-
-=item B<-pady> =E<gt> I<amount>
-
-I<Amount> specifies how much vertical external padding to
-leave on each side of the slave(s).
-I<Amount> defaults to 0.
-
-=item B<-side> =E<gt> I<side>
-
-Specifies which side of the master the slave(s) will be packed against.
-Must be B<left>, B<right>, B<top>, or B<bottom>.
-Defaults to B<top>.
-
-=back
-
-=back
-
-If no B<-in>, B<-after> or B<-before> option is specified
-then slave will be inserted at the end of the packing list
-for its parent unless it is already managed by the packer (in which
-case it will be left where it is).
-If one of these options is specified then slave will be
-inserted at the specified point.
-If the slave are already managed by the geometry manager
-then any unspecified options for them retain their previous values rather
-than receiving default values.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$slave>-E<gt>B<packConfigure>?(I<options>)?
-
-Same as B<pack>.
-
-=item I<$slave>-E<gt>B<packForget>
-
-Removes I<slave> from the packing order for its
-master and unmaps its window.
-The slave will no longer be managed by the packer.
-
-=item I<$slave>-E<gt>B<packInfo>
-
-Returns a list whose elements are the current configuration state of
-the slave given by I<$slave> in the same option-value form that
-might be specified to B<packConfigure>.
-The first two elements of the list are ``B<-in>=E<gt>I<$master>'' where
-I<$master> is the slave's master.
-
-=item I<$master>-E<gt>B<packPropagate>?(I<boolean>)?
-
-If I<boolean> has a true boolean value such as B<1> or B<on>
-then propagation is enabled for I<$master>,
-(see L<"GEOMETRY PROPAGATION"> below).
-If I<boolean> has a false boolean value then propagation is
-disabled for I<$master>.
-In either of these cases an empty string is returned.
-If I<boolean> is omitted then the method returns B<0> or
-B<1> to indicate whether propagation is currently enabled
-for I<$master>.
-Propagation is enabled by default.
-
-=item I<$master>-E<gt>B<packSlaves>
-
-Returns a list of all of the slaves in the packing order for I<$master>.
-The order of the slaves in the list is the same as their order in
-the packing order.
-If I<$master> has no slaves then an empty list/string is returned in
-array/scalar context, respectively
-
-=back
-
-=head1 THE PACKER ALGORITHM
-
-For each master the packer maintains an ordered list of slaves
-called the I<packing list>.
-The B<-in>, B<-after>, and B<-before> configuration
-options are used to specify the master for each slave and the slave's
-position in the packing list.
-If none of these options is given for a slave then the slave
-is added to the end of the packing list for its parent.
-
-The packer arranges the slaves for a master by scanning the
-packing list in order.
-At the time it processes each slave, a rectangular area within
-the master is still unallocated.
-This area is called the I<cavity>;  for the first slave it
-is the entire area of the master.
-
-For each slave the packer carries out the following steps:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item [1]
-
-The packer allocates a rectangular I<parcel> for the slave
-along the side of the cavity given by the slave's B<-side> option.
-If the side is top or bottom then the width of the parcel is
-the width of the cavity and its height is the requested height
-of the slave plus the B<-ipady> and B<-pady> options.
-For the left or right side the height of the parcel is
-the height of the cavity and the width is the requested width
-of the slave plus the B<-ipadx> and B<-padx> options.
-The parcel may be enlarged further because of the B<-expand>
-option (see L<"EXPANSION"> below)
-
-=item [2]
-
-The packer chooses the dimensions of the slave.
-The width will normally be the slave's requested width plus
-twice its B<-ipadx> option and the height will normally be
-the slave's requested height plus twice its B<-ipady>
-option.
-However, if the B<-fill> option is B<x> or B<both>
-then the width of the slave is expanded to fill the width of the parcel,
-minus twice the B<-padx> option.
-If the B<-fill> option is B<y> or B<both>
-then the height of the slave is expanded to fill the width of the parcel,
-minus twice the B<-pady> option.
-
-=item [3]
-
-The packer positions the slave over its parcel.
-If the slave is smaller than the parcel then the B<-anchor>
-option determines where in the parcel the slave will be placed.
-If B<-padx> or B<-pady> is non-zero, then the given
-amount of external padding will always be left between the
-slave and the edges of the parcel.
-
-Once a given slave has been packed, the area of its parcel
-is subtracted from the cavity, leaving a smaller rectangular
-cavity for the next slave.
-If a slave doesn't use all of its parcel, the unused space
-in the parcel will not be used by subsequent slaves.
-If the cavity should become too small to meet the needs of
-a slave then the slave will be given whatever space is
-left in the cavity.
-If the cavity shrinks to zero size, then all remaining slaves
-on the packing list will be unmapped from the screen until
-the master window becomes large enough to hold them again.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 EXPANSION
-
-If a master window is so large that there will be extra space
-left over after all of its slaves have been packed, then the
-extra space is distributed uniformly among all of the slaves
-for which the B<-expand> option is set.
-Extra horizontal space is distributed among the expandable
-slaves whose B<-side> is B<left> or B<right>,
-and extra vertical space is distributed among the expandable
-slaves whose B<-side> is B<top> or B<bottom>.
-
-=head1 GEOMETRY PROPAGATION
-
-The packer normally computes how large a master must be to
-just exactly meet the needs of its slaves, and it sets the
-requested width and height of the master to these dimensions.
-This causes geometry information to propagate up through a
-window hierarchy to a top-level window so that the entire
-sub-tree sizes itself to fit the needs of the leaf windows.
-However, the B<packPropagate> method may be used to
-turn off propagation for one or more masters.
-If propagation is disabled then the packer will not set
-the requested width and height of the packer.
-This may be useful if, for example, you wish for a master
-window to have a fixed size that you specify.
-
-=head1 RESTRICTIONS ON MASTER WINDOWS
-
-The master for each slave must either be the slave's parent
-(the default) or a descendant of the slave's parent.
-This restriction is necessary to guarantee that the
-slave can be placed over any part of its master that is
-visible without danger of the slave being clipped by its parent.
-
-=head1 PACKING ORDER
-
-If the master for a slave is not its parent then you must make sure
-that the slave is higher in the stacking order than the master.
-Otherwise the master will obscure the slave and it will appear as
-if the slave hasn't been packed correctly.
-The easiest way to make sure the slave is higher than the master is
-to create the master window first:  the most recently created window
-will be highest in the stacking order.
-Or, you can use the B<raise> and B<lower> methods to change
-the stacking order of either the master or the slave.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::form|Tk::form>
-L<Tk::grid|Tk::grid>
-L<Tk::place|Tk::place>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-geometry manager, location, packer, parcel, propagation, size
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/palette.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/palette.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 40a6914fd5c..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/palette.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,89 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-setPalette, bisque - Modify the Tk color palette
-
-=for category Creating and Configuring Widgets
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-I<$widget>-E<gt>B<setPalette>(I<background>)
-
-I<$widget>-E<gt>B<setPalette(>I<name>=E<gt>I<value>?,I<name>=E<gt>I<value ...>?)
-
-I<$widget>-E<gt>B<bisque>
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<setPalette> method changes the color scheme for Tk.
-It does this by modifying the colors of existing widgets and by changing
-the option database so that future widgets will use the new color scheme.
-If B<setPalette> is invoked with a single argument, the
-argument is the name of a color to use as the normal background
-color;  B<setPalette> will compute a complete color palette
-from this background color.
-Alternatively, the arguments to B<setPalette> may consist of any number
-of I<name>-I<value> pairs, where the first argument of the pair
-is the name of an option in the Tk option database and the second
-argument is the new value to use for that option.  The following
-database names are currently supported:
-
- activeBackground	foreground	selectColor
- activeForeground	highlightBackground	selectBackground
- background	highlightColor	selectForeground
- disabledForeground	insertBackground	troughColor
-
-B<setPalette> tries to compute reasonable defaults for any
-options that you don't specify.  You can specify options other
-than the above ones and Tk will change those options on widgets as
-well.  This feature may be useful if you are using custom widgets with
-additional color options.
-
-Once it has computed the new value to use for each of the color options,
-B<setPalette> scans the widget hierarchy to modify the options
-of all existing widgets.  For each widget, it checks to see if any
-of the above options is defined for the widget.  If so, and if the
-option's current value is the default, then the value is changed;  if
-the option has a value other than the default, B<setPalette>
-will not change it.  The default for an option is the one provided by
-the widget (B<($w-E<gt>configure('option'))[3]>) unless
-B<setPalette> has been run previously, in which case it is the
-value specified in the previous invocation of B<setPalette>.
-
-After modifying all the widgets in the application, B<setPalette>
-adds options to the option database to change the defaults for
-widgets created in the future.  The new options are added at
-priority B<widgetDefault>, so they will be overridden by options
-from the .Xdefaults file or options specified on the command-line
-that creates a widget.
-
-The method B<bisque> is provided for backward compatibility:
-it restores the application's colors to the light brown (``bisque'')
-color scheme used in Tk 3.6 and earlier versions.
-
-=head1 BUGS
-
-The use of option database names rather than the configure names is
-understandable given the mechanism (copied from Tcl/Tk), but
-is potentially confusing.
-
-The interpolation of different 'shades' of color used for 3D effects
-in 'RGB' space can lead to undesirable changes in 'hue'.
-Interpolation in 'HSV' (as used in B<Tk::ColorEditor>) would be more
-robust and X11R5's color support probably even more so.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::options|Tk::options>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-bisque, color, palette
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/place.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/place.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 9f7e74f210f..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/place.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,283 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::place - Geometry manager for fixed or rubber-sheet placement
-
-=for category  Tk Geometry Management
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<   >I<$widget>->B<place>?(I<-option>=>I<value>?, I<-option>=>I<value>, ...)?
-
-S<   >I<$widget>->B<placeForget>
-
-S<   >I<$widget>->B<placeInfo>
-
-S<   >I<$master>->B<placeSlaves>
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The placer is a geometry manager for Tk.
-It provides simple fixed placement of windows, where you specify
-the exact size and location of one window, called the I<slave>,
-within another window, called the I<master>.
-The placer also provides rubber-sheet placement, where you specify the
-size and location of the slave in terms of the dimensions of
-the master, so that the slave changes size and location
-in response to changes in the size of the master.
-Lastly, the placer allows you to mix these styles of placement so
-that, for example, the slave has a fixed width and height but is
-centered inside the master.
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$slave>->B<place>?(I<-option>=>I<value>?, I<-option>=>I<value>, ...?)?
-
-The B<place> method arranges for the placer
-to manage the geometry of I<$slave>.
-The remaining arguments consist of one or more I<-option>=>I<value>
-pairs that specify the way in which I<$slave>'s
-geometry is managed. I<-option> may have any of the values accepted
-by the L<< placeConfigure|/$slave->placeConfigure >> method.
-
-The B<place> method returns I<$slave>.
-
-=item I<$slave>->B<placeConfigure>?(I<-option>=>I<value>?, I<-option>=>I<value>, ...?)?
-
-Query or modify the geometry options of the I<$slave>. If no option is
-specified, this method returns a list describing the available
-options (see Tk_ConfigureInfo for information on the format of this
-list). If option is specified with no value, then the command returns
-a list describing the one named option (this list will be identical to
-the corresponding sublist of the value returned if no option is
-specified). If one or more option-value pairs are specified, then the
-method modifies the given option(s) to have the given value(s); in
-this case the command returns C<undef>.
-
-The following I<-option>=>I<value> pairs are supported:
-
-=over 8
-
-=item B<-anchor> => I<where>
-
-I<Where> specifies which point of I<$slave> is to be positioned
-at the (x,y) location selected by the B<-x>, B<-y>,
-B<-relx>, and B<-rely> options.
-The anchor point is in terms of the outer area of I<$slave>
-including its border, if any.
-Thus if I<where> is B<se> then the lower-right corner of
-I<$slave>'s border will appear at the given (x,y) location
-in the master.
-The anchor position defaults to B<nw>.
-
-=item B<-bordermode> => I<mode>
-
-I<Mode> determines the degree to which borders within the
-master are used in determining the placement of the slave.
-The default and most common value is B<inside>.
-In this case the placer considers the area of the master to
-be the innermost area of the master, inside any border:
-an option of B<-x>=>B<0> corresponds to an x-coordinate just
-inside the border and an option of B<-relwidth>=>1.0
-means I<$slave> will fill the area inside the master's
-border.
-If I<mode> is B<outside> then the placer considers
-the area of the master to include its border;
-this mode is typically used when placing I<$slave>
-outside its master, as with the options
-B<-x>=>B<0>, B<-y>=>B<0>, B<-anchor>=>B<ne>.
-Lastly, I<mode> may be specified as B<ignore>, in which
-case borders are ignored:  the area of the master is considered
-to be its official X area, which includes any internal border but
-no external border.  A bordermode of B<ignore> is probably
-not very useful.
-
-=item B<-height> => I<size>
-
-I<Size> specifies the height for I<$slave> in screen units
-(i.e. any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetPixels>).
-The height will be the outer dimension of I<$slave> including its
-border, if any.
-If I<size> is an empty string, or if no B<-height> or
-B<-relheight> option is specified, then the height requested
-internally by the window will be used.
-
-=item B<-in> => I<$master>
-
-I<$master> is the reference to the window relative
-to which I<$slave> is to be placed.
-I<$master> must either be I<$slave>'s parent or a descendant
-of I<$slave>'s parent.
-In addition, I<$master> and I<$slave> must both be descendants
-of the same top-level window.
-These restrictions are necessary to guarantee
-that I<$slave> is visible whenever I<$master> is visible.
-If this option isn't specified then the master defaults to
-I<$slave>'s parent.
-
-=item B<-relheight> => I<size>
-
-I<Size> specifies the height for I<$slave>.
-In this case the height is specified as a floating-point number
-relative to the height of the master: 0.5 means I<$slave> will
-be half as high as the master, 1.0 means I<$slave> will have
-the same height as the master, and so on.
-If both B<-height> and B<-relheight> are specified for a slave,
-their values are summed.  For example, B<-relheight>=>1.0, B<-height>=>-2
-makes the slave 2 pixels shorter than the master.
-
-=item B<-relwidth> => I<size>
-
-I<Size> specifies the width for I<$slave>.
-In this case the width is specified as a floating-point number
-relative to the width of the master: 0.5 means I<$slave> will
-be half as wide as the master, 1.0 means I<$slave> will have
-the same width as the master, and so on.
-If both B<-width> and B<-relwidth> are specified for a slave,
-their values are summed.  For example, B<-relwidth>=>1.0, B<-width>=>5
-makes the slave 5 pixels wider than the master.
-
-=item B<-relx> => I<location>
-
-I<Location> specifies the x-coordinate within the master window
-of the anchor point for I<$slave> widget.
-In this case the location is specified in a relative fashion
-as a floating-point number:  0.0 corresponds to the left edge
-of the master and 1.0 corresponds to the right edge of the master.
-I<Location> need not be in the range 0.0-1.0.
-If both B<-x> and B<-relx> are specified for a slave
-then their values are summed.  For example, "B<-relx>=>0.5, B<-x>=-2"
-positions the left edge of the slave 2 pixels to the left of the
-center of its master.
-
-=item B<-rely> => I<location>
-
-I<Location> specifies the y-coordinate within the master window
-of the anchor point for I<$slave> widget.
-In this case the value is specified in a relative fashion
-as a floating-point number:  0.0 corresponds to the top edge
-of the master and 1.0 corresponds to the bottom edge of the master.
-I<Location> need not be in the range 0.0-1.0.
-If both B<-y> and B<-rely> are specified for a slave
-then their values are summed.  For example, B<-rely>=>0.5, B<-x>=>3
-positions the top edge of the slave 3 pixels below the
-center of its master.
-
-=item B<-width> => I<size>
-
-I<Size> specifies the width for I<$slave> in screen units
-(i.e. any of the forms accepted by B<Tk_GetPixels>).
-The width will be the outer width of I<$slave> including its
-border, if any.
-If I<size> is an empty string, or if no B<-width>
-or B<-relwidth> option is specified, then the width requested
-internally by the window will be used.
-
-=item B<-x> => I<location>
-
-I<Location> specifies the x-coordinate within the master window
-of the anchor point for I<$slave> widget.
-The location is specified in screen units (i.e. any of the forms
-accepted by B<Tk_GetPixels>) and need not lie within the bounds
-of the master window.
-
-=item B<-y> => I<location>
-
-I<Location> specifies the y-coordinate within the master window
-of the anchor point for I<$slave> widget.
-The location is specified in screen units (i.e. any of the forms
-accepted by B<Tk_GetPixels>) and need not lie within the bounds
-of the master window.
-
-=back
-
-If the same value is specified separately with
-two different options, such as B<-x> and B<-relx>, then
-the most recent option is used and the older one is ignored.
-
-=item I<$slave>->B<placeForget>
-
-The B<placeForget> method causes the placer to stop managing
-the geometry of I<$slave>.  As a side effect of this method call
-I<$slave> will be unmapped so that it doesn't appear on the
-screen.
-If I<$slave> isn't currently managed by the placer then the
-method call has no effect.
-B<placeForget> returns an empty string as result.
-
-=item I<$slave>->B<placeInfo>
-
-The B<placeInfo> method returns a list giving the current
-configuration of I<$slave>.
-The list consists of I<-option>=>I<value> pairs in exactly the
-same form as might be specified to the B<place>
-method.
-
-=item I<$slave>->B<placeSlaves>
-
-The B<placeSlaves> method returns a list of all the slave
-windows for which I<$master> is the master.
-If there are no slaves for I<$master> then an empty list is
-returned.
-
-=back
-
-If the configuration of a window has been retrieved with
-B<placeInfo>, that configuration can be restored later by
-first using B<placeForget> to erase any existing information
-for the window and then invoking B<place> with
-the saved information.
-
-=head1 FINE POINTS
-
-It is not necessary for the master window to be the parent
-of the slave window.
-This feature is useful in at least two situations.
-First, for complex window layouts it means you can create a
-hierarchy of subwindows whose only purpose
-is to assist in the layout of the parent.
-The ``I<real children>'' of the parent (i.e. the windows that
-are significant for the application's user interface) can be
-children of the parent yet be placed inside the windows
-of the geometry-management hierarchy.
-This means that the path names of the ``I<real children>''
-don't reflect the geometry-management hierarchy and users
-can specify options for the real children
-without being aware of the structure of the geometry-management
-hierarchy.
-
-A second reason for having a master different than the slave's
-parent is to tie two siblings together.
-For example, the placer can be used to force a window always to
-be positioned centered just below one of its
-siblings by specifying the configuration
-
-S<    >B<-in>=>I<$sibling>, B<-relx>=>0.5, B<-rely>=>1.0,
-B<-anchor>=>'n', B<-bordermode>=>'outside'
-
-Whenever the I<$sibling> widget is repositioned in the future, the slave
-will be repositioned as well.
-
-Unlike many other geometry managers (such as the packer)
-the placer does not make any attempt to manipulate the geometry of
-the master windows or the parents of slave windows (i.e. it doesn't
-set their requested sizes).
-To control the sizes of these windows, make them windows like
-frames and canvases that provide configuration options for this purpose.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::form>, L<Tk::grid>, L<Tk::pack>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-geometry manager, height, location, master, place, rubber sheet, slave, width
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/selection.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/selection.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index f8a3ce54856..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/selection.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,159 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::Selection - Manipulate the X selection
-
-=for category User Interaction
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-I<$widget>-E<gt>B<Selection>I<Option>?(I<args>)?
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-This command provides an interface to the X selection mechanism and
-implements the full selection functionality described in the
-X Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual (ICCCM).
-
-The widget object used to invoke the methods below determines which
-display is used to access the selection.
-In order to avoid conflicts with B<selection> methods of widget classes
-(e.g. B<Text>) this set of methods uses the prefix B<Selection>.
-The following methods are currently supported:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<SelectionClear>?(B<-selection>=E<gt>I<selection>)?
-
-If I<selection> exists anywhere on I<$widget>'s display, clear it
-so that no window owns the selection anymore.  I<Selection>
-specifies the X selection that should be cleared, and should be an
-atom name such as PRIMARY or CLIPBOARD; see the Inter-Client
-Communication Conventions Manual for complete details.
-I<Selection> defaults to PRIMARY.
-Returns an empty string.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<SelectionGet>?(?B<-selection>=E<gt>I<selection>?,?B<-type>=E<gt>I<type>?)?
-
-Retrieves the value of I<selection> from I<$widget>'s display and
-returns it as a result.  I<Selection> defaults to PRIMARY.
-
-I<Type> specifies the form in which the selection is to be returned
-(the desired ``target'' for conversion, in ICCCM terminology), and
-should be an atom name such as STRING or FILE_NAME; see the
-Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual for complete details.
-I<Type> defaults to STRING.  The selection owner may choose to
-return the selection in any of several different representation
-formats, such as STRING, ATOM, INTEGER, etc. (this format is different
-than the selection type; see the ICCCM for all the confusing details).
-
-If I<format> is not STRING then things get messy, the following
-description is from the Tcl/Tk man page as yet incompetely translated for
-the perl version - it is misleading at best.
-
-If the selection is returned in a non-string format, such as INTEGER
-or ATOM, the B<SelectionGet> converts it to a list of perl
-values: atoms are converted to their
-textual names, and anything else is converted integers.
-
-A goal of the perl port is to provide better handling of different
-formats than Tcl/Tk does, which should be possible given perl's
-wider range of ``types''. Although some thought went into this
-in very early days of perl/Tk what exactly happens is still
-"not quite right" and subject to change.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<SelectionHandle>(?B<-selection>=E<gt>I<selection>?,?B<-type>=E<gt>I<type>?,?B<-format>=E<gt>I<format>? I<callback>)
-
-Creates a handler for selection requests, such that I<callback> will
-be executed whenever I<selection> is owned by I<$widget> and
-someone attempts to retrieve it in the form given by I<type>
-(e.g. I<type> is specified in the B<selection get> command).
-I<Selection> defaults to PRIMARY, I<type> defaults to STRING, and
-I<format> defaults to STRING.  If I<callback> is an empty string
-then any existing handler for I<$widget>, I<type>, and
-I<selection> is removed.
-
-When I<selection> is requested, I<$widget> is the selection owner,
-and I<type> is the requested type, I<callback> will be executed
-with two additional arguments.
-The two additional arguments
-are I<offset> and I<maxBytes>:  I<offset> specifies a starting
-character position in the selection and I<maxBytes> gives the maximum
-number of bytes to retrieve.  The command should return a value consisting
-of at most I<maxBytes> of the selection, starting at position
-I<offset>.  For very large selections (larger than I<maxBytes>)
-the selection will be retrieved using several invocations of I<callback>
-with increasing I<offset> values.  If I<callback> returns a string
-whose length is less than I<maxBytes>, the return value is assumed to
-include all of the remainder of the selection;  if the length of
-I<callback>'s result is equal to I<maxBytes> then
-I<callback> will be invoked again, until it eventually
-returns a result shorter than I<maxBytes>.  The value of I<maxBytes>
-will always be relatively large (thousands of bytes).
-
-If I<callback> returns an error (e.g. via B<die>)
-then the selection retrieval is rejected
-just as if the selection didn't exist at all.
-
-The I<format> argument specifies the representation that should be
-used to transmit the selection to the requester (the second column of
-Table 2 of the ICCCM), and defaults to STRING.  If I<format> is
-STRING, the selection is transmitted as 8-bit ASCII characters (i.e.
-just in the form returned by I<command>).
-
-If I<format> is not STRING then things get messy, the following
-description is from the Tcl/Tk man page as yet untranslated for
-the perl version - it is misleading at best.
-
-If I<format> is
-ATOM, then the return value from I<command> is divided into fields
-separated by white space;  each field is converted to its atom value,
-and the 32-bit atom value is transmitted instead of the atom name.
-For any other I<format>, the return value from I<command> is
-divided into fields separated by white space and each field is
-converted to a 32-bit integer;  an array of integers is transmitted
-to the selection requester.
-
-The I<format> argument is needed only for compatibility with
-many selection requesters, except Tcl/Tk.  If Tcl/Tk is being
-used to retrieve the selection then the value is converted back to
-a string at the requesting end, so I<format> is
-irrelevant.
-
-A goal of the perl port is to provide better handling of different
-formats than Tcl/Tk does, which should be possible given perl's
-wider range of ``types''. Although some thought went into this
-in very early days of perl/Tk what exactly happens is still
-"not quite right" and subject to change.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<SelectionOwner>?(B<-selection>=E<gt>I<selection>)?
-
-B<SelectionOwner> returns the
-window in this application that owns I<selection> on the display
-containing I<$widget>, or an empty string if no window in this
-application owns the selection.  I<Selection> defaults to PRIMARY.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<SelectionOwn>?(?B<-command>=E<gt>I<callback>?,?B<-selection>=E<gt>I<selection>?)?
-
-B<SelectionOwn> causes I<$widget> to become
-the new owner of I<selection> on I<$widget>'s display, returning
-an empty string as result. The existing owner, if any, is notified
-that it has lost the selection.
-If I<callback> is specified, it will be executed when
-some other window claims ownership of the selection away from
-I<$widget>.  I<Selection> defaults to PRIMARY.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-clear, format, handler, ICCCM, own, selection, target, type
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/send.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/send.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 40382f2422d..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/send.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,118 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-send - Execute a command in a different application
-
-=for category Tk Generic Methods
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >I<$result> = I<$widget>-E<gt>B<send>(?I<options>,?I<app>=E<gt>I<cmd>?I<arg arg ...>?)
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-This method arranges for I<cmd> (and I<arg>s) to be 'sent' to the
-application named by I<app>.  It returns the result or
-an error (hence above should probably be 'wrapped' in B<eval{}> and $@ tested).
-I<App> may be the name of any application whose main window is
-on the display containing the sender's main window;  it need not
-be within the same process.
-If no I<arg> arguments are present, then the string to be sent
-is contained entirely within the I<cmd> argument.  If one or
-more I<arg>s are present, they are concatenated separated by white space to
-form the string to be sent.
-
-If the initial arguments of the call begin with ``-''
-they are treated as options.  The following options are
-currently defined:
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<-async>
-
-Requests asynchronous invocation.  In this case the B<send>
-command will complete immediately without waiting for I<cmd>
-to complete in the target application;  no result will be available
-and errors in the sent command will be ignored.
-If the target application is in the same process as the sending
-application then the B<-async> option is ignored.
-
-=item B<-->
-
-Serves no purpose except to terminate the list of options.  This
-option is needed only if I<app> could contain a leading ``-''
-character.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 APPLICATION NAMES
-
-The name of an application is set initially from the name of the
-program or script that created the application.
-You can query and change the name of an application with the
-B<appname> method.
-
-=head1 WHAT IS A SEND
-
-The B<send> mechanism was designed to allow Tcl/Tk applications
-to send Tcl Scripts to each other. This does not map very well onto perl/Tk.
-Perl/Tk "sends" a string to I<app>, what happens as a result of this
-depends on the receiving application. If the other application is a Tcl/Tk4.*
-application it will be treated as a Tcl Script. If the "other" application is
-perl/Tk application (including sends to self) then the string is
-passed as an argument to a method call of the following form:
-
-I<$mainwindow>-E<gt>B<Receive(>I<string>);
-
-There is a default (AutoLoaded) B<Tk::Receive> which returns an error to the
-sending application. A particular application may define its own
-B<Receive> method in any class in B<MainWindow>'s inheritance tree
-to do whatever it sees fit. For example it could B<eval> the string,
-possibly in a B<Safe> "compartment".
-
-If a Tcl/Tk application "sends" anything to a perl/Tk application
-then the perl/Tk application would have to attempt to interpret the
-incoming string as a Tcl Script. Simple cases are should not be too hard to
-emulate (split on white space and treat first element as "command" and other
-elements as arguments).
-
-=head1 SECURITY
-
-The B<send> command is potentially a serious security loophole,
-since any application that can connect to your X server can send
-scripts to your applications. Hence the default behaviour outlined above.
-(With the availability of B<Safe> it may make sense to relax default behaviour
-a little.)
-
-Unmonitored B<eval>'ing of these incoming "scripts" can cause perl to
-read and write files and invoke subprocesses under your name.
-Host-based access control such as that provided by B<xhost>
-is particularly insecure, since it allows anyone with an account
-on particular hosts to connect to your server, and if disabled it
-allows anyone anywhere to connect to your server.
-In order to provide at least a small amount of
-security, core Tk checks the access control being used by the server
-and rejects incoming sends unless (a) B<xhost>-style access control
-is enabled (i.e. only certain hosts can establish connections) and (b) the
-list of enabled hosts is empty.
-This means that applications cannot connect to your server unless
-they use some other form of authorization
-such as that provide by B<xauth>.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<perlfunc/eval>, L<Safe>,
-system's administrator/corporate security guidelines etc.
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-application, name, remote execution, security, send
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/tixWm.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/tixWm.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 9bdd02d461c..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/tixWm.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
-
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::tixWm - Tix's addition to the standard TK wm command.
-
-=for category  Tix Extensions
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-S<    >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<wmCapture>
-
-S<    >I<$widget>-E<gt>B<wmRelease>
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The B<wmCapture> and the B<wmRelease> methods change the
-toplevel attribute of Tk widgets.
-
-=head1 METHODS
-
-=over 4
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<wmCapture>
-
-Converts the toplevel window specified by I<$widget> into a non-toplevel
-widget. Normally this command is called to convert a L<Toplevel|Tk::Toplevel> widget
-into a L<Frame|Tk::Frame> widget. The newly-converted frame widget is
-un-mapped from the screen. To make it appear inside its parent, you
-must call a geometry manager (e.g. grid or pack) explictly.
-
-=item I<$widget>-E<gt>B<wmRelease>
-
-Makes the non-toplevel window specified by I<$widget> into a toplevel
-widget. Normally this command is called to convert a L<Frame|Tk::Frame> widget
-into a L<Toplevel|Tk::Toplevel> widget, but it can also be used on any
-non-toplevel widget (e.g, label). The newly-converted toplevel window
-is in a B<withdrawn> state. To make it appear on the screen, you must call
-B<deiconify> after calling B<wmRelease>.
-
-Any data associated with I<$widget> via B<wm> methods (icon, protocol,
-command etc.) are released, and must be re-established if window is later
-re-captured.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 BUGS
-
-B<wmCapture> does not exist in the Win32 window manager code.
-
-How these methods interact with perl/Tk's class hierarchy is not yet clear.
-In particular a B<wmRelease>d window will not automatically ``I<inherit>''
-the B<Tk::Wm> methods, however a B<wmCapture>d window still will.
-(A B<release>d B<Label> might make a good candidate for an B<Icon>.)
-
-=head1 AUTHORS
-
-Ioi Kim Lam - ioi@graphics.cis.upenn.edu wrote original Tix version.
-Updated for tk8.0, Win32 and perl by Nick Ing-Simmons.
-
-=head1 SEE ALSO
-
-L<Tk::Wm|Tk::Wm>
-L<Tk::Mwm|Tk::Mwm>
-L<Tk::Frame|Tk::Frame>
-L<Tk::Toplevel|Tk::Toplevel>
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-window manager, wm, TIX
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/tkvars.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/tkvars.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 5ae8ac477ef..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/tkvars.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,107 +0,0 @@
-#  Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
-#  Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-#  See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-#  of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-#
-#
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-tkvars - Variables used or set by Tk
-
-=for category  Tk Generic Methods
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-The following perl variables are either set or used by Tk at various times
-in its execution. (For a list of variables used by perl see L<perlvar>.)
-
-=over 4
-
-=item B<$Tk::library>
-
-This variable holds the file name for a directory containing the modules
-related to Tk.  These modules include an initialization
-file that is normally processed whenever a Tk application starts up,
-plus other files containing procedures that implement default behaviors
-for widgets.
-The initial value of B<$Tk::library> is set when Tk is added to
-an interpreter;  this is done by searching searching for a directory
-named Tk in the directory where the file F<Tk.pm>, or the first
-directory F<Tk> in C<@INC>.
-
-The B<TK_LIBRARY> environment variable used by Tcl/Tk is not
-supported by perl/Tk.  Please use L<@INC|perlvar/@INC> to change where modules
-are searched.
-
-B<Note:> This is Tcl remnant. With perl it makes more sense to
-use C<@INC> and C<%INC>).
-
-=item B<$Tk::patchLevel>
-
-Contains a decimal integer giving the current patch level for Tk.
-The patch level is incremented for each new release or patch, and
-it uniquely identifies an official version of Tk.
-
-B<Note:> this is Tcl remnant. With perl it makes more sense to
-use B<$Tk::VERSION> described below.
-
-=item B<$Tk::strictMotif>
-
-This variable is set to zero by default.
-If an application sets it to one, then Tk attempts to adhere as
-closely as possible to Motif look-and-feel standards.
-For example, active elements such as buttons and scrollbar
-sliders will not change color when the pointer passes over them.
-
-=item B<$Tk::VERSION>
-
-The variable holds the current version number of the perl/Tk
-release in the form I<major>.I<minor>.  I<Major> and
-I<minor> are integers.
-
-The I<major> version number shows on which
-Tcl/Tk release perl/Tk is based.  E.g., B<402> means based on
-Tcls Tk 4.2.  (Patchlevel of Tcls Tk are not incorporated because
-perl/Tk tended  to be ``I<ahead>'' of them on some fixes and behind on
-others.  The first digest of the major version number increases in
-any Tk release that includes changes that are not backward compatible
-(i.e. whenever existing perl/Tk applications and scripts may have to change to
-work with the new release).
-
-The I<minor> version depends on perl/Tk only. It uses the
-'even'='stable', 'odd'='experimental' scheme that linux uses:
-
- .0xx  - inherently 'alpha'
- .1xx  - experimental 'beta'
- .2xx  - stable
- .3xx  - experimental
- .4xx  - stable
- ...
-
-The minor version number increases with
-each new release of Tk, except that it resets to zero whenever the
-major version number changes.
-
-=item B<$Tk::version>
-
-The variable holds the current version number of the Tk
-library in the form I<major>.I<minor>.  I<Major> and
-I<minor> are integers.  The major version number increases in
-any Tk release that includes changes that are not backward compatible
-(i.e. whenever existing Tk applications and scripts may have to change to
-work with the new release).  The minor version number increases with
-each new release of Tk, except that it resets to zero whenever the
-major version number changes.
-
-B<Note:> this is Tcl remnant.  With perl it makes more sense to
-use B<$Tk::VERSION> described above.
-
-=back
-
-=head1 KEYWORDS
-
-variables, version
-
-=cut
-
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/widgets.pod b/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/widgets.pod
deleted file mode 100644
index 114f52505d7..00000000000
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlperl/lib/Tk/widgets.pod
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-
-=head1 NAME
-
-Tk::widgets - preload widget classes
-
-=for pm Tk/widgets.pm
-
-=for category Implementation
-
-=head1 SYNOPSIS
-
-  use Tk::widgets qw(Button Label Frame);
-
-=head1 DESCRIPTION
-
-Does a 'require Tk::Foo' for each 'Foo' in the list.
-May speed startup by avoiding AUTOLOADs.
-
-=cut
-